Operating Manual EMI TEST RECEIVER ESIB7 - Rohde & Schwarz

Test and Measurement 

Division 

Operating Manual 

EMI TEST RECEIVER 

ESIB7 

1088.7490.07 

ESIB26 

1088.7490.26 

ESIB40 

1088.7490.40 

Printed in the Federal 

Republic of Germany 

1088.7531.12-04 I 10/02

Dear Customer, 

throughout this manual, the EMI test receiver R&S ESIB is abbreviated as ESIB. 

This product contains technology licensed by Marconi Instruments LTD. under US patent 4609881 

and under the corresponding patent in Germany and elsewhere. 

1088.7531.12 2 E-4

ESIB 

Tabbed Divider Overview 

Tabbed Divider Overview 

Volume 1 

Data Sheet 

Safety Instructions 

Certificate of quality 

EC Certificate of Conformity 

Support Center 

List of R & S Representatives 

Manuals for EMI Test Receiver ESIB 

Tabbed Divider 

1 Chapter 1: Putting into Operation 

2 Chapter 2: Getting Started 

3 Chapter 3: Operation 

4 Chapter 4: Functional Description 

Tabbed Divider 

5 Chapter 5: Remote Control – Basics 

6 Chapter 6: Remote Control – Commands 

7 Chapter 7: Remote Control – Program Examples 

8 Chapter 8: Maintenance and Hardware Interfaces 

9 Chapter 9: Error Messages 

10 Index 

1088.7531.12 RE E-3

Before putting the product into operation for 

the first time, make sure to read the following 


Rohde & Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer 

its customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment required 

for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards. Compliance with 

these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system. This product has been 

designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s 

plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe 

operation, observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions 

regarding these safety instructions, Rohde & Schwarz will be happy to answer them. 

Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is 

designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in 

any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used 

for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's instructions. The 

manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product. 

The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its operating manual and 

within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using 

the products requires technical skills and knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that the 

products be used exclusively by skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the 

required skills. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be 

indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. 

Symbols and safety labels 

Observe 

operating 

instructions 

Weight 

indication for 

units >18 kg 

Danger of 

electric 

shock 

Warning! 

Hot 

surface 

PE terminal 

Ground 

Ground 

terminal 

Attention! 

Electrostatic 

sensitive 

devices 

Supply 

voltage 

ON/OFF 

Standby 

indication 

Direct 

current 

(DC) 

Alternating 

current (AC) 

Direct/alternating 

current (DC/AC) 

Device fully 

protected by 

double/reinforced 

insulation 

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 1


Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by 

dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions 

before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety 

instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation. In these safety 

instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by Rohde & Schwarz, 

including instruments, systems and all accessories. 

DANGER 

WARNING 

CAUTION 

ATTENTION 

NOTE 

Tags and their meaning 

This tag indicates a safety hazard with a high potential of risk for the 

user that can result in death or serious injuries. 

This tag indicates a safety hazard with a medium potential of risk for the 

user that can result in death or serious injuries. 

This tag indicates a safety hazard with a low potential of risk for the user 

that can result in slight or minor injuries. 

This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage 

to the product. 

This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention 

to operating the product but which does not lead to damage. 

These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European 

Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist. It is therefore 

essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the 

associated documentation and the associated product. The use of tags in connection with unassociated 

products or unassociated documentation can result in misinterpretations and thus contribute to personal 

injury or material damage. 

1. The product may be operated only under 

the operating conditions and in the 

positions specified by the manufacturer. Its 

ventilation must not be obstructed during 

operation. Unless otherwise specified, the 

following requirements apply to 

Rohde & Schwarz products: 

prescribed operating position is always with 

the housing floor facing down, IP protection 

2X, pollution severity 2, overvoltage 

category 2, use only in enclosed spaces, 

max. operation altitude max. 2000 m. 

Unless specified otherwise in the data 

sheet, a tolerance of ±10% shall apply to 

the nominal voltage and of ±5% to the 

nominal frequency. 

2. Applicable local or national safety 

regulations and rules for the prevention of 

accidents must be observed in all work 

performed. The product may be opened 

only by authorized, specially trained 

personnel. Prior to performing any work on 

the product or opening the product, the 

Basic safety instructions 

product must be disconnected from the 

supply network. Any adjustments, 

replacements of parts, maintenance or 

repair must be carried out only by technical 

personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. 

Only original parts may be used for 

replacing parts relevant to safety (e.g. 

power switches, power transformers, 

fuses). A safety test must always be 

performed after parts relevant to safety 

have been replaced (visual inspection, PE 

conductor test, insulation resistance 

measurement, leakage current 

measurement, functional test). 

3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, 

the use of substances that induce an 

allergic reaction (allergens, e.g. nickel) 

such as aluminum cannot be generally 

excluded. If you develop an allergic 

reaction (such as a skin rash, frequent 

sneezing, red eyes or respiratory 

difficulties), consult a physician immediately 

to determine the cause. 

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 2


4. If products/components are mechanically 

and/or thermically processed in a manner 

that goes beyond their intended use, 

hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust 

such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be 

released. For this reason, the product may 

only be disassembled, e.g. for disposal 

purposes, by specially trained personnel. 

Improper disassembly may be hazardous to 

your health. National waste disposal 

regulations must be observed. 

5. If handling the product yields hazardous 

substances or fuels that must be disposed 

of in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine 

oils that must be replenished regularly, the 

safety instructions of the manufacturer of 

the hazardous substances or fuels and the 

applicable regional waste disposal 

regulations must be observed. Also 

observe the relevant safety instructions in 

the product documentation. 

6. Depending on the function, certain products 

such as RF radio equipment can produce 

an elevated level of electromagnetic 

radiation. Considering that unborn life 

requires increased protection, pregnant 

women should be protected by appropriate 

measures. Persons with pacemakers may 

also be endangered by electromagnetic 

radiation. The employer is required to 

assess workplaces where there is a special 

risk of exposure to radiation and, if 

necessary, take measures to avert the 

danger. 

7. Operating the products requires special 

training and intense concentration. Make 

certain that persons who use the products 

are physically, mentally and emotionally fit 

enough to handle operating the products; 

otherwise injuries or material damage may 

occur. It is the responsibility of the 

employer to select suitable personnel for 

operating the products. 

8. Prior to switching on the product, it must be 

ensured that the nominal voltage setting on 

the product matches the nominal voltage of 

the AC supply network. If a different voltage 

is to be set, the power fuse of the product 

may have to be changed accordingly. 

9. In the case of products of safety class I with 

movable power cord and connector, 

operation is permitted only on sockets with 

earthing contact and protective earth 

connection. 

10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth 

connection either in the feed line or in the 

product itself is not permitted. Doing so can 

result in the danger of an electric shock 

from the product. If extension cords or 

connector strips are implemented, they 

must be checked on a regular basis to 

ensure that they are safe to use. 

11. If the product has no power switch for 

disconnection from the AC supply, the plug 

of the connecting cable is regarded as the 

disconnecting device. In such cases, it 

must be ensured that the power plug is 

easily reachable and accessible at all times 

(length of connecting cable approx. 2 m). 

Functional or electronic switches are not 

suitable for providing disconnection from 

the AC supply. If products without power 

switches are integrated in racks or systems, 

a disconnecting device must be provided at 

the system level. 

12. Never use the product if the power cable is 

damaged. By taking appropriate safety 

measures and carefully laying the power 

cable, ensure that the cable cannot be 

damaged and that no one can be hurt by 

e.g. tripping over the cable or suffering an 

electric shock. 

13. The product may be operated only from 

TN/TT supply networks fused with max. 

16 A. 

14. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are 

dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all 

the way into the socket. Otherwise this can 

result in sparks, fire and/or injuries. 

15. Do not overload any sockets, extension 

cords or connector strips; doing so can 

cause fire or electric shocks. 

16. For measurements in circuits with voltages 

V rms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. 

appropriate measuring equipment, fusing, 

current limiting, electrical separation, 

insulation) should be taken to avoid any 

hazards. 

17. Ensure that the connections with 

information technology equipment comply 

with IEC 950/EN 60950. 

18. Never remove the cover or part of the 

housing while you are operating the 

product. This will expose circuits and 

components and can lead to injuries, fire or 

damage to the product. 

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 3


19. If a product is to be permanently installed, 

the connection between the PE terminal on 

site and the product's PE conductor must 

be made first before any other connection 

is made. The product may be installed and 

connected only by a skilled electrician. 

20. For permanently installed equipment 

without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or 

similar protective devices, the supply circuit 

must be fused in such a way that suitable 

protection is provided for users and 

products. 

21. Do not insert any objects into the openings 

in the housing that are not designed for this 

purpose. Never pour any liquids onto or into 

the housing. This can cause short circuits 

inside the product and/or electric shocks, 

fire or injuries. 

22. Use suitable overvoltage protection to 

ensure that no overvoltage (such as that 

caused by a thunderstorm) can reach the 

product. Otherwise the operating personnel 

will be endangered by electric shocks. 

23. Rohde & Schwarz products are not 

protected against penetration of water, 

unless otherwise specified (see also safety 

instruction 1.). If this is not taken into 

account, there exists the danger of electric 

shock or damage to the product, which can 

also lead to personal injury. 

24. Never use the product under conditions in 

which condensation has formed or can form 

in or on the product, e.g. if the product was 

moved from a cold to a warm environment. 

25. Do not close any slots or openings on the 

product, since they are necessary for 

ventilation and prevent the product from 

overheating. Do not place the product on 

soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or 

inside a closed housing, unless this is well 

ventilated. 

26. Do not place the product on heatgenerating 

devices such as radiators or fan 

heaters. The temperature of the 

environment must not exceed the maximum 

temperature specified in the data sheet. 

27. Batteries and storage batteries must not be 

exposed to high temperatures or fire. Keep 

batteries and storage batteries away from 

children. If batteries or storage batteries are 

improperly replaced, this can cause an 

explosion (warning: lithium cells). Replace 

the battery or storage battery only with the 

matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see 

spare parts list). Batteries and storage 

batteries are hazardous waste. Dispose of 

them only in specially marked containers. 

Observe local regulations regarding waste 

disposal. Do not short-circuit batteries or 

storage batteries. 

28. Please be aware that in the event of a fire, 

toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that 

may be hazardous to your health may 

escape from the product. 

29. Please be aware of the weight of the 

product. Be careful when moving it; 

otherwise you may injure your back or other 

parts of your body. 

30. Do not place the product on surfaces, 

vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons 

of weight or stability are unsuitable for this 

purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's 

installation instructions when installing the 

product and fastening it to objects or 

structures (e.g. walls and shelves). 

31. Handles on the products are designed 

exclusively for personnel to hold or carry 

the product. It is therefore not permissible 

to use handles for fastening the product to 

or on means of transport such as cranes, 

fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is 

responsible for securely fastening the 

products to or on the means of transport 

and for observing the safety regulations of 

the manufacturer of the means of transport. 

Noncompliance can result in personal injury 

or material damage. 

32. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the 

sole responsibility of the driver to drive the 

vehicle safely. Adequately secure the 

product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or 

other damage in the event of an accident. 

Never use the product in a moving vehicle if 

doing so could distract the driver of the 

vehicle. The driver is always responsible for 

the safety of the vehicle; the manufacturer 

assumes no responsibility for accidents or 

collisions. 

33. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is 

integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product, 

do not use any other settings or functions 

than those described in the documentation. 

Otherwise this may be hazardous to your 

health, since the laser beam can cause 

irreversible damage to your eyes. Never try 

to take such products apart, and never look 

into the laser beam. 

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 4

Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de 

la primera puesta en funcionamiento las 

siguientes informaciones de seguridad 

Informaciones de seguridad 

Es el principio de Rohde & Schwarz de tener a sus productos siempre al día con los estandards de 

seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los 

equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de seguridad vigentes. 

Nuestra sección de gestión de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas 

estas normas. Este producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el comprobante de conformidad 

adjunto según las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los 

estandards técnicos de seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento 

libre de peligros, deberá el usuario atenerse a todas las informaciones, informaciones de seguridad y 

notas de alerta. Rohde&Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas 

referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad. 

Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto 

solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la indústria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de 

ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona/cosa pueda ser dañada. El uso del 

producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante 

queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de 

consecuencias a causa del maluso del producto. 

Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las 

instrucciones del correspondiente manual del uso y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido (ver 

hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso de los productos hace 

necesarios conocimientos profundos y el conocimiento del idioma inglés. Por eso se deberá tener en 

cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso de los productos a personas péritas o debidamente 

minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de 

seguridad para el uso de productos de R&S, encontrará la información debida en la documentación del 

producto en el capítulo correspondiente. 

Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad 

Ver manual 

de 

instrucciones 

del uso 

Informaciones 

para 

maquinaria 

con uns peso 

de > 18kg 

Peligro de 

golpe de 

corriente 

¡Advertencia! 

Superficie 

caliente 

Conexión a 

conductor 

protector 

Conexión 

a tierra 

Conexión 

a masa 

conductora 

¡Cuidado! 

Elementos de 

construción 

con peligro de 

carga 

electroestática 

potencia EN 

MARCHA/PARADA 

Indicación 

Stand-by 

Corriente 

continua 

DC 

Corriente 

alterna AC 

Corriente 

continua/alterna 

DC/AC 

El aparato está 

protegido en su 

totalidad por un 

aislamiento de 

doble refuerzo 

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 1


Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda 

clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se 

tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán 

ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en otro 

capítulo de esta documentación y que también son obligatorias de seguir. En las informaciones de 

seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por Rohde&Schwarz bajo la 

denominación de „producto“, entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así como toda clase de 

accesorios. 

PELIGRO 

ADVERTENCIA 

ATENCIÓN 

CUIDADO 

INFORMACIÓN 

Palabras de señal y su significado 

Indica un punto de peligro con gran potencial de riesgo para el 

ususario.Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves 

heridas. 

Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo mediano para el 

usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves 

heridas . 

Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo pequeño para el 

usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta heridas leves o 

pequeñas 

Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia 

dañarlo. 

Indica una situación en la que deberían seguirse las instrucciones en el 

uso del producto, pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un 

daño del mismo. 

Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el ámbito de la 

comunidad económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición. Por eso se 

debera tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en 

combinación con la correspondiente documentación y solamente en combinación con el producto 

correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en combinación con productos o 

documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a malinterpretaciones y tener por 

consecuencia daños en personas u objetos. 

1. El producto solamente debe ser utilizado 

según lo indicado por el fabricante referente 

a la situación y posición de funcionamiento 

sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se 

convino de otra manera, es para los 

productos R&S válido lo que sigue: 

como posición de funcionamiento se define 

principialmente la posición con el suelo de la 

caja para abajo , modo de protección IP 2X, 

grado de suciedad 2, categoría de 

sobrecarga eléctrica 2, utilizar solamente en 

estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m 

sobre el nivel del mar. 

A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la 

hoja de datos, se aplicará una tolerancia de 

±10% sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5% 

sobre la frecuencia nominal. 

Informaciones de seguridad elementales 

2. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en 

cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de 

trabajo y de prevención de accidentes. El 

producto solamente debe de ser abierto por 

personal périto autorizado. Antes de efectuar 

trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deberá este 

ser desconectado de la corriente. El ajuste, 

el cambio de partes, la manutención y la 

reparación deberán ser solamente 

efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por 

R&S. Si se reponen partes con importancia 

para los aspectos de seguridad (por ejemplo 

el enchufe, los transformadores o los 

fusibles), solamente podrán ser sustituidos 

por partes originales. Despues de cada 

recambio de partes elementales para la 

seguridad deberá ser efectuado un control de 

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 2


seguridad (control a primera vista, control de 

conductor protector, medición de resistencia 

de aislamiento, medición de medición de la 

corriente conductora, control de 

funcionamiento). 

3. Como en todo producto de fabricación 

industrial no puede ser excluido en general 

de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos 

que puedan generar alergias, los llamados 

elementos alergénicos (por ejemplo el 

níquel). Si se producieran en el trato con 

productos R&S reacciones alérgicas, como 

por ejemplo urticaria, estornudos frecuentes, 

irritación de la conjuntiva o dificultades al 

respirar, se deberá consultar inmediatamente 

a un médico para averigurar los motivos de 

estas reacciones. 

4. Si productos / elementos de construcción son 

tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de 

forma mecánica o térmica, pueden generarse 

elementos peligrosos (polvos de sustancia 

de metales pesados como por ejemplo 

plomo, berilio, níquel). La partición elemental 

del producto, como por ejemplo sucede en el 

tratamiento de materias residuales, debe de 

ser efectuada solamente por personal 

especializado para estos tratamientos. La 

partición elemental efectuada 

inadecuadamente puede generar daños para 

la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las 

directivas nacionales referentes al 

tratamiento de materias residuales. 

5. En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de 

peligro o combustibles en la aplicación del 

producto que debieran de ser transferidos a 

un tratamiento de materias residuales, como 

por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben 

ser repuestos en periodos definidos, o 

aceites para motores, deberan ser tenidas en 

cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del 

fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o 

combustibles y las regulaciones regionales 

para el tratamiento de materias residuales. 

Cuiden también de tener en cuenta en caso 

dado las prescripciones de seguridad 

especiales en la descripción del producto. 

6. Ciertos productos, como por ejemplo las 

instalaciones de radiación HF, pueden a 

causa de su función natural, emitir una 

radiación electromagnética aumentada. En 

vista a la protección de la vida en desarrollo 

deberían ser protegidas personas 

embarazadas debidamente. También las 

personas con un bypass pueden correr 

peligro a causa de la radiación 

electromagnética. El empresario está 

comprometido a valorar y señalar areas de 

trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de 

exposición a radiaciones aumentadas de 

riesgo aumentado para evitar riesgos. 

7. La utilización de los productos requiere 

instrucciones especiales y una alta 

concentración en el manejo. Debe de 

ponerse por seguro de que las personas que 

manejen los productos estén a la altura de 

los requerimientos necesarios referente a 

sus aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y 

emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se 

pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. 

El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de 

seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el 

manejo de los productos. 

8. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto 

se deberá tener por seguro de que la tensión 

preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a 

la del la red de distribución. Si es necesario 

cambiar la preselección de la tensión 

también se deberán en caso dabo cambiar 

los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto. 

9. Productos de la clase de seguridad I con 

alimentación móvil y enchufe individual de 

producto solamente deberán ser conectados 

para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente 

de contacto de seguridad y con conductor 

protector conectado. 

10. Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupción 

intencionada del conductor protector, tanto 

en la toma de corriente como en el mismo 

producto ya que puede tener como 

consecuencia el peligro de golpe de corriente 

por el producto. Si se utilizaran cables o 

enchufes de extensión se deberá poner al 

seguro, que es controlado su estado técnico 

de seguridad. 

11. Si el producto no está equipado con un 

interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se 

deberá considerar el enchufe del cable de 

distribución como interruptor. En estos casos 

deberá asegurar de que el enchufe sea de 

fácil acceso y nabejo (medida del cable de 

distribución aproximadamente 2 m). Los 

interruptores de función o electrónicos no 

son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si 

los productos sin interruptor están integrados 

en construciones o instalaciones, se deberá 

instalar el interruptor al nivel de la 

instalación. 

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 3


12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el 

cable eléctrico. Asegure a través de las 

medidas de protección y de instalación 

adecuadas de que el cable de eléctrico no 

pueda ser dañado o de que nadie pueda ser 

dañado por él, por ejemplo al tropezar o por 

un golpe de corriente. 

13. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento 

en redes de distribución TN/TT aseguradas 

con fusibles de como máximo 16 A. 

14. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de 

corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca 

el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la 

toma de corriente. Si no tiene en 

consideración estas indicaciones se arriesga 

a que se originen chispas, fuego y/o heridas. 

15. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los 

cables de extensión o los enchufes de 

extensión ya que esto pudiera causar fuego 

o golpes de corriente. 

16. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente 

con una tensión de entrada de Ueff > 30 V se 

deberá tomar las precauciones debidas para 

impedir cualquier peligro (por ejemplo 

medios de medición adecuados, seguros, 

limitación de tensión, corte protector, 

aislamiento etc.). 

17. En caso de conexión con aparatos de la 

técnica informática se deberá tener en 

cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de 

la EC950/EN60950. 

18. Nunca abra la tapa o parte de ella si el 

producto está en funcionamiento. Esto pone 

a descubierto los cables y componentes 

eléctricos y puede causar heridas, fuego o 

daños en el producto. 

19. Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un 

lugar, se deberá primero conectar el 

conductor protector fijo con el conductor 

protector del aparato antes de hacer 

cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y la 

conexión deberán ser efecutadas por un 

electricista especializado. 

20. En caso de que los productos que son 

instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin 

protector implementado, autointerruptor o 

similares objetos de protección, deberá la 

toma de corriente estar protegida de manera 

que los productos o los usuarios estén 

suficientemente protegidos. 

21. Por favor, no introduzca ningún objeto que 

no esté destinado a ello en los orificios de la 

caja del aparato. No vierta nunca ninguna 

clase de líquidos sobre o en la caja. Esto 

puede producir corto circuitos en el producto 

y/o puede causar golpes de corriente, fuego 

o heridas. 

22. Asegúrese con la protección adecuada de 

que no pueda originarse en el producto una 

sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una 

tormenta. Si no se verá el personal que lo 

utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de 

corriente. 

23. Los productos R&S no están protegidos 

contra el agua si no es que exista otra 

indicación, ver también punto 1. Si no se 

tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de 

golpe de corriente o de daños en el producto 

lo cual también puede llevar al peligro de 

personas. 

24. No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las 

que pueda producirse y se hayan producido 

líquidos de condensación en o dentro del 

producto como por ejemplo cuando se 

desplaza el producto de un lugar frío a un 

lugar caliente. 

25. Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio 

del producto, ya que estas son necesarias 

para la ventilación e impiden que el producto 

se caliente demasiado. No pongan el 

producto encima de materiales blandos como 

por ejemplo sofás o alfombras o dentro de 

una caja cerrada, si esta no está 

suficientemente ventilada. 

26. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que 

produzcan calor, como por ejemplo 

radiadores o calentadores. La temperatura 

ambiental no debe superar la temperatura 

máxima especificada en la hoja de datos. 

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 4


27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser 

expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego. 

Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del 

alcance de los niños. Si las baterías o los 

acumuladores no son cambiados con la 

debida atención existirá peligro de explosión 

(atención celulas de Litio). Cambiar las 

baterías o los acumuladores solamente por 

los del tipo R&S correspondiente (ver lista de 

piezas de recambio). Baterías y 

acumuladores son deshechos problemáticos. 

Por favor tirenlos en los recipientes 

especiales para este fín. Por favor tengan en 

cuenta las prescripciones nacionales de cada 

país referente al tratamiento de deshechos. 

Nunca sometan las baterías o acumuladores 

a un corto circuito. 

28. Tengan en consideración de que en caso de 

un incendio pueden escaparse gases tóxicos 

del producto, que pueden causar daños a la 

salud. 

29. Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de 

un incendio pueden desprenderse del 

producto agentes venenosos (gases, líquidos 

etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. 

30. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, 

vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus 

características de peso o de estabilidad no 

sean aptas para él. Siga siempre las 

instrucciones de instalación del fabricante 

cuando instale y asegure el producto en 

objetos o estructuras (por ejemplo paredes y 

estantes). 

31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven 

solamente de ayuda para el manejo que 

solamente está previsto para personas. Por 

eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la 

sujecion en o sobre medios de transporte 

como por ejemplo grúas, carretillas 

elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. El 

usuario es responsable de que los productos 

sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios 

de transporte y de que las prescripciones de 

seguridad del fabricante de los medios de 

transporte sean tenidas en cuenta. En caso 

de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden 

causarse daños en personas y objetos. 

32. Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un 

vehículo, queda en la responsabilidad 

absoluta del conductor que conducir el 

vehículo de manera segura. Asegure el 

producto dentro del vehículo debidamente 

para evitar en caso de un accidente las 

lesiones u otra clase de daños. No utilice 

nunca el producto dentro de un vehículo en 

movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al 

conductor. Siempre queda en la 

responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la 

seguridad del vehículo y el fabricante no 

asumirá ninguna clase de responsabilidad 

por accidentes o colisiones. 

33. Dado el caso de que esté integrado un 

producto de laser en un producto R&S (por 

ejemplo CD/DVD-ROM) no utilice otras 

instalaciones o funciones que las descritas 

en la documentación. De otra manera pondrá 

en peligro su salud, ya que el rayo laser 

puede dañar irreversiblemente sus ojos. 

Nunca trate de descomponer estos 

productos. Nunca mire dentro del rayo laser. 

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 5


Certificate No.: 2001-70 

This is to certify that: 

Equipment type Stock No. Designation 

ESIB7 1088.7490.07 EMI Test Receiver 

ESIB26 1088.7490.26 

ESIB40 1088.7490.40 

ESIB-B1 1089.0547.02 Linear Video Output 

ESIB-B2 1137.4494.26/.40 Preamplifier 

complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the 

approximation of the laws of the Member States 

- relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 

(73/23/EEC revised by 93/68/EEC) 

- relating to electromagnetic compatibility 

(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC) 

Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards: 

EN61010-1 : 1993 + A2 : 1995 

EN55011 : 1998 + A1 : 1999 

EN61326-1 : 1997 + A1 : 1998 

For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility, the limits of radio interference for Class 

B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used 

as a basis. 

Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2001 

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG 

Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München 

Munich, 2001-11-26 

Central Quality Management FS-QZ / Becker 

1088.7490.01 CE E-3


Certificate No.: 9502052 

This is to certify that: 

Equipment type Stock No. Designation 

FSE-B1 1073.4990.02 Color Display 

FSE-B10 1066.4769.02 Tracking Generator 


FSE-B12 1066.5065.02 Output Attenuator 

FSE-B13 1119.6499.02 1 dB Input Attenuator 

FSE-B15 1073.5696.02/.03 Computer Function 

FSE-B16 1073.5973.02/.03/.04 Ethernet Interface 

FSE-B17 1066.4017.02 2nd IEC BUS Interface 

FSE-B18 1088.6993.02 Removeable Harddrive 

FSE-B19 1088.7248.xx Second Harddisk 

FSE-B2 1073.5044.02 7 GHz Frequency Extension 

FSE-B21 1084.7243.02 External Mixer Output 

FSE-B23 1088.7348.02 741,4 MHz Broadband Output 

FSE-B24 1106.3680.02 44 GHz Frequency Extension 

FSE-B3 1073.5244.02 TV Demodulator 

FSE-B4 1073.5396.02 OCXO 10 MHz and Low Phase Noise 

FSE-B7 1066.4317.02 Signal Vectoranalysis 

FSE-B77 1102.8493.02 Signal Vectoranalysis 



FSE-Z2 1084.7043.02 PS/2 Mouse 

complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation 

of the laws of the Member States 

- relating to electromagnetic compatibility 

(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC) 

Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards: 

EN55011 : 1998 + A1 : 1999, Klasse B 

EN61000-3-2 : 1995 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 1998 + A14 : 2000 

EN61000-3-3 : 1995 

EN50082-1 : 1992 

Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1995 

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG 

Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München 

Munich, 2001-01-11 

Central Quality Management FS-QZ / Becker 

1073.4990.02 CE E-11

ESIB 

Manuals 

Contents of Manuals for EMI Test Receiver ESIB 

Operating Manual ESIB 

The operating manual describes the following models and options: 

• ESIB7 20 Hz to 7 GHz 

• ESIB26 20 Hz to 26,5 GHz 

• ESIB40 20 Hz to 40 GHz 

• Option ESIB-B1 

• Option ESIB-B2 

• Option FSE-B10/11 

• Option FSE-B16 

• Option FSE-B17 

Linear Video Output 

Preamplifier 

Tracking Generator 

Ethernet Adapter 

Second IEC/IEEE Bus Interface 

Options FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis, and FSE-B21, External Mixer Output, are described in separate 

manuals. 

The present operating manual contains comprehensive information about the technical data of the 

instrument, the setup and putting into operation of the instrument, the operating concept and controls 

as well as the operation of the ESIB via the menus and via remote control. Typical measurement 

tasks for the ESIB are explained using the functions offered by the menus and a selection of program 

examples. 

In addition the operating manual gives information about maintenance of the instrument and about 

error detection listing the error messages which may be output by the instrument. It is subdivided into 

2 volumes containing the data sheet plus 9 chapters: 

Volume 1 

The data sheet 

Chapter 1 

Chapter 2 

Chapter 3 

Chapter 4 

Chapter 10 

informs about guaranteed specifications and characteristics of the instrument. 

describes the control elements and connectors on the front and rear panel as 

well as all procedures required for putting the ESIB into operation and integration 

into a test system. 

gives an introduction to typical measurement tasks of the ESIB which are explained 

step by step. 

describes the operating principles, the structure of the graphical interface and 

offers a menu overview. 

forms a reference for manual control of the ESIB and contains a detailed description 

of all instrument functions and their application. 

contains an index for the operating manual. 

Volume 2 

Chapter 5 

Chapter 6 

Chapter 7 

Chapter 8 

Chapter 8 

Chapter 9 

Chapter 10 

describes the basics for programming the ESIB, command processing and the 

status reporting system. 

lists all the remote-control commands defined for the instrument. At the end of 

the chapter a alphabetical list of commands and a table of softkeys with command 

assignment is given. 

contains program examples for a number of typical applications of the ESIB. 

describes preventive maintenance and the characteristics of the instrument’s 

interfaces. 

gives a list of error messages that the ESIB may generate. 

contains a list of error messages. 

contains an index for the operating manual. 

1088.7531.12 0.1 E-2

Manuals 

ESIB 

Service Manual - Instrument 

The service manual - instrument informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications (performance 

test) and on the self tests. 

Service Manual 

The service manual is not delivered with the instrument but may be obtained from your R&S service 

department using the order number 1088.7531.94. 

The service manualinforms on instrument function, repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It 

contains all information required for the maintenance of ESIB by exchanging modules.It contains information 

about the individual modules of ESIB. This comprises the test and adjustment of the modules, 

fault detection within the modules and the interface description. 

1088.7531.12 0.2 E-2

Beiblatt B zum Datenblatt 

Signalanalysator FSIQ26, Spektrumanalyzer FSEM und 

Funkstörmeßempfänger ESIB26 

Folgende Daten weichen für FSIQ26, FSEM und ESIB26 von den im Datenblatt spezifizierten ab: 

Störfestigkeit 

Nebenempfang (Spiegel), f > 22 GHz 

-75dB 

Supplement B to Data sheet 

Signal Analyzer FSIQ26, Spectrum Analyzer FSEM and EMI Test 

Receiver ESIB26 

Correction of data sheet specifications for models FSIQ26. FSEM and ESIB26. The following 

specifications are valid: 

Immunity to Interference 

Image frequency, f > 22 GHz 

-75dB 

151.4160.12/22 B D/E-4

Dear Customer, 

Supplement A 

to Operating Manual,Version 01 

EMI Test Receiver ESIB7, ESIB26 and ESIB40 

(Firmware Version 4.31 and higher) 

your EMI test receiver is equipped with a new firmware version. The new firmware offers a number of 

extensions and improvements which are not yet described in the operating manual. They are explained 

on the following pages. The new functions concern: 

• Setting the input attenuation to 0 dB via roll-key no longer possible in Analyzer mode 

• Limit lines with additional unit dBpT, editing feature extended 

• Extended functionality for option External Mixer Output (FSE-B21) 

• Extension of the detector selection by the CISPR Average detector. 

• Extension of the adjacent channel power measurement. 

• Selection of trace averaging method 

• Additional IEEE/IEC-bus commands 

Correction of Operating Manual, Section "Windows-NT Software Installation" 

The stated path for starting the reinstallation is only valid for software pack 3 ("C:\SP3\I386\update"). 

To start the reinstallation of software pack 5 path "C:\SP5\I386\update\update" has to be entered into 

the command line. 

Input Attenuation 0 dB can no longer be set via Roll-key in Analyzer mode 

In order to prevent the input attenuation from being inadvertently switched off, value 0 dB can only be 

set via manual input. The input attenuation can only be reduced up to 10 dB via roll-key or UP/DOWN 

keys. In Receiver mode, the availability of the 0 db setting is already controlled with the 0 DB MIN 

softkey. 

Limit lines with additional unit dBpT, editing feature extended 

dBpT can be set as additional unit for limit lines. 

In firmware versions used so far, a physical unit once set could not be changed. In the new firmware 

version this is now possible. The entered reference values remain unchanged 

External Mixer option FSE-B21 extended 

The permissible setting range of parameter HARMONIC NUMBER under BAND LOCK OFF was 

increased from 40 to 62. 

1088.7490.01 A E-10

CISPR Average Detector (CISPR AV) 

The weighting modes that can be selected have been extended by the detector CISPR Average. 

CONFIGURATION MODE - 

EMI RECEIVER menu: 

TRACE menu: 

DETECTOR 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

QUASIPEAK 

DETECTOR 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

QUASIPEAK 

The DETECTOR softkey opens a 

submenu to select the detector. 

Multiple detection is activated by 

switching on up to four single 

detectors. 

AVERAGE 

CISPR 

AVERAGE 

RMS 

AVERAGE 

CISPR 

AVERAGE 

RMS 

The MIN PEAK, RMS and AC 

VIDEO detector cannot be 

switched on simultaneously. 

The AVERAGE and CISPR 

AVERAGE detector cannot be 

switched on simultaneously. 

MIN PEAK 

AC VIDEO 

FINAL 

MAX PEAK 

FINAL 

QUASIPEAK 

Softkey AC VIDEO is available 

only if the instrument is equipped 

with the linear video output 

(option ESIB-B1). 

QP RBW 

COUPLED 

FINAL 

AVERAGE 

FINAL 

CISPR AV 

FINAL 

RMS 

CISPR AV detector For the measurement of the average according to CISPR 16-1, 

the maximum value of the linear average value is displayed 

during the measurement time. It is used for the measurement 

of pulsed sinusoidal signals with low pulse frequency, for 

example. The maximum value is calibrated with the rms value 

of an unmodulated sinusoidal signal. 

On the ESIB, averaging is done with lowpass filters of the 2nd 

order (simulation of a mechanical instrument). The lowpass 

time constants and the IF bandwidths are fixed depending on 

the frequency. The main parameters are listed in the following 

table: 

CISPR Band A CISPR Band B CISPR Band C/D 

Frequency range 9 kHz to 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1000 MHz 

IF bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 

Lowpass time constant 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms 

1088.7490.01 B E-10

Setting the Measurement Time 

The measurement time is the time during which ESIB measures the input signal and forms a 

measurement result weighted by the selected detector. The measurement time does not include settling 

times. ESIB automatically waits until transients are over. 

CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu 

MEAS TIME 

The MEAS TIME softkey activates the entry field for the measurement time. 

The measurement time can be set with 2 digits resolution in the range 100 µs 

to 100 s, e.g. 980 ms, 990 ms, 1 s, 1.1 s. 

When the quasi-peak detector is used, the minimum measurement time is 

1 ms. 

When the CISPR average detector is used, the minimum measurement time 

is 100 ms. 

With the average, RMS, AC video or min/max peak detector the smallest 

settable measurement time depends on the bandwidth. 

Bandwidth Shortest measurement time Shortest measurement time 

AV, RMS 

PK+, PK-, AC video 

≤ 10 Hz 1 s 10 ms 

100 Hz 100 ms 1 ms 

200 Hz 50 ms 1 ms 

1 kHz 10 ms 0.1 ms 

9 kHz 1 ms 0.1 ms 

≥ 100 kHz 0.1 ms 0.1 ms 

IEC/IEEE-bus command 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME 

Effect of measurement time with 

CISPR Average measurement 

With CISPR Average measurements, the maximum value of 

the weighted signal during the measurement time is displayed. 

The relatively long time constants used with CISPR Average 

detectors entail long measurement times to obtain correct 

results. With unknown signals the measurement time should be 

at least 1 s. This ensures correct weighting of pulses down to a 

pulse frequency of 5 Hz. 

After a frequency change or a modification of the attenuation, 

the receiver waits until the lowpass has settled before the 

measurement time starts. The measurement time is selected 

depending on the IF bandwidth and the characteristics of the 

signal to be measured. Unmodulated sinusoidal signals as well 

as signals with high modulation frequency can be measured 

within a short time. Slowly fluctuating signals or pulse signals 

require longer measurement times. 

1088.7490.01 C E-10

Weighting of pulsed sinusoidal signals 

Rel. level 

Pulse width/ms 

Fig. 1 

Differences of the weighting of pulsed sinusoidal signals resulting from display modes AV, 

CISPR AV and Pk depending on the pulse width (measurement time = 2 s, pulse 

frequency = 1 Hz, IF bandwidth = 9 kHz, averaging time constant = 160 ms). 

Rel. level/dB 

Pulse width/ms 

Fig. 2 


CISPR AV and Pk depending on the pulse width (measurement time = 2 s, pulse 

frequency = 1 Hz, IF bandwidth = 120 kHz, averaging time constant = 100 ms). 

1088.7490.01 D E-10

el. level 

Pulse frequency/Hz 

Fig. 3 


CISPR AV and Pk depending on the pulse width (measurement time = 2 s, 

pulse width = 10 ms, IF bandwidth = 9 kHz, averaging time constant = 160 ms). 

rel. level/dB 

Pulse frequency/Hz 

Fig. 4 


CISPR AV and Pk depending on the pulse frequency (measurement time = 2 s, 

pulse width = 10 ms, IF bandwidth = 120 kHz, averaging time constant = 100 ms). 

1088.7490.01 E E-10

Adjacent Channel Power Measurements 

The chapter "Channel Configuration" of the operating manual was extended to include adjacent channel 

power measurements. 

ACP 

STANDARD 

The ACP STANDARD softkey activates the selection of a digital mobile-radio 

standard. The parameters for the adjacent channel power measurement are 

set according to the regulations of the selected standard. 

ACP STANDARD 

NONE 

NADC 

TETRA 

PDC 

PHS 

CDPD 

CDMA800 FWD 

CDMA800 REV 

CDMA1900 FWD 

CDMA1900 REV 

W-CDMA FWD 

W-CDMA REV 

W-CDMA 3GPP FWD 

W-CDMA 3GPP REV 

CDMA2000 MC 

CDMA2000 DS 

CDMA ONE 800 FWD 

CDMA ONE 800 REV 



TD-SCDMA 

The following standards can be selected: 

NADC (IS-54 B) 

TETRA 

PDC (RCR STD-27) 

PHS (RCR STD-28) 

CDPD 

CDMA 800 FWD 

CDMA 800 REV 

CDMA 1900 REV 

CDMA 1900 FWD 

W-CDMA FWD 

W-CDMA REV 



CDMA2000 Multi Carrier 

CDMA2000 Direct Sequence 





TD-SCDMA 

Selection of Trace Averaging Method 

Section "Trace Selection and Setup" of the operating manual was extended to include the selection of 

the trace averaging method. 

TRACE 1 right side menu: 

AVG MODE 

LOG LIN 

The AVERAGE LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic 

averaging in case of logarithmic level display. 

In case of logarithmic averaging, the dB values of the display voltage are 

averaged, in case of linear averaging the level values in dB are converted into 

linear voltages or powers prior to averaging. These voltages or powers are 

averaged and then again converted into level values. 

For stationary sinewave signals the two averaging methods yield the same 

result. 

Logarithmic averaging is recommended if sinewave signals are to clearly 

stand out against the noise since, with this averaging, noise suppression is 

greater while the sinewave signals remain unchanged. 

IEC/IEEE command :[SENSe:]AVERage:TYPE VIDeo|LINear 

1088.7490.01 F E-10

New and Extended IEEE-Bus Commands 

The new firmware was extended by the following IEEE-bus commands: 

• Additional command for active limit lines. 

• Additional power measurement standard. 

• Selection of Trace Averaging Method. 

• Additional detector. 

• Additional command for firmware update via IEC/IEEE bus interface. 

• Additional parameter PHOLd for TRACe:DATA command. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACTive? 

This command queries the name of all activated limit lines. The names are output in alphabetical 

order. If no limit line is activated, an empty string will be output. The numeric suffixes in 

CALCulate and LIMit are not significant. 

Example: 

":CALC:LIM:ACT?" 

Features: *RST value: - 

SCPI: device-specific 

:CALCulate:MARKer: FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | CDPD | 

FWCDma | RWCDma | 

FW3Gppcdma | RW3Gppcdma| 

F8CDma | R8CDma | F19Cdma | 

R19Cdma | M2CDma | D2CDma | 

FO8Cdma | RO8Cdma | FO19CDMA 

| RO19CDMA | TCDMa | NONE 

This command selects the settings for power measurement of one of the standards. 

Example: 

"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES NADC" 



Mode: 

A-F 

TCDMa TD-SCDMa 

The selection of a standard influences the parameters weighting filter, channel bandwidth and 

spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep time. 

1088.7490.01 G E-10

:[SENSe:]AVERage:TYPE MAXimum | MINimum | SCALar | VIDeo | LINear 

This command selects the trace averaging method. 

VIDeo 

Averaging of logarithmic level values. 

LINear 

Averaging of linear power values prior to their conversion into level values. 

Example: ":AVER:TYPE LIN" 

Features: *RST value: VIDeo 


Mode: 

A, VA (“VIDeo“ and “LINear“ are not available in VA mode) 

Note: 

It is also possible to select the evaluation mode (MAXimum, MINimum, SCAlar) for the 

trace with this command. However, it is recommended to use command 

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE for this purpose. The command 

AVERage:TYPE should be used only to select the trace averaging method. Also, the 

query reads out the trace averaging mode only. 

The following functions are defined but should not be used: 

MAXimum (MAX HOLD): AVG(n) = MAX(X 1 ...X n ) 

MINimum (MIN HOLD): AVG(n) = MIN(X 1 ...X n ) 

SCALar (AVERAGE): 

1 n 

AVG( n)= × xi 

n 

i = 1 

:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] APEak | NEGative | POSitive| SAMPle | RMS | 

AVERage | CAVerage | QPEak | ACVideo 

This command switches the detector for recording of the measured value. 

Example: ":DET POS" 

Features: *RST value: Trace1: POSitive 

Trace 2: AVERage 

SCPI: conforming 

Modes: 

R, A 

In scan mode of the receiver, the detectors POSitive, RMS, AVERage, CAVerage, QPEak and 

ACVideo are available (ACVideo only with option ESIB-B1). 

In the analyzer mode, the detectors APEak, POSitive, NEGative, RMS, SAMPLe and AVERage are 

available. The value "APEak" (AutoPeak) displays both the positive peak value and the negative 

peak value when noise is present. The positive peak value is displayed when one signal is present. 

The trace is selected by means of the numeric suffix after DETector. 

1088.7490.01 H E-10

:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | CAVerage | 

QPEak| ACVideo 

This command switches on the detectors for single measurements. 

Example: ":DET:REC POS,AVER,QPE" 

Features: *RST value: POS 


Mode: 

R 

The trace is not selectable; up to four detectors may be switched on simultaneously. 

The RMS, NEgative and ACVideo detector cannot be switched on simultaneously. 

The AVERage and CAVerage detector cannot be switched on simultaneously. 

Selection ACVideo is available only if the instrument is equipped with the linear video output (option 

ESIB-B1). 

:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement NEGative | POSitive | RMS | AVERage | 

CAVerage | QPEak | ACVideo 

This command selects the detector for the final measurement (the detector used for the subsequent 

final measurement). 

Example: "DET:FME POS" 

Features: *RST value: Trace 1, 3 POS 

Trace 2, 4 AVERage 

SCPI: device specific 

Mode: 

R 

:SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate 

This command starts a firmware update using the files in the set directory. 

Example : ":SYST:FIRM:UPD ‘C:\V4.32’" 

Features : *RST value: – 

SCPI : conforming 

Mode: 

A, VA, BTS, MS 

This command is an event and has therefore no query and no *RST value assigned. 

:TRACe[:DATA] TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4| SINGle | PHOLd | SCAN | STATus | FINAL1 

| FINAL2 | FINAL3 | FINAL4, | 

This command transfers trace data from the controller to the instrument, the query reads trace data 

out of the instrument. 

Receiver 

PHOLd yields the level value of the maxhold marker of the bargraph. 

1088.7490.01 I E-10

ESIB 

Contents - Preparing for Operation 

Contents - Chapter 1 " Preparing for Operation " 

1 Preparing for Operation 

Description of Front and Rear Panel Views .................................................................................. 1.1 

Front View................................................................................................................................ 1.1 

Rear View .............................................................................................................................. 1.13 

Start-Up........................................................................................................................................... 1.18 

Unpacking the Instrument...................................................................................................... 1.18 

Setting up the Instrument ...................................................................................................... 1.18 

Stand-alone Operation ................................................................................................ 1.18 

19" Rack Installation.................................................................................................... 1.19 

EMI Protection Measures ...................................................................................................... 1.19 

Connecting to AC Supply....................................................................................................... 1.19 

AC Power Line Fuses ............................................................................................................ 1.19 

Switching the Instrument on/off ............................................................................................. 1.19 

Switching on the Instrument ........................................................................................ 1.20 

Startup Menu and Booting........................................................................................... 1.20 

Switching off the Instrument........................................................................................ 1.20 

Energy Saving Mode ................................................................................................... 1.21 

Battery Backed-up Memory ................................................................................................... 1.21 

Function Test ................................................................................................................................. 1.21 

Controller Function - Windows NT .............................................................................................. 1.22 

Connecting a Mouse...................................................................................................................... 1.23 

Connecting an External Keyboard ............................................................................................... 1.24 

Connecting an External Monitor ..................................................................................................1.25 

Connecting a Printer...................................................................................................................... 1.27 

Installation of a Network Printer (with option FSE-B16 only) ................................................. 1.33 

Connecting a CD-ROM Drive ........................................................................................................ 1.35 

Firmware Update............................................................................................................................ 1.37 

Installing Windows NT Software ..................................................................................................1.38 

Options ........................................................................................................................................... 1.39 

Option FSE-B17 – Second IEC/IEEE Interface ..................................................................... 1.39 

Installing the software.................................................................................................. 1.39 

Operation..................................................................................................................... 1.41 

Option FSE-B16 – Ethernet Adapter ..................................................................................... 1.42 

Hardware Installation................................................................................................... 1.42 

Software Installation .................................................................................................... 1.43 

Operation..................................................................................................................... 1.47 

NOVELL ......................................................................................................... 1.47 

MICROSOFT .................................................................................................. 1.47 

1088.7531.12 I-1.1 E-3

Contents - Preparing for Operation 

ESIB 

1088.7531.12 I-1.2 E-3

ESIB 

Front View 

1 Preparing for Operation 

Chapter 1 describes the controls and connectors of the EMI Test Receiver ESIB by means of the front 

and rear view. Then follows all the information that is necessary to put the instrument into operation and 

connect it to the AC supply and to external devices. 

A more detailed description of the hardware connectors and interfaces can be found in chapter 8. 

Chapter 2 provides an introduction into the operation of the ESIB by means of typical examples of 

configuration and measurement; for the description of the concept for manual operation and an 

overview of menus refer to chapter 3. For a systematic explanation of all menus, functions and 

parameters and background information refer to the reference part in chapter 4. For remote control of 

the ESIB refer to the general description of the SCPI commands, the instrument model, the status 

reporting system, and command description in chapter 5 and 6. 

Description of Front and Rear Panel Views 

Front View 

1 

Display Screen see Chap. 3 and 4 

2 

Softkeys see Chap. 3 and 4 

3 USER 

USER Generate macros see Chap. 4 

4 MARKER 

MARKER 

NORMAL SEARCH 

DELTA MKR 

Select and set marker 

NORMAL Select and set the marker 

SEARCH Set and start the peak/min search 

DELTA Select and set the delta markers 

MKR ⇒ Set the active marker 

see Chap. 4 

5 FREQUENCY 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER / SPAN / 

FREQ ZOOM 

START STOP 

Define frequency axis in the active window 

CENTER/ Set center frequency etc. 

FREQ Set receiver frequency 

SPAN/ Set sweep span 

ZOOM Set zoom frequencies 

START Set start frequency 

STOP Set stop frequency 

see Chap. 4 

1088.7531.12 1.1 E-3

Front View 

ESIB 

28 

27 

26 

25 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTING 

STATUS 

SRQ 

REMOTE 

LOCAL 

24 

23 

1 2 4 6 8 9 

3 5 7 

EMI TEST RECEIVER . 20 Hz . . . 7 GHz . ESIB 1088.7490 07 

USER 

FREQUENCY LEVEL DATA ENTRY 

CENTER / SPAN / REF / 

7 8 9 

FREQ ZOOM UNIT 

-dBm 

V 

s 

GHz 

START STOP RANGE 

4 5 6 

dBm 

mV 

ms 

MHz 

1 2 3 

MARKER LINES 

dB 

µV 

µs 

kHz 

NORMAL SEARCH D LINES 

0 

. - 

dB.. 

nV 

ns 

Hz 

DELTA MKR LIMITS 

CLR BACK 

EXP 

TRACE SWEEP DATA VARIATION 

TRIGGER 

1 2 

HOLD STEP 

SWEEP / 

3 4 

MEMORY 

SCAN 

SAVE 

MENU 

RBW 

RECALL 

VBW 

CONFIG 

SWT 

COUPLING / 

RUN 

INPUT 

AF OUTPUT RF INPUT 2 20Hz ... 1GHz 

PROBE POWER GEN OUTPUT 50W PROBE / CODE 

RF INPUT 1 

+30 dBm 

MAX 

+ 30 dBm 

DC 0V 

MAX 

MAX 

50 W 

50 W 

REMOTE 

MADE IN GERMANY 

19 17 

22 21 20 

18 

15 

16 14 13 

10 

11 

12 

Fig. 1-1 

Front View 

1088.7531.12 1.2 E-3

ESIB 

Front View 

6 LINES 

LINES 

D LINES 

LIMITS 

Setup evaluation lines and tolerance limits 

D LINES Setup evaluation lines (display lines) 

LIMITS Definition and recall of tolerance limits 

see Chap. 4 

7 LEVEL 

LEVEL 

REF / 

UNIT 

RANGE 

Define reference levels and display range in the active 

measurement window. 

REF/ UNIT Set reference level (= max. display level) 

Set unit 

RANGE Set range 

see Chap.4 

8 DATA ENTRY 

7 8 9 

4 5 6 

1 2 3 

0 

CLR 

DATA ENTRY 

. - 

BACK 

-dBm 

V 

s 

dBm 

mV 

ms 

dB 

µV 

µs 

dB.. 

nV 

ns 

GHz 

MHz 

kHz 

Hz 

EXP 

Keypad for data input 

0...9 input numbers 

. input decimal point 

– change sign 

CLR 

BACK 

– close input field (for 

uncompleted or already closed 

inputs, the original entry is 

kept) 

– erase the current entry in input 

field (beginning of an input) 

– close message window 

(status, error and warning 

messages) 

erase last character input 

see Chap.3 

GHz The units keys close the data 

-dBm V s input and define the multiplication 

factor for each basic unit. 

MHz dBm For dimension-less or 

mV ms alphanumeric inputs, the units 

keys have weight 1. 

kHz dB They behave, in this case, like 

µV µs the ENTER key. 

Hz dB 

nV ns 

EXP Append an exponent 

1088.7531.12 1.3 E-3

Front View 

ESIB 

28 

27 

26 

25 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTING 

STATUS 

SRQ 

REMOTE 

LOCAL 

24 

23 

1 2 4 6 8 9 

3 5 7 


USER 



7 8 9 


-dBm 

V 

s 

GHz 


4 5 6 

dBm 

mV 

ms 

MHz 

1 2 3 

MARKER LINES 

dB 

µV 

µs 

kHz 


0 

. - 

dB.. 

nV 

ns 

Hz 


CLR BACK 

EXP 


TRIGGER 

1 2 

HOLD STEP 

SWEEP / 

3 4 

MEMORY 

SCAN 

SAVE 

MENU 

RBW 

RECALL 

VBW 

CONFIG 

SWT 

COUPLING / 

RUN 

INPUT 



RF INPUT 1 

+30 dBm 

MAX 

+ 30 dBm 

DC 0V 

MAX 

MAX 

50 W 

50 W 

REMOTE 


19 17 

22 21 20 

18 

15 

16 14 13 

10 

11 

12 

Fig. 1-1 

Front View 

1088.7531.12 1.4 E-3

ESIB 

Front View 

9 

10 DATA VARIATION 

3 1/2" diskette drive; 1.44 MByte 

HOLD STEP 

DATA VARIATION 

11 MEMORY 

Key group for entering data and for cursor 

movement 

HOLD Disable control elements / overall 

control. The LED indicates the 

hold condition. 

STEP Set step size for cursor keys and 

roll-key. 

Cursor keys – Move the cursor within the 

input fields and tables. 

– Vary the input value. 

– Define the direction of 

movement for the roll-key. 

Roll-key 

– Vary input values. 

– Move markers and limits. 

– Select letters in the help line 

editor. 

– Move cursor in the tables 

see Chap. 3 

MEMORY 

SAVE 

RECALL 

CONFIG 

Memory media and file management 

SAVE Save instrument data 

RECALL Recall instrument data 

CONFIG Configuration of memory media 

and data 

see Chap. 4 

12 INPUT 

INPUT 

Set impedance and attenuation at the RF 

input. 

see Chap. 4 

13 RF INPUT 1 

RF INPUT 1 

+ 30 dBm 

DC 0V 

MAX 

MAX 

50 W 


RF-Input 1 

Caution: 

The maximum DC voltage is 

0 V, the maximum power is 1 W 

(=;^ 30 dBm at ≥ 10 dB 

attenuation) 

see Chap. 4 

1088.7531.12 1.5 E-3

Front View 

ESIB 

28 

27 

26 

25 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTING 

STATUS 

SRQ 

REMOTE 

LOCAL 

24 

23 

1 2 4 6 8 9 

3 5 7 


USER 



7 8 9 


-dBm 

V 

s 

GHz 


4 5 6 

dBm 

mV 

ms 

MHz 

1 2 3 

MARKER LINES 

dB 

µV 

µs 

kHz 


0 

. - 

dB.. 

nV 

ns 

Hz 


CLR BACK 

EXP 


TRIGGER 

1 2 

HOLD STEP 

SWEEP / 

3 4 

MEMORY 

SCAN 

SAVE 

MENU 

RBW 

RECALL 

VBW 

CONFIG 

SWT 

COUPLING / 

RUN 

INPUT 



RF INPUT 1 

+30 dBm 

MAX 

+ 30 dBm 

DC 0V 

MAX 

MAX 

50 W 

50 W 

REMOTE 


19 17 

22 21 20 

18 

15 

16 14 13 

10 

11 

12 

Fig. 1-1 

Front View 

1088.7531.12 1.6 E-3

ESIB 

Front View 

14 PROBE/CODE 

PROBE / CODE 

Power supply and coded socket for R&S 

accessories.(12-pin Tuchel) 

see Chap. 8 

15 SWEEP 

SWEEP 

TRIGGER 

SWEEP / 

SCAN 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

COUPLING / 

RUN 

Input sweep parameters 

TRIGGER Set trigger source. The LED illuminates on 

valid trigger. 

SWEEP/ Define the sweep mode 

SCAN Define the scan parameters. 

COUPLING/ Set coupled parameters. Resolution 

RUN Bandwidth (RBW), Video Bandwidth 

(VBW) and Sweep Time (SWT). 

The LEDs light indicating coupled 

parameters which are manually cancelled. 

Start scan. 

see Chap. 4 

16 GEN OUTPUT 50Ω 

GEN OUTPUT 50W 

Generator output; N-connector 

see Chap. 8 

17 MENU 

MENU 

Menu-change keys 

see Chap. 3 

Call main menu 

Change to left menu 

Change to right menu 

18 TRACE 

TRACE 

1 2 

Select and activate measurement traces (Trace 1...4). 

The LEDs indicate traces turned on. 

see Chap. 4 

3 4 

1088.7531.12 1.7 E-3

Front View 

ESIB 

28 

27 

26 

25 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTING 

STATUS 

SRQ 

REMOTE 

LOCAL 

24 

23 

1 2 4 6 8 9 

3 5 7 


USER 



7 8 9 


-dBm 

V 

s 

GHz 


4 5 6 

dBm 

mV 

ms 

MHz 

1 2 3 

MARKER LINES 

dB 

µV 

µs 

kHz 


0 

. - 

dB.. 

nV 

ns 

Hz 


CLR BACK 

EXP 


TRIGGER 

1 2 

HOLD STEP 

SWEEP / 

3 4 

MEMORY 

SCAN 

SAVE 

MENU 

RBW 

RECALL 

VBW 

CONFIG 

SWT 

COUPLING / 

RUN 

INPUT 



RF INPUT 1 

+30 dBm 

MAX 

+ 30 dBm 

DC 0V 

MAX 

MAX 

50 W 

50 W 

REMOTE 


19 17 

22 21 20 

18 

15 

16 14 13 

10 

11 

12 

Fig. 1-1 

Front View 

1088.7531.12 1.8 E-3

ESIB 

Front View 

19 PROBE POWER 

PROBE POWER 

Power supply connector (+15V / - 12.6V) for 

measurement accessories (probes) 

see Chap. 8 

20 

Reserved for options 

21 RF INPUT 2 20 Hz ... 1 GHz 

RF INPUT 2 20Hz ... 1GHz 

+30 dBm 

MAX 

50 W 

RF-Input 2 

Caution: 

The maximum power is 1 W 

(=;^ 30 dBm at ≥ 10 dB atten.) 

see Chap. 4 

22 AF OUTPUT 

AF OUTPUT 

AF output connector (head phones) 

(miniature phone jack) 

see Chap. 8 

23 

REMOTE 

Internal loudspeaker 

The loudspeaker is disabled when the phone jack 

is inserted in the AF output. 

In position REMOTE the volume can be 

controlled via remote control command 

SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume. 

see Chap. 6 

and Chap. 8 

24 

ON/STANDBY-switch 

see Chap.1 

Caution: 

In standby mode, the AC line 

voltage is still present within the 

instrument. 

1088.7531.12 1.9 E-3

Front View 

ESIB 

28 

27 

26 

25 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTING 

STATUS 

SRQ 

REMOTE 

LOCAL 

24 

23 

1 2 4 6 8 9 

3 5 7 


USER 



7 8 9 


-dBm 

V 

s 

GHz 


4 5 6 

dBm 

mV 

ms 

MHz 

1 2 3 

MARKER LINES 

dB 

µV 

µs 

kHz 


0 

. - 

dB.. 

nV 

ns 

Hz 


CLR BACK 

EXP 


TRIGGER 

1 2 

HOLD STEP 

SWEEP / 

3 4 

MEMORY 

SCAN 

SAVE 

MENU 

RBW 

RECALL 

VBW 

CONFIG 

SWT 

COUPLING / 

RUN 

INPUT 



RF INPUT 1 

+30 dBm 

MAX 

+ 30 dBm 

DC 0V 

MAX 

MAX 

50 W 

50 W 

REMOTE 


19 17 

22 21 20 

18 

15 

16 14 13 

10 

11 

12 

Fig. 1-1 

Front View 

1088.7531.12 1.10 E-3

ESIB 

Front View 

25 STATUS 

STATUS 

SRQ 

REMOTE 

LOCAL 

Indicators for remote control and switch for manual 

control. 

LOCAL Switch from remote to manual control. 

The LED SRQ indicates that a service 

request from the instrument is active on the 

IEC/IEEE-bus. 

The LED REMOTE indicates that the 

instrument is under remote control. 

see Chap. 4 and 

Chap. 6 

26 HARDCOPY 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTING 

Printer control 

START Start a print job with the setup defined in 

the SETTING menu. 

SETTING Configure the diagram, parameter list and 

measurement protocol outputs on the 

various output media. 

see Chap. 4 

27 CONFIGURATION 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

Select operational modes and define default settings 

MODE Select mode 

SETUP Define configurationss 

see Chap. 1 and 

Chap. 4 

28 SYSTEM 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

General instrument default settings 

PRESET Recall instrument default settings 

DISPLAY Configure the display screen format 

CAL Calibrate the analyzer 

INFO – Call information concerning instrument 

state and measurement parameters 

– Call help functions 

see Chap. 4 

1088.7531.12 1.11 E-3

Rear View 

ESIB 

51 

I/Q DATA 

OUT 

MOUSE 

50 

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 

PC MONITOR 

EXT TRIG 

GATE 

CCVS/FBAS 

OUT 

TG IN 

I/AM/ALC 

TG IN 

Q/FM 

21.4 MHz 

OUT 

LOG 

VIDEO OUT 

EXT REF 

IN/OUT 

IN/OUT 

NOICE 

SOURCE 

SWEEP 

LPT COM1 COM2 ANALYZER MONITOR USER PORT 

IEC 625 SCPI 

49 48 47 46 45 44 

43 42 

41 

40 39 38 

KEYBOARD 

37 

SUPPLY 

CHECK 

ON 

OFF 

IEC FOR COMPUTER FUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI 

Fig. 1-2 

Rear View 

1088.7531.12 1.12 E-3

ESIB 

Rear View 

Rear View 

29 

Power switch 

see Chap. 1 

Fuse holder 

AC power connector 

30 

Power supply fans 

31 EXT TRIG/GATE 

EXT TRIG 

IN/OUT GATE 

Input connector for an external trigger or an external 

gate signal 

see Chap. 4 

and 

Chap. 8 

32 CCVS/FBAS OUT 

Not used in ESIB 

33 TG IN I/AM/ALC 

TG IN 

I/AM/ALC IN/OUT 

Signal input connector for external modulation of 

Tracking Generator (option FSE-B11) 

see Chap. 4 

34 TG IN Q FM 

TG IN 

IN/OUT I/Q FM 

Signal input connector for external modulation of 

Tracking Generator (option FSE-B11) 

see Chap. 4 

35 21.4 MHZ OUT 

21.4 MHz 

IN/OUT 

Output connector for 21.4 MHz IF see Chap. 8 

I 

1088.7531.12 1.13 E-3

Rear View 

ESIB 

I/Q DATA 

OUT 

MOUSE 

50 

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 

PC MONITOR 

EXT TRIG 

GATE 

CCVS/FBAS 

OUT 

51 

TG IN 

I/AM/ALC 

TG IN 

Q/FM 

21.4 MHz 

OUT 

LOG 

VIDEO OUT 

EXT REF 

IN/OUT 

IN/OUT 

NOICE 

SOURCE 

SWEEP 


IEC 625 SCPI 

49 48 47 46 45 44 

43 42 

41 

40 39 38 

KEYBOARD 

37 

SUPPLY 

CHECK 

ON 

OFF 


Fig. 1-2 

Rear View 

1088.7531.12 1.14 E-3

ESIB 

Rear View 

36 LOG VIDEO OUT 

LOG 

VIDEO IN/OUT OUT 

Output connector for video signal see Chap. 8 

37 KEYBOARD 

KEYBOARD 

Connector for an external keyboard 

(5-pin DIN socket) 

see Chap. 1 

and 

Chap. 8 

38 SWEEP 

SWEEP 

IN/OUT 

Output connector 

During a sweep, a sawtooth voltage is output which is 

proportional to frequency. 

see Chap. 8 

39 IEC625 

IEC 625 SCPI IEC Bus-connector see Chap. 8 

40 NOISE SOURCE 

NOICE 

SOURCE IN/OUT 

Output connector for a switchable noise source see Chap. 8 

41 USER PORT 

USER PORT 

User interface connector with configurable inputs and 

outputs (USER-PORT A and USER-PORT B) 

see Chap. 8 

42 ANALYZER MONITOR 

ANALYZER MONITOR 

Connector for an external VGA monitor 

see Chap. 8 

1088.7531.12 1.15 E-3

Rear View 

ESIB 

I/Q DATA 

OUT 

MOUSE 

50 

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 

PC MONITOR 

EXT TRIG 

GATE 

CCVS/FBAS 

OUT 

51 

TG IN 

I/AM/ALC 

TG IN 

Q/FM 

21.4 MHz 

OUT 

LOG 

VIDEO OUT 

EXT REF 

IN/OUT 

IN/OUT 

NOICE 

SOURCE 

SWEEP 


IEC 625 SCPI 

49 48 47 46 45 44 

43 42 

41 

40 39 38 

KEYBOARD 

37 

SUPPLY 

CHECK 

ON 

OFF 


Fig. 1-2 

Rear View 

1088.7531.12 1.16 E-3

ESIB 

Rear View 

43 EXT REF IN/OUT 

EXT REF 

IN/OUT 

IN/OUT 

Input for external reference frequency (1 MHz to 16 

MHz), can be switched to output 10 MHz. 

see Chap. 4 

and 

Chap. 8 

44 COM2 

COM2 

Connector for serial interface 2 

(9-pin socket; COM2) 

see Chap. 1 

and 

Chap. 8 

45 

Cover plate for retrofitting option FSE-B16, Ethernet 

Interface 

see Chap. 1 

and 

Chap. 8 

46 COM1 

COM1 

Connector for serial interface 1 

(9-pin socket; COM1) 

see Chap. 1 

and 

Chap. 8 

47 IEC FOR COMPUTER FUNCTION IEC625 

Cover plate for retrofitting option FSE-B17, Second 

IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface 

see Chap. 5 

and 

Chap. 8 

48 LPT 

LPT 

Parallel interface connector 

(printer connector, Centronics compatible) 

see Chap. 1 

and 

Chap. 8 

49 I/O DATA OUT 

50 MOUSE 

Cover sheet for retrofitting digital interfaces (option 

FSE-B77) 

MOUSE Connector for PS/2-Mouse see Chap. 1 

and 

Chap. 8 

51 PC MONITOR 

PC MONITOR 

Connector for an external PC-Monitor 

see Chap. 1 

and 

Chap. 8 

1088.7531.12 1.17 E-3

Start-Up 

ESIB 

Start-Up 

The following section describes how to put the instrument into service and how to connect external 

devices like eg printer and monitor. 

Important Note: 

Before turning the instrument on, check the following: 

• instrument covers are in place and screwed down, 

• fan openings are free from obstructions, 

• signal levels at the input connectors are all within specified limits, 

• signal outputs are connected correctly and not overloaded. 

The instrument may be damaged if the above conditions are not observed. 

Unpacking the Instrument 

remove protective caps 

½ Take the instrument out of its transport container and check 

whether the items listed in the packing list and in the lists of 

accessories are all there. 

½ Remove the two protective covers from the front and rear of the 

ESIB and carefully check the instrument for damage. 

½ Should the instrument be damaged, immediately notify the carrier 

which shipped the instrument to you and keep the container and 

packing material. 

½ For further transport or shipment of the ESIB the original packing 

should also be used. It is recommended to keep at least the two 

protective covers for the front and rear to prevent damage to the 

controls and connectors. 

Setting up the Instrument 

Stand-alone Operation 

The instrument is designed for use under general laboratory conditions. The ambient conditions must be 

as follows: 

Wrist strap with cord 

Building ground 

Ground connection 

of operational site 

Heel strap 

Floor mat 

• The ambient temperature must be in the range 

recommended in the data sheet. 

• All fan openings must be unobstructed and the air flow at 

the rear panel and at the side-panel perforations must not 

be obstructed. The distance from the wall should be at 

least 10 cm. 

• The ESIB should be placed on a level surface. 

• In order to avoid damage of electronic components of the 

instrument or of the device under test due to electrostatic 

discharge on manual touch, protection of the operational 

site against electrostatic discharge is recommended. 

For applications in the laboratory or on a work bench, it is recommended that the support feet on the 

bottom of the instrument be extended. For the LCD display, this provides the optimum viewing angle 

which typically ranges from perpendicular to the display front to approximately 30° below. 

1088.7531.12 1.18 E-3

ESIB 

Start-Up 

19" Rack Installation 

Important Note: 

When the instrument is rack-mounted, ensure that the air flow through the sidepanel 

holes and the air outlet in the rear panel are not obstructed. 

The instrument may be mounted in a 19" rack by using the rack adapter kit ZZA-95 (order number: see 

data sheet). The installation instructions are included in the adapter kit. 

EMI Protection Measures 

In order to prevent electromagnetic interference (EMI), the instrument may be operated only when all 

covers are correctly in place. Only adequately shielded signal and control cables may be used (see 

recommended accessories). 

Connecting to AC Supply 

The ESIB features automatic AC-line voltage selection (range: see power supply name-plate). The AC 

power connector is located on the rear panel (see below). 

½ Connect the instrument to the AC power source using the AC power cable delivered with the 

instrument. 

AC Power Line Fuses 

The ESIB is protected by two fuses as specified on the power supply name-plate. The fuses are located 

in a removable fuse holder which is located between the AC power switch and the AC power connector 

(see below). 

Switching the Instrument on/off 

Caution: 

Do not power down during booting. This may corrupt harddisk files. 

Note: On power-up, the drive should contain no disk, since otherwise the instrument will try to boot from 

the disk. 

1088.7531.12 1.19 E-3

I 

Start-Up 

ESIB 

AC power switch on the rear panel 

ON 

OFF 

0 

Ac power switch 

Fuse holder 

AC power connector 

Power switch 

After turn-on (position ON), the instrument is in the ready 

state (STANDBY) or in operation dependent upon the 

position of the ON/STANDBY switch located on the 

instrument front panel (see below). 

Note: The AC power switch can be left ON all the time.. 

Switching to OFF is only required when the instrument 

has to be completely disconnected from the AC power 

source. 

Switching to OFF (position OFF) disconnects the ESIB 

completely from the AC power source. 

ON/STANDBY switch on the front panel 

ON 

STANDBY 

. 

Standby 

½ ON/STANDBY switch is not depressed. 

The yellow LED (STANDBY) is on. Only the ESIB‘s 

internal power is connected to the AC line. The crystal 

oven is maintained at the normal operating temperature. 

Operation 

Caution: 

In standby mode, the ESIB is 

still live. 

½ ON/STANDBY is depressed. 

The green LED (ON) is on. The instrument is ready for 

operation. All modules within the instrument are supplied 

with power. 

Switching on the Instrument 

½ To switch on the ESIB, set the power switch on the rear panel to position I. 

½ Pressing the ON/STANDBY key on the front panel. The green LED ahould come on. 

Startup Menu and Booting 

When the instrument is switched on, a message indicating the installed BIOS version (eg Analyzer BIOS 

Rev. 1.2) appears on the screen for a few seconds. 

Windows NT is booted first and then the instrument firmware. As soon as boot up is over, the instrument 

will start measuring. The settings used will be the one that was active when the instrument was 

previously switched off, provided no other device configuration than FACTORY had been selected with 

AUTO RECALL in the MEMORY menu. 

Switching off the Instrument 

½ Remove the disk, if any, from the drive before switching off. 

½ Press the ON/STANDBY key on the front panel. The yellow LED should come on. 

Only when completely disconnecting the ESIB from the AC power source: 

½ Set the power switch on the rear panel to position 0. 

1088.7531.12 1.20 E-3

ESIB 

Functional Test 

Energy Saving Mode 

The ESIB offers an energy saving mode for the screen display. The screen goes blank if no entries have 

been made from the front panel (key, softkey or hotkey and rollkey) for a selectable period of time. 

To switch on the energy saving mode: 

1. Call the SYSTEM DISPLAY - CONFIG DISPLAY submenu to configure the screen display: 

½ Press the DISPLAY key 

½ Press the CONFIG DISPLAY softkey 

2. Activate the save mode 

½ Press the SCR. SAVER ON softkey. 

The softkey is highlighted, indicating that the energy saving mode is on. At the 

same time the data entry for the shutdown time opens. 

3. Enter the shutdown time 

½ Press the SCR. SAVER TIME softkey. 

½ Enter the shutdown time in minutes and confirm the entry using the ENTER key. 

The screen will go blank when the shut down time elapsed. 

Battery Backed-up Memory 

The ESIB has a battery-powered read/write memory (CMOS-RAM) for backing up instrument settings 

on power-off. After each power-on, the ESIB is reloaded with the operational parameters which were 

active just prior to the last power-off (STANDBY or AC power OFF) or were set with AUTO RECALL 

(see Chapter 4 "Saving and Recalling Data Sets"). 

A lithium battery powers the CMOS-RAM. When the battery goes flat (after approx. 5 years), any data 

stored in the CMOS-RAM will be lost. If this happens, the factory setup is loaded on power up. As the 

ESIB has to be opened to replace the battery, please contact the representative of our company 

responsible for you for changing batteries. 

Function Test 

On power up, the ESIB displays the following message on the screen: 

Receiver BIOS 

Rev.x.y 

Copyright 

Rohde & Schwarz 

Munich 

Booting 

A self-test of the digital hardware is then performed. If the self-test finds no faults, Windows NT is 

booted up and the instrument starts measuring. 

Any errors which occur in self-test are transferred as ASCII text to the printer interface (LPT). Therefore, 

an error diagnosis can be carried out, even for serious failures. 

A check of the data contents of the instrument is performed in system error correction (CAL, CAL 

TOTAL key) The individual results of the correction (PASSED / FAILED) can be displayed in the 

calibration menu. 

With the aid of the built-in self-test functions (INFO key, SELFTEST soft key), the functional integrity of 

the instrument can be verified and/or defective modules can be localized. 

1088.7531.12 1.21 E-3

Windows NT Controller Function 

ESIB 

Controller Function - Windows NT 

Caution: 

The drivers used in the integrated controller function are specially configured for the 

instrument. To prevent functions crashing, only the settings described below should 

be used. Only the update software released by Rohde&Schwarz should be used to 

update the drivers. Only programs authorized by Rohde&Schwarz for use on the 

instrument may be run on the instrument. 

Do not power down during booting. This may corrupt the harddisk files. 

The instrument has an integrated Windows-NT controller. The user can switch between the 

measurement screen and the controller screen. When an external monitor is connected, the 

measurement function and the controller function can be displayed simultaneously (see section 

"Connecting an External Monitor"). The controller function is automatically booted on power-up. 

Windows NT operation is described in the supplied manual or in the online help of Windows NT. 

Login 

The user has to login to Windows NT by entering his name and password. As a factory default, the 

instrument is configured for Auto Login, i.e. the login is performed automatically and in the background. 

The user name used is then "instrument" and the password is also "instrument" (lower case). 

To login under another name, call up the logout window in the task bar with START - SHUT DOWN. 

Mark the item "Close all programs and log on as a different user?" in the window and click YES while 

holding the SHIFT key down until the login window is displayed to enter the user identification. The 

password should be entered in the correct syntax including lower-case and upper-case characters. 

Administrator identification 

Some of the installations (eg CD-ROM drive) described below require the administrator login. This is 

indicated in the relevant window. 

The administrator is an identification which in particular allows system settings which are disabled for 

the standard user. 

The password for the administrator is 894129 for the instrument. 

After an installation under the administrator identification, the "Service Pack" of Windows NT has to be 

re-installed, see section "Installation of Windows NT Software". 

On power-up following an installation under the administrator identification, the NT login window is 

displayed (no autologin). The user name "Administrator" is indicated in the window. This entry is to be 

replaced by "instrument" and then "instrument" as password entered. An autologin is then possible. 

Changeover between measurement screen and controller screen 

To call up the controller screen use key combination (US keyboard). 

To return to the measurement screen, activate the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" on the controller. 

Logout 

The instrument can be switched off (standby mode). Logging out of Windows NT is not necessary. 

1088.7531.12 1.22 E-3

ESIB 

Connecting an External Keyboard 

Connecting a Mouse 

Caution: 

The keyboard may only be connected when the instrument is switched off 

(STANDBY). Otherwise, correct operation of the keyboard cannot be guaranteed. 

A mouse can be connected to the PS/2 (MOUSE) connector on the rear panel of the instrument to make 

it easier to use. 

MOUSE 

During measurements, softkeys, tables and data input fields may also be controlled by mouse. For 

computer function, the mouse has the usual functions. 

The control functions for the mouse during measurement operation are described in Chapter 3 in the 

section "Mouse Control of Further Display Elements". This section contains a list in which the screen 

display elements for mouse control of the corresponding softkeys and push buttons of the instrument 

are described. Chapter 8 describes the connector interface. 

After connection of the mouse and subsequent power-on, the mouse will be automatically recognized. 

Special settings such as mouse cursor speed etc., can be made in the Windows NT menu START - 

SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - MOUSE. 

1088.7531.12 1.23 E-3

Connecting a Mouse 

ESIB 

Connecting an External Keyboard 

Caution: 

The mouse may only be connected when the instrument is switched off 

(STANDBY). Otherwise, correct operation of the mouse and instrument cannot be 

guaranteed. 

The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel 5-contact DIN connector (KEYBOARD) for the connection of 

an external PC keyboard. 

KEYBOARD x 

During measurements, the keyboard makes it easier to enter comments, filenames, etc. For computer 

function, the keyboard has the usual functions. 

Chapter 3, in section "External Keyboard Control", contains a list which describes the assignment of the 

instrument front-panel key functions to the key codes of the external keyboard as well as special key 

combinations used for quick operations. Chapter 8 describes the interface for the connector. 

After connection of the keyboard and subsequent power-on, the keyboard will be automatically 

recognized. The default setting is for the US keyboard. Special settings such as repetitional rate etc. can 

be performed in Windows NT menu START - SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - KEYBOARD. 

1088.7531.12 1.24 E-3

ESIB 

Connecting an External Monitor 


Caution: 

The monitor may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY). 

Otherwise, the monitor may be damaged. 

Do not modify the screen driver (display type) as this would cause a malfunction. 

Notes: 

- When connecting the monitor to the PC MONITOR connector, the display of controller 

function can be adapted to the external screen (eg higher resolution) in the NT menu 

START-SETTING - CONTROL PANEL - DISPLAY PROPERTIES. 

- CHIPS (setting = both) should not be modified since otherwise switching between the 

external monitor and the instrument screen is not possible. 

The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel connector PC MONITOR or ANALYZER MONITOR for an 

external monitor. 

PC MONITOR 

ANALYZ ER MONITOR 

Chapter 8 describes the connector interface. 

With an external monitor it is possible to have an enlarged display of the measurement screen 

(ANALYZER MONITOR connector) or of the controller screen (PC MONITOR connector). The 

measuring instrument and the Windows NT controller can be operated in parallel. The mouse and the 

keyboard are allocated to only one mode. 

Display of the measurement screen - Connection to ANALYZER MONITOR connector 

Connection 

After connecting the external monitor the measurement screen is displayed on both the external monitor 

and the instrument. Further settings are not necessary. 

Operation 

The instrument is operated as usual via its softkeys, the mouse and keyboard, etc.. 

Toggle between measurement screen and controller screen 

Key combination is used to call up the controller. After call up, the mouse and 

keyboard are allocated to the controller function. 

By activating the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" the user returns to the measurement screen and the 

mouse and keyboard are allocated to this screen. 

Display of the controller screen - Connection to PC MONITOR connector 

Connection 

After connecting the monitor external monitor operation should be selected. 

Setting is performed in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu (key group: CONFIGURATION, see in 

Chapter 4, the section "Presettings and Interface Configuration"): 

1088.7531.12 1.25 E-3


ESIB 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

EXTERNAL 

REFERENCE 

GENERAL 

SETUP 

Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu 

½ Press the SETUP key in the CONFIGURATION 

field. 

The SETUP menu is opened. 

½ Press the GENERAL SETUP softkey. 

The GENERAL SETUP submenu is opened and the 

current settings of the instrument parameters are 

displayed on the screen in the form of tables. 

MONITOR 

CONNECTED 

Selecting the external monitor mode 

½ Press the MONITOR CONNECTED softkey. 

The softkey is in color to indicate that the external 

monitor mode is activated. The external monitor 

displays the controller screen. 

Operation 

The controller function is operated as usual with the mouse and keyboard. The measuring instrument 

(displayed on the instrument screen) can be operated with both the softkeys and keys of the instrument. 

Toggle between screens 

By activating (clicking) the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" at the controller the mouse and keyboard 

are allocated to the measurement screen. The mouse and keyboard are allocated to the controller when 

the window is deactivated. 

1088.7531.12 1.26 E-3

ESIB 

Connecting a Printer 


Caution: 

The printer may be connected only when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY) 

Notes: 

- The installation of some printer drivers is possible only under the administrator identification 

(see section "Controller Function"). 

- After the installation, the "Service Pack" of Windows NT is to be re-installed, see "New 

Installation of Windows NT Software". 

- To ensure that the instrument performs an autologin, the user identification is to be reset to 

"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function". 

- If bad printouts are produced after installing the printer driver, it is recommended to obtain 

the latest drivers from the printer manufacturer (eg via Internet). Experience has shown that 

printer problems are thus solved in most cases. 

The instrument provides an option for connecting up to three different printers to provide screen 

hardcopy. 

The interfaces can also be used for printing in the controller mode. The output formats "WMF" 

(Windows Metafile) and "Clipboard" are preset. A large number of output devices can be connected 

under Windows NT after installing suitable printer drivers. 

The output devices supported by the instrument can be found in the selection box DEVICE/LANGUAGE 

in the HARDCOPY –SETTINGS DEVICE1/2 menu (see in Chapter 4, the section "Documentation of 

Measurement Results"). To print out via the COM interface, the latter must be assigned the controller 

function in the SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu (owner = OS). 

Chapter 8 describes the connector interfaces. 

The interface connectors are located on the rear panel: 

LPT COM1 COM2 

After the printer has been connected to the appropriate interface connector, the interface needs to be 

configured, the printer driver has to be installed and assigned to an interface. 

1. Connecting the keyboard and mouse 

Ti install and configure of printer drivers on the ESIB, it is necessary to connect a keyboard to the front 

panel and a PS/2 mouse to the rear panel (see sections "Connecting a Mouse" and "Connecting a 

Keyboard"). 

2. Configuring of the interface 

LPT1 

The LPT1 needs no configuration. 

Note: An external CM-ROM drive can be connected to this interface. If this is 

the case, one of the serial interfaces can be used for the printout. 

COM1/COM2 

The COM interfaces have to be assigned to the controller function (OWNER = OS) 

in the SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu. The configuration of serial interfaces 

COM1 and COM2 can then be performed in the Windows NT menu START - 

SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - PORTS. The parameters COM PORTS 

BAUDRATE, BITS, PARITY, STOPBITS, HW/SW-HANDSHAKE must be those 

specified for the printer in question (see the operating manual for the output 

device). 

1088.7531.12 1.27 E-3


ESIB 

Note: 

The serial interfaces can be used for remote control when the analyzer 

is made the owner (Owner = Instrument). The settings made for the 

serial interface in the menu SETUP - GENERAL SETUP overwrite the 

settings in the NT menu.. 

However, settings in the Windows NT menu do not overwrite those of 

the SETUP menu. This means that the settings are only valid as long as 

the interface is assigned to the operating system. 

3. Selection and installation of the printer driver 

The selection and installation of the printer driver, the assignment to the interface and the setting of 

most of the printer-specific parameters (eg paper size) is performed under Windows NT in the 

START - SETTINGS - PRINTER menu. 

4. Configuration of the connected output device 

The printer connected to the instrument is configured in the HARDCOPY DEVICE–SETTINGS 

DEVICE1/2 menu (key group: HARDCOPY, see Chapter 4, Section "Selection and Configuration of 

the Output Device "). The configuration of one or two output devices (DEVICE1 and DEVICE2) can 

be entered, at least one of which must be activated for printing. 

• The parameter DEVICE/LANGUAGE determines which printer is used. 

• The parameter PRINT TO FILE determines if the output is written to a file. 

• The parameter ORIENTATION sets the page format to horizontal or vertical (landscape or 

portrait). 

Selecting the printer type automatically sets the parameters PRINT TO FILE and ORIENTATION to 

values which correspond to the standard mode for this printer. Other printer-dependent parameters 

such as FORMFEED, PAPERFEED etc., can be modified under Windows NT in the printer 

properties window (START/SETTINGS/PRINTERS/SETTINGS/....). 

Table 1-1 shows the standard factory settings for the two output devices. 

The factory settings of DEVICE 1 correspond to the "WMF" (Windows Metafile) output format, with 

printout to a file. WMF is a common format which is used to import of hardcopies (eg of 

measurement windows) to other Windows applications that support this format (eg WinWord). 

The factory setting of DEVICE 2 is "Clipboard". In this setting, the printout is copied to the Windows 

NT clipboard. Most Windows applications support the clipboard. The clipboard contents can be 

directly inserted into a document with EDIT - PASTE. 

Table 1-1 

Factory settings for DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 in the HARDCOPY-DEVICE SETTINGS menu. 

Parameter Parameter name DEVICE 1 settings DEVICE 2 settings 

Output device DEVICE WINDOWS METAFILE CLIPBOARD 

Output PRINT TO FILE YES --- 

Paper orientation ORIENTATION --- --- 

In the following example, an HP DeskJet 660C printer is connected to interface LPT1 and configured as 

DEVICE2 for hardcopies of the screen. 

Switch off ESIB. 

Connect printer to the LPT1 interface . 

Switch on both the ESIB and the printer. 

1088.7531.12 1.28 E-3

ESIB 


Select printer driver under Windows NT 

½ Press key combination 

The Windows NT screen is displayed. 

½ In the Start menu click on "Settings" and 

then "Printers". 

The printer window is opened. 

½ Double-click "Add Printer". 

The "Add Printer Wizard" window is 

opened. This window leads through the 

following printer driver installation. 

½ Click first "My computer" and then "Next". 

The available ports are displayed. 

½ Select LPT1 port. 

The selection is indicated by a tick. 

½ "Click "Next". 

The available printer drivers are displayed. 

The left-hand selection table indicates the 

manufacturers and the right-hand one the 

available printer drivers. 

1088.7531.12 1.29 E-3


ESIB 

½ Mark "HP" in the "Manufacturers" selection 

table and "HP DeskJet 660C" in the 

"Printers" selection table . 

Note: If the required printer type is not in the 

list, the driver has not yet been 

installed. In this case click "HAVE 

DISK". A message box requesting to 

insert a disk with the printer driver will 

be displayed. Insert the disk, press OK 

and select the printer driver. After 

installation, Service Pack must be 

reinstalled (see section "Installing 

Windows NT Software"). 

½ Click "Next". 

The entry field for the printer name is 

displayed. 

½ The printer name can be modified in the 

entry field "Printer name" (max. 60 

characters). 

If one or more printers have already been 

installed, a query is displayed in this 

window to ask if the printer last installed as 

the default printer should be selected for 

the Windows NT applications (Do you 

want your Windows-based programs to 

use this printer as default printer?) "No" is 

preset. 


A query is displayed whether the printer is 

to be shared with other network users.. 

This query is irrelevant when installing a 

local printer. The answer "Not shared" is 

preset. 


The window for printing a test page is 

displayed. The test page is for checking if 

the installation was successful. 

1088.7531.12 1.30 E-3

ESIB 


½ Switch on printer. 

½ Click Yes (recommended)". 

½ Click "Finish". 

A test page is printed out if the installation 

was successful. 

If the test page is not printed out or not 

completely, the Windows NT online help 

offers troubleshooting instructions under 

the entry "Printer Trouble Shooting". 

Note: 

If a request for the printer driver path 

appears after clicking "Finish", this printer 

installation should be performed under the 

administrator identification (see section 

"Controller Function". 

Now, the instrument needs to be configured 

so that hardcopies of the measurement 

screen can be printed out on this printer. 

Configuring HP DeskJet 660C. 

½ Click the "R&S Analyzer Interface" button. 

The measurement screen is displayed. 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTING 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

COLOR 

ON OFF 

TRC COLOR 

AUTO INC 

½ Press the SETTINGS key in the 

HARDCOPY field. 

The SETTING menu is opened. 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

½ Press the HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey. 

The HARDCOPY DEVICE submenu is 

opened and the current settings of the two 

possible output devices are displayed in 

HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS-table. 

SETTINGS 

DEVICE2 

HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS 

Device1 

WINDOWS METAFILE 

Print to File YES 

Orientation --- 

½ Press the SETTING DEVICE2 softkey. 

Line DEVICE2 is marked with the 

selection bar. 

Device2 

CLIPBOARD 

Print to File --- 


1088.7531.12 1.31 E-3


ESIB 

DATA ENTRY 

-dBm 

s 

V 

GHz 


Device1 



DEVICE 


Device2 

CLIPBOARD 

CLIPBOARD 



ENHANCED METAFILE 


BITMAP FILE 

HP DeskJet 660C 

½ Press one of the unit keys. 

The DEVICE selection box is displayed on 

the screen. The current selection is 

marked by a tick and highlighted by the 



½ Press the cursor key Ã until the entry 

HP DeskJet 600C is highlighted by the 


DATA ENTRY 

-dBm 

s 

V GHz 


Device1 




Device2 

HP Deskjet 660C 

Print to File NO 

Orientation PORTRAIT 

½ Press one of the unit keys. 

The DEVICE selection box is closed and 

HP DeskJet 660C is entered in the 

DEVICE2 row. 

Note: 

Selecting the printertype automatically sets 

the parameters PRINT TO FILE and 

ORIENTATION to standard mode values for 

this printer. Other printer-dependent 

parameters such as PAPERSIZE, can be 

modified under Windows NT in the printer 

properties window 

(START/SETTINGS/PRINTER/SETTINGS).. 

ENABLE 

DEV1 DEV2 

Start printing. 

½ Press the ENABLE softkey until DEV2 is 

marked on the second softkey line. 

Printing can then be started with the 

START key in the HARDCOPY menu. 

MENU 

Return to main menu 

½ Press the menu key several times. 

Note: After the installation, the "Service 

Pack" of Windows NT is to be reinstalled, 

see "New Installation of 

Windows NT Software". 

1088.7531.12 1.32 E-3

ESIB 


Installation of a Network Printer (with option FSE-B16 only) 

After opening the "Printers" dialog window 

proceed with the installation as follows: 

½ Double-click the "Add Printer" line. 


opened. This window guides the user 

through the printer driver installation. 

½ Click "Network printer server" and then 

"Next". 

A window to set the path to the printer 

server is displayed. 

½ Set the path to the desired printer server, 

mark it and select it with OK. 

½ Confirm the following request for the 

installation of a suitable printer driver with 

OK. 

The list of printer drivers is displayed. 

The manufacturers are listed in the 

window at the left, the available printer 

drivers at the right. 

1088.7531.12 1.33 E-3


ESIB 

½ Select the manufacturer in the 

"Manufacturers" window and then the 

printer driver in the "Printers" window. 

Note: 

If the required type of output device is not 

included in the list, the driver has not yet 

been installed. In this case click on button 

"HAVE DISK". A message box requesting 

to insert a disk with the corresponding 

printer driver will be displayed. Insert the 

disk, press OK and select the required 

printer driver. 

½ Click "Next" 

If one or more printers are already 

installed, a prompt is displayed in this 

window to ask if the printer last installed as 

default printer should be selected for the 

Windows NT applications ("Do you want 

your Windows-based programs to use this 

printer as default printer?"). The default 

selection is "No". 

½ Start the printer driver installation with 

"Finish". 

Note: 

If a prompt for the printer driver path 

appears after pressing "Finish", the 

Service Pack must be re-installed after this 

printer installation (see Chapter 1, section 

"Installing Windows NT Software"). 

After installation, the instrument has to be configured for printout with this printer in the HCOPY - 

SETTINGS menu. 

Finally, Service Pack x must be re-installed (see section "Installing Windows NT Software"). 

1088.7531.12 1.34 E-3

ESIB 

Connecting a CD ROM Drive 

Connecting a CD-ROM Drive 

Caution: 

The CD-ROM may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY). 

If this is not observed correct operation of the CD-ROM and the instrument cannot be 

guaranteed. 

Notes: 

- The installation of a CD-ROM is possible only under the administrator identification (see 

section "Controller Function"). 




"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function", 

The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel interface LPT1 for the connection of a CD-ROM drive. 

LPT 

The following CD-ROM drives are supported: 

− MICROSOLUTIONS BACKPACK External CD-ROM. 

− FREECOM IQ DRIVE 

− ADAPTEC Parallel SCSI Adapter + SCSI CD-ROM 

After connection, the CD-ROM drive is to be installed under Windows NT. 

Switch off ESIB. 

Connect CD-ROM drive to interface LPT1 of the 

instrument and to AC power source. 

Switch on ESIB. 

Administrator identification 



½ Call the logout window with "Shut Down" in 

the "Start" menu. 

1088.7531.12 1.35 E-3

Connecting a CD ROM Drive 

ESIB 

½ Mark entry "Shut down and log on as a 

different user". 

½ Press the "Shift" key and click button "Yes" at 

the same time. 

The login window is displayed. 

½ Enter "administrator" under "name" and 

"894129" under "password", confirm entry 

with "OK". 

Select driver under Windows NT 

½ In the Start menu press first "Setting" and 

then "Control Panel". 

The system control window is opened. 

½ Double-click "SCSI Adapters". 

The "SCSI Adapters" window is opened. 

½ Click the "Driver" index card and then button 

"Add". 

The list of installed drivers is displayed. 

½ Click "Have Disk". 

This window leads through the following 

installation. 

Note: 

After the installation, the "Service Pack" 

of Windows NT is to be re-installed, 

see "New Installation of Windows NT 

Software. 

1088.7531.12 1.36 E-3

ESIB 

Installing Windows NT Software 

Firmware Update 

The installation of a new firmware version can be performed using the built-in diskette drive and does 

not require opening the receiver. The firmware update kit contains several diskettes. 

The installation program is called up in the CONFIGURATION - SETUP menu. 

Insert diskette 1 into the drive. 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu 

½ Press the SETUP key in the CONFIGURATION 

field. 

The SETUP menu is opened. 

MENU 

½ Change to the right-hand menu using the menu key. 

FIRMWARE 

UPDATE 

½ Press the FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey. 

The submenu is opened. 

UPDATE 

½ Press the UPDATE softkey. 

The installation program starts and leads the user 

through the remaining steps of the update. 

The installation can be cancelled. 

RESTORE 

½ Press the RESTORE softkey. 

The previous firmware version is restored. 

1088.7531.12 1.37 E-3


ESIB 

Installing Windows NT Software 

The driver software and the Windows NT system settings are exactly adapted to the measurement 

functions of the instrument. Correct operation of the instrument can, therefore, be guaranteed only if the 

software and hardware used is released or provided by Rohde & Schwarz. 

The use of other software or hardware may cause the ESIB to malfunction. 

The latest list of software authorized for use on the ESIB can be obtained from your nearest 

Rohde&Schwarz agency (see list of addresses). 

After each software installation requiring the administrator identification, "Service Pack" of Windows NT 

must be re-installed (also with administrator identification; see section "Controller Function"): 

Re-installing Service Pack 

½ In the Start menu click "Run". 

The entry window opens. 

Service Pack 5: 

½ Enter "C:\SP5\I386\UPDATE\UPDATE" into the 

command line and start installation with "OK". 

The following window leads through the installation. 

Service Pack 3: 

½ Enter "C:\SP3\I386\UPDATE" into the command line 

and start installation with "OK". 

The following window leads through the installation. 

1088.7531.12 1.38 E-3

ESIB 

Options 

Options 

This section describes options FSE-B17, Second IEC/IEE Interface, and FSE-B16, Ethernet Interface. 

Note: - Option ESIB-B1, Linear Video Output, is described in Chapter 4, Section ’Selection of 

Detectors’ 

- Options FSE-B10 to B12, Tracking Generator, are described in Chapter 4, Section ’Tracking 

Generator 

Option FSE-B17 – Second IEC/IEEE Interface 

Notes: - The installation of option FSE-B17 is possible only under the administrator identification 

(see section "Controller Function"). 




"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function". 

- Interface "COM2" is no longer available after installation of option FSE-B17. 

Besides the instrument external devices can also be controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus using the optional 

2nd bus interface FSE-B17 and the computer function for instrument. The interface software permits 

IEC/IEEE-bus commands to be included in user programs. The installation instructions are enclosed 

with the option. 

Installing the software 

The operating software is already installed and need not be loaded from the driver diskettes which serve 

as backup diskettes. 

The driver must be loaded on the start-up of Windows NT. To do this, enter the type of board, configure 

the board and enter the parameters for the connected equipment. If the option is factory fitted, all this 

has been done in the factory. 

The following parameters may not be changed after selection on configuration of the board: 

Board Type ...................AT-GPIB/TNT 

Base I/O Address .............02C0h 

Interrupt Level ..............3 

DMA Channel ..................5 

Enable Auto Serial Polling ...No 

For further parameters, refer to manual for the board. 

Selecting the board type 

½ Click "Start" in the task bar. 

½ Click consecutively "Settings", "Control 

Panel" and "GPIB" in this sequence. 

The "GPIB Configuration" menu for 

selecting the board type and configuring 

the board is opened. 

½ Click button "Board Type". 

The "Board Type" menu for selecting the 

board type is opened. 

1088.7531.12 1.39 E-3

Options 

ESIB 

½ Mark "GPIB0" in the "GPIB Board" list. 

½ Mark "AT-GPIB/TNT" in the "Board Type" 

list. 

½ Confirm the selection with "OK". 

The "GPIB Configuration" menu is 

displayed again. 

½ Click button "Configure". 

The "GPIB0 (AT-GPIB/TNT)" menu for 

configuring the board is opened. 

Configuring the board 

½ Set "3" in the "Interrupt Level" list. 

½ Click button "Software". 

The menu is extended. 

½ Deactivate (= no tick) "Enable Auto Serial 

Polling" in the "Advanced Items" field. 

½ Quit the menu with "OK". 

The "GPIB Configuration" menu is displayed 

again. 

Note: 

The settings of the following parameters 

should not be no longer modified. 

Board Type ......... AT-GPIB/TNT 

Base I/O Address ......... 02C0h 

Interrupt Level .............. 3 

DMA Channel .................. 5 

Enable Auto Serial Polling .. No 

1088.7531.12 1.40 E-3

ESIB 

Options 

Setting the parameters for the connected 

equipment 

½ Mark the instrument in the "Device 

Template" list and confirm selection with 

"OK". 

The "DEV.. Settings" menu is opened. 

½ Perform the settings for the selected unit 

in the "DEV.. Settings" menu. 

The logic name for the instrument is preset 

with DEV1 and address 20. See board 

manual for further units. 

Note: 

When assigning logic names to 

connected equipment note that 

these names do not correspond to 

the directory names under DOS. 

½ Terminate setting with "OK". 

The query asking if the GPIB software 

should be re-started is displayed. 

½ Select "No". 

½ Re-start controller with Start-Restart in the 

task bar. 

After the controller has been re-started, 

the settings for the GPIB interface are 

effective. 

Note: 

After the installation, the "Service 




Use of DOS Programs 

When using DOS programs, driver GPIB-NT.COM should be loaded. For this to take place, the line 

device=C:\PROGRA~1\NATION~1\GPIB\NI488\DosWin16\Gpib-nt.com has to be activated in 

the file C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\CONFIG.NT. If the option is factory fitted, this line will have been 

entered in the factory. 

Operation 

The second IEC/IEEE-bus interface corresponds physically to that of the instrument (see Chapter 8). 

If the instrument is to be controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus, a bus cable must be plugged to both bus 

connectors. The interface can be driven under DOS/WINDOWS3.1/95/NT by R&S software (FS-K3, 

Order No. 1057.3028.02, etc.) or by user-written software. The handling of IEC/IEEE-bus commands in 

user programs is described in the manual for the card. 

The files are in directory C:\Program Files\National Instrument\GPIB\NI488. 

1088.7531.12 1.41 E-3

Options 

ESIB 

Option FSE-B16 – Ethernet Adapter 

With the option Ethernet Adapter FSE-B16, the device can be connected to an Ethernet-LAN (local area 

network). It is possible to transmit data via the network and to use the network printer. The adapter 

operates with a 10 MHz Ethernet in line with standards IEEE 802.3 10Base2 (Thin Ethernet, 

CheaperNet, BNC-Net) (B16 model 03) or 10Base5 (Thick Ethernet) (B16 model 02). 

Hardware Installation 

Caution: 

Prior to installation contact the network administrator, especially in case of complex 

LAN installations since mistakes in cabling might have influence the whole network. 

If the adapter is installed at the factory, it is preconfigured. In case of retrofitting, refer to the installation 

instructions. The hardware settings must not be modified since the functions of the device could 

otherwise be impaired. 

The following parameters are factory-set: 

I/O Addr. 300, IRQ 5, MEM D0000 

The connection with the network depends on the connectors used in the network. 

BNC (Thin Ethernet, CheaperNet; FSE-B16 Var. 03) 

Connection 

Network traffic 

The device is looped into the LAN segment via rear-panel 2 BNC 

connectors. 

If a cable is not connected to one of the BNC connectors, this BNC 

connector has to be terminated with 50 Ohm. BNC T connectors 

must not be used. 

Note that the network traffic is disturbed if a segment is interrupted. 

Requirements 

Thin Ethernet segment requirements have to be complied with: 

- maximum segment length of 185 m 

- minimum distance between the connectors of 0.5 m 

- maximum of 30 connectors per segment. 

If components that comply with enhanced requirements are 

exclusively used (Ethernet Adapter FSE-B16 complies with the 

enhanced requirements): 

- maximum length of segment of 300 m 

- maximum number of connectors of 100 

With repeaters used: 

- maximum total length of the network of 900 m containing a 

- maximum of 3 segments 

- maximum of two repeaters between two connectors 

1088.7531.12 1.42 E-3

ESIB 

Options 

AUI (Thick Ethernet; FSE B16 Var. 02) 

Connection 


Requirements 

The device is connected to the LAN segment using a transceiver 

cable (DB-15 AUI connector, not part of the equipment supplied) 

which is connected to the rear panel and to the transceiver. 

The connection does not conflict with the network traffic. The device 

can also be disconnected from the network without any problems 

but make sure that data are not being transmitted. 

The Thick Ethernet segment requirements have to be taken into 

account. 

- The maximum segment length should be 500 m and the 

- distance between the connectors should at least be 2.5 m. 

- A maximum of 100 connectors may be used in a segment. 

With repeaters used, 

- the total length of the network must not be more than 2500 m 

containing 

- a maximum of 3 segments. 

- There should be no more than two repeaters between two 

connectors. 

If other network components are used, these conditions may vary. 

RJ45 (UTP, 10BaseT, Western Connector) 

Connection 

The device is connected to the LAN segment using a RJ45 cable 

(not part of the equipment supplied) which is connected to the rear 

panel and to the network hub of the LAN segment. 


This connection does not conflict with the network traffic. The 

device can also be disconnected from the network without any 

problems but make sure that data are not being transmitted. 

Requirements 

Since RJ45 is not a bus but a star topology no special requirements 

have to be taken into account for the connection. 

The LAN requirements should be considered in the installation. 

Software Installation 

Data transmission within the network is by means of data blocks, the so-called packets. Besides user 

data other information, the so-called protocol data (transmitter, receiver, type of data, order) are 

transmitted. The drivers corresponding to the protocol have to be installed to process protocol 

information. A network operating system is required for network services (data transmission, directory 

services, printing in the network) and thus has to be installed. 

1088.7531.12 1.43 E-3

Options 

ESIB 

Calling up Configuration Menu for Network Settings 


½ Click consecutively "Settings", "Control 

Panel" and "Network". 

The "Network" configuration menu for 

network settings is opened. 

Registering the Identification 

Note: It is important for the computer name to be unique in the network.. 

½ Select "Identification". 

½ Confirm computer and workgroup names 

with "OK" or enter new names in submenu 

"Change". 

1088.7531.12 1.44 E-3

ESIB 

Options 

Installation and Configuration of the Driver for the Network Adapter 

½ Select "Adapter". 

½ Click "Add" and mark network driver "SMC 

8416 EtherEZ" and select with "OK". 

The query "Files.." is displayed. 

½ Answer it by clicking "Continue". 

The "SMCEthernet Card Setup" window is 

displayed. 

½ Close the window with "OK". 

Some files are copied and the network 

adapter is displayed under "Network 

Adapters". 

The entry "MS Loopback Adapter" refers 

to a driver which ensures instrument 

control and should not be modified. 

Note: The network adapter settings must 

not be modified since this may cause 

problems to the instrument. 

Installation of Network Protocols 

Note: The network administrator knows which protocols are to be used.. 

½ Select "Protocol". 

½ Click "Add", mark the desired protocol and 

select with "OK". 

This operation has to be performed 

several times when several protocols are 

selected. 

½ Execute the installation by clicking 

"Continue". 

Note: If a protocol requires further settings, 

they can be performed with "Properties" 

after marking the corresponding 

entry. If further settings are not 

possible, this field is gray. 

1088.7531.12 1.45 E-3

Options 

ESIB 

Installation of Network Services 

To utilize the resources of the network it is necessary to install the corresponding services. 

Note: The network administrator knows which services are to be used. 

½ Select "Services". 

½ Click "Add", mark the desired service and 

select with "OK". 

This operation has to be performed 

several times when several services are 

selected. 

Some services are pre-installed and can 

be cleared with "Remove" if they are not 

needed. 

½ Execute the installation by clicking 

"Continue". 

Note: If a service requires further settings, 

they can be performed with 

"Properties" after marking the corresponding 

entry. If further settings are 

not possible, this field is gray. 

Terminating the Installation 

½ Quit the "Network" configuration menu for 

network settings with "OK". 

The settings are checked and processed. 

Missing information is queried. 

½ Answer the query "You must shutdown..." 

with "Yes". 

The settings are valid after computer restart. 

Note: 

After the installation, the "Service 




1088.7531.12 1.46 E-3

ESIB 

Options 

Examples of Configurations 

Network Protocols Services Notes 

NOVELL Netware 

NWLink IPX/SPX 

Compatible 

Transport 

Client Service for 

NetWare 

The "Frame Type" used under "Protocols - 

Properties" should be set. 

IP networks 

(FTP, TELNET, WWW, 

GOPHER, etc.) 

TCP/IP Protocol 

Simple TCP/IP 

Services 

An "IP Address" unambiguous in the network 

should be set under "Protocols - Properties". 

MICROSOFT network 

NetBEUI Protocol 

or 

TCP/IP Protocol 

Workstation 

Server 

A name unambiguous in the network should be 

registered under "Identification - Computer 

Name". 

Operation 

After installing the network operating system it is possible to transfer data between the device and other 

computers and to use printers in the network. A precondition for network operation is the authorization to 

use network resources. Resources may be access to the file directories of other computers or the use of 

a central printer. The network or server administrator will grant the authorizations. The network name of 

the resource and the corresponding authorization are required. Passwords protect the resources 

against improper use. A user name is normally assigned to every authorized user. The user also has a 

password. Resources may then be assigned to the user. The type of access, i.e. whether data are only 

read or also written as well as a shared access to data has to be defined. Other types are possible 

depending on the network operating system. 

NOVELL 

Operating system NETWARE from NOVELL is as server-supported system. Data transfer between the 

individual workstations is not possible. Data transfer is between workstation computers and a central 

computer, the server. This server provides storage capacity and the connection to the network printers. 

Like under DOS, the data on a server are organized in directories and are offered to the workstation as 

virtual drives. A virtual drive on a workstation is like a hard disk and data can be processed accordingly. 

This is called drive mapping. Also network printers can be addressed as normal printers. 

Network operating system NOVELL is available in two forms: NETWARE 3 and NETWARE 4 NDS. In 

the previous version NETWARE 3, each server manages its own resources itself and is independent. A 

user has to be managed separately on each server. For NOVELL 4 NDS, all resources are managed in 

the NDS (NOVELL DIRECTORY SERVICE). The user only has to log in once and gains access to the 

resources released for him. The individual resources and the user are managed as objects in a 

hierarchical tree (NDS TREE). The position of the object in the tree is called CONTEXT for NETWARE 

and must be known in order to access the resources. 

MICROSOFT 

For MICROSOFT, data can be transferred between workstations (peer-to-peer) but also between 

workstations and servers. The servers can provide access to individual files as well as the connection to 

network printers. Like under DOS, the data on a server are organized in directories and are offered to 

the workstation as virtual drives. A virtual drive on a workstation is like a hard disk and data can be 

processed accordingly. This is called drive mapping. Also network printers can be addressed as normal 

printers. A connection to DOS, WINDOWS FOR WORKGROUPS, WINDOWS95, WINDOWS NT is 

possible. 

1088.7531.12 1.47 E-3

Options 

ESIB 

Installing a user 

After the network software has been installed, the instrument logs with an error message during the next 

start-up since there is no user "Instrument" (= user identification for NT autologin) in the network. It is 

therefore necessary to install a user which should be the same for Windows NT and for the network. 

The network administrator is responsible for the installation of new users in the network. 

Note: 

The installation of new users is possible only under the administrator identification (see 

section "Controller Function"). 


½ Click consecutively "Programs" 

"Administrative Tools (Common)" and 

"User Manager" . 

The "User Manager" menu is opened. 

½ Click "User" and select "New User". 

The menu "New User" for entering user 

data is opened. 

½ Fill in the lines "Username", "Password" 

and "Confirm Password" and confirm 

the entry with OK. 

The user data should correspond to the 

network settings. 

1088.7531.12 1.48 E-3

ESIB 

Options 

Only NOVELL network: 

Configure NOVELL Client 


½ Click consecutively "Settings", 

"Control Panel", "CSNW". 

NOVELL 3.x 

½ Click "Preferred Server". 

½ Under "Select Preferred Server" 

select the NOVELL server for which 

the user has been installed. 

NOVELL 4.x 

½ Click "Default Tree and Context" . 

½ Enter the NDS Tree under "Tree" and, 

under "Context", the hierarchical path 

for which the user has been installed. 

Note: These specifications can be 

obtained from the network 

administrator. 

Login in the Network 

Network login is automatically performed with the operating system login. A prerequisite is that the user 

name and the password are the same under Windows NT and in the network. 

Use of Network Drives 


½ Click consecutively "Programs" and 

"Windows NT Explorer". 

½ Click "Network" line in the "All 

Directories" list. 

A list of available network drives is 

displayed. 

½ Click "Tools" and "Map Network Drive". 

In the list "Shared Directories:" the 

network paths available in the network 

are displayed. 

½ Mark the desired network path. 

1088.7531.12 1.49 E-3

Options 

ESIB 

½ Select the drive under "Drive:" 

½ Activate "Reconnect at Logon:" if the 

link is to be automatically established at 

each unit start. 

½ Connect the network path to the 

selected drive with "OK". 

The user name and the password are 

queried. The drive is then displayed in 

the "All Directories" list of Explorer. 

Note: Only drives for which an 

authorization is available may 

be connected. 

Disconnect link: 

½ Click "Tools" and "Disconnect Network 

Drive" in Explorer. 

½ Select under "Drive:" the drive whose 

connection is to be removed. 

½ Disconnect link with "OK". The query 

should be answered with "Yes". 

Printing on a Network Printer 

Select printer driver under Windows NT 



½ In the Start menu press first "Setting" and 

then "Printers". 

The printer window is opened. 

1088.7531.12 1.50 E-3

ESIB 

Options 

½ Double-click line "Add Printer". 


opened. This window leads through the 

following printer driver installation. 

½ Click first "Network Printer Source" and 

then "Next". 

The list of available network printers is 

displayed. 

½ Mark the printer and select with "OK". 

The available printer drivers are displayed. 

The left-hand selection table indicates the 

manufacturers and the right-hand one the 

available printer drivers. 

½ Mark the manufacturer in selection table 

"Manufacturers" and then the printer driver 

in selection table "Printers". 

1088.7531.12 1.51 E-3

Options 

ESIB 


The window for starting a test page is 

displayed. The test print is for checking if 

the installation was successful. 

½ Switch on printer. 

½ Click Yes (recommended)". 

½ Click "Finish". 

A test page is printed out if the installation 


If the test page is not printed out or not 

completely, the Windows NT online help 

offers troubleshooting instructions under 

the entry "Printer Trouble Shooting". 

The instrument has to be configured with 

this printer for the printout of the 

measurement screen. This configuration is 

described in this chapter in the section 

"Connecting an Output Device". 

Server Function 

With the server function data can be provided on the instrument for use in other computers. This is 

possible only in the MICROSOFT network. The server function is released after network installation as 

standard. If this is not required, it should be deactivated, see "Installation of Network Services". 

The availability of instrument data in the network is controlled by releases. The release is a property of 

a file or of a directory. To grant a release, the object is to be marked in "Windows NT Explorer" and 

pressed by the right-hand mouse key. The release is performed under Properties -> Sharing by 

selecting "Shared As". Other computers can then access these objects with the names allocated under 

"Share Name". The online help gives further information on the network operation. 

TCP/IP 

The TCP/IP protocol allows files to be transmitted between different computer systems. A program 

running on both computers is required to control the data transfer. The same operating or file system 

need not be used by the two partners. A file transfer is possible between DOS/WINDOWS and UNIX, 

for example. One partner has to be configured as host the other as client or vice versa. The system 

performing several processes at the same time (UNIX) will normally be the host. The usual file transfer 

program used for TCP/IP is FTP (File Transfer Protocol). An FTP host is installed as standard on most 

of the UNIX systems. 

After installing the TCP/IP services, a terminal link can be established with "Start" - "Programs" - 

"Accessories" - "Telnet" or a data transmission with FTP using "Start" - "Run" "ftp" - "OK". Thus, all 

controller systems can be accessed which support these universal protocols (UNIX, VMS, ...). 

Further information is given in the NT online help which can be called up with "Help". 

1088.7531.12 1.52 E-3

ESIB 

Options 

FTP 

For a complete description of the functions and commands see the FTP documentation. 

Establishing a connection 

½ Click "Start" and then "Run" in the task bar. 

The program is started with the DOS command 

FTP 

The following command sets up the connection: 

OPEN 

xx.xx.xx.xx = IP address, e.g. 89.0.0.13 

File transmission 

To transmit a file to the target system, the following command is 

used: 

PUT 

file name = name of file e.g. DATA.TXT. 

To call a file from the target system, the following command is 

used: 

GET 

file name = name of file e.g. SETTING.DAT. 

TYPE B 

allows the transmission of files in the BINARY format, no 

conversion is performed. 

TYPE A 

allows the transmission of files in the ASCII format. Thus, control 

characters are converted so that the text files can be read on the 

target system, too. 

Examples: 

PUT C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT 

sends the AUTOEXEC.BAT file to the target system. 

LCD DATA 

changes to subdirectory DATA in the computer function. 

CD SETTING 

changes to the subdirectory SETTING on the target system. 

Changing directories 

The command 

LCD 

changes the directory as the corresponding DOS command. 

LDIR 

lists the directory. 

These commands refer to the computer function of the 

instrument. If the ’L’ preceding the commands is omitted, they 

apply to the target system. 

1088.7531.12 1.53 E-3

ESIB 

Contents - Getting Started 

Contents - Chapter 2 "Getting Started" 

4 Getting Started..................................................................................................... 2.1 

Measurement Example.................................................................................................................... 2.1 

Example of Level and Frequency Measurement ..................................................................... 2.2 

Measurement ................................................................................................................ 2.2 

Main Test Receiver Functions....................................................................................... 2.2 

Measurement Sequence - Level and Frequency Measurement ................................... 2.2 

1088.7531.12 I-2.1 E-3

Contents - Getting Started 

ESIB 

1088.7531.12 I-2.2 E-3

ESIB 

Example - Level and Frequency Measurement 

2 Getting Started 

Chapter 2 provides a fast introduction to operation by guiding the user step by step through a 

measurement example. 

Before starting any measurement with the ESIB, please note the instructions given in chapter 1 for 

putting the instrument into operation. In chapters 3 you will find detailed information on customizing the 

instrument and the display. 

For a systematic explanation of all menus, functions and parameters and background information refer 

to the reference part in chapter 4. 

Measurement Example 

This section describes a typical and simple measurement task for an EMI test receiver. Each operating 

step is explained with the aid of ESIB for rapid familiarization of the user without the need to know all the 

details of the operating functions. 

In the introductory example a standard measurement of level and frequency is performed with the aid 

of the SCAN table. This measurement is an overview and precertification measurement to be performed 

before the final standard-conformal measurement is carried out. 

Note: ESIB is provided with 2 RF inputs. Input 1 (20 Hz to 7/26 /40 GHz) and input 2 (20 Hz to 1 

GHz). If unknown (RFI) signals are to be measured, input 2 with at least 10 dB RF attenuation 

should be given preference because of its higher pulse loading capacity. 

In the following example the test receiver is set to default values. The default setup is activated with 

PRESET in the SYSTEM section. The main default parameters are listed in the following table. 

Table 2-1 

Parameter 

Default parameters after preset 

Setting 

Mode 

EMI Receiver 

Receiver frequency 

100 MHz 

RF attenuation 

Auto 

Preamplifier 

Off 

Input Input 1 

Detector 

AV 

Measurement time 

100 ms 

RES bandwidth 

120 kHz 

Demodulator 

Off 

Trigger 

Free run 

1088.7531.12 2.1 E-3


ESIB 

Example of Level and Frequency Measurement 

Measurement 

Measurement and display of RFI signal levels versus frequency is one of the most frequent tasks 

performed by an EMI test receiver. In the case of unknown signals, PRESET values will mostly be used 

for the measurement. If levels higher than +137 dBµV (10 dB RF attenuation) are expected or possible, 

a power attenuator has to be connected in front of the test receiver input. Very high levels may 

otherwise damage or destroy the attenuator or input mixer. 

Main Test Receiver Functions 

The main functions required for the level and frequency measurement are setting the SCAN table 

(START FREQUENCY, STOP FREQUENCY, STEPSIZE), selecting the resolution (IF) bandwidth (RES 

BW), setting the measurement time (MEAS TIME) and selecting the detectors (eg peak or average) and 

MARKER functions required for the analysis. 

Measurement Sequence - Level and Frequency Measurement 

In this example the spectrum of the signal present at RF INPUT 2 is recorded in the frequency range 

150 kHz to 30 MHz. The scan table and associated parameters are manually set. 

The example is generally suitable for all fast pre-compliance measurements required for measuring 

unknown noise spectra of DUTs in the development stage and for modifying prototypes and can be 

used as a basis for final tests later on. 

The high speed of fully synthesized scans, the frequency and amplitude accuracy and the wide dynamic 

range of Test Receiver ESIB are of utmost importance and very useful for these measurements. 

The following measurement steps are performed: 

1. PRESET of instrument. 

2. Selecting EMI RECEIVER mode (in ESIB automatically selected with PRESET). 

3. Programming the scan table: stop frequency 30 MHz; input 2, 1 scan range 

4. Selecting detectors, measurement bandwidth and measurement time 

5. Applying the signal (RF input 2) 

6. Starting the scan 

7. Level analysis in the frequency domain using MARKER function 

8. Setting the SPLIT SCREEN function 

9. Tuning to the receiver frequency using the TUNE TO MARKER function and obtaining final test 

results using the QUASI PEAK detector 

10. From overview to standard-conformal measurement 

11. Storing test results, tables and diagrams 

1088.7531.12 2.2 E-3

ESIB 


SYSTEM 

PRESET 

1. Resetting the instrument and 

2. Selecting the EMI RECEIVER mode 

½ Press the PRESET key. 

In the default setup the main receiver menu is 

automatically opened. The receiver mode is set. 

The EMI RECEIVER menu is the starting point for 

all subsequent settings. 

The following screen is displayed: 

EMI 

RECEIVER 


FREQUENCY 

USER 

ATTEN 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

RES BW 

DETECTOR 

MEAS TIME 

DEMOD 

SPLIT SCRN 

ON OFF 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

RUN 

SCAN 

Fig.2-1 

Display after selecting default setup with PRESET 

1088.7531.12 2.3 E-3


ESIB 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

3. Programming a SCAN table 

½ Press the DEFINE SCAN key. 

A menu is displayed where the whole display range 

can be defined and divided into scan subranges. 

After PRESET a scan range of 150 kHz to 1 GHz is 

set on the frequency axis. The SCAN table is 

automatically activated. 

Now the stop frequency is set to 30 MHz. 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

USER 

SCAN 

SCAN TABLE 

Start 

Stop 

Step 

150 kHz 

1 GHz 

LIN Auto 

Max Level 

Min Level 

Frequency Axis LOG 

100 dBµV 

0 dBµV 

ADJUST 

AXIS 

SINGLE 

SCAN 

CONTINUOUS 

SCAN 

RANGE 1 

Start 150.000 kHz 

Stop 

30 MHz 

Step Size 4 kHz 

RES BW 9 kHz 

Meas Time 1 ms 

Auto Ranging OFF 

RF Attn 10 dB 

Preamp OFF 

Auto Preamp OFF 

Input INPUT 1 

RANGE 2 RANGE 3 RANGE 4 RANGE 5 

30 MHz 

1 GHz 

40 kHz 

120 kHz 

100 µs 

OFF 

10 dB 

OFF 

OFF 

INPUT 1 

SCAN RANGES 

SCAN 

RANGES 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

RANGES 

1-5 6-10 

RUN 

SCAN 

Fig.2-2 Scan range after selecting default setup with PRESET 

: 


½ Press the DOWN cursor key in the DATA 

VARIATION field. 

The set stop frequency is marked. 

1088.7531.12 2.4 E-3

ESIB 


DATA ENTRY 

3 

0 

dBm 

mV MHz 

ms 

STOP FREQUENCY 

30 MHz 

½ Press 3 + 0 on the numeric keypad and terminate 

the entry by pressing MHz. 

The new value for the stop frequency is entered in 

the table. 

Input 2 should now be selected. 

SCAN 

RANGES 

½ Press the SCAN RANGES softkey. 

The SCAN RANGES table is activated and the set 

start frequency is marked in the RANGE 1 column. 


½ Press the DOWN cursor in the DATA VARIATION 

field repeatedly until the INPUT line is marked. 

DATA ENTRY 

INPUT 

dBm 

mV MHz 

INPUT 1 

ms 

INPUT 2 

½ Press one of the unit keys, eg MHz. 

The input selection table is opened. 


½ Press the DOWN cursor key in the DATA 


INPUT 2 is marked. 

DATA ENTRY 

dBm 

mV MHz 

ms 


The selection table is closed and INPUT 2 is 

displayed in the SCAN RANGES table. 

Only one scan range is defined in the example. For 

this reason the second subrange (column 

RANGE 2) should be cleared. 


½ Press the RIGHT cursor key in the DATA 


An entry in the RANGE 2 column is marked. 

1088.7531.12 2.5 E-3


ESIB 

DELETE 

RANGE 

½ Press the DELETE RANGE softkey. 

All entries in column RANGE 2 are cleared. 

The following scan table is now displayed: 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

USER 

SCAN 

SCAN TABLE 

Start 

Stop 

Step 

150 kHz 

30 MHz 

LIN Auto 

Max Level 

Min Level 

Frequency Axis LOG 

100 dBµV 

0 dBµV 

ADJUST 

AXIS 

SINGLE 

SCAN 

CONTINUOUS 

SCAN 

RANGE 1 


Stop 

30 MHz 


RES BW 9 kHz 



RF Attn 10 dB 

Preamp OFF 


Input INPUT 2 

SCAN RANGES 


SCAN 

RANGES 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

RANGES 

1-5 6-10 

RUN 

SCAN 

Fig.2-3 Modified SCAN table for preparing a SCAN 

After editing the scan subrange, the frequency 

display has to be adapted to the new settings. The 

lowest START frequency of SCAN range 1 and the 

highest STOP frequency of the subsequently 

defined subranges are used for defining the start 

and stop frequencies of the graphics display. In the 

example the limit frequencies of SCAN RANGE 1 

are therefore also the limits of the graphics display. 

ADJUST 

AXIS 

½ Press the ADJUST AXIS softkey. 

The respective frequency values in the table are 

transferred to adapt the display. 

MENU 

½ Press the key in the MENU field. 

The SCAN RANGES submenu is closed. 

1088.7531.12 2.6 E-3

ESIB 


4. Selecting detectors, measurement bandwidth 

and measurement time 

Up to four detectors can be connected in parallel to 

simultaneously display the amplitude at every frequency 

as a function of detector weighting. When a parallel 

detector is selected, the slowest detector (in the sense 

of a calibrated measurement) determines the speed or 

the total measurement time required for the scan. The 

fastest scan is performed when the peak detector is 

used as the sole detector. 

In the example, the peak detector (trace 1) and the 

average detector (trace 2; default) are used in an 

overview measurement. 

TRACE 

½ Press the 1 key in the TRACE key field. 

1 

SCAN 

COUNT 

DETECTOR 

The TRACE1 menu is opened where the detector for 

the selected trace can be selected. 

COPY 

DETECTOR 

TRACE1 

DETECTOR 

PEAK 

QUASIPEAK 

USER 

½ Press the DETECTOR softkey. 

The TRACE1 DETECTOR menu is opened where 

different detectors, eg PEAK, QUASIPEAK, 

AVERAGE and RMS, can be selected for trace 1. 

AVERAGE 

RMS 

The peak detector is selected. 

PEAK 

½ Press the PEAK softkey. 

The level (LEVEL) for two detectors is displayed 

numerically and on two bargraphs. 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

½ Press the MODE key in the CONFIGURATION key 

field. 

The EMI RECEIVER main menu opens. 

A measurement bandwidth of 9 kHz should now be 

set. 

1088.7531.12 2.7 E-3


ESIB 

RES BW 

120 kHz 

RES BW 

½ Press the RES BW softkey. 

A window with the currently set resolution bandwidth 

is opened (120 kHz in the example). 

DATA ENTRY 

9 

dB 

µV kHz 

ns 

RES BW 

9 kHz 

½ Press 9 on the numeric keypad and terminate the 

entry by pressing kHz. 

The new value for the resolution bandwidth is 

displayed. 

A measurement time of 1 kHz should be set. 

MEAS TIME 

MEAS TIME 

100 ms 

½ Press the MEAS TIME softkey. 

A window with the currently set measurement time 

is opened (100 ms in the example). 

1 

DATA ENTRY 

dBm 

mV MHz 

ms 

MEAS TIME 

1 ms 

½ Press 1 on the numeric keypad and terminate the 

entry by pressing MHz. 

The new value for the measurement time is 

displayed. 

5. Applying the signal 

½ Connect RF cable to input 2. 

RUN 

SCAN 

6. Starting the scan 

½ Press the RUN SCAN softkey. 

The measurement with the selected PEAK and 

AVERAGE detectors is continuously repeated 

because the default setting CONTINUOUS SCAN 

remains unchanged. 

At the same time the HOLD SCAN and STOP 

SCAN softkeys are displayed with the aid of which 

the scan can be interrupted (HOLD SCAN) or 

aborted (STOP SCAN). 

In the example the scan should be aborted. 

1088.7531.12 2.8 E-3

ESIB 


STOP 

SCAN 

½ Press the STOP SCAN softkey. 

The measurement is aborted. 

Peak and average results (see Fig.2-4 should be 

further analyzed with the aid of the built-in marker 

functions. 

Depending on the DUT, diverse trace forms are 

obtained. For this reason the diagram below should 

be regarded as an example. 




FREQUENCY 

USER 

ATTEN 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

RES BW 

DETECTOR 

MEAS TIME 

DEMOD 

SPLIT SCRN 

ON OFF 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

RUN 

SCAN 

Fig.2-4 

Result display of standard pre-compliance measurement using 

peak/average detector 

1088.7531.12 2.9 E-3


ESIB 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

7. Level analysis in frequency domain using 

MARKER functions 

½ Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER field. 

Measured values can be read in the marker field at 

the screen top. 


½ Move the marker on the trace with the aid of the 

spinwheel. 

The respective level and frequency values are 

displayed in the marker field. 

or with 

PEAK search functions 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

USER 

½ Press the SEARCH key in the MARKER field. 

The MARKER SEARCH menu is opened. 

PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

N 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

O 

PEAK 

½ Press the PEAK softkey. 

The marker is positioned at the maximum level in 

the display. 

NEXT PEAK 

½ Press the NEXT PEAK softkey. 

The marker moves to the next lower level in the 

spectrum irrespective of whether the frequency is 

higher or lower than that of the previously measured 

PEAK value. 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

½ Press the NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey. 

The marker is displayed on the next level at a higher 

frequency (see Fig.2-5). 

The displayed spectrum can be further analyzed 

with the aid of up to four markers. The markers can 

be assigned to different traces. 

1088.7531.12 2.10 E-3

ESIB 


MARKER 

SEARCH 

USER 

PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

NEXT PEAK 

LEFT 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

MARKER 

TRACK 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

SEARCH LIM 

ON OFF 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MRK DELTA 

Fig.2-5 

Screen display with marker 

8. Setting the SPLIT SCREEN function 

The SPLIT SCREEN function simplifies the analysis 

of measured data, particularly at critical frequencies. 

In the split-screen mode, the frequency, eg that of 

the active marker, and the level of the active 

detectors are displayed in the upper half of the 

screen numerically and on a bargraph. 

SYSTEM 

DISPLAY 

DISPLAY 

USER 

½ Press the DISPLAY key in the SYSTEM field. 

The SYSTEM DISPLAY menu is opened. 

FULL 

SCREEN 

SPLIT 

SCREEN 

SPLIT 

SCREEN 

½ Press the SPLIT SCREEN softkey. 

Two windows are displayed on the screen. 

1088.7531.12 2.11 E-3


ESIB 

9. Tuning the receiver frequency and obtaining 

final test results using the QUASI-PEAK detector 

The currently measured frequency can be rapidly 

changed eg with the TUNE TO MARKER softkey in 

the MARKER NORMAL menu. Other or additional 

detectors can be switched on at this receive 

frequency and an overview of levels of all active 

detectors is given. For measurements to standard, 

the measurement time must first be set to 1 s. 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

½ Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER field. 

Marker 1 is displayed. Frequency and level values 

can be read in the marker field at the top left of the 

screen. 

MARKER 

MKR 

MARKER -> 

USER 

½ Press the MKR→ key in the MARKER field. 

The MARKER → menu is opened. 

PEAK 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

½ Press the TUNE TO MARKER softkey. 

The current receive frequency is tuned to the 

marker frequency. 

A measurement time of 1 s must be set for 

measurements to standard. 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

½ Press the MODE key in the CONFIGURATION field. 

The EMI RECEIVER menu is opened. 

MEAS TIME 

MEAS TIME 

1 ms 

½ Press the MEAS TIME softkey. 

The window with the currently set measurement 

time is opened (1 ms in the example). 

1088.7531.12 2.12 E-3

ESIB 


DATA ENTRY 

1 

-dBm 

V GHz 

s 

1 s 

MEAS TIME 

½ Enter 1 on the numeric keypad (DATA ENTRY) and 

terminate by pressing s. 

The new measurement time is displayed. 

The quasi-peak detector should now be switched on 

in addition. 

DETECTOR 

USER 

DETECTOR 

PEAK 

QUASIPEAK 

AVERAGE 

½ Press the DETECTOR softkey. 

The DETECTOR menu is opened. The peak and 

average detectors of the pre-compliance 

measurement are active. 

RMS 

QUASIPEAK 

½ Press the QUASI-PEAK softkey. 

The LEVEL at the current receive frequency is 

displayed for three detectors numerically and on 

three bargraphs (see Fig.2-6). 

DETECTOR 

USER 

MAX PEAK 

QUASIPEAK 

AVERAGE 

RMS 

MIN PEAK 

FINAL 

MAX PEAK 

FINAL 

QUASIPEAK 

FINAL 

AVERAGE 

FINAL 

RMS 

FINAL 

MIN PEAK 

Fig.2-6 Analysis of single frequencies with standard measurement time and several detectors 

1088.7531.12 2.13 E-3


ESIB 

10. From overview to standard-conformal 

measurement 

Data reduction and automatic routines for final 

measurement 

The ESIB offers several data reduction methods for 

interactive or automatic final measurements. 

The methods are described in Chapter 4, Section 

"Data Reduction and Subrange Maxima". 

Limit lines 

A final measurement to standard can be performed 

when active limit lines are displayed in the diagram 

during the described analysis and measurements 

are repeated at all critical frequencies using the 

standard measurement time and a corresponding 

detector. 

The use and setting of limit lines is described in 

Chapter 4, Section "Limit Lines - LIMIT Key". 

Transducer 

Care should be taken that the correction values or 

transducer factors available in tabular form are 

considered in the measurement result when 

accessories with frequency-dependent 

characteristics are used. Several correction tables 

can be combined to form a transducer set. 

The use and entry of transducer tables is described 

in Chapter 4, Section "Using Transducers". 

11. Storing test results, tables or diagrams on 

floppy 

In the example, test results are stored on a floppy. 

Measured data are output to a file type *.wmf for use 

in other applications. 

DEVICE1 and output to a file type *.wmf is 

automatically selected with PRESET. 

The display elements are now selected. 

HARDCOPY 

SETTINGS 

½ Press the SETTINGS key in the HARDCOPY field. 

The HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu is opened. 

1088.7531.12 2.14 E-3

ESIB 


COPY 

SCREEN 

½ Press the COPY SCREEN softkey. 

The output of the whole screen content to a file is 

selected. 

½ Insert a floppy into the floppy disk drive. 

HARDCOPY 

START 

½ Press the START key in the HARDCOPY field. 

The output is started. A window is displayed where 

the file name and the path must be entered using 

the built-in auxiliary line editor or the external 

keyboard, eg 

A:\ display.wmf. 

DATA ENTRY 

dBm 

mV MHz 

ms 


The screen content is stored on the floppy under the 

specified file name. 

During storing the softkeys are blanked. Operation 

in the menus can be continued when the softkeys 

are displayed again. 

The file can be used in other Windows applications, 

ie it can be linked. 

Fig. 2-7 gives an example of a stored display. In the 

example, two limit lines are active and four markers 

positioned in the spectrum. 

1088.7531.12 2.15 E-3


ESIB 

marker info 

HARDCOPY 

SETTING 

COPY 

SCREEN 

USER 

COPY 

TRACE 

COPY 

TABLE 

limit 

lines 

marker 

SELECT 

QUADRANT 

ENTER 

TEXT 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

COLOR 

ON OFF 

TRC COLOR 

AUTO INC 

Fig. 2-7 Result display stored in a file in WMF format 

Note: 

A detailed description of the file management for complete receiver setups, data records for 

traces (traces 1-4), limit lines and transducer is given in in Chapter 4, Section 

"Management of Data Files". 

1088.7531.12 2.16 E-3

ESIB 

Contents - Manual Operation 

Contents - Chapter 3 "Manual Operation" 

3 Manual Operation ................................................................................................ 3.1 

The Screen........................................................................................................................................ 3.2 

Diagram Area .......................................................................................................................... 3.3 

Displays in the Diagram Area........................................................................................ 3.4 

Full Screen............................................................................................................................... 3.9 

Split Screen ............................................................................................................................. 3.9 

Softkey Area .......................................................................................................................... 3.11 

Changing the Menu ...............................................................................................................3.12 

Setting the Parameters.................................................................................................................. 3.14 

Data Entry.............................................................................................................................. 3.14 

Numeric Keypad on the Front Panel ........................................................................... 3.14 

Roll-key and Cursor Keys............................................................................................ 3.15 

Entry Windows....................................................................................................................... 3.16 

Setting Up the Entry Window ...................................................................................... 3.16 

Editing of Numeric Parameters ................................................................................... 3.17 

Editing of Alphanumeric Parameters........................................................................... 3.18 

Help Line Editor ........................................................................................................... 3.18 

Table Entry ............................................................................................................................ 3.19 

Shifting Mode............................................................................................................... 3.19 

Editing Mode................................................................................................................ 3.19 

Disabling the Control Elements - HOLD Key .............................................................................. 3.20 

Setting the Stepsize - STEP Key................................................................................................... 3.21 

Mouse and External Keyboard Control ....................................................................................... 3.22 

External Keyboard Control..................................................................................................... 3.22 

Data Entry Windows with Mouse Control .............................................................................. 3.23 

Mouse Control of Further Display Elements.......................................................................... 3.24 

Menu Overview .............................................................................................................................. 3.25 

System Key Group................................................................................................................. 3.25 

Configuration Key Group ....................................................................................................... 3.27 

Hardcopy Key Group ............................................................................................................. 3.31 

Frequency Key Group............................................................................................................ 3.32 

Level Key Group, Input Key................................................................................................... 3.34 

Marker Key Group ................................................................................................................. 3.36 

Lines Key Group .................................................................................................................... 3.40 

Trace Key Group ................................................................................................................... 3.41 

Sweep Key Group.................................................................................................................. 3.42 

Memory Key Group................................................................................................................3.45 

User Key................................................................................................................................ 3.47 

1088.7531.12 I-3.1 E-13

Contents - Manual Operation 

ESIB 

1088.7531.12 I-3.2 E-13

ESIB 

Manual Operation 

3 Manual Operation 

Chapter 3 verviews manual operation of the ESIB. This includes a description of the screen, menu 

operation and the setting of parameters. There is an overview of the menus at the end of this chapter. 

The functions of the menus are described in detail in Chapter 4. Chapter 2 contains a short introduction 

which goes through simple measurements step-by-step. The remote control is described in Chapters 5, 

6 and 7. 

The ESIB is menu-controlled via keys and softkeys. Instrument parameters and test parameters can be 

set directly via softkeys or by entering values in entry fields and by making selections from tables. 

Softkey are used to select operating modes and the screen mode. 

If required, data entry windows and tables also be displayed on the measurement screen. 

After switching on the instrument a message about the BIOS version installed is displayed for a few 

seconds (e.g. "Analyzer BIOS Rev. 1.2"). 

The results of the self test is displayed next. 

MAINPROCESSOR 

SELFTEST STARTING ... 

TESTING CMOS ... 

DMA CHANNEL ... 

INTERRUPTS ... 

NMI ... 

BASE MEMORY ... 

EXTENDED MEMORY ... 

HD CAPACITY ... 

INIT FLOPPY DRIVE ... 

INIT HD ... 

SELFTEST DONE, 

SYSTEM IS BOOTING ... 

Subsequently, the Windows NT controller boots and the instrument then starts measuring. The type of 

measurement which was activated prior to last switch-off is performed, as long as no other instrument 

configuration was selected via AUTO RECALL in the MEMORY RECALL menu. While the 

measurement is being performed other menus and measuring modes can be entered simultaneously. 

The measurement results and the settings of the parameters are displayed on the screen. 

1088.7531.12 3.1 E-13

Screen 

ESIB 

The Screen 

The screen informs continuously on the results and parameters for the selected measuring functions. 

The display mode for test results, the softkey labeling and the type of menu depend on the selected 

measuring function. 

The screen is divided into two areas: 

diagram area 

softkey area 

DET MA/QP/AV Trd 

Att 0 dB 

RES BW 120 kHz 

INPUT 2 Meas T 100 ms Unit dBuV 

FREQUENCY 

LEVEL PK+ 

QPK 

AV 

1.0000000 GHz 

17.05 dB µ V 

12.62 dB µ V 

5.89 dB µ V 




FREQUENCY 

ATTEN 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

RES BW 

USER 

Marker [T1] 

30.23 dB V/m 

161.45000000 MHz 

SCAN RANGES 

DETECTOR 

MEAS TIME 

DEMOD 

SPLIT SCR 

ON OFF 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

RUN 

SCAN 

Fig. 3-1 

Basic screen areas 

Diagram area 

Softkey area 

This area contains the measuring diagrams and other result displays as well 

as the parameters and status information which are important for analyzing 

the results. 

Message fields, entry windows and tables may also be shown in this area. 

This area displays the instrument functions which can be selected via the 

softkeys. No other images are superimposed on the softkey area. 

1088.7531.12 3.2 E-13

ESIB 

Screen 

Diagram Area 

Status 

Marker /deltamarker 

Hardware settings 

ER 

Logo 

Reference-/ 

max level 

Entry window 

-10.0 

R UNCAL OVLD 

S Ref Lvl 

-20 dBm 

0 

START FREQUENCY 

1.000000 MHz 

Marker 1 [T1 CNT] 

-36.42 dBm 

100.002 MHz 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

1 MHz 

1 MHz 

5 ms 

RF Att 

Mixer 

Unit 

20 dB 

-40 dBm 

dBυV 

* 

A 

Message field 

-20.0 

-30.0 

-40.0 

-50.0 

WARNING 

Hardcopy not completed. 

Stop printer? 

YES 

NO 

LVL 

FRQ 

1-R 

2-R 

3-R 

4-R 

GAT 

TRG 

Instrument settings 

(enhancement 

labels) 

Table 

Level scale 

labelling 

Frequency scale 

or time scale 

labelling 

-60.0 

-70.0 

-80.0 

-90.0 

-10.0 

0 

Interface 

Owner 

MOUSE 

PS/2 

Instrument 

Center 100.0 MHz 

Span 50.0 MHz 

75Ω 

MAC 

Grid 

Fig. 3-2 

Screen areas in analyzer mode 

Display line 

(frequency line) 

Display line 

(frequency line) 

D1 

Limit lines 

Display lines 

(level lines) 

L1 

L2 

L3 

D2 

2 

Marker 

3 

Deltamarker 

Trace 

F1 

F2 

Fig. 3-3 

Measuring diagram 

1088.7531.12 3.3 E-13

Screen 

ESIB 

Displays in the Diagram Area 

The following graphic elements are displayed in the diagram area: 

Status information 

A status information indicates that a problem has occurred. 

In addition the status display displays MAX / REF LVL, if the maximum 

level and the reference level have different values (analyzer mode). 

UNCAL "UNCAL" is displayed under the following circumstances: 

• no valid correction data (Status CALIBRATION FAILED in 

table CAL RESULTS), may occur after a cold start 

following a firmware update 

⇒ record correction data (CAL TOTAL) 

• correction data are switched off (menu CAL, CAL CORR 

OFF). 

⇒ switch on CAL CORR ON or PRESET 

• Sweep time too short for current instrument settings 

(span, resolution bandwidth, video band width), (analyzer 

mode). 

⇒ increase sweep time 

• resolution bandwidth too small for set symbol rate (Vector 

Anaylsis, option FSE-B7: digital demodulation) . 

⇒ increase resolution bandwidth 

OVLD 

IFOVLD 

DIFOVL 

ExtRef 

LO unl 

LO Lvl 

LO LvD 

OCXO 

UNLD 

„Overload“ is displayed when the input mixer is overloaded 

⇒ Increase input attenuation 

„IF Overload“ is displayed when an overload occurs after the 

input mixer. 


„Digital IF Overload“ is displayed when the digital resolution 

filter is overloaded. 


„External Reference“ is displayed when the instrument is set 

to REFERENCE EXT (menu SETUP), but the reference 

signal is missing at the rear panel connector. 

⇒ Ceck input signal of external reference 

„LO unlock“ is indicated when the 1st LO is unlocked 

(module error). 

„LO Level“ is displayed when the output level of the 1st LO 

is too small (module error). 

„LO Level Digital IF“ is displayed when the output level of 

the oscillator of module Digital IF is too small (module 

error). 

'OCXO cold' is indicated when the crystal oscillator has not 

yet reached ist operating temperature. This indication 

vanishes after a few minutes after switch on. 

'Underload' is displayed when the analyzer is not in its 

optimal dynamic range. In this case the measuring accuracy 

is not optimal. This indication is only output in vector 

analyzer operating mode (option FSE-B7). 

⇒ Decrease reference level 

1088.7531.12 3.4 E-13

ESIB 

Screen 

Marker/Deltamarker 

This label displays the position of the last selected marker or 

deltamarker in the x and y-directions and the marker/deltamarker index. 

As additional information, 2 fields in square brackets are provided which 

contain the curve which the marker is assigned to and the active 

measuring function of the marker indicated. The measuring function of 

the markers in the second field is indicated by the following 

abbreviations: 

CNT frequency counter active 

TRK signal track active 

NOI noise measurement active 

The marker text has the same color as the trace which the marker is 

assigned to. If, for example, the active marker is assigned to trace 1, 

and trace 1 is yellow, the marker text will be yellow, too. 

Hardware settings 

EMI Receiver mode 

RBW 

Det 

Meas T 

Trd 

Unit 

Indication of the set resolutíon bandwidth 

Indication of the set detectors 

Indication of the set measurement time 

Indication of the active transducer factors or sets 

Indication of unit of measurement results 

Analyzer mode 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

RF Att 

Mixer 

Unit 

Display of the set resolution bandwidth. 

Display of the set video bandwidth. 

Display of the set sweep time. 

Display of the set RF attenuation. 

Display of the user set level at the input mixer (only when level differs 

from standard settings) ( = level of the reference level REF LVL). 

Display of the level unit of the measuring results and the associated 

setting and test parameters in full length. This label is particularly 

important for selection of units with more than 4 digits, since they can 

only be indicated as dB* in the other labels (except for marker). 

Tracking generator mode 

TG Lvl 

Only available with one of the options FSE-B10/11 

Indication of the set output level of the tracking generator 

Vector Analyzer mode 

CF 

SR 

Demod 

Standard 

Only available with option FSE-B7 

Display of the set center frequency 

Display of the symbol rate 

Display of the switched on demodulator. 

Display of the set standard (e.g. GSM) 

Grid 

X-axis: frequency or time, 

Y-axis: level 

1088.7531.12 3.5 E-13

Screen 

ESIB 


(Enhancement Labels) 

Display of user instrument settings which influence the measuring result 

and which are not immediately obvious when viewing the measured 

values. 

The current instrument setting is not the same as the setting selected 

* 

when one of the traces was stored. This occurs under the following 

circumstances: 

• The instrument setting is modified while a sweep is being performed. 

• The instrument setting is modified in SINGLE SWEEP mode after the 

end of the sweep and no new sweep is started. 

• The instrument setting is modified after setting the trace to VIEW. 

The display will not change until the cause is eliminated by the user. I.e., 

either a new sweep is started (SINGLE SWEEP mode), or the trace in 

question is switched to BLANK (all cases). 

A 

B 

C 

D 

LN 

LD 

Identification for screen A. Screen A is activated for the entry of test 

parameters. 

Identification for screen B. Screen B is activated for the entry of test 

parameters. 

If, in the Vector Analyzer (Option FSE-B7) mode, the inphase and 

quadrature signal is displayed in the measurement window A, the 

window is subdivided into two diagrams. The upper diagram is marked 

with an A and the bottom one with C. 

If, in the Vector Analyzer (Option FSE-B7) mode, the inphase and 

quadrature signal is displayed in the measurement window B, the 

window is subdivided into two diagrams. The upper diagram is marked 

with an B and the bottom one with D. 

The automatic setting of the input attenuation is set to ATTEN LOW 

NOISE in analyzer mode (analyzer mode). 

The automatic setting of the input attenuation is set to ATTEN LOW 

DISTORTION (analyzer mode). in analyzer mode 

P0 

P20 

IN1 

I2A 

I2D 

NOR 

APP 

TDF 

TDS 

LVL 

RF preselection and 0 dB preamplification is switched on. 

RF preselection and 20 dB preamplification is switched on. 

RF input 1 is switched on. 

RF input 2 with AC coupling is switched on. 

RF input 2 with DC coupling is switched on. 

Normalization is activated; high accuracy (only with one of the options 

FSE-B10/11). 

Normalization is activated; medium accuracy (only with one of the 

options FSE-B10/11) 

An antenna correction factor (TRANSDUCER FACTOR) is switched on. 

A set of antenna correction factors (TRANSDUCER SETS) is switched 

on. 

A level offset ≠ 0 dB has been set. A level offset of the installed tracking 

generator (option) leads to the same display. 

1088.7531.12 3.6 E-13

ESIB 

Screen 

FRQ 

SGL 

A frequency offset ≠ 0 Hz has been set. 

The scan/sweep is set to SINGLE SCAN or SINGLE SWEEP. 

1- 

2- 

3- 

4- 

AP 

MA 

MI 

SA 

AV 

RM 

QP 

AC 

GAT 

TRG 

EXT 

Subtraction Trace 1 - Trace active (: numeric value) or 

subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (: R) 







For trace (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to AUTOPEAK. 

For trace (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to MAX PEAK. 

For trace (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to MIN PEAK. 

For trace (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to SAMPLE. 

For trace (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to AVERAGE. 

For trace (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to RMS. 

For trace (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to QUASIPEAK. 

For trace (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to AC VIDEO (ESIB-B1) 

The frequency sweep is controlled via the EXT TRIG/GATE connector. 

The instrument is not triggered in FREE RUN mode. 

The unit is configured for operation with external reference 

75 Ω The input impedance of the unit is set to 75 Ω. 

MAC 

PRN 

VIEW 

AVG 

MIX 

SID 

AID 

Macro recording active. 

A printout is taking place. PRN overwrites the enhancement label 

MAC. 

Trace (n = 1 to 4) is set to VIEW 

Trace (n = 1 to 4) is set AVERAGE 

The external mixer output is switched on (option FSE-B21). 

External mixer output: SIGNAL ID is switched on (option FSE-B21). 

External mixer output: AUTO ID is switched on (option FSE-B21). 

1088.7531.12 3.7 E-13

Screen 

ESIB 

Frequency axis labeling 

Display of the x-scaling. 

123.4 ms/Div 

Center 1.2345678901234 GHz 

Start 1.2345678901234 GHz 

Span 1.2345678901234 GHz 

Stop 1.2345678901234 GHz 

Trigger 1.234 ms 

Optional labeling 

The distance between two grid lines is displayed in this label. 

The set center frequency or start frequency is displayed in this label 

depending on whether the keys CENTER/SPAN or START/STOP were 

last pressed. 

If span = 0 Hz, the center frequency is always displayed. 

The set frequency range (SPAN) or the stop frequency is displayed, 

depending on whether the keys CENTER/SPAN or START/STOP 

were last pressed. 

If span = 0 Hz, the trigger moment (PRETRIGGER) is displayed. 

Optional indication of date, time and comment. 

14.Jun 97 12:13 

Level axis labeling 

Display of the y-scaling. 

Entry window 

The data entry window is superimposed in the diagram area, if 

required. 

Reference level/ Max. 

level 

Input/RFattenuation 

Att 

Auto 

Preamp 

Input 

Display of the set reference level or combined display of maximum 

level and reference level in analyzer mode. 

Indication of set RF attenuation. 

Auto range function is active. 

Preamplifier is switched on. 

Indication of the selected input (n = 1, 2) 

Limit lines 

Limit lines are are the upper and/or lower limits for level curves or 

spectral distributions. 

Traces 1 to 4 

Up to 4 traces can be displayed simultaneously. 

Display lines 

Utilities for trace analysis. 

The ESIB provides two display modes: 

• Full Screen: 

1 window, all traces are displayed in one screen. 

• Split Screen: 

2 windows, traces, grid and labels are distributed on the two screens. 

1088.7531.12 3.8 E-13

ESIB 

Screen 

Full Screen 

In the full-screen mode,, the settings and measurements are performed in the active visible window. All 

indications on the screen refer to this window. The designation (SCREEN A or SCREEN B) is inserted 

as enhancement label A or B on the right diagram margin. 

The DISPLAY key is used to switch between the windows. The current measurement is terminated 

when its window goes blank. 

Switching from split-screen to full-screen mode is performed in menu SYSTEM DISPLAY. 

Split Screen 

In the Split Screen mode, the screen is divided into two halves. 

USER 

-20.0 

-40.0 

Ref Lvl 

-20 dBm 


-36.42 dBm 

100.002 MHz 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

1 MHz 

1 MHz 

5 ms 

RF Att 20 dB 

Mixer -40 dBm 

Unit dBm 

A 

SOFTKEY 1 

-60.0 

SOFTKEY 2 

-80.0 

-100.0 

-120.0 

-20.0 

-40.0 

-60.0 

-80.0 

-100.0 

Center 100.0 MHz 5 MHz/ Span 50.0 MHz 

Ref Lvl 

-20 dBm 


-36.42 dBm 

100.002 MHz 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

1 MHz 

1 MHz 

5 ms 

RF Att 20 dB 

Mixer -40 dBm 

Unit dBm 

SOFTKEY 3 

SOFTKEY 4 

SOFTKEY 5 

SOFTKEY 6 

SOFTKEY 7 

SOFTKEY 8 

SOFTKEY 9 

-120.0 

Center 100.0 MHz 5 MHz/ Span 50.0 MHz 

SOFTKEY 10 

Fig. 3-4 

Split Screen mode 

In the default receiver mode, the screen is divided up according to fixed configurations. 

Table 3-1 Default assignment of traces to windows with split screen in the receiver mode 

upper (screen A) Indication of level and frequency Zoomed scan 

lower (screen B) Scan spectrum Scan spectrum 

However, a selection can be made in the upper half of the screen (SCREEN A) between bargraph 

display of the receiver mode and the spectrum analyzer mode. 

With spectrum analyzer selected, the scan display in the lower half of the screen remains unchanged 

and the spectrum analyzer with all its measurement functions is available in the upper screen half (see 

Chapter 4, Section ’Display Configuration’). 

1088.7531.12 3.9 E-13

Screen 

ESIB 

In analyzer mode, the upper half is always assigned to Screen A, the lower to Screen B. The 

measurement settings can be selected independently for both screens. E.g., a spectrum may be 

displayed in Screen A and a time amplitude in the time range is displayed in Screen B. The window for 

entry of the measuring parameters or the marker operation is selected using the DISPLAY key. 

The indications which apply only to one window appear in the margin of the associated diagram. 

Indications which apply to the two windows are displayed between the diagrams. 

The assignment of traces to the windows is fixed and cannot be modified. 

Table 3-2 Assignment of traces to windows with split screen in the signal or vector analyzer mode 

Trace 1: upper (screen A) Trace 3: upper (screen A) 

Trace 2: lower (screen B) Trace 4: lower (screen B) 

The two windows can be subdivided into two measurement diagrams. This applies to separate display 

of measurement values, eg to the display of the inphase and quadrature signal in vector analysis. 

Screen A is divided into diagrams A and C, screen B is divided in diagrams B and D. 

1088.7531.12 3.10 E-13

ESIB 

Screen 

Softkey Area 

The layout of the softkey area is independent of the operating mode. It consists of the following graphic 

elements: 

SOFTKEY 

MENU TITLE 

Menu title 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 1 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 2 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 3 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 4 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 5 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 6 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 7 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 8 

Indication of submenu (arrow) 

Softkey active (green) 

Softkey function not available 

(without 3D frame) 

Softkey menu 

Softkey active, opens a data 

entry field (red) 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 9 

SOFTKEY 

LABEL 10 

Menu display 

Fig. 3-5 

Layout of the softkey area 

The softkeys have different functions depending on the instrument state. Therefore, their labeling 

changes. The current state of the softkeys is indicated by color coding. The color code is factory-set as 

follows: 

Table 3-3 

Factory-set color code for softkeys 

Softkey color 

gray 

green 

red 

Meaning 

Softkey off 

Softkey on 

Softkey on and data entry active 

These colors can be changed by the user as desired in the SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY 

menu. 

A softkey is switched on or off by pressing it. If a mouse is connected to the instrument, the softkey label 

on the display can be clicked. 

Softkey labels are not displayed if the function they represent is not available. There are two cases: 

• If an instrument function depends on an option, and this option is not fitted, the associated softkey 

label will not be displayed. 

• If the instrument function is not available temporarily due to specific settings, the softkey is displayed 

without the 3D frame. 

1088.7531.12 3.11 E-13

Screen 

ESIB 

Changing the Menu 

With manual control, the ESIB can be operated via the front-panel keys, the external keyboard or with a 

mouse. 

Operation is menu-controlled. Various softkey menus are displayed depending on the instrument 

status. The menus are organized using a tree structure. The start menu (the root of the menu tree) is 

always called by pressing a hardkey. The softkeys are then used to branch into further menus 

(submenus). 

Root menu 

USER 

SCREEN 

Submenu 

Supplementary 

menus 

Fig. 3-6 

Theory of menu selection 

Each softkey menu consists of max. 30 softkeys, 10 softkeys being arranged in a main menu, 10 in a 

left-hand supplementary menu and 10 in a right-hand supplementary menu. In contrast to empty main 

menus, empty supplementary menus are not displayed. Arrows at the lower edge of the softkey area 

indicate whether a supplementary menu exists or not. 

1088.7531.12 3.12 E-13

ESIB 

Screen 

Left-hand supplementary menu 

Softkey 

21 

Softkey 

22 

Softkey 

23 

Softkey 

24 

Softkey 

25 

Softkey 

26 

Softkey 

27 

Softkey 

28 

Softkey 

29 

Softkey 

30 

Main menu 

Softkey 

1 

Softkey 

2 

Softkey 

3 

Softkey 

4 

Softkey 

5 

Softkey 

6 

Softkey 

7 

Softkey 

8 

Softkey 

9 

Softkey 

10 

Right-hand supplementary menu 

Softkey 

11 

Softkey 

12 

Softkey 

13 

Softkey 

14 

Softkey 

15 

Softkey 

16 

Softkey 

17 

Softkey 

18 

Softkey 

19 

Softkey 

20 

Fig. 3-7 

Switching between main menu and supplementary menu 

The menu arrows help to orient inside the menu tree. 

Examples: 

This menu has a right-hand and a lefthand supplementary menu. It is the 

root menu since there is no ⇑ arrow. 

Only a right-hand supplementary menu or the upper menu can be accessed 

from this menu. 

MENU 

The MENU keys allow for selecting the main menu and the supplementary 

menus. If a mouse is connected to the instrument, the menu arrows can be 

selected to enter the respective menus. The MENU keys have the following 

functions: 

When this key is pressed, the ESIB enters the left-hand supplementary 

menu. 

This key is pressed to call the upper menu which is located in the next higher 

hierarchical level in the menu tree. Several menus provide for automatic 

change, i.e., return to the next higher menu is caused automatically after 

pressing a softkey. 

The right-hand supplementary menu is selected by pressing this key. 

A supplementary menu cannot be selected from another supplementary 

menu but only via the main menu. 

Submenu are always selected with a softkey. 

SOFTKEY 

The labeling of all softkeys which call a submenu includes an arrow. 

The softkeys are masked out in remote mode and during macro processing. 

1088.7531.12 3.13 E-13

Setting the Parameters 

ESIB 


Data Entry 

Instrument parameters can be entered in an entry window or in a table via the numeric keypad on the 

front panel (DATA ENTRY), an external keyboard and the roll-key. 

The numeric keypad DATA ENTRY is provided for entry of numeric parameters (e.g., the start 

frequency). The roll-key is used for fast incrementing or decrementing of numeric parameters with a 

defined step size. 

It is advisable to use the external keyboard for definition of alphanumeric parameters (e.g., file names) 

since the front panel does not allow for entry of letters. 

Numeric Keypad on the Front Panel 

The keys are assigned the following functions: 

DATA ENTRY 

0 ... 9 Number keys 

DATA ENTRY 

- 

Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. A "-" is inserted at the cursor 

position in the case of an alphanumeric parameter. 

DATA ENTRY 

. Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position in the numeric string. 

D ATA EN TRY 

-dBm 

V 

s 

GHz 

Append the selected unit to the numeric value that has been entered 

dBm 

mV 

ms 

dB 

µV 

µs 

MHz 

kHz 

The unit keys are all assigned the value "1" if quantities are indicated 

without dimensions in order to prevent faulty operations The unit keys, 

therefore, also adopt the function of an ENTER key. The same applies to 

alphanumeric entries. 

dB.. 

nV 

ns 

Hz 

1088.7531.12 3.14 E-13

ESIB 


DATA ENTRY 

EXP 

Adds an exponent (E-xx) to the end of the numeric string. 

DATA ENTRY 

BACK 

Deletes the character to the left of the cursor with numeric entry. 

Toggles between the current parameter and the previous value - but not 

when an entry is being made (UNDO function). 

DATA ENTRY 

CLR 

Closes the entry field when entry has been made. 

Aborts the entry before it has been confirmed. 

Closes the system message windows. 

Roll-key and Cursor Keys 


The roll-key has several functions. 

• With numeric entry, the instrument parameter is incremented (turning 

clockwise) or decremented (turning counterclockwise) at a defined step 

size. 

The step size may be equal to or smaller (e.g., 1/10) than the step size 

being defined for the cursor keys (see description of the STEP key). 

• In tables, the roll-key can be used to shift the cursor horizontally or 

vertically when no entry window is open. The direction (horizontal/ 

vertical) is changed with the cursor keys. 

• The roll-key is used with the help-line editor to select the individual 

letters. 

• It can be used to shift markers, display lines, limit lines etc. 

As the roll-key is turned faster, the step size increases so speeding up the 

setting procedure. 

Cursor keys: 


With numeric entry, the keys or are used to increase or decrease the 

instrument parameter by the selected step size. The keys are disabled With 

alphanumeric entry, the keys are used to toggle between the editing line 

and the help line editor. 

The keys and are used to shift the cursor to the required position 

within the (alpha)numeric editing line.. 

In tables, the cursor keys are used to shift the cursor between the lines and 

columns of the table. 

1088.7531.12 3.15 E-13


ESIB 

Entry Windows 

Setting Up the Entry Window 

The instrument parameters are not entered at the location where the parameter is displayed but in an 

individual entry window. 

The entry window is called by a softkey or a hardkey and is used for definition of numeric or 

alphanumeric instrument parameters (START FREQUENCY by way of example): 


10.2457535 GHZ 

START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE 

Fig. 3-8 Setup of an entry window 

Headline with 

parameter designation 

Editing line with 

parameter value and unit 

Status and error messages 

Subsequent to calling the entry window the current parameter value including the unit is displayed in the 

editing line. Status and error messges which refer to the current entry are displayed in the third and 

(optionally) fourth line. 

The entry window is displayed in the left upper edge of the active measuring window with the default 

setting. When a mouse is connected to the instrument, open entry windows can be shifted to any 

position on the screen provided that they do not cover the softkey line. The new position is valid until 

measuring window is selected. The data entry window is represented transparent or non-transparent, as 

required. 

Alphanumeric parameters are displayed as a simple character string in the editing line. Numeric 

parameters which consist of mantissa, exponent and unit are set up as follows: 

Mantissa 

Exponent 

Unit 

-123.456789 E-12 MHz 

Sign 

Fig. 3-9 

Mantissa: 

Exponent: 

Unit: 

Space 

Setup of numeric parameters 

The first character is the sign of the mantissa, the positive sign is not displayed. The 

actual numeric value follows. The number of digits depends on the instrument 

parameter. The cursor may be shifted to the first digit of the mantissa at maximum, 

however, it may not precede the sign. The decimal point can be set as required. 

The exponent is separated from mantissa by a space character. The sign field of the 

exponent follows the "E", the positive sign "+" being not displayed similar to the 

representation of the mantissa. The cursor skips the "E" and the sign field. Two 

characters are fixed for the exponent value. 

The unit (not represented in editing mode) is separated from the exponent by a space 

character. 

The number of digits which can be entered for each instrument parameter is limited by the width of the 

input field only, but not by the amount which is physically enabled. (Example: Levels should be indicated 

with two decimals. The user may, however, enter as many decimals as desired - the entered value is 

rounded accordingly). 

1088.7531.12 3.16 E-13

ESIB 


There are two types of entry windows: 

10.2457535 GHZ 



HARDCOPY TITLE 

BANDPASS-FILTER TEST 23A 

The editing line of the entry window for numeric 

parameters allows for display of up to 24 

characters. Horizontal scrolling is not possible in 

the editing line. 

The editing line of the entry window for 

alphanumeric parameters allows for display of up 

to 60 characters (cf. display section). Maximum 

256 characters may be entered. Horizontal 

scrolling is possible. 

Editing of Numeric Parameters 

Calling the entry window: 

• Subsequent to calling the entry window, the current value of the numeric parameter including the unit 

is displayed in inverted color. The cursor is not displayed in this state. The transparent data entry 

window has no background color. 

• The entry window is closed upon pressing the key CLR. 

Editing mode: 

• Pressing a number, sign or decimal point key causes the value and unit to be deleted. The new value 

is output left-justified. The individual characters are entered in insert mode. If the maximum amount of 

characters for the mantissa or the exponent has been entered, no further entry is possible (no 

horizontal scrolling). If characters are positioned to the right of the cursor, they are shifted right when 

reaching the maximum length and get lost. 

• Pressing the keys DATA VARIATION or causes normal representation of the current value. 

The unit is no longer displayed and the cursor precedes the first digit of the mantissa ( ) or follows 

the last digit entered ( ). The DATA VARIATION keys and change the numeric value of the 

cursor. 

• Pressing the DATA VARIATION keys or or the roll-key causes the original parameter value to 

be restored and modified according to the defined step size for this parameter. 

• The data management of the instrument stores the previous value of a parameter in addition to the 

current value. The BACK key allows for toggling between these two values. 

Termination and abortion of entry: 

• The editing mode is terminated by pressing a unit key. The validity of the new parameter value is 

checked and accepted for the instrument setting. If an error occurs, a corresponding error message is 

displayed in the status line of the editing field, e.g., "Out of range", "Value adjusted", etc. 

• Editing of a parameter can be aborted by pressing the key CLR. The original parameter is then 

displayed again. The entry window is closed by pressing the CLR key again. 

• Pressing a key or softkey subsequent to starting the entry causes the entry to be aborted and the 

entry window to be closed. If the same softkey which has opened the entry window is activated during 

entry, the original value is restored and displayed. 

1088.7531.12 3.17 E-13


ESIB 

Editing of Alphanumeric Parameters 

Generally, the regulations for numeric parameters analogously apply for alphanumeric parameters. Note 

the exceptions given below: 

• Alphanumeric parameters are not displayed with a unit. 

• The four unit keys adopt the function of the ENTER key. 

• Horizontal scrolling is possible in the editing line. 

• Incrementing or decrementing cannot be effected via the keys , or the roll-key. 

• Pressing the sign key causes a "-" character to be inserted at the cursor position, the decimal point 

key causes insertion of a point ".". 

• The exponent key has no function. 

Help Line Editor 

The help line editor allows for labelling or text entries to be made without an external keyboard being 

required. In this case, a field containing letters and special characters is added to the standard entry 

window. The help line editor is displayed automatically if no external keyboard is provided and an entry 

window for alphanumeric entry is opened. 

CALIBRATION FILE 

C:\MEASDATA\STANDARD.CAL 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÄÖÜ!?"$%/(){[]}\+*#~'-_=.: 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzäöüß,;|@µ²³^°123456789 0 

Three-line entry window 

Uppercase and 

lowercase letters, 

special characters 

and digits 

Fig. 3-10 

Help line editor 

• The keys and are used to toggle between the editing line and the help line editor. 

• The cursor can be positioned to the required character in the help line editor using the cursor keys 

and the roll-key. 

• A character is entered in the editing line by pressing any of the unit keys. 

• If the cursor is already located in the editing line, pressing a unit key terminates data entry. 

1088.7531.12 3.18 E-13

ESIB 


Table Entry 

The ESIB uses numerous tables for indication and configuration of instrument parameters. The tables 

differ very much in the number of lines, columns and inscriptions and have a different functionality. 

Tables are represented in a non-transparent form. The size is predefined and cannot be modified. If a 

mouse is connected, the tables may be shifted on the display without covering the softkeys. Tables can 

be superimposed by entry windows or suchlike. 

Tables are mostly coupled to a softkey menu which provides further functions for editing table entries, 

e.g., deletion of tables, copying lines or columns, marking of table elements, restoring of default states 

etc. Another kind of tables is exclusively used for indication of instrument parameters and cannot be 

edited. 

The definition of individual tables and the operation of particular editing functions can be looked up in the 

reference section with the description of the corresponding softkey menu. 

The basic concept of operation is, however, the same for all tables. A differentiation is made between 

shifting mode and editing mode. 

Shifting Mode 

This mode is active subsequent to opening a table. The cursor is shifted between the table elements by 

means of the cursor keys. The table element which is below the cursor is represented in inverted color. 

TRANSDUCER SET 

Name Unit 

Antenna 

Ant_Cab2 

Ant_Pre 

Ant_Cab1 

Probeset 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dBµA 

Cursor 

Fig. 3-11 

Shifting mode 

Editing Mode 

A table element which is marked by a cursor can be editied as follows: 

• by pressing one of the unit keys on the front panel or the ENTER key on the external keyboard. 

• by a double-click of the mouse on the table element. If the clicked element is not yet marked by the 

cursor, the letter is positioned on the element, additionally. 

• For numeric or alphanumeric instrument parameters, the editing operation may be started by entry of 

any number or letter on the front panel or on the external keyboard. 

The data entry window, the selection list or the toggle editor are provided for this purpose. 

After the editing operation has been terminated, the table enters the shifting mode again. The cursor is 

positioned automatically on the next table element. 

1088.7531.12 3.19 E-13

Disabling the Control Elements 

ESIB 

Disabling the Control Elements - HOLD Key 

The individual softkeys have the following functions: 

HOLD 

D A TA V AR I A T I ON 

The functions of the HOLD menu allow for disabling individual control 

elements or the complete instrument control. The LED above the HOLD 

key indicates that either the function LOCK DATA or LOCK ALL has been 

activated. The control can be enabled again by successively pressing the 

two UNLOCK softkeys in any order. 

Switching off the instrument resets control such that the instrument can be 

normally operated again after subsequent switch-on. 

UNLOCK 

After selecting the two UNLOCK softkeys, the instrument keyboard is enabled 

again. The LED above the HOLD key goes out. 

LOCK DATA 

Selection of softkey LOCK DATA causes the roll-key to be disabled in order 

to prevent a parameter from being varied by mistake. 

LOCK ALL 

Selection of LOCK ALL softkey disables the complete front panel (including 

the PRESET key and roll-key, not including the UNLOCK softkeys), the 

mouse and all keys of the external keyboard. Exit from the HOLD menu is no 

longer possible. Control is enabled again by actuating the two UNLOCK 

softkeys. 

1088.7531.12 3.20 E-13

ESIB 

Setting the Step Size 

Setting the Stepsize - STEP Key 

A number of numeric instrument parameters allow for step-by-step incrementing or decrementing the 

value in the editing line of the entry window using the keys or or the roll-key. The stepsize used 

with the cursor keys can be specified for the selected parameters in the STEP menu. 

Notes: – It is not possible to set the stepsize by all of the numeric parameters. 

– An extended STEP menu is available by some parameters. The extra functions are 

described by the respective parameter. 

– Setting the step size has no effect on the roll-key (the resolution of the roll-key is higher than 

that of the step size functuion) 

D A TA V AR I A T I ON 

The STEP key opens the STEP menu for entry of the stepsize. 

STEP 

The stepsize of an instrument parameter can only be varied when this 

parameter is edited in an entry window. 

The softkeys in the STEP menu are disabled if no instrumentnparameter is 

being varied or if the parameter being edited does not support stepsize 

variation (as is the case by all of the alphanumeric parameters. 

The key leads to exit from the STEP menu and automatic return to the 

previously active menu. 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

The softkey STEPSIZE AUTO causes the stepsize for the corresponding 

instrument parameter to be set automatically and be continuously varied with 

varying instrument settings (in accordance with other parameters). 

Example: 

The stepsize of the CENTER frequency depends on the selected span. 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

The softkey STEPSIZE NORMAL calls an entry window for definition of a 

stepsize by the user. The parameter whose stepsize is varied, is displayed in 

the headline of the entry window: 

START FREQUENCY STEPSIZE 

100 kHz 

The stepsize remains constant until a new value is entered or until the 

STEPSIZE AUTO softkey is activated. It is no longer coupled to other 

instrument parameters. 

1088.7531.12 3.21 E-13

Mouse and External Keyboard Control 

ESIB 


External Keyboard Control 

The connection of an external keyboard provides additional characters for the entry (letters and special 

characters). It is permitted to use both, front panel keys and the external keyboard, for control. 

The number, cursor and sign keys have the same effect as the corresponding front panel keys. A few 

keys of the external keyboard provide an extended functionality with entries or tables which is described 

in the following table. 

The table shows the external keyboard key combinations through which the functions of the front panel 

keys can be emulated. 

Note: 

The key combination switches between the instrument display screen 

and the controller display screen 

Table 3-3 

Front Panel Keyboard Emulation 

ESIB front panel keys 

Key assign. for 

the ext. keyboard 

ESIB front panel keys 

Key assign. for 

the ext. keyboard 

Softkeys: 

Menu select: 

Cursor control: 

Roll-key: 

SK1 

SK2 

SK3 

SK4 

SK5 

SK6 

SK7 

SK8 

SK9 

SK10 

Menu left 

Menu right 

Menu up 

Cursor left 

Cursor right 

Cursor up 

Cursor down 

Turn left 

Turn right 

F1 

F2 

F3 

F4 

F5 

F6 

F7 

F8 

F9 

F10 

CTRL ← 

CTRL → 

CTRL ↑ 

← 

→ 

↑ 

↓ 

SHIFT ↑ 

SHIFT ↓ 

Numeric keys: 0 to 9 0 to 9 

Units keys: GHz... 

MHz... 

kHz... 

Hz... 

Edit keys: Clear 

Backspace 

Misc. data entry keys: 

Exponent "Exp" 

Sign "+/-" 

Decimal point"." 

ALT-G 

ALT-M 

ALT-K 

 

 

BACK 

ALT-E 

- 

. 

Hold key: Hold SHIFT-F1 

User menu: User SHIFT-F2 

System keys: Preset 

Cal 

Display 

Info 

SHIFT-F4 

ALT-F12 

ALT-F10 

SHIFT-F5 

Configuration key group: Mode 

Setup 

Hardcopy key group: Start 

Settings 

ALT-F2 

SHIFT-F8 

SHIFT-F6 

SHIFT-F9 

Status key group : Local SHIFT-F3 

Frequency key group: Start 

Stop 

CenterCenter 

/Freq 

Span/Zoom 

Level key group: Ref/Unit 

Range 

Input 

Cal 

Marker key group : Normal 

Search 

Delta 

→ Mkr 

Lines key group : Display 

Limit 

Traces key group : 1 

2 

3 

4 

Sweep key group : -- 

-- 

-- 

Coupl./Run 

Sweep/Scan 

Trigger 

Memory key group: Config 

Save 

Recall 

Data entry key group : Step 

Letters and special characters 

Edit key 

Cursor control 

CTRL-F7 

CTRL-F8 

CTRL-F9 

CTRL-F10 

CTRL-F11 

CTRL-F12 

ALT-F11 

ALT-F12 

CTRL-F1 

CTRL-F2 

CTRL-F3 

CTRL-F4 

CTRL-F5 

CTRL-F6 

ALT-1 

ALT-2 

ALT-3 

ALT-4 

ALT-F3 

ALT-F4 

ALT-F5 

ALT-F6 

ALT-F7 

ALT-F8 

SHIFT-F10 

SHIFT-F11 

SHIFT-F12 

SHIFT-F7 

A to Z (ext.) 

a to z (ext.) 

Special 

characters (ext.) 

Delete 

Home 

End 

Page up 

Page down 

1088.7531.12 3.22 E-13

ESIB 


Data Entry Windows with Mouse Control 

With a mouse being connected, additional functions are provided in the entry windows. Therefore, 

buttons are displayed in the entry window. 

Essentially, the definitions which have been made for all types of entry window also apply for mouse 

control. However, note the following deviations: 

• The so-called close-button is displayed on the left margin of the headline. Selecting this button via the 

mouse aborts the entry and closes the entry window. This corresponds to the function of the CLR key 

with manual control. 

• In the numeric entry window, two buttons ( ) are displayed on the left margin of the editing line. 

Simply clicking the buttons causes the parameter in the editing line to be incremented or 

decremented (similar to the keys / or the roll-key with manual control). 

• The cursor can be positioned in the entry line by clicking a character using the mouse. 

• A character in the letter window of the help line editor can be selected by a single click. A double click 

copies the character from the letter window into the editing line. 

• Open entry windows can be shifted across the complete screen using the mouse; they must not, 

however, be superimposed on the softkey line. Shifting is performed by clicking the headline and 

pushing the mouse while he mouse-key is being pressed. 

Example: Numeric entry window with mouse control 

10.2457535 GHZ 



1088.7531.12 3.23 E-13


ESIB 

Mouse Control of Further Display Elements 

In analyzer mode, all display and control elements (enhancement labels, softkeys, function fields, 

display and limit lines) which can be displayed on the display screen can also be controlled by the 

mouse. Each softkey or key is assigned to a display element. 

Double-klicking an display or control element opens the corresponding softkey menu. The assignment 

of softkeys/keys to display elements is shown in the following table. 

Klicking the right mouse key call all softkey menus one after the other. 

Table 3-4 

Mouse Control of Display Elements 

Display element for mouse control. 

Assigned softkey or key 

Display field for Softkey 1 to Softkey 10 Softkey 1 to Softkey 10 

Display field for menu arrow: right/center/left 

Enhancement labels * 

PA 

PS 

UNS 

LVL 

FRQ 

1-x 

2-x 

3-x 

4-x 

TRG 

DC 

75Ω 

MAC 

Key right/center/left supplementary menu 

-- 

SETUP key 

SETUP key 

COUPLING/RUN key 

REF/UNIT key 

CENTER/FREQ key 

TRACE 1 key 

TRACE 2 key 

TRACE 3 key 

TRACE 4 key 

TRIGGER key 

INPUT key 

INPUT key 

USER key 

Status display 

UNCAL 

OVLD 

ERR 

CAL key 

REF/UNIT key 

INFO key 

Display fields above the diagram 

Ref. Level / Max 

Level 

Marker 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

RF Att 

Mixer 

Unit 

REF/UNIT key 

NORMAL key 




INPUT key 

INPUT key 

REF/UNIT key 

Display fields below the diagram 

Start 

Stop 

Center 

Span 

Trigger 

/Div 

START key 

STOP key 

CENTER/FREQ key 

SPAN/ZOOM key 

TRIGGER key 

-- 

1088.7531.12 3.24 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

Menu Overview 

System Key Group 

SYSTEM 

Receiver 

DISPLAY 

FULL 

SCREEN 

Analyzer 

DISPLAY 

FULL 

SCREEN 

PRESET 

CAL 

SPLIT 

SCREEN 

SPLIT 

SCREEN 

DISPLAY 

INFO 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN A 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN A 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN B 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN B 

SCREEN A 

BARGRAPH 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN C 

SCREEN A 

SWEEP 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN D 

RUN SCAN 

SCREEN 

COUPLING 

SCREEN 

COUPLING 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

DATAENTRY 

FIELD 

DATAENTRY 

X 

DATAENTRY 

Y 

DEFAULT 

POSITION 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

SELECT 

OBJECT 

BRIGHTNESS 

TINT 

SATURATION 

DEFAULT 

COLORS 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

TIME 

ON OFF 

DISPLAY 

COMMENT 

SCR SAVER 

ON OFF 

SCR SAVER 

TIME 

SCREEN 

COUPLING 

MODE 

COUPLED 

HORIZONTAL 

SCALING 

VERTICAL 

SCALING 

COUPLING 

CONTROL 

PREDEFINED 

COLORS 

ON 

LOGO 

OFF 

DATAENTRY 

OPAQUE 

FREQUENCY 

ON OFF 

DATAENTRY 

FIELD 

analyzer 

only 

SCREENS 

UNCOUPLED 

1088.7531.12 3.25 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

SYSTEM 

PRESET 

CAL 

CALIBRATE 

CAL SHORT 

CALIBRATE 

CAL 

RESULTS 

DISPLAY 

INFO 

CAL TOTAL 

CAL 

RES BW 

CAL LOG 

with option 

FSE-B7 only 

CAL 

LO SUPP 

CAL 

CAL 

I/Q 

I/Q 


PRESEL 

PRESEL 

PEAK 

CAL CORR 

ON OFF 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

SYSTEM 

INFO 

PRESET 

CAL 

FIRMWARE 

VERSIONS 

DISPLAY 

INFO 

HARDWARE+ 

OPTIONS 

SELFTEST 


EXECUTE 

TESTS 

SYSTEM 

MESSAGES 

OPTIONS 

STATISTIC 

STATISTIC 

ATTEN 

SWITCHES 

SYSTEM 

MESSAGES 

CLEAR 

MESSAGE 

CLEAR ALL 

MESSAGES 

. 

. 

. 

UPDATE 

MESSAGES 

1088.7531.12 3.26 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

Configuration Key Group 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

MODE 

SETUP 

ANALYZER 



TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 

with option tracking 

generator only; see below 

with option FSE-B7 only; 

see manual of option 




FREQUENCY 

ATTEN 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 



PEAK 

SEARCH 

EDIT PEAK 

LIST 

NO OF 

PEAKS 

see below 

RES BW 

PEAK 

SUBRANGES 

with option FSE-K10 only; 




GSM MS 

ANALYZER 

GSM BTS 

ANALYZER 

DETECTOR 

MEAS TIME 

DEMOD 

MARGIN 

FINAL 

MEAS TIME 

LISN 

see below 

SPLIT SCRN 

ON OFF 

AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

RUN 

SCAN 

RUN 

FINAL MEAS 

see below 

ATTEN 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

DEMOD 

DEMOD 

ON OFF 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

SCAN TABLE 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

CISPR 

RANGE A 

0 DB MIN 

ON OFF 

QUASIPEAK 

AM 

ADJUST 

AXIS 

CISPR 

RANGE B 

HOLD 

SCAN 

AUTO RANGE 

ON OFF 

AVERAGE 

FM 

SINGLE 

SCAN 

CISPR 

RANGE C 

AUTOPREAMP 

ON OFF 

RMS 

CONTINUOUS 

SCAN 

CISPR 

RANGE D 

MIN PEAK 

SCAN 

RANGES 

SCAN 

RANGES 

HOLD 

SCAN 

with option 

ESIB-B1 only 

AC VIDEO 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

STOP 

SCAN 

QP RBW 

UNCOUPLED 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

CONTINUE 

SCAN 

RANGES 

1-5 6-10 

RANGES 

1-5 6-10 

CONT AT 

REC FREQ 

RUN 

SCAN 

CONTINUE 

AT HOLD 

STOP 

SCAN 

1088.7531.12 3.27 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

MODE 

ANALYZER 






FREQUENCY 



PEAK 

SEARCH 

SETUP 

TRACKING 

GENERATOR 


generator only; see below 

ATTEN 

EDIT PEAK 

LIST 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 



PREAMP 

ON OFF 

NO OF 

PEAKS 

RES BW 

PEAK 

SUBRANGES 

DETECTOR 

MARGIN 



GSM MS 

ANALYZER 

MEAS TIME 

FINAL 

MEAS TIME 



GSM BTS 

ANALYZER 

DEMOD 

LISN 

left side menu 

see above 

SPLIT SCRN 

ON OFF 

AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

RUN 

SCAN 

RUN 

FINAL MEAS 

EDIT PEAK 

LIST 

LISN 

EDIT 

FREQUENCY 

ESH2-Z5 

ENV 4200 

INSERT 

ESH3-Z5 

DELETE 

HOLD 

FINAL MEAS 

OFF 

CONTINUE 

FINAL MEAS 

AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

SKIP 

FREQUENCY 

MEASURE 

HOLD 

FINAL MEAS 

STOP 

FINAL MEAS 

PRESCAN/FINAL 

PHASES 

PHASE N 

PHASE L1 

PHASE L2 

PHASE L3 

PE 

GROUNDED 

PRESCAN 

PHASES 

FINAL 

PHASES 

SORT BY 

FREQUENCY 

SORT BY 

DELTA LIM 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

EDIT 

PATH 

DECIM SEP 

. , 

NEW 

APPEND 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

STOP 

FINAL MEAS 

PE 

FLOATING 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

1088.7531.12 3.28 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

MODE 

ANALYZER 



TRACKING GENERATOR 


generator only 



TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 

TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

SOURCE 

ON OFF 

SOURCE 

POWER 

POWER 

OFFSET 


se manual of option 



GSM MS 

ANALYZER 

GSM BTS 

ANALYZER 

SOURCE 

CAL 

FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 

MODULATION 

MODULATION 

EXT AM 

SOURCE 

CAL 

CAL 

TRANS 

CAL REFL 

SHORT 

CAL REFL 

OPEN 

EXT FM 

NORMALIZE 

EXT ALC 

REF VALUE 

POSITION 

EXT I/Q 

REF VALUE 

RECALL 

1088.7531.12 3.29 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

TRANSDUCER 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

Analyzer only 

OPTIONS 

ENABLE NEW 

OPTION 

SETUP 

PRESELECT 

ON OFF Analyzer only 

GENERAL 

SETUP 

PRESELECT 

ON 

LISN 

OFF GPIB 

ADDRESS 

SERVICE 

INPUT 

RF 

SERVICE 

CAL GEN 

120 MHZ 

USER 

PORT A 

INPUT 

CAL 

PULSE 

25 HZ 

OPTIONS 

USER 

PORT B 

NOISE 

SOURCE 

PULSE 

100 HZ 

REFERENCE 

INT EXT 

FIRMWARE 

UPDATE 

COM 

PORT1 

REFERENCE 

ADJUST 

PULSE 

100 KHZ AB 

EXT REF 

FREQUENCY 

COM 

PORT2 

PULSE 

100 KHZ CD 

SERVICE 

MODE FSE 

ON OFF 

TIME 

GENERAL 

SETUP 

DATE 

TRANSDUCER 

TRANSDUCER 

FACTOR 

TRANSDUCER 

SET 

EDIT TRD 

FACTOR 

EDIT TRD 

SET 

NEW 

FACTOR/SET 

DELETE 

FACTOR/SET 

PAGE UP 

EDIT 

TRANSD SET 

TRANSD SET 

NAME 

TRANSD SET 

UNIT 

TRANSD SET 

RANGES 

INS ERT 

LI NE 

DELETE 

LINE 

UPDATE 

RESTORE 

EDIT TRD 

FACTOR 

TRD FACTOR 

NAME 

TRD FACTOR 

UNIT 

TRD FACTOR 

VALUES 

INSERT 

LINE 

DELETE 

LINE 

MONITOR 

CONNECTED 

KEY CLICK 

ON OFF 

LISN 

ESH2-Z5 

ENV 4200 

ESH3-Z5 

OFF 

PHASE N 

PHASE L1 

PHASE L2 

ENTER 

PASSWORD 

REFERENCE 

ADJUST 

REFERENCE 

REFERENCE 

PROG 

PAGE DOWN 

SAVE TRD 

SET 

SAVE TRD 

FACTOR 

PHASE L3 

DRAW 

TRD SET 

DRAW TRD 

FACTOR 

PE 

GROUNDED 

PAGE UP 

PE 

FLOATING 

PAGE DOWN 

1088.7531.12 3.30 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

Hardcopy Key Group 

HARDCOPY 

START 

HARDCOPY 

SETTINGS 

COPY 

SCREEN 

COPY TRACE 

SETTINGS 

COPY TABLE 

SELECT 

QUADRANT 

ENTER 

TEXT 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

SETTINGS 

DEVICE 1 

ENTER 

TEXT 

COMMENT 

SCREEN A 

COMMENT 

SCREEN B 

SELECT 

QUADRANT 

UPPER 

LEFT 

LOWER 

LEFT 

UPPER 

RIGHT 

COLOR 

ON OFF 

SETTINGS 

DEVICE 2 

LOWER 

RIGHT 

TRC COLOR 

AUTO INC 

ENABLE 

DEV1 DEV2 

TITLE 

FULL 

PAGE 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTINGS 

without softkey menu 

1088.7531.12 3.31 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

Frequency Key Group 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

--- 

Receiver 

FREQUENCY 

Analyzer 

CENTER 

CENTER 

MANUAL 

START 

STOP 

START 

FIXED 

SPAN 

FIXED 

STOP 

FIXED 

FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 

FREQ MIXER AXIS 

LIN INTERNAL LOG 

MIXER 

EXTERNAL 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

START 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

STOP 

Without function in 

receiver mode. 

Analyzer 

SPAN 

SPAN 

MANUAL 

START 

FIXED 

CENTER 

FIXED 

FREQUENCY 

ZOOM 

MOVE ZOOM 

WINDOW 

MOVE ZOOM 

START 

MOVE ZOOM 

STOP 

STOP 

FIXED 

ZOOM 

OFF 

ZERO SPAN 

FULL SPAN 

LAST SPAN 

ZOOM 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 

1088.7531.12 3.32 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

Receiver 


--- 

Analyzer 

START FREQ 

START 

MANUAL 

CENTER 

FIXED 

START 

STOP 

SPAN 

FIXED 

STOP 

FIXED 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

--- 

Receiver 

STOP FREQUENCY 

Analyzer 

STOP FREQ 

STOP 

MANUAL 

START 

FIXED 

START 

STOP 

CENTER 

FIXED 

SPAN 

FIXED 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 

1088.7531.12 3.33 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

Level Key Group, Input Key 

LEVEL 

REF/ 

UNIT 

Receiver 

UNIT 

dBµV 

dBm 

Analyzer 

REF LEVEL 

REF LEVEL 

REF LEVEL 

OFFSET 

REF LEVEL 

MAX LEVEL 

AUTO 

MAX LEVEL 

MANUAL 

RANGE 

dB µA 

GRID 

ABS REL 

dBpW 

UNIT 

dBpT 

dBµV/m 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

dBµA/m 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

dB* / MHz 

REF ATTEN LEVEL AUTO 

LOW AUTO NOISE 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

PR OBE CODE 

ON OFF 

MIXER 

LEVEL 

UNIT 

dBm 

dBmV 

dBµV 

dB µA 

dBpW 

dB* / MH 

VOLT 

AMPERE 

WATT 

PR OBE CODE 

ON OFF 

1088.7531.12 3.34 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

LEVEL 

REF/ 

UNIT 

Receiver 

LEVEL RANGE 

LOG 120 dB 

Analyzer 

LEVEL RANGE 

LOG 120 dB 

RANGE 

LOG 100 dB 

LOG 50 dB 

LOG 100 dB 

LOG 50 dB 

LOG 20 dB 

LOG 20 dB 

LOG 10 dB 

LOG 10 dB 

LOG 

MANUAL 

LOG 

MANUAL 

LINEAR/dB 

GRID 

MAX LEVEL 

GRID 

MIN LEVEL 

LINEAR/% 

GRID 

ABS REL 

Receiver 

Analyzer 

INPUT 

INPUT 

INPUT 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

INPUT 

SELECT 

0 dB MIN 

ON OFF 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

RF INPUT 

50 OHM 

AUTO RANGE 

ON OFF 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW NOISE 

RF INPUT 

75 OHM/RAM 

AUTOPREAMP 

ON OFF 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

RF INPUT 

75 OHM/RAZ 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

MIXER 

LEVEL 

INPUT 1 

INPUT 1 

INPUT 

SELECT 

INPUT 2 

INPUT 2 

INPUT 2 

AC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

AC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

DC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

DC COUPLED 

1088.7531.12 3.35 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

Marker Key Group 

MARKER 

Receiver 

Analyzer 

NORMAL 

DELTA 

SEARCH 

MKR 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 

DEMOD 

MKR DEMOD 

ON OFF 

MARKER 2 

MARKER 2 

AM 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 3 

FM 

MARKER 4 

MARKER 4 

SIGNAL 

COUNT 

MARKER 

ZOOM 

MARKER 

DEMOD 

MKR DEMOD 

STOP TIME 

PREV ZOOM 

RANGE 

MARKER 

ZOOM 

ZOOM 

OFF 

MARKER 

INFO 

MARKER 

INFO 

ALL MARKER 

OFF 

ALL MARKER 

OFF 

POWER MEAS 

SETTING 

SET NO. OF 

ADJ CHAN’S 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

POWER MEAS 

SETTING 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

ACP 

STANDARD 

CH FILTER 

ON OFF 

CHANNEL 

POWER 

CP / ACP 

ABS REL 

CHANNEL 

BANDWIDTH 

CHANNEL 

SPACING 

EDIT 

ACP LIMITS 

LIMIT 

CHECK 

SET CP 

REFERENCE 

C / N 

C / No 

ADJACENT 

CHAN POWER 

ADJUST CP 

SETTINGS 

COUNTER 

RESOL 

SIGNAL 

TRACK 

NOISE 

COUNTER 

RESOLUTION 

10 kHz 

1 kHz 

100 Hz 

10 Hz 

% POWER 

BANDWIDTH 

OCCUPIED 

PWR BANDW 

1 Hz 

0.1 Hz 

1088.7531.12 3.36 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

SEARCH 

DELTA 

MARKER 

DELTA 1 

DELTA 

MKR 

DELTA 2 

DELTA 3 

DELTA 4 

PHASE 

NOISE 

analyzer only 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REFERENCE 

FIXED 

DELTA MKR 

ABS REL 

ALL DELTA 

OFF 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REF POINT 

LEVEL 

REF POINT 

LVL OFFSET 

REF POINT 

FREQUENCY 

REF POINT 

TIME 

analyzer only 

1088.7531.12 3.37 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

SEARCH 

Receiver 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

Analyzer 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MIN 

PEAK 

PEAK 

DELTA 

MKR 

NEXT MIN 

NEXT PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

NEXT MIN 

RIGHT 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

NEXT PEAK 

LEFT 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

SUM MKR 

ON OFF 

MARKER 

TRACK 

MARKER 

TRACK 

SUMMARY 

MARKER 

SUMMARY 

MARKER 

AUTO SETTINGS PEAK 

ON COUPLED OFF 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

PEAK 

EXCURSION 

SEARCH LIM 

ON OFF 

SEARCH LIM 

ON OFF 

SELECT 

MARKER 

SELECT 

MARKER 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MIN 

NEXT MIN 

NEXT MIN 

RIGHT 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

ALL MARKER 

TO MIN 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

N DB DOWN 

SHAPE FACT 

60 /3 DB 

SHAPE FACT 

60 /6 DB 

RMS 

MEAN 

PEAK HOLD 

ON OFF 

AVERAGE 

ON OFF 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

ALL SUM 

MKR OFF 

EXCLUDE LO 

ON OFF 

PEAK 

EXCURSION 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

1088.7531.12 3.38 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

MARKER 

NORMAL SEARCH 

DELTA MKR 

Receiver 

MARKER 

PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

ADD TO 

PEAK LIST 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

MKR->CF 

STEPSIZE 

MARKER 

TRACK 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

MKR 

TRACE 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

Analyzer 

MARKER 

PEAK 

MKR 

CENTER 

MKR 

REF LEVEL 

AUTOSCALE 

MKR->CF 

STEPSIZE 

MKR 

START 

MKR 

STOP 

MKR 

TRACE 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

1088.7531.12 3.39 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

Lines Key Group 

LINES 

D LINES 

Receiver 

DISPLAY 

LINES 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1 

Analyzer 

SPAN = 0 SPAN = 0 

DISPLAY 

DISPLAY 

LINES 

LINES 

DISPLAY 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1 

LINE 1 

LIMITS 

DISPLAY 

LINE 2 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

DISPLAY 

LINE 2 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

DISPLAY 

LINE 2 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 1 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 1 

oder 

TIME 

LINE 1 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 2 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 2 

TIME 

LINE 2 

SHOW 

LINE INFO 

BASELINE SHOW 

LINE CLIPPING INFO 

BASELINE SHOW 

LINE CLIPPING INFO 

LINES 

D LINES 

LIMITS 

LIMIT LINES 

SELECT 

LIMIT LINE 

NEW LIMIT 

LINE 

EDIT LIMIT 

LINE 

NEW COPY LIMIT 

LIMIT LINE LINE 

DELETE 

LIMIT LINE 

X OFFSET 

Y OFFSET 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

EDIT 

LIMIT LINE 

NAME 

VALUES 

INSERT 

VALUE 

DELETE 

VALUE 

SHIFT X 

LIMIT LINE 

SHIFT EDIT Y 

TABLE LIMIT GRAPH LINE 

ACCEPT 

POSITION 

SAVE 

LIMIT LINE 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

1088.7531.12 3.40 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

Trace Key Group 

TRACE 

Receiver 

Analyzer 

1 2 

3 4 

TRACE 1 

CLEAR/ 

WRITE 

VIEW 

TRACE 1 

T1-T2+REF 

-> T1 

T1-T3+REF 

-> T1 

TRACE 1 

CLEAR/ 

WRITE 

VIEW 

TRACE 1 

ANALOG TR 

ON OFF 

BLANK 

T1-T4+REF 

-> T1 

BLANK 

T1-REF 

->T1 

AVERAGE 

TRACE 

MATH 

MAX HOLD 

TRACE MATH 

OFF 

MAX HOLD 

MIN HOLD 

MIN HOLD 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

only trace 

3 and 4 

FINAL 

RESULTS 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

HOLD CONT 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

SCAN 

COUNT 

DETECTOR 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

TRACE 1 

DETECTOR 

AUTO 

SELECT 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

DETECTOR 

COPY.. 

DETECTOR 

AUTOPEAK 

COPY.. 

TRACE 1 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

ASCII CONFIG 

EDIT PATH 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

DETECTOR 

MIN PEAK 

ASCII CONFIG 

EDIT PATH 

TRACE MATH 

T1-T2+REF 

-> T1 

QUASIPEAK 

DECIM SEP 

. , 

DETECTOR 

SAMPLE 

DECIM SEP 

. , 

T1-T3+REF 

-> T1 

AVERAGE 

NEW 

APPEND 

DETECTOR 

RMS 

NEW 

APPEND 

T1-T4+REF 

-> T1 

without ESIB-B1 

with ESIB-B1 

RMS 

MIN PEAK 

AC VIDEO 

FINAL 

MAX PEAK 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

with 

option 

ESIB-B1 

DETECTOR 

AVERAGE 

DETECTOR 

AC VIDEO 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

T1-REF 

->T1 

FINAL 

QUASIPEAK 

FINAL 

AVERAGE 

FINAL 

RMS 

ADJUST TO 

TRACE 

FINAL 

MIN PEAK 

TRACE MATH 

OFF 

1088.7531.12 3.41 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

Sweep Key Group 

SWEEP 

TRIGGER 

Receiver 

TRIGGER 

FREE RUN 

Analyzer 

TRIGGER 

FREE RUN 

S / 

S N 

RBW 

VBW 

SW T 

COUPLING 

/RUN 

EXTERN 

VIDEO 

LINE 

EXTERN 

RF POWER 

SLOPE 

POS NEG 

TRIGGER 

DELAY 

SLOPE 

POS NEG 

1088.7531.12 3.42 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

SWEEP 

Receiver 

Receiver 

Analyzer 

TRIGGER 

SWEEP / 

SCAN 

R 

V 

W 

W 

SW T 

COUPLING 

/RUN 

SCAN 

SCAN TABLE 

ADJUST 

AXIS 

SINGLE 

SCAN 

CONTINUOUS 

SCAN 

SCAN 

RANGES 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

SCAN 

CISPR 

RANGE A 

CISPR 

RANGE B 

CISPR 

RANGE C 

CISPR 

RANGE D 

SCAN 

RANGES 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

SWEEP 

CONTINOUS 

SWEEP 

SINGLE 

SWEEP 

SWEEP TIME 

AUTO 

SWEEP TIME 

MANUAL 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

GAP SWEEP 

ON OFF 

GAP SWEEP 

SETTINGS 

TRIGGER 

LEVEL 

PRE 

TRIGGER 

TRG TO GAP 

TIME 

GAP 

LENGTH 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

GAP SWEEP 

SETTINGS 

DELETE 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

GATE 

ON OFF 

RANGES 

1-5 6-18 

RANGES 

1-5 6-18 

GATE 

SETTINGS 

RUN 

SCAN 

SGL SWEEP 

DISP OFF 

HOLD 

SCAN 

GATE 

SETTINGS 

GATE 

LEVEL 

GATE MODE 

LEVEL EDGE 

GATE 

ADJUST 

GATE 

LEVEL 

GATE MODE 

LEVEL EDGE 

HOLD 

SCAN 

STOP 

SCAN 

HOLD 

SCAN 

CONT AT 

REC FREQ 

CONTINUE 

AT HOLD 

STOP 

SCAN 

GATE POL 

POS NEG 

GATE 

DELAY 

GATE 

LENGTH 

GATE 

EXTERN 

GATE 

RF POWER 

GATE POL 

POS NEG 

GATE 

DELAY 

GATE 

LENGTH 

SWEEPTIME 

MANUAL 

RES BW 

MANUAL 

VIDEO BW 

MANUAL 

VIDEO BW 

AUTO 

GATE 

ADJUST 

1088.7531.12 3.43 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

SWEEP 

TRIGGER 

SWEEP / 

SCAN 

RBW 

VBW 

SW T 

COUPLING 

/RUN 

Receiver 

HOLD 

SCAN 

COUPLED 

FUNCTIONS 

RES BW 

MANUAL 

RES BW 

AUTO 

RES BW 

3dB 6dB 

VIDEO BW 

MANUAL 

VIDEO BW 

AUTO 

SWEEP TIME 

MANUAL 

SWEEP TIME 

AUTO 

Analyzer 

COUPLED 

FUNCTIONS 

RBW 1 kHz 

ANA DIG 

RBW

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

Memory Key Group 

MEMORY 

SAVE 

RECALL 

CONFIG 

MEMORY 

SAVE 

EDIT 

NAME 

EDIT 

PATH 

EDIT 

COMMENT 

SEL ITEMS 

TO SAVE 

DATA SET 

LIST 

DATA SET 

CLEAR 

DATA SET 

CLEAR ALL 

SEL ITEMS 

TO SAVE 

SELECT 

ITEMS 

ENABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DISABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

DEFAULT 

CONFIG 

1088.7531.12 3.45 E-13

Menu Overview 

ESIB 

MEMORY 

SAVE 

RECALL 

CONFIG 

MEMORY 

RECALL 

EDIT 

NAME 

EDIT 

PATH 

AUTO 

RECALL 

SEL ITEMS 

TO RECALL 

DATA SET 

LIST 

DATA SET 

CLEAR 

SEL ITEMS 

TO RECALL 

SELECT 

ITEMS 

ENABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DISABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DATA SET 

CLEAR ALL 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

DEFAULT 

CONFIG 

MEMORY 

MEMORY 

CONFIG 

MEMORY 

CONFIG 

SAVE 

RECALL 

EDIT 

PATH 

COPY 

FORMAT 

DISK 

CONFIG 

DELETE 

RENAME 

MAKE 

DIRECTORY 

SORT MODE 

PAGE UP 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

PAGE DOWN 

1088.7531.12 3.46 E-13

ESIB 

Menu Overview 

User Key 

USER 

USER 

(MACRO 1) 

(MACRO 2) 

(MACRO 3) 

(MACRO 4) 

DEFINE 

MACRO 

RECORD 

ON OFF 

DEFINE 

PAUSE 

(MACRO 5) 

(MACRO 6) 

(MACRO 7) 

DEFINE 

MACRO 

DELETE 

MACRO 

MACRO 

TITLE 

SELECT 

MACRO 

1088.7531.12 3.47 E-13

ESIB Contents - "Instrument Functions" 

Contents - Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions" 

4 Instrument Functions.......................................................................................... 4.1 

General Configuration – SYSTEM and CONFIGURATION Key Groups...................................... 4.2 

ESIB Initial Configuration – PRESET Key ............................................................................... 4.2 

Display Configuration – DISPLAY Key .................................................................................... 4.3 

Display Screen Mode Selection..................................................................................... 4.4 

Measurement Window Coupling ................................................................................... 4.6 

Display Screen Configuration........................................................................................ 4.7 

Recording the Correction Data – CAL Key............................................................................ 4.10 

Correction Function Calls ............................................................................................ 4.11 

Results of System Error Correction............................................................................. 4.13 

Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters – INFO Key............................................. 4.14 

Firmware Versions ...................................................................................................... 4.14 

Hardware Configuration and Options .......................................................................... 4.15 

Self Test ...................................................................................................................... 4.16 

System Messages ....................................................................................................... 4.17 

Statistics Function for Input Attenuator Switching ....................................................... 4.18 

Mode Selection – MODE Key ................................................................................................ 4.19 

Preliminary Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key............................................... 4.21 

Using Transducers ...................................................................................................... 4.21 

Activating Transducer Factors and Transducer Sets ..................................... 4.22 

New Entry and Editing of Transducer Factors................................................ 4.24 

New Entry and Editing of Transducer Sets..................................................... 4.28 

Preamplification and Preselection (incl. ESBI-B2) ...................................................... 4.32 

Preselection.................................................................................................... 4.32 

Preamplification .............................................................................................. 4.34 

Control of V-networks (LISNs)..................................................................................... 4.35 

Enabling Firmware Options ......................................................................................... 4.37 

External Reference Oscillator...................................................................................... 4.37 

Service Functions........................................................................................................ 4.38 

Setting the Interface Configuration and Time.............................................................. 4.41 

IEC/IEEE-Bus Address Selection ................................................................... 4.41 

User Port Configuration .................................................................................. 4.42 

Serial Interface Configuration ......................................................................... 4.43 

Setting the Date and Time.............................................................................. 4.46 

Connecting the External Monitor .................................................................... 4.46 

Switching the Beeper ON/OFF ....................................................................... 4.46 

Firmware Update......................................................................................................... 4.47 

Compatibility to FSE Instrument Family ...................................................................... 4.47 

Status Display-Remote/Manual Control – STATUS Key Group ................................................ 4.48 

Measurement Documentation – HARDCOPY Key Group.............................................................. 4.49 

Printing Data – START Key ................................................................................................... 4.49 

Printing Configuration – SETTINGS Key............................................................................... 4.51 

Selection of Displayed Elements and Colour Settings ................................................ 4.52 

Selection of Hardcopy Format..................................................................................... 4.53 

Entry of Comment Text ............................................................................................... 4.54 

Selection and Configuration of the Printer................................................................... 4.55 

Saving and Recalling Data Sets – MEMORY Key Group............................................................ 4.57 

Configuration of Memory – CONFIG Key ............................................................................. 4.59 

Saving Data Sets – SAVE Key ............................................................................................. 4.61 

Selecting the Data Set for Saving................................................................................ 4.62 

Selecting the Data subset for Storage......................................................................... 4.64 

1088.7531.12 I-4.1 E-2

Contents - "Instrument Functions" 

ESIB 

Recalling of Data Sets – RECALL Key................................................................................. 4.66 

Selecting the Data Set for Recalling............................................................................ 4.67 

Building a Data Set......................................................................................... 4.69 

Macros – USER Key....................................................................................................................... 4.71 

Fundamentals........................................................................................................................ 4.71 

Starting Macros...................................................................................................................... 4.72 

Defining Macros..................................................................................................................... 4.73 

EMI RECEIVER Mode..................................................................................................................... 4.75 

Operation on a Discrete Frequency....................................................................................... 4.76 

Setting the Receive Frequency ................................................................................... 4.76 

Setting the RF Attenuation .......................................................................................... 4.77 

Preamplifier ................................................................................................................. 4.79 

Setting the IF Bandwidth ............................................................................................. 4.79 

Selecting the Detector (incl. ESIB-B1) ........................................................................ 4.80 

Setting the Measurement Time ................................................................................... 4.84 

AF Demodulators ........................................................................................................ 4.86 

Switchover between Full Screen and Split Screen Mode............................................ 4.86 

Frequency Scan..................................................................................................................... 4.87 

Entry of Scan Data ...................................................................................................... 4.89 

Editing a Scan ............................................................................................................. 4.94 

Running a Scan........................................................................................................... 4.95 

Data Reduction and Peak List ............................................................................................... 4.97 

Selection of Detectors for Final Measurement .......................................................... 4.108 

Automatic Control of Line Impedance Stabilization Networks ............................................. 4.109 

Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group............................................... 4.111 

Start Frequency – START Key.................................................................................. 4.111 

Stop Frequency – STOP Key .................................................................................... 4.111 

Receiver Frequency – FREQ Key ............................................................................. 4.111 

Receiver Frequency Step Size .................................................................................. 4.112 

Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group.......................................... 4.113 

Display Units - UNIT Key........................................................................................... 4.113 

Level Range – RANGE Key ...................................................................................... 4.115 

RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key ........................................................................ 4.116 

Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group ........................................................................... 4.119 

Main Markers– NORMAL Key ................................................................................... 4.119 

Marker Step Size .......................................................................................... 4.123 

Delta Markers – DELTA Key ..................................................................................... 4.124 

Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key............................................................. 4.127 

Search Functions – SEARCH Key ............................................................................ 4.128 

Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Í Key .................................... 4.133 

Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field ........................................................... 4.134 

Display Lines – D LINES Key .................................................................................... 4.134 

Limit Lines – LIMITS Key .......................................................................................... 4.136 

Limit Line Selection ...................................................................................... 4.137 

Entry and Editing of Limit Lines .................................................................... 4.139 

Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group................................................................. 4.143 

Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key.............................................. 4.143 

Mathematical Functions for Traces ........................................................................... 4.148 

ASCII Export for Trace data ...................................................................................... 4.149 

Scan Control – SWEEP Key Group..................................................................................... 4.153 

Entry of Scan Data – SCAN Key ............................................................................... 4.153 

Start of Frequency Sweep – RUN Key...................................................................... 4.153 

Triggering a Level Measurement – TRIGGER Key................................................... 4.154 

1088.7531.12 I-4.2 E-2

ESIB Contents - "Instrument Functions" 

Analyzer Mode.............................................................................................................................. 4.155 

Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group............................................... 4.155 

Start Frequency – START Key.................................................................................. 4.155 

Stop Frequency – STOP Key .................................................................................... 4.157 

Center Frequency – CENTER Key............................................................................ 4.158 

Center Frequency Step Size ..................................................................................... 4.160 

Frequency Span – SPAN Key ................................................................................... 4.162 

Display Zoom............................................................................................................. 4.164 

Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group.......................................... 4.165 

Reference Level – REF key ...................................................................................... 4.165 

Display Units.............................................................................................................. 4.167 

Level Range – RANGE Key ...................................................................................... 4.169 

RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key ........................................................................ 4.171 

Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group ........................................................................... 4.175 

Main Markers– NORMAL Key ................................................................................... 4.175 

LF Demodulation .......................................................................................... 4.179 

Frequency Measurement.............................................................................. 4.181 

Noise Power Density Measurement ............................................................. 4.182 

Channel Power Measurements .................................................................... 4.183 

Marker Step Size .......................................................................................... 4.197 

Delta Markers – DELTA Key ..................................................................................... 4.198 

Phase Noise Measurement .......................................................................... 4.201 

Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key............................................................. 4.202 

Search Functions – SEARCH Key ............................................................................ 4.203 

Summary Marker.......................................................................................... 4.208 

Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Í Key .................................... 4.211 

Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field ........................................................... 4.213 

Display Lines – D LINES Key .................................................................................... 4.213 

Limit Lines – LIMITS Key .......................................................................................... 4.217 

Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group................................................................. 4.226 

Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key.............................................. 4.226 

Detector Selection ..................................................................................................... 4.231 

Quasi Analog Display ................................................................................................ 4.235 

Mathematical Functions for Traces ........................................................................... 4.235 

Trace Export.............................................................................................................. 4.237 

Sweep Control – SWEEP Key Group.................................................................................. 4.240 

Coupled Settings – COUPLING Key ......................................................................... 4.240 

Setting and Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep 

Time............................................................................................ 4.241 

Sweep Coupling Ratio .................................................................................. 4.247 

Sweep Trigger – TRIGGER Key ............................................................................... 4.249 

Sweep Setup – SWEEP Key..................................................................................... 4.251 

Gated Sweep................................................................................................ 4.253 

Sweep Blanking – Gap Sweep ..................................................................... 4.259 

Tracking Generator Option ......................................................................................................... 4.263 

Tracking Generator Settings................................................................................................ 4.264 

Transmission Measurement ................................................................................................ 4.265 

Calibration of the Transmission Measurement.......................................................... 4.265 

Normalization............................................................................................................. 4.267 

Reflection Measurements.................................................................................................... 4.271 

Calibration of Reflection Measurement ..................................................................... 4.271 

Calibration Methods................................................................................................... 4.272 

Frequency-Converting Measurements ................................................................................ 4.273 

External Modulation of Tracking Generator......................................................................... 4.274 

1088.7531.12 I-4.3 E-2

Contents - "Instrument Functions" 

ESIB 

1088.7531.12 I-4.4 E-2

ESIB 

Instrument Functions 

4 Instrument Functions 

All functions of the EMI receiver are explained in detail in this chapter. 

The instrument functions for general settings, printout and data management are described at the 

beginning of this chapter – key groups SYSTEM, CONFIGURATION, HARDCOPY, MEMORY and the 

USER key. 

The sequence of the following key groups depends on their appearance on the front panel: key groups 

FREQUENCY, LEVEL, MARKER, LINES, TRACE, SWEEP and the INPUT key. The menus are 

described separately for the different operating modes. 

Option Tracking Generator is described at the end of the chapter. Further options are supplied with a 

separate manual. 

The various softkeys in a menu are described from top to bottom and from the left to the right side 

menu. The submenus are indicated by an indentation or displayed in a separate section. The whole path 

(key - softkey - ...) is indicated in the line above the menu display. 

An overview of the menus is given in chapter 3 which also contains the description of the operating 

concept. 

For fast reference a list of softkeys with the associated IEC/IEEE-bus commands is given at the end of 

Chapter 6. 

An index at the end of the handbook provides as further help for the user. 

1088.7531.12 4.1 E-15

Initial Configuration 

ESIB 

General Configuration – SYSTEM and CONFIGURATION Key 

Groups 

ESIB Initial Configuration – PRESET Key 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DI AY INFO 

Using the PRESET key, the ESIB can be brought to a predefined initial state 

equivalent to the state after power on. All previous setting are deleted if they 

were not previously saved in memory. Returning to the PRESET state is not 

critical with regard to an arbitrary signal which may still be present at the input 

as long as the signal is within the specified voltage range. 

Note: 

The initial state set by the PRESET key can be adapted to the 

user requirements using the AUTO RECALL function. When the 

PRESET key is pressed, the AUTO RECALL dataset is loaded. 

For further information refer to Section "Saving and Recalling 

Data Sets". 

IEC/IEEE- bus command 

:*RST 

Pressing the PRESET key, causes the ESIB to enter its initial state according to the following table: 

Table 4-1 

Parameter 

Initial state of the ESIB 

Setting 

Mode 

EMI Receiver 

Receiver Frequency 

100 MHz 

RF Attenuation 

Auto 

Preamplification 

off 

Input Input 1 

Detector 

AV 

Measurement Time 

100 ms 

IF Bandwidth (RES BW) 

120 kHz 

Demodulation 

off 

Trigger 

free run 

1088.7531.12 4.2 E-15

ESIB 

Display Configuration 

Display Configuration – DISPLAY Key 

The measurement results are displayed on the screen of the ESIB either in a full-screen window or in 

two spli-screen windows. In some cases, the two windows can be subdivided into two diagrams each, e. 

g. for the representation of the inphase and quadrature signal in the vector analyzer mode (Option FSE- 

B7). In the EMI RECEIVER mode, a selection can be made in the upper half of the screen (SCREEN A) 

between bargraph display of receiver mode and the spectrum analyzer mode. 

If only one window is used, this window fills the complete display screen. Two measurement windows 

are always placed over each other. The axes labelling and measurement settings are defined 

independently in each measurement window. 

When two measurement windows are used, the settings can be chosen to be either coupled or fully 

independent from each other (depending on the operating mode). The measurement procedure is 

always sequential. 

New instrument settings can only be entered in the active measurement window. This window is marked 

on the upper right corner of the grid. Coupled settings are changed simultaneously in both windows at 

the time of entry. 

The entry of the measurement parameters for each of the two windows can be either independent from 

one another using numerical inputs, or by graphical definition of the span through the use of level and 

frequency lines. The former case, e.g., may be used for harmonic or frequency converter 

measurements, and the latter case, for a zoom display of a frequency or level segment. 

10.0 

-0 

-10 

-20 

-30 

-40 

-50 

-60 

-70 

-80 

-90 

10.0 

-0 

-10 

-20 

-30 

-40 

-50 

-60 

-70 

-80 

-90 

Ref Lvl 

10 dBm 

Center 

Ref Lvl 

10 dBm 

Center 

MKR1 [T1] 

+9.8 dBm 

10.010000 MHz 

10.000002 MHz 

DELTA [T2] 

-36.8 dBm 

10.000010 MHz 

20.000004 MHz 

RBW 1 kHz 

VBW 1 kHz 

SWT 100 ms 

1 

10 kHz/ 

RBW 1 kHz 

VBW 1 kHz 

SWT 100 ms 

1 

10 kHz/ 

RF ATT 40 dB 

Mixer -30 dBm 

Unit dBm 

Span 100 kHz 

RF ATT 40 dB 

Mixer -30 dBm 

Unit dBm 

Span 100 kHz 

A 

B 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

NEXT PEAK 

LEFT 

SEARCH LIM 

ON OFF 

SELECT 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

USER 

Fig. 4-1 

Split screen mode 

1088.7531.12 4.3 E-15


ESIB 

SYSTEM DISPLAY menu: 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

RECEIVER ANALYZER The DISPLAY key calls a menu which is used 

DISPLAY DISPLAY to configure the display screen and to select 

FULL 

FULL the active measurement window in SPLIT- 

SCREEN SCREEN 

SCREEN mode. 

SPLIT 

SCREEN 

SPLIT 

SCREEN The menu differs for the two operating modes 

EMI RECEIVER and ANALYZER. 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN A 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN B 

SCREEN A 

BARGRAPH 

SCREEN A 

SWEEP 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN A 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN B 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN C 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN D 

RUN SCAN 

SCREEN 

COUPLING 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

SCREEN 

COUPLING 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

Display Screen Mode Selection 

SYSTEM DISPLAY menu: 

FULL 

SCREEN 

SPLIT 

SCREEN 

The FULL SCREEN softkey selects the full-screen display. 

In this mode, the ACTIVE SCREEN A / ACTIVE SCREEN B and SCREEN 

COUPLING softkeys are not used. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:FORMat SINGle 

The SPLIT SCREEN softkey selects the split screen mode. The upper screen 

is designated SCREEN A, the lower screen SCREEN B. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:FORMat SPLit 

This is the default setting of the ESIB. 

1088.7531.12 4.4 E-15

ESIB 


EMI RECEIVER mode: 

In the RECEIVER mode, a selection can be made in the upper half of the screen (SCREEN A) between 

bargraph display of the receiver mode and the spectrum analyzer mode. 

With spectrum analyzer selected, the scan display in the lower half of the screen remains unchanged 

and the spectrum analyzer with all its measurement functions is available in the upper screen half. 

It is therefore possible to perform first a premeasurement with a scan and then to further investigate 

suspect signals with the aid of the spectrum analyzer, eg in the zero span to determine time 

characteristics. The center frequency of the spectrum analyzer can be coupled to the marker frequency 

of the scan display so that the frequencies to be analyzed can be easily displayed in the spectrum 

analyzer. 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN A 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN B 

If SPLIT SCREEN display is activated, the ACTIVE SCREEN A and ACTIVE 

SCREEN B softkeys activate either screen A or screen B. 

The entry of new settings is only possible for the active window. 

When switching back to FULL SCREEN mode, the active measurement 

window is displayed. 

These softkeys are only displayed if operation with two independent channels 

and different softkey menus - receiver with scan display and spectrum 

analyzer - is selected (SCREEN A SWEEP). Only in this case will it be 

necessary to assign entries to the receiver or to the spectrum analyzer. 

IEC/IEEE bus command - (the screen is selected via the numeric suffix) 

SCREEN A 

BARGRAPH 

The SCREEN A BARGRAPH softkey switches on the bargraph display in the 

upper half of the screen (SCREEN A). 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INSTrument[1][:SELect] RECeiver 

SCREEN A 

SWEEP 

The SCREEN A SWEEP softkey switches on the analyzer mode in the upper 

half of the screen (SCREEN A). 

The softkeys of all menus are assigned the analyzer functions. An exception 

is the DISPLAY menu where the SCREEN A BARGRAPH softkey is 

displayed to allow a return to the bargraph display of the receiver mode. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INSTrument[1][:SELect] SANalyzer 

RUN SCAN 

The RUN SCAN softkey starts the frequency scan with the selected settings. 

(see Section "Frequency Scan"). 

ANALYZER mode: 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN A 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN B 

If SPLIT SCREEN display is activated, the ACTIVE SCREEN A and ACTIVE 

SCREEN B softkeys activate either screen A or screen B. 

The entry of new settings is only possible for the active window. 

When switching back to FULL SCREEN mode, the active measurement 

window is displayed. 

If, in addition, the two screens are both subdivided into two diagrams, the 

ACTIVE SCREEN A/B softkeys activate the upper diagram, ACTIVE 

SCREEN C/D the lower diagram in each screen. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command - (the screen is selected via the numeric suffix) 

1088.7531.12 4.5 E-15


ESIB 

Measurement Window Coupling 

For the most part, the settings for the two windows can be either independently performed or coupled to 

one another. In many cases, when changes are made in one window (e.g., the reference level) it is 

desirable to also make the corresponding changes in the second window. The measurement window 

parameters which are to be coupled may be selected in the SCREEN COUPLING menu. 

SYSTEM DISPLAY-SCREEN COUPLING submenu: 

SCREEN 

COUPLING 

SCREEN 

COUPLING 

MODE 

COUPLED 

The SCREEN COUPLING softkey calls a sub-menu in 

which the coupling between the two measurement 

windows SCREEN A and SCREEN B can be defined. This 

coupling is only effective when both windows are 

displayed (SPLIT SCREEN). 

HORIZONTAL 

SCALING 

In the default setting, all of the items which are selectable 

are also coupled. 

VERTICAL 

SCALING 

COUPLING 

CONTROL 

... 

SCREENS 

UNCOUPLED 

MODE 

COUPLED 

The MODE COUPLED softkey switches the coupling of the operating mode 

(Analyzer, Vector Analyzer) on/off. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :INSTrument:COUPle MODE 

HORIZONTAL 

SCALING 

The HORIZONTAL SCALING softkey switches the coupled scaling of the 

horizontal axes on and off. In the frequency domain, the center frequency and 

the frequency span are identical. In the time domain, the sweep time for both 

windows is the same. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :INSTrument:COUPle X 

VERTICAL 

SCALING 

COUPLING 

CONTROL 

The VERTICAL SCALING softkey switches the coupled scaling of the vertical 

axes on and off. For a level measurement, this means that the reference level 

and the vertical resolution (LEVEL RANGE) are set to the same values in 

both windows. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command : INSTrument:COUPle Y 

The COUPLING CONTROL softkey switches the coupling of the trigger and 

gate parameters and of SWEEP COUNT and SWEEP SINGLE/ 

CONTINOUS on/off. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :INSTrument:COUPle CONTrol 

SCREENS 

UNCOUPLED 

The SCREENS UNCOUPLED softkey switches all of the possible couplings 

between the measurement windows to off. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command : INSTrument:COUPle NONE | ALL 

1088.7531.12 4.6 E-15

ESIB 


Display Screen Configuration 

SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY submenu: 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

SELECT 

OBJECT 

BRIGHTNESS 

TINT 

SATURATION 

DEFAULT 

COLORS 

PREDEFINED 

COLORS 

LOGO 

ON OFF 

FREQUENCY 

ON OFF 

DATAENTRY 

FIELD 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

TIME 

ON OFF 

DISPLAY 

COMMENT 

SCR SAVER 

ON OFF 

SCR SAVER 

TIME 

The CONFIG DISPLAY softkey calls a submenu, in 

which the selection of color and brightness for the 

individual elements on the display screen takes 

place. The actual selection of the elements takes 

place in the corresponding menu table. 

The color assignment of the softkeys is coupled with 

the color assignment of other display elements. 

Changing for example the color of SOFTKEY 

STATE OFF causes the color of the table 

background to be changed at the same time. The 

same applies to SOFTKEY STATE DATA ENTRY 

and display lines, and to SOFTKEY STATE ON and 

enhancement labels. 

In the right side menu, date, time and a diagram 

label can be displayed on the screen and the energy 

saving mode can be activated. 

The FREQUENCY ON/OFF softkey is not available 

in receiver mode. 

SELECT 

OBJECT 

The SELECT OBJECT softkey activates the SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT 

table, with which a graphics element can be selected. After selection, the 

brightness, tint and saturation of the selected element can be changed using 

the softkeys of the same name. The color changes can be seen immediately 

on the display screen. 

SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT 

TRACE 1 

TRACE 2 

TRACE 3 

TRACE 4 

MARKER 

GRID 

SOFTKEY STATE ON 

SOFTKEY STATE DATA ENTRY 

SOFTKEY STATE OFF 

SOFTKEY SHADE 

TEXT 

TITLE 

BACKGROUND 

BRIGHTNESS 

TINT 

The BRIGHTNESS softkey is used to enter the brightness of the color for the 

selected element. The range of input values is 0 to 100%. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:CMAP:HSL ,, 

The TINT softkey is used to enter the color tint of the selected element. The 

percentage that is entered specifies a point in a color spectrum ranging from 

red (0%) to blue (100%). 

The TINT function is not available for monochrome (black/white) displays. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:CMAP:HSL ,, 

1088.7531.12 4.7 E-15


ESIB 

SATURATION 

The SATURATION softkey is used to enter the color saturation of the 

selected element. 

The range is 0 to 100%. 


:DISPlay:CMAP:HSL ,, 

DEFAULT 

COLORS 

The DEFAULT COLORS softkey restores the default settings for brightness, 

color tint and color saturation for all display screen elements. 


:DISPlay:CMAP:DEFault 

PREDEFINED 

COLORS 

The PREDEFINED COLORS softkey activates a table, to select the 

predefined colors for the diplay screen elements can be selected. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:CMAP:PDEFined BLACk 

LOGO 

ON OFF 

The LOGO softkey switches the Rohde & Schwarz company logo displayed in 

the upper left corner of the display screen on or off. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF 

FREQUENCY 

ON OFF 

TIME 

ON OFF 

The FREQUENCY softkey switches the frequency information on the screen 

on and off. The softkey is available only in analyzer mode. 

ON Frequency information is displayed. 

OFF Frequency information is not output to the display. This can be used for 

example to protect confidential data. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON|OFF 

The TIME softkey switches on or off the date and time display at the lower 

edge of the diagram. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TIME ON | OFF 

DISPLAY 

COMMENT 

SCR.SAVER 

ON OFF 

The DISPLAY COMMENT softkey activates the entry of a label comprising a 

maximum of 50 characters. This label is displayed at the lower edge of the 

diagram. 

Pressing the softkey again causes the label to be switched off. The stored 

text, however, is not deleted. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[:DATA] 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF 

The SCR. SAVER softkey is used to switch the energy saving mode for the 

display on/off. 

After the elapse of the shutdown time (SCR. SAVER TIME) the display is 

completely switched off, ie including backlighting. 

The screen saver is deactivated by pressing any key or by sending the 

corresponding IEC/IEEE- bus command. 


:DISPlay:PSAVer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

SCR.SAVER 

TIME 

The SCR. SAVER TIME softkey activates the entry of the time for the screen 

saver to respond. The shut-down time is entered in minutes between 1 to 100 

minutes. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:PSAVer:HOLDoff 

1088.7531.12 4.8 E-15

ESIB 


SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY DATAENTRY FIELD Untermenü: 

DATAENTRY 

FIELD 

DATAENTRY 

FIELD 

DATAENTRY 

X 

DATAENTRY 

Y 

The DATAENTRY FIELD softkey displays a submenu used to specify 

the position and characteristics of the data entry field. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command -- 

DEFAULT 

POSITION 

DATAENTRY 

OPAQUE 

DATAENTRY 

X 

The DATAENTRY X softkey shifts the position of the data entry field 

horizontally. 


DATAENTRY 

Y 

The DATAENTRY Y softkey shifts the position of the data entry field 

vertically. 


DEFAULT 

POSITION 

The DEFAULT POSITION softkey positions the data entry field 

automatically. In general, its position is the upper left edge of the grid on the 

active screen. 


DATAENTRY 

OPAQUE 

The DATAENTRY OPAQUE softkey sets the data entry windows to opaque. 

This means that entry windows are underlayed with the background color for 

tables and that diagrams and traces behind an entry window can no longer be 

seen. 


1088.7531.12 4.9 E-15

Calibration 

ESIB 

Recording the Correction Data – CAL Key 

The ESIB maintains its high measurement accuracy thanks to its integrated system-error correction 

method. The CAL hard key provides a series of correction functions which allow not only the system 

error correction of the complete instrument, but also correction functions which are specifically 

applicable to the measurement requirements of relevant instrument sections. 

The measurement settings of the ESIB are saved and, after system error correction, completely 

restored. The correction data valid before system error correction are saved and, in case of a correction 

abort, restored. 

A window shows the progress of the correction data recording. ABORT can be used to abort the 

procedure at any time. 

SYSTEM MESSAGE 

Cal BW and CentFreq of 5MHz filt 

ABORT 

Note: 

The term "Calibration" formerly used for integrated system error correction was often taken to be 

the "true" calibration of the instrument performed during production and service. It is, therefore, 

no longer used although it appears in abbreviated form in the name of keys ("CAL..."). 

SYSTEM CAL menu: 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

CALIBRATE 

CAL SHORT 

CALIBRATE 

CAL 

RESULTS 

The CAL key displays a menu with 

the system error correction functions. 

CAL TOTAL 

DISPLAY I O 

CAL 

RES BW 

CAL LOG 

CAL 

LO SUPP 

CAL I/Q 


PRESEL 

PRESEL 

PEAK 

PAGE UP 

CAL CORR 

ON OFF 

PAGE DOWN 

. 

1088.7531.12 4.10 E-15

ESIB 

Calibration 

Correction Function Calls 


CAL 

SHORT 

The CAL SHORT softkey starts a short calibration, in which the absolute gain 

of the analyzer as well as the gain errors of the selected bandwidth are 

corrected. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :CALibration:SHORt? 

CAL 

TOTAL 

The CAL TOTAL softkey starts a complete correction of the receiver including 

additional partial corrections shown in the menu. 

UNCAL is displayed in the status line if the correction data recording has 

failed or if the correction values are deactivated (CAL CORR softkey= OFF). 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :CALibration[:ALL]? 

CAL 

RES BW 

The CAL RES BW softkey starts the correction of the center frequency, the 

bandwidth and the gain of the resolution filter. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :CALibration:BANDwidth[:RESolution]? 

CAL LOG 

The CAL LOG softkey starts the correction of the linearity of the logarithmic 

amplifier. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :CALibration:LDETector? 

CAL 

LO SUPP 

The CAL LO SUPP softkey starts the correction of the compensation of the 

first oscillator at low frequencies. After correction, the display of the internal 

oscillator at the frequency 0 Hz is very small. 

It is recommended that the correction be performed whenever sensitive 

measurements are to be made at low frequencies. 

CAL I/Q 

The CAL I/Q softkey starts the correction of the gain error of the I/Q 

demodulator. 

The softkey is only available in conjunction with option FSE-B7. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :CALibration:IQ? 

1088.7531.12 4.11 E-15

Calibration 

ESIB 


PRESEL 

The EMI PRESEL softkey calibrates the frequency response of the 

preselector and the preamplifier. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command ::CALibration:PRESelector? 

PRESEL 

PEAK 

The PRESEL PEAK softkey optimizes the tuning of the preselector for input 

signals in the frequency range above 7 GHz. 

This calibration should be used whenever signal levels in the frequency range 

above 7 GHz are to be measured and high accuracy is desired. 

If a marker is not active when the PRESEL PEAK softkey is pressed, marker 

1 is activated as the reference marker and placed on the signal maximum in 

the active trace. Otherwise the active marker is used. 

The following window is displayed on the screen while the peaking function is 

running. The function can be aborted at any time using the ABORT line. In 

this case, the correction value determined at the factory is restored. 

SYSTEM MESSAGE 

PEAKING 

ABORT 

The input signal’s signal-to-noise ratio must be at least 10dB in order that the 

peaking function runs properly. Otherwise, the preselector may be set 

incorrectly, which would cause level errors by subsequent measurements. 

If the instrument setting (start/stop frequency, sweep time) is changed after 

PRESEL PEAK has been called, the correction value for the preselector 

determined by the function is no longer used. Instead, the correction value 

determined at the factory is restored. 


:CALibration:PPEak? 

CAL CORR 

ON OFF 

The CAL CORR ON/OFF softkey switches the correction data on/off. 

ON The status message depends upon the results of the total correction 

OFF The message UNCAL appears in the ESIB status line. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :CALibration:STATe ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.12 E-15

ESIB 

Calibration 

Results of System Error Correction 


CAL 

RESULTS 

The CAL RESULTS softkey in the right-hand supplementary menu calls the 

CALIBRATION RESULTS table, which displays the correction data that has 

been recorded. 

The CALIBRATION RESULTS table contains the following information: 

page 1: 

• date and time of the last recorded correction values 

• overall results of the correction value recording 

• list of the correction procedures according to function/module, including the 

correction values, the measured results and the individual results for each 

of the correction procedures 

The results for the individual correction procedures are categorised and 

displayed as follows: 

PASSED system error correction was completely successful 

CHECK deviations larger than expected, however, corrections could 

be performed 

FAILED deviations too large, no corrections were possible 

ABORTED correction aborted 

CALIBRATION RESULTS 

CALIBRATION: PASSED 

Last cal total: 05.Jun 1997 16:24:54 

Calibration of IF Filters PASSED 

IF GAIN Adjust 

PASSED 

Bandwidth: 

Filter Cal Val [Hz] DAC Val State 

1kHz 2.806e+01 1679 PASSED 

2kHz 1.603e+01 2887 PASSED 

3kHz -6.012e+00 3238 PASSED 

5kHz -1.002e+01 3514 PASSED 

10kHz 1.804e+02 3703 PASSED 

20kHz 3.607e+02 3801 PASSED 

30kHz 8.417e+02 3831 PASSED 

50kHz 1.403e+03 3743 PASSED 

100kHz 1.804e+03 3698 PASSED 

200kHz 3.607e+03 3606 PASSED 

300kHz 8.417e+03 3516 PASSED 

500kHz 1.403e+04 3329 PASSED 

1MHz 2.806e+04 2881 PASSED 


PAGE UP 

The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys can be used to page through the 

table of correction results. 

PAGE DOWN 

1088.7531.12 4.13 E-15

Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters 

ESIB 

Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters – INFO Key 

SYSTEM INFO menu: 

SYSTEM 

PRESET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

INFO 

INSTRUMENT 

SETTINGS 

FIRMWARE 

VERSIONS 

HARDWARE+ 

OPTIONS 


SYSTEM 

MESSAGES 

The INFO key is used to request general information 

concerning the instrument. These include: 

• firmware version 

• installed hardware and hardware options 

• modification level of the individual modules 

• self-test results with the option of calling self-test 

functions 

• list of generated system messages 

• installed firmware and hardware options. 

• Statistical evaluations 

OPTIONS 

STATISTIC 

HELP 

Firmware Versions 


FIRMWARE 

VERSION 

The FIRMWARE VERSIONS softkey opens two tables, which provide the 

following informations: 

• Table MODEL displays the exact instrument model. 

ESIB26 

MODEL 

• In the FIRMWARE VERSION table, the version of each software 

component installed in the instrument is listed. The versions of 

programmable logic devices are also included if the firmware version of 

the device can be determined. 

FIRMWARE VERSION 

BIOS 1.2 

RECEIVER 1.65 

SERIAL NUMBER 101379/005 


:*IDN? 

1088.7531.12 4.14 E-15

ESIB 


Hardware Configuration and Options 


HARDWARE+ 

OPTION 

The HARDWARE+OPTIONS softkey opens two tables in which the modules 

(INSTALLED COMPONENTS) installed in the instrument are listed. 

• Table MODEL lists the instrument name and model: 

ESIB26 

MODEL 

• Table INSTALLED COMPONENTS consists of four columns: 

COMPONENT name of module 

MODEL INDEX model number of the module 

MODIF INDEX main modification index of the module 

HW CODE secondary modification index of the module 

These lists contain only the modules which are actually present in the 

instrument, i.e., the modules which were identified by the module 

recognition software. 

INSTALLED COMPONENTS 

COMPONENT MODEL INDEX MODIF INDEX HW CODE 

Main Processor 4 n/a 0 

Graphic Board 4 n/a 0 

I/O Board 4 n/a 0 

FRAC SYN 4 0 4 

RF Module 4 0 4 

2nd IF Converter 3 2 2 

LO Phase 3 4 12 

Preselector 2 6 0 

MW Converter 2 0 0 

MW YIG Filter 2 0 0 

Detector 4 0 2 

RF Attenuator 4 4 0 

IF Filter 3 2 3 

Digital IF 2 0 2 


*OPT? 

:SYSTem:BINFo? 

OPTIONS 

The OPTIONS softkey opens two tables listing the options installed. The 

standard ESIB is equipped with options FSE-B4 and FSE-B5. The options are 

indicated for reasons of compatibility to instrument family FSE. 

DESIGNATION 

FFT 

FIRMWARE OPTIONS 

TYPE 

B5 

CODE 

1938496289 

Note: New firmware options can be enabled in the SETUP menu. 

DESIGNATION 

HARDWARE OPTIONS 

CODE 

Low Phase Noise & OCXO 

Vector Signal Analysis 

B4 

B7 


*OPT? 

1088.7531.12 4.15 E-15


ESIB 

Self Test 

SYSTEM INFO-SELFTEST submenu: 



EXECUTE 


. 

. 

. 

The SELFTEST softkey opens a submenu with which the self test 

can be started. 

The instrument has extensive self test functions which 

comprehensively test instrument functionality. In case of a fault, 

the instrument can locate a defective module on its own. The self 

test sequence is described in more detail in the service manual 

instrument (supplied with the ESIB). 

EXECUTE 


The EXECUTE TESTS softkey starts the test of the complete instrument. 

During the self test a window is displayed: 


in progress 

ABORT 

The functions are tested in the following order: 

1. Modules main CPU, digital motherboard, graphics and the interfaces 

2. Reference frequency conditioning, the synthesizer modules and all LO 

signals 

3. All RF, IF and signal-weighting modules 

If no failure occurs during the execution of the self test, the following message 

is displayed when the complete self test is finished: 


successfully completed 

OK 

If a failure occurs during the execution of the self test, the self test is 

immediately aborted and a message indicating the defective module and the 

defective function is displayed: 

SELFTEST FAILED 

IF Filter Stepgain 

ABORT 

Further testing should be performed by an R&S service department. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :*TST? 

1088.7531.12 4.16 E-15

ESIB 


System Messages 

The SYSTEM MESSAGES softkey opens a submenu with a table in which the generated system 

messages are displayed. The most recent messages are at the top of the list. 

The following information is presented: 

NO 

Device-specific three-digit error code (shown as XXX in the figure) 

MESSAGE 

Brief description of the reason for the message 

DATE/TIME Date and time of the message 

Error messages that have occurred since the SYSTEM MESSAGES menu was last called are marked by 

an asterix "*". 

SYSTEM INFO-SYSTEM MESSAGES submenu: 

SYSTEM 

MESSAGES 

SYSTEM MESSAGES 

NO MESSAGE DATE/TIME 

SYSTEM 

MESSAGES 

USER 

102 

* CH1 LO unl: frac syn synth. 17.Oct.99; 12:05:33 

CLEAR 

MESSAGE 

CLEAR ALL 

MESSAGES 

UPDATE 

MESSAGES 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :SYSTem:ERRor? 

CLEAR 

MESSAGE 

CLEAR ALL 

MESSAGES 

The CLEAR MESSAGE softkey deletes the message just selected. 

All subsequent messages are shifted automatically one line upwards so that 

no empty lines exist. When the last message has been deleted, the selection 

bar also disappears. 

IEC/IEEE- bus command :SYSTem:ERRor? 

The CLEAR ALL MESSAGES softkey deletes all messages. 


UPDATE 

MESSAGES 

The UPDATE MESSAGES softkey causes all newly arrived messages to be 

entered at the top of the table. At this time, all messages previously indicated 

as "new" are displayed as "old" messages 


1088.7531.12 4.17 E-15


ESIB 

Statistics Function for Input Attenuator Switching 


STATISTIC 

STATISTICS 

ATT 

SWITCHES 

The STATISTICS softkey calls a submenu for indication of 

device statistics. 

ATT 

SWITCHES 

The ATT SWITCHES softkey displays various tables listing the mechanical 

switches and attenuators fitted in the instrument, plus the number of 

switching operations for the respective switch or attenuator. 

INPUT ATTENUATOR 

Date 5 Aug 1999 

Calibration Input 6 

10 dB 121 

20 dB 217 

30 dB 137 


:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation 

1088.7531.12 4.18 E-15

ESIB 

Mode Selection 

Mode Selection – MODE Key 

The ESIB can be operated in one of several modes, each of which is different with respect to 

functionality and control. The differences in control, however, consist not only in the enabling/disabling of 

additional softkeys within existing softkey menus, but rather in the fact that existing menus are 

completely replaced by new menus and menu trees which are tailored to the functional requirements. 

CONFIGURATION MODE menu 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SE P 

MODE 

ANALYZER 



TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 

. 

. 

The MODE key opens the menu for selection 

of the mode. 

Herein, the modes can be selected according 

to the available ESIB options. 

• Analyzer 

• EMI Test Receiver 

• Tracking Generator 

• Vector Signal Analysis and 

ANALYZER 

The ANALYZER softkey selects the ANALYZER mode. 

The functions provided correspond to those of a conventional spectrum 

analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the test signal 

over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep 

time, or, for a fixed frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INSTrument[:SELect] SANalyzer 



The EMI RECEIVER softkey selects the EMI Test Receiver mode. 

This mode is the default setting of the ESIB. 

In the receiver mode, ESIB behaves like a test receiver, ie if the basic 

settings are active, it measures the level with the selected bandwidth and 

measurement time at the set frequency. The signal is evaluated by means of 

the four detectors average, peak, rms and quasi peak. 

A frequency sweep may be carried out with the start and stop frequencies 

and the stepwidth. 

The main menu of the RECEIVER mode is described in detail in Section ’EMI 

Receiver Mode’. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INSTrument[:SELect] RECeiver 

TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

The TRACKING GENERATOR softkey selects the operating mode Scalar 

Network Analysis. 

The softkey is only available if ESIB is equipped with option: FSE-B10 or B11. 

For a detailed description of operation see Section ’Option Tracking 

Generator’. 

1088.7531.12 4.19 E-15

Mode Selection 

ESIB 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 

Softkey VECTOR ANALYZER selects the vector analysis mode. 

The softkey is only available if ESIB is equipped with Option FSE-B7. 

In the vector analyzer mode the ESIB is automatically set to a fixed 

frequency (center frequency) since vector analysis can only be carried out on 

one frequency. 

The IF signal is digitized by the selected resolution bandwidth after filtering 

and mixed into the baseband by a digital mixer. Further processing is via 

digital signal processors which display the time characteristic of the amplitude 

or phase. As an option, the baseband can also be demodulated and the 

demodulated signal can be displayed. Principally any type of modulation 

(digital and analog) can be processed. 

The functions of the analyzer mode are supplemented by the vector analysis 

functions which are described in detail in a separate manual to the option. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INSTrument[:SELect] DDEMod 

1088.7531.12 4.20 E-15

ESIB 

Configuration/Setup 

Preliminary Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key 

CONFIGURATION SETUP menu: 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

SETUP 

TRANSDUCER 

PRESELECT 

ON OFF 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

SETUP 

FIRMWARE 

UPDATE 

FSE MODE 

ON OFF 

The SETUP key opens the menu for 

configuration of the ESIB. 

The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a 

submenu for entering correction characteristics 

for the measurement transducer. 

Softkey PRESELECT activates the 

preselection in the Analyzer mode. 

Softkey PREAMP switches the preamplifier on 

and off while preselection is active. 

The LISN softkey opens the submenu 

including the settings required to control V- 

networks (LISNs). 

The OPTIONS softkey allows the enabling of 

firmware options (Application Firmware 

Modules). 

The REFERENCE INT/EXT and EXTERNAL 

REF FREQUENCY softkeys determine the 

reference to be used. 

The SERVICE softkey provides special setup 

functions which, although not necessary in 

normal use, are useful in instrument service. 

The GENERAL SETUP softkey opens a 

submenu for all the general settings such as 

date and time as well as the configuration of 

the device interfaces. 

LISN 

OPTIONS 

REFERENCE 

INT EXT 

EXT REF 

FREQUENCY 

SERVICE 

GENERAL 

SETUP 

The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey opens a 

submenu for the installation of a firmeware 

update. 

The FSE MODE softkey determines whether 

the ESIB is FSE-compatible after preset. 

Using Transducers 

A transducer is often connected ahead of ESIB both during the measurement of useful signals and EMI 

and converts the useful or interference variable such as field strength, current or RFI voltage into a 

voltage across 50 Ohm. Transducers with a frequency-independent transducer factor can be coded in 

10-dB steps together with the unit at connector PROBE CODE. They are supplied at the same time by 

this connector. Transducers such as antennas, probes or current probes mostly have a frequencydependent 

transducer factor which can be stored in ESIB and automatically has the correct unit during 

level measurement. 

If a transducer is switched on it is considered as part of the unit during the measurement, ie the 

measured values are displayed in the correct unit and magnitude. When working with two measurement 

windows, the transducer is always assigned to two windows. 

ESIB distinguishes between transducer factor and transducer set. A transducer factor takes the 

frequency response of a single transfer element, eg an antenna into consideration. A transducer set can 

summarize different transducer factors in several subranges (several transducer factors at the same 

time), eg an antenna, a cable and a diplexer. 

1088.7531.12 4.21 E-15


ESIB 

A transducer factor consists of max. 50 reference values defined with frequency, transducer factor and 

the unit. For the measurement between frequency values linear or logarithmic interpolation of the 

transducer factor can be chosen. 

Several factors can be compiled in a transducer set provided that all factors have the same unit or unit 

"dB". The frequency range covered by a set can be subdivided into max. 10 subranges (each with up to 

4 transducer factors) which follow each other without a gap, ie the stop frequency of a subrange is the 

start frequency of the next subrange. 

The transducer factors used in a subrange have to fully cover the subrange. 

The definition of a transducer set is recommended if different transducers are used in the frequency 

range to be measured or if a cable attenuation or an amplifier has to be taken into consideration. 

If a transducer set is defined during a frequency sweep, the latter can be stopped at the interface 

between two transducer ranges and the user is asked to exchange the transducer. 

The following message informs the user that the limit has been reached: 

TDS Range # reached, CONTINUE / BREAK 

He can continue the sweep by confirming the message (CONTINUE) or he can switch off the transducer 

(BREAK). 

With the automatic switchover of the transducer used, the frequency sweep is not interrupted. 

Note: 

Transducers cannot be used in vector analyzer mode. 

Activating Transducer Factors and Transducer Sets 

The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a submenu in which already defined transducer factors or sets can 

be activated or deactivated, new transducer factors or sets can be generated or existing transducer 

factors or sets can be edited. Tables with the defined transducer factors and sets are displayed. The 

table (factor or set) in which a transducer is active is set. 

By switching on the transducers all the level settings and outputs are automatically made in the unit of 

the transducer. A change of the unit in menu LEVEL REF is no longer possible as ESIB together with 

the transducer used is regarded as a measuring instrument. Only if the transducer has the unit dB, can 

the original unit at ESIB be maintained and changed. 

Note: 

If one of the units dBµV, dBµV/m, dBµA, or dBµA/m is selected, the LEVEL REF key (see 

UNIT-submenu) can be used to switch to the corresponding units referred to the bandwidth, 

i.e. dBµV/MHz, dBµV/mMHz, dBµA/MHz, dBµA/mMH. 

If a transducer factor is active, TDF is displayed in the column of the enhancement labels and TDS if the 

transducer set is active. 

After switching off all the transducers, ESIB continues to use the unit which was selected before a 

transducer was switched on. 

In the analyzer mode, an active transducer for a sweep is uniquely calculated for each point displayed 

after its setting and added to the result of the level measurement during the sweep. If the sweep range 

is changed, the correction values are recalculated. If several measured values are combined, only a 

single value is taken into consideration. 

If an active transducer factor/set is not defined over the whole sweep or scan range during the 

measurement, the missing values are replaced by zero. 

1088.7531.12 4.22 E-15

ESIB 


CONFIGURATION SETUP Menu 

TRANSDUCER 

Name: 

Unit: 

ACTIVE TRANSDUCER FACTOR 

Cable_1 

Freq range: 

dB 

to: 

0 Hz 

2.000 GHz 

TRANSDUCER 

TRANSDUCER 

FACTOR 

USER 

Comment: 

Cable length 1.50 m, No.112234 

TRANSDUCER 

SET 

TRANSDUCER FACTOR 

Name 

Unit 

Antenna1 dBµV/m 

Probe_A dBµA 

Probe_B dBµA 

Probe_C dBµA 

My_Probe dBµV 

Cable_1 dB 

Cable_2 dB 

Preamp dB 

_ 

TRANSDUCER SET 

Name Unit 

Antenna 

Ant_Cab2 

Ant_Pre 

Ant_Cab1 

Probeset 

_ 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dBµA 

EDIT TRD 

FACTOR 

EDIT 

TRD SET 

NEW 

FACTOR/SET 

DELETE 

FACTOR/SET 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

Press ENTER to (de)activate 

The upper table ACTIVE TRANSDUCER FACTOR / SET indicates the active transducer factor or the 

set with the associated name, frequency range and unit. If no factor or set is active, none is displayed in 

the table. Additional information can be entered in a comment line. If a transducer factor is active, the 

selected interpolation is displayed in addition, if a set is active, the break setting is displayed. 

The left table TRANSDUCER FACTOR comprises all the defined factors with name and unit. If the 

number of defined transducer factors exceeds the number of possible lines in the table, the table will be 

scrolled. 

The right table TRANSDUCER SET comprises all the defined transducer sets with the corresponding 

information. 

Only one set or transducer can be activated. An already active transducer factor or set is switched off 

automatically if another one is switched on. An activated transducer factor or set is marked with a check 

sign. 

TRANSDUCER 

FACTOR 

TRANSDUCER 

SET 

The TRANSDUCER FACTOR softkey sets the selection bar to the position of 

the active transducer factor. 

If no transducer factor is switched on, the bar is positioned to the first line of 

the table. 

IEC/IEEE bus commands 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

The TRANSDUCER SET softkey sets the selection bar to the position of the 

active transducer set. 

If no transducer set is switched on, the bar is set to the first line of the table. 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON|OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.23 E-15


ESIB 

DELETE 

FACTOR/SET 

The DELETE FACTOR/SET softkey deletes the marked factor or set. To 

avoid deletion by mistake, deletion has to be confirmed. 

MESSAGE 

Do you really want to 

delete factor or set? 

YES 

NO 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:DELete 

PAGE UP 

The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys are used to scroll in large tables 

which cannot fully be displayed on the screen. 

PAGE DOWN 

New Entry and Editing of Transducer Factors 

A transducer factor is characterized by 

• reference values with frequency and transducer factor (Values) 

• the unit of the transducer factor (Unit) and 

• the name (Name) to distinguish between the different factors. 

During the entry, ESIB checks the transducer factor according to specific rules that have to be met to 

ensure trouble-free operation. 

• The frequencies for the reference values always have to be entered in ascending order. Otherwise, 

the entry is not accepted and the following message is displayed: 

Frequency Sequence! 

• The entered frequencies do not necessarily have to be set at ESIB, as only the values for the 

frequency display range are considered for a set sweep or scan. The minimum frequency for a 

reference value is 0 Hz, the maximum frequency 200 GHz. 

• The minimum or maximum value for a transducer factor is -200 dB or 200 dB. The unit "dB" means 

that the transducer factor is always logarithmic and has nothing to do with the physical transducer 

factor, which, for example, establishes the relationship between field strength and voltage into 50 

Ohm. If the minimum or maximum value is exceeded, ESIB signals: 

Min Level -200 dB or 

Max Level 200 dB. 

• Amplifiers have a negative transducer factor, attenuation values have to be entered as a positive 

transducer factor. 

Note: 

A unit activated by switching on the transducer has priority over a coded unit of the 

connected probe. 

With the exception of dB*/MHz, the softkeys for the unit in the menu under key LEVEL REF 

are inoperative with the transducer switched on. 

1088.7531.12 4.24 E-15

ESIB 


EDIT TRD 

FACTOR 

NEW TRD 

FACTOR/SET 

The EDIT TRD FACTOR and NEW FACT/SET softkeys 

both open the submenu for editing and entering new 

transducer factors. A precondition for the NEW 

FACTOR/SET softkey is that the selection bar is located 

in the table when the table TRANSDUCER FACTOR is 

called up. 

EDIT TRANSDUCER FACTOR 

Name: 

Antenna1 

Unit: 

dBuV/m 

Interpolation: LIN 

Comment: Ant1 and cable 1 

NO. 

FREQUENCY TDF/dB.. FREQUENCY 

20.0000 MHz 

25.0000 MHz 

30.0000 MHz 

40.0000 MHz 

50.0000 MHz 

60.0000 MHz 

70.0000 MHz 

80.0000 MHz 

25.5 

23.8 

20.5 

19.8 

20.0 

19.5 

19.1 

18.2 

TDF/dB.. 

EDIT TRD 

FACTOR 

TRD FACTOR 

NAME 

TRD FACTOR 

UNIT 

TRD FACTOR 

VALUES 

INSERT 

LINE 

DELETE 

LINE 

USER 

SAVE TRD 

FACTOR 

DRAW TRD 

FACTOR 

24 

25 

48 

49 

50 

The table with the data of the marked factor (the EDIT TRD FACTOR softkey) or an empty table is 

displayed in which the following entries are preset (the NEW FACTOR/SET softkey): 

Unit: 

dB 

Interpolation: LIN for linear frequency scaling 

LOG for logarithmic frequency scaling 

The characteristics of the factor can be entered in the header field of the table, the frequency and the 

transducer factor in the columns of the table. 

Name 

Entry of the name 

Unit 

Selection of unit 

Interpolation Selection of interpolation 

Comment Entry of a comment 

FREQUENCY Entry of the frequency of the reference points 

TDF/dB Entry of the transducer factor. 

An overwritten transducer factor remains stored in the background as long as the edited factor is stored 

with the SAVE TRD FACTOR softkey or until the table is closed. A factor overwritten by mistake can be 

restored by leaving the entry. 

1088.7531.12 4.25 E-15


ESIB 

TRD FACTOR 

NAME 

The TRD FACTOR NAME softkey activates the entry of the transducer factor 

characteristics in the header field of the table. 

Name - Entry of name 

A maximum of 8 characters is permissible for the name. The characters have 

to comply with the convention of DOS file names. The unit automatically 

stores all transducer factors with the extension .TDS. 

If an existing name is changed, the factor stored under the previous name is 

retained and will not be overwritten automatically with the new name. The 

previous factor can be deleted at a later time, using DELETE FACTOR/SET. 

Thus, factors can be copied. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]CORR:TRAN:SELect 

TRD FACTOR 

UNIT 

Unit - Selection of unit 

The unit of the transducer factor is selected from a selection box activated by 

the TRD FACTOR UNIT softkey. 

FACTOR UNIT 

dB 

dBm 

dBµV 

dBµV/m 

dBµA 

dBµA/m 

dBpW 

dBpT 

The default setting is dB. 


:[SENSe:]CORR:TRAN:UNIT 

Interpolation - Selection of interpolation 

Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the frequency 

reference points of the table. Selection is via the ENTER key which is toggled 

between LIN and LOG (toggle function). 

The following diagrams indicate the effect of the interpolation on the 

calculated characteristic: 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]CORR:TRAN:SCAL LIN|LOG 

Fig. 4-2 

Linear frequency axis and linear interpolation 

1088.7531.12 4.26 E-15

ESIB 


Fig. 4-3 

Logarithmic frequency axis and logarithmic interpolation 

Fig. 4-4 

Logarithmic frequency axis and linear interpolation 

Comment - Entry of a comment 

The comment can be freely selected. It can have a maximum number of 50 

characters. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENS:]CORR:TRAN:COMM 

TRD FACTOR 

VALUES 

INSERT 

LINE 

DELETE 

LINE 

The TRD FACTOR VALUES softkey activates the entry for the reference 

values of the transducer factor. 

The selection bar marks the first reference value. The desired reference 

values have to be entered in ascending frequency sequence. 

After entering the frequency the selection bar automatically jumps to the 

corresponding level value. After entering the first reference value the table 

can be edited. The two INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE softkeys are 

displayed. Individual values are changed at a later time by marking the field 

and by entering the new value. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENS:]CORR:TRAN:DATA 

, 

The INSERT LINE softkey inserts a free line above the marked reference 

value. When entering a new reference value into this line watch out for the 

ascending frequency sequence. 

The DELETE LINE softkey deletes the marked reference value (the whole 

line). The following reference values move up. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command -- 

SAVE TRD 

FACTOR 

The SAVE TRD FACTOR softkey saves the changed table in a file on the 

internal hard disk. 

If a transducer factor with the same name already exists, a corresponding 

query is performed beforehand. 

If the factor to be newly saved is currently switched on, the new values will 

immediately be valid. If a transducer set is switched on comprising the factor, 

the values will only be used when the set is switched on next time. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command - (executed automatically) 

1088.7531.12 4.27 E-15


ESIB 

New Entry and Editing of Transducer Sets 

A transducer set is characterized by: 

− maximum 10 ranges (Ranges) in which different transducer factors can be active 

− the combination of several transducer factors per range (Factor) 

− a transducer-set name (Name) 

EDIT 

TRD SET 

NEW TRD 

FACTOR/SET 

The EDIT TRD SET and NEW FACTOR/SET softkeys 

both open the submenu for editing and entering new 

transducer factors. A precondition for the NEW 

FACTOR/SET softkey is that the selection bar is located 

in the table TRANSDUCER SET. 

Name: Ant_Cab1 

Unit: dBµV/m 

Break: ON 

Comment: Ant. 1 and cable 1 

TRANSDUCER SET RANGES 

Start Stop 

20.00000 MHz 80.00000 MHz 

80.00000 MHz 400.00000 MHz 

400.0000 MHz 1.00000 GHz 

EDIT TRANSDUCER SET 

Sel 

fac 

EDIT 

TRANSD SET 

TRANSD SET 

NAME 

TRANSD SET 

UNIT 

TRANSD SET 

RANGES 

INSERT 

LINE 

DELETE 

LINE 

USER 

SAVE TRD 

SET 

DRAW 

TRD SET 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

The table with the data of the marked set (the EDIT TRD SET softkey) or an empty table in which the 

following entries are preset (the NEW FACTOR/SET softkey) is displayed: 

Unit: 

dB 

Break: 

NO 

The characteristics of the set can be entered in the header field of the table, the subranges in the 

columns of the set. 

Name 

Entry of the name 

Unit 

Selection of unit 

Break 

Activating the query when changing the subrange 

Comment Entry of a comment 

Start 

Entry of the start frequency of the subrange 

Stop 

Entry of the stop frequency of the subrange 

Sel Fac Selection of the transducer factors for the subrange 

1088.7531.12 4.28 E-15

ESIB 


An overwritten transducer set remains stored in the background as long as the edited factor is stored 

with the SAVE TRD SET softkey or until the table is closed. A set overwritten by mistake can be 

restored by leaving the entry. 

TRANSD SET 

NAME 

The TRD SET NAME softkey activates the entry of the transducer set 

characteristics in the header field of the table. 


A maximum of 8 characters is permissible for the name. The characters have 

to comply with the convention of DOS file names. The unit automatically 

stores all transducer sets with the extension .TDS. 

If an existing name is changed, the set stored under the previous name is 

retained and will not be overwritten automatically with the new name. The 

previous set can be deleted at a later time using DELETE FACTOR/SET. 

Thus, sets can be copied. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]CORR:TSET:SELect 

TRANSD SET 

UNIT 

Unit - Selection of unit 

The unit of the transducer set is selected from a selection box activated by 

the TRANSD SET UNIT softkey. 

The unit should be selected prior to the entry as it determines the settable 

transducer factors. The preset unit for new sets is "dB". The unit can no 

longer be changed when editing a set as the set of selected transducer 

factors will otherwise become inconsistent. 

SET UNIT 

dB 

dBm 

dBµV 

dBµV/m 

dBµA 

dBµA/m 

dBpW 

dBpT 


:[SENSe:]CORR:TSET:UNIT 

Break - Activation of query when changing a subrange 

The sweep can be stopped if the user changes the subrange and selects a 

new subrange of the transducer. A message informs the user that the limit 

has been attained. He can continue the sweep or switch off the transducer. 

The interruption is activated by setting Break to ON. Selection is by the 

ENTER key which toggles between ON and OFF (toggle function). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]CORR:TSET:BREak ON|OFF 

Comment - Entry of a comment 

The comment can be freely selected. It can have a maximum number of 50 

characters. 


:[SENSe:]CORR:TSET:COMMent 

1088.7531.12 4.29 E-15


ESIB 

TRANSD SET 

RANGES 

Softkey TRANSD SET RANGES activates the entry of subranges and the 

associated transducer factors. The selection bar marks the frequency values 

last active. 

Start - Entry of start frequency of subrange 

Stop - Entry of stop frequency of subrange 

The individual subranges have to be linked without a gap. That is why the 

start frequency is already defined from the second subrange (= stop 

frequency of previous range). 

After entering the first frequency value the table can be edited. The two 

INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE softkeys are displayed. Some values are 

changed at a later time by marking the field and by entering the new value. It 

should be noted that both the stop frequency of a particular subrange and the 

start frequency of the subsequent subrange are changed to the same extent. 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe 

,,.. 

Sel fac- Selection of factors for the subrange 

A check sign in column Sel Fac (select factor) indicates whether one or 

several transducer factors were selected for the subrange. 

The permissible transducer factors for the marked subrange can be selected 

in a selection box. Only factors matching with the unit of the set and fully 

covering the selected subrange are permissible. 

After each change of range limits, ESIB thus checks the factor list and, if 

required, rebuilds it. 

After reducing the start frequency or increasing the stop frequency of a range 

it may happen that the factors defined for this range no longer fully cover the 

range. These factors are deleted for this range when the transducer factor 

table is opened next time. 

A maximum of 4 transducer factors can be switched on at the same time in 

each subrange. If none of them is switched on, 0 dB is assumed as a factor 

for the whole subrange. 

SELECT TRANSDUCER FACTOR 

Name 

Antenna1 

Probe_A 

Probe_B 

Probe_C 

My_Probe 

Cable_1 

Cable_2 

Preamp 

Unit 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dBµV/m 

dB 

dB 

dB 

dB 


1088.7531.12 4.30 E-15

ESIB 


INSERT 

LINE 

DELETE 

LINE 

The INSERT LINE softkey inserts a free line above the marked subrange. 

The DELETE LINE softkey deletes the marked subrange (whole line). The 

following subranges move up. 

In both cases ESIB checks that the ranges follow each other without a gap. 


SAVE TRD 

SET 

The SAVE TRD SET softkey saves the changed table in a file on the internal 

hard disk. If a transducer name with the same name already exists, a 

corresponding query is performed beforehand: 

MESSAGE 

File exists! Do you 

want to overwrite? 

YES 

NO 

After pressing ENTER, the data set is overwritten on the hard disk. 

If the saved set is switched on, the new values will be used immediately. 


-- (executed automatically) 

PAGE UP 

PAGE UP 

The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys set the table to the next or 

previous page. 

The softkeys are locked during selection of factors in the right table. 

1088.7531.12 4.31 E-15


ESIB 

Preamplification and Preselection 

In the frequency range up to 7 GHz, ESIB has a preselection with switchable preamplifier which can be 

selected by the user in the analyzer mode. The preselection is always active in the receiver mode. 

Option ESIB-B2, Preamplification, extends the frequency range for preamplification to 26.5 GHz or 

40 GHz. 

The 20 dB preamplifier is available only if the preselection is switched on. 

Preselection 

The frequency range 20 Hz to 7 GHz is distributed over nine filter bands. Two fixed-tuned filters are 

used up to 2.025 MHz, six tracking passband filters from 2.025 to 1000 MHz and a fixed-tuned highpass 

filter above 1 GHz. 

The filters are switched by a relay at 150 kHz and by PIN-diode switches above 150 kHz. 

LP 150 kHz 

BP 150 kHz...2.025MHz 

BP 2.025...8.025MHz 

Preamplifier 

BP 8.025...25.025MHz 

20 Hz...7 GHz 20 Hz...7 GHz 

BP 25.025...80.025MHz 

BP 80.025...200.025MHz 

BP 200.025...500.025MHz 

BP 500.025 ...1000MHz 

HP 1GHz 

Fig. 4-6 Preselection and preamplifier 


PRESELECT 

ON OFF 

The PRESELECT ON/OFF softkey switches the preselection on or off. 

The softkey is available only in the analyzer mode. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut:PRESelection[:STATe] ON|OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.32 E-15

ESIB 


Preselection causes additional dependencies which are automatically taken into account in the coupled 

setting. 

• With the preselection active, the FFT bandwidths are not available. 

• With the preselection active, the start frequency is set to 150 kHz in the FULL SPAN setting to avoid 

permanent switching of the relay at the band limit of 150 kHz. 

• When the measurement is performed with activated preselection, it must be ensured that the 

resolution bandwidth is not greater than the preselection bandwidth. On entering the resolution 

bandwidth (RBW), this value is limited depending on the selected start frequency: 

Start frequency 

f start < 150 kHz 

Max. RBW 

100 kHz 

150 kHz ≤ f start < 8.025 MHz 500 kHz 

8.025MHz ≤ f start < 25.025 MHz 

2 MHz 

25.025 MHz ≤ f start < 80.025 MHz 5 MHz 

f start ≥ 80.025 MHz 

10 MHz 

• Due to the limited tuning speed of the tracking passband filters, the maximum sweep rate (7 GHz / 5 

ms) can no longer be attained with the preselection switched on. The minimum settable sweep time is 

obtained from the sum of the minimum possible sweep times in the associated filter bands. 

Filter band 

Min. sweep time for 

filter band 

20 Hz to 150 kHz - 

150 kHz to 2,025 MHz - 

2.025 to 8.025 MHz 500 ms 

8.025 to 25.025 MHz 50 ms 

25.025 to 80.025 MHz 50 ms 

80.025 to 200.025 MHz 50 ms 

200.025 to 500.025 MHz 50 ms 

500.025 to 1000 MHz - 

1000 to 7000 MHz - 

A longer sweep time is distributed over the filter bands such that only the times in the bands with the 

shorter sweep times are increased. The time available is uniformly distributed over all bands provided 

all bands are swept at the same speed. 

1088.7531.12 4.33 E-15


ESIB 

Preamplification 

Switching on the preamplifier diminishes the total noise figure of the ESIB, thus increasing the 

sensitivity. The preamplifier follows the preselection filters so that the risk of overdriving by strong out-ofband 

signals is reduced to a minimum. The signal level of the subsequent mixer is 20 dB higher so that 

the maximum input level is reduced by the gain of the preamplifier. The total noise figure of ESIB is 

reduced from approx. 18 dB to approx. 11 dB with the preamplifier switched on. The use of the 

preamplifier is recommended when measurements with a maximum sensitivity are to be performed. If 

the measurement should be performed at maximum dynamic range, the preamplifier should be switched 

off. 

The gain of the preamplifier is automatically considered in the level display. On switching on the 

preamplifier the RF attenuation or the reference level is adapted depending on the settings of the ESIB. 


PREAMP 

ON OFF 

The PREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the preamplifier on or off. 

The softkey is available only in the analyzer mode when the measurement 

with preselection is activated. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.34 E-15

ESIB 


Control of V-networks (LISNs) 


LISN 

LISN 

ESH2-Z5 

ENV 4200 

ESH3-Z5 

PRESELECT OFF 

ON OFF 

The LISN softkey opens the submenu including the settings 

required to control V-networks (LISNs). 

Softkeys ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200, ESH3-Z5 and OFF or PHASE 

N, PHASE L1, PHASE L2 and PHASE L3 as well as PE 

GROUNDED and PE FLOATING are toggle keys. Only one of 

them can be activated at a time. 

PHASE N 

PHASE L1 

PHASE L2 

PHASE L3 

PE 

GROUNDED 

PE 

FLOATING 

ESH2-Z5 

ENV 4200 

ESH3-Z5 

Softkeys ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200, ESH3-Z5 and OFF allow to select the V- 

network to be controlled via the user port. 

ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200 

ESH3-Z5 

OFF 

four-line V-network is controlled, 

two-line V-network is controlled, 

remote control is deactivated. 


INPut:LISN[:TYPE] TWOPhase | FOURphase | OFF 

OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.35 E-15


ESIB 

PHASE N 

PHASE L1 

PHASE L2 

Softkeys PHASE N, PHASE L1, PHASE L2 and PHASE L3 select the phase 

of the V-network on which the RFI voltage is to be measured. 

PHASE N 

PHASE L1 

PHASE L2 

RFI on phase N is measured, 

RFI on phase L1 is measured, 

RFI on phase L2 is measured 

(only for ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200), 

PHASE L3 RFI on phase L3 is measured 

(only for ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command INPut:LISN:PHASe L1 | L2 | L3 | N 

PHASE L3 

PE 

GROUNDED 

PE 

FLOATING 

Softkeys PE GROUNDED and PE FLOATING switch the protective earth 

conductor chokes on or off. 

PE GROUNDED 

protective earth conductor choke switched off, 

PE FLOATING protective earth conductor choke switched. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command INPut:LISN:PEARth GROunded | FLOating 

1088.7531.12 4.36 E-15

ESIB 


Enabling Firmware Options 


OPTIONS 

The OPTIONS softkey opens a submenu for entering keywords for new 

firmware options (Application Firmware Modules). Options which are already 

available are indicated in a table that is opened when the menu is called. 

ENABLE NEW 

OPTION 

The ENABLE OPTION softkey activates the entry of a 

keyword for a firmware option. 

One or several keywords may be specified in the entry 

field. When a valid keyword is entered, the message 

OPTION KEY OK appears in the info line and the option 

is written into the FIRMWARE OPTIONS table. 

The FIRMWARE OPTIONS table can also be displayed 

using the FIRMWARE OPTIONS softkey in the INFO 

menu. 

If a keyword is invalid the message OPTION KEY 

INVALID is displayed in the info line. 


External Reference Oscillator 

In general, the ESIB can generate all internal oscillators from either the internal or an external reference 

oscillator. A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source. A reference oscillator 

output is also available at the rear panel via the EXT REF IN/OUT connector. 

This output can be used, e.g., to synchronize other instruments to the ESIB. This connector can also be 

used as an input connector for application of an external frequency standard. The ESIB requires that the 

frequency of the external standard be entered so that the internal oscillators can be synchronized to it. 

CONFIGURATION SETUP Menu: 

REFERENCE 

INT EXT 

The REFERENCE INT EXT softkey toggles between the internal and external 

references. 


:[SENSe:]ROSC:SOURce INT | EXT 

EXT REF 

FREQUENCY 

The EXT REF FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry of the frequency of 

the external source. 

Range of input values is 1 MHz to 16 MHz in 1 MHz steps. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13 MHz 

1088.7531.12 4.37 E-15


ESIB 

Service Functions 

The service menu offers a variety of additional functions which are used for maintenance and/or trouble 

shooting. The service functions are not necessary for normal measurements, however, incorrect use 

can impair the functionality and/or data integrity of the ESIB. Therefore, many of the functions can only 

be used after entering a password. 


SERVICE 

SERVICE 

INPUT 

RF 

SERVICE 

CAL GEN 

120 MHZ 

The SERVICE softkey calls the service 

submenu. 

INPUT 

CAL 

NOISE 

SOURCE 

REFERENCE 

ADJUST 

PULSE 

25 Hz 

PULSE 

100 HZ 

PULSE 

100 KHZ AB 

PULSE 

100 KHZ CD 

ENTER 

PASSWORD 

INPUT 

RF 

INPUT 

CAL 

The INPUT RF and INPUT CAL softkeys are mutually exclusive selection 

switches. Only one switch can be activated at any one time. They switch the 

input to the ESIB between the INPUT RF connector (default) and the internal 

calibration source (120 MHz, -40 dBm). 

After PRESET, RECALL or ESIB power on, the INPUT RF is always selected. 


:DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] RF| CAL 

NOISE 

SOURCE 

The NOISE SOURCE softkey switches the supply voltage for an external 

noise source on or off. The source is connected to the NOISE SOURCE 

connector on the instrument’s rear panel. 

The dc voltages on the connector are described in Chapter 8. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.38 E-15

ESIB 


CONFIGURATION SETUP SERVICE menu: 

REFERENCE 

ADJUST 

REFERENCE 

ADJUST 

REFERENCE 

REFERENCE 

PROG 

The REFERENCE ADJUST softkey opens a submenu used to 

adjust the frequency precision of the reference oscillator. 

The value should be modified only after the frequency 

precision was checked and found to be erroneous (setting 

range 0 to 4095). 

For more information about how to perform the adjustment of 

the frequency precision refer to service manual instrument 

(delivered with the ESIB). 

The modified reference value is preserved when the menu is 

closed. 

The current adjustment value can be permanently stored in an 

EEPROM in the instrument. 

Caution: 

As the specifications of the whole instrument 

depend directly on the setting of the reference 

oscillator (frequency precision), storing incorrect 

adjustment values should be avoided. 

Note: If no adjustment value has been stored 

(REFERENCE PROG softkey) before the analyzer 

is switched off and on again, the factory-set value 

of the reference frequency or the value that has 

been programmed last will be used. 

REFERENCE 

REFERENCE 

PROG 

The REFERENCE softkey adjusts the frequency precision of the 

reference oscillator. 


:[SENSe:]ROSC:[INT:]TUNe 

The REFERENCE PROG softkey stores the current adjustment 

value in an EEPROM in the instrument. 


:[SENSe:]ROSC:[INT:]TUNe:SAVe 

ENTER 

PASSWORD 

The ENTER PASSWORD softkey allows the entry of a password. 

The ESIB has a variety of service functions which, if incorrectly used, can 

impair the functionality of the instrument. These functions can only be 

accessed with a password (ENTER PASSWORD). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] 

1088.7531.12 4.39 E-15


ESIB 

CAL GEN 

120 MHZ 

The CAL GEN 120 MHZ softkey switches on the 120 MHz calibration source 

(default setting). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command - 

PULSE 

25 HZ 

The PULSE 25 HZ softkey switches on the 25 Hz pulse generator. 


PULSE 

100 HZ 

The PULSE 100 HZ softkey switches on the 100 Hz pulse generator. 


PULSE 

100 KHZ AB 

The PULSE 100 KHZ AB switches on the low frequency 100 kHz pulse 

generator. 


PULSE 

100 KHZ CD 

The PULSE 100 KHZ CD switches on the high frequency 100 kHz pulse 

generator. 


1088.7531.12 4.40 E-15

ESIB 


Setting the Interface Configuration and Time 

The GENERAL SETUP softkey opens a submenu in which the general instrument setup can be entered. 

The current settings are displayed as tables on the screen where they may be edited. 


GENERAL 

SETUP 

GENERAL 

SETUP 

GPIB 

ADDRESS 

USER 

GPIB ADRESS 

19 

USER PORTS 

PORT A 

PORT B 

TIME AND DATE 

Time 

Date 

21:59 

01 Oct 1994 

USER 

PORT A 

USER 

PORT B 

COM 1 

Direction 

Value 

Input 

10101010 

Output 

00010001 

COM 2 

COM PORTS 

TIME 

Baud 

Bits 

Parity 

Stopbits 

HW-Handshake 

SW-Handshake 

Owner 

COM 1 

9600 

8 

None 

1 

None 

XON/XOFF 

Instrument 

COM 2 

1200 

8 

None 

1 

None 

None 

Instrument 

DATE 

MONITOR 

CONNECTED 

KEY CLICK 

ON OFF 

IEC/IEEE-Bus Address Selection 

CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu: 

GPIB 

ADDRESS 

The GPIB ADDRESS softkey activates the entry of the IEC/IEEE-bus 

address. 

The range is 0 to 31. The default setting is 20. 


:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 20 

1088.7531.12 4.41 E-15


ESIB 

User Port Configuration 

The instrument provides two parallel interfaces, each of which is 8 bits wide. Over these ports, arbitrary 

bit patterns can be output or input. The interfaces are designated USER PORT A and USER PORT B. 


USER 

PORT A 

The USER PORT A and USER PORT B softkeys activate the columns PORT 

A and PORT B, respectively, in the USERPORTS table for entry of the 

parameters for both of the parallel interfaces in the instrument. Because the 

two interfaces are configured in the same manner, how to configure an 

interface is described in the following using USER PORT A. 

The following parameters need to be configured in the table: 

Direction 

Direction of data transmission 

Value 

Indication/entry of current value 

USERPORTS 

Direction 

Value 

PORT A 

INPUT 

10101010 

PORT B 

OUTPUT 

Direction – Direction of data transmission 

The DIRECTION parameter determines in which direction the interface 

transmits data. 

INPUT read operation 

OUTPUT write operation 

DIRECTION 

INPUT 

OUTPUT 


:INPut:UPORt:STATe ON|OFF 

:OUTPut:UPORt:STATe ON|OFF 

Value – Indication/Entry of current value 

The VALUE parameter shows the current value of the data at the port for 

data input as well as for data output. The displayed data is in binary format 

with the least significant bit (LSB) on the right. 

If the port is configured as an OUTPUT then, the displayed value can be 

edited. Data entry must also be in binary format (i.e., only the digits 0 and 1 

are accepted). 

VALUE 

00010001 


:INPut:UPORt[:VALue]? 

:OUTPut:UPORt[:VALue] 

1088.7531.12 4.42 E-15

ESIB 


Serial Interface Configuration 


COM 

PORT 1 

COM 

PORT 2 

The COM PORT 1 and COM PORT 2 softkeys activate the columns COM1 

and COM2, respectively, for entry of the serial interface parameters Since the 

two interfaces are configured in the same manner, how to configure an 

interface is described in the following using COM PORT 1. 

The following parameters must be in the table: 

Baud rate 

data transmission rate 

Bits 

number of data bits 

Parity 

bit parity check 

Stop bits 

number of stop bits 

HW-Handshake hardware handshake protocol 

SW-Handshake software handshake protocol 

Owner 

assignment of the serial port to the ESIB or computer 

COM PORTS 

Baud 

Bits 

Parity 

Stopbits 

HW-Handshake 

SW-Handshake 

Owner 

COM 1 

9600 

8 

None 

1 

None 

XON/XOFF 

Instrument 

COM 2 

1200 

8 

None 

1 

None 

None 

Instrument 

Note: 

A serial interface (COM1 or COM2) cannot be used for another 

purpose if a mouse is connected to it. 

Baud – Data transmission rate 

Allowed are the indicated values between 110 and 19200 baud. The default 

setting is 9600 baud. 

BAUD RATE 

19200 

9600 

4800 

1200 

600 

300 

110 


:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD 9600 

Bits – Number of data bits per word 

For the text transmission without special characters, 7 bits are adequate. For 

binary data as well as text with special characters, 8 bits must be selected 

(default setting). 

BITS 

7 

8 


:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BITS 7 | 8 

1088.7531.12 4.43 E-15


ESIB 

Parity – Bit parity check 

NONE no parity check (default setting) 

EVEN even parity check 

ODD odd parity check 

PARITY 

NONE 

EVEN 

ODD 


:SYSTem:COMM:SERial[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] 

EVEN| ODD| NONE 

Stop bits – Number of stop bits 

Available are 1 and 2. The default setting is 1 stop bit. 

STOPBITS 

1 

2 


:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:SBITs 1|2 

HW-Handshake – Hardware handshake protocol 

The integrity of data transmission can be improved through the use of a 

hardware handshake protocol which prevents uncontrolled transmission of 

data and the resulting possible loss of data bytes. With the hardware 

handshaking procedure, additional interface lines are used to transmit 

acknowledge signals with which the data transmission can be controlled and, 

if necessary, stopped until the receiver is ready to receive data again. 

A prerequisite for handshaking is, however, that the interface lines (DTR and 

RTS) are provided between the sender and receiver. For a simple, 3-wire 

connection, this is not the case and a hardware handshake cannot be 

realized. 

Default setting is NONE. 

HW-HANDSHAKE 

None 

DTR/RTS 


:SYSTem:COMM:SERial:CONTrol:DTR IBFull|OFF 

:SYSTem:COMM:SERial:CONTrol:RTS IBFull|OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.44 E-15

ESIB 


SW-Handshake – Software handshake protocol 

Besides the hardware handshake procedure using interface lines, it is also 

possible to achieve the same effect by using a software handshake protocol. 

In this case, control bytes are transmitted in addition to the normal data bytes. 

These control bytes can be used, as necessary, to stop data transmission 

until the receiver is ready to receive data again. 

In contrast to hardware handshaking, software handshaking can be realized 

even for a simple, 3-wire connection. 

Software handshaking, however, does have one limitation. Software 

handshaking cannot be used for the transmission of binary data since, the 

control characters XON and XOFF require bit combinations that are also 

used for binary data transmission. 

Default setting is NONE. 

SW-HANDSHAKE 

None 

XON/XOFF 


:SYSTem:COMM:SERial[:RECeive]:PACE XON|NONE 

Owner – Assignment of the interface 

The serial interface can be assigned either to the instrument or the computer 

(operating system, OS). 

INSTRUMENT 

OS 

Assignment to the instrument means that outputs to the 

port by the OS are not possible as any output would be 

lost. 

Assignment to the operating system means that the 

instrument cannot use the port, i.e. it is not possible to 

remote control the instrument via this port. 

OWNER 

INSTRUMENT 

OS 


1088.7531.12 4.45 E-15


ESIB 

Setting the Date and Time 


TIME 

The TIME softkey activates the entry of time for the internal real time clock. In 

the corresponding dialog box, the time is partitioned into two input fields so 

that hours and minutes can be entered independently. 

TIME 

TIME 10 : 33 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :SYSTem:TIME 0...23, 0...59, 0...59 

DATE 

The DATE softkey activates the entry of the date of the internal real-time 

clock. In the corresponding dialog box, the date is partitioned into 3 input 

fields so that day, month and year can be input separately. 

For the selection of the month, pressing a units key opens a list of 

abbreviations for the months. 

DATE 

MONTH 

DATE 10 MAY 1995 

JAN 

FEB 

MAR 

APR 

MAY 

JUN 

JUL 

AUG 

SEP 

OCT 

NOV 

DEC 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :SYSTem:DATE ,, 

Connecting the External Monitor 

Submenu CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP: 

MONITOR 

CONNECTED 

The MONITOR CONNECTED softkey informs the unit that an external 

monitor is available at PC MONITOR connector 

The external monitor displays the Windows NT mask. 


Switching the Beeper ON/OFF 


KEY CLICK 

ON OFF 

The KEY CLICK ON/OFF softkey switches the beeper on or off. The beeper 

acknowledges each key stroke with a beep. 


1088.7531.12 4.46 E-15

ESIB 



New firmware versions can be installed from the integral disk drive. The firmware update kit contains 

several disks. 

The installation program is called in the SETUP menu. 

CONFIGURATION SETUP sidemenu: 

FIRMWARE 

UPDATE 

FIRMWARE 

UPDATE 

UPDATE 

The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey opens the submenu for 

the installion of a new firmware version. 

RESTORE 

UPDATE 

The UPDATE softkey starts the installation program and guides the user 

through the remaining steps of the update procedure. 

RESTORE 

The RESTORE softkey restores the previous firmware version 

Compatibility to FSE Instrument Family 

CONFIGURATION SETUP sidemenu: 

FSE MODE 

ON OFF 

The FSE MODE ON/OFF softkey determines whether theESIB is FSEcompatible 

after a preset. Following a preset, the ESIB has not the same 

settings as an FSE. With compatibility, the ESIB has the same default 

settings as FSE after a preset. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible OFF | FSE 

1088.7531.12 4.47 E-15

Manual Control 

ESIB 

Status Display-Remote/Manual Control – STATUS Key 

Group 

STATUS 

SRQ 

REMOTE 

LOCAL 

The SRQ LED, the REMOTE LED and the LOCAL. key are contained in the 

STATUS key group. 

é 

é 

é 

The SRQ LED indicates that a service request from the instrument has 

been asserted on the IEC Bus. 

The REMOTE LED indicates that the instrument is under remote control. 

The LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote to manual control, 

with the assumption that the remote controller has not previously set the 

LOCAL LOCKOUT function. 

A change in the control mode comprises: 

- Enabling the Front Panel Keys 

Under remote control, the softkey menu is turned off and all keys, with 

the exception of PRESET and LOCAL, are disabled. Returning to 

manual mode enables all disabled keys. The main menu of the current 

mode is selected as the softkey menu.. 

- Turning off the REMOTE LED 

- Generating the message OPERATION COMPLETE 

If the synchronization via *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is active when the 

LOCAL softkey is pressed, any measurement procedure that is running 

is aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding 

bits in the registers of the status reporting system. 

- Setting Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event Status Register 

If the status reporting system is configured appropriately, setting this bit 

immediately elicits a service request (SRQ) which is used to inform the 

controller that the user wishes to return to front-panel control. This 

information can be used, e.g., to interrupt the control program so that the 

user can make the necessary manual corrections to instrument settings. 

This bit is set each time the LOCAL key is pressed. 

é The LOCAL key aborts a running macro. The continuation of the macro is 

not possible. 


CALL IBLOC(receiver%) 

1065.6016.12 4.48 E-15

ESIB 

Documentation of Measurement Results 

Measurement Documentation – HARDCOPY Key Group 

Note: 

The installation of additional printer drives is described in chapter 1, section "Installation and 

Configuration of Printers". 

Printing Data – START Key 

The instrument uses the printer function of Windows NT to output hardcopies. Any printer supported by 

Windows NT can be used. In addition, the instrument permits data output in the usual data formats 

WMF, EWMF and BMP which enable hardcopies to be directly inserted into other documents. Network 

printers can be used if the instrument is connected to a network. 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SE NG 

The START key initiates the printing of measurement/ instrument status data. 

The instrument can distinguish between two different printers, each of which 

may be individually configured, e.g., a laser printer and a ink jet printer. All 

documents are printed on the printer which is currently active. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :HCOPy[:IMMediate] 

Pressing the HARDCOPY START key starts the print job. The settings under Windows NT and in the 

HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu determine the printer configuration. All of the display items to be printed 

out are written to the printer buffer of Windows NT. Since the printer runs in the background, the 

instrument may be operated immediately after pressing the START key. 

When COPY SCREEN is selected in menu HARDCOPY SETTINGS, all the measurememt diagrams 

with traces and status displays are printed as they appear on the screen. Softkeys, open tables and data 

entry fields are not printed out. Specific traces can be printed out with the COPY TRACE function. With 

COPY TABLE, tables can be printed out. 

If CLIPBOARD is active in the HARDCOPY DEVICE submenu the clipboard can be used to directly 

transfer hardcopies to Windows applications. The copy is written in the clipboard by pressing 

HARDCOPY START. The user can then change to another Word document and insert the clipboard 

content into the document with EDIT - PASTE by using the key combination CTRL+V. 

If the PRINT TO FILE option in the HARDCOPY DEVICE submenu is selected, the printout is directed to 

a file. When the HARDCOPY START is pressed , the file name to which the output data are to be 

written is requested. 

If the START key is pressed while printing is in progress, a second output can be released which can 

also be joined to the printer queue. Any number of print jobs can be released consecutively. 

Current print jobs can be aborted only by cancelling the entries in the Windows NT printer queue. After 

starting the print a printer symbol is displayed in the task bar near the time indication. 

1088.7531.12 4.49 E-15


ESIB 

A double-click on this symbol opens a window containing the entries of the printer queue. The relevant 

print order can be cancelled by marking it with the mouse and pressing the DEL key. 

While a print job is in progress, problems may occur in the printer. If, while printing, the printer issues a 

PAPER OUT message, i.e., no more paper is available, the user will be prompted by the following 

message 

ERROR 

Paper out on device LPT 

(manual feed)? 

ABORT 

CONTINUE 

to load paper into the printer. The print job will then be either continued (CONTINUE) or aborted 

(ABORT). 

Switchover between b/w and colored printouts is possible with the COLOR ON/OFF softkey provided 

that an appropriate printer is connected. The colors of the printout correspond exactly to those on the 

screen, ie a red trace will be output in red. 

To change the colors of the objects on the printout, the screen colors have to be changed in DISPLAY- 

CONFIG DISPLAY menu. One exception is the color of the background and the color of the diagrams. 

The output background is always white irrespective of the screen color and the diagrams are always 

black. 

If several traces are to be output one after the other on the same sheet different colors can be chosen 

for each trace with the TRC COLOR AUTO INC softkey (Trace Color Auto Increment). 

On most b/w printers, a better printout of the color screen is obtained on hardcopies if the color 

information is converted into gray shades. For this, the color output in menu HARDCOPY SETTINGS is 

to be activated (COLOR ON). 

1088.7531.12 4.50 E-15

ESIB 


Printing Configuration – SETTINGS Key 

HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu: 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTINGS 

COPY 

SEL ITEMS 

SELECT 

ITEMS 

HARDCOPY 

SETTINGS 

COPY 

SCREEN 

COPY 

TRACE 

COPY 

TABLE 

SELECT 

QUADRANT 

ENTER 

TEXT 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

COLOR 

ON OFF 

TRC COLOR 

AUTO INC 

The SETTINGS key opens the menu to configure the printout. 

The recommended procedure for configuring the printout is as 

follows: 

• Configure the desired printer and select the interface over 

which the output is to take place by using Windows NT and 

the HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey. 

• Select the display items to be printed with the COPY 

SCREEN, COPY TRACE softkeys. 

• Select between coloured and b/w printouts with the COLOR 

ON/ OFF and TRC COLOR AUTO INC softkeys. 

• Enter comment applicable to the diagram or add a title for the 

overall printout by using the ENTER TEXT softkey. 

• Select the page format (QUADRANT, FULL PAGE) through 

use of the SELECT QUADRANT softkey. 

The COPY SCREEN, COPY TRACE and COPY TABLE 

softkeys are selection switches, i.e., only one function can be 

enabled at any one time. The push buttons are used for 

selection only and do not initiate a print job. The actual printing is 

initiated by the HARDCOPY START key. 

1088.7531.12 4.51 E-15


ESIB 

Selection of Displayed Elements and Colour Settings 

HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu: 

COPY 

SCREEN 

The COPY SCREEN softkey selects the output of test results. 

All the diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, display lines, limit lines etc. 

are printed out as long as they are displayed on the screen. Softkeys, tables 

and open data entry fields are not printed out. However, comments, title, 

date, and time entered are printed out at the bottom of the printout. The logo 

appears at the top left of the printout. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :HCOPy:ITEM:ALL 

COPY 

TRACE 

The COPY TRACE softkey selects the output of all traces displayed on the 

screen without any auxiliary information. Specifically, no markers or display 

lines are printed. 


:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:STATe ON|OFF 

COPY 

TABLE 

COLOR 

ON OFF 

The COPY TABLE softkey selects the output of all tables visible displayed on 

the screen. 


:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABle:STATe ON|OFF 

The COLOR ON/ OFF softkey selects a coloured or b/w printout. 

After having changed the printer driver or the hardcopy device (in submenu, 

HARDCOPY SETTINGS) the softkey is automatically switched to ON. 

One exception is printer driver HP PCL4 which only supports b/w printouts. In 

this case, the softkey cannot be operated. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF 

TRC COLOR 

AUTO INC 

The TRC COLOR AUTO INC softkey automatically switches the colours of 

the traces on to the next printout. On the second printout, trace 1 has the 

colour of trace 2, trace 2 the colour of trace 3 etc. The fourth printout starts 

with the first colour. With the softkey switched off, the colours of the traces 

are reset to their original state. 

When changing the printer driver or the hardcopy device (both in submenu 

HARDCOPY SETTINGS) as well as the selection b/w printout (softkey 

COLOR ON/ OFF in position OFF), softkey TRC COLOR AUTO INC is 

switched off. 


:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:CAINcrement ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.52 E-15

ESIB 


Selection of Hardcopy Format 

HARDCOPY SETTINGS-SELECT QUADRANT submenu: 

SELECT 

QUADRANT 

SELECT 

QUADRANT 

UPPER 

LEFT 

LOWER 

LEFT 

UPPER 

RIGHT 

LOWER 

RIGHT 

The SELECT QUADRANT softkey calls the the submenu for 

selection of QUADRANTthe location of the display screen 

graphics on the printed page. 

FULL 

PAGE 

FULL 

PAGE 

The FULL PAGE softkey switches quadrant printing off, i.e., printing now 

takes place at full size. The information as to which quadrant was last 

selected is also lost. FULL PAGE is the default setting. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL 

UPPER 

LEFT 

LOWER 

LEFT 

UPPER 

RIGHT 

The UPPER LEFT, LOWER LEFT as well as UPPER RIGHT, LOWER 

RIGHT softkeys select the page quadrants where the printed data will be 

positioned. In this case, the actual size of the data printed on the page is 

reduced to 25% of normal size. This reduction is independent of how the 

graphics are distributed on the display screen. Thus, for two measurement 

windows (SPLIT SCREEN), both measurement diagrams shown on the 

display are placed in the chosen quadrant. Thus, up to a maximum of 8 

measurement windows can be printed on one page. (4 print commands for a 

SPLIT SCREEN display, each to a different quadrant) 


:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 1|2|3|4 

LOWER 

RIGHT 

1088.7531.12 4.53 E-15


ESIB 

Entry of Comment Text 

HARDCOPY SETTINGS-ENTER TEXT submenu: 

ENTER 

TEXT 

ENTER 

TEXT 

COMMENT 

SCREEN A 

COMMENT 

SCREEN B 

The ENTER TEXT softkey calls the submenu for editing the 

commentary for the individual windows. The comment text 

appears in the print-out, but does not appear on the display 

screen. 

If a comment is not to appear on the printout, it has to be deleted. 

By pressing PRESET, all comments will be deleted. 

TITLE 

COMMENT 

SCREEN A 

COMMENT 

SCREEN B 

The COMMENT SCREEN A softkey opens an entry field in which 

a comment of at most two lines (60 characters per line) can be 

entered for screen A or screen B. If the user enters more than 60 

characters, the overflow characters appear on the second line on 

the print-out. At any point, a manual line-feed can be forced by 

entering the @ character. The comment is printed below the 

corresponding screen. 


:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT 

TITLE 

The TITLE softkey activates a single line entry box for entering a 

title for the complete print-out with a maximum of 60 characters. 


:HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:TEXT 

1088.7531.12 4.54 E-15

ESIB 


Selection and Configuration of the Printer 

The instrument permits two different printers to be configured. One of the devices is defined as the 

active device and can be used for hardcopies. 

The printers are mainly installed and configured under Windows NT and and the settings are valid for all 

Windows applications (see Chapter 1, section "Connecting an Printer"). The active device and the 

settings which concern only the output of hardcopies are selected in menu HARDCOPY DEVICE.. 

HARDCOPY SETTINGS submenu: 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

SETTINGS 

DEVICE 1 

SETTINGS 

DEVICE 2 

ENABLE 

DEV1 DEV2 

. 

. 

. 

The HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey switches to the submenu 

which is used for the selection/configuration of the two printers. 

When the sub-menu is called, the corresponding table is 

displayed. The SETTINGS DEVICE 1 softkey is active and the 

selection bar is located at the DEVICE1 line in the corresponding 

column of the table. 


Device1 




Device2 

CLIPBOARD 



SETTINGS 

DEVICE 1 

SETTINGS 

DEVICE 2 

The SETTINGS DEVICE 1 softkey permits the selection and configuration of the 

printer DEVICE 1. The SETTINGS DEVICE 2 softkey is used to configure DEVICE 

2. 

The actual selection of the active printer takes place with the ENABLE DEV1 DEV2 

softkey in the HARDCOPY DEVICE sub-menu. 

Device 

The selection of the printer/language for DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 is made in this 

line. 


Device1 




DEVICE 

Device2 

CLIPBOARD 

CLIPBOARD 



ENHANCED METAFILE 


BITMAP FILE 

HP DeskJet 660C 

1088.7531.12 4.55 E-15


ESIB 

Three file formats and the Windows NT clipboard are always available, even if a 

printer has not yet been installed under Windows NT. All installed printers are listed 

below in alphabetic order. 

The printer installation is described in Chapter 1, Section "Installation and 

Configuration of Printers". 

CLIPBOARD 

The hardcopies are copied to the Windows NT clipboard. This 

permits to obtain a printout of high quality which can be directly 

inserted into other Windows applications (menu EDIT | PASTE or 

key combination CTRL+V). The lines ’Print to File’, ’Orientation’ and 

’GPIB Address’ are deactivated. 

WINDOWS METAFILE and ENHANCED METAFILE 

WMF and EWMF are vector graphics formats which can be 

imported by most graphics and editing programs. EMF is 

recommended for recent Windows32 applications. 

BITMAP FILE BMP is a bitmap format which can also be imported by most 

programs. 

When WMF, EWMF and BMP are selected, the line "Print to File" is automatically 

set to ON and line "Orientation" deactivated. 

IEC/IEEE-bus commands 

:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage WMF|EWMF |BMP |GDI 

:HCOPy:DESTination 

"MMEM"|"SYST:COMM:PRIN"|"SYST:COMM:CLIP" 

:HCOPy:ITEM:FFEed:STATe ON | OFF 

Print to File 

With "Print to File" ON, the printout is directed to a file. In this case the user is 

prompted to enter a file name on starting the printout. 

Note: This setting is coupled to the corresponding setting under Windows NT. 

IEC/IEEE-bus commands :HCOPy:DESTination "MMEM" 

:MMEMory:NAME 

Orientation 

In this line, the print format of the output page is set to either vertical (= PORTRAIT) 

or horizontal (= LANDSCAPE). 

ENABLE 

DEV1 DEV2 

The ENABLE DEV1 / DEV2 softkey determines the active printer. The default 

printer is DEVICE 1, i.e., all output takes place on DEVICE 1. 


-- (The numeric suffix after HCOPy:IMMediate 

denotes the first or second device.) 

1088.7531.12 4.56 E-15

ESIB 

Memory Configuration 

Saving and Recalling Data Sets – MEMORY Key Group 

The keys in the MEMORY group call the following functions: 

• Functions for managing storage media (CONFIG). This includes among others functions listing files, 

formatting storage media, copying, and deleting/renaming files. 

• Save/recall functions for saving (SAVE) settings such as instrument configurations 

(measurement/display settings, etc.) and saving measurement results from working memory to 

permanent storage media, or for recalling (RECALL) stored data. 

The ESIB can internally store complete instrument settings with instrument configurations and 

measurement data in the form of data-sets. The data are stored on the internal hard disk or, if if 

required, on an external disk. The hard-disk drive and the floppy-disk drive are assigned logical names 

as usual in PC applications: 

Disk drive A: 

hard disk C: 

In addition to saving and recalling complete instrument settings, it is also possible to save/recall subsets 

of settings. Configuration data and measurement values are stored in separate files. These files have 

the same name as the data set but have a different extension. A data set therefore comprises several 

files which have the same name but different extensions (see Table 4-2). 

When saving or recallong a data set, the subsets which are to be saved or recallong can be selected in 

the corresponding menus. This makes it easy to recall specific instrument settings. 

When saving and recalling data via the SAVE and RECALL menus, data subsets are selected in a table 

in the sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO SAVE/RECALL. The relationship between the designations in the table 

and the contents of the data subsets is shown in Table 4-2 

The saved data set files can be copied from one storage medium (e.g. drive C:) to another (e.g. drive 

A:) or to another directory using the functions found in the MEMORY CONFIG menu. However, do not 

change the file names and extensions when copying. Table 4-2 hows how extensions are assigned to 

data subsets.. 

1088.7531.12 4.57 E-15


ESIB 

Table 4-2 

Assignment of extensions to data subsets 

Extension Contents Designation in the table 

SEL ITEMS TO 

SAVE/RECALL 

Configuration data: .SET current settings of the measurement 

hardware and designation, if present 

HARDWARE SETTINGS 

.LIN data-point tables for the active limit lines LINES 

.LIA all defined limit lines ALL LINES 

.CFG 

current configuration of general instrument 

parameters 

GENERAL SETUP 

.HCS configuration for hardcopy output HARDCOPY 

.TCI 

.TS1 

.TS2 

.TC1 

.TC2 

.CL 

.CLA 

tracking generator settings 

(only with option FSE-B10/11) 

settings for source calibration 


correction data for source calibration 


used conversion loss (cvl) tables 

(only with option FSE-B21, External Mixer 

Output) 

all conversion loss (cvl) tables 

(only with option FSE-B21, External Mixer 

Output) 

SOURCE CAL 

SOURCE CAL 

SOURCE CAL 

USED CVL TABLES 

ALL CVL TABLES 

.TS activated transducer set TRANSDUCER 

.TSA all transducer sets ALL TRANSDUCER 

.TF transducer factor TRANSDUCER 

.TFA all transducer factors ALL TRANSDUCER 

.COL user-defined color settings COLOR SETUP 

Measurement results: .TR1....4 measurement data trace 1 to trace 4 TRACE1...4 

1088.7531.12 4.58 E-15

ESIB 


Configuration of Memory – CONFIG Key 

MEMORY CONFIG menu: 

MEMORY 

SAVE 

RECALL 

CONFIG 

The CONFIG key opens a menu for managing storage media and files. 

The Drive Management table displays the name and label of the storage 

medium as well as the free memory. 

The File Management table displays the files in the current directory and 

indicates if any subdirectories are present. 

If a directory name is selected, the ESIB automatically changes to this 

directory. Selection of the entry ’..’ moves the ESIB to the next highest 

directory level. 

Note: It is not possible to change menus as long as a file operation is 

running. 

USER 

DRIVE MANAGEMENT 

DRIVE: HARDDISK C: LABEL: 

FREE MEM: 394:510.336 

MEMORY 

CONFIG 

DISK 

COPY 

PATH: 

C:\USER\CONFIG 

FILE MANAGEMENT 

EDIT 

PATH 

DISK 

LABEL 

FILE NAME 

.. 

SETTING1.DRW 

SETTING2.DRW 

SETTING3.DRW 

SETTING4.DRW 

DATE 

10.MAY.93 

15.MAY.93 

17.MAY.93 

28.MAY.93 

TIME 

10:25:18 

13:08:27 

08:15:21 

17:05:42 

SIZE 

68.175 kB 

73.283 kB 

174.315 kB 

1.236812 MB 

COPY 

DELETE 

FORMAT 

DISK 

UNDELETE 

RENAME 

MAKE 

DIRECTORY 

SORT MODE 

PAGE UP 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

PAGE DOWN 

EDIT 

PATH 

The EDIT PATH softkey activates the entry of the directory which will be used 

for subsequent file operations. 

The new path is included in the FILE MANAGEMENT table. 


:MMEMory:MSIS ’C:\’ 

:MMEMory:CDIRectory ’C:\user\data’ 

1088.7531.12 4.59 E-15


ESIB 

COPY 

The COPY softkey activates the entry of the destination for the copy 

operation. 

By prefixing a disk drive letter (e.g. C:), a file can also be copied to another 

storage medium. When the ENTER key is pressed, the selected 

files/directories are copied. 


:MMEMory:COPY ’C:\user\data\setup.cfg’,’A:’ 

DELETE 

The DELETE softkey deletes the selected files. 

To prevent accidental deletion of data, confirmation by the user is requested. 


:MMEMory:DELete ’TEST01.HCP’ 

:MMEMory:RDIRectory ’C:\test’ 

RENAME 

The RENAME softkey activates the entry of a new name for the selected file 

or directory. 


:MMEMory:MOVE ’TEST.CFG’, ’SETUP.CFG’ 

MAKE 

DIRECTORY 

The MAKE DIRECTORY softkey creates directories/sub-directories. The use 

of sub-directories is recommended as a way of structuring the storage 

medium to make it easier to navigate. 

When entering a subdirectory, entry of an absolute path name (e.g.; 

"\USER\MEAS") as well as the path relative to the current directory (e.g., 

"..\MEAS") is possible. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:MDIRectory ’C:\user\data’ 

SORT MODE 

The SORT MODE softkey activates the selection of the sort criteria for the 

files listed in the FILE MANAGEMENT table. 

SORT MODE 

by NAME 

by DATE/TIME 

by EXTENSION 

Directory names are at the top of the list after the entry for the next highest 

directory level (".."). 


FORMAT 

DISK 

The FORMAT DISK softkey formats disks located in drive A:. 

To prevent accidental destruction of disks data, confirmation by the user is 

requested. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:INITialize 

1088.7531.12 4.60 E-15

ESIB 

Saving Data Sets 

Saving Data Sets – SAVE Key 

The SAVE key activates a menu which contains all functions necessary for saving instrument data. 

– Entry of the name of the data set which should be saved. Confirmation of the entry initiates a 

save operation to store the data set. 

Data set names may contain both alphabetical and numeric characters, in the simplest case 

only numbers. The simplest example for the input of a data set name is illustrated by the 

following key strokes: 

 

– Entry of the directory in which the data set should be saved 

– Input of data set description 

– Selection of the data subsets to be saved (sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO SAVE) 

– Indication of all available data sets 

– Deletion of all available data sets 

MEMORY SAVE menu 

MEMORY 

SAVE 

RE LL 

CONFIG 

SAVE DATA SET 

NAME: DATASET1 PATH:C:\USER\CONFIG 

COMMENT: Radio Monitoring 

EDIT NAME 

DATASET1_ 

ITEMS: DEFAULT 

MEMORY 

SAVE 

EDIT 

NAME 

EDIT 

PATH 

EDIT 

COMMENT 

SEL ITEMS 

TO SAVE 

USER 

DATA SET 

LIST 

DATA SET 

CLEAR 

DATA SET 

CLEAR ALL 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

The SAVE DATA SET table shows the current settings regarding the data set: 

Name 

Name of data set 

Path 

Directory in which the data set will be saved 

Items 

Indicates whether the default selection of data subsets 

(DEFAULT) or a user-defined selection (SELECTED) will be 

saved 

Comment Comments about the data set 

The EDIT NAME softkey for entering the name of the data set to be saved is activated 

automatically. 

1088.7531.12 4.61 E-15


ESIB 

Selecting the Data Set for Saving 

MEMORY SAVE menu: 

EDIT 

NAME 

The EDIT NAME softkey activates the entry of the name of the data set to be 

saved. 

Data entry is concluded by pressing one of the units keys which initiates a 

save operation to store the data set. 


:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,’test’ 

EDIT 

PATH 

The EDIT PATH softkey activates the input of a directory name where the 

data sets are to be stored. Default path is c:\user\config. 


EDIT 

COMMENT 

The EDIT COMMENT softkey activates the entry of comments for the current 

data set. A total of 60 characters are available for this purpose. 


:MMEMory:COMMent 

DATA SET 

LIST 

The DATA SET LIST softkey opens the DATA SET LIST/CONTENTS table. 

The DATA SET CLEAR and DATA SET CLEAR ALL softkeys are also 

displayed. 

The DATA SET LIST column lists all the data sets which are stored in the 

selected directory. 

The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the DATA SET CONTENTS 

column indicate the saved data subsets and the comments for the currently 

selected data set. 


Note: 

The current instrument configuration can be easily stored under the 

name of an existing data set: 

½ Press a units key after selecting a data set 

The name and the selection of the data subsets for the currently 

selected data set will be placed in the SAVE DATA SET table. The 

DATA SET LIST table is closed and, instead, the entry field for the 

EDIT NAME function with the name of the selected data set is 

opened. 

½ Press a units key. 

The current instrument configuration is saved as a data set under 

this name. 

1088.7531.12 4.62 E-15

ESIB 


DATA SET 

CLEAR 

The DATA SET CLEAR softkey clears the marked data set. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,’test’ 

DATA SET 

CLEAR ALL 

The DATA SET CLEAR ALL softkey deletes all data sets in the current 

directory. 

To prevent all the data sets from being accidentally lost, confirmation from the 

user is required before actual clearing takes place. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:CLEar:ALL 

PAGE UP 

The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the DATA SET LIST table to the 

next or previous page. 

PAGE DOWN 

1088.7531.12 4.63 E-15


ESIB 

Selecting the Data subset for Storage 

MEMORY SAVE-SELECT ITEMS TO SAVE sub-menu: 

SEL ITEMS 

TO SAVE 

SEL ITEMS 

TO SAVE 

SELECT 

ITEM 

ENABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DISABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

The SEL ITEMS TO SAVE softkey opens a sub-menu for 

selection of the data subsets. 

DEFAULT 

CONFIG 

The ITEMS TO SAVE table displays the selectable data subsets: 

ITEMS TO SAVE 

GENERAL SETUP 

HW-SETTINGS 

TRACE 1 

TRACE 2 

TRACE 3 

TRACE 4 

ACTIVE LINES 

ALL LINES 

USED CVL TABLES 

ALL CVL TABLES 

COLOR SETUP 

HARDCOPY 

MACROS 

ACTIVE TRANSDUCER 

ALL TRANSDUCER 

General Setup current configuration of general instrument parameters 

HW-Settings current measurement hardware settings 

Trace1...4 measurement data trace 1 to trace 4 

Active Lines active limit lines 

All Lines 

all limit lines 

Used CVL Tables activated conversion loss tables 

All CVL Tables all conversion loss tables 

Color Setup user-defined color settings 

Hardcopy Setup configuration for hardcopy output 

Macros 

macros 

Active Transducer active transducer 

All Transducer all transducer 

1088.7531.12 4.64 E-15

ESIB 


SELECT 

ITEMS 

The SELECT ITEMS softkey moves the selection bar to the first line, left 

column of the table. 


:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL[:ACTive] ON | OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL:ALL ON | OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData ON | OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer ON|OFF 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ON|OFF 

ENABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all entries in the ITEMS TO SAVE. 

table. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL 

DISABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

The DISABLE ALL ITEMS softkey unmarks all entries in the ITEMS TO SAVE 

table. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE 

DEFAULT 

CONFIG 

The DEFAULT CONFIG softkey establishes the default selection of the data 

subset to be saved and outputs DEFAULT in the ITEMS field of the SAVE 

DATA SET table. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault 

1088.7531.12 4.65 E-15

Recalling Data Sets 

ESIB 

Recalling of Data Sets – RECALL Key 

The RECALL key activates a menu which contains all functions necessary for recalling data sets. 

– Entry of the name of the data set which should be recalled. Confirmation of the entry initiates 

a load operation to recall the data set. 

– Entry of the directory in which the data set is stored 

– Display of data set description 

– Selection of a data set which will be automatically loaded upon power-up 

– Indication of all available data sets 

– Deletion of all available data sets 

– Selection of the data subsets which should be loaded (configurations, measurement and 

calibration data, sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO RECALL) 

Any settings not restored when data subsets are loaded will remain unchanged in the instrument. During 

recall operations, the ESIB recognises which data subsets are present in the recalled data set and offers 

only the corresponding settings for selection in the SELECT ITEM sub-menu. 

A new instrument data set can be easily constructed from several existing data sets: the desired data 

subsets are selected and recalled out of various data sets in several RECALL operations. When the 

desired configuration is completed, the new data set can be saved under a new name. 

MEMORY RECALL menu: 

MEMORY 

SAVE 

RECALL 

CO FIG 

RECALL DATA SET 

NAME: DATASET1 PATH: C:\USER\CONFIG 

COMMENT: R 

EDIT NAME 

DATASET1_ 

ITEMS: DEFAULT 

MEMORY 

RECALL 

EDIT 

NAME 

EDIT 

PATH 

AUTO 

RECALL 

USER 

SEL ITEMS 

TO RECALL 

DATA SET 

LIST 

DATA SET 

CLEAR 

DATA SET 

CLEAR ALL 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

The RECALL DATA SET table shows the current settings regarding the data set: 

Name Name of data set 

Path 

Directory in which the data set is located 

Items Indicates whether the default selection of data subsets (DEFAULT) or 

a user-defined selection (SELECTED) will be loaded 

Comment Comments about the data set 

The EDIT NAME softkey for entering the name of the data set to be loaded is 

activated automatically. 

1088.7531.12 4.66 E-15

ESIB 


Selecting the Data Set for Recalling 

MEMORY RECALL menu: 

EDIT 

NAME 

The EDIT NAME softkey activates the entry of a data set name. 

The data input is terminated by pressing one of the units keys which 

simultaneously initiates the data set recall operation. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,’A:test’ 

EDIT 

PATH 

The EDIT PATH softkey activates the entry of a directory name in which the 

data set is located. Default path is c:\user\config. 


AUTO 

RECALL 

The AUTO RECALL softkey activates the selection of a data set which will be 

automatically recalled when the instrument is powered up. The DATA SET 

LIST/CONTENT table is opened to make the selection (analogous to DATA 

SET LIST). 


:MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,’C:\user\data\auto’ 

DATA SET LIST 

DATASET1 

DATASET2 

DATASET3 

AUTO RECALL SET CONTENT 

CONTENTS 

GENERAL SETUP 

HW-SETTINGS 

TRACE 1 

TRACE 2 

TRACE 3 

TRACE 4 

LINES 

CVL TABLES 

COLOR SETUP 

HARDCOPY 

MACROS 

TRANSDUCER 

COMMENT 

GSM_MASK 

The DATA SET LIST column displays all the data sets in the selected 

directory. 

The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the AUTO RECALL CONTENTS 

column indicate the saved data subsets and the comments for the currently 

selected data set. 

In addition to the data sets saved by the user, the data set FACTORY, which 

contains the settings of the instrument before it was last switched off 

(Standby), is always included. 

If a data set other than FACTORY is chosen the data subsets in the selected 

data set that are available are recalled when the ESIB is powered up. The 

data subsets which are not in this data set are taken from the FACTORY data 

set. 

Note: 

The selected data set is also loaded on PRESET if AUTO RECALL 

is active. The preset settings can then be configured as required. 

1088.7531.12 4.67 E-15


ESIB 

DATA SET 

LIST 

see Chapter "Saving Data Sets" 

DATA SET 

CLEAR 


DATA SET 

CLEAR ALL 


PAGE UP 

The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the DATA SET LIST table to the 

next or previous page. 

PAGE DOWN 

1088.7531.12 4.68 E-15

ESIB 


Building a Data Set 

MEMORY RECALL-SELECT ITEMS TO RECALL sub-menu: 

SEL ITEMS 

TO RECALL 

SEL ITEMS 

TO RECALL 

SELECT 

ITEM 

ENABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DISABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

The SEL ITEMS TO RECALL softkey opens a sub-menu to 

select data subsets. 

DEFAULT 

CONFIG 

The ITEMS TO RECALL table displays the selectable data subsets: 

ITEMS TO RECALL 

GENERAL SETUP 

HW-SETTINGS 

TRACE 1 

TRACE 2 

TRACE 3 

TRACE 4 

LINES 

CVL TABLES 

COLOR SETUP 

HARDCOPY SETUP 

MACROS 

TRANSDUCER 

General Setup current configuration of general instrument parameters 

HW-Settings current measurement hardware settings 

Trace1...4 measurement data trace 1 to trace 4 

Lines 

data point tables for the active limit lines 

CVL Tables conversion loss tables 

Color Setup user-defined color settings 

Hardcopy Setup configuration for hardcopy output 

Macros 

macros 

Transducer transducer factor, transducer set 

1088.7531.12 4.69 E-15


ESIB 

SELECT 

ITEMS 

The SELECT ITEMS softkey activates the ITEMS TO RECALL table and sets 

the selection bar to the first line, left column of the table. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command see "Selecting the Data subset for Storage" 

ENABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all entries in the ITEMS TO RECALL 

table. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL 

DISABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

The DISABLE ALL ITEMS softkey unmarks all entries in the ITEMS TO 

RECALL table. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE 

DEFAULT 

CONFIG 

The DEFAULT CONFIG softkey establishes the default selection of the data 

subset to be recalled and outputs DEFAULT in the ITEMS field of the 

RECALL DATA SET table. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault 

1088.7531.12 4.70 E-15

ESIB 

Macros 

Macros – USER Key 

The ESIB menus are so designed that the receiver can be easily applied to most of the usual 

measurement tasks with a minimum number of key operations. However, the USER menu also permits 

a tailored adaptation of any necessary setup and measurement functions needed for special 

applications. Here, a sequence of key operations, which may occur repeatedly, can be listed in the 

USER menu as a key macro, then stored in memory and recalled as required by the application. 

Fundamentals 

Macros are defined as arbitrary key sequences which need to be defined only once and then can be 

recalled as often as desired. Through the use of macros, often-needed measurement functions or 

instrument setups, which may require a large number of key operations, can be easily performed. The 

writing of macros is possible only under manual control. Macro generation is not possible under remote 

control (e.g. via the IEC Bus interface) and when using a mouse. 

A total of 7 different macros can be programmed and assigned to the individual softkeys of the USER 

menu. Each macro has a title (arbitrarily defined by the user ) which is also used as a label for the 

corresponding softkey. To indicate that a macro has not yet been programmed, the softkey label 

appears in parenthesis (e.g. (MACRO 1)). After a key-sequence macro has been defined, the 

parenthesis are removed and the softkey is replaced by the titel specified by the user. 

A macro is executed by pressing the corresponding softkey. 

During execution of macros, the key actions are repeated in exactly the same sequence as they were 

programmed. The sequential execution of a macro may be interrupted by using the PAUSE instruction. 

As soon as a macro is interrupted, adjustments on the Unit Under Test (UUT) may be made, etc. The 

interrupted macro is allowed to continue by pressing CONTINUE in the message window and is aborted 

by pressing ABORT. 

MESSAGE 

Macro "MACRO 1" stopped ! 

CONTINUE 

ABORT 

A running macro can be aborted by pressing the LOCAL key. At this time, the following message is 

displayed: 

WARNING 

Execution of macro "MACRO 1" aborted 

OK 

During the time a macro is executing, manual operations on the instrument are not possible, and the 

softkey panel is disabled. After interruption or conclusion of a macro, the applicable softkey panel is 

enabled (i.e., menu state at the conclusion of the macro). 

1088.7531.12 4.71 E-15

Macros 

ESIB 

Starting Macros 

USER menu 

USER 

USER MENU 

(MACRO 1) 

(MACRO 2) 

The USER key opens a menu for selection and starting 

of macros. 

The macros can be defined in the DEFINE MACRO 

submenu. 

(MACRO 3) 

(MACRO 4) 

DELETE 

(MACRO 5) 

LINE 

(MACRO 6) 

(MACRO 7) 

DEFINE 

MACRO 

(MACRO 1) 

he MACRO 1 to 7 softkeys start the execution of the macros. 


(MACRO 7) 

1088.7531.12 4.72 E-15

ESIB 

Macros 

Defining Macros 

In the DEFINE MACRO menu, all necessary softkeys needed for macro management are available. 

Included are functions for starting and ending macro programming, editing of a macro title, etc. 

USER DEFINE MACRO menu 

DEFINE 

MACRO 

ON 

DEFINE 

MACRO 

RECORD 

OFF 

DEFINE 

PAUSE 

The DEFINE MACRO softkey calls the sub-menu to define 

the macros. 

The SELECT MACRO softkey is active and opens the box to 

select the macro to be edited. In case no selection is made, 

MACRO 1 is automatically selected. 


DELETE 

MACRO 

MACRO 

TITLE 

SELECT 

MACRO 

RECORD 

ON OFF 

The RECORD ON/OFF starts or stops the recording of the macro. 

ON 

All key actions are recorded until the softkey is changed to OFF . To 

indicate that macro record is enabled, the enhancement label 

MAC is displayed. 

The number of actions which can be stored in a macro is limited. If 

the limit is exceeded, the error message "Macro too long. 

Recording aborted" is output and the recording operation is aborted, 

however, the actions already recorded do remain stored. 

OFF The recording is stopped. The key actions are stored under the 

macro chosen by the SELECT MACRO softkey. 


1088.7531.12 4.73 E-15

Macros 

ESIB 

DEFINE 

PAUSE 

The DEFINE PAUSE softkey inserts a pause instruction into the macro 

sequence which is being recorded. A running macro will pause when it 

reaches this instruction, at which point settings on the unit under test could for 

example be made. CONTINUE in the message window is used to continue 

the macro execution. 


DELETE 

MACRO 

The DELETE MACRO softkey deletes the macro which was previously 

selected by the SELECT MACRO softkey. The softkey of the deleted title now 

carries its default label (MACRO X, X = macro number) 


MACRO 

TITLE 

The MACRO TITLE softkey activates the entry of the title for the selected 

macro. 

Because the macro title is used for labelling the corresponding softkey, a 

maximum of only 20 characters is allowed. All text after the 10 th character is 

written to the second line. However, entering the character @ forces a new 

line at any point in the softkey title. 


SELECT 

MACRO 

The SELECT MACRO softkey open the selection box with a list of all 7 

macros. All softkey functions of this menu are related to this macro. 

Macro 1 

(Macro 2) 

(Macro 3) 

(Macro 4) 

(Macro 5) 

(Macro 6) 

(Macro 7) 

SELECT MACRO 


1088.7531.12 4.74 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Operation on a Discrete Frequency 

EMI RECEIVER Mode 

The mode is selected in the CONFIGURATION MODE menu (see also section "Mode Selection - Mode 

Key") 

The EMI RECEIVER softkey selects the receiver mode (RFI reception) and activates the menu for 

setting the receiver parameters. 

A window for receiver operation is opened. 

The entry for the receiver frequency is automatically active (FREQUENCY softkey). 

EMI RECEIVER is the default setting of ESIB. 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

MODE 

ANALYZER 







FREQUENCY 



PEAK 

SEARCH 

. 

. 

. 

ATTEN 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

EDIT PEAK 

LIST 

NO OF 

PEAKS 

RES BW 

PEAK 

SUBRANGES 

DETECTOR 

MARGIN 

MEAS TIME 

FINAL 

MEAS TIME 

DEMOD 

LISN 

SPLIT SCRN 

ON OFF 

AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

RUN 

SCAN 

RUN 

FINAL MEAS 


:INSTrument[:SELect] RECeiver 

In the receiver mode, ESIB acts as a test receiver, ie it measures the level at the set frequency with a 

selected bandwidth and measurement time (RES BW and MEAS TIME softkeys). Signal weighting is by 

means of the average, max peak, min peak, RMS and quasi-peak detectors (DETECTOR softkey). 

The attenuation of the employed input can be selected (ATTEN softkey). The total noise figure can be 

reduced by means of a preamplifier (PRAMP ON/OFF softkey). 

The functions for the control of line impedance simulating network are available in the SETUP menu. 

1088.7531.12 4.75 E-15

ESIB- Receiver 

ESIB 

A frequency scan can be performed after setting the start and stop frequency and the step width. The 

scan subranges can be defined in a table (DEFINE SCAN softkey). The entry of standard-conformal 

frequency ranges and associated receiver settings are facilitated by default settings (softkeys CISPR 

RANGE A...D). 

The scan is started with the SCAN softkey or the RUN key in the SWEEP field. 

To reduce the amount of data in RFI voltage measurements, a list of subrange maxima (softkey PEAK 

LIST) can be generated from the scan results and an acceptance line (softkey MARGIN) may be 

defined. A final measurement is performed only for frequencies with high RFI level. 

The final measurement may be either automatic (softkey AUTOMATIC FINAL) or in interactive mode 

(softkey INTERACTIVE). Automatic control functions for line impedance stabilization networks (softkey 

LISN) are available. The final measurement is started with the softkey RUN FINAL MEAS. 

The measurement examples given in section 2 serve as introduction into the different fields of 

application of the EMI test receiver. 

When the EMI receiver mode is active, the MODE key directly opens the main receiver menu. For a 

change to the ANALYZER mode, the main menu must be called first. 

Operation on a Discrete Frequency 

Setting the Receive Frequency 



FREQUENCY 

The RECEIVER FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry field of the receive 

frequency. 

The receive frequency can also be activated with the FREQ key in the 

FREQUENCY field without quitting the currently selected menu. A precondition is 

that the frequency and level display is active. 

The adjustable frequency range depends on the selected input: 

Input 1: 20 Hz ≤ f in ≤ f max 

Input 2: 20 Hz ≤ f in ≤ 1 GHz 

When the tuning frequency is lower than twice the IF bandwidth, the IF bandwidth 

is automatically reduced so that this condition is met again. 

If the frequency is increased again, the original IF bandwidth is restored. The 

memory is cleared when the IF bandwidth is manually changed. 

The resolution of the receive frequency is always 0.1 Hz. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] 

1088.7531.12 4.76 E-15

ESIB 


Setting the RF Attenuation 

ESIB is equipped with two signal inputs selectable in the INPUT menu. With INPUT 1 selected the RF 

attenuation can be set between 0 and 70 dB in 10 dB steps. With INPUT 2 - this is the pulse-resistant 

input - the attenuation can be set between 0 and 70 dB in 5 dB steps. 


ATTEN 

ATTEN 

ATTEN 

MANUAL 

0 DB MIN 

ON OFF 

AUTO RANGE 

ON OFF 

AUTOPREAMP 

ON OFF 

The ATTEN softkey opens a submenu where the input 

attenuator can be configured. The submenu includes setting 

the RF attenuation and the autorange function. 

ATTEN 

MANUAL 

The RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey activates the attenuation 

entry field. 

The following attenuation can be set depending on the active 

input: 

• INPUT 1: 0 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps, 

• INPUT 2: 0 to 70 dB in 5 dB steps.. 

Other entries are rounded to the next higher integer. 


:INPut:ATTenuation 

1088.7531.12 4.77 E-15


ESIB 

0 DB MIN 

ON OFF 

The 0 DB MIN softkey determines whether the 0 dB setting of 

the attenuator may be used in the manual or automatic setting 

of the attenuator. 

0 DB MIN OFF is the default value, ie an RF attenuation of at 

least 10 dB is always set on ESIB to protect the input mixer. 

An attenuation of 0 dB cannot be set manually either. This 

avoids 0 dB being switched on inadvertently particularly when 

DUTs with high RFI voltage are measured. 

Caution: 

If 0 dB RF attenuation is used with 

autoranging, care must be taken that the 

permissible signal level at the RF input is not 

exceeded. Exceeding this level would 

damage the input mixer. The 0 dB 

attenuation should under no circumstances 

be used when RFI voltage measurements 

are performed with artificial networks as in 

this case very high pulses occur during 

phase switching. 

C/IEEE-bus command 

:INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection ON | OFF 

AUTO RANGE 

ON OFF 

The AUTO RANGE ON/OFF softkey switches the autorange 

function on and off. 

With the autorange function active, ESIB automatically sets the 

attenuation so that a good S/N ratio is obtained without the 

receiver stages being overdriven. 


:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF 

AUTOPREAMP 

ON OFF 

The AUTOPREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the autopreamp 

function and or off. 

With the autopreamp function active, the preamplifier is 

considered in the autorange procedure. The preamplifier is cut 

in when the RF attenuation is reduced to the minimum settable 

value. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.78 E-15

ESIB 


Preamplifier 

In the frequency range up to 7 GHz, ESIB is provided with a switchable preamplifier of 20 dB gain. 

Option ESIB-B2, Preamplification, extends the frequency range for preamplification to 26.5 GHz or 

40 GHz. 

Switching on the preamplifier reduces the total noise figure of ESIB and thus improves the sensitivity. 

The disadvantage of a poorer large-signal immunity (intermodulation) is reduced by the connected 

preselector. The signal level of the subsequent mixer is 20 dB higher so that the maximum input level is 

reduced by the gain of the preamplifier. The total noise figure of ESIB is reduced from approx. 18 dB to 

approx. 10 dB when a preamplifier is used. The use of the preamplifier is recommended when 

measurements with a maximum sensitivity are to be performed. On the other hand, if the measurement 

should be performed at maximum dynamic range, the preamplifier should be switched off. 

The gain of the preamplifier is automatically considered in the level display. The preamplifier follows the 

preselection filters so that the risk of overdriving by strong out-of-band signals is reduced to a minimum. 


PREAMP 

ON OFF 

The PREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the preamplifier on and off. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INPut:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF 

Setting the IF Bandwidth 

ESIB offers the IF bandwidths (6 dB bandwidths) 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 1 kHz, 9 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 

kHz, 120 kHz, 1 MHz and 10 MHz. 

The IF filters up to 1 kHz are digital Gauss filters. They behave like analog filters. 

The 9 kHz and 10 kHz bandwidths are obtained by decoupled crystal filters and the bandwidths between 

100 kHz and 1 MHz by decoupled LC filters. These filters contain 5 filter circuits. 

The 10 MHz filter is a critically coupled LC filter. 


RES BW 

The RES BW softkey activates the manual entry mode for the resolution 

bandwidth. 

For numerical inputs, the values are always rounded to the next valid bandwidth. 

For rollkey or the UP/DOWN key entries, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps 

either upwards or downwards. 

When the quasi-peak detector is switched on, a fixed bandwidth is preset 

depending on the frequency. However, the coupling of the IF bandwidth to the 

frequency range can be cancelled using softkey QP RBW UNCOUPLED. 

The bandwidth is limited by the set receive frequency: 

RES BW ≤ f in /2 


:[SENSe:]BANDwidth:RESolution 

1088.7531.12 4.79 E-15


ESIB 

Selecting the Detector 

The ESIB detectors are all-digital. Five different detectors can be selected for weighting the receive 

signal. If ESIB is equipped with option ESIB-B1, Linear Video Output, the AC VIDEO detector has been 

added to those already available. 

The input signal of ESIB can be displayed weighted by five detectors. 

Peak detectors 

(MAX PEAK/ MIN PEAK) 

Quasi-peak detector 

(QUASIPEAK) 

Peak detectors are implemented with digital comparators, which 

determine the largest sample values (max peak) or the smallest 

sample values (min peak) of the levels measured during the set 

measurement time. 

The quasi-peak detector yields the maximum detected value 

weighted to CISPR 16 during the set measurement time. 

For this purpose ESIB uses the linear display voltage after 

envelope detection. The linear sampling values are weighted with 

a digital detector. The time constants defined for the bands A, B 

and C/D are automatically set as a function of the receive 

frequency. 

With switched-on quasi-peak detector, a fixed bandwidth is preset 

as a function of frequency. 

Band A Band B Band C/D 

Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz > 30 MHz 

IF bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 

Charge time constant 45 ms 1 ms 1 ms 

Discharge time constant 500 ms 160 ms 550 ms 

Time constant of 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms 

instrument 

For frequencies above 1 GHz, ESIB uses the settings of band 

C/D. 

The coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range with 

activated quasi peak detector can be cancelled using the QP 

RBW UNCOUPLED softkey. 

If the coupling is cancelled, any of the three CISPR bandwidths 

200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz can be selected for a given frequency 

range (softkey RES BW). 

Average detector 

(AVERAGE) 

The average detector yields the average level of the samples 

measured during the set measurement time. 

The ESIB uses the linear display voltage after envelope detection. 

The linear sample values are summed and the sum is divided by 

the number of measurement samples (= linear average value). In 

the case of logarithmic display, the logarithm is then formed from 

the average value. 

The average detector gives the true average of the signal 

irrespective of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white 

noise or pulse signal). 

1088.7531.12 4.80 E-15

ESIB 


RMS detector 

(RMS) 

The rms detector yields the rms level of the samples measured 

during the set measurement time. 

The ESIB uses the linear display voltage after envelope detection. 

The linear samples are squared, summed and the sum is divided 

through the number of samples (= mean of square). In the case of 

logarithmic display, the logarithm is then formed from the square 

sum. 

The rms detector gives the true power of the signal irrespective of 

the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or pulse 

signal). There is no need for the various waveform correction 

factors which are required when other detectors are used to 

measure power, 

AC Video detector 

(AC VIDEO, 

with option ESIB-B1 only) 

The AC video detector yields the difference (max peak – min 

peak) of measurement results over a pixel or a result. 


envelope detection. The max peak detector and the min peak 

detector determine the maximum and minimum levels within a 

shown measurement point and display it as a common 

measurement result. For logarithmic representation, the logarithm 

of the difference is formed. For linear representation, the 

difference itself is shown. In receiver operation, the AC value 

determined during the measurement time is shown. 

Irrespective of the signal form (CW carrier, modulated carrier, 

white noise of pulsed signal), the AC video detector always 

supplies the AC component of the signal. 

If during a frequency sweep the dwell time on a certain frequency 

point is not sufficient, this may lead to incorrect results being 

displayed. 

1088.7531.12 4.81 E-15


ESIB 

CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu: 

DETECTOR 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

QUASIPEAK 

AVERAGE 

RMS 

The DETECTOR softkey opens a submenu to select the 

detector. 

Multiple detection is activated by switching on up to four single 

detectors. The MIN PEAK, RMS and AC VIDEO detector 

cannot be switched on simultaneously. 

Softkey AC VIDEO is available only if the instrument is 

equipped with the linear video output (option ESIB-B1). 

MIN PEAK 

AC VIDEO 

QP RBW 

COUPLED 

MAX PEAK 

The MAX PEAK softkey activates the max peak detector. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive 

QUASIPEAK 

The QUASIPEAK softkey selects the quasi-peak detector. 


weighted to CISPR 16 during the set measurement time. The IF 

bandwidth is adapted as a function of the frequency range. The 

coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range can be 

cancelled using softkey QP RBW UNCOUPLED. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] QPEak 

AVERAGE 

The AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector. 

The average detector supplies the straight average of the signal 

during the measurement time. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] AVERage 

1088.7531.12 4.82 E-15

ESIB 


RMS 

The RMS softkey activates the rms detector. 

The rms detector supplies the rms value of the signal. To this 

effect the root mean square of all sampled values is formed during 

the measurement time. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] RMS 

MIN PEAK 

The MIN PEAK softkey activates the min peak detector.. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] NEGative 

AC VIDEO 

The AC VIDEO softkey activates the AC VIDEO detector. 

Irrespective of the signal form, the AC VIDEO detector always 

supplies the AC component of the signal. For this purpose the 

difference is formed of all maximum and minimum level values 

collected during the set measurement time. The measurement 

time therefore determines the number of values to be considered, 

so the AC component is determined more accurately with 

increasing measurement time. The AC VIDEO detector can thus 

be used as an alternative for the detection of modulated signals. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] ACVideo 

QP RBW 

UNCOUPLED 

The QP RBW UNCOUPLED softkey cancels the coupling of the 

IF bandwidth to the frequency range with activated quasi peak 

detector. 

If the coupling is cancelled, any of the three CISPR bandwidths 

200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz can be selected for a given frequency 

range (softkey RES BW). 


:[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON|OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.83 E-15


ESIB 

Setting the Measurement Time 

The measurement time is the time during which ESIB measures the input signal and forms a 

measurement result weighted by the selected detector. The measurement time does not include settling 

times. ESIB automatically waits until transients are over. 


MEAS TIME 

The MEAS TIME softkey activates the entry field for the measurement time. 

The measurement time can be set in steps of 1-2-5 in the range 100 µs to 

100 s. A measurement time of 15 s is available in addition. 

When the quasi-peak detector is used, the minimum measurement time is 

1 ms. 

With the average, RMS, AC video or min/max peak detector the smallest 

settable measurement time depends on the bandwidth. 

Bandwidth Shortest measurement time Shortest measurement time 

AV, RMS 

PK+, PK-, AC video 

≤ 10 Hz 1 s 10 ms 

100 Hz 100 ms 1 ms 

200 Hz 50 ms 1 ms 

1 kHz 10 ms 0.1 ms 

9 kHz 1 ms 0.1 ms 

≥ 100 kHz 0.1 ms 0.1 ms 



Effect of measurement time with different weighting modes: 

MIN/MAX PEAK measurement: 

With peak weighting selected, the maximum or minimum level 

during the selected measurement time is displayed. The peak 

detector is reset at the beginning of each measurement. At the 

end of the measurement time the maximum or minimum level 

occurred during the measurement time is displayed. Since the 

peak detector of ESIB is a digital detector, discharging is 

irrelevant even with long measurement times. 

Unmodulated signals can be measured with the shortest possible 

measurement time. When pulses are measured, the selected 

measurement time must be long enough for at least one pulse to 

occur during the measurement time. 

AC video measurement: 

Since the AC video detector is a combination of a min peak and a 

max peak detector, the considerations for the peak measurement 

apply here too 

The longer the measurement time, the better the acquisition of 

the AC voltage component of the test signal. 

1088.7531.12 4.84 E-15

ESIB 


Quasi-peak measurement: 

With quasi-peak measurements, the maximum value of the 

weighted signal during the measurement time is displayed. The 

relatively long time constants used with quasi-peak detectors 

entail long measurement times to obtain correct results. With 

unknown signals the measurement time should be at least 1 s. 

This ensures correct weighting of pulses down to a pulse 

frequency of 5 Hz. 

After internal switching, ESIB waits until the measurement result 

has stabilized before it starts the actual measurement. Since the 

level does not change during a frequency scan, known signals (eg 

broadband RFI) can be correctly measured with a much shorter 


Average measurement: 

With average detection selected, the video voltage (envelope of 

IF signal) is averaged during the measurement time. Averaging is 

digital, ie the digitized values of the video voltage are summed up 

and divided by the number of samples at the end of the 

measurement time. With unmodulated signals the shortest 

possible measurement time can be selected. With modulated 

signals the measurement time is determined by the lowest 

modulation frequency to be averaged. With pulse signals, the 

selected measurement time should be long enough for sufficient 

number of pulses (>10) to occur in the measurement window for 

averaging. 

RMS measurement: 

With RMS weighting the same applies to the measurement time 

as with the average measurement. 

Measurement with several 

detectors: 

If several detectors are used simultaneously, a measurement time 

suiting the slowest detector should be selected to obtain correct 

results for all detectors. It is therefore recommended to set a 

measurement time that matches the average detector when the 

peak and average detectors are used. 

1088.7531.12 4.85 E-15


ESIB 

AF Demodulators 

ESIB provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these demodulators selected, a displayed 

signal can be monitored using the internal loudspeaker or external headphones. 


DEMOD 

DEMOD 

DEMOD 

ON OFF 

AM 

FM 

The DEMOD softkey calls a submenu in which the desired 

type of demodulation can be switched on. 

The volume for loudspeaker and headphones is set by 

means of control knob on the front panel. When the knob is 

in the Remote position (left stop) the volume can be remotecontrolled. 

DEMOD 

ON OFF 

The DEMOD ON/OFF softkey switches demodulation on/off. 

When demodulation is on, the signal is demodulated. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command [SENSe:]DEMod OFF 

(DEModulation ON automatically switched 

on with AM|FM) 

AM 

FM 

The AM and FM selection switches can be activated one at a 

time. They are used to set the desired demodulation type, FM 

or AM. The default setting is AM. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]DEMod AM | FM 

Switchover between Full Screen and Split Screen Mode 


SPLIT SCRN 

ON OFF 

The SPLIT SCRN ON/OFF softkey toggles between full-screen and split-screen 

mode. 

During the scan ESIB automatically selects full-screen mode. 


1088.7531.12 4.86 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Frequency Scan 

Frequency Scan 

In the scan mode, ESIB measures in a predefined frequency range with selectable step width and 

measurement time for each frequency. 

Up to 10 subranges which need not be next to each other can be defined within one scan. The 

subranges are then scanned by ESIB one after the other. Measurement ranges should not overlap. The 

parameters to be measured in each subrange can be selected independently. 

Transducer factors or transducer sets and limit lines can be defined and displayed separately and are 

not part of the scan data record. 

The scanned frequency range is defined by the start and stop frequency set independently of the scan 

table. A scan table can thus be defined for each measurement task, which can be stored and reloaded. 

The required frequency range can be defined by means of two parameters which can be set via keys so 

that no elaborate editing has to be done in the scan table. 

start frequency 

stop frequency 

scan ranges 

transducer set 

Fig. 4-6 

Definition of scan range 

Full-screen or split-screen mode can be selected for result display. In the full-screen mode, the result 

diagram covers the whole screen area. 

In split-screen mode, the upper half of the screen displays either the frequency and level readout, ie a 

bargraph or the spectrum analyzer screen with frequency sweep or zero span. The lower half holds the 

result diagram possibly with the previously measured scan results. 

In the split-screen mode, the upper half of the screen is used for frequency and level readout. The 

diagram is displayed in the lower half. During the scan ESIB automatically selects full-screen display. 

1088.7531.12 4.87 E-15


ESIB 

Up to 4 detectors can be measured simultaneously. They are assigned to traces 1 to 4. Since the 

detectors are set only once, it is not possible to measure with different detectors in different the 

subranges. 

The scan can be performed as a single scan or continuously. Scanning is started with the RUN SCAN 

softkey and in the case of single scan it is stopped when the stop frequency is reached. The continuous 

scan can be interrupted with the HOLD SCAN softkey or terminated with STOP SCAN. 

The maximal number of measured frequencies which can be measured, is limited and depends on the 

number of the traces which are switched on. 

Number of traces 

Measured values /trace 

1 250.000 

2 150.000 

3 100.000 

4 80.000 

They are stored for postprocessing. If the scan subranges are defined so that more than the possible 

values would be measured, a respective message is output upon the scan start. Afterwards the scan is 

performed up to the maximum value. 

In the DEFINE SCAN menu predefined settings of standard-conformal frequency ranges and associated 

receiver settings can be selected (softkeys CISPR RANGE A...D) 

1088.7531.12 4.88 E-15

ESIB 


Entry of Scan Data 

A scan is defined in the form of tables. Each scan range is determined by the start frequency, stop 

frequency, step width and by the measurement parameters valid for the range. Frequency and level 

axes can be user-selected and are defined for the whole scan. 

The DEFINE SCAN softkey opens a submenu where existing scan tables can be edited or new ones 

created. Tables with the current scan settings are displayed. 

Pressing the SCAN key in the SWEEP field also opens the DEFINE SCAN submenu. 

The SCAN table at the top specifies limit frequencies for the diagram, linear or logarithmic frequency 

switching and the display mode for the frequency axis. 

The SCAN RANGES table at the bottom gives settings for the scan subranges. It contains 5 columns for 

5 subranges and lines for entering the parameters for the different subranges. Up to 10 subranges can 

be defined. 

At least one scan is defined in the list. Two subranges with the limit frequencies 150 kHz and 30 MHz 

and 30 MHz and 1 GHz are defined in the default setup. All other parameters are shown in the following 

table: 

Table 4-3 

Default setup of scan table 

Range 1 Range 2 

Start frequency 150 MHz 30 MHz 

Stop frequency 30 MHz 1 GHz 

Step width 4 kHz 40 kHz 

IF bandwidth 9 kHz 120 kHz 

Measurement time 1 ms 100 µs 

Auto ranging off off 

RF attenuation 10 dB 10 dB 

Preamplification off off 

Auto-Preamp off off 

Input Input1 Input1 

The diagram parameters to be defined are: start frequency 150 kHz, stop frequency 1 GHz, min. level 

0 dBµV, max. level 100 dBµV, linear frequency switching and log. frequency axis. 

The measurement parameters correspond to the settings recommended for overview measurements to 

CISPR 16. 

When the menu for creating and editing scans is quit and no runnable scan is available, the last scan 

data record is activated. 

1088.7531.12 4.89 E-15


ESIB 


DEFINE 

SCAN 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

SCAN TABLE 

ADJUST 

AXIS 

SINGLE 

SCAN 

CONTINUOUS 

SCAN 

SCAN 

RANGES 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

CISPR 

RANGE A 

CISPR 

RANGE B 

CISPR 

RANGE C 

CISPR 

RANGE D 

SCAN 

RANGES 

The DEFINE SCAN softkey opens a submenu 

where existing scan tables can be edited or new 

ones created. Tables with the current scan 

settings are displayed. 


INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

RANGES 

1-5 6-10 

RUN 

SCAN 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

RANGES 

1-5 6-10 

Limits for the diagram and the type of frequency switching can be entered in the 

SCAN table . 

Start 

Stop 

150 kHz 

1 GHz 

SCAN 

Max Level 

Min Level 

100 dBµV 

0 dBµV 

Step 

Start 

Stop 

Step 

Max Level 

Min Level 

Frequency 

LIN Auto Frequency Axis LOG 

lower frequency limit 

upper frequency limit 

linear or logarithmic frequency switching 

upper level limit 

lower level limit 

linear or logarithmic frequency axis 

SCAN TABLE 

The SCAN TABLE softkey activates the entry field for the limits 

in the SCAN table. 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG | AUTO 

:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:TOP 

:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom 

:DISPlay:TRACe:X:SPACing LIN | LOG 

1088.7531.12 4.90 E-15

ESIB 


In the SCAN RANGES table the parameters for the individual subranges can be set. 

SCAN RANGES 

RANGE 1 


Stop 

30.000 MHz 


RES BW 9 kHz 



RF Attn 10 dB 

Preamp OFF 


Input INPUT 1 


30.000 MHz 

1.0000 GHz 

40 kHz 

120 kHz 

100 µs 

OFF 

10 dB 

OFF 

OFF 

INPUT 1 

Start 

Entry of start frequency 

The following conditions should be observed: 

The start frequency of a subrange must be equal to or 

greater than the stop frequency of the previous subrange. 

The start frequency of the next subrange must always be 

greater than the stop frequency of the already defined one. 

When the start frequency is entered, the entry field for the 

stop frequency is automatically activated. 

Stop 

Entry of stop frequency 

The following conditions should be observed: 

The stop frequency of a subrange must be equal to or 

greater than the start frequency of the subrange. The stop 

frequency of a subrange must always be lower than the 

start frequency of the next subrange. 

When start and stop frequencies are entered, the adjacent 

subranges are automatically adapted to ensure that the 

above-mentioned conditions are met. 

Step Size 

Entry of step size 

In the case of linear frequency increments, step widths 

between 1 Hz and the maximum ESIB frequency can be 

set. When a step size greater than the scan range is 

entered (from start to stop), ESIB performs a measurement 

at the start and stop frequency. 

With logarithmic frequency increments, values between 

0.1% and 100% can be set with steps of 1/2/3/5. 

With STEP AUTO selected, the step size cannot be 

changed because it is automatically set with respect to the 

IF bandwidth. 

1088.7531.12 4.91 E-15


ESIB 

RES BW 

Entry of IF bandwidth 

In the case of quasi-peak weighting, usually a fixed 

bandwidth is set which cannot be changed (CISPR). 

However, the coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency 

range can be cancelled using softkey QP RBW 

UNCOUPLED in the MODE EMI RECEIVER menu. 

Meas Time 

Entry of measurement time 

The measurement time can be set between 100 µs and 100 

s separately for each subrange. 

Auto Ranging 

Activates the autorange function 

With automatic attenuation setting selected, ESIB 

automatically sets the input attenuation as a function of the 

signal level. 

Caution: 

If 0 dB RF attenuation is used with 

autoranging, care must be taken that the 

permissible signal level at the RF input is 

not exceeded. Exceeding this level would 

damage the input mixer. The 0 dB 

attenuation should under no circumstances 

be used when RFI voltage measurements 

are performed with the aid of artificial 

networks as in this case very high pulses 

occur during phase switching. 

RF Atten 

Entry of a fixed RF attenuation 

Preamp 

Switching the preamplifier on and off 

Auto Preamp 

Activates the auto preamp function 

The preamplifier is considered in autoranging. It is only cut 

in after the attenuation has been reduced to the minimum 

settable value. 

Input 

Selection of RF input 

1088.7531.12 4.92 E-15

ESIB 


ADJUST 

AXIS 

The ADJUST AXIS softkey automatically sets the limits of the 

diagram so that the lower limit frequency corresponds to the 

start frequency of range 1 and the upper limit frequency to the 

stop frequency of the last range. 


SINGLE 

SCAN 

Pressing the SINGLE SCAN softkey triggers a frequency scan. 

ESIB stops at the end frequency. 

The enhancement label SGL displayed at the screen edge 

indicates that the single-scan mode is set. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INITiate2:CONTinuous OFF 

CONTINUOUS 

SCAN 

The CONTINUOUS SCAN softkey selects the continuous scan 

mode. ESIB scans continuously until the scan is stopped. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INITiate2:CONTinuous ON 

SCAN 

RANGES 

The SCAN RANGES softkey activates the entry of scan settings 

in the SCAN RANGES table. 


:[SENSe:]SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt] 1...10 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:STARt 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:STOP 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:STEP 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:BANDwidth:RESolution 

 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:TIME 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO 

 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:ATTenuation 

 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:GAIN 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON|OFF 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:TYPE INPUT1|INPUT2 

1088.7531.12 4.93 E-15


ESIB 

Editing a Scan 

The parameters of a scan subrange in a scan data record can be modified or complete subranges can 

be added or deleted. When changing the scan limit frequencies, care should be taken that the scan 

ranges do not overlap. 

Complete scan ranges can be cleared or added with the INSERT RANGE and DELETE RANGE 

softkeys. 

Predefined settings of standard-conformal frequency ranges and associated receiver settings can be 

selected (softkeys CISPR RANGE A...D). 

CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER - DEFINE SCAN menu 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

The INS BEFORE RANGE softkey shifts the active scan range 

in the table to the left by one column. A new column with 

identical settings is created. The limit frequencies can be 

changed accordingly. 


INS AFTER 

RANGE 

The INS AFTER RANGE softkey shifts the active scan range in 

the table to the right by one column. A new column with identical 

settings is created. The limit frequencies can be changed 

accordingly. 


DELETE 

RANGE 

The DELETE RANGE softkey clears the activated scan range. 

All other ranges are shifted to the left by one column. 


RANGES 

1-5 6-10 

With the RANGES 1-5/6-10 softkey a switchover can be made 

between ranges 1-5 and 6-10. 


1088.7531.12 4.94 E-15

ESIB 


CISPR 

RANGE A 

The CISPR RANGE A/B/C/D softkeys enter the following 

standard-conformal frequency ranges and associated receiver 

settings into the scan table: 

CISPR 

RANGE C 

CISPR 

RANGE B 

Band A Band B Band C Band D 

Start frequency 9 kHz 150 kHz 30 MHz 300 MHz 

Stop frequency 150 kHz 30 MHz 300 MHz 1 GHz 

Step width 80 Hz 4 kHz 40 kHz 40 kHz 

RBW 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 120 kHz 

MEAS TIME 50 ms 1 ms 100 us 100 us 


CISPR 

RANGE D 

Running a Scan 

The scan is started with the RUN SCAN softkey. It can also be started with the RUN key in the SWEEP 

field. 

At the beginning of the scan, ESIB sets up the diagram as specified in the scan table and starts the scan 

in the selected mode (SINGLE or CONTINUOUS). With SINGLE selected, ESIB performs a single scan 

and stops at the end frequency. With CONTINUOUS selected, the scan is performed continuously until 

it is deliberately stopped. 

The measurement can be interrupted with HOLD SCAN or stopped with STOP SCAN. The two softkeys 

are displayed instead of the menu shown before the scan is started. 

If a transducer set is defined with points of changeover, the scan automatically stops at the frequencies 

of the new subrange of the transducer set and the user may exchange the transducer. 

The following message informs the user that the limit has been reached: 

TDS Range # reached, CONTINUE / BREAK 

He can continue the scan at the point of change over by confirming the message (CONTINUE) or he 

can switch off the transducer (BREAK). 

IEC/IEEE-bus commands :INITiate2:CONMeas (CONTINUE) 

-- (BREAK) 

1088.7531.12 4.95 E-15


ESIB 


RUN 

SCAN 

HOLD 

SCAN 

REF LEVEL 

AUTO 

HOLD 

SCAN 

STOP 

SCAN 

CONTINUE 

SCAN 

REF CONT LEVEL AT 

REC AUTO FREQ 

CONTINUE 

AT HOLD 

STOP 

SCAN 

The RUN SCAN softkey starts the frequency 

scan with the selected settings. The HOLD 

SCAN submenu is displayed instead of the 

menu shown before the scan is started. 


:INITiate2[:IMMediate] 

HOLD 

SCAN 

The HOLD SCAN softkey interrupts the scan. 

The CONTINUE SCAN submenu is displayed. The scan stops at 

the frequency at which it was interrupted until it is continued with 

the CONT AT REC FREQ or CONTINUE AT HOLD softkeys. 

While the scan is stopped, the receiver settings can be changed, 

eg for a detailed analysis of the recorded trace. 


:HOLD 

CONT AT 

REC FREQ 

With the CONT AT REC FREQ softkey the scan is continued at 

the current receiver frequency when the receiver frequency is 

lower than the frequency at which the scan was interrupted. 

Otherwise the scan continues at the frequency at which it was 

interrupted. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INITiate2[:IMMediate] 

CONTINUE 

AT HOLD 

With the CONT AT HOLD softkey the scan is continued where it 

was interrupted. The scan is always continued with the settings 

in the scan table. 


STOP 

SCAN 

The STOP SCAN softkey stops the scan. Upon restart, scanning 

starts at the beginning. The results of the performed 

measurements are lost. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :ABORt 

1088.7531.12 4.96 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Data Reduction and Peak List 

Data Reduction and Peak List 

EMI measurements may involve much time because the time constants prescribed by the standard for 

the quasi-peak weighting require transients which lead to long measurement times per each value. In 

addition, the standards stipulate procedures for finding local EMI maxima such as shifting the absorbing 

clamp, variation of the test antenna height and rotating the DUT. Measuring with quasi-peak weighting 

at each frequency and for each setting of the test configuration would lead to unacceptably long 

measurement times. For this reason, R&S has developed a method which reduces the time-consuming 

measurements to a minimum with an optimum reliability of detection. 

The interference spectrum is first pre-analyzed in a fast prescan to optimize the duration of the 

measurement. Data reduction follows so that the time-consuming final measurement is performed at 

only some important frequencies: 

dB 

80 

Subrange 

70 

60 

50 

Subrange maximum 

40 

Limit line 

30 

Acceptance line 

20 

10 

0 

0,03 0,1 

Fig. 4-7 Dividing the spectrum into eight subranges 

GHz 

1,0 

Data reduction is of crucial importance. It is initiated by the user pressing a key after the prescan and 

then automatically performed by the receiver. Data reduction is used to select frequencies with a very 

high interference level. Several data reduction methods are used: 

• Acceptance analysis, ie the interference spectrum is further analyzed at frequencies with levels 

above a line parallel to a limit line. 

• Generating subrange maxima, ie the interference spectrum is further analyzed at frequencies with 

the highest interference level of a frequency subrange (search method SUBRANGES). 

• Determination of a specific number of peak values relative to the limit lines with the level values 

being independent of their frequency spectral distribution (search method PEAKS). 

1088.7531.12 4.97 E-15


ESIB 

For generation of subrange maxima, the whole frequency range is divided into equidistant subranges. A 

subrange maximum is determined for each subrange (search method SUBRANGES). 

Determining the level maxima irrespective of their distribution in the frequency spectrum (search mode 

PEAKS) is suitable for measurement regulations that demand determination of the relatively highest 

level irrespective of the distribution in the measured frequency range, eg FCC. 

If the prescan is performed in parallel with several detectors, typically with peak value and average 

value, the maxima are determined separately for the two detectors so that the distribution of narrowband 

and wideband sources of interference can be taken into account. For example, the frequency of the 

maximum determined with the average detector can be used for the final measurement performed with 

this detector and the frequency found in the prescan carried out with the peak detector is taken for the 

final measurement using the quasi-peak detector. 

Consideration of the limit lines ensures that the final measurement is not performed at frequencies at 

which the inference level is far below the limit value. The margin between the acceptance line and the 

limit line can be selected by the user in dB as the MARGIN. Each limit line is allocated to a trace, ie 

different limit lines are taken for the different detectors. 

Two values should therefore be defined for this purpose: 

• the number of subranges or highest level values (NO OF PEAKS in the range from 1 to 500; default 

value: 25) 

• the acceptance margin (MARGIN; default value: 6 dB). It is valid for all limit lines. 

As an alternative method, it is possible to preset a list of frequencies at which the final measurements 

are performed. A typical application is, for example, the statistical analysis of several units. 

The peak list can be either edited manually or can be filled with desired values by adopting the marker 

values. 

If no limit lines are activated, the measurement procedure is as if all measured values would exceed the 

limit line. 

1088.7531.12 4.98 E-15

ESIB 


CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu (right side menu) 



PEAK 

SEARCH 

EDIT PEAK 

LIST 

NO OF 

PEAKS 

The PEAK SEARCH softkey starts the determination of the subrange 

maxima list from the available scan results. The procedure can be repeated 

as often as desired to try out different settings of margin and number of 

subranges. 


:CALCulate:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate] 

PEAKS 

SUBRANGES 

MARGIN 

FINAL 

MEAS TIME 

LISN 

AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

RUN 

FINAL MEAS 

The following table shows the peak list which is determined by the peak-search function after the 

prescan: 

¦ 

EDIT PEAK LIST (Prescan Results) 

Trace1: 014QP Trace2: 014AV 

Trace3: --- Trace4: --- 

TRACE FREQUENCY LEVEL dBpT DELTA LIMIT dB 

2 Average 80.0000 MHz 35.34 -3.91 

2 Average 89.4800 MHz 38.83 -0.91 

1 Max Peak 98.5200 MHz 47.53 -2.63 

2 Average 98.5200 MHz 46.63 6.47 

1 Max Peak 100.7200 MHz 54.14 3.88 

2 Average 102.3200 MHz 50.89 10.56 

1 Max Peak 113.2400 MHz 49.68 -1.08 

2 Average 116.9200 MHz 44.81 3.91 

1 Max Peak 125.8800 MHz 55.01 3.78 

2 Average 125.8800 MHz 53.55 12.33 

1 Max Peak 138.4800 MHz 45.68 -5.95 

2 Average 138.4800 MHz 42.17 0.53 

2 Average 144.0400 MHz 43.72 1.90 

2 Average 167.0400 MHz 44.77 2.32 

2 Average 176.2400 MHz 45.52 2.83 

1 Max Peak 200.4800 MHz 52.49 -0.75 

2 Average 200.4800 MHz 48.76 5.51 

1 Max Peak 210.2800 MHz 60.55 7.09 

2 Average 226.5600 MHz 59.02 15.24 

2 Average 230.0000 MHz 48.59 4.75 

1088.7531.12 4.99 E-15


ESIB 


EDIT PEAK 

LIST 

EDIT PEAK 

LIST 

EDIT 

FREQUENCY 

INSERT 

The EDIT PEAK LIST softkey calls the 

EDIT PEAK LIST submenu used for 

editing the peak list. A frequency list can 

thus be predefined and a final 

measurement carried out at these 

frequencies. 

DELETE 

SORT BY 

FREQUENCY 

SORT BY 

DELTA LIM 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

EDIT PATH 

DECIM SEP 

. , 

NEW 

APPEND 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

A peak list can also be generated by 

adopting the marker values (see section 

"Changing the device settings with 

Markers marker →") 

EDIT 

FREQUENCY 

The EDIT FREQUENCY softkey activates table EDIT 

PEAK LIST. The cursor marks the upper field of column 

FREQUENCY. 


INSERT 

The INSERT softkey creates an empty line above the 

current cursor position 


DELETE 

The DELETE softkey erases the complete line at the 

cursor position. Before deletion, a message appears 

requesting confirmation.. 


SORT BY 

FREQUENCY 

The softkey SORT BY FREQUENCY sorts the table in a 

descending order according the entries in the 

FREQUENCY column. 


1088.7531.12 4.100 E-15

ESIB 


SORT BY 

DELTA LIM 

The softkey SORT BY DELTA LIMIT sorts the table in a 

descending order according to the entries in the DELTA 

LIMIT column (see table below). 


The following table shows the peak list sorted according to the margin to the limit value list: 

¦ 

EDIT PEAK LIST (Prescan Results) 



TRACE FREQU ENCY LEV EL dBpT DELTA LIMIT dB 

2 Average 226.5600 MHz 59.02 15.24 

2 Average 125.8800 MHz 53.55 12.33 

2 Average 102.3200 MHz 50.89 10.56 

1 Max Peak 210.2800 MHz 60.55 7.09 

2 Average 98.5200 MHz 46.63 6.47 

2 Average 200.4800 MHz 48.76 5.51 

2 Average 230.0000 MHz 48.59 4.75 

2 Average 116.9200 MHz 44.81 3.91 

1 Max Peak 100.7200 MHz 54.14 3.88 

1 Max Peak 125.8800 MHz 55.01 3.78 

2 Average 176.2400 MHz 45.52 2.83 

2 Average 167.0400 MHz 44.77 2.32 

2 Average 144.0400 MHz 43.72 1.90 

2 Average 276.9200 MHz 45.81 1.16 

2 Average 138.4800 MHz 42.17 0.53 

2 Average 267.2800 MHz 44.44 -0.05 

1 Max Peak 200.4800 MHz 52.49 -0.75 

2 Average 89.4800 MHz 38.83 -0.91 

1 Max Peak 113.2400 MHz 49.68 -1.08 

1 Max Peak 98.5200 MHz 47.53 -2.63 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

The ASCII EXPORT softkey stores the final measurement data 

in a file with ASCII format. 

Upon pressing the ASCII EXPORT softkey, a file name can be 

entered. The default name is TRACE.DAT. Then the measured 

data of the trace are stored. 

The function can be configured in the ASCII CONFIG submenu. 


:MMEMory:STORe:FINal 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

In the ASCII CONFIG submenu, various settings for the TRACE 

ASCII EXPORT function can be made (see Section "Trace 

Selection and Setup"). 

1088.7531.12 4.101 E-15


ESIB 

Structure of the ASCII file: 

RECEIVER mode, final measurement data: 

Content of file 

File header Type;ESIB 7; 

Version;2.07; 

Date;01.Jan 2000; 

Mode;Receiver; 

Start;10000;Hz 

Stop;100000;Hz 

x-Axis;LIN; 

Scan Count;1; 

Transducer;TRD1; 

Scan 1: 


Stop;1000000;Hz 

Step;4000;Hz 

RBW;100000;Hz 

Meas Time;0.01;s 

Auto Ranging;ON; 

RF Att;20;dB 

Auto Preamp;OFF; 

Preamp;0;dB 

Input;1; 

Description 

Instrument model 

Firmware version 

Date record storage date 

Instrument operating mode 

Start/stop of the display range. 

Unit: Hz 

Scaling of x axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) 

Number of scans set 

Transducer name (if switched on) 

Loop over all defined scan ranges (1-10) 

Range - start frequency in Hz 

Range – stop frequency in Hz 

Range - step width in Hz for linear step width or in % 

(1-100) for logarithmic step width 

Range - resolution bandwidth 

Range - measurement time 

Auto ranging on - or off for current range 

Range - input attenuation 

Auto Preamp on or off for current range 

Range - preamplifier on (20dB) or off (0dB) 

Range - input (1 or 2) 

Data section 

of the file 

TRACE 1 FINAL: 

Trace Mode;AVERAGE; 

Final Detector 

x-Unit;Hz; 

y-Unit;dBuV; 

Final Meas 

Time;1.000000;s 

Margin;6.000000:s 

Values;8; 

2;154000.000000;81.638 

535;15.638535;N;GND 

1;158000.000000;86.563 

789;7.563789;N;GND 

2;1018000.000000;58.68 

9873;-1.310127;N;GND 

... 

Selected trace 

Trace mode: 

CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAX HOLD,MIN HOLD, 

VIEW, BLANK 

Final detector 

MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, RMS, AVERAGE, 

QUASI PEAK, AC VIDEO 

Unit of x values: 

Unit of y values: 

Final measurement time 

Margin 

Number of test points 

Measured values: 

;, ; ; 

Phase and protective grounding are output only if a 

line impedance stabilization has been activated. They 

specify the setting at which the maximum RFI level at 

the associated frequency was found. 

1088.7531.12 4.102 E-15

ESIB 


Example : 

Type;ESIB 40 ; 

Version;2.08; 

Date;30.May 2000; 


Start;150000.000000;Hz 

Stop;30000000.000000;Hz 

x-Axis;LOG; 

Scan Count;1; 

Transducer;; 

Scan 1: 

Start;150000.000000;Hz 

Stop;30000000.000000;Hz 

Step;4000.000000;Hz 

RBW;9000.000000;Hz 


Auto Ranging;OFF; 

RF Att;10.000000;dB 


Preamp;0.000000;dB 

Input;1; 

Scan 2: 

Start;30000000.000000;Hz 

Stop;1000000000.000000;Hz 

Step;40000.000000;Hz 

RBW;120000.000000;Hz 



RF Att;10.000000;dB 



Input;1; 


Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; 

Final Detector;QUASI PEAK; 



Final Detector;AVERAGE; 

x-Unit;Hz; 

y-Unit;dBuV; 

Final Meas Time;1.000000;s 

Margin;6.000000;dB 

Values;11; 

2;154000.000000;81.638535;15.638535;N;GND 

1;158000.000000;86.563789;7.563789;N;GND 

2;1018000.000000;58.689873;-1.310127;N;GND 

2;302000.000000;63.177345;-2.822655;L1;GND 

2;3294000.000000;56.523022;-3.476978;N;GND 

2;1122000.000000;53.849747;-6.150253;N;GND 

2;10002000.000000;47.551216;-12.448784;N;GND 

1;3390000.000000;59.762917;-13.237083;N;GND 

1;9998000.000000;58.309189;-14.690811;L1;GND 

2;20002000.000000;45.142456;-14.857544;L1;GND 

2;7502000.000000;36.406967;-23.593033;L1;GND 

1088.7531.12 4.103 E-15


ESIB 


NO OF 

PEAKS 

Der Softkey NO OF PEAKS activates the entry field of the number of 

subranges or peaks for the determination of the peak list. The range of 

values is 1 to 500. 


:CALCulate:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges 1...500 

PEAKS 

SUBRANGES 

The PEAKS SUBRANGES softkey defines the search method with which 

maxima are searched for within a scan. 

PEAKS Determination of a specific number of peak values 

relative to the limit lines with the level values being 

independent of their frequency spectral distribution. 

SUBRANGES Generating subrange maxima, ie the interference 

spectrum is further analyzed at frequencies with the 

highest interference level of a frequency subrange. 


:CALCulate:PEAKsearch:METHod SUBRange | PEAK 

MARGIN 

The MARGIN softkey activates the entry field of the margin, ie of an 

additional acceptance threshold for the determination of the peak list. The 

limit line currently used is shifted by this amount for defining the maxima. 

The range of values is -200 dB to 200 dB. 


:CALCulate:PEAKsearch:MARGin -200dB to 200dB 

FINAL 

MEAS TIME 

The FINAL MEAS TIME softkey activates the entry field of the time of final 

measurement. 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:FMEasurement 

AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

The AUTOMATIC FINAL softkey selects the automatic routine for the final 

measurement. This routine is run according to the available frequency list 

without user interaction. 


1088.7531.12 4.104 E-15

ESIB 


INTER 

ACTIVE 

The INTERACTIVE softkey selects the following sequence for the final 

measurement: 

• A frequency from the frequency list is set on the receiver together with 

the associated settings from the corresponding partial scan. 

• The marker is set on this frequency in the scan diagram. 

• The final measurement sequence switches to the Interrupted status. 

• The signal can be exactly analyzed by modifying the receiver settings. 

• CONTINUE AT HOLD starts the actual final measurement, the receiver 

settings being restored except the frequency. 

• The current frequency replaces the original one in the frequency list 

(drifting interference sources) 

• Next frequency of frequency list..... 

Note: 

With the AUTOMATIC FINAL softkey in the CONTINUE FINAL 

MEAS submenu a switchover can be made to the automatic 

mode before the measurement is started anew. 


RUN 

FINAL MEAS 

HOLD 

FINAL MEAS 

HOLD 

FINAL MEAS 

STOP 

FINAL MEAS 

The RUN FINAL MEAS softkey starts the final measurement 

sequence as described above. The HOLD FINAL MEAS 

submenu is called. 

The detectors used for the final measurement replace those 

used in the list or for the prescan. 

The out-of-limit condition is shown by a plus sign preceding the 

values in the DELTA LIMIT column (see table below). 


Note: 

The final measurement function is only available in the 

manual mode. For operation under program control it 

is preferable to read the prescan results and the datareduced 

peak list, if any, from the ESIB with the 

controller and carry out the individual measurements 

with the controller. This considerably makes the 

control of the interactive mode easier. 

1088.7531.12 4.105 E-15


ESIB 

HOLD 

FINAL MEAS 

CONTINUE 

FINAL MEAS 

AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

SKIP 

FREQUENCY 

MEASURE 

STOP 

FINAL MEAS 

The HOLD FINAL MEAS softkey interrupts the 

automatic run of the final measurement. 

The CONTINUE FINAL MEAS submenu 

appears. 

With the final measurement halted all receiver 

settings can be modified for example for 

examining the signal in detail. 

The mode of the measurement (automatic or 

interactive) can again be selected. 

The final measurement can be started with the 

MEASURE softkey. 


AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

SKIP 

FREQUENCY 

The AUTOMATIC FINAL softkey selects the 

automatic mode for the final measurement 

(see above). 


The INTERACTIVE softkey selects the 

interactive mode for the final measurement as 

described above. 


The SKIP FREQUENCY softkey skips the next 

entry in the FREQUENCY column. 


MEASURE 

The MEASURE softkey continues with the final 

measurement. The final measurement starts at 

the next frequency entry on the peak list or at a 

marked frequency if one or several lines have 

been skipped with the SKIP FREQUENCY 

softkey. 


STOP 

FINAL MEAS 

The STOP FINAL MEAS softkey halts the final measurement. 

The final measurement starts from the beginning on a new start. 

The previously collected data are lost. 


1088.7531.12 4.106 E-15

ESIB 


The peak list available after the final measurement: 

The detectors used for the final measurement replace those used in the list or for the prescan. 

The out-of-limit condition is shown by a plus sign preceding the values in the DELTA LIMIT column. 

¦ 

EDIT PEAK LIST (Final Measurement Results) 



TRACE FREQUENCY LEVEL dBpT DELTA LIMIT dB 

2 Average 80.0000 MHz 29.99 -9.26 

2 Average 89.4800 MHz 35.64 -4.09 

1 Quasi Peak 98.5200 MHz 49.94 -0.22 

2 Average 98.5200 MHz 48.32 8.15 

1 Quasi Peak 100.7200 MHz 55.33 5.07 

2 Average 102.3200 MHz 50.86 10.53 

1 Quasi Peak 113.2400 MHz 42.50 -8.26 

2 Average 116.9200 MHz 44.44 3.53 

1 Quasi Peak 125.8800 MHz 54.91 3.68 

2 Average 125.8800 MHz 53.86 12.64 

1 Quasi Peak 138.4800 MHz 41.83 -9.81 

2 Average 138.4800 MHz 39.38 -2.25 

2 Average 144.0400 MHz 40.77 -1.04 

2 Average 167.0400 MHz 44.82 2.37 

2 Average 176.2400 MHz 46.56 3.87 

1 Quasi Peak 200.4800 MHz 50.93 -2.31 

2 Average 200.4800 MHz 48.27 5.02 

1 Quasi Peak 210.2800 MHz 58.71 5.25 

2 Average 226.5600 MHz 59.07 15.29 

2 Average 230.0000 MHz 46.90 3.05 

1088.7531.12 4.107 E-15


ESIB 

Selection of Detectors for Final Measurement 

The selection of detectors for the final measurement is made in the TRACE menu (see section 

"Selection and setting of traces "). 

The detectors to be used for the final measurement can be set here for each trace, ie any combination 

of prescan and final measurement is possible. The required flexibility is thus obtained for the diverse 

test specifications which are covered by means of the ESIB. 

Traces 3 and 4 can be used for displaying the final measurement values. For this purpose, the FINAL 

MEAS softkey should be activated in the associated menu. Trace 3 represents the allocated final 

measurement values referring to trace 1 with the symbol "x" and trace 4 the final measurement values 

for trace 2 with "+". 

The results of prescan and final measurement in a diagram: 

Att 0 dB AUTO 

INPUT 1 

100 

Det 

AV Trd 

ResBW 120 kHz 

Meas T 100 ms Unit 

100 MHz 

dBpT 

90 

80 

70 

1MA 

2AV 

60 

xQP 

+AV 

50 

40 

30 

014QP 

014AV 

20 

10 

0 

30 MHz 300 MHz 

Date: 14.DEC.1999 11:41:33 

Fig. 4-8 

Results of prescan and final measurement 

1088.7531.12 4.108 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Automatic Control of Line Impedance Stabilization Networks 

Automatic Control of Line Impedance Stabilization Networks 

The selected phases are controlled during the prescan and the final measurement via the USERPORT 

with the LISN switched on. In contrast, the LISN menu in the SETUP menu is used for the direct control 

of the LISN and is not included in the automatic sequences. 

Only one phase and one PE setting (1 out of n) can be selected for the prescan. Any number of settings 

can be selected for the final measurement (m out of n). 

All selected phase/PE combinations are measured during the final measurement and the maximum 

value is determined. 


LISN 

LISN 

ESH2-Z5 

ENV 4200 

The LISN softkey opens the submenu for 

automatic control of V-networks (LISNs) 

ESH3-Z5 

OFF 

PRESCAN 

PHASES 

FINAL 

PHASES 

PRESCAN/FINAL 

PHASES 

PHASE N 

PHASE L1 

PHASE L2 

PHASE L3 

PE 

GROUNDED 

PE 

FLOATING 

ESH2-Z5 

ENV 4200 

ESH3-Z5 

Softkeys ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200, ESH3-Z5 and OFF allow to select 

the V-network to be controlled via the user port. 

ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200 

ESH3-Z5 

OFF 

four-line V-network is controlled, 

two-line V-network is controlled, 

remote control is deactivated. 


:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] TWOPhase| FOURphase| OFF 

OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.109 E-15


ESIB 

PRESCAN 

PHASES 

The PRESCAN PHASES and FINAL PHASES softkeys open the 

submenu for the selection of phase and protective earth setting. 

FINAL 

PHASES 

PRESCAN PHASES: 

FINAL PHASES: 

Softkeys ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200, ESH3-Z5 

and OFF or PHASE N, PHASE L1, 

PHASE L2 and PHASE L3 as well as PE 

GROUNDED and PE FLOATING are 

toggle keys. Only one of them can be 

activated at a time. 

All combinations of phases and PE 

setting are possible. 

PHASE N 

PHASE L1 

PHASE L2 

Softkeys PHASE N, PHASE L1, PHASE L2 

and PHASE L3 select the phase of the V- 

network on which the RFI voltage is to be 

measured. 

PHASE N 

PHASE L1 

PHASE L2 

RFI on phase N is measured, 

RFI on phase L1 is measured, 

RFI on phase L2 is measured 

(only for ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200), 

PHASE L3 RFI on phase L3 is measured 

(only for ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200). 


:INPut:LISN:PHASe L1| L2| L3| N 

PHASE L3 

PE 

GROUNDED 

PE 

FLOATING 

Softkeys PE GROUNDED and PE 

FLOATING switch the protective earth 

conductor chokes on or off. 

PE GROUNDED 

PE FLOATING 

protective earth conductor 

choke switched 

off, 

protective earth conductor 

choke switched 

on. 


:INPut:LISN:PEARth 

GROunded|FLOating 

1088.7531.12 4.110 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Frequency and Span 

Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group 

The FREQUENCY key group is used to specify the receiver frequency and the frequency axis of the 

active measurement . The frequency axis is defined by the start and stop frequency. 

After pressing one of the keys FREQ, START or STOP, the value of the corresponding parameter can 

be defined in the appropriate dialog window. 

Start Frequency – START Key 

FREQUENCY – START menu: 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

START 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

STOP 

The START key opens a window where the start frequency of the scan 

diagram can be entered. 

The start frequency can be selected in the ESIB frequency range 

irrespective of scan range limits. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt 

Stop Frequency – STOP Key 

FREQUENCY – STOP menu: 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

START 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

STOP 

The STOP key opens a window where the stop frequency of the scan 

diagram can be entered. 

The stop frequency can be selected in the ESIB frequency range 

irrespective of scan range limits. 

The permissible value range for the stop frequency is: 

f stop > f start 

IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP 

Receiver Frequency – FREQ Key 

FREQUENCY – FREQ menu: 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

START 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

STOP 

The FREQ key opens a window where the receiver frequency can be 

entered. 

A precondition is that the frequency and level readout is active. 

The permissible value range depends on the selected input: 

Input 1: 20 Hz ≤ f in ≤ f max 

Input 2: 20 Hz ≤ f in ≤ 1 GHz 

If the tuning frequency is lower than twice the IF bandwidth, the IF bandwidth 

is automatically reduced so that this condition is met again. 

If the frequency is increased again, the original IF bandwidth is restored. The 

memory is cleared when the IF bandwidth is manually changed. 

The resolution of the receive frequency is always 0.1 Hz. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP 

1088.7531.12 4.111 E-15

Frequency and Span - Receiver 

ESIB 

Receiver Frequency Step Size 

The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a menu for setting the step size of the 

receiver frequency. The step size can be coupled to the receiver frequency or be manually set to a fixed 

value. 

In order to change the step size, the entry window for the receiver frequency must already be active. 

After pressing the STEP key, the REC FREQ STEP menu appears. 

The softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one switch can be active at a time. 

Control is returned to the FREQUENCY FREQ menu via the menu key . 

DATA VARIATION - STEP menu 


HOLD 

STEP 

REC FREQ 

STEPSIZE 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

STEPZIZE 

=FREQUENC 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for the input of a fixed 

step size. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 

STEPSIZE 

= FREQUENC 

The STEPSIZE = FREQUENC softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL and 

the step size to a value equal to the receiver frequency. 

This function is especially useful during measurements of the signal harmonic 

content, because, when entering the receiver frequency, the receiver frequency of 

another harmonic is selected with each stroke of the STEP key. 

IEC/IEEE bus command -- 

1088.7531.12 4.112 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Level Display/RF Input 

Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group 

The UNIT and RANGE keys are used to set the display units and the display range of the scan diagram. 

The INPUT key sets the characteristics of the RF input (input, input attenuation, and preamplification). 

Display Units - UNIT Key 

In general, a receiver measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level display is calibrated in rms 

values of an unmodulated sinewave signal. In the initial state, the level is displayed in dBµV. Via the 

known input resistance of 50 Ω a conversion can be made to other units. The units dBm, dBµA, dBpW, 

and dBpT are directly convertible and can be selected in the UNIT menu. 

If the antenna coded connector on the front panel is used, the coded unit there determines the possible 

display units. Connecting to the coded connector deactivates the settings of the UNIT menu. 

By certain codings it is nevertheless possible to select a conversion of the unit in the menu. The 

dependencies between the unit of the antenna coded connector and the unit which is to be selected for 

the display are given in the softkey description. 

The default coding defined by the connector can be switched off using the PROBE CODE ON/OFF 

softkey. In this case, the unit can be set with the corresponding unit softkeys (dBm, dBµV, ... ) even if a 

coded connector is plugged in. The coded entries in the connector are then ignored. 

LEVEL UNIT submenu: 

LEVEL 

REF/ 

UNIT 

RANGE 

UNIT 

dBµV 

dBm 

dBµA 

The UNIT key opens a submenu in which the desired units 

for the level axis can be selected and the coding of the 

antenna coded connector can be switched on and off. 

The unit softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. 

Only one of these switches may be active at any one time. 

dBpW 

dBpT 

dBµV/m 

dBµA/m 

dB*/MHz 

PROBE CODE 

ON / OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.113 E-15

Level Display/RF Input - Receiver 

ESIB 

dB µ V 

dBm 

dB µ A 

The dBµV, dBm, dBµA, dBpW, dBpT, dBµV/m, dBµA/m, dB*/MHz softkeys 

set the display units to the corresponding logarithmic units. 

The dBµV unit is the default unit in receiver mode. 

IEC/IEEE bus command 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer 

DBMV | DBM | DBUA | DBPW | DBPT | 

DBUV_M | DBUA_M | DBUV_MHZ | 

DBUA_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ 

dBpW 

dBpT µ 

dB µ V/m 

dB µ A/m 

dB*/MHz 

PROBE CODE 

ON / OFF 

The PROBE CODE ON/OFF softkey enables or disables the units defined by 

the coded connector. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :UNIT:PROBe ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.114 E-15

ESIB 


Level Range – RANGE Key 

LEVEL RANGE menu: 

LEVEL 

REF/ 

UNIT 

RANGE 

LEVEL RANGE 

LOG 120 dB 

LOG 100 dB 

LOG 50 dB 

LOG 20 dB 

LOG 10 dB 

LOG 

MANUAL 

The RANGE key calls a menu in which the range for the 

scan diagram can be selected. 

The default setting is 100 dB. 

The most often used settings (120 dB, 100 dB, 50 dB, 

20 dB and 10 dB) are each directly selectable by a 

softkey. 

All other ranges are chosen with the LOG MANUAL 

softkey. 

When the display range is changed, GRID MAX LEVEL 

and GRID MIN LEVEL are newly set. GRID MIN LEVEL is 

not changed, however. 

Editing of GRID MAX LEVEL and GRID MIN LEVEL sets 

LOG MANUAL. 

GRID 

MAX LEVEL 

GRID 

MIN LEVEL 

LOG 

MANUAL 

The LOG MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the level display range. The 

display rangesgo from 10 to 200 dB in 10-dB steps. Invalid entries are 

rounded off to the nearest valid value. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing LOG 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SCALe 110DB 

GRID 

MAX LEVEL 

The GRID MAX LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the maximum level of 

the display range. Values from -83 dBµV to +307 dBµV are allowed. 



:DISP[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:TOP 

GRID 

MIN LEVEL 

The GRID MIN LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the minimum level of the 

display range. Allowed values are: 

GRID MAX LEVEL - 200 ≤ GRID MIN LEVEL ≤ GRID MAX LEVEL - 10 



:DISP[:WIND]:TRACe:Y[:SCAL]:BOTTom 

1088.7531.12 4.115 E-15


ESIB 

RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key 

In addition to manual entry of the input attenuation, the ESIB provides an option which allows the RF 

attenuation, dependent on the selected reference level, to be automatically set. 

INPUT menu: 

INPUT 

INPUT 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

0 dB MIN 

ON OFF 

AUTO RANGE 

ON OFF 

AUTOPREAMP 

ON OFF 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

The INPUT key opens the menu for configuring the RF 

input. It contains the input attenuator for matching the RF 

input to the input signal, the auto ranging of the 

preamplifier, and the selection of the input. 

INPUT 1 

INPUT 2 

INPUT 2 

AC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

DC COUPLED 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

The RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey activates the entry of an attenuation factor 

irrespective of the reference level. 

The following attenuation factor can be set irrespective of the active input: 

• INPUT 1: 0 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps, 

• INPUT 2: 0 to 70 dB in 5 dB steps. 

Other entries are rounded down to the nearest integer. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut:ATTenuation 40DB 

1088.7531.12 4.116 E-15

ESIB 


0 DB MIN 

ON OFF 

The 0 DB MIN softkey determines whether the 0 dB setting of the attenuator 

may be used in the manual or automatic setting of the attenuator. 

0 DB MIN OFF is the default value, ie an RF attenuation of at least 10 dB is 

always set on ESIB to protect the input mixer. 

An attenuation factor of 0 dB cannot be set manually either. This prevents 

0 dB being switched on inadvertently particularly when DUTs with high RFI 

voltage are measured. 

Caution: 

If 0 dB RF attenuation is used with autoranging, care must be 

taken that the permissible signal level at the RF input is not 

exceeded. Exceeding this level would damage the input 

mixer. The 0 dB attenuation should under no circumstances 

be used when RFI voltage measurements are performed with 

the aid of artificial networks as in this case very high pulses 

occur during phase switching. 


:INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection ON|OFF 

AUTO RANGE 

ON OFF 

The AUTO RANGE ON/OFF softkey switches auto ranging on or off. 

When the autorange function is active, ESIB automatically sets the selected 

attenuation so that a good S/N ratio is obtained without the receiver stages 

being overdriven. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF 

AUTOPREAMP 

ON OFF 

The AUTOPREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the autopreamp function on or 

off. 

When the autopreamp function is active, the preamplifier is considered in the 

autorange procedure. The preamplifier is only switched on when the RF 

attenuation is reduced to the lowest settable value. 

This function can only be controlled when the preamplifier is switched on. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

The PREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the preamplifier on and off. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.117 E-15


ESIB 

INPUT 1 

The INPUT 1 softkey selects input 1 (default setting). 

INPUT 2 

The INPUT 2 softkey selects input 2. 

The INPUT 2 softkey switches on the pulse-resistant input 2. With the input 2 

used, the frequency range is limited to 2 GHz. Higher frequencies cannot be 

set. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut:TYPE INPUT1 | INPUT2 

INPUT 2 

AC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

DC COUPLED 

The softkeys INPUT 2 DC COUPLED and INPUT 2 AC COUPLED chose DC 

or AC coupling for the RF input 2. 

Default setting is AC coupling. 

The bottom frequency limit is 1 kHz. 

To indicate that input 2 is used (with AC or DC coupling), the enhancement 

labels I2A or I2D are shown on the display. 

When using the input 1, the two softkeys are then not offered for selection 

(enhancement label IN1). 

IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut:COUPling AC | DC 

1088.7531.12 4.118 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Main Markers 

Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group 

The markers are used for marking points on measurement curves, reading out measurement values 

and for quickly selecting a display screen segment. Preselected measurement routines can be called by 

pressing a key in the marker menu. The ESIB provides four markers and four delta markers. The 

currently activated marker can be shifted with the cursor keys, the roll-key or the softkeys. 

The marker which can be moved by the user is defined as the active marker. 

Examples: 

marker active marker temporary marker 

1 3 

T1 

2 

delta marker 

The measurement values of the active marker (also called marker values) are displayed in the marker 

field. In the marker info list, the measurement values from all enabled markers are sorted in ascending 

order. The marker info list can be switched off with the MARKER INFO softkey so that only the values 

for the active marker are shown. 

Main Markers– NORMAL Key 

MARKER 

NORMAL SEARCH 

DE A MKR 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 2 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 4 

The NORMAL key calls a menu which contains all marker 

standard functions. The current state of the markers is 

indicated by a colored illumination of the softkeys. If no 

marker is enabled prior to pressing the NORMAL key, 

MARKER 1 will be enabled as the reference marker and a 

peak search on the measurement curve is carried out 

(assumption: at least one measurement curve is active). 

Otherwise, the peak search is omitted and the entry window 

for the reference marker is activated. 

The marker field at the upper left of the display screen shows 

the marker location (here, frequency), the level and the 

currently selected measurement curve. 

MARKER 

ZOOM 

PREV ZOOM 

RANGE 

ZOOM 

OFF 

MARKER 

INFO 

ALL MARKER 

OFF 

MARKER 1 [T1] 

-27.5 dBm 

123.4567 MHz 

Measured scan data can be subsequently represented in an 

expanded form using the zoom function. If the measured 

values obtained are more than the available pixels, several 

measured values are combined to one pixel. This 

compression is performed again for each zoom operation. 

At the same time, the scan start and stop frequencies are set 

to the new diagram limits. A newly started scan then sweeps 

only the currently represented frequency range 

1088.7531.12 4.119 E-15

Main Markers - Receiver 

ESIB 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 2 

ON 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 4 

The MARKER 1 to MARKER 4 softkeys switch the corresponding marker on/off or 

activate it as the reference marker. If the marker is activated as a reference 

marker, an entry field for manually setting the position of the reference marker is 

opened simultaneously. If the marker is disabled, the softkey is not illuminated. 

Enabled markers and the reference marker are indicated by illuminating the 

corresponding softkeys in different colors.(In the instrument default state, the 

active reference marker is displayed in red and enabled markers are displayed in 

green.) 

Operating example: 

MARKER 1 is shown as the reference marker by the colored background 

illumination. MARKER 2 through MARKER 4 are turned off. 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 2 

ON 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 2 

MARKER 3 

Pressing the MARKER 3 softkey switches MARKER 3 on and it becomes the 

reference maker. The previous reference marker remains enabled and the 

softkey remains illuminated. However, the entry mode for this marker is not now 

active. Instead, the entry window for MARKER 3 is opened and the position of 

MARKER 3 can be shifted. 

MARKER 3 

123.4567 MHz 

The information in the marker field also changes to describe the new reference 

marker. 

MARKER 3 [T1] 

-27.5 dBm 

23.4567891 MHz 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 2 

ON 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 2 

MARKER 3 

1088.7531.12 4.120 E-15

ESIB 


Pressing the current reference marker (MARKER 3) softkey again switches 

MARKER 3 off. If at least one marker is enabled, the marker with the smallest 

number will be selected as the new reference marker (in the example, 

MARKER 1). Switching off the last active marker also deletes are delta markers. 


:CALCulate:MARKer[:STATe] ON | OFF; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:X 10.7MHz; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:Y? 

When several measurement curves (traces) are being displayed, the marker is set 

to the maximum value (peak) of the active curve which has the lowest number (1 to 

4). In case a marker is already located there, it will be set to the frequency of the 

next highest level (next peak). 

If a measurement curve is turned off, the corresponding markers and marker 

functions are also erased. If the curve is switched on again (VIEW, CLR/WRITE;..), 

these markers along with coupled functions will be restored to their original 

positions. 

A prerequisite for the restoration of the marker positions is that individual markers 

have not been used on another measurement curve or that the scan data (start/stop 

frequency) have not been changed. 

If a marker (or, delta marker) necessary for a marker function is not available, it will 

be automatically checked whether or not the enabling of the corresponding marker 

is possible (see above). If this is not the case, a warning is issued. 

WARNING: 

No trace active 

The activation of the desired marker function is then not possible. 

On the other hand, if the marker can be enabled, a peak search is automatically 

performed. Thereafter, the desired marker function can be executed. 

MARKER NORMAL menu: 

MARKER 

ZOOM 

The MARKER ZOOM softkey zooms 10% of the diagram around the current 

marker. It opens at the same time a data entry field which allows to enter any 

frequency range which is then displayed 

Pressing the softkey again expands the diagram such that only 3 measured values 

are represented. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ZOOM 

PREV ZOOM 

RANGE 

The PREVIOUS ZOOM softkey sets again the previous frequency range 


1088.7531.12 4.121 E-15

Main Markers - Receiver 

ESIB 

ZOOM 

OFF 

The ZOOM OFF softkey switches off the zoomed representation. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM OFF 

ALL MARKER 

OFF 

The ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all markers (reference and delta 

markers). Similarly, it switches off all functions and displays correlated with the 

markers/delta markers. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF 

MARKER 

INFO 

The MARKER INFO softkey opens the display of several markers within the grid. In 

the upper right corner of the grid, a maximum of 4 markers/delta markers with the 

marker symbols ∆/∇, marker number (1 to 4), position and measurement value are 

listed. For the output of the marker position, the number or displayed characters will 

be limited as required. 

If the number of lines available is not enough for all the enabled markers and delta 

markers, first the markers and then the delta markers are entered into the info list 

IEC/IEEE bus command :DISPlay:WINDow:MINFo ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.122 E-15

ESIB 


Marker Step Size 

DATA VARIATION – STEP menu: 


HOLD STEP 

MARKER 

STEP SIZE 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a 

menu to match the marker step size to each individual 

application. In order to change the step size, the marker entry 

mode must already be active. 

Control is returned to the MARKER NORMAL menu via the 

menu key . 

MKR TO 

STEPSIZE 

DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

. 

. 

. 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

MKR TO 

STEPSIZE 

DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the marker step size to AUTO. In this 

case, the step size is exactly 10% of the grid. A one-raster movement of the 

roll-key corresponds to one pixel. 

STEPSIZE AUTO is the default setting. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:STEP:AUTO ON|OFF 

The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for defining a 

fixed value for the marker step size. 

Pressing the step key shifts the marker position by the selected step size. 

The resolution of the roll-key is always one pixel per raster. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:STEP 10KHZ 

The MKR TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the current 


This function is well suited to harmonic measurements. The marker is set to 

the largest signal using the peak search function. After activation of the MKR 

TO STEPSIZE function, the marker is set to the corresponding harmonic of 

the signal each time the cursor key or is pressed when entering the 

marker position. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:MSTep 

The DELTA TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the 

difference between the reference marker and the last active delta marker. 

The softkey is only available when at least one delta marker is enabled. 


1088.7531.12 4.123 E-15

Delta Markers - Receiver 

ESIB 

Delta Markers – DELTA Key 

The delta markers are used to measure a level or frequency referred to a reference marker. They are 

always referenced to the marker whose position was last changed. A delta marker is displayed 

as an empty symbol. The reference marker is displayed as a filled symbol. 

MARKER DELTA menu: 

MARKER 

NORMAL SEARCH 

DELTA 

MARKER 

DELTA 1 

DELTA 2 

The DELTA key switches a delta marker on and calls the 

menu for its control. If no marker is enabled, MARKER 1 is 

automatically activated when the delta marker is switched on. 

The delta marker activated to entry mode is shown on the 

display screen as a filled symbol. 

DELTA 

MKR 

DELTA 3 

DELTA 4 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REFERENCE 

FIXED 

DELTA MKR 

ABS REL 

ALL DELTA 

OFF 

DELTA 1 

DELTA 2 

DELTA 3 

DELTA 4 

The DELTA 1 to 4 softkeys are used to enable delta markers 1 to 4. The 

control of the delta markers corresponds to that of the markers. After a delta 

marker has been enabled, all entries are now applicable to this marker. The 

main marker must be activated anew if its position is to be changed. 

The delta marker field on the display screen contains the delta marker 

number, the difference frequency from the delta marker to reference marker 

and the level difference between the active delta markers and reference 

markers. 

The indicated differences are, in general, referred to the reference marker. If 

the REFERENCE FIXED function are enabled, the reference values under 

REFERENCE POINT are applicable. 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker ON|OFF 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X 10.7MHZ 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X:REL? 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:Y 

1088.7531.12 4.124 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Delta Markers 

DELTA MKR 

ABS REL 

The DELTA ABS REL softkey switches between relative and absolute entry 

modes for the delta-marker frequency. 

REL 

The delta marker frequency is entered relative to the reference 

marker. In this case, the entry mode for the delta-marker 

frequencies is also relative. 

ABS The entry of the delta-marker frequency is in terms of absolute 

frequency. 

The default setting is REL. 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MODE ABS | REL 

ALL DELTA 

OFF 

The ALL DELTA OFF softkey switches off all active delta markers and any 

associated functions (e.g. REFERENCE FIXED). 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:AOFF 

REFERENCE 

FIXED 

The REFERENCE FIXED softkey enables/disables relative measurements 

with respect to a fixed, measurement-curve-independent reference value 

(REFERENCE POINT). 

The information in the delta-marker field on the display screen is referenced 

to this fixed reference point. For the generation of the marker lists using 

MARKER INFO list, the delta markers are also output relative to a fixed 

reference. In the lists, the REFERENCE POINT is tagged by the number of 

the reference marker (only one enabled) 

When REFERENCE FIXED is enabled, the current settings of the reference 

marker become the reference points. If no marker is active, MARKER 1 (with 

peak search) is activated. After transferring the reference values, all markers 

are deleted, and the active delta marker is set to the position of the reference 

point. Additional delta markers can be switched on. 

The reference point can be subsequently changed 

1. by shifting it in the REFERENCE POINT sub-menu. 

2. by starting a search: 

In the MARKER NORMAL menu the REF POINT is handled as a reference 

marker (even though it is not bound to the measurement curve). This 

means, that it will be shown as enabled and can also be changed in 

position. The co-ordinates of the REF POINT are overwritten by the marker 

values (they lie, by definition, on the measurement curve). Thus, it is 

possible, even for an enabled REFERENCE FIXED, to define a new 

reference point with search functions. 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed ON|OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.125 E-15

Delta Markers - Receiver 

ESIB 

MARKER DELTA- REFERENCE POINT submenu: 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REF POINT 

LEVEL 

REF POINT 

LVL OFFSET 

REF POINT 

FREQUENCY 

The REFERENCE POINT softkey opens a sub-menu in which 

the reference value of the REFERENCE FIXED function can 

be modified. 

The position of the reference point is indicated by two 

additional display lines (horizontal and vertical). In addition, an 

offset level may be defined which is added to each difference 

during output. 

The softkey is only available when the REFERENCE FIXED 

function is switched on. 

REF POINT 

LEVEL 

The REF POINT LEVEL softkey activates an entry box for setting the 

reference level relevant to the REFERENCE FIXED function. 


:CALCulate:DELT:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:Y -10DBM 

REF POINT 

LVL OFFSET 

The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey activates the entry box for the entry of 

an additional offset level during output when the REFERENCE FIXED 

function are enabled. 

The offset level is set to 0 dB when the REFERENCE FIXED function are 

switched on 


:CALCulate:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFSet 10DB 

REF POINT 

FREQUENCY 

The REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry box for the input of 

a reference frequency for the REFERENCE FIXED function. 


:CALCulate:DELT:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:X 10.7MHZ 

1088.7531.12 4.126 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Delta Markers 

Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key 

STEP-DELTA STEP menu: 


HOLD STEP 

DELTA 

STEP SIZE 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 


menu to match the step size of the individual delta markers 

to the specific application. In order to change the step size, 

the entry mode for a delta marker must already be active. 

Control is returned to the DELTA MARKER menu via the 

menu key . 

DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

. 

. 

. 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the delta marker step size to AUTO. In 

this case, the step size of the delta marker is exactly 10% of the grid. The 

roll-key corresponds to 1/500, i.e., for each rotational pulse, the delta 

marker is shifted one pixel position. 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey permits the entry of a fixed value for the 

delta marker step size. 

Pressing the step-key shifts the marker position by the selected step size. 

The roll-key resolution, however, always remains constant at 1 pixel. 


DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

The DELTATO STEPSIZE softkey sets the delta marker step size to a 

quantity equal to the difference between the delta and reference markers. 

The softkey is only presented when at least one delta marker is switched 

on. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate:DELT:STEP 10HZ 

1088.7531.12 4.127 E-15

Search Functions - Receiver 

ESIB 

Search Functions – SEARCH Key 

The ESIB offers numerous functions useful for peak/min. peak searching. The search functions can be 

used for marker as well as delta marker functions. 

The setups applicable to the available search functions are performed in the MARKER-SEARCH menu. 

The search functions are always related to the currently active marker. If the SEARCH key is pressed 

while the marker entry mode is active, then all search functions are related to the current reference 

marker. If the entry mode of a delta marker is active, then the functions will be applied to the 

corresponding delta marker. For the case where no marker is active, MARKER 1 will be automatically 

enabled (with peak search). The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey allows toggling between the active 

marker and the active delta marker. 

If the threshold line is turned on, the peak/min. search functions will only evaluate signals which have a 

level above/below the selected threshold. In addition, the search range can also be limited (SEARCH 

LIM ON/OFF softkey) by the frequency lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1/2). 

MARKER SEARCH menu: 

NORMAL 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MIN 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

PEAK 

DELTA 

MKR 

NEXT MIN 

NEXT MIN 

RIGHT 

NEXT PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

NEXT PEAK 

LEFT 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

MARKER 

TRACK 

MARKER 

TRACK 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

PEAK 

EXCURSION 

SEARCH LIM 

ON OFF 

SELECT 

MARKER 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

1088.7531.12 4.128 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Search Functions 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey toggles between the active marker and 

the active delta marker. 

If DELTA is illuminated, the following search functions are performed with the 

active delta marker. 

Note: 

Switching between marker and delta marker entry modes may 

also be performed using the NORMAL and DELTA keys. 


SELECT 

MARKER 

The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the selection of the marker/delta 

markers. The selection box lists the currently enabled markers/delta markers. 

MARKER SELECT 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 4 

DELTA SELECT 

DELTA 1 

DELTA 2 

DELTA 3 


PEAK 

The PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the peak of the 

corresponding trace. 

IEC/IEEE bus commands :CALCulate:MARK:MAXimum 

:CALCulate:DELT:MAXimum 

NEXT PEAK 

The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the next 

lower peak on the corresponding trace. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAX:NEXT 

:CALCulate:DELT:MAX:NEXT 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

The NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to 

the right of the current marker. 


:CALCulate:MARK:MAX:RIGHt 

:CALCulate:DELT:MAX:RIGHt 

NEXT PEAK 

LEFT 

The NEXT PEAK LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to the 

left of the current marker. 


:CALCulate:MARK:MAX:LEFT 

:CALCulate:DELT:MAX:LEFT 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

The TUNE TO MARKER softkey sets the receiver frequency to the marker 

frequency. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:CENTer 

1088.7531.12 4.129 E-15


ESIB 

MARKER 

TRACK 

The MARKER TRACK softkey couples the current receive frequency to the 



:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] ON|OFF 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

The SETTINGS COUPLED softkey couples the receiver frequency settings 

from the corresponding subscans to the marker frequency for functions 

TUNE TO MARKER and MARKER TRACK. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:SCOupled[:STATe] ON|OFF 

MIN 

The MIN softkey sets the active marker to the lowest peak on the 



:CALCulate:MARKer:MIN 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MIN 

NEXT MIN 

The NEXT MIN softkey sets the active marker to the next higher of the low 

peaks on the corresponding trace. 


:CALCulate:MARK:MIN:NEXT 

:CALCulate:DELT:MIN:NEXT 

NEXT MIN 

RIGHT 

The NEXT MIN RIGHT softkey sets the active marker to the next low peak to 

the right of the current marker. 


:CALCulate:MARK:MIN:RIGHt 

:CALCulate:DELT:MIN:RIGHt 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

The NEXT MIN LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next low peak to 

the left of the current marker. 


:CALCulate:MARK:MIN:LEFT 

:CALCulate:DELT:MIN:LEFT 

PEAK 

EXCURSION 

The PEAK EXCURSION softkey activates the entry the minimum amount a 

signal level must decrease/increase before it is recognised by the search 

functions (except PEAK and MIN) as a maximum or minimum. 

The entry range is 0 dB to 80 dB with a resolution of 0.1 dB. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:PEXCursion 10DB 

1088.7531.12 4.130 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Search Functions 

The peak excursion is preset to 6 dB. This is sufficient for the functions NEXT 

PEAK (or NEXT MIN) as the next smallest (or highest) signal is always 

searched four. 

Functions NEXT PEAK LEFT and NEXT PEAK RIGHT (or NEXT MIN LEFT 

and NEXT MIN RIGHT) search for the next relative maximum (or minimum) 

irrespective of the current signal amplitude. 

As for wide bandwidths, the set 6-dB level change is already reached by the 

noise indication of the receiver, the noise values are also identified as peak. In 

this case, a value for PEAK EXCURSION which is greater than the difference 

between the maximum and minimum noise display reading must be entered. 

The following example shows the effect of different PEAK EXCURSION 

settings. 

0 

-10 

-20 

Marker [T1] 

199.0140 MHz 

-22.4 dBm 

1 

1 

2 

4 

-30 

3 

-40 

-50 

42dB 

30dB 

46dB 

-60 

-70 

-80 

-90 

-100 

Fig. 4-9 Example: level measurements at various peak excursion settings 

Maximum relative level change of the measured signals: 

Signal 2: 42dB 

Signal 3 30dB 


With Peak Excursion 40dB signal 2 and 4 are detected by NEXT PEAK or 

NEXT PEAK RIGHT. Signal 3 is not detected since it is only decreased by 30 

dB before rising again. 

Order in which signals are found: 

PEAK: Signal 1 or PEAK: Signal 1 

NEXT PEAK: Signal 2 NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Signal 2 


1088.7531.12 4.131 E-15


ESIB 

With Peak Excursion 20dB signal 3 is detected since its highest level change 

of 30 dB is now higher than the peak excursion. 






With Peak Excursion 6dB all the signals are detected, NEXT PEAK RIGHT 

does not produce the required results. 


PEAK: Signal 1 

NEXT PEAK: Signal 2 



or 


NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2 


SEARCH LIM 

ON OFF 

The SEARCH LIMIT ON/OFF softkey toggles between a limited (ON) and 

unlimited (OFF) search range. 

For peak and min. search functions, the search range can also be limited by 

the frequency lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1, 2). If SEARCH LIMIT = ON, the 

appropriate signal level will only be searched for between the specified 

frequency lines. 

The default setting is SEARCH LIMIT = OFF. 

When only one line is enabled, frequency line 1 is defined as the lower limit 

and the upper limit is defined by the stop frequency. If frequency line 2 turned 

on, then it determines the upper limit. 

For the case in which no line is active the search range is unlimited. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits ON|OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.132 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Marker Å Menu 

Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Í Key 

MARKER MKR →menu: 

MARKER 

NORMAL SEARCH 

DELTA MKR 

MARKER-> 

PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

ADD TO 

PEAK LIST 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

MKR-> 

STEPSIZE 

MARKER 

TRACK 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

MKR-> 

TRACE 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

The MKR → menu offers functions through which instrument 

parameters can be changed with the aid of the currently 

active marker. Exactly as in the SEARCH menu, these 

functions can also be applied to the delta markers. 

The choice between marker and delta marker is made 

according to the currently active frequency entry mode for the 

marker/delta marker. If no entry mode is active, the marker 

with the lowest number will be activated as the reference 

marker. 

To simplify control, the functions PEAK, NEXT PEAK, TUNE 

TO MARKER, MARKER TRACK, SETTINGGS COUPLED, 

SELECT MARKER and ACTIVE MKR DELTA are also 

available in the MRK→ menu. Thus, the most important 

functions can be selected in one menu (see section "Search 

Functions - SEARCH Key" for these softkeys). 

ADD TO 

PEAK LIST 

The ADD TO PEAK LIST softkey adds the receiver frequency of the current 

marker to the peak list (see also Section "Data Reduction and Subrange 

Maxima"). 


MKR-> 

STEPSIZE 

The MKR→STEPSIZE softkey sets the step size for the receiver frequency to 

the current marker frequency. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:CSTep 

MKR-> 

TRACE 

The MKR→TRACE softkey opens a selection window through which the 

marker can be set on a new trace. The traces available for selection appear 

in the window. 

SELECT TRACE 

TRACE1 

TRACE2 

TRACE3 

TRACE4 

IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe 2 

:CALCulate:DELT:TRACe 2 

1088.7531.12 4.133 E-15

Display and Limit Lines - Receiver 

ESIB 

Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field 

Display Lines – D LINES Key 

Display lines are aids which, similar to markers, make the evaluation of measurement curve data more 

convenient. The function of display lines is similar to that of a movable scale which can be used to 

measure absolute and differential values on measurement curves. 

In addition, the display lines can also be used to limit the range of search for marker functions. 

The ESIB provides four different types of display lines: 

• two horizontal threshold lines for setting levels or for defining level search ranges – Display Line 1/2, 

• two vertical frequency lines for indicating frequencies or for determining frequency search ranges – 

Frequency Line 1/2, 

• a threshold line which, for example, sets the search threshold for maximum levels (Peak Search) – 

Threshold Line 

• a reference line which serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between measurement curves 

– Reference Line 

For purposes of clarity, each line is annotated on the right side of the display diagram by the following 


D1 Display Line 1 TH Threshold Line 

D2 Display Line 2 REF Reference Line 

F1 Frequency Line 1 

F2 Frequency Line 2 

The lines for level, threshold and reference are displayed as continuous, horizontal lines over the full 

width of the diagram. They are movable in the y-direction. 

The lines for frequency are displayed as vertical, continuous lines over the total height of the diagram. 

They are movable in the x-direction. 

Note: 

The softkeys for setting and switching the display lines on and off operate similar to a threeposition 

switch: 

Initial condition: The line is switched off (softkey has grey background) 

1 st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is 

activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the rollkey, 

the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry 

keypad. If some other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is 

disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green 

background). 

2 nd press: The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background). 

Initial condition: The line is switched on (softkey has green background) 




keypad. If any other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is 


background). 


1088.7531.12 4.134 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Display and Limit Lines 

Menu LINES-D-LINES 

LINES 

D LINES 

LIMITS 

D LINES 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1 

DISPLAY 

LINE 2 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

The D LINES key activates the sub menu for setting of 

the display lines. 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 1 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 2 

. 

. 

. 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1 

The DISPLAY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the display lines on/off and activate 

the entry of the line location. 

The display lines mark the selected levels in the measurement window. 

DISPLAY 

LINE 2 

IEC\IEEE bus commands 

:CALCulate:DLINe:STATe ON|OFF; 

:CALCulate:DLINe -20dBm 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

The THRESHOLD LINE softkey switches the threshold line on/off and 

activates the entry of the line location. 

The threshold line is a display line which defines a threshold value. This 

threshold value serves as a lower search limit for maximums/minimums in 

the marker functions (MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc.). 


:CALCulate:THReshold ON | OFF; 

:CALCulate:THReshold -82dBm 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

The REFERENCE LINE softkey switches the reference line on/off and 

activates the entry of the line position. 

The reference line serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between 

measurement curve data (see section "Mathematical Operations on 

Measurement Curves" 


:CALCulate:RLINe ON | OFF; 

:CALCulate:RLINe -10dBm 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 1 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 2 

The FREQUENCY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the frequency lines 1/2 on/off 

and activate the entry of the line locations. 

The frequency lines mark the selected frequencies in the measurement 

window or define search ranges (see section "Marker Functions"). 


:CALCulate:FLINe:STATe ON | OFF; 

:CALCulate:FLINe 120 MHz 

1088.7531.12 4.135 E-15


ESIB 

Limit Lines – LIMITS Key 

Limit lines are used to define limits to amplitude curves or spectral distributions on the screen. They 

indicate, for example, the upper limits for spurious emissions from a Unit Under Test (UUT). The lower 

and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then, the amplitude curve can be checked either 

visually or automatically for any violations of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test). 

The ESIB supports up to 300 limit lines, each of which may have a maximum of 50 data points. For 

each limit line, the following characteristics must be defined: 

• The name of the limit line. The limit line is stored under this name and is displayed in the LIMIT LINES 

table. 

• The X-coordinates of the interpolation points. In the receiver mode, the limit line is specified for 

absolute frequencies. 

• The Y-coordinates of the interpolation points. In the receiver mode, the limit line is selected for 

absolute levels. 

• The type of limit line (upper or lower limit). With this information and the active limit checking function 

(LIMIT CHECK), the ESIB checks for compliance with each limit. 

• The limit line units to be used. The units for the limit line must be compatible with the level axis in the 

active measurement window. 

• The trace to which the limit line is assigned. For the ESIB, this defines the trace to which the limit is to 

be applied when several traces are simultaneously displayed. 

• For each limit line, a margin can be defined which serves as a threshold for automatic evaluation. 

• A comment can also be entered for each limit line, eg, a description of the application. 

In the LINES LIMIT menu, the compatible limit lines can be enabled in the LIMIT LINES table. The 

SELECTED LIMIT LINE display field provides information concerning the characteristics of the marked 

limit lines. New limit lines can be specified and edited in the NEW LIMIT LINE and EDIT LIMIT LINE 

submenus. 

1088.7531.12 4.136 E-15

ESIB 


LINES LIMIT menu 

LINES 

D LINES 

LIMITS 

SELECETED LIMIT LINE 

Name: GSM22UP Limit: LOWER 

Domain: FREQUENCY X-Axis: LOG 

Unit: dB X-Scaling: ABSOLUTE 

Comment: Line 1 

Y-Scaling: RELATIVE 

LIMIT LINES 

LIMIT 

LINES 

SELECT 

LIMIT LINE 

NEW LIMIT 

LINE 

EDIT LIMIT 

LINE 

USER 

NAME 

COMPATIBLE LIMIT CHECKTRACE 

MARGIN 

GSM22UP 

off 

1 0 dB 

LP1GHz 

on 

1 0 dB 

LP1GHz off 

1 0 dB 

MIL461A off 

2 -10 dB 

COPY 

LIMIT LINE 

DELETE 

LIMIT LINE 

X OFFSET 

Y OFFSET 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

Press ENTER to activate / deactivate Limit Line 

Limit Line Selection 

The SELECTED LIMIT LINES table provides information about the 

characteristics of the marked limit line : 

Name 

name 

Domain 

frequency domain 

Limit 

upper/lower limit 

X-Axis 

linear or logarithmic interpolation 

X-Scaling absolute frequencies 

Y-Scaling absolute Y-units 

Unit 

for vertical scale 

Comment comment 

The characteristics of the limit line are set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE (=NEW LIMIT 

LINE) submenu. 

Note: 

In the receiver mode only frequency domain and absolute scaling of the 

x and y axis are valid. 

1088.7531.12 4.137 E-15


ESIB 

SELECT 

LIMIT LINE 

The SELECT LIMIT LINE softkey activates the LIMIT LINES table and the 

selection bar jumps to the uppermost name in the table. 

The column heading are as follows: 

Name NAme of limit line to be selected. 

Compatible 

Limit Check 

Trace 

Margin 

Indicates if the limit line is compatible with the measurement 

window of the given trace. 

These functions are not available in the receiver mode. Entries 

made in these columns are not effective. 

Name and Compatible - Switching on limit lines 

A maximum of 8 limit lines can be switched on at any one time. A check mark at 

the left edge of a cell indicates that this limit line is enabled. A limit line can only 

be enabled when it has a check mark in the Compatible column, ie, only when 

the display mode of the x-axis and the y-axis units are identical to those of the 


Note: In the receiver mode, limit lines are only used in the frequency 

domain with absolute X and Y scales. The limit line cannot be 

switched on when other parameters are entered (time domain or 

relative scale). 

It should be noted that lines with dB scales are compatible with all dB(..) scales 

for the Y-axis. 

If the trace assigned to a line is not switched on, the line is displayed in the 

window the trace would be displayed in. 

If the y-axis unit is changed, all non-compatible limit lines are automatically 

switched off in order to avoid misinterpretations. The limit lines must be 

switched on again when the original display mode is restored. 

IEC\IEEE bus :CALCulate:LIMit:NAME ; 

commands :CALCulate:LIMit:STATe ON | OFF 

COPY 

LIMIT LINE 

The COPY LIMIT LINE softkey copies the data set of the marked limit line and 

saves it under a new name. In this way, a new limit line can be easily generated 

by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line. The name can be 

arbitrarily chosen and entered via an entry window (max. of 8 characters). 

IEC\IEEE bus command 

:CALCulate:LIMit:COPY 1..8| 

DELETE 

LIMIT LINE 

Pressing the DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line. Before 

deletion, a message appears requesting confirmation. 

IEC\IEEE bus command :CALCulate:LIMit:DELete 

X OFFSET 

The X OFFSET softkey is not used in the receiver mode. 

Y OFFSET 

The Y OFFSET softkey is not used in the receiver mode. 

1088.7531.12 4.138 E-15

ESIB 


Entry and Editing of Limit Lines 

A limit line is characterized by 

• its name 

• the domain assignment (frequency) 

• the scale in absolute frequencies 

• linear or logarithmic interpolation 

• the vertical unit 

• the vertical scale 

• the definition of the limit line as either upper or lower limit. 

• the interpolation points for frequency and level 

When the limit line is entered, the ESIB immediately checks ll limit lines according to rules that 

guarantee correct operation. 

• The frequencies for each interpolation point must be entered in ascending order, however, for any 

single frequency, two data points may be entered (vertical segment of a limit line). 

The interpolation points are allocated in order of ascending frequency. Gaps are not allowed. If gaps 

are desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled. 

• The entered frequencies need not necessarily be selectable in ESIB. A limit line may also exceed the 

frequency display range. The minimum frequency for an interpolation point is -200 Hz, the maximum 

frequency is 200 GHz. 

• The minimum/maximum value for a limit line is -200 dB/+200 dB for the logarithmic or 10 -20 /10 +20 or 

-99.9%/+ 999.9% for the linear amplitude scales. 

1088.7531.12 4.139 E-15


ESIB 

LINES LIMIT-EDIT LIMIT LINE menu 

EDIT LIMIT 

LINE 

NEW LIMIT 

LINE 

The EDIT LIMIT LINE and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT 

LIMIT LINE submenu used for editing limit lines. In the table heading, 

the characteristics of the limit line can be entered. The frequency and 

level points are entered in the columns. 

Name 

Domain 

Unit 

X-Axis 

X-Scaling 

Y-Scaling 

Limit 

Comment 

Frequency 

Limit/dB(..) 

Enter name. 

Indication of domain. 

Select the units. 

Selection of interpolation 

Entry of absolute values for the X-axis 

Entry of absolute values for the Y-axis 

Select upper/lower limit. 

Enter comments. 

Enter frequency points. 

Enter level points. 

EDIT LIMIT LINE TABLE 

Name: 

Limit_22 

Domain: 

FREQUENCY 

Unit: 

dBuV/m 

X-Axis: 

LOG 

X-Scaling: ABSOLUTE 

Y-Scaling: ABSOLUTE 

Limit: 

UPPER 

Comment: Limit 22 

FREQUENCY 

30.000 MHz 

230.000 MHz 

230.000 MHz 

1.000 GHz 

30.0000 

30.0000 

37.0000 

37.0000 

LIMIT/dBuV/m 

26 

EDIT 

LIMIT LINE 

NAME 

VALUES 

INSERT 

VALUE 

DELETE 

VALUE 

SHIFT X 

LIMIT LINE 

SHIFT EDIT Y 

TABLE LIMIT GRAPH LINE 

ACCEPT 

POSITION 

USER 

SAVE 

LIMIT LINE 

PAGE UP 

Press 25 ENTER to edit field. 

49 

50 

PAGE DOWN 

1088.7531.12 4.140 E-15

ESIB 


NAME 

The NAME softkey activates the entry of characteristics in the table heading. 

Name - Enter name 

A maximum of 8 characters are permitted for each name. All names must be 

compatible with the MS-DOS conventions for file names. The instrument 

automatically stores all limit lines with the .LIM extension. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:NAME 

Domain - Indication of frequency domain 

In the receiver mode, only frequency domain is used. 

EE bus command 

:CALCulate:LIMit:DOMain FREQuency 

X-Axis - Indication of interpolation 


reference points of the table. Selection is via the ENTER key which is toggled 

between LIN and LOG (toggle function). 

EC-Bus-Befehl 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:SPACing LIN | LOG 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:SPACing LIN | LOG 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:SPACing LIN | LOG 

Scaling - Indication of scaling 

In the receiver mode, absolute scaling is used. 

X-Scaling ABSOLUTE The frequencies are interpreted as absolute 

physical units. 

Y-Scaling ABSOLUTE The limit values are absolute levels or voltages. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:MODE ABSolute 

Unit - Selecting the vertical scale units for the limit line 

Units are selected in a selection box. The default setting is dBm. 

IEC\IEEE bus command :CALCulate:LIMit:UNIT 

DB| DBM| PCT |DBUV| DBMW | DBUA | DBPW| 

DBPT | WATT| VOLT | AMPere | DBUV_MHZ | 

DBMV_MHZ| DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUV_MMHZ 

| DBUA_M | DBUA_MMHZ 

Limit - Selecting the upper/lower limit 

A limit line can be defined as either an upper or lower limit. 

IEC\IEEE bus command -- 

(defined by the key words :UPPer or :LOWer) 

Comment - Enter comments 

Comments are user selectable, but may not exceed 40 characters in length. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:COMMent ’string’ 

1088.7531.12 4.141 E-15


ESIB 

VALUES 

The VALUES softkey activates the entry of the data points in the table 

columns Frequency and Limit/dB(..). 

The desired frequency data points are entered in ascending order (two 

repeated frequencies values are permitted). 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] 

, .. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] 

, .. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] 

,.. 

INSERT 

VALUE 

The INSERT VALUE softkey creates an empty line above the current cursor 

position where a new data point can be entered. However, when entering new 

values, the ascending order for frequency values must be kept. 


DELETE 

VALUE 

The DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point (complete line) at the 

cursor position. All succeeding data points are shifted down accordingly. 


SHIFT X 

LIMIT LINE 

SHIFT Y 

LIMIT LINE 

The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete 

limit line may be shifted horizontally direction. 

The shift units are the same as the the horizontal scale units: Hz, kHz, MHz 

or GHz. 

This means that it is easy to create a new limit line from an existing limit line 

which has been shifted horizontally and stored (SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey) 

under a new name (NAME softkey). 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt 50kHz 

The SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete 

limit line may be shifted vertically. 

The shift takes place in dB. 

This means that a new limit line can easily be created from an existing limit 

line which has been shifted vertically and stored (SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey) 



:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt 20dB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt 20dB 

SAVE 

LIMIT LINE 

The SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey stores the currently edited limit line . The 

name can be entered in an entry window (max. 8 characters) 

IEC\IEEE bus command -- (automatically executed during remote control) 

1088.7531.12 4.142 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Traces 

Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group 

The ESIB can display up to four separate traces at the same time. A trace has a maximum of 500 pixels 

along the horizontal frequency axis. If there are more measurement values than pixels available, then 

several measurement values are assigned to one pixel. 

The traces are selected using keys 1 to 4 of the TRACES key group. 

The traces can be individually enabled for a measurement and, after the measurement is completed, be 

frozen. Traces which are not enabled remain blanked. 

A display mode ican be selected for each trace. The traces can be overwritten (CLEAR/WRITE mode) 

after each sweep, or the maximum/ minimum over several sweeps can be displayed. 

Individual detectors are selectable for the various traces. The peak detector displays the maximum 

values represented by a pixel. The quasi peak detector displays the value of the level at a pixel weighted 

according to CISPR. The rms detector displays the power (rms value) of the measured values 

represented by a pixel, the average detector the linear average value. 

The maximum number of measured frequencies which can be measured is limited and depends on the 

number of the traces which are switched on. 

Number of traces 

Measured values /trace 

1 250.000 

2 150.000 

3 100.000 

4 80.000 

They are stored for postprocessing. If the scan subranges are defined so that more than the possible 

values would be measured, a respective message is output upon the scan start. Afterwards the scan is 

performed up to the maximum value. 

Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key 

The trace functions are categorized as follows: 

• type of trace display (CLEAR/WRITE, VIEW and BLANK) 

• evaluation of the trace as a whole (MAX HOLD and MIN HOLD) 

• detector of a trace (PEAK, QUASI PEAK, RMS, AVERAGE and AC VIDEO 

(AC VIDEO with option ESIB-B1 only) 

1088.7531.12 4.143 E-15

Traces - Receiver 

ESIB 

TRACE 1 menu 

TRACE 

1 2 

TRACE 1 

CLEAR/ 

WRITE 

VIEW 

TRACE 1 

T1-T2+REF 

->T1 

T1-T3+REF 

->T1 

3 

3 

4 

BLANK 

T1-T4+REF 

->T1 

T1-REF 

->T1 

MAX HOLD 

MIN HOLD 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

Traces 3 and 4 only 

FINAL 

RESULTS 

SCAN 

COUNT 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

DETECTOR 

COPY 

TRACE MATH 

OFF 

The TRACE keys 1...4 call a menu which presents the setting options for the selected trace. 

This menu is used to determine how the measured data will be represented in the frequency domain 

using the 500 pixels provided by the display. 

When the measurement is started, a new trace can be displayed or the trace can be based on previous 

results. 

Traces can be displayed, blanked and copied. By applying mathematical functions, the traces can also 

be corrected. The measurement detector for each of the display types may be chosen directly by the 

ESIB. 

All activated traces are marked with a LED at the corresponding key (here, TRACE 1). The default 

setting is TRACE 1 with CLEAR / WRITE and the PEAK detector selected, TRACE2 with CLEAR / 

WRITE and the AVERAGE detector selected . The remaining traces 3 to 4 are switched off (BLANK). 

The CLEAR/WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD, VIEW, and BLANK are mutually exclusive selection 

switches. 

CLEAR/ 

WRITE 

The CLEAR/WRITE softkey activates the clear/write display mode. 

The trace is displayed without additional trace evaluation. The trace memory 

is overwritten by each scan. If more than one data point falls within a pixel, 

the trace is displayed in bar form with the maximum and minimum values in a 

pixel connected. In the clear/write display mode, all the available detectors 

are selectable. 

Whenever the CLEAR/WRITE softkey is pressed, the ESIB clears the 

selected trace memory and restarts the measurement. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE WRITe 

1088.7531.12 4.144 E-15

ESIB 


VIEW 

The VIEW softkey freezes the current contents of the trace memory and 

displays them. 

If, in the VIEW display mode, the level display range (LEVEL RANGE) is 

changed, the ESIB automatically adapts the measured data to the changed 

display range. This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the 

measurement in order to show details of the trace. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE VIEW 

BLANK 

The BLANK softkey removes the trace from the display screen. However, the 

trace data remain stored in memory and can be displayed again by VIEW. 

The markers for the blanked trace are also erased. If the trace is activated 

again (with VIEW, CLEAR / WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD) the markers 

will be restored to their original positions. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe OFF 

MAX HOLD 

The MAX HOLD softkey activates the max hold function. 

In this display mode, the ESIB saves for each scan the largest of the 

previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. In this way, 

the maximum value of a signal can be determined over several scans. 

This is especially useful for measurement of modulated or pulse-like signals. 

The signal spectrum is built up scan by scan until all the signal components 

have been captured. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MAXH 

MIN HOLD 

The MIN HOLD softkey activates the min hold mode. 

In this display mode, the ESIB saves for each scan the smallest of the 

previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. In this way, 

the minimum value of a signal can be determined over several scans. 

This function is, e.g., useful in making an unmodulated carrier in a mix of 

signals visible. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are 

suppressed by the MIN HOLD function while a CW signal maintains a 

constant level. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MINH 

FINAL 

RESULTS 

(only traces 3 and 4) 

The FINAL RESULTS softkey activates the display of final measurement 

values. Trace 3 represents the allocated final measurement values referring 

to trace 1 with the symbol "x" and trace 4 the final measurement values for 

trace 2 with "+" (see section "Selection of Detectors for Final Measurement"). 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE FRESults 

1088.7531.12 4.145 E-15


ESIB 

In SINGLE SCAN mode, RUN SCAN initiates n single scans. The scans are stopped as soon as the 

selected number of scans is reached. 

SCAN 

COUNT 

The SCAN COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of scans for 

SINGLE SCAN. 

The permitted range for SCAN COUNT is 1 through 32767. The default setting is 

1 scan. 

IEC\IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt 10 

DETECTOR 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

QUASIPEAK 

AVERAGE 

RMS 

MIN PEAK 

FINAL 

MAX PEAK 

FINAL 

QUASIPEAK 

FINAL 

AVERAGE 

FINAL 

RMS 

FINAL 

MIN PEAK 


detector. 

The detector type may be indepently selected for each trace. 

Multiple detection is activated by switching on up to four single 

detectors. 

For description of detector types see Section "Detector 

Selection" in Analyzer Mode. 

The detectors for the final measurement are marked by 

"FINAL". 


equipped with the linear video output option (option ESIB-B1). 

It replaces softkey MIN PEAK. 

MAX PEAK 

The MAX PEAK softkey activates the max peak detector. 


:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] POSitive 

QUASIPEAK 

The QUASIPEAK softkey selects the quasi-peak detector. 


weighted to CISPR 16 during the set measurement time. The 

IF bandwidth is adapted as a function of the frequency range. 

The coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range can 

be cancelled using softkey QP RBW UNCOUPLED in the EMI 

RECEIVER DETECTOR menu. 


:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] QPEak 

1088.7531.12 4.146 E-15

ESIB 


AVERAGE 

The AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector. 

The average detector supplies the straight average of the 

signal during the measurement time. 


:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] AVERage 

RMS 

The RMS softkey activates the rms detector. 

The rms detector supplies the rms value of the signal. The 

mean of squares of all sampled values is formed during the 



:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] RMS 

MIN PEAK 

The MIN PEAK softkey activates the min peak detector. 


:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] NEGative 

AC VIDEO 

The DETECTOR AC VIDEO softkey activates the AC VIDEO 

detector. The softkey is available only if the instrument is 

equipped with the linear video output option (option ESIB-B1). 


:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] ACVideo 

FINAL 

MAX PEAK 

The FINAL MAX PEAK selects the max peak detector for the 

final measurement. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement POSitive 

FINAL 

QUASIPEAK 

The FINAL QUASIPEAK selects the quasi peak detector for 

the final measurement. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement QPEak 

FINAL 

AVERAGE 

The FINAL AVERAGE selects the average detector for the 



:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement AVERage 

FINAL 

RMS 

The FINAL RMS selects the rms detector for the final 

measurement. 


:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement RMS 

1088.7531.12 4.147 E-15


ESIB 

FINAL 

MIN PEAK 

The FINAL MIN PEAK selects the min peak detector for the 



:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement NEGative 

FINAL 

AC VIDEO 

The FINAL AC VIDEIO selects the AC video detector for the 

final measurement. The softkey is available only if the 

instrument is equipped with the linear video output option 

(option ESIB-B1). 


:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement ACVideo 

COPY.. 

The COPY softkey copies the current trace as displayed on the screen to 

another trace memory. A table appears in which the desired copy procedure 

can be selected. 

COPY TRACE 1 TO 

TRACE 2 

TRACE 3 

TRACE 4 

Copying overwrites the contents of the selected memory and the new contents 

are displayed in view mode. 


:TRACe:COPY 

TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4, 

TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4 

Mathematical Functions for Traces 

TRACE 1- menu: 

TRACE MATH 

T1-T2+REF 

-> T1 

T1-T3+REF 

-> T1 

T1-T4+REF 

-> T1 

T1-REF 

->T1 

TRACE MATH 

OFF 

The T1-T2+REF, T1-T3+REF, T1-T3+REF and T1-REF softkeys subtract the 

corresponding traces and add the set level to the difference. If the reference 

line is switched on (see key D LINES), the level value of the reference line is 

added to the difference. Thus, the differential curve can be positioned 

anywhere on the screen by shifting the reference line. The difference of the two 

traces with respect to the reference line is displayed. 

The T1-REF softkey subtracts the level of the reference line from the trace 

level. 

To indicate that the trace is a difference trace, an enhancement label is 

displayed at the right margin of the diagram (1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-R). In TRACE 1 

main menu, the TRACE MATH softkey is illuminated to show that the function 

is being used. 


:CALCulate:MATH:STATe ON 

:CALCulate:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] 

The TRACE MATH OFF softkey switches the difference function off. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :CALCulate:MATH:STATe OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.148 E-15

ESIB 


ASCII Export for Trace data 

TRACE 1- menu: 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

The ASCII EXPORT softkey stores the active trace in a file with ASCII format. 

Upon pressing the ASCII EXPORT softkey, a file name can be entered. The 

default name is TRACE.DAT. Then the measured data of the trace are stored. 


IEC\IEEE bus command :MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

EDIT PATH 

DECIM SEP 

. , 

NEW 

APPEND 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

. 

. 

. 

In the ASCII CONFIG submenu, various settings for the TRACE 

ASCII EXPORT function can be made. 

EDIT PATH 

The EDIT PATH softkey defines the directory in which the file is to 

be stored. 


DECIM SEP 

. , 

The DECIM SEP softkey selects the separator for the ASCII file: 

’.’ (decimal point) or ’,’ (comma). 

This means that the decimal separator used in various language 

versions of evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) can be selected 

so that the packages are supported. 


:FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMA 

NEW 

APPEND 

The APPEND NEW softkey defines whether output data are to be 

written to an existing file or a new file. 

• With APPEND, the data are added to an existing file. 

• With NEW, either a new file is generated or an existing file is 

overwritten by storage of the data. 


:FORMat:DEXPort:APPend ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.149 E-15


ESIB 

EDIT 

ON OFF 

The HEADER ON/OFF softkey defines whether important 

instrument settings should be stored at the beginning of the file. 


:FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer ON | OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

The ASCII COMMENT softkey activates the entry of commentary 

concerning the current ASCII data set. A total of 60 characters are 

available for this purpose. 


:FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent ’string’ 


The file consists of a header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing the 

trace data. 

There are three columns of data in the file header, each separated by a semicolon “;”: 

parameter name; numeric value; basic unit 

The data section starts with the keyword " Trace " ( = number of stored trace), followed by the 

measured data in one or several columns (depending on the measurement) which are also separated 

by a semicolon ",". 

This format can be read in from spreadsheets, eg MS-Excel. It is necessary to define ';' as a separator. 

1088.7531.12 4.150 E-15

ESIB 



File header Type;ESIB 7; 

Version;2.07; 

Date;01.Jan 2000; 




x-Axis;LIN; 

Detector;AVERAGE; 

Scan Count;1; 

Transducer;TRD1; 

Scan 1: 


Stop;1000000;Hz 

Step;4000;Hz 

RBW;100000;Hz 


Auto Ranging;ON; 

RF Att;20;dB 


Preamp;0;dB 

Input;1; 

Description 



Date of data set storage 

Instrument mode 


Unit: Hz 

Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) 

Selected detector 

MAX PEAK,MIN PEAK,RMS,AVERAGE, 

QUASI PEAK,AC VIDEO 

Scan count 

Transducer name (if switched on) 

Loop over all defined scan ranges (1-10) 

Range - start frequency in Hz 

Range – stop frequency in Hz 

Range - step width in Hz for linear step width or in % 

(1-100) for logarithmic step width 

Range - resolution bandwidth 

Range - measurement time 

Auto ranging on - or off for current range 

Range - input attenuation 

Auto Preamp on or off for current range 

Range - preamplifier on (20dB) or off (0dB) 

Range - input (1 or 2) 

Data section of the file Trace 1: 


x-Unit;Hz; 

y-Unit;dBuV; 

Values;31714; 

150000.000000;11.459816; 

154000.000000;13.225037; 

158000.000000;12.387199; 

162000.000000;13.124626; 

166000.000000;13.615486; 

...;...; 


Trace mode: 

CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAX HOLD,MIN HOLD, VIEW, 

BLANK 



Number of test points 


, ; 

1088.7531.12 4.151 E-15


ESIB 

Example for exported scan data: 

Type;ESIB 7 ; 

Version;2.07; 

Date;01.Jan 2000; 


Start;150000.000000;Hz 

Stop;1000000000.000000;Hz 

x-Axis;LOG; 

Detector;MAX PEAK; 

Scan Count;1; 

Transducer;; 

Scan 1: 

Start;150000.000000;Hz 

Stop;30000000.000000;Hz 

Step;4000.000000;Hz 

RBW;9000.000000;Hz 



RF Att;10.000000;dB 



Input;1; 

Scan 2: 

Start;30000000.000000;Hz 

Stop;1000000000.000000;Hz 

Step;40000.000000;Hz 

RBW;120000.000000;Hz 



RF Att;10.000000;dB 



Input;1; 

TRACE 1: 


x-Unit;Hz; 

y-Unit;dBuV; 

Values;31714; 

150000.000000;11.459816; 

154000.000000;13.225037; 

158000.000000;12.387199; 

162000.000000;13.124626; 

166000.000000;13.615486; 

..... 

..... 

999880000.000000;24.259178; 

999920000.000000;25.103134; 

999960000.000000;28.462601; 

1000000000.000000;28.185074; 

If all traces are to be stored in one file with the header information stored only once, the following 

procedure is recommended: 

[TRACE 1] [MENU ⇒][ASCII CONFIG] 

[ASCII CONFIG] [NEW] 

[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER ON] 

[TRACE 1] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT] 


[ASCII CONFIG] [APPEND] 

[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER OFF] 




Generate new file 

with header 

Store trace 1 with header 

Append to end of file 

without header 

Write trace 2 to file 



1088.7531.12 4.152 E-15

ESIB 

Receiver - Scan Control 

Scan Control – SWEEP Key Group 

Using the SWEEP key group, the parameters are entered which determine the scan characteristics. 

These are the scan range (SCAN key), the trigger used for starting the scan (TRIGGER key) and the 

starting of the scan (RUN key). 

Entry of Scan Data – SCAN Key 

SWEEP SCAN menu: 

SWEEP 

TRIGGER 

The SCAN key opens a submenu where existing scan tables can be edited or 

new ones created. Tables with the current scan settings are displayed (see 

section "Entry of Scan Data"). 

SWEEP/ 

SCAN 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

COUPLING/ 

RUN 

Start of Frequency Sweep – RUN Key 

SWEEP RUN menu 

SWEEP 

TRIGGER 

The RUN key starts the frequency scan with the selected settings (see 

section "Running a Scan"). 

SWEEP/ 

SCAN 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

COUPLING/ 

RUN 

1088.7531.12 4.153 E-15

Receiver - Scan Control 

ESIB 

Triggering a Level Measurement – TRIGGER Key 

SWEEP TRIGGER menu 

SWEEP 

TRIGGER 

SWEEP/ 

SCAN 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

COUPLING/ 

RUN 

TRIGGER 

FREE RUN 

EXTERN 

The TRIGGER key opens a menu for selecting the various 

trigger sources and the trigger polarity. The active trigger 

mode is indicated by illumination of the corresponding 

softkey. 

The FREE RUN and EXTERN softkeys are selection 

switches. Only one key can be enabled at any one time 

(illuminated). 

If triggering has taken place, the trigger LED is turned on and 

then turned off at the end of level measurement. 

To indicate that the ESIB is set for triggering (= not free run), 

the enhancement label TRG is displayed on the screen. 

SLOPE 

POS NEG 

FREE RUN 

The FREE RUN softkey activates the free-run level measurement (default 

setting). 

With free-run level measurement selected, the start of a scan is not explicitly 

triggered. Once a measurement is completed, another is started immediately. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate 

EXTERN The EXTERN softkey activates triggering by an external voltage 

(-5V to +5V) at the input connector EXT TRIGGER/GATE on the rear panel. 

The trigger threshold can be set in an entry window within this range. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel 2.5V 

SLOPE 

POS NEG 

The SLOPE POS/NEG softkey selects the trigger slope. 

The measurement starts after a positive or negative trigger signal edge. The 

selected setting is illuminated. The selection is valid for all trigger modes with 

the exception of FREE RUN. 

The default mode is SLOPE POS. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POS |NEG 

1088.7531.12 4.154 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Frequency and Span 

Analyzer Mode 

The analyzer mode is activated in the CONFIGURATION MODE menu (see also Section ’Mode 

Selection - MODE Key) 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SETUP 

MODE 

ANALYZER 




. 

. 

. 

The ANALYZER softkey selects the ANALYZER mode. 

The functions provided are those of a conventional 

spectrum analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency 

spectrum over the selected frequency range with the 

selected resolution and sweep time, or, for a fixed 

frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal. 


:INSTrument[:SELect] SANalyzer 

Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group 

The FREQUENCY key group is used to specify the frequency axis of the active measurement window. 

The frequency axis can be defined either by the start and stop frequency or by the center frequency and 

span. For the case when two measurement windows (SPLIT-SCREEN) are displayed simultaneously, 

data entered are always related to the window selected in the SYSTEM-DISPLAY menu. 

When one of the keys CENTER, SPAN, START or STOP is pressed, its value can be specified in an 

entry window. At the same time, a softkey menu appears, which allows selecting the optional 

parameters. 

Start Frequency – START Key 

FREQUENCY – START menu: 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

START 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

STOP 

START FREQ 

START 

MANUAL 

CENTER 

FIXED 

SPAN 

FIXED 

STOP 

FIXED 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 

The START key opens a menu which displays the various 

options for setting the start frequency of the sweep. 

The START MANUAL softkey is automatically active and 

opens the entry window for manual input of the start 

frequency. At the same time, the coupling of the parameters is 

set to STOP FIXED 

The STOP FIXED, SPAN FIXED and CENTER FIXED 

softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one 

of these switches may be active at any one time. The 

frequency coupling selected by the softkeys defines which of 

the dependent parameters stop frequency, center frequency 

and span is to remain constant when a change in the start 

frequency is made. 

The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear 

and logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis. 

1088.7531.12 4.155 E-15

Frequency and Span - Analyzer 

ESIB 

START 

MANUAL 

The START MANUAL softkey activates manual entry of the start frequency. 

The allowed range of values for the start frequency is: 

0 Hz

ESIB 


Stop Frequency – STOP Key 

FREQUENCY – STOP menu: 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

START STOP 

STOP FREQ 

STOP 

MANUAL 

START 

FIXED 

CENTER 

FIXED 

SPAN 

FIXED 

The STOP key opens a menu which displays the various 

options for setting the stop frequency of the sweep. 

The STOP MANUAL softkey is automatically active and opens 

the entry window for manual input of the stop frequency. At the 

same time, parameter coupling is set to START FIXED. 

The START FIXED, CENTER FIXED and SPAN FIXED 

softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one 

switch can be active at any one time. The softkeys are used to 

select the frequency coupling. The frequency coupling defines 

which of the dependent parameters start frequency, center 

frequency or span is to remain constant when the stop 

frequency is changed. 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 

STOP 

MANUAL 

The STOP MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry window for the stop 

frequency. 

The allowed range of values for the stop frequency is: 

minspan ≤ f stop ≤ f max f stop stop frequency 

minspan smallest selectable span (10Hz) 

f max max. frequency 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP 13 GHz 

START 

FIXED 

If the START FIXED softkey is active, the start frequency remains constant 

when the stop frequency is changed. The center frequency is adjusted to the 

new frequency range. The START FIXED coupling is the default setting. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:STOP:LINK STARt 

CENTER 

FIXED 

If the CENTER FIXED softkey is active, the center frequency remains 

constant when the stop frequency is changed. The start frequency is adjusted 

to the new frequency range. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:STOP:LINK CENTer 

SPAN 

FIXED 

If the SPAN FIXED softkey is active, the span remains constant when the 

stop frequency is changed. The start frequency is adjusted to the new 

frequency range. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:STOP:LINK SPAN 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 

The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic 

scales on the frequency axis (see START key). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG 

1088.7531.12 4.157 E-15


ESIB 

Center Frequency – CENTER Key 

FREQUENCY – CENTER menu: 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

START STOP 

CENTER 

CENTER 

MANUAL 

START 

FIXED 

SPAN 

FIXED 

STOP 

FIXED 

FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 

The CENTER softkey opens a menu which displays the 

various options for setting the center frequency of the sweep. 

The CENTER MANUAL softkey is automatically active and 

opens the entry window for manual input of the center 

frequency. At the same time, the coupling of the parameters is 

set to SPAN FIXED. 

The START FIXED, STOP FIXED and SPAN FIXED softkeys 

are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one switch can 

be active at any one time. The softkeys are used to select the 

frequency coupling. The frequency coupling defines which of 

the dependent parameters start frequency, stop frequency or 

span remains constant when the center frequency is changed. 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 

CENTER 

MANUAL 

The CENTER MANUAL softkey opens the entry window for entering the 

center frequency. 

The entry range for the center frequency is: 

for the frequency domain (span > 0): 

0 Hz

ESIB 


SPAN 

FIXED 

If the SPAN FIXED softkey is active, the span remains constant when the 

center frequency is changed. The start and stop frequency are adjusted to 

the new frequency range. SPAN FIXED coupling is the default setting. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:CENTer:LINK SPAN 

START 

FIXED 

If the START FIXED softkey is active, the start frequency remains constant 

when the center frequency is changed. The span is adjusted to the new 


IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:CENTer:LINK STARt 

STOP 

FIXED 

If the STOP FIXED softkey is active, the stop frequency remains constant 

when the center frequency is changed. The span is adjusted to the new 


IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:CENTer:LINK STOP 

FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 

The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the entry of a straight 

frequency offset which is added to the frequency axis. The offset range is - 

100 GHz to 100 GHz. The default setting is 0 Hz. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:OFFSet 10 GHz 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 




1088.7531.12 4.159 E-15


ESIB 

Center Frequency Step Size 

The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a menu for setting the step size of the center 

frequency. The step size can be coupled to the span (frequency domain) or the resolution bandwidth 

(time domain) or it can be manually set to a fixed value. 

In order to change the step size, the entry window for the center frequency must already be active. After 

pressing the STEP key, the CENTER STEP menu appears. The softkeys are presented according to the 

selected domain (frequency or time). 

Only one of the menu softkeys can be activated at any one time. 

Control is returned to the FREQUENCY CENTER menu via the menu key . 

DATA VARIATION - STEP menu for span ≠ 0 for span = 0 


HOLD 

STEP 

CENTER 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

0.1 * SPAN 

AUTO 

0.5 * SPAN 

AUTO 

X * SPAN 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

STEPSIZE 

= CENTER 

CENTER 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

0.1 * RBW 

AUTO 

0.5 * RBW 

AUTO 

X * RBW 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

STEPSIZE 

= CENTER 

AUTO 

0.1 * SPAN 

AUTO 

0.1 * RBW 

Frequency domain: The AUTO 0.1 * SPAN softkey sets the step size for center 

frequency entry to 10% of the span. 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN; 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 10PCT 

Time domain: The AUTO 0.1 * RBW softkey sets the step size of the 

center frequency entry to 10% of the resolution 

bandwidth 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW; 


AUTO 0.1 * RBW is the default setting. 

1088.7531.12 4.160 E-15

ESIB 


AUTO 

0.5 * SPAN 

AUTO 

0.5 * RBW 

Frequency domain: The AUTO 0.5 * SPAN softkey sets the step size for 

center frequency entry to 50% of the span. 




Time domain: The AUTO 0.5 * RBW softkey sets the step size of the 

center frequency entry to 50% of the resolution 

bandwidth 




AUTO 

X * SPAN 

AUTO 

X * RBW 

Frequency domain:The AUTO X * SPAN softkey activates the entry of the 

factor defining the center frequency step size as a % of 

span. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command see AUTO 0.5 * SPAN 

Time domain: The AUTO X * RBW softkey activates the entry of the 

factor defining the center frequency step size as a % of 

the resolution bandwidth. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command see AUTO 0.5 * RBW 

Values between 1 and 100% in steps of 1% are acceptable. The default 

setting is 10%. 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for the input of a 

fixed step size. 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 1.3 GHz 

STEPSIZE 

= CENTER 

The STEPSIZE = CENTER softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL 

and the step size to the center frequency. This function is especially useful 

when measuring harmonics, because, when the center frequency is entered, 

each STEP key stroke slects the center frequency of the next harmonic. 


1088.7531.12 4.161 E-15


ESIB 

Frequency Span – SPAN Key 

FREQUENCY – SPAN menu: 

FREQUENCY 

CENTER/ 

FREQ 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

START STOP 

SPAN 

SPAN 

MANUAL 

START 

FIXED 

CENTER 

FIXED 

STOP 

FIXED 

ZERO SPAN 

FULL SPAN 

The SPAN key opens a menu for setting the sweep span. 

The SPAN MANUAL softkey is automatically active and 

opens the entry window for manual input of the span. At 

the same time, the parameter coupling is set to CENTER 

FIXED. 

The START FIXED, CENTER FIXED and STOP FIXED 

softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only 

one switch can be active at any one time. The frequency 

coupling is selected with these softkeys. The frequency 

coupling defines which of the dependent parameters start 

frequency, center frequency or stop frequency is to remain 

constant when the span is changed 

LAST SPAN 

ZOOM 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 

SPAN 

MANUAL 

The SPAN MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry of the span. 

The span entry range is for: 

time domain (span = 0): 

0 Hz 

frequency domain (span > 0): 

minspan ≤ f span ≤ f max f span frequency span 

minspan smallest selectable span (10Hz) 

f max max. frequency 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 10MHZ 

ZERO SPAN 

The ZERO SPAN softkey sets the span value to 0 Hz. The x axis becomes 

the time axis. The axis labelling corresponds to the sweep time (on the left, 0 

ms, on the right, the current sweep time (SWT)). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 0HZ 

1088.7531.12 4.162 E-15

ESIB 


FULL SPAN 

The FULL SPAN softkey sets the span value to the maximum span of the 

ESIB. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL 

LAST SPAN 

The LAST SPAN softkey restores the previous setting if the span has been 

changed. This makes it possible to switch over between an overview 

measurement (FULL SPAN) and a detailed measurement (manually set 

center frequency and span). 

The FULL SPAN softkey modifies the center frequency as well as the 

selected span. The LAST SPAN softkey cancels this change. 


START 

FIXED 

If the START FIXED softkey is activated, the start frequency remains 

constant when the span is changed. The center and stop frequency are 

adjusted to the new span. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:SPAN:LINK START 

CENTER 

FIXED 

If the CENTER FIXED softkey is activated, the center frequency remains 

constant when the span is changed. The center and stop frequency are 

adjusted to the new span. The CENTER FIXED coupling is the default 

setting. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:SPAN:LINK CENTer 

STOP 

FIXED 

If the STOP FIXED softkey is activated, the stop frequency remains constant 

when the span is changed. The center and start frequency are adjusted to the 

new span. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQ:SPAN:LINK STOP 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 




1088.7531.12 4.163 E-15


ESIB 

Display Zoom 

FREQUENCY SPAN- ZOOM submenu: 

ZOOM 

ZOOM 

MOVE ZOOM 

WINDOW 

MOVE ZOOM 

START 

MOVE ZOOM 

STOP 

ZOOM 

OFF 

. 

. 

. 

The ZOOM softkey activates the zoom mode and opens a 

sub-menu to define the zoom span. 

Two frequency lines, which show and define the frequency 

range to be zoomed, appear in the active measurement 

window when the zoom mode is switched on. The default 

setting is a zoom span of 10% to the left and 10% to the right 

of the center frequency. The zoomed display is shown in the 

second measurement window. 

The settings for the second measurement window are taken 

from the original window. The second measurement window 

thus becomes the active measurement window and its 

settings can now be changed. 

If only one window is active when the zoom function is 

selected, SPLIT SCREEN mode is automatically switched on. 

The zoom span can be edited by using the softkeys of the 

sub-menu to change the position of the frequency lines. 

The softkey ZOOM OFF switches off the zoom. 

MOVE ZOOM 

WINDOW 

The MOVE ZOOM WINDOW softkey shifts the whole zoom window. The 

window can shifted until the upper frequency line reaches the stop frequency 

or the lower frequency line reaches the start frequency of the original window. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:ZOOM:CENTer 1GHz 

MOVE ZOOM 

START 

The MOVE ZOOM START softkey shifts the lower frequency line. The start 

frequency of the zoomed display can then be modified. The frequency line 

can be shifted to the start frequency of the original window or to the upper 

frequency line (= zero span). 



:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:ZOOM:STARt 100MHz 

MOVE ZOOM 

STOP 

The MOVE ZOOM STOP softkey shifts the upper frequency line. Thus, the 

stop frequency of the zoomed display can be modified. The frequency line 

can be shifted to the stop frequency of the original window or to the lower 

frequency line (= zero span). 



:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:ZOOM:STOP 200MHz 

ZOOM 

OFF 

The ZOOM OFF softkey switches the zoom function off and then returns 

control to the main menu. 

The frequency lines indicating the zoom range are deleted, SPLIT SCREEN 

mode remains active, the settings of both measurement windows are 

retained and the coupling of the two measurement windows is cancelled. 



1088.7531.12 4.164 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input 

Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group 

The REF and RANGE keys are used to set the reference level (= maximum RF input level, = overload 

limit), the maximum level (= upper grid level) , and the display range of the active window. The INPUT 

key sets the characteristics of the RF input (input impedance, selection of input and input attenuation). 

Reference Level – REF key 

In addition to the reference level (maximum RF input level), the ESIB provides a function to define a 

maximum level (uppermost grid line on the display): 

For a spectrum analyzer, the upper boundary of the measurement diagram (maximum level) is also the 

limit of its dynamic range (reference level). This means, that a signal which goes beyond the upper grid 

line also overdrives the analyzer. 

For compensation of frequency or antenna characteristics, transducer factors can be applied to increase 

the signal level. In this case, the calculated values can be above the reference level without actually 

being physically applied to the instrument. In order to display these signals on the grid, an upper grid 

level which is different from the reference level of the analyzer can be entered. 

LEVEL REF menu: 

LEVEL 

REF/ 

UNIT 

RANGE 

REF LEVEL 

REF LEVEL 

REF LEVEL 

OFFSET 

GRID 

ABS / REL 

REF LEVEL 

MAX LEVEL 

AUTO 

MAX LEVEL 

MANUAL 

The REF key opens a menu to set the 

reference level and the input attenuation 

for the active measurement window . 

The REF LEVEL softkey is automatically 

active with the menu called up and 

opens the entry window for manual input 

of the reference level. 

UNIT 

At the same time various settings 

concerning the level and the attenuation 

display can be made. 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

The functions for setting the attenuation 

are identical to those under the INPUT 

key and are described in Section 

"Configuration of the RF Input - INPUT 

Key". 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW NOISE 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

MIXER 

LEVEL 

1088.7531.12 4.165 E-15

Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer 

ESIB 

REF LEVEL 

The REF LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the reference level. The unit of 

the entry will be the currently active unit (dBm, dBµV, etc.). 

If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey is active, a change of the reference level 

causes an equal amount of change in maximum level Thus, the separation 

between the overload limit of the analyzer to the upper grid edge remains the 

same. Thus, with only one entry, it is possible to make a change to the 

display and simultaneously to perform an adjustment to the amplifier. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:RLEVel -60DBM 

REF LEVEL 

OFFSET 

The REF LEVEL OFFSET softkey activates the entry of a straight level offset 

( ±200 dB in 0,1 dB steps). The offset is added to the measured level 

irrespective of the selected unit. The scaling of the y axis is changed 

accordingly. The input can be used to take into account an external 

attenuation. 

The setting range is ±200 dB in 0,1-dB steps. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:RLEVel:OFFSet -1dB 

GRID 

ABS REL 

The GRID ABS/REL softkey toggles between absolute and relative scaling of 

the level axis. GRID ABS is the default setting. 

For absolute scaling the labeling of the level lines is referenced to the 

absolute value of the reference level. 

For relative scaling, the upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB and the scale 

units are in dB. In contrast, the reference level is always displayed in the set 

units (dBm, dBµV,..). 

The softkey is not displayed for setting LIN / % (linear scaling, labelling in %) 

in the LEVEL-RANGE menu since the % unit itself implies a relative scale. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:MODE ABS | REL 

The MAX LEVEL MANUAL and MAX LEVEL AUTO softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. 

Only one switch can be active at one time. The softkeys are used to select whether reference level and 

maximum level are identical or not: 

MAX LEVEL 

AUTO 

When MAX LEVEL AUTO softkey is active, the reference level and maximum 

level are identical. 

In this case, the reference level is displayed above the upper left corner of the 

grid in the corresponding function field. 

MAX LEVEL AUTO is the default setting. 

If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey was active prior to pressing the MAX 

LEVEL AUTO softkey, the upper boundary of the grid is set to the reference 

level. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:RVALue:AUTO ON 

MAX LEVEL 

MANUAL 

The MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the maximum level. 

The range of input values is ± 200dBm with 0.1 dB resolution. 

If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey is activated, the maximum level is 

displayed in addition to the reference level to the right above the grid. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:RVALue:AUTO OFF 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:RVALue -20DBM 

1088.7531.12 4.166 E-15

ESIB 


Display Units 

Generally, a spectrum analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level display is 

calibrated in terms of therms values of an unmodulated sine wave. In the initial state, the level is 

displayed at a power of 1 milliwatt (= dBm). As the input impedance is known to be 50Ω or 75Ω, 

conversion to other units is possible. The units dBm, dBµV, dBµA, dBpW, V, A and W are directly 

convertible and can be selected in the REF UNIT menu. 

Units dB../MHz have a special status. They are applicable for broadband pulse signals. The measured 

pulse voltage or the pulse current is referred to 1 MHz bandwidth. This conversion is not useful for 

narrowband or sinewave signals. 

If the antenna coded connector on the front panel is used, the coded unit there determines the possible 

display units. Connecting to the coded connector deactivates the settings of the UNIT menu. 

By certain codings it is nevertheless possible to select a conversion of the unit in the menu. The 

dependencies between the unit of the antenna coded connector or the unit of the transducer and the 

unit which is to be selected for the display are given in the softkey description. 

The default coding defined by the connector can be switched off using the PROBE CODE ON/OFF 

softkey. In this case, the unit can be set with the corresponding unit softkeys (dBm, dBµV, ... ) even if a 

coded connector is plugged in. The coded entries in the connector are then ignored. 

Note: 

The units dBµV/m and dBµA/m can only be set via the unit of a transducer or via the unit of the 

coded connector. 

LEVEL REF UNIT submenu: 

UNIT 

UNIT 

dBm 

dBmV 

dBµV 

dBµA 

The UNIT softkey opens a sub-menu in which the desired 

units for the level axis can be selected and the coding of the 

antenna coded connector can be switched on and off. 

The selected units are valid for both displays when two 

measurement windows are displayed. 

The unit softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. 

Only one of these switches may be active at any one time. 

dBpW 

dB* / MHz 

VOLT 

AMPERE 

WATT 

PROBE CODE 

ON / OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.167 E-15


ESIB 

dBm 

dBmV 

The dBm, dBµV, dBmV, dBµA, dBpW softkeys set the display units to the 

corresponding logarithmic units. The dBm unit is the default unit in analyzer 

mode. 

The units dBm, dBµV, dBmV, dBµA cannot be selected when the coded 

antenna connector or the used transducer defines a unit. 

Only for coding dB, the conversion to the desired units is permitted. 

dB µ V 


:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBM |DBMV |DBUV |DBUA |DBPW 

dB µ A 

dBpW 

dB* / MHz 

The dB*/MHz softkey activates/disactivates the display of results in units 

relative to the bandwidth. Those units can be derived from the logarithmic 

units dBµV, dBµV/m, dBµA and dBµA/m. 

This leads to the following relative units: 

dBmV ⇒ dBmV/MHz 

dBµV ⇒ dBµV/MHz 

dBµV/m ⇒ dBµV/mMHz 

dBµA ⇒ dBµA/MHz 

dBµA/m ⇒ dBµA/mMHz 

Switching over is possible also if a coded antenna connector or a transducer 

fixes the unit to be used. 

Conversion to 1 MHz is via the pulse bandwidth of the selected resolution 

bandwidth B imp according to the following equation (example for dBµV) : 

P/(dBV/MHz) 20 log B imp 

µ = ⋅ / MHz 

+ P/(dBV) µ , 

1MHz 

where P = display level 

The dBµV/MHz unit can be combined with the following coded connector or 

transducer units 

dB (the unit dBµV/MHz remains ) 

µV/m (yields the display unit dBµV/mMHz) 

analogous for dBµA/MHz: 

dB and µA (the unit dBµA/MHz remains) 

Other combinations are not allowed. 


:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUV_MHZ|DBUA_MHZ|DBMV_MHZ 

1088.7531.12 4.168 E-15

ESIB 


VOLT 

AMPERE 

WATT 

The VOLT, AMPERE, WATT softkeys set the display units to the 

corresponding linear units. 

The units VOLT, AMPERE, WATT cannot be selected when the coded 

antenna connector or the transducer table defines one of the following as 

units: 

µV/m 

µA 

For coding dB, the conversion to the desired units is permitted. 

PROBE CODE 

ON OFF 

The PROBE CODE ON/OFF softkey enables or disables the units defined by 

the coded connector. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :UNIT:PROBe ON | OFF 

Level Range – RANGE Key 

LEVEL RANGE menu: 

LEVEL 

REF/ 

UNIT 

RANGE 

LEVEL RANGE 

LOG 120 dB 

LOG 100 dB 

LOG 50 dB 

LOG 20 dB 

LOG 10 dB 

LOG 

MANUAL 

The RANGE key calls a menu in which the range, linear or 

logarithmic the display scale, absolute or relative and the 

level units for the active window can be selected. 

The display range of the analyzer can be set in 10 dB 

steps from 10 to 200 dB. 

The default setting is 100 dB. 

The most often used settings (120 dB, 100 dB, 50 dB, 

20 dB and 10 dB) are each directly selectable by a 

softkey. 

All other ranges are chosen with the LOG MANUAL 

softkey. 

After pressing the RANGE key, the LOG MANUAL entry 

window is enabled if the display range is not set to LIN. 

LINEAR/dB 

LINEAR/ % 

GRID 

ABS REL 

1088.7531.12 4.169 E-15


ESIB 

LOG 

MANUAL 

The LOG MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the level display range. 

Display ranges from 10 to 200 dB are allowed in 10-dB steps. Values which 

are not permissible are rounded to the next valid number. 



:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y 110DB 

LINEAR/dB 

The LINEAR/dB softkey switches the display range of the analyzer to linear 

scaling. The horizontal lines are labelled according to the selection GRID 

ABS/REL in dB* or *. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing LINear 

LINEAR/ % 

The LINEAR/% softkey switches the display range of the analyzer to linear 

scaling. The horizontal lines are labelled in %. The grid is divided into 

decades. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing PERCent 

GRID 

ABS REL 

The GRID ABS/REL softkey switches between absolute and relative scaling 

of the level axis. GRID ABS is the default setting. 

ABS The labelling of the level lines is referenced to the absolute value of the 

reference level. 

REL The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB and the scale units are in 

dB. In contrast, the reference level is always displayed in the set units 

(dBm, dBµV,..). 

The softkey is not displayed for setting LIN / % (linear scaling, labelling in %) 

since the % unit itself implies a relative scale. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:MODE ABS | REL 

1088.7531.12 4.170 E-15

ESIB 


RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key 

In addition to manual entry of the input attenuation, the ESIB provides an option which allows the RF 

attenuation, dependent on the selected reference level, to be automatically set. Thus, it is guaranteed 

that an optimum combination of RF attenuation and IF amplification is always used. For the automatic 

selection process, three modes are provided. The AUTO LOW NOISE mode selects the 

amplification/attenuation combination so that the display of noise on the ESIB is at a minimum. The 

signal/noise ratio is maximised. The AUTO LOW DISTORTION mode is tuned for minimisation of the 

internally generated interference products. This causes, however, a lower signal/noise ratio. The ATTEN 

AUTO NORMAL mode is a compromise between low noise and low distortion. 

When the instruemnt is equipped with option FSE-B21, External Mixer Output, the ESIB26 and ESIB40 

can be operated with external mixer. 

INPUT menu: 

INPUT 

INPUT 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW NOISE 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

MIXER 

LEVEL 

INPUT 

SELECT 

The INPUT key opens the menu for configuring the RF 

input. It contains the input attenuator and mixer level for 

matching the RF input to the input signal. 

The RF ATTEN MANUAL, ATTEN AUTO NORMAL, 

ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE and ATTEN AUTO LOW 

softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. only 

one can be active at any one time. 

Softkeys INTERNAL MIXER and EXTERNAL MIXER are 

only available when the ESIB is equiped with option FSE- 

B21, External Mixer Input (see manual of option). 

The INPUT SELECT softkey calls a submenu for 

configuration of the RF input 

INTERNAL 

MIXER 

EXTERNAL 

MIXER 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

The RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey activates the entry of an attenuation factor 

independent of the reference level. 

The following attenuation settings are available, irrespective of which input is 

active: 

• INPUT 1: 0 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps 

• INPUT 2: 0 to 70 dB in 5 dB steps 

Other inputs will be rounded to the next higher integer value. 

If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation, the 

reference level will be adjusted accordingly and the warning "Limit reached" 

will be output. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INPut:ATTenuation 40DB 

1088.7531.12 4.171 E-15


ESIB 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

The ATTEN AUTO NORMAL softkey sets the RF attenuation automatically as 

a function of the selected reference level. 


:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal 

:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ON 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW NOISE 

The ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE softkey sets the RF attenuation always 10dB 

lower than in the RF ATTEN AUTO mode. Therefore, for 10 dB RF 

attenuation, the maximum reference level is -10 dBm. For reference levels 

which are lower, at least 10 dB is always set (see above). 

Setting Low Noise means that the indicated inherent noise level is low. This 

setting is recommended if signals with a low level have to be measured as 

the highest S/N ratio is then obtained. 


:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LNOise 


ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

The ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST softkey sets the RF attenuation 10 dB higher 

than in RF ATT AUTO mode. This means that for 10 dB RF attenuation, the 

maximum reference level is -30 dBm (-40 dBm at the mixer). 

This setting is recommended whenever a small signal is to be measured in 

the presence of larger signals. Here, the intermodulation-free range of the 

ESIB is large and the internal distortion products are minimised. 


:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LDIStortion 


MIXER 

LEVEL 

The MIXER LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the maximum mixer level 

attainable for a given reference level. At the same time it enables softkeys 

ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE and ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST . 

Range of input values is -10 to -100 dBm 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INPut:MIXer -30DBM 

1088.7531.12 4.172 E-15

ESIB 


INPUT INPUT SELECT submenu: 

INPUT 

SELECT 

INPUT 

SELECT 

RF INPUT 

50 OHM 

RF INPUT 

75 OHM/RAM 

RF INPUT 

75 OHM/RAZ 

The INPUT SELECT softkey calls a submenu for selection an 

configuration of the RF input. Default setting is 50 Ohm and 

INPUT 1. 

By connecting an impedance converter RAM or RAZ ahead, the 

50-Ohm input can be transformed to 75 Ohm. ESIB 

automatically takes the corresponding correction values for the 

level display into account. 

Alternatively, the pulse-resistant INPUT 2 may be used in the 

frequency range up to 1 GHz. If INPUT 2 is switched on, the user 

can choose between AC and DC coupling. 

INPUT 1 

INPUT 2 

INPUT 2 

AC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

DC COUPLED 

RF INPUT 

50 OHM 

The RF INPUT 50 OHM softkey sets the input impedance to 50 

Ohm (= default setting). All level indications are referenced to 50 

Ohm. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INPut:IMPedance 50 

RF INPUT 

75 OHM/RAM 

The RF INPUT 75 OHM/RAM softkey sets the input impedance 

of the ESIB to 75 Ohm including the matching element RAM. All 

level indications are referenced to 75 Ohm. 


:INPut:IMPedance:CORR RAM 

RF INPUT 

75 OHM/RAZ The RF INPUT 75 OHM/RAZ softkey sets the input impedance 

of the ESIB to 75 Ohm including the matching element RAZ. All 

level indications are referenced to 75 Ohm. 


:INPut:IMPedance:CORR RAZ 

1088.7531.12 4.173 E-15


ESIB 

INPUT 1 

The INPUT 1 softkey activates input 1 (default setting). 

INPUT 2 

The INPUT 2 softkey activates pulse-resistant input 2. If input 2 

is used, the frequency range is restricted to 1 GHz. Higher 

frequencies cannot be set. 


:INPut:TYPE INPUT1|INPUT2 

INPUT 2 

AC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

DC COUPLED 

The INPUT 2 AC COUPLED and INPUT 2 DC COUPLED 

softkeys select AC or DC coupling for RF input 2. The default 

setting is AC coupling. The lower frequency limit is 1 kHz. 

To indicate that input 2 with AC or DC coupling is activated, the 

enhancement label I2A or I2D is shown on the display. 

If the ESIB is operated with RF input 1, the softkeys are not 

available (enhancement label IN1). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :INPut:COUPling AC | DC 

1088.7531.12 4.174 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Main Markers 

Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group 

The markers are used for marking points on measurement curves (traces), reading out measurement 

values and for quickly selecting a screen mode. Preselected measurement routines can be called by 

pressing a key in the marker menu. The ESIB has four markers and four delta markers per 

measurement window. The currently activated marker can be shifted with the cursor keys, the roll-key or 

the softkeys. The softkeys are defined according to the type of display representation selected 

(frequency or time domain). 

The marker which can be moved by the user is defined as the active marker. 

Examples of marker displays: 

marker active marker temporary marker 

1 3 

T1 

2 

delta marker 

Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to evaluate the measurement 

results. They disappear when the associated function is deactivated. 

The measurement values of the active marker (also called marker values) are displayed in the marker 

field. In the marker info list, the measurement values from all enabled markers are sorted in ascending 

order. The marker info list can be switched off with the MARKER INFO softkey so that only the values 

for the active marker are shown. 

The summary markers have a special function. They read out the rms or average value of the current 

trace or the trace averaged over several sweeps in the marker info list. These markers are not 

displayed. 

Main Markers– NORMAL Key 

The NORMAL key calls a menu which contains all the standard marker functions. The current state of 

the markers is indicated by a colored illumination of the softkeys. If no marker is enabled prior to 

pressing the NORMAL key, MARKER 1 will be enabled as the reference marker and a peak search on 

the trace is carried out (assumption: at least one trace is active). Otherwise, the peak search is omitted 

and the entry window for the reference marker is activated. 

The marker field in the upper right corner of the display screen shows the marker values, in this case, 

the frequency, the level and the currently selected trace. 

MARKER 1 [T1] 

-27.5 dBm 

123.4567 MHz 

1088.7531.12 4.175 E-15

Main Markers - Analyzer 

ESIB 


MARKER 

NORMAL SEARCH 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

POWER MEAS 

SETTING 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

DE A MKR 

MARKER 2 

CHANNEL 

POWER 

MARKER 3 

CP / ACP 

ABS REL 

MARKER 4 

SET CP 

REFERENCE 

SIGNAL 

COUNT 

COUNTER 

RESOL 

C / N 

MARKER 

DEMOD 

SIGNAL 

TRACK 

C / No 

MARKER 

ZOOM 

NOISE 

ADJACENT 

CHAN POWER 

ADJUST CP 

SETTINGS 

MARKER 

INFO 

OCCUPIED 

PWR BANDW 

ALL MARKER 

OFF 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 2 

ON 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 4 

The MARKER 1 to MARKER 4 softkeys switch the corresponding marker 

on/off or activate it as the reference marker. If the marker is activated as a 

reference marker, an entry field for manually setting the position of the 

reference marker is opened simultaneously. If the marker is disabled, the 

softkey is not illuminated. Enabled markers and the reference marker are 

indicated by illuminating the corresponding softkeys in different colors.(In 

the instrument default state, the active reference marker is displayed in red 

and enabled markers are displayed in green.) 

Operating example: 

MARKER 1 is shown as the reference marker by the colored background 

illumination. MARKER 2 through MARKER 4 are turned off. 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 2 

ON 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 2 

MARKER 3 

1088.7531.12 4.176 E-15

ESIB 


Pressing the MARKER 3 softkey switches MARKER 3 on and it becomes 

the reference maker. The previous reference marker remains enabled and 

the softkey remains illuminated. However, the entry mode for this marker is 

not now active. Instead, the entry window for MARKER 3 is opened and the 

position of MARKER 3 can be shifted. 

MARKER 3 

123.4567 MHz 

The information in the marker field also changes to describe the new 

reference marker. 

MARKER 3 [T1] 

-27.5 dBm 

23.4567891 MHz 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 

NORMAL 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 2 

MARKER 2 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 3 

Pressing the current reference marker (MARKER 3) softkey again switches 

MARKER 3 off. If at least one marker is enabled, the marker with the 

smallest number will be selected as the new reference marker (in the 

example, MARKER 1). Switching off the last active marker also deletes are 

delta markers. 



:CALCulate:MARKer:X 10.7MHz; 


When several traces are displayed, the marker is set to the maximum value (peak) of the active trace 

with the lowest number (1 to 4). if a marker is already positioned there, it will be set to the frequency of 

the next highest level (next peak). 

When the split screen mode is active, the marker will be placed in the active window (for SCREEN A: 

trace 1 or 3, for SCREEN B: trace 2 or 4). Since markers are attached to a trace, the marker can only be 

enabled when at least one trace is displayed in the corresponding window. 

If a trace is turned off, the markers and marker functions attached to the trace are also switched off. If 

the trace is switched on again (VIEW, CLR/WRITE;..), these markers, along with any coupled functions 

will be restored to their original positions. A prerequisite for the restoration of the marker positions is that 

individual markers have not been used on another trace or that the sweep data (start/stop frequency for 

span > 0 or sweep time for span = 0) have not been changed. 

1088.7531.12 4.177 E-15


ESIB 

If a marker (or, delta marker) necessary for a marker function is not available, it will be automatically 

checked whether or not the enabling of the corresponding marker is possible (see above). If this is not 

the case, a warning is issued. 

WARNING: 

No trace active 

The activation of the desired marker function is then not possible. 

On the other hand, if the marker can be enabled, a peak search is automatically performed. Thereafter, 

the desired marker function can be executed. 


ALL MARKER 

OFF 

The ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all markers (reference and delta 

markers). Similarly, it switches off all functions and displays correlated with 

the markers/delta markers (signal count, signal track, marker zoom, N dB 

down, shape factor, marker list and marker info). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF 

SIGNAL 

TRACK 

After each sweep, the SIGNAL TRACK softkey starts a search for the 

maximum signal level on the screen (PEAK SEARCH) and then sets the 

center frequency to the frequency of this signal (MARKER ->CENTER). 

If a threshold line is enabled, only signals above the threshold level are 

considered. If no signal is over the threshold, the center frequency remains 

constant until a signal is available which is over the threshold. 

If no marker is switched to the active trace, the next unused marker is 

automatically activated and positioned by the peak search routine. 

In order to reduce the search range, it is possible to apply the SEARCH LIMIT 

ON/OFF function (see section: "Search Functions"). If the center frequency is 

changed, the position of the frequency line relative to the center frequency 

remains the same, ie its absolute position is correspondingly changed. 

The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (spectrum) display 

mode (span > 0.) 


:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt ON |OFF; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt:FREQuency? 

1088.7531.12 4.178 E-15

ESIB 


MARKER 

ZOOM 

The MARKER ZOOM softkey expands the area around the active marker. 

With the zoom function, more details of the spectrum can be seen. The 

desired display range can be defined in an entry window. 

The sweep is stopped at the reference marker. The frequency of the signal is 

counted and the measured frequency becomes the new center frequency. 

The zoomed display is set and the new settings are used by the ESIB for 

further measurements. 

As long as the switchover to the new frequency display range has not yet 

taken place, pressing the softkey will abort the procedure. 

If no marker is activated when the softkey is pressed, then MARKER 1 is 

automatically activated and set to the highest peak in the measurement 

window. 

If an instrument setting is changed after selection of MARKER ZOOM, the 

function is aborted. 

The MARKER ZOOM softkey is only available for frequency domain 

measurements (span > 0). 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ZOOM 1KHZ 

MARKER 

INFO 

The MARKER INFO softkey opens the display of several markers within the 

grid. In the upper right corner of the grid, a maximum of 4 markers/delta 

markers with the marker symbols ∆/∇, marker number (1 to 4), position and 

measurement value are listed. For the output of the marker position, the 

number or displayed characters will be limited as required. 

If the number of lines available is not enough for all the enabled markers and 

delta markers, first the markers and then the delta markers are entered into 

the info list 

In the SPLIT SCREEN display, the info list is partitioned into 2 partial lists and 

assigned to the corresponding measurement window (SCREEN A and 

SCREEN B). The info list for SCREEN A contains the markers which are 

assigned to trace 1 or trace 3. The info list for SCREEN B contains the 

markers which are assigned to trace 2 and trace 4. 

For the two measurement windows, it is not possible to turn the MARKER 

INFO function selectively on/off . 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :DISPlay:WINDow:MINFo ON | OFF 

LF Demodulation 

The ESIB provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these demodulators, a displayed signal 

can be identified acoustically with of the internal loudspeaker or with external headphones. The 

frequency at which demodulation is activated is coupled to the markers. The sweep stops at the 

frequency determined by the set marker for the selected time and the RF signal is demodulated. 

During time domain measurements (span = 0) the demodulation is switched on continuously. 

1088.7531.12 4.179 E-15


ESIB 

MARKER NORMAL-MARKER DEMOD submenu: 

MARKER 

DEMOD 

MARKER 

DEMOD 

MKR DEMOD 

ON OFF 

AM 

The MARKER DEMOD softkey calls a sub-menu in which the 

type of demodulation desired, the duration of the 

demodulation may be selected 

FM 

MKR 

STOP TIME 

. 

. 

. 

MKR DEMOD 

ON OFF 

MKR 

STOP TIME 

AM 

FM 

The MKR DEMOD ON/OFF softkey switches the demodulation on/off. When 

the demodulation is on, the sweep is stopped at all marker frequencies, 

assuming the signal is over the threshold, and the signal is demodulated until 

the entered sweep stop time elapses. A total of four stopping points (four 

markers) can be programmed. 

If no marker is set when the demodulation is switched on, the ESIB switches the 

first marker on (MARKER 1) and positions it on the trace peak. 

IEC-Bus-Befehl 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEM ON|OFF 

The MKR STOP TIME softkey activates the entry window for setting the stop 

time. 

The ESIB stops the sweep at the marker or the marker for the duration of the 

defined stop time and then switches the demodulation on (see also MKR 

DEMOD ON/OFF). 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEM:HOLDoff 3s 

The AM and FM are selection switches of which only one can be activated at 

any one time. They are used to set the desired demodulation type, FM or AM. 

The default setting is AM. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEM:SELect AM|FM 

1088.7531.12 4.180 E-15

ESIB 


Frequency Measurement 

To accurately determine the frequency of a signal, the ESIB is equipped with an internal frequency 

counter. The frequency counter measures the frequency of the RF signal at the intermediate frequency. 

Using the value found at the intermediate frequency, the ESIB calculates the frequency of the RF signal 

by applying the known frequency conversion relationships. 

The frequency measurement error depends only upon the accuracy of the frequency standard used 

(external or internal reference). Although the ESIB always performs the frequency sweep in sync - no 

matter what frequency range is set - the frequency counter gives a more exact frequency measurement 

than a measurement performed with a marker. This is explained by the following: 

• The marker only gives the position of a pixel on the trace and the frequency of the signal is deduced 

from this. The trace, however, contains only a limited number of pixels, so each pixel may represent 

a number of measurement values that depends on the selected span. This reduces the frequency 

resolution. 

• The resolution with which the frequency can be measured is proportional to the measurement time. 

For measurement time reasons, the bandwidth is normally held as wide as possible and the sweep 

time is set a short as possible. This results in a loss of frequency resolution. 

For the measurement with the frequency counter, the sweep is stopped at the reference marker, the 

frequency is measured to the desired resolution and then the sweep is allowed to continue (see also 

Chapter 2, "Measurement Examples"). 


SIGNAL 

COUNT 

The SIGNAL COUNT softkey switches the frequency counter on/off. 

The frequency is counted at the position of the reference marker. The sweep 

stops at the reference marker until the frequency counter outputs a result. 

The time required for a frequency measurement depends on the selected 

frequency resolution. The resolution is set in the COUNTER RESOL submenu. 

If no marker is enabled when the SIGNAL COUNT softkey is pressed, 

MARKER 1 is switched on and set to the trace peak. 

The SIGNAL COUNT function is also indicated by [T x CNT] in the marker 

field on the display screen. 

MARKER 2 [T1 CNT] 

-27.5 dBm 

23.4567891 MHz 

Switching the SIGNAL COUNT function off is accomplished by pressing the 

softkey once again. 

Note: For digital resolution filters (RBW < 1kHz or softkey RBW 1kHz set to 

DIG), a analog prefilter of 2 kHz is active. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt ON | OFF; 


1088.7531.12 4.181 E-15


ESIB 

COUNTER 

RESOL 

COUNTER 

RESOLUTION 

10 kHz 

1 kHz 

100 Hz 

10 Hz 

1 Hz 

0.1 Hz 

The COUNTER RESOL softkey in the right side menu opens 

a sub-menu in which the resolution of the frequency counter 

can be defined. 

The value can be selected between 0.1 Hz and 10 kHz. 

The time which the frequency counter requires for a 

measurement is proportional to the selected resolution. For 

example, a 1 Hz resolution will require approximately one 

second measurement time. In order to prevent slowing the 

sweep time unnecessarily, it is recommended that the 

frequency resolution be set as low as possible. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt:RES 1KHZ 

Noise Power Density Measurement 

MARKER NORMAL menu (right side menu): 

NOISE 

The NOISE softkey switches noise measurement on/off. 

During a noise measurement, the noise power density is measured at the 

position of the reference marker. The noise power density is displayed in 

the marker field dependent upon the vertical units in dBx/Hz (for logarithmic 

scale) or in V/Hz, A/Hz or W/Hz for linear scales. The correction factors for 

the selected bandwidth and the conversion of the IF logarithmic converter 

are automatically taken into consideration. 

For trace setting AUTO SELECT, the sample detector is automatically 

switched on and off with the noise marker to provide for displayof the rms 

value of the noise power. For single sweep, a new sweep has to be started 

after the marker has been switched on in order to ensure that the trace is 

recorded with the correct detector. 

For all other detector settings, the user is prompted to select the sample 

detector for optimum results as soon as the noise marker is switched on. In 

this case the sample detector has to be switched on manually. 

In order to produce a smoother noise display, neighboring points 

(symmetrical to measurement frequency) on the trace are averaged. 

In the time domain display, an average of the measurement values takes 

place in time (after each sweep). 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe ON | OFF; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? 

1088.7531.12 4.182 E-15

ESIB 


Channel Power Measurements 

A modulated carrier is almost always used (exception e.g.,.: SSB-AM) for high-frequency transmission 

of information. Due to the information modulated onto the carrier, the latter covers a spectrum which is 

defined by the modulation, the data transmission rate and the signal filtering. Within a transmission 

band, each carrier is assigned a channel taking into account these parameters. In order to ensure errorfree 

transmission, each transmitter must keep within its specified parameters. These include among 

others: 

• the output power, 

• the occupied bandwidth, i.e., the bandwidth within which a defined percentage of the power must be 

contained and 

• the power received by adjacent channels. 

Using the power measurement function, the ESIB is capable of measuring all the specified parameters 

with high precision and at high speed. 

The power measurements settings are performed in the left-hand side-menu MARKER NORMAL. 


MARKER 

NORMAL 

POWER MEAS 

SETTINGS 

CHANNEL 

POWER 

CP / ACP 

ABS REL 

SET CP 

REFERENCE 

C / N 

The following measurements can be made: 

• channel power (CHANNEL POWER) 

• signal / noise power (C/N) 

• signal / noise power density (C/No) 

• adjacent channel power (ADJACENT CHAN POWER) 

• occupied bandwidth (OCCUPIED PWR BANDWIDTH) 

The channel power and the adjacent channel power can be measured either 

relative (CP/ACP REL) to the power in the utilised channel or in absolute terms 

(CP/ACP ABS). 

Channel configuration is via sub menu POWER MEAS SETTINGS. 

The above mentioned power measurements can be performed alternately. 

C / No 

ADJACENT 

CHAN POWER 

ADJUST CP 

SETTINGS 

OCCUPIED 

PWR BANDW 

1088.7531.12 4.183 E-15


ESIB 

Channel Configuration 

For all power measurements, a specified channel configuration is assumed which is, e.g. oriented on a 

specific radio communications system. 

The channel configuration is defined by the nominal channel frequency ( = center frequency of the 

ESIB), the channel bandwidth (CHANNEL BANDWIDTH) and the channel spacing (CHANNEL 

SPACING). 

The channel is indicated on the display screen by vertical lines located at a half-channel bandwidth to 

the left and to the right of the channel frequency. For the adjacent channel power measurement, the 

adjacent channels are also indicated by vertical lines. The lines of the utilised channel are labelled with 

CO for easier recognition. 

Depending on the radio communication service, the power of the 1 st alternate channel and/or 2 nd 

alternate channel can be measured in addition (softkey SET NO.OF ADJ CHAN’S). 

With the ACP STANDARD softkey, the channel configuration can be set automatically according to the 

regulations of different digital mobile-radio standards. For some standards, the channel power has to be 

evaluated by means of a root-cosine filter corresponding to the transmit filter. This filter is switched on 

automatically if the corresponding standards are selected but can be switched off manually (softkey CH 

FILTER ON/OFF). 

MARKER NORMAL - POWER MEAS SETTINGS submenu: 

POWER MEAS 

SETTING 

POWER MEAS 

SETTINGS 

SET NO. OF 

ADJ CHAN’S 

ACP 

STANDARD 

CH FILTER 

ON OFF 

The POWER MEAS SETTINGS softkey calls the sub-menu 

for the definition of the channel configuration. 

CHANNEL 

BANDWIDTH 

CHANNEL 

SPACING 

EDIT 

ACP LIMITS 

LIMIT 

CHECK 

% POWER 

BANDWIDTH 

SET NO. OF 

ADJ CHAN’S 

The SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S softkey activates the input of number ±n 

adjacent channels to be considered for adjacent channel power measurement 

The individual powers are indicated separately. Example n=3: 

CH0 Pwr -20.00 dBm 

ACP UP -45.23 dBm 

ACP LOW -52.11 dBm 

ALT1 UP -60.04 dBm 

ALT1 LOW -61.00 dBm 

ALT2 UP -63.34 dBm 

ALT2 LOW -64.00 dBm 

1, 2 or 3 adjacent channels are possible. ALT1 and 

ALT2 (Alternate Channel Power) indicate the channel 

power at ± 2 × channel spacing and ± 3 × channel 

spacing from the center of the channel. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 2 

1088.7531.12 4.184 E-15

ESIB 


ACP 

STANDARD 

The ACP STANDARD softkey activates the selection of a digital mobile-radio 

standard. The parameters for the adjacent channel power measurement are 

set according to the regulations of the selected standard. 

ACP STANDARD 

NONE 

NADC 

TETRA 

PDC 

PHS 

CDPD 

CDMA800 FWD 

CDMA800 REV 

CDMA1900 FWD 

CDMA1900 REV 

W-CDMA FWD 

W-CDMA REV 



CDMA2000 MC 

CDMA2000 DS 





The following standards can be selected: 

NADC (IS-54 B) 

TETRA 

PDC (RCR STD-27) 

PHS (RCR STD-28) 

CDPD 

CDMA800FWD 

CDMA800REV 

CDMA1900REV 

CDMA1900FWD 

W-CDMA FWD 

W-CDMA REV 



CDMA2000 Multi Carrier 

CDMA2000 Direct Sequence 





If the full dynamic range of the analyzer is to be utilized for the W-CDMA 

measurement (for a power measurement in this standard), the RF attenuation 

has to be set to 0 dB. 

However this is not done automatically to avoid damaging the analyzer input. 

Instead, a window displaying the following note is shown if one of the W- 

CDMA standards is selected: ’Attention: For higher dynamic range use RF 

ATTEN MANUAL=0dB. 

The following parameters change according to the standard selected: 

• channel spacing 

• channel bandwidth 

• modulation filter 

• resolution bandwidth 

• video bandwidth 

• detector 

Trace Maths and Trace Averaging are switched off. 

The reference level is not changed when a standard is selected. It has to be 

set for an optimum dynamic range so that the signal maximum is in the 

vicinity of the reference level. 

The basic setting ACP STANDARD NONE. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet 

NONE |NADC |TETRA |PDC |PHS |CDPD |F8CDma |R8CDma 

|F19Cdma |R19Cdma |FWCDma | RWCDma |FW3Gppcdma 

|RW3Gppcdma |M2CDma |D2CDma |FO8Cdma |RO8Cdma |FO19cdma 

|RO19cdma 

1088.7531.12 4.185 E-15


ESIB 

CH FILTER 

ON OFF 

The CH FILTER ON/OFF softkey switches a modulation filter for the channel 

power and adjacent channel power measurement on or off. 

When selecting the digital mobile-radio standards NADC, TETRA and W- 

CDMA 3 GPP (FWD and REV) using the ACP STANDARD softkey, the 

softkey is automatically set to ON. When the other standards are selected, 

weighting is not selectable and the softkey is not available. 

CH FILTER ON The channel bandwidth is defined by the filter weighting 

alone. Therefore, the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey 

cannot be operated. 

The activated modulation filter influences the channel 

and adjacent channel power measurement. 

Within the definition range of the filter, the individual 

pixels are weighted with the calculated filter attenuation 

as a function of the spacing to the channel center. The 

weighted display points are then added to the total 

channel power. 

CH FILTER OFF No modulation filter is switched on. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:CFIL ON|OFF 

CHANNEL 

BANDWIDTH 

The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey opens an entry window for setting the 

channel bandwidth for the transmission channel and the corresponding 

adjacent channels. 

For all channels, the default setting is 14 kHz. 

ACP CHANNEL BW 

CHAN BANDWIDTH 

CH 14 kHz 

ADJ 14 kHz 

ALT1 14 kHz 

ALT2 14 kHz 

Note: 

If the bandwidth of one channel is changed, the new value is also 

assigned to all subsequent channels in the table. The bandwidths 

for the individual channels can be set independently, however, by 

overwriting the table from the top to the bottom. 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel] 24KHZ 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel 24KHZ 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ALTernate 24KHZ 

1088.7531.12 4.186 E-15

ESIB 


CHANNEL 

SPACING 

The CHANNEL SPACING softkey opens an table for defining the channel 

spacing. The channel spacing is the spacing of the center frequency of a 

given channel relative to the center of the transmission channel. 

The default setting for channel spacing is 20 kHz. 

CHANNEL SPACING 

CHAN SPACING 

ADJ 20 kHz 

ALT1 40 kHz 

ALT2 60 kHz 

Note: Channel spacings can be selected separately for each channel. If a 

spacing value is changed in the table, the following values are 

changed automatically. 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] 24KHZ 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 24KHZ 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALT 24KHZ 

EDIT 

ACP LIMITS 

The EDIT ACP LIMITS opens a table for defining the limits for ACPmeasurement. 

ACP LIMITS 

CHAN CHECK LOWER CHANNEL LIMIT UPPER CHANNEL LIMIT 

ADJ -50 dB -50 dB 

ALT1 -60 dB -60 dB 

ALT2 

The limit values are defined either in units of dB (forCP/ACP REL) or in dBm 

(for CP/ACP ABS). 

Note: Measured values that exceed one of the limits are marked with an 

preceding asterisk. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:ACP:ACHannel 30DB, 30DB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACP:ACHannel:STATe ON|OFF 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACP:ALT 30DB, 30DB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACP:ALT:STATe ON|OFF 

LIMIT 

CHECK 

The LIMIT CHECK softkey switches on or off the limit check of the ACp 

measurement. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACP:ACHannel:RESult? 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACP:ALTernate:RESult? 

% POWER 

BANDWIDTH 

The % POWER BANDWIDTH softkey opens an entry window for defining the 

percentage of the power with respect to the total power in the displayed 

frequency range. This defines the occupied bandwidth (percent of the total 

power). 

The permitted range is 10 % - 99,9 % 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth 99PCT 

1088.7531.12 4.187 E-15


ESIB 

Channel Power Measurement 

The CHANNEL POWER measurement is performed by an integration of the measurement points within 

the channel bandwidth. The channel is marked by two vertical lines to the left and to the right of the 

center frequency as defined by the channel bandwidth (see Fig. 4-9). 

0 

-10 

-20 

Ref Lvl 

-20 dBm 

Marker [T1] 

200.0100 MHz 

-22.4 dBm 

RBW 300 Hz 

VBW 300 Hz 

SWT 100 ms 

1 

RF ATT 10 dB 

Mixer -30 dBm 

Unit dBm 

1 -24.5 dBm 

200.000590 MHz 

CH PWR -18.0 dBm 

CH BW 30.0 kHz 

-30 

-40 

-50 

-60 

-70 

-80 

-90 

-100 

Center 

200 MHz 

10 kHz/ 

Span 100 kHz 

channel width 

Fig. 4-9 

Determination of the channel width 


CHANNEL 

POWER 

The CHANNEL POWER softkey initiates the calculation of the power in the 

measurement channel. The display takes place in the units of the y axis, e.g., 

in dBm, dBµV. 

The calculation is performed by summing the power at the pixels within the 

specified channel. 

The measurement is either absolute or relative to a reference power (see the 

CP/ACP ABS/ REL softkey). 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNC:POW:SELect CPOWer; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNC:POW:RESult? CPOWer; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNC:POW[:STATe] OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.188 E-15

ESIB 


CP/ACP 

ABS REL 

The CP/ACP ABS/REL softkey (Channel Power/Adjacent Channel Power 

Absolute /Relative) switches between an absolute and relative display of the 

power measured in the channel or adjacent channel. 

Channel power measurement 

CP ABS The absolute value of the power is displayed in the unit of the 

Y axis, eg in dBm, dBV. 

CP REL The power of a freely selected channel is measured. This 

power is set in relation to the power of a reference channel. 

The reference channel power is selected beforehand using 

the SET CP REFERENCE softkey, ie: 

1. Declare the power in the currently measured channel as 

the reference value using the SET CP REFERENCE 

softkey. 

2. Set the channel of interest by changing the channel 

frequency (ESIB center frequency). 

In case of linear scale of the Y axis the relative power 

(CP/CP ref ) of the new channel is displayed in addition to the 

reference channel. In case of dB scale, the logarithmic ratio 

20×log (CP/CP ref ) is displayed. 

Therefore, the relative channel power measurement can also 

be used for universal adjacent channel power measurements. 

Example: 

Measurement of the 1597-QCDMA adjacent channel power. 

The useful channel and the adjacent channels have different 

bandwidths (1.23 MHz or 30 kHz). 

Adjacent channel power measurement 

The power of the adjacent channels is measured. The 

reference value is the power of the useful channels (see 

measurement of the adjacent channel power). The useful 

channel is marked by two vertical lines that are labelled with 

C0. 

ACP ABS The powers of the useful channel and of the adjacent 

channels are displayed as absolute values in the unit of the Y 

axis. 

ACP REL The logarithmic ratio 20×log (CP/CP 0 ) of the powers of the 

adjacent channels to the useful channel is displayed 

The softkey is not available for OCCUPIED PWR BANDWIDTH, C/N and 

C/N0 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABS|REL 

SET CP 

REFERENCE 

The SET CP REFERENCE softkey sets the reference value to the currently 

measured channel power for an activated CHANNEL POWER power 

measurement,. 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REF:AUTO ONCE 

1088.7531.12 4.189 E-15


ESIB 

Signal / Noise Power Measurement 


C / N 

The C/N (Carrier to Noise) softkey calculates the ratio of carrier power to 

noise power and the power of interference signals in the channel defined 

under POWER MEAS SETTING. For the measurement, a marker must be 

set to the carrier of interest. 

The unit of C/N is dB when the display is logarithmic. When the display is 

linear, C/N is shown without a unit. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW:SELect CN; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW:RESult? CN; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW[:STATe] OFF 

C / N 0 

The C/N 0 softkey starts the C/N 0 measurement. 

In contrast to the C/N measurement, C/N calculates the ratio of carrier 

power to noise and interference signals based on a 1 Hz bandwidth in the 

channel defined under POWER MEAS SETTING. 

The unit of C/No is dB/Hz when the display is logarithmic and 1/Hz when the 

display is linear. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW:SELect CN0; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW:RESult? CN0; 


Measurement procedure: 

1. Activate a marker and position it to the peak of the carrier signal (e.g., with the Marker -> Peak 

softkey). 

2. Select With the desired frequency range (channel) with the FREQUENCY CENTER and CHANNEL 

BANDWIDTH (POWER MEAS SETTING sub-menu) softkeys. 

3. Press the C/N or C/N 0 softkey. The marker is set to reference fixed and activates each 

measurement. It must be observed that the carrier is either located outside of the measurement 

channel or turned off at the UUT (Unit Under Test). 

4. Press the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey to active the default settings with modified channel 

parameters. 

The measurement values for C/N or C/N o are displayed in the marker info field. 

Notes: – If no carrier marker was set, only N or N o with the appropriate units is displayed. 

– Is the carrier located inside the measurement channel, C/C+N or C/C+N 0 will be displayed 

1088.7531.12 4.190 E-15

ESIB 


Example: 

The signal-to-noise ratio of the carrier (f = 199.9 MHz) in the channel with +100 kHz separation from 200 

MHz (channel center frequency) is to be measured. The channel bandwidth is 150 kHz. 

1. Using the CENTER key, set the center frequency to the channel center frequency 200 MHz. 

2. Using the SPAN key, set the span, e.g., to 1 MHz (carrier must be visible). 

3. Using the MARKER NORMAL key, activate MARKER 1 (If Marker 1 was not yet active, the function 

MARKER→ PEAK is automatically executed. In this case, skip step 4.) 

4. Using the MARKER→ PEAK key, set MARKER 1 on the carrier (assumption: the 200 MHz carrier has 

the highest level in the selected span). 

5. Press the MARKER NORMAL key and change to the left-hand supplementary menu. 

6. Using the POWER MEAS SETTING softkey, call the sub-menu for defining the measurement channel. 

7. Using the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH: softkey, set the bandwidth to 150 kHz (The channel spacing 

does not need to be entered for this measurement). Then press ⇑ menu change key. 

8. Using the C/N softkey, start the C/N measurement. In the marker info field, the outputs CHANNEL 

CENTER, CHANNEL BANDWIDTH as well as the corresponding C/N measurement values appear. 

MARKER 1 is also set to reference fixed. 

9. Using the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey, activate the default settings with modified channel 

parameters (channel bandwidth = 150kHz) for the correct C/N measurement (span = 2 × channel 

bandwidth = 300 kHz, RBW = 3 kHz, VBW = 10 kHz, detector: sampling ). 

Two vertical lines mark the channel 200 MHz ± 75 kHz in which the noise measurement is performed 

(see Fig.4-10). The reference value is the measurement from MARKER 1 (Reference Fixed). 

0 

-10 

Ref Lvl 

-20 dBm 

FXD -20.7021 

dBm 

Marker [T1] 

-24.4 dBm 

199.9020 MHz 

RBW 3 kHz 

VBW 10 kHz 

SWT 100 ms 

RF ATT 10 dB 

Unit 

dBm 

1 -24.4 dBm 

199.90200000 MHz 

C/N 

65.43 dB 

CH BW 150.00000000 kHz 

-20 

-30 

-40 

-50 

-60 

-70 

-80 

-90 

FXD 

-100 

Center 

200 MHz 

30 kHz/ 

Span 300 kHz 

CHANNEL 

BANDWIDTH 

Fig.4-10 

Example: measurement of the signal/noise power 

1088.7531.12 4.191 E-15


ESIB 

Adjacent Channel Power 


ADJACENT 

CHAN POWER 

The ADJACENT CHAN POWER softkey starts the measurement of the 

adjacent channel power. 

The ADJACENT CHAN POWER measures the power which the transmitter 

delivers to the two adjacent channels (upper channel , lower channel). The 

measurement values are displayed according to the setting of the CH/ACD 

ABS/REL softkey as absolute values in the scale of the X axis (see Fig.4-11) 

or as a logarithmic ratio of adjacent channel to useful channel in dB (20 × log 

(CP/CP 0 ). 

If the power of the other neighbouring channels is to be measured in addition 

to the adjacent channel power, the number of adjacent channels can be 

extended (on one side only) using SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S in the submenu 

POWER MEAS SETTINGS. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW:SELect ACP; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW:RESult? ACP; 


A prerequisite for the correct measurement of the adjacent channel power is the correct setting of the 

ESIB center frequency, the channel bandwidth and the channel spacing. The CHANNEL SPACING and 

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH are defined in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS sub-menu. 

For an activated measurement of adjacent channel power, the analyzer itself optimally sets all other 

values (span, resolution bandwidth, detector, etc.) after the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey is pressed. 

The carrier power in the utilised channel, the power (absolute or relative to the utilised channel) in the 

upper and lower adjacent channels as well as the largest of the two power values and the channel raster 

with channel spacing and bandwidth are displayed as the result of the measurement. The C0 lines mark 

the bandwidth of the carrier channel. Other unlabelled frequency lines mark the adjacent channels (see 

Fig.4-11). With SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S 2 selected, the other two neighbouring channels (1st 

Alternate Channels) are displayed as well, with SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S 3 selected, an additional 

channel each (2nd Alternate Channels). 

The measurement values are updated and displayed until the ADJACENT CHAN POWER softkey is 

pressed again and the measurement of the adjacent channel power is stopped. 

1088.7531.12 4.192 E-15

ESIB 


0 

-10 

-20 

-30 

Ref Lvl 

-20 dBm 

Marker [T1] 

-28.4 dBm 

200.0100 MHz 

C0 

RBW 300 Hz 

VBW 300 Hz 

SWT 100 ms 

C0 

1 

RF ATT 10 dB 

Mixer -30 dBm 

Unit dBm 

1 -28.4 dBm 

200.0100 MHz 

CH0 PWR -18.3 dBm 

ACP Max -67.23 dBm 

ACP UP -67.23 dBm 

ACP LOW -69.45 dBm 

CH Space 30 kHz 

Ch BW 

24 kHz 

-40 

-50 

-60 

-70 

-80 

-90 

-100 

Center 

200 MHz 

10 kHz/ 

Span 100 kHz 

Channel BW 

Channel BW 

Channel BW 

Channel 

Spacing 

Channel 

Spacing 

Fig.4-11 

Lower 

Channel 

Transmit 

Channel 

Measurement of the adjacent channel power. 

Upper 

Channel 

If the limit check is activated for ACP measurements, the result of the limit check (PASSED/FAILED) is 

displayed as well as an asterisk preceding each measured ACP power that exceeded one of the limits. 

Note: 

The limit check is activated and the limits are defined in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS menu. 

1088.7531.12 4.193 E-15


ESIB 

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement 

An important characteristic of a modulated signal is the bandwidth which it occupies. In a radio 

communications system, for instance, the occupied bandwidth must be limited prevent in adjacent 

channel interferences. The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which a defined 

percentage of the total transmitter power is contained. The percentage of the power can be set between 

10 and 99% in the ESIB. 


OCCUPIED 

PWR BANDW 

The OCCUPIED PWR BANDW (occupied power bandwidth) softkey starts 

the measurement for determining the occupied bandwidth. 

In the spectrum display mode, the bandwidth is determined in which a 

predefined percentage of the power in the displayed bandwidth is contained. 

(selectable in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS sub-menu with the : % POWER 

BANDWIDTH softkey). The occupied bandwidth is output to the marker 

display field and marked on the trace with temporary markers. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW:SELect OBW 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POW:RESult? OBW 


Measurement principle: 

For example, the bandwidth is to be found in which 99% of the signal power is contained. The routine 

calculates first the total power of all displayed points (pixels) of the trace. In the next step, the 

measurement points from the right edge of the trace are integrated until 0.5% of the total power is 

reached. Then the ESIB integrates, in an analog fashion, from the left edge of the trace until 0.5% of the 

power is reached. The delta marker is positioned at this point. Thus, 99% of the power is located 

between the two markers. The difference between the two frequency markers is the occupied bandwidth 

which is displayed in the marker info field. 

A prerequisite for the correct operation of the measurement is that only the signal to be measured is 

visible on the display screen of the ESIB. An additional signal would falsify the measurement. 

In order to be able to perform correct power measurements, especially for noisy signals, and thus to 

achieve the correct occupied bandwidth, the selection of the following parameters should be observed: 

RBW 

VBW 

detector 

span 

ESIB 


Parameters for Channel Power Measurements / Configuration 

For the correct measurement of channel power, C/N, C/N0, adjacent channel power and occupied 

bandwidth, it is recommended that an automatic optimisation of the analyzer settings be performed after 

enabling the corresponding measurement and selecting the channel configuration (channel power 

settings). 


ADJUST CP 

SETTINGS 

The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey optimises automatically the settings of 

the analyzer for the selected power measurement (see below). 

All relevant analyzer settings for a power measurement within a defined 

frequency range (channel bandwidth) are optimally set including: 

• span 

• resolution bandwidth 

• video bandwidth 

• detector 

dependent upon the channel configuration (channel bandwidth and, if 

needed, channel spacing). 

The trace mathematical functions and trace averaging are switched off. 

The reference level is not influenced by the automatic optimisation routine. 

The reference level is to be so adjusted that the signal maximum is located 

near the reference level. 

The optimisation is performed only once, however, if necessary, the 

instrument settings may be changed later. 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ADJust 

Span 

The span should cover at least the frequency range that is to be observed. For 

channel power measurements, C/N and C/N0, this is the channel bandwidth. 

For adjacent channel power measurements, this is the utilised channel 

bandwidth and the adjacent channels located within the channel spacing. 

If the span is large compared to the observed frequency band(s), then only a 

few points on the trace are available for the measurement. 

The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey sets the span as follows: 

2 × channel bandwidth for channel power, C/N, C/No or 

2 × channel spacing + channel width for adjacent channel power 

4 × channel bandwidth for adjacent channel power and NO. 

OF ADJ CHAN‘S 2 

6 × channel spacing + channel width for adjacent channel power and NO. 

OF ADJ CHAN‘S 3 

For measurements of the occupied bandwidth, the span is not influenced. 

1088.7531.12 4.195 E-15


ESIB 

Resolution bandwidth (RBW) 

In order to achieve acceptable speed as well as the necessary selectivity (to 

suppress spectral components outside of the channel to be measured and, 

especially adjacent channels), the resolution bandwidth that is selected must 

not be too narrow or too broad. 

If the resolution bandwidth is too narrow, the measurement speed becomes 

very slow and it is possible that relative spectral components are not displayed 

(due to the sampling detector necessary for power measurements and the 

finite number of points). 

On the other hand, the resolution bandwidth should not be so broad that, due 

to insufficient selection, spectral components outside of the observed 

frequency range (from adjacent channel) falsify the measurement results. 

The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey sets the resolution bandwidth (RBW) 

dependent upon the channel bandwidth as follows: 

RBW ≤ 1/40 of the channel bandwidth. The maximum possible RBW, with 

due regard to the 1, 2, 3, 5 step size and the requirement RBW ≤ 1/40 will be 

selected. 

The RBW is not influenced by measurements of the occupied bandwidth. 

Video bandwidth (VBW) 

Since a power measurement of the noise components is also necessary 

(otherwise, errors occur due to the logarithmic characteristics of the spectrum 

analyzer), the video bandwidth should be slected to be substantially larger 

than the resolution bandwidth. 

The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey adjusts the video bandwidth (VBW) 

dependent upon the channel bandwidth as follows: 

VBW ≥ 3* RBW. The minimum VWB with regard to the available 1, 2, 3, 5 

step size is selected. 

Detector 

The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey selects the sampling detector. 

The sampling detector is to be selected, above all, for correct power 

measurements of noisy signals within the observed frequency range. 

1088.7531.12 4.196 E-15

ESIB 


Marker Step Size 

DATA VARIATION – STEP menu: 


HOLD STEP 

MARKER 

STEP SIZE 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 


menu to match the marker step size to each individual 

application. In order to change the step size, the marker entry 

mode must already be active. 

Control is returned to the MARKER NORMAL menu via the 

menu key . 

MKR TO 

STEPSIZE 

DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

. 

. 

. 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

MKR TO 

STEPSIZE 

DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the marker step size to AUTO. In this 

case, the step size is exactly 10% of the grid. A one-raster movement of the 

roll-key corresponds to one pixel. 

STEPSIZE AUTO is the default setting. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:STEP:AUTO ON|OFF 

The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for defining a 

fixed value for the marker step size. 

Pressing the step key shifts the marker position by the selected step size. 

The resolution of the roll-key is always one pixel per raster. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:STEP 10KHZ 

The MKR TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the current 

marker frequency or marker time. 

In the frequency domain, this function is well suited to harmonic 

measurements. The marker is set to the largest signal using the peak search 

function. After activation of the MKR TO STEPSIZE function, the marker is 

set to the corresponding harmonic of the signal each time the cursor key 

or is pressed when entering the marker position (see also Chapter 2, 

"Measurement Examples"). 



The DELTA TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the 

difference between the reference marker and the last active delta marker. 

The softkey is only available when at least one delta marker is enabled. 


1088.7531.12 4.197 E-15

Delta Markers - Analyzer 

ESIB 

Delta Markers – DELTA Key 

The delta marker.s are used to measure a level or frequency referred to a reference marker. They are 

always referenced to the marker whose position was last changed. A delta marker is displayed 

as an empty symbol. The reference marker is displayed as a filled symbol. 


MARKER 

NORMAL 

SEARCH 

DELTA 

MARKER 

DELTA 1 

DELTA 2 

The DELTA key switches a delta marker on and calls the 

menu for its control. If no marker is enabled, MARKER 1 is 

automatically activated when the delta marker is switched on. 

The delta marker activated to entry mode is shown on the 

display screen as a filled symbol. 

DELTA 

MKR 

DELTA 3 

DELTA 4 

PHASE 

NOISE 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REFERENCE 

FIXED 

DELTA MKR 

ABS REL 

ALL DELTA 

OFF 

DELTA 1 

DE A 2 

DELTA 3 

DELTA 4 

The DELTA 1 to 4 softkeys are used to enable delta markers 1...4. The 

control of the delta markers corresponds to that of the markers. After a delta 

marker has been enabled, all entries are now applicable to this marker. The 

main marker must be activated anew if its position is to be changed. 

The delta marker field on the display screen contains the delta marker 

number, the difference frequency from the delta marker to reference marker 

and the level difference between the active delta markers and reference 

markers. 

The indicated differences are, in general, referred to the reference marker. If 

the PHASE NOISE or REFERENCE FIXED functions are enabled, the 

reference values under REFERENCE POINT are applicable. 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker ON|OFF 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X 10.7MHZ 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X:REL? 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:Y 

1088.7531.12 4.198 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Delta Markers 

DELTA MKR 

ABS REL 

The DELTA ABS REL softkey switches between relative and absolute entry 

modes for the delta-marker frequency. 

In the REL position, the delta marker frequency is entered relative to the 

reference marker. In this case, the entry mode for the delta-marker 

frequencies is also relative. 

In the ABS position, the entry of the delta-marker frequency is in terms of 

absolute frequency. 

The default setting is REL. 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MODE ABS | REL 

ALL DELTA 

OFF 

The ALL DELTA OFF softkey switches off all active delta markers and any 

associated functions (e.g. REFERENCE FIXED, PHASE NOISE). 



REFERENCE 

FIXED 

The REFERENCE FIXED softkey enables/disables relative measurements 

with respect to a fixed, measurement-curve-independent reference value. 

The information in the delta-marker field on the display screen is referenced 

to this fixed reference value. For the generation of the marker lists using 

MARKER INFO list, the delta markers are also output relative to a fixed 

reference. In the lists, the REFERENCE POINT is tagged by the number of 

the reference marker (only one enabled) 

When REFERENCE FIXED is enabled, the current settings of the reference 

marker become the reference values. If no marker is active, MARKER 1 (with 

peak search) is activated. After transferring the reference values, all markers 

are deleted, and the active delta marker is set to the position of the reference 

value. Additional delta markers can be switched on. 

The reference value can be subsequently changed 

1. by shifting it in the REFERENCE POINT sub-menu. 

2. by starting a search: 

In the MARKER NORMAL menu the REF POINT is handled as a reference 

marker (even though it is not bound to the trace). This means, that it will be 

shown as enabled and can also be changed in position. The co-ordinates 

of the REF POINT are overwritten by the marker values (they lie, by 

definition, on the trace). Thus, it is possible, even for an enabled 

REFERENCE FIXED, to define a new reference point function with search 

functions. 

The REFERENCE FIXED function is particularly useful for measurements 

which are performed relative to a reference signal that is not available during 

the whole measurement time (e. g. harmonics measurements, see chapter 

"Measurement Example"). 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed ON|OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.199 E-15


ESIB 

MARKER DELTA- REFERENCE POINT submenu: 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REF POINT 

LEVEL 

REF POINT 

LVL OFFSET 

REF POINT 

FREQUENCY 

REF POINT 

TIME 

The REFERENCE POINT softkey opens a sub-menu in which 

the reference value the REFERENCE FIXED and PHASE 

NOISE functions can be modified. 

The position of the reference value is indicated by two 

additional display lines (horizontal and vertical). In addition, an 

offset level may be defined which is added to each difference 

during output. 

The softkey is only available when the REFERENCE FIXED or 

PHASE NOISE function is switched on. 

REF POINT 

LEVEL 

REF POINT 

FREQUENCY 

REF POINT 

LVL OFFSET 

REF POINT 

TIME 

The REF POINT LEVEL softkey activates an entry box for setting the 

reference level relevant to the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE. 

functions. 


:CALCulate:DELT:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:Y -10DBM 

The REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry box for the input of 

a reference frequency for the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE. 

functions. 


:CALCulate:DELT:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:X 10.7MHZ 

The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey activates the entry box for the entry of 

an additional offset level during output when the REFERENCE FIXED or 

PHASE NOISE. functions are enabled. 

The offset level is set to 0 dB when the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE 

NOISE. functions are switched on. 


:CALCulate:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFSet 10DB 

The REF POINT TIME softkey activates the entry box for the input of a 

reference time for the REFERENCE FIXED function in the time domain 

(span = 0). 

The entry of a reference time for the PHASE NOISE function is not possible. 


:CALCulate:DELT:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:X 100ms 

1088.7531.12 4.200 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Delta Markers 

Phase Noise Measurement 


PHASE 

NOISE 

The PHASE NOISE softkey switches the PHASE NOISE function on/off. 

When PHASE NOISE measurement is switched on, the frequency and level 

of the reference marker are used as fixed reference values, i.e. the 

REFERENCE FIXED function is activated. 

The difference between this reference point and the active delta markers is 

determined. The correction factors for bandwidth and the logarithmic 

converter are automatically taken into account. The sampling detector is 

automatically seleced to allow the effective noise power to be displayed. The 

measured values are displayed in the delta marker field in units of dBc/Hz. 

If several delta markers are enabled, only the measurement value output of 

the active marker is shown in the marker field. Using MARKER INFO and 

MARKER LIST the measurement data of all delta markers can be displayed. 

If no marker is present when the PHASE NOISE function is enabled, 

MARKER 1 is automatically switched on (peak search), and the marker 

values are saved as reference values. The reference value can be changed 

later in the NORMAL menu, SEARCH menu or REFERENCE POINT submenu 

(see REFERENCE FIXED softkey). 

Turning on an additional marker causes the PHASE NOISE function to be 

disabled. 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNC:PNOise ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNC:PNOise:RESult? 

1088.7531.12 4.201 E-15


ESIB 

Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key 

STEP-DELTA STEP menu: 


HOLD STEP 

DELTA 

STEP SIZE 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 


menu to match the step size of the individual delta markers 

to the specific application. In order to change the step size, 

the entry mode for a delta marker must already be active. 

Control is returned to the DELTA MARKER menu via the 

menu key . 

DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

. 

. 

. 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the delta marker step size to AUTO. In 

this case, the step size of the delta marker is exactly 10% of the grid. The 

roll-key corresponds to 1/500, i.e., for each rotational pulse, the delta 

marker is shifted one pixel position. 



STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey permits the entry of a fixed value for the 

delta marker step size. 

Pressing the step-key shifts the marker position by the selected step size. 

The roll-key resolution, however, always remains constant at 1 pixel. 


DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

The DELTATO STEPSIZE softkey sets the delta marker step size to a 

quantity equal to the difference between the delta and reference markers. 

The softkey is only presented when at least one delta marker is switched 

on. 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:STEP 10HZ 

1088.7531.12 4.202 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Search Functions 

Search Functions – SEARCH Key 

The ESIB offers numerous functions useful for peak/min. peak searching. The search functions can be 

used for marker as well as delta marker functions. 

The setups applicable to the available search functions are performed in the MARKER-SEARCH menu. 

The search functions are always related to the currently active marker. If the SEARCH key is pressed 

while the marker entry mode is active, then all search functions are related to the current reference 

marker. If the entry mode of a delta marker is active, then the functions will be applied to the 

corresponding delta marker. For the case where no marker is active, MARKER 1 will be automatically 

enabled (with peak search). The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey allows toggling between the active 

marker and the active delta marker. 

If the threshold line is turned on, the peak/min. search functions will only evaluate signals which have a 

level above/below the selected threshold. In addition, the search range can also be limited (SEARCH 

LIM ON/OFF softkey) by the frequency/time lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1/2, TIME LINE 1/2). 

For all peak search functions, the first local oscillator is omitted at 0 Hz if it happens to be displayed. 

In the time domain display, the summary markers can be activated and set in addition to the search 

functions in menu MARKER-SEARCH. 

MARKER SEARCH menu: 

MARKER 

NORMAL SEARCH 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

SUMMARY 

MARKER 

MIN 

PEAK 

N DB DOWN 

DELTA 

MKR 

NEXT MIN 

NEXT PEAK 

SHAPE FACT 

60 /3 DB 

NEXT MIN 

RIGHT 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

SHAPE FACT 

60 /6 DB 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

EXCLUDE LO 

ON OFF 

NEXT PEAK 

LEFT 

SUM MKR 

ON OFF 

SUMMARY 

MARKER 

RMS 

MEAN 

PEAK HOLD 

ON OFF 

AVERAGE 

PEAK 

EXCURSION 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

SEARCH LIM 

ON OFF 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

ON 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

OFF 

ALL SUM 

MKR OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.203 E-15

Search Functions - Analyzer 

ESIB 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey toggles between the active marker and 


If DELTA is illuminated, the following search functions are performed with the 


Note: 

Switching between marker and delta marker entry modes may 

also be performed using the NORMAL and DELTA keys. 


SELECT 

MARKER 

The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the selection of the marker/delta 

markers. The selection box lists the currently enabled markers/delta markers. 

MARKER SELECT 

MARKER 1 

MARKER 3 

MARKER 4 

DELTA SELECT 

DELTA 1 

DELTA 2 

DELTA 3 


PEAK 

The PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the maximum 

displayed value on the corresponding trace. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum 

NEXT PEAK 

The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the trace 

value next in magnitude after the peak. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAX:NEXT 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAX:NEXT 

NEXT PEAK 

The NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to 

the right of the current marker position. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAX:RIGHt 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAX:RIGHt 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

The NEXT PEAK LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to the 

left of the current marker position. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAX:LEFT 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAX:LEFT 

MIN 

The MIN softkey sets the active marker to minimum displayed value on the 



:CALCulate:MARKer:MIN 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MIN 

1088.7531.12 4.204 E-15

ESIB 


NEXT MIN 

The NEXT MIN softkey sets the active marker to the next higher of the low 

peaks on the corresponding trace. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MIN:NEXT 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MIN:NEXT 

NEXT MIN 

RIGHT 

The NEXT MIN RIGHT softkey set the active marker to the next low peak to 

the right of the current marker position. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MIN:RIGHt 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MIN:RIGHt 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

The NEXT MIN LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next low peak to 

the left of the current marker position. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MIN:LEFT 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MIN:LEFT 

EXCLUDE LO 

ON OFF 

PEAK 

EXCURSION 

The EXCLUDE LO ON/OFF softkey switches between a restriced (ON) and 

an unrestricted search range (OFF). 

ON Because of non-ideal input mixer, the first LO of any analyzer can be 

seen at 0 Hz. The search functions can possibly respond to this LO 

level, in particular in the preset setting (FULL SPAN). To prevent 

this, the search range is restricted according to the following 

formula: 

Search range ≥ 6 × resolution bandwidth 

OFF No restriction on the search range. The search functions find also 

signals below the frequency limit quoted above. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:LOEXclude ON|OFF 

The PEAK EXCURSION softkey activates the entry box which sets the 

minimum amount a signal level must decrease/increase before it is 

recognised by the search functions (except PEAK and MIN) as a maximum or 

minimum. 

Input values from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed with a resolution of 0.1 dB. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:PEXCursion 10DB 

The peak excursion is preset to 6 dB. This is sufficient for the functions NEXT 

PEAK (or NEXT MIN) as the next smallest (or next largest) signal is always 

searched for. 

Functions NEXT PEAK LEFT and NEXT PEAK RIGHT (or NEXT MIN LEFT 

and NEXT MIN RIGHT) search for the next relative maximum (or minimum) 

irrespective of the current signal amplitude. 

As for wide bandwidths, the intrinsic noise of the ESIB may equal the 6 dB 

level change preset for PEAK EXCURSION and so noise peaks are identified 

as signal peaks 

In this case, a value for PEAK EXCURSION which is higher than the 

difference between the maximum and minimum noise display reading must be 

entered. 

1088.7531.12 4.205 E-15


ESIB 

The following example shows the effect of different PEAK EXCURSION 

settings. 

0 

-10 

-20 

Marker [T1] 

199.0140 MHz 

-22.4 dBm 

1 

1 

2 

4 

-30 

3 

-40 

-50 

42dB 

30dB 

46dB 

-60 

-70 

-80 

-90 

-100 

Fig. 4-12 Example for level measurements at various peak excursion settings 

Maximum relative level change of the measured signals: 


Signal 3 30dB 


With Peak Excursion 40dB signals 2 and 4 are detected by NEXT PEAK or 

NEXT PEAK RIGHT. Signal 3 is not detected since it is only decreased by 30 

dB before rising again. 





With Peak Excursion 20dB signal 3 is detected as well since its highest level 

change of 30 dB is now higher than the peak excursion. 






1088.7531.12 4.206 E-15

ESIB 


Whith Peak Excursion 6dB all signals are detected, NEXT PEAK RIGHT 

does not produce the required results. 






or 




SEARCH LIM 

ON OFF 

The SEARCH LIMIT ON/OFF softkey switches between a limited (ON) and 

unlimited (OFF) search range. 

For peak and min. search functions, the search range can also be limited by 

the frequency and time lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1, 2/TIME LINE 1, 2). If 

SEARCH LIMIT = ON, the appropriate signal level will only be searched for 

between the specified frequency/time lines. 

The default setting is SEARCH LIMIT = OFF. 

When only one line is enabled, frequency/time line 1 is defined as the lower 

limit and the upper limit is defined by the stop frequency. If frequency/time 

line 2 turned on, then it determines the upper limit. 

For the case in which no line is active the search range is unlimited. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits ON|OFF 

N dB DOWN 

The N dB DOWN softkey automatically activates the temporary markers T1 

and T2 and sets them n dB below the active reference marker. Marker T1 is 

located on the left, the marker T2 is located on the right of the reference 

marker. The value n can be entered in an entry window. The default value is 

6 dB. 

The frequency difference between the two temporary markers is indicated in 

the level output field. 

If, e.g., due to the noise level, it is not possible to determine the frequency 

difference for the n dB value, dashes are displayed instead of the measured 

value. 

Entry mode is switched to the reference marker for the case in which the 

delta maker entry mode is to be active. The position of the reference marker 

can be changed in the usual way (numeric input, step-keys, roll-key, peak 

search, etc.). 

Pressing the N dB DOWN softkey again switches the function off, however, 

the entry function for the reference marker remains turned on. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown 3DB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQ? 

1088.7531.12 4.207 E-15


ESIB 

SHAPE FACT 

60/3 DB 

SHAPE FACT 

60/6 DB 

The SHAPE FACT 60/3dB.and SHAPE FACT 60/6dB softkeys activate the 

automatic measurement of the form factor for the displayed signals. 

For this purpose, four temporary markers are used. The markers T1 to T4 

indicate, in increasing order, the 3 dB/6 dB positions below the reference 

marker level. 

In the level output field, the relationship between the two frequency 

differences ∆f 60dB / ∆f 3dB and ∆f 60dB / ∆f 6dB are displayed 

The display of the measurement value takes place in the marker field. When 

the level differences cannot be determined, the measurement value is 

marked as invalid. The update of the shape-factor display takes place at the 

end of sweep. 

The entry mode is switched to the reference marker if the delta marker entry 

mode is to be active. The position of the reference marker can be changed in 

the usual way (numeric input, step-keys, roll-key, peak search, etc.). 

The SHAPE FACTOR function is turned off by pressing SHAPE FACTOR 

softkey once again, or by enabling another marker. 

The SHAPE FACTOR function is available only in the frequency domain. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor 

(60dB/3dB) | (60dB/6dB) 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQ? 

Summary Marker 

The summary markers are available for measurements in the time domain (SPAN = 0). 

Unlike the markers and delta markers, the summary markers are not used to mark the pixels of a trace. 

They activate a measurement of the rms value (RMS) or of the average value (MEAN) of the whole 

trace. The result is displayed in the marker info field. 

The measured values are either updated after every sweep or averaged according to a defined number 

of sweeps (AVERAGE ON/OFF and SWEEP COUNT). In case of maximum peak evaluation (PEAK 

HOLD ON) the measured values are held until the occurrence of the next higher value. 

Example: 

Marker info field switched on with summary marker: MEAN, AVERAGE ON and PEAK HOLD ON 

MEAN HOLD 

MEAN AV 

2.33 Watt 

2.29 Watt 

The evaluation range can be limited with the function SEARCH LIMITS ON and the time lines (TIME 

LINE1,2), eg when measuring the average power of a sampled signal from the beginning to the end of a 

burst. 

With the summary marker switched on, the sampling detector is activated (TRACE-DETECTOR-AUTO). 

MARKER SEARCH menu 

SUM MKR 

ON OFF 

The SUM MKR softkey activates the summary marker 

The measurement, rms or average value and the settings for maximum peak 

evaluation and averaging is selected in the submenu SUMMARY MARKER. 

The softkey is only available in the time domain. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary ON|OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.208 E-15

ESIB 


MARKER SEARCH menu 

SUMMARY 

MARKER 

SUMMARY 

MARKER 

The SUMMARY MARKER softkey calls up the submenu for 

selecting the summary marker measurements. 

The softkey is only available in the time domain. 

RMS 

MEAN 

PEAK HOLD 

ON OFF 

AVERAGE 

ON OFF 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

ALL SUM 

MKR OFF 

RMS 

MEAN 

The RMS softkey selects the measurement of the rms value of the signal per 

sweep. 

In case of maximum peak evaluation the highest rms value since the activation of 

PEAK HOLD ON is displayed. In case of AVERAGE ON the rms values of a trace 

are averaged and displayed over several sweeps. 

The number of sweeps is set with the SWEEP COUNT softkey. If PEAK HOLD = 

ON is active at the same time, the display is held until the occurrence of the next 

higher average value. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMM:RMS ON 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMM:RMS:RES? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES? 

The MEAN softkey selects the measurement of the average value of the signal per 

sweep. 

Thus, the mean power can be measured, for example during a GSM burst. 

In case of maximum peak evaluation, the highest average value since the 

activation of PEAK HOLD ON is displayed. 

In case of AVERAGE ON, the average values of a trace are averaged and 

displayed over several sweeps. 

The number of sweeps is set with the SWEEP COUNT softkey. If PEAK HOLD = 

ON is active at the same time, the display is held until the occurrence of the next 

higher average value. 

IEC/IEEE-bus commands : 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMM:MEAN ON 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMM:MEAN:RES? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES? 

1088.7531.12 4.209 E-15


ESIB 

PEAK HOLD 

ON OFF 

The PEAK HOLD ON/OFF softkey switches the maximum peak evaluation on and 

off. 

For all active summary markers, the displays are updated after each sweep only if 

higher values have occurred. 

The measured values can be reset by switching the PEAK HOLD ON / OFF 

softkey on and off again. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON 

AVERAGE 

ON OFF 

The AVERAGE ON/OFF softkey switches the averaging of the summary markers 

on and off. 

The measured values can be reset by switching the AVERAGE HOLD ON / OFF 

softkey on and off again. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps in the 

SINGLE SWEEP mode. 

The permissible range of values is 0 to 32767. 

In case of AVERAGE ON: 

If an averaging has been selected, SWEEP COUNT also determines the 

number of measurements required for averaging. 

SWEEP COUNT = 0 

SWEEP COUNT = 1 

SWEEP COUNT > 1 

10 measured values are required for running 

averaging. 

No averaging is carried out. 

An averaging is carried out over the set number of 

measured values. 

In the CONTINUOUS SWEEP mode averaging is performed until the number 

of sweeps set under SWEEP COUNT is attained and then running averaging 

is performed. 

The maximum peak evaluation is infinite independent of the entry under SWEEP 

COUNT. 

Note: This setting is equivalent to the settings of the number of sweeps of menus 

TRACE and SWEEP-SWEEP. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt 20 

ALL SUM 

MKR OFF 

The ALL SUM MKR OFF softkey switches all the summary markers off. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF 

1088.7531.12 4.210 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Marker Å Menu 

Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Í Key 

MARKER MKR →menu: 

NORMAL 

DELTA 

MARKER 

SEARCH 

MKR 

MARKER-> 

PEAK 

MKR-> 

CENTER 

MKR-> 

REF LEVEL 

The MKR → menu offers functions that can be used to 

change instrument settings with the currently active marker. 

Exactly as in the SEARCH menu, these functions can also be 

applied to the delta markers. 

The choice between marker and delta marker is made 

according to the currently active frequency entry mode for the 

marker/delta marker. If no entry mode is active, the marker 

with the lowest number will be activated as the reference 

marker. 

MKR->CF 

STEPSIZE 

MKT-> 

START 

MKR-> 

STOP 

MKR-> 

TRACE 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

ACTIVE 

MKR DELTA 

The ACTIVE MKR /DELTA softkey toggles between the active marker and 


If DELTA is illuminated, the following marker functions are carried out with the 


Note: Switching between marker and delta marker can also be done with 

the NORMAL and DELTA keys. 


PEAK 

To simplify control, the PEAK search function (see section "Search Functions 

- SEARCH Key") is also available in the MRK→ menu. Thus, the most 

important functions MARKER→PEAK, MKR→CENTER and MKR→REF 

LEVEL can be selected in one menu. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAX 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAX 

MKR-> 

CENTER 

The MKR→CENTER softkey sets the center frequency to the current 

marker/delta marker frequency . 

The softkey is not available in the time domain. 



1088.7531.12 4.211 E-15

MarkerÅ Menu - Analyzer 

ESIB 

MKR-> 

REF LEVEL 

The MKR→REF LEVEL softkey sets the reference level to that of the current 

marker. 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:REFerence 

MKR->CF 

STEPSIZE 

The MKR→CF STEPSIZE softkey sets the step size for the center frequency 

variation to the current marker frequency, and also sets step-size adaptation 

to MANUAL. The CF STEP SIZE remains at this value until the center 

frequency entry mode in the STEP menu is switched from MANUAL to AUTO 

again. 

The MKR→CF STEPSIZE function is, above all, useful when measuring 

harmonics with a large dynamic range (small bandwidth and small span). 




MKR-> 

START 

The MKR→START softkey sets the start frequency to the current marker 

frequency. 



:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STARt 

MKR-> 

STOP 

The MKR→STOP softkey sets the stop frequency to the current marker 

frequency. 



:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STOP 

MKR-> 

TRACE 

The MKR→TRACE softkey places the active marker on a new trace. The 

traces available for selection appear in the selection window. 

SELECT TRACE 

TRACE1 

TRACE2 

TRACE3 

TRACE4 


:CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe 2 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:TRACe 2 

1088.7531.12 4.212 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines 

Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field 

Display Lines – D LINES Key 

Display lines are aids which, similar to markers, make the evaluation of trace data more convenient. The 

function of display lines is similar to that of a movable scale which can be used to measure absolute and 

differential values on traces. 

In addition, the display lines can also be used to limit the range of search for marker functions. 

The ESIB provides four different types of display lines: 

• two horizontal threshold lines for setting levels or for defining level search ranges – Display Line 1/2, 

• two vertical frequency/time lines for indicating frequencies/times or for determining frequency or time 

search ranges – Frequency/Time Line 1/2, 

• a threshold line which, for example, sets the search threshold for maximum levels (Peak Search) – 

Threshold Line 

• a reference line which serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between traces – Reference 

Line 

For purposes of clarity, each line is annotated on the right side of the display diagram by the following 


D1 Display Line 1 T1 Time Line 1 

D2 Display Line 2 T2 Time Line 2 

F1 Frequency Line 1 TH Threshold Line 

F2 Frequency Line 2 REF Reference Line 

The lines for level, threshold and reference are displayed as continuous, horizontal lines over the full 

width of the diagram. They are movable in the y-direction. 

The lines for frequency and time are displayed as vertical, continuous lines over the total height of the 

diagram. They are movable in the x-direction. 

For measurement operations in two separate windows, (Split Screen-Modus), the display lines are 

available independently in both windows. In the currently active window, the display lines can be 

activated and/or shifted. Lines previously defined in the currently inactive window remain unchanged. 

The LINES-D LINES menu, used for switching on and setting the display lines, is dedicated to the 

chosen display in the active measurement window (span or time). For the display of a spectrum (span ≠ 

0), the FREQUENCY LINE 1 and FREQUENCY LINE 2 softkeys appear, For the time display (span = 

0), the TIME LINE 1 and TIME LINE 2 softkeys are displayed. 

1088.7531.12 4.213 E-15

Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer 

ESIB 

Note: 

The softkeys for setting and switching the display lines on and off operate similar to a threeposition 

switch: 

Initial condition: The line is switched off (softkey has grey background) 




keypad. If some other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is 


background). 


Initial condition: The line is switched on (softkey has green background) 




keypad. If any other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is 


background). 


Menu LINES-D-LINES for Span ≠ 0 for Span = 0 

LINES 

D LINES 

LIMITS 

DISPLAY 

LINES 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1 

DISPLAY 

LINE 2 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

DISPLAY 

LINES 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1 

DISPLAY 

LINE 2 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 1 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 2 

TIME 

LINE 1 

TIME 

LINE 2 

BASELINE 

CLIPPING 

BASELINE 

CLIPPING 

1088.7531.12 4.214 E-15

ESIB 


DISPLAY 

LINE 1 

DISPLAY 

LINE 2 

The DISPLAY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the display lines on/off and activate 

the entry of the line location. 

The display lines mark the selected levels in the measurement window. 


:CALCulate:DLINe:STATe ON | OFF; 

:CALCulate:DLINe -20dBm 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

The THRESHOLD LINE softkey switches the threshold line on/off and 

activates the entry of the line location. 

The threshold line is a display line which defines a threshold value. This 

threshold value serves as a lower search limit for maximums/minimums in 

the marker functions (MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc.). For signal 

tracking (SIGNAL TRACK function), this threshold value defines the lower 

search limit (see section "Marker Functions").. 



:CALCulate:THReshold -82dBm 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

The REFERENCE LINE softkey switches the reference line on/off and 

activates the entry of the line position. 

The reference line serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between 

trace data (see section "Mathematical Operations on Measurement Curves" 


:CALCulate:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF; 

:CALCulate:RLINe -10dBm 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 1 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 2 

The FREQUENCY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the frequency lines 1/2 on/off 

and activate the entry of the line locations. 

The frequency lines mark the selected frequencies in the measurement 

window or define search ranges (see section "Marker Functions"). 



:CALCulate:FLINe 120 MHz 

1088.7531.12 4.215 E-15


ESIB 

TIME 

LINE 1 

TIME 

LINE 2 

The TIME LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the time lines 1/2 on/off and activate the 

entry of line locations. 

The time lines mark the selected times or define the search range (see 

section "Marker Functions"). 


:CALCulate:TLINe:STATe ON | OFF; 

:CALCulate:TLINe 10ms 

BASELINE 

CLIPPING 

The BASELINE CLIPPING softkey switches on or off the BASELINE 

CLIPPING function and allows a limit value to be entered. 

The BASELINE CLIPPING function is for blanking measured values (for 

example noise) which are below a preset threshold. 

If the BASELINE CLIPPING function is active and a measured value is below 

the preset threshold, the value is set to a lower boundary (-400 dBm). 

Measured values above the clipping level are not changed. 

Note: 

It is advisable not to combine the BASELINE CLIPPING function 

with the AUTOPEAK detector. 

If the set clipping value is within the displayed noise band 

(AUTOPEAK detector), activation of the CLIPPING function and 

the resulting clipping of the MIN PEAK values will lead to a drastic 

enlargement of the displayed noise band. 


:CALCulate:CTHReshold:STATe ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:CTHReshold -82dBm 

1088.7531.12 4.216 E-15

ESIB 


Limit Lines – LIMITS Key 

Limit lines are used to define limits for amplitude curves or spectral distributions on the screen. They 

indicate, for example, the upper limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are permissible 

from a Unit Under Test (UUT). In the case of TDMA transmissions (e.g., GSM), the amplitude curve of 

the bursts in a time slot must fall within a specified tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each 

be specified by a limit line. Then, the amplitude curve can be cecked either visually or automatically for 

any violations of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test). 

The ESIB instrument supports up to 300 limit lines, each of which may have a maximum of 50 data 

points. For each limit line, the following characteristics must be defined: 

• The name of the limit line. The limit line is stored under this name and is diplayed in the LIMIT LINES 

table. 

• The domain in which the limit line is to be used. A distinction is made between the time domain (span 

= 0 Hz) and the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz). 

• The X-coordinates of the interpolation points. The limit line can be specified either in terms of 

absolute frequencies or times or in terms of frequencies referred to the set center frequency and 

times referred to the time represented by the left-hand edge of the diagram. 

• The Y-coordinates of the interpolation points. The limit line can be selected either for absolute levels 

or voltages or referred to the set maximum level (Ref Lvl or Max Lvl). If the reference line is switched 

on, it is used as reference when relative setting has been selected. 

• The type of limit line (upper or lower limit). With this definition and the limit checking function on 

(LIMIT CHECK), the ESIB checks for compliance with each limit. 

• The limit line units. The units for the limit line must be compatible with the level axis in the active 


• The trace to which the limit line is assigned. For the ESIB, this defines the trace to which the limit is to 

be applied when several traces are simultaneously displayed. 

• For each limit line, a margin can be defined which serves as a threshold for automatic evaluation. 

• A comment can also be entered for each limit line, e.g., a description of the application. 

In the LINES LIMIT menu, the compatible limit lines can be enabled in the LIMIT LINES table. The 

SELECTED LIMIT LINE display field provides information about the characteristics of the marked limit 

lines. New limit lines can be specified and edited in the NEW LIMIT LINE and EDIT LIMIT LINE submenus. 

1088.7531.12 4.217 E-15


ESIB 

LINES LIMIT menu 

LINES 

D LINES 

LIMITS 

SELECETED LIMIT LINE 

Name: GSM22UP Limit: LOWER 

Domain: FREQUENCY X-Axis: LOG 

Unit: dB X-Scaling: ABSOLUTE 

Comment: Line 1 

Y-Scaling: RELATIVE 

LIMIT LINES 

LIMIT 

LINES 

SELECT 

LIMIT LINE 

NEW LIMIT 

LINE 

EDIT LIMIT 

LINE 

USER 

NAME 

COMPATIBLE LIMIT CHECKTRACE 

MARGIN 

GSM22UP 

off 

1 0 dB 

LP1GHz 

on 

1 0 dB 

LP1GHz off 

1 0 dB 

MIL461A off 

2 -10 dB 

COPY 

LIMIT LINE 

DELETE 

LIMIT LINE 

X OFFSET 

Y OFFSET 

PAGE UP 

PAGE DOWN 

Press ENTER to activate / deactivate Limit Line 

Limit Line Selection 

The SELECTED LIMIT LINES table provides information about the 

characteristics of the marked limit line : 

Name 

name 

Domain 

frequency or time 

Limit 

upper/lower limit 

X-Axis 

linear or logarithmic interpolation 

X-Scaling absolute or relative frequencies/times 

Y-Scaling absolute or relative Y-units 

Unit 

for vertical scale 

Comment comment 

The characteristics of the limit line are set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE (=NEW 

LIMIT LINE) submenu. 

SELECT 

LIMIT LINE 

The SELECT LIMIT LINE softkey activates the LIMIT LINES table and the 

selection bar jumps to the uppermost name in the table. 

The columns headfings are as follows: 

Name NAme of the limit line to be selected. 

Compatible 

Limit Check 

Trace 

Margin 

Indicates if the limit line is compatible with the measurement 

window of the given trace. 

Activates the automatic "within limits" check. 

Selects the trace to which the limit is assigned. 

Defines a margin. 

1088.7531.12 4.218 E-15

ESIB 


Name and Compatible - Switching on limit lines 

A maximum of 8 limit lines can be switched at any one time. A check mark at 

the left edge of a cell indicates that this limit line is switched on. A limit line 

can only be switched on when it has a check mark in the Compatible column, 

i.e., only when the display mode of the x-axis (time or frequency) and y-axis 

units are identical to those in the measurement window. 

It should be noted that lines with dB scales are compatible with all dB(..) 

scales of the Y-axis. 

If the trace assigned to a line is not switched on, the line is displayed in the 

window the trace would be displayed in. 

Example: 

In split screen mode, trace 2 is assigned measuring window B. A line 

assigned to trace 2 is always displayed in measurement window B. 

If the y-axis unit or the domain (frequency or time) are changed, all noncompatible 

limit lines are automatically switched off in order to avoid 

misinterpretations. The limit lines must be switched on again when the 

original display mode is restored. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:NAME ; 

:CALCulate:LIMit:STATe ON | OFF 

Limit Check - Activating the limit check 

When LIMIT CHECK ON is activated, a limit check is performed automatically 

on the active screen. In the center of the screen, a display window containing 

the results of the limit check test appears: 

LIMIT CHECK: PASSED No out-of-limits conditions. 

LIMIT CHECK: FAILED One or more out-of-limits conditions. The 

message contains the names of the limit lines 

which were violated or whose margins were not 

complied with. 

LIMIT CHECK: MARGIN 

The margin of at least one active limit line was not 

complied with, however, no limit line was violated. 

The message contains the names of the limit lines 

whose margins were not complied with. 

The following example shows three active limit lines: 

LIMIT CHECK: FAILED 

LINE VHF_MASK: Failed 

LINE UHF2MASK: Margin 

A limit check is performed only if the trace associated with the limit line is 

turned on. 

If LIM CHECK is set to OFF for all active limit lines, then the limit line check is 

not executed and the display field not activated. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL? 

1088.7531.12 4.219 E-15


ESIB 

Trace - Selecting the trace to which the limit line is assigned. 

The trace is selected in an entry window. An integer entries 1, 2, 3 or 4 

indicating the trace is entered. The default setting is trace 1. If the selected 

limit line is not compatible with the assigned trace, the limit line is disabled. 

(display and limit check). 


:CALCulate:LIMit:TRACe 1|2|3|4 

Margin - Setting a margin. 

The margin is defined as the level difference between the limit line and the 

signal . When the limit line is defined as an upper limit, the margin means 

that the level is below the limit line. When the limit line is defined as a lower 

limit, the margin means that the level is above the limit line. The default 

setting is 0 dB (i.e., no margin). 


:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:MARGin 10DB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:MARGin 10DB 

COPY 

LIMIT LINE 

The COPY LIMIT LINE softkey copies the data set of the marked limit line 

and saves it under a new name. In this way, a new limit line can be easily 

generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line. The name 

can be arbitrarily chosen and input via an entry window (max. of 8 

characters). 


:CALCulate:LIMit:COPY 1..8| 

DELETE 

LIMIT LINE 

The DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line. Before 

deletion, a message appears requesting confirmation. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :CALCulate:LIMit:DELete 

X OFFSET 

The X OFFSET softkey horizontally shift a limit lines which has been 

specified for relative frequencies or times (X-axis). The softkey opens an 

entry window, where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via 

the roll-key. 

Note: When changing the start or the stop frequency, the line on the 

display only remains unchanged, if SPAN FIXED is set. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONT:OFFSet 100us 

Y OFFSET 

The Y OFFSET softkey vertically shifts a limit line, which has relative values 

for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such as volt). The softkey opens an entry 

window where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via the rollkey. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:UPP:OFFSet 3dB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOW:OFFSet 3dB 

1088.7531.12 4.220 E-15

ESIB 


Entering and Editing of Limit Lines 

A limit line is characterized by 

• its name 

• the domain assignment (frequency or time) 

• whether the scale is absolute or relative (time or frequency) 

• linear or logarithmic interpolation 

• the vertical unit 

• the vertical scale 

• the definition of the limit line as either an upper or lower limit. 

• the interpolation points for frequency/time and level 

When the limit line is entered, the ESIB immediately checks all limit lines according to rules that 

guarantee correct operation. 

• The frequencies/times for each interpolation point must be entered in ascending order, however, for 

any single frequency/time, twodata points may be entered (vertical segment of a limit line). 

The interpolation points are allocated in order of ascending frequency/time. Gaps are not allowed. If 

gaps are desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled. 

• The entered frequencies/times need not necessarily be capable of selection on the ESIB. A limit line 

may also exceed the frequency or time display range. The minimum frequency for an interpolation 

point is -200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For the time domain, negative times may also 

be entered. The range is -1000 s to +1000 s. 

• The minimum/maximum value for a limit line is -200 dB/ +200 dB for the logarithmic scale or 10 -20 / 

10 +20 or-99.9%/ + 999.9% for linear amplitude scales. 

1088.7531.12 4.221 E-15


ESIB 

LINES LIMIT-EDIT LIMIT LINE menu 

EDIT LIMIT 

LINE 

NEW LIMIT 

LINE 

The EDIT LIMIT LINE and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT 

LIMIT LINE submenu used for editing limit lines. In the table heading, 

the characteristics of the limit line can be entered. The frequency/time 

and level points are entered in the columns. 

Name 

Domain 

Unit 

X-Axis 

X-Scaling 

Y-Scaling 

Limit 

Comment 

Time/Frequency 

Limit/dBm 

Enter name. 

Select domain. 

Select units. 

Select interpolation 

Entry of absolute or relative values for the X-axis 

Entry of absolute or relative values for the Y-axis 

Select upper/lower limit. 

Enter comments. 

Enter time/frequency points. 

Enter level points. 

EDIT LIMIT LINE TABLE 

Name: 

Limit_22 

Domain: 

FREQUENCY 

Unit: 

dBuV/m 

X-Axis: 

LOG 

X-Scaling: ABSOLUTE 

Y-Scaling: ABSOLUTE 

Limit: 

UPPER 

Comment: Limit 22 

FREQUENCY 

30.000 MHz 

230.000 MHz 

230.000 MHz 

1.000 GHz 

30.0000 

30.0000 

37.0000 

37.0000 

LIMIT/dBuV/m 

26 

EDIT 

LIMIT LINE 

NAME 

VALUES 

INSERT 

VALUE 

DELETE 

VALUE 

SHIFT X 

LIMIT LINE 

SHIFT Y 

LIMIT LINE 

USER 

SAVE 

LIMIT LINE 

PAGE UP 

Press 25 ENTER to edit field. 

49 

50 

PAGE DOWN 

1088.7531.12 4.222 E-15

ESIB 


NAME 

The NAME softkey activates the entry of characteristics in the table heading. 


A maximum of 8 characters are permitted for each name. All names must be 

compatible with the MS DOS conventions for file names. The instrument 

automatically stores all limit lines with the .LIM extension. 



Domain - Selection of time or frequency domain 

The domain (frequency/time) can only be changed when the limit-line point 

table is empty. The default setting is frequency. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:DOMain FREQ | TIME 

X-Axis - Indication of interpolation 


reference points of the table. The ENTER key toggels between LIN and LOG 

selection. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:SPACing LIN | LOG 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:SPACing LIN | LOG 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:SPACing LIN | LOG 

Scaling - Selection of absolute or relative scale 

The limit line scale can either be absolute (frequency or time) or relative. Any of 

the unit keys may be used to toggle between ABSOLUTE and RELATIVE, the 

cursor must in the X-Scaling or the Y-Scaling line 

X-Scaling ABSOLUTE The frequencies or times are interpreted as absolute 

physical units. 

X-Scaling RELATIVE The frequencies in the limit-line point table are 

referred to the currently set center frequency. In the 

time domain, the left boundary of the diagram 

constitutes the reference. 

Y-Scaling ABSOLUTE The limit values are absolute levels or voltages. 

Y-Scaling RELATIVE The limit values refer to the reference level or, in 

case a reference line is set, to the reference line. 

Limit values in dB or % are always relative values. 

RELATIVE scaling is always recommended, if masks for bursts are to be 

defined in the time domain, or if masks for modulated signals are required in 

the frequency domain. 

An X-offset equal to half the sweep time may be entered to shift the mask in 

the time domain to the center of the screen. 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:MODE REL | ABS 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:MODE REL | ABS 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:MODE REL | ABS 

1088.7531.12 4.223 E-15


ESIB 

Unit - Selection of the vertical scale units for the limit line 

Units are selected in a selection box. The default setting is dBm. 

UNITS 

VERTICAL SCALE 

dB 

dBm 

% 

dBuV 

dBmV 

dBuA 

dBpW 

dBpT 

V 

A 

W 

dBuV/MHz 

dBmV/MHz 

dBuA/MHz 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :CALCulate:LIMit:UNIT 

DB| DBM| PCT |DBUV| DBMW | DBUA | 

DBPW| DBPT | WATT| VOLT | AMPere | 

DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ| DBUA_MHZ | 

DBUV_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_M | 

DBUA_MMHZ 

Limit - Selection of upper/lower limit 

A limit line can be defined as either an upper or lower limit. 


(defined by the key words :UPPer or :LOWer) 

Comment - Enter comments 

Comments are user selectable, but may not exceed 40 characters in length. 



VALUES 

The VALUES softkey activates the entry of the data points in the table 

columns Time/Frequency and Limit/dB. Which table column appears 

depends on the Domain selection in the table heading. 

The frequency/time points are entered in ascending order (two repeated 

frequencies/times are permitted). 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] 

, .. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] 

, .. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] 

,.. 

1088.7531.12 4.224 E-15

ESIB 


INSERT 

VALUE 

The INSERT VALUE softkey creates an empty line above the current cursor 

position where a new data point can be entered. However, when entering new 

values, the ascending order for frequency/time values must be kept. 


DELETE 

VALUE 

The DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point (complete line) at the 

cursor position. The data points that follow are moved along to fill the gap. 


SHIFT X 

LIMIT LINE 

The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete 

limit line may be shifted horizontally. 

The shift units are the same as the horizontal scale units: 

– in the frequency domain in Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz 

– in the time domain in ns, µs, ms or s 

This means that it is easy to create a new limit line from existing limit line 

which has been shifted horizontally and stored (SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey) 



:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt 50kHz 

SHIFT Y 

LIMIT LINE 

The SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete 

limit line may be shifted vertically. 

The shift units are the same as the vertical scale units: 

– for relative logarithmic units in dB 

– for linear units, as a factor 

This means that a new limit line can easily be created from an existing limit 

line which has been shifted vertically and stored (SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey) 



:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt 20dB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt 20dB 

SAVE 

LIMIT LINE 

The SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey stores the currently edited limit line. The name 

can be entered in an entry window (max. 8 characters) 

IEC/IEEE-bus command -- (automatically executed) 

1088.7531.12 4.225 E-15

Traces - Analyzer 

ESIB 

Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group 

The ESIB can display up to four separate traces at a time on a screen. A trace has of a maximum of 

500 pixels along the horizontal axis (frequency or time). If more measured values than pixels are 

available, several measurement values are assigned to one pixel. 

The traces are selected using keys 1 to 4 of the TRACES key group. When two measurement windows 

(SPLIT SCREEN) are displayed, traces 1 and 3 are assigned to the upper (SCREEN A) and traces 2 

and 4 are assigned to the lower (SCREEN B) measurement window. 

The traces can be individually activated for a measurement or frozen after completion of a 

measurement. Traces that are not activated are not displayed. 

A display mode can be selected for each trace. The traces can be overwritten (CLEAR/WRITE mode) 

after each sweep, averaged (AVERAGE mode) over several sweeps, or the maximum/ minimum value 

from several sweeps can be displayed (MIN HOLD/MAX HOLD). 

Individual detectors are selectable for each of the traces. The auto-peak detector displays the maximum 

and minimum values on a vertical line. The max-peak detector and min-peak detector display the 

maximum and /minimum levels represented by a pixel. The sampling detector displays the 

instantaneous value of the level at a pixel. The rms detector displays the power (rms) of the spectrum at 

a pixel, the average detector the average value. 

Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key 

The trace functions are categorized as follows: 

• type of trace display (CLEAR/WRITE, VIEW and BLANK) 

• evaluation of the trace as a whole (AVERAGE, MAX HOLD and MIN HOLD) 

• evaluation of the individual pixels of a trace (AUTOPEAK, MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, SAMPLE, RMS 

and AVERAGE) 

TRACE 1 menu 

TRACE 

1 2 

TRACE 1 

CLEAR/ 

WRITE 

VIEW 

TRACE 1 

ANALOG TR 

ON OFF 

3 

3 

4 

BLANK 

AVERAGE 

TRACE 

MATH 

MAX HOLD 

MIN HOLD 

HOLD CONT 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

DETECTOR 

COPY 

1088.7531.12 4.226 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Traces 

The TRACE keys 1...4 call a menu whith the setting options for the selected trace. 

This menu is used to determine the method for compressing the measurement data in the frequency or 

time domain to the 500 representable points of the display is determined. 

When the measurement is started, a new trace can be displayed or the trace can be based on previous 

results. The traces can be displayed, blanked and copied. 

Traces can also be corrected with the mathematical functions. 

The measurement detector for each of the display types may be chosen either directly or selected 

automatically by the ESIB. 

All activated traces are marked with a LED at the corresponding key (here, TRACE 1). The default 

setting is TRACE 1 with CLEAR / WRITE selected. The remaining traces 2...4 are switched off 

(BLANK). For the split screen display, the selection of the trace automatically selects the corresponding 

screen for entry. 

Only one of the CLEAR/WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD, AVERAGE, VIEW and BLANK softkeys can 

be activated at any one time. 

CLEAR/ 

WRITE 

The CLEAR/WRITE softkey activates the clear/write display mode. 

The trace is displayed without additional trace evaluation. The trace memory 

is overwritten by each sweep. If more than one data point falls within a pixel, 

the trace is displayed in bar form with the maximum and minimum values 

being assigned to one pixel. In the clear/write display mode, all the available 

detectors are selectable. The autopeak detector is selected in the default 

mode (detector to AUTO). 

Whenever the CLEAR/WRITE softkey is pressed, the ESIB clears the 

selected trace memory and restarts the measurement. 



VIEW 

The VIEW softkey freezes the current contents of the trace memory and 

displays them. 

If the trace data were formed through MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD or AVERAGE, 

the sweep is restarted and the trace contents are cleared, after switching to 

these trace modes. 

If a trace is frozen by VIEW, the instrument settings can be modified without 

modifying the displayed trace. The fact that the trace and the current 

instrument setting do not agree anymore is indicated by an enhancement 

label "*" at the right edge of the grid. The initial instrument setting can be 

restored using the ADJUST TO TRACE softkey in the TRACE MATH submenu. 

If LEVEL RANGE or REF LEVEL is changed in the VIEW display mode, the 

ESIB adjusts the measurement data to the changed display range. Thus, an 

amplitude zoom can be performed after the measurement so that details of 

the trace can be seen better. 



1088.7531.12 4.227 E-15


ESIB 

BLANK 

AVERAGE 

The BLANK softkey activates the blanking of the trace. 

However, the trace remains stored in memory and can be displayed again by 

pressing VIEW. The markers for the blanked trace are also erased. After 

reactivation of the trace (with VIEW, CLEAR / WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN 

HOLD, AVERAGE) the markers will be restored their their previous positions. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe OFF 

The AVERAGE softkey activates the trace averaging function. The average is 

formed over several sweeps. The average can be calculated for each 

available detector. If the detector is automatically selected by the ESIB , the 

sampling detector is used. 

After enabling the averaging mode, the first trace is recorded in 

CLEAR/WRITE mode with the selected detector. After the second sweep, the 

average is then formed for each succeeding sweep. Here, the average is 

formed over the samples/pixels, i.e., according to the LIN or LOG setting, 

over amplitudes or levels. 

Averaging is restarted every time the AVERAGE softkey is pressed. The 

trace memory is also cleared. This is also the case when the trace is 

switched from the setting AVERAGE to VIEW or BLANK 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE AVER 

Description of averaging: 

Averaging is carried out using the pixels which are derived from the measurement value samples. 

These pixels may in some cases be comprised of several combined measurement values. This means 

that the average is formed over linear amplitude values when the level display is linear and over levels 

when the level display is logarithmic. Because of this, the trace must be measured anew when changing 

between the LIN and LOG display mode. The settings CONT/SINGLE SWEEP and the sliding average 

apply to the average display analogously. 

Two calculation procedures are available for averaging. For SWEEP COUNT= 0 , a sliding average is 

calculated using the following equation: 

9*TRACEn 

TRACEn 

= 

+ Meas_Value 

10 

- 1 

Because of the relative weighting of the new measurement value and the trace average, past values 

have practically no no influence on the displayed trace after about 10 sweeps. For this setting, the signal 

noise is effectively reduced without the need to restart the averaging process even if the signal is 

changed. 

If the SWEEP COUNT is >1 averaging takes place over the selected number of sweeps. In this case, 

the displayed trace is given by the following formula during averaging:: 

TRACE 

n 

⎡n 

1 

= ⎢∑ − n ⎢⎣ 

i= 

1 

1 

( Ti) 

⎤ 

+ Meas Value⎥ 

⎥⎦ 

where n is the number of the current sweep (n = 2 ... SWEEP COUNT). For the first sweep, an average 

is not calculated. The measurement values are stored directly in trace memory. With growing n, the 

displayed trace becomes increasingly smoother since more individual trace data are available for 

averaging. 

The average is stored in trace memory after the defined number of sweeps. Until this number of sweeps 

is reached, a preliminary average is displayed. 

1088.7531.12 4.228 E-15

ESIB 


On completion of averaging, ie when the number of sweeps defined with SWEEP COUNT has been 

reached, a sliding average given by the following formula is obtained with CONTINUOUS SWEEP 

(N −1) 

⋅TRACEn - 1 + Meas Value , where Trace = new trace 

TRACEn 

= 

N 

Trace old = old trace 

N = SWEEP COUNT 

The display "Sweep 200 of 200" then remains constant until there is a new start. 

In SINGLE SWEEP mode, SWEEP START initiates n single sweeps. The sweeps are stopped as soon 

as the selected number of sweeps has been reached. The number of the current sweep and the total 

number of sweeps are shown in the display: "Sweep 3 of 200". 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps 

used for averaging. 

The range for SWEEP COUNT is 0 through 32767. For 0, the ESIB performs 

a sliding average over 10 sweeps. For 1, no averaging takes place. 

The default setting is 10 sweeps. The programming naturally influences the 

sweep duration. The number of sweeps used for averaging is the same for 

all 4 traces. 

Note : The setting of the SWEEP COUNT in the trace menu is equivalent 

to the setting in the sweep menu. 


MAX HOLD 

The MAX HOLD softkey activates the max hold mode. 

In this display mode, the ESIB saves for each sweep the largest of the 

previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. The 

detector is set automatically to MAX PEAK. In this way, the maximum value 

of a signal can be determined over several sweeps. 

This is especially useful for measurement of modulated or pulsed signals. 

The signal spectrum is built up sweep by sweep until all the signal 

components have been captured. 

Pressing of the MAX HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and 

restarts the max hold mode. 

If MAX HOLD is enabled, a new start is made after clearing the trace memory 

for each frequency change, (start frequency, stop frequency, center 

frequency or frequency span), a reference level change or switching between 

linear/logarithmic scales. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MAXH 

1088.7531.12 4.229 E-15


ESIB 

MIN HOLD 

The MIN HOLD softkey activates the min hold mode. 

In this display mode, the ESIB saves for each sweep the smallest of the 

previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. The 

detector is set automatically to MIN PEAK. In this way, the minimum value of 

a signal can be determined over several sweeps. This function is, e.g., useful 

for making an unmodulated carrier in a signals mixture easier to see on the 

display. Noise, interference or modulated signals are suppressed by the MIN 

HOLD function, whereas a CW signal maintains a constant level. 

Pressing the MIN HOLD softkey clears the trace memory and the minimum 

value function starts anew. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MINH 

HOLD CONT 

ON OFF 

The HOLD CONT softkey defines whether the traces in the average mode 

and min hold/max hold mode are reset after some definite parameter 

changes. 

OFF The traces are reset after some definite parameter changes. 

ON This mechanism is switched off. 

In general, parameter changes require a restart of the measurement before 

results are evaluated (e. g. with markers). For those changes that are known 

to require a new measurement (e. g. modification of the span), the trace is 

automatically reset so that erroneous evaluations of previous results are 

avoided. 

This mechanism can be switched off for those exceptional cases where the 

described behavior is unwelcome. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:HCON ON|OFF 

COPY.. 

The COPY softkey copies the current trace as display on the screen to 

another trace memory. A table appears in which the copy procedure can be 

selected. 

COPY TRACE 1 TO 

TRACE 2 

TRACE 3 

TRACE 4 

For only one window, the selected trace can be copied to any of the other 

trace memories since here, all four traces are displayed in one diagram with 

the same frequency boundaries. 

In the split screen display, this is only possible as long as the frequencies of 

screen A and screen B are identical. If this is not the case, the selected trace 

can only be copied to the corresponding trace memory, i.e., trace 1 to trace 3 

and trace 2 to trace 4 or vice versa. In this case, only the available trace is 

displayed. 

After copying, the contents of the destination memory are lost. The 

destination memory now changes automatically to view mode with the new 

data. 


:TRACe:COPY TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4, 


1088.7531.12 4.230 E-15

ESIB 


Detector Selection 

The ESIB detectors are all-digital. The detectors available are the max-peak detector which derives the 

maximum value from a number of sample values, the min-peak detector which derivess the minimum 

value from a number of sample values and the sampling detector. The sampling detector passes on the 

sampled data without modification or performs a data reduction by suppressing non-displayable values. 

The peak detectors compare the current level with the maximum/minimum levels of the previously 

sampled data. When the number of samples defined by the instrument settings is reached, the samples 

are combined as displayable pixels. Each of the 500 pixels of the display therefore represents 1/500 of 

the sweep range and so all the individual measurements (frequency samples) that fall within this 

subrange in a compressed form. Even though the recording rate is high, there are no recording gaps 

thanks to the internal pipeline structure. For each trace display mode, an optimized detector is selected 

automatically. Since the peak detectors and the sample detector are connected in parallel, a single 

sweep is sufficient for record and display four traces with four detectors. 

Peak value detectors 

(MAX PEAK / MIN PEAK) 

Peak value detectors are implemented with digital comparators. 

For each of the levels measured at each of the frequencies 

represented by one of the 500 pixels, they determine the 

maximum (max peak) of all positive peaks and the minimum (min 

peak) of all the negative peaks. 

This is repeated for each pixel so that, for wide frequency spans 

and inspite of the limited display resolution, a larger number of 

measurements than would otherwise be possible can be used to 

display the spectrum. 

AUTOPEAK detector 

The AUTOPEAK detector combines the two peak detectors. The 

max-peak detector and min-peak detector determine the 

maximum and minimum level over a displayed pixel at the same 

time and display it as a common measurement value. The 

maximum and minimum level over a frequency point are joined 

with a vertical line. 

SAMPLE detector 

The SAMPLE detector passes on all sampled data without further 

evaluation and either displays them directly or, for speed (short 

sweep times), first writes them to a memory and subsequently 

processes them. 

Data reduction, i.e., summing of measurement values of 

neighboring frequencies or time samples is not performed here. 

If, during a sweep, more measurement values are generated 

than can be displayed, measurement values will be lost. Discrete 

signals can thus be lost 

Therefore, the sampling detector can only be recommended for a 

ratio of span-to-resolution bandwidth of up to approximately 250. 

To ensure that no signal will be suppressed (example: span 1 

MHz --> min. bandwidth 5 kHz). 

1088.7531.12 4.231 E-15


ESIB 

RMS detector 

The rms detector finds the rms value of the measured values 

over a pixel. 

The ESIB uses the linear display voltage after the envelope 

detection. The linear samples are squared, summed and the 

sum is divided through the number of samples (= mean of 

squares). With the logarithmic display, the logarithm of the sum 

of squares is taken. With the linear display the mean of the 

squares is displayed directly. Each pixel represents the total 

power of the measured values assigned to the pixel. 

The rms detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of 

the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or 

pulse signal). There is no need for the various waveform 

correction factors which are required when other detectors are 

used for the power measurement. 

Average detector 

AC video detector 

(with option ESIB-B1 only) 

The average detector averages the measured values over a 

pixel. 

The ESIB uses the linear display voltage after envelope 

detection. The linear samples are summed and the sum is 

divided by the number of measurement samples (= linear 

average). With the logarithmic display, the logarithm of the 

average is taken. With the linear display the average is 

displayed directly. Each pixel therefore represents the average 

of the measured values assigned the pixel. 

The average detector gives the true average of the signal 

irrespective of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, 

white noise or pulse signal). 

The AC video detector finds the difference (max peak – min peak) 

of measurement results within a pixel or a result. 


envelope detection. The max peak detector and the min peak 

detector determine the maximum and minimum levels within a 

shown measurement point and display it as a common 

measurement result. For logarithmic representation, the logarithm 

of the difference is formed. For linear representation, the 

difference itself is shown. This means that for analyzer operation 

each pixel corresponds to the AC value of the measurement 

results combined in the pixel. In receiver operation, on the other 

hand, the AC value determined during the measurement time is 

shown. 

Irrespective of the signal form (CW carrier, modulated carrier, 

white noise of pulsed signal), the AC video detector always 

supplies the AC component of the signal. 

If during a frequency sweep the dwell time on a certain frequency 

point is not sufficient, this may lead to incorrect results being 

displayed. 

Notes: During a sweep, the ESIB switches the first oscillator frequency in steps which are smaller than 

approximately 1/10 of the bandwidth. This guarantees that the level of a signal is correctly 

measured. For narrow bandwidths and wide spans, a very large number of measurement values 

are generated. The number of frequency steps is, however, always a multiple of 500 (= number 

of displayable points). In the sampling mode, only every n th value is displayed. The quantity n 

depends upon the number of measurement values, i.e on the span, resolution bandwidth and 

the measurement rate. 

For sweep times < 5ms in the time domain, the same detector is used for all active traces. 

1088.7531.12 4.232 E-15

ESIB 


TRACE 1-DETECTOR submenu 

DETECTOR 

TRACE 1 

DETECTOR 

AUTO 

SELECT 

DETECTOR 

AUTO PEAK 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

DETECTOR 

MIN PEAK 

DETECTOR 

SAMPLE 


detector. 


equipped with the linear video output (option ESIB-B1) 

The detector may be independently selected for each trace. 

Mode AUTO SELECT sets the best suitable detector for each 

trace display mode (Clear Write, Max Hold oder Min Hold). 

Only one of the softkeys for the detectors can be activated at 

any one time. 

DETECTOR 

RMS 

DETECTOR 

AVERAGE 

DETECTOR 

AC VIDEO 

AUTO 

SELECT 

DETECTOR 

AUTOPEAK 

The AUTO SELECT softkey (= default) selects the optimum detector for the 

selected trace display mode (clear write, max hold, min hold). 

Trace-mode 

Detector 

Clear/Write 

Autopeak 

Average 

Sample 

Max Hold 

Max Peak 

Min Hold 

Min Peak 


:[SENSe:]DETector:AUTO ON|OFF 

The DETECTOR AUTOPEAK softkey selects the autopeak detector. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]DETector APEak 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

DETECTOR 

MIN PEAK 

The DETECTOR MAX PEAK softkey selects the max peak detector. It is 

recommended for pulse-like signals. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]DETector POSitive 

The DETECTOR MIN PEAK softkey selects the min peak detector. Weak 

sinewave signals can be brought out clearly against noise by using this 

detector. For a composite signal made up of sinewaves and pulse-like-like 

signals the pulse signals are suppressed. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]DETector NEGative 

1088.7531.12 4.233 E-15


ESIB 

DETECTOR 

SAMPLE 

The DETECTOR SAMPLE softkey selects the sample detector. 

It is used for measuring uncorrelated signals such as noise. The power can 

be determined by means of fixed correction factors for evaluation and the log 

amplifier. 


:[SENSe:]DETector SAMPle 

DETECTOR 

RMS 

The DETECTOR RMS softkey activates the rms detector. 

The rms detector gives the true power of the signal irrespective of the 

waveform. The mean of the squares of all level samples is formed as a pixel 

is swept. The sweep time, therefore, determines the number of values 

averaged and, with increasing sweep time, better averaging is obtained. The 

rms detector is therefore an alternative to averaging over several sweeps 

(see TRACE AVERAGE). 

In the time domain (SPAN = 0), the rms detector is only available for sweep 

times ≥ 5 ms. Moreover, the combination of the rms detector with the 

pretrigger function and the gaped sweep function is not permissible. 

The video bandwidth has to be set to at least 10 times the resolution 

bandwidth (RBW) so that the rms value of the signal is not invalidated by 

video filtering. 


:[SENSe:]DETector RMS 

DETECTOR 

AVERAGE 

The DETECTOR AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector. 

In contrast to the rms detector, the average detector supplies the straight 

average of all the level sampleds as a pixel is swept over. 

The same restrictions as those of the rms detector apply (see above). 


:[SENSe:]DETector AVERage 

DETECTOR 

AC VIDEO 

The DETECTOR AC VIDEO softkey activates the AC VIDEO detector. 

Irrespective of the signal form, the AC VIDEO detector always supplies the 

AC component of the signal. For this purpose the difference is formed of all 

maximum and minimum level values collected during the runtime of the pixel 

/ the set measurement time. The sweep / measurement time therefore 

determines the number of values to be considered, so the AC component is 

determined more accurately with increasing sweep / measurement time. The 

AC VIDEO detector can thus be used as an alternative for the detection of 

modulated signals. 

The softkey is available only if the instrument is equipped with the linear video 

output (option ESIB-B1). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]DETector ACVideo 

1088.7531.12 4.234 E-15

ESIB 


Quasi Analog Display 

Normally, when measured values are displayed they are joined together with line segments to form a 

trace which is deleted and redrawn after each sweep. When analog measurements are performed, the 

persistence of the screen makes it possible to assess the signal’s frequency of occurrence. Frequently 

occurring events appear brighter on the screen than events that occur less frequently. 

The ANALOG TRACE function simulates an analog display. 

In this case, a measured value is represented by a single pixel on the screen. After the trace has been 

explicitly cleared with CLEAR / WRITE, this pixel is reset. As the trace is build up from several sweeps, 

the frequency distribution is, in effect, indicated by the varying brightness of the trace. 

TRACE 1 side menu 

ANALOG TR 

ON OFF 

The ANALOG TR ON/OFF switches the quasi-analog display mode on and off for 

the selected trace 

The measurement is always made with the selected detector. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:ANALog ON | OFF 

Mathematical Functions for Traces 

TRACE 1-TRACE MATH submenu: 

TRACE 

MATH 

TRACE MATH 

T1-T2+REF 

-> T1 

T1-T3+REF 

-> T1 

T1-T4+REF 

-> T1 

T1-REF 

->T1 

The TRACE MATH softkey opens a submenu in which a 

differential curve for the selected trace is calculated. 

ADJUST TO 

TRACE 

TRACE MATH 

OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.235 E-15


ESIB 

TRACE MATH 

T1-T2+REF 

-> T1 

T1-T3+REF 

-> T1 

T1-T4+REF 

-> T1 

T1-REF 

->T1 

The T1-T2+REF, T1-T3+REF, T1-T3+REF and T1-REF softkeys subtract the 

traces and add the set level to the difference. If the reference line is switched 

on (see key D LINES), the level value of the reference line instead of the 

reference level is added to the difference. Thus, the differential curve can be 

positioned anywhere on the screen by shifting the reference line. The 

difference of the two traces with respect to the reference line is displayed. 

The T1-REF softkey subtracts the level of the reference line from the trace 

level. 

To indicate that the trace is a difference trace, a enhancement label is 

displayed at the right margin of the measurement value diagram (1-2, 1-3, 1- 

4, 1-R). In TRACE 1 main menu, the TRACE MATH softkey is on a coloured 

background to show that the function is being used. 

Important: For a display with two measurement windows, not all 

combinations are allowed if the sweep data for screen A and 

screen B are not the same. Only the traces allowed in the screen 

can be combined (in screen A, only trace 1 with trace 3; in 

screen B, only trace 2 with trace 4). 




TRACE MATH 

OFF 

The TRACE MATH OFF softkey switches the math function off. The softkey 

is only available when a conversion function is enabled. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :CALCulate:MATH:STATe OFF 

ADJUST TO 

TRACE 

The ADJUST TO TRACE softkey restores the original instrument settings 

when the corresponding trace is set to VIEW and the current instrument 

settings are different than those of the trace data. 

If a trace is frozen with VIEW, changes in the instrument settings can be 

made without influencing the trace. An asterisk( * ) at the edge of the display 

screen indicates that the current instrument settings are different than those 

in effect when the trace was recorded. In this case, the ADJUST TO TRACE 

softkey is presented with which the original instrument setting can be 

restored. 


1088.7531.12 4.236 E-15

ESIB 


Trace Export 

TRACE 1 menu: 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

The ASCII EXPORT softkey stores the active trace in a file with ASCII format. 

Upon pressing the ASCII EXPORT softkey, a file name can be entered. The 

default name is TRACE.DAT. Then the measured data of the trace are stored. 


IEC/IEEE-bus command :MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 1..4, 

TRACE 1 menu: 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

EDIT PATH 

DECIM SEP 

. , 

NEW 

APPEND 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

. 

. 

. 

The ASCII CONFIG softkey calls a submenu for various settings for 

the TRACE ASCII EXPORT function. 

EDIT PATH 

The EDIT PATH softkey defines the directory in which the file is to be 

stored. 


DECIM SEP 

. , 

The DECIM SEP softkey selects the decimal separator for the ASCII 

file. The choice is ’.’ (decimal point) or ’,’ (comma). 

This means that the decimal separator used in various language 

versions of evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) can be selected so 

that the packages are supported. . 


:FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMM 

NEW 

APPEND 

The APPEND NEW softkey defines whether output data are to be 

written to an existing file or a new file. 

• With APPEND, the data are added to an existing file. 

• With NEW, either a new file is generated or an existing file is 

overwritten by storage of the data. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :FORMat:DEXPort:APPend ON | OFF 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

The HEADER ON/OFF softkey defines whether important instrument 

settings should be stored at the beginning of the file. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.237 E-15


ESIB 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

The ASCII COMMENT softkey activates the entry of commentary 

concerning the current ASCII data set. A total of 60 characters are 

available for this purpose. 

IEC\IEEE bus command :FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent ’string’ 


The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing 

the trace data. The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon: 

parameter name; numeric value; basic unit 

The data section starts with the keyword " Trace " ( = number of stored trace), followed by the 

measured data in one or several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a 

semicolon. 

This format can be read in from spreadsheet calculation programs, eg MS-Excel. It is necessary to 

define ’;’ as a separator. 

File header 


Type;ESIB7; 

Version;2.10; 

Date;01.Jul 1999; 

Comment; test 

Mode;Spectrum; 



Center Freq;55000;Hz 

Span;90000;Hz 

Freq Offset;0;Hz 

x-Axis;LIN; 

y-Axis;LOG; 

Ref.Level;-30;dBm 

Level Offset;0;dB 

Max Level 

Level Range;100;dB 

RF Att;20;dB 

RBW;100000;Hz 

VBW;30000;Hz 

SWT;0.005;s 


Detector;SAMPLE; 

Sweep Count;20; 

Description 



Date record storage date 

Comment 

Instrument operating mode 


Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0, 

Center frequency 

Frequency range (0 Hz for zero span) 

Frequency offset 

Scaling of x axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) 

Scaling of y axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) 

Reference level 

Level offset 

Maximium level 

Display range in y direction. Unit: dB for x axis LOG, % for x axis LIN 

Input attenuation 

Resolution bandwidth 

Video bandwidth 

Sweep time 

Display mode of trace: CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD 

Detector set: 

AUTOPEAK,MAXPEAK,MINPEAK,AVERAGE, RMS,SAMPLE 

Number of sweeps set 

Data section of 

the file 

Trace 1:; 

x-Unit;Hz; 

y-Unit;dBm; 

Values;500; 

10000;-10.3;-15.7 

10180;-11.5;-16.9 

10360;-12.0;-17.4 

...;...; 



Hz for span > 0; s for span = 0; dBm/dB for statistics measurements 


dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit for y axis LOG or % for y axis 

LIN 

Number of measurement points 


, , 

being available only with AUTOPEAK detector and containing in this 

case the smaller of the two measured values for a measurement point. 

1088.7531.12 4.238 E-15

ESIB 


Example: 

Type;ESIB7; 

Version;2.10; 

Date;20.Sep 1999; 

Comment; test 

Mode;Spectrum; 

Start;0.000000;Hz 

Stop;3500000000.000000;Hz 

Center Freq;1750000000.000000;Hz 

Span;3500000000.000000;Hz 

Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz 

x-Axis;LIN; 

y-Axis;LOG; 

Level Range;100.000000;dB 

Ref. Level;-20.000000;dBm 

Level Offset;0.000000;dBm 

Max. Level;-20.000000;dBm 

RF Att;10.000000;dB 

RBW;3000000.000000;Hz 

VBW;3000000.000000;Hz 

SWT;0.005000;s 


Detector;AUTOPEAK; 

Sweep Count;0; 

TRACE 1: 

x-Unit;Hz; 

y-Unit;dBm; 

Values;500; 

0.000000;-44.465958;-60.190887 

7014028.056112;-49.233063;-81.451668 

14028056.112224;-75.692101;-101.811501 

21042084.168337;-75.147057;-101.229843 

28056112.224449;-75.114517;-95.358429 

35070140.280561;-71.769005;-100.755981 

... 

If all traces are to be stored in one file with the header information stored only once, the following 

procedure is recommended: 


[ASCII CONFIG] [NEW] 

[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER ON] 



[ASCII CONFIG] [APPEND] 

[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER OFF] 




Generate new file 

with header 

Store trace 1 with header 

Append to end of file 

without header 




1088.7531.12 4.239 E-15

Coupled Settings - Analyzer 

ESIB 

Sweep Control – SWEEP Key Group 

Using the SWEEP key group, the parameters are entered which determine the sweep characteristics. 

These are the coupled functions resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth and sweep time (COUPLING 

key), the trigger used for starting the sweep (TRIGGER key) and the type of sweep (SWEEP key). 

Coupled Settings – COUPLING Key 

The COUPLING key calls a menu for entering the sweep parameters resolution bandwidth (RBW), 

video bandwidth (VBW) and sweep time (SWT). The parameters may be coupled as a function of the 

span, coupled to each other or set by the user. When working with a split screen display, the settings 

always refer to the active window. 

The ESIB offers the resolution bandwidths 1 Hz to 10 MHz in 1, 2, 3, 5steps: 

The ESIB resolution bandwidths up to 1 kHz have been implemented using digital filters with Gaussian 

characteristics. They behave like analog filters. The 1-kHz filter has been implemented both as a 

decoupled quartz filter and as a digital filter. One of the two filter types can be selected. The bandwidths 

from 2 kHz to 30 kHz have been implemented using decoupled quartz filters, the bandwidths between 

50 kHz and 5 MHz using decoupled LC filters. These filters consist of 5 circuits, their shape factor is < 

12, typ. 9.5. 

The 10-MHz filter is a critically coupled LC filter. 

For bandwidths up to about 1 kHz, the FFT-algorithm, as compared to other filter methods with identical 

settings, offers clear advantages with respect to the measurement time. The reason is that with analog 

filters the sweep time required for a particular span is proportional to (Span/RBW 2 ). The FFT-algorithm 

reduces that time to a value proportional to (Span/RBW). 

FFT-filters are provided for bandwiths between 1 Hz and 1kHz as an alternative to the analog filters. 

The video bandwidths are available in 1/2/3/5 steps between 1 Hz and 10 MHz. They can be set 

independent of the resolution bandwidth. Video bandwidths between 1 Hz and 10 kHz are available for 

resolution bandwidths up to 1 kHz and video bandwidths between 1 Hz and 10 MHz are available for 

resolution bandwidths greater than or equal to 2 kHz. The video filters are used to smooth the traces. 

Small video bandwidths in relation to the resolution bandwidth average out noise peaks pulse-like 

signals such that only the average value of the signals is displayed. A large video bandwidth in relation 

to the resolution bandwidth is therefore recommended when measuring pulsed signals (VBW ≥ 10 x 

RBW) so that the amplitude of pulses can be measured correctly. 

1088.7531.12 4.240 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Coupled Settings 

Setting and Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep 

Time 

SWEEP COUPLING menu 

COUPLED 

SWEEP 

FUNCTIONS 

RES BW 

TRIGGER 

MANUAL 

SWEEP/ 

SCAN 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

COUPLING/ 

RUN 

RES BW 

AUTO 

RES BW 

3 dB 6 dB 

VIDEO BW 

MANUAL 

VIDEO BW 

AUTO 

SWEEP TIME 

MANUAL 

SWEEP TIME 

AUTO 

COUPLED 

FUNCTIONS 

RBW 1 KHZ 

ANA DIG 

RBW 

0 Hz). The softkey is blanked in the time domain. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON 

1088.7531.12 4.241 E-15


ESIB 

RES BW 

MANUAL 

The RES BW MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry mode for the 

resolution bandwidth. 

The lower limit of the bandwidth is 1 Hz. 

For numerical inputs, the values are always rounded to the next valid 

bandwidth. For rollkey or the UP/DOWN key entries, the bandwidth is 

adjusted in steps either upwards or downwards. 

For manual input of the resolution bandwidth (coupling off), the RBW LED on 

the front panel remains off. 


:[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF 

:[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution] 1MHz 

RBW 

3DB 6DB 

The RES BW 3DB/6DB softkey switches between 3 dB and 6 dB bandwidths 

of the resolution filters. 

3-dB bandwidths: 1 Hz to 10 MHz i available in steps of 1/2/3/5. 

6-dB bandwidths: 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 1 KHz, 9 kHz, 10 kHz, 

100 kHz, 120 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz. 

The 9 kHz and 120 kHz CISPR bandwidths are only available as 6 dB 

bandwidths. 

Some of the marker functions are not available when using the 6 dB 

bandwidths. 


:[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:FILTer 3|6 

VIDEO BW 

AUTO 

The VIDEO BW AUTO softkey couples the video bandwidth of the ESIB to 

the resolution bandwidth. If the resolution bandwidth is changed, the video 

bandwidth is automatically adjusted. 

The coupling of the video bandwidth is always recommended when the 

maximum sweep time for a selected resolution bandwidth is to be obtained. 

Small video bandwidths require longer sweep times due to the longer settling 

time. Large bandwidths reduce the signal/noise ratio. 

The coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO menu. 

The coupling is indicated by illumination of the softkey and the lighted VBW 

LED on the front panel. 

The coupling of the video bandwidth to the resolution filter is also permitted 

for display in the time domain (span = 0). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON 

1088.7531.12 4.242 E-15

ESIB 


VIDEO BW 

MANUAL 

The VIDEO BW MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry for the video 

bandwidth. 

The video bandwidth can be selected in 1/2/3/5 steps between 1 Hz and 10 

MHz. For bandwidths up to 1 kHz, the maximum video bandwidth is 10 kHz, 

for larger resolution bandwidths, there is no restriction to the video bandwidth. 

For numerical entries, rounding is made to the next valid bandwidth. For rollkey 

or UP/DOWN entries, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either 

downwards or upwards. 

For manual input, the video bandwidth (coupling disabled) VBW LED on the 

front panel is turned off. 


:[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF 

:[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo 10kHz 

SWEEP TIME 

AUTO 

The SWEEP TIME AUTO softkey couples the sweep time to the span, video 

bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW). The sweep time is 

automatically adjusted whenever the span, resolution bandwidth or video 

bandwidth are changed. The ESIB always selects the shortest sweep time 

which will not lead to spurious measurements. 

The coupling is indicated by illumination of the softkey and turning on the 

SWT LED. 

The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz). The 

softkey is blanked in the time domain. 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON 

SWEEP TIME 

MANUAL 

The SWEEP TIME MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry for the sweep 

time. At the same time, the coupling of the sweep is cancelled and the SWT 

LED is turned off. Other couplings (VIDEO BW, RES BW) remain in effect. 

In the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz) and for resolution bandwidths ≥ 1 kHz, 

sweep times from 5 ms through 16000 s are allowed in steps that are at most 

5% of the sweep time. The digital resolution filters from 10 Hz to 1 kHz allow 

a minimum sweep time of 20 ms. 

If an FFT-filter is used the sweep time is fixed by the display range and 

resolution bandwidth selected and therefore can not be changed. 

In the time domain (span = 0 Hz), the sweep time range is 1 µs to 2500 s, 

selectable in steps that are at most 5% of the sweep time. 

Numerical entries are rounded to the next valid sweep time. For rollkey or 

UP/DOWN entries, the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or 

upwards. 

If the selected sweep time is too small for the selected span and bandwidth, 

measurement errors will occur. This happens because the available settling 

time for the resolution filter or the video filter is too short. The ESIB, therefore, 

outputs UNCAL on the display 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME 10s 

1088.7531.12 4.243 E-15


ESIB 

COUPLING 

DEFAULT 

The COUPLING DEFAULT softkey sets all coupled functions to AUTO. The 

RBW / VBW ratio is also set to SINE [1] and the SPAN/RBW ratio is set to 50 

in the COUPLING RATIO submenu (default setting, COUPLING RATIO 

softkey not illuminated). 

The relevant softkeys are then illuminated. 


:[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON; 

:[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON; 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON 

RBW 1KHZ 

ANA DIG 

The RBW 1kHz ANA/DIG softkey enables either the analog quartz filter 

(ANA) or the digital filter (DIG) for the instruments’s resolution bandwidth of 1 

kHz. In the default setting, the instrument uses the analog IF filter for the 1- 

kHz bandwidth. 


:[SENSe:]BWIDth:MODE ANALog | DIGital 

1088.7531.12 4.244 E-15

ESIB 


RBW


ESIB 

MAIN PLL 

BANDWIDTH 

The MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH softkey opens a selection window for setting 

the PLL control bandwidth. 

MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH 

AUTO 

HIGH 

MEDIUM 

LOW 

The first local oscillator is synchronized with the PLL control bandwidth. The 

control bandwidth determines the characteristic of the phase noise. A 

medium or high control bandwidth improves the phase noise for frequency 

differences smaller than 10 kHz to the carrier, whereas a low control 

bandwidth improves the phase noise for frequency differences larger than 

100 kHz to the carrier. If the control bandwidth is set unfavorably, the phase 

noise is deteriorated. 

The PLL bandwidth is set in the AUTO mode depending on the RBW and 

SPAN according to the following tables: 

MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH 

HIGH 

MEDIUM 

LOW 

SPAN ≤ 100 kHz 

and RBW < 3kHz 

X 

SPAN > 100 kHz 

or RBW ≥ 3kHz 

X 

The setting is chosen such that the phase noise for small spans with small 

resolution bandwidth near the carrier is optimized. 

For measurements with small span but with a relatively large frequency 

difference to the carrier (>100kHz), the automatic bandwidth setting 

deteriorates the phase noise relative to the optimal setting. The MAIN PLL 

BANDWIDTH softkey allows to by-pass this automatic setting. Optimal 

settings are, as a function of the carrier difference @: 

MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH @ ≤ 10 kHz 10 kHz < @ < 100 

kHz 

HIGH 

X 

MEDIUM 

X 

LOW 

@ ≥ 100 kHz 

If a larger control bandwidth is needed due to the sweep velocity, the 

processor automatically increases the control bandwidth as far as 

necessary. 

X 

1088.7531.12 4.246 E-15

ESIB 


Sweep Coupling Ratio 

SWEEP COUPLING-COUPLING RATIO submenu: 

COUPLING 

RATIO 

COUPLING 

RATIO 

RBW / VBW 

SINE [1] 

RBW / VBW 

PULSE [.1] 

RBW / VBW 

NOISE [10] 

RBW / VBW 

MANUAL 

SPAN / RBW 

AUTO [50] 

The COUPLING RATIO softkey opens a sub-menu in 

which the coupling ratio between resolution bandwidth, 

video bandwidth and the span can be defined. 

These settings are effective only for the selected 

parameters in ...AUTO of the main menu. 

The softkeys RBW/VBW PULSE, RBW/VBW SINE, RBW/ 

VBW NOISE, RBW/VBW MANUAL are selection keys. 

Only one softkey can be enabled (illuminated) at any one 

time. 

The same is valid for the softkeys SPAN/RWB AUTO [50] 

and SPAN / RWB MANUAL. 

SPAN / RBW 

MANUAL 

RBW / VBW 

SINE [1] 

The RBW / VBW SINE [1] softkey always sets the video bandwidth equal to 

the resolution bandwidth. 

This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth to video 

bandwidth. 

This coupling ratio is recommended when sine-wave signals are to be 

measured. 

This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio SINe 

1088.7531.12 4.247 E-15


ESIB 

RBW / VBW 

PULSE [.1] 

The RBW / VBW PULSE softkey sets the following coupling ratio: 

video bandwidth = 10 x resolution bandwidth 

or 

video bandwidth = 10 MHz (= maximum video bandwidth). 

This coupling ratio is recommended when the amplitude of pulsed signals is 

to be measured. The IF filter characteristics alone determine the pulse shape. 

No additional weighting is provided by the video filter. 

This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio PULSe 

RBW / VBW 

NOISE [10] 

The RBW / VBW NOISE softkey sets the following coupling ratio: 

video bandwidth = resolution bandwidth/10 

At this coupling ratio, noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video 

section. For noise signals, the ESIB displays the average value. 

This softkey is disabled unless VBW AUTO is selected in the main menu. 


:[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio NOISe 

RBW / VBW 

MANUAL 

The RBW / VBW MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the coupling ratio for 

resolution bandwidth to video bandwidth. 

The range for the RBW/VBW ratio is 0,001 to 1000. 

This softkey is disabled unless VBW AUTO is selected in the main menu. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio 10 

SPAN / RBW 

AUTO [50] 

The SPAN / RBW AUTO [50] softkey sets the following coupling (rounding is 

made to the next higher value): 

resolution bandwidth = span/50 

This coupling corresponds to the default state. 

This softkey is disabled unless RBW AUTO is selected in the main menu. 


:[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.02 

SPAN / RBW 

MANUAL 

The SPAN / RBW MANUAL softkey activates the entry for the coupling of 

resolution bandwidth and span. 

The range for the SPAN/RBW ratio is 1 to 10000. 

This softkey is disabled unless RBW AUTO is selected in the main menu. 


:[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.1 

1088.7531.12 4.248 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Sweep Trigger 

Sweep Trigger – TRIGGER Key 

SWEEP TRIGGER menu: 

SWEEP 

TRIGGER 

SW 

SC 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

COUPLING/ 

RUN 

TRIGGER 

FREE RUN 

VIDEO 

LINE 

EXTERN 

RF POWER 

TRIGGER 

DELAY 

SLOPE 

POS NEG 

The TRIGGER key opens a menu for selecting the various 

trigger sources and the trigger polarity. The active trigger 

mode is indicated by illumination of the corresponding 

softkey. 

For triggering modes in which the trigger threshold can be 

entered, the corresponding entry window is activated and, if 

appropriate, a horizontal trigger line is displayed. 

The FREE RUN, VIDEO, LINE, EXTERN and RF-POWER 

softkeys are selection switches. Only one key can be 

enabled at any one time (illuminated). For sweep operations 

controlled by a gate signal, the FREE RUN setting is the only 

setting possible. 

If triggering has taken place, the trigger LED is turned on at 

the beginning of the sweep and then turned off at the end of 

sweep. 

To indicate that the ESIB is set for triggering (= not free run), 

the enhancement label TRG is shown on the display. If two 

measurement windows are displayed, TRG appears next to 

the window which is configured for triggering. 

FREE RUN 

The FREE RUN softkey activates the free-run sweep mode (default setting), 

i.e. the start of a sweep is not explicitly triggered. Once a measurement is 

completed, another is started immediately. 

IIEC/IEEE-bus command 


VIDEO 

The VIDEO softkey activates triggering by the displayed voltage. 

For the video triggering mode, a level line showing the trigger threshold is 

displayed. Using the level line, the threshold can be adjusted with the roll-key 

or the UP/DOWN keys. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce VIDeo 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 50PCT 

LINE 

The LINE softkey activates triggering derived from the mains (line) frequency. 

The power supply generates a trigger pulse at the line frequency which is 

used to trigger a new sweep. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce LINE 

1088.7531.12 4.249 E-15

Sweep Trigger - Analyzer 

ESIB 

EXTERN The EXTERN softkey activates triggering by an external voltage 

(-5V...+5V) at the input connector EXT TRIGGER/GATE on the rear panel. 

The trigger threshold can be set in an entry window within a range 

of -5V...+5V. 

External triggering in the sweep mode "gated sweep" (SWEEP SWEEP- 

GATE ON) is not possible, because the EXT TRIG/GATE connector is used 

to control the sweep. The softkey is not illuminated in these modes. 



:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel 2.5V 

RF POWER 

The RF POWER softkey activates triggering of the measurement by signals 

which are outside the measurement channel. 

The ESIB uses a level detector at the intermediate frequency. The detector 

threshold is approximately -20 dBm at the input mixer. This means that the 

actual trigger level at the RF input is approx. -20 dBm plus the set RF 

attenuation. 

The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency is approximately 160 MHz. 

Triggering takes place when the trigger threshold is exceeded within a 100 

MHz band about the selected frequency. Therefore, the measurement of 

noise emissions, e.g., for pulsed carriers, is possible. The carrier itself is 

suppressed via the selected resolution filter. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce RFPower 

TRIGGER 

DELAY 

The TRIGGER DELAY softkey activates the entry window for delay time or a 

pretrigger. 

The triggering is delayed or advanced relative to the trigger signal by the 

entered delay time. The delay time can be set in the range from -100 s to 100 

s (default = 0 s). 

Note: A negative delay time (pretrigger) can be set in the time domain 

(SPAN < 0 Hz) only. The maximum range and the maximum 

resolution of the pretrigger is limited by the set sweep time: 

max. range = - 499/500 x sweep time 

max. resolution = sweep time/500. 

Pretriggering is not possible when the rms or the average detector is 

activated. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff 500us 

SLOPE 

POS NEG 

The SLOPE POS/NEG softkey selects the trigger slope. 

The sweep starts after a positive or negative trigger signal edge. The 

selected setting is illuminated. 

The selection is valid for all trigger modes with the exception of FREE RUN. 

The default mode is SLOPE POS. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POS |NEG 

1088.7531.12 4.250 E-15

ESIB 

Analyzer - Sweep Control 

Sweep Setup – SWEEP Key 

SWEEP SWEEP menu: 

SWEEP 

TRIGGER 

SWEEP/ 

SCAN 

R 

VBW 

SWT 

COUPLING/ 

RUN 

SWEEP 

CONTINUOUS 

SWEEP 

SINGLE 

SWEEP 

SWEEP TIME 

AUTO 

SWEEP TIME 

MANUAL 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

GAP SWEEP 

ON OFF 

GAP SWEEP 

SETTINGS 

The SWEEP key calls a menu in which the type of sweep 

(sweep mode) is determined. In split screen mode, the entries 

are valid only for the active measurement window. 

In the menu, continuous or single sweep mode, gap-sweep 

settings or the external gate function can be selected. 

The CONTINUOUS SWEEP and SINGLE SWEEP softkeys 

are selection switches. Only one softkey can be active at any 

one time. 

ON 

GATE 

OFF 

GATE 

SETTINGS 

SGL SWEEP 

DISP OFF 

CONTINUOUS 

SWEEP 

The CONTINUOUS SWEEP softkey sets the continuous sweep mode. This 

means, that the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger 

conditions. 

In the case of split screen display with different settings in each measurement 

window, screen A is swept first and then screen B. After pressing the softkey, 

the sweep is initialized and restarted. 

CONTINUOUS SWEEP is the default setting of the ESIB. 


:INITiate:CONTinuous ON; 

:INITiate 

SINGLE 

SWEEP 

The SINGLE SWEEP softkey starts a series of n sweeps according to the 

triggering definition. The number of sweeps, n, is determined by the SWEEP 

COUNT softkey. 

In split screen display mode, the spans of each window are swept 

sequentially. If a displayed curve is averaged, the span is swept n times (n = 

sweep count). For n = 0, a single sweep takes place. 

To indicate that the ESIB is set for single sweep, the enhancment label SGL 

is shown on the display. 


:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF; 

:INITiate 

1088.7531.12 4.251 E-15

Sweep Control - Analyzer 

ESIB 

SWEEPTIME 

AUTO 

SWEEPTIME 

MANUAL 

The SWEEPTIME AUTO and SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkeys activate the 

automatic or manual selection of the sweep time. These functions are 

identical to the entries in the COUPLING menu (see section "Setting and 

Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep Time"). 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON | OFF 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME 10s 

SGL SWEEP 

DISP OFF 

The SGL SWEEP DISP OFF softkey switches off the display during a single 

sweep. The trace is displayed when the sweep has been completed. 


:INITiate:DISPlay ON | OFF; 

:INITiate 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps 

performed by the ESIB after the start of a single sweep. If trace average, max 

hold or min hold is switched on, this also determines the number of averages 

or minimua/maxima that are taken. 

Example: 

[TRACE1: MAX HOLD] 

[SWEEP: SWEEP COUNT: {10} ENTER] 

[SINGLE SWEEP] 

The ESIB performs the max hold function over 10 sweeps. 

The sweep count range is 0 through 32767. For sweep count = 0 or 1, a 

sweep is performed. For trace averaging (AVERAGE), sweep count = 0 and 

continuous sweep, the ESIB performs a sliding average over 10 sweeps in 

average mode. For sweep count = 1, no averaging takes place. 

The default setting totals 10 sweeps. 

Note: The setting for the number of sweeps in the TRACE menu is 

equivalent to the setting in the SWEEP menu. In SINGLE SWEEP 

mode, the measurement is stopped after reaching the chosen 

number of sweeps. 


1088.7531.12 4.252 E-15

ESIB 


Gated Sweep 

By using a gate in the sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive, the 

spectrum of pulsed carriers can be displayed without overlaid frequency components caused by 

switching. Similarly, the spectrum can also be examined when the carrier is inactive. The sweep can be 

controlled by an external gate or by the internal power trigger. 

Fig. 4-13 

Pulsed signal with GATE OFF 

Fig 4-14 

TDMA-signal with GATE ON 

1088.7531.12 4.253 E-15


ESIB 

The ’gated sweep’ mode is activated by the GATE ON/OFF softkey. The mode is set in the GATE 

SETTINGS sub-menu. 


GATE 

ON OFF 

The GATE ON / OFF softkey switches the sweep mode with an internal or 

external gate on/off. 

When GATE ON is selected, a signal applied to the rear panel connector EXT 

TRIGGER/GATE or the internal RF power detector controls the sweep of the 

analyzer. The sweep can be stopped and then continued. A switch from an 

edge triggered to a level triggered mode can also be made. 

Gate Mode LEVEL 

Gate Mode EDGE 

RF 

ext. Gate 

Meas. active 

Delay 

Delay 

Length 

Fig. 4-15 Interaction of the parameters GATE MODE, GATE DELAY and 

GATE LENGTH 

The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span > 0). 

GATE ON is only possible when the trigger mode is set to FREE RUN 

(SWEEP TRIGGER menu) . 

To indicate that the ESIB is set for sweep mode with external gate, the 

enhancement label GAT is displayed on the screen. GAT appears next to the 

window for which the gate is configured. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.254 E-15

ESIB 


SWEEP SWEEP-GATE SETTINGS sub-menu: 

GATE 

SETTINGS 

GATE 

SETTINGS 

GATE 

LEVEL 

GATE MODE 

LEVEL EDGE 

GATE POL 

POS NEG 

GATE 

DELAY 

GATE 

LENGTH 

In the GATE SETTINGS submenu, all settings are made 

which are necessary for ’gated sweep’ operation. 

On switching to the time domain, the GATE DELAY and 

GATE LENGTH times are represented by horizontal time 

lines which allow simple adjustment of the gate time. 

The softkeys GATE EXTERN and GATE RF POWER provide 

alternative settings, only one of them can be active at one 

time. 

GATE 

EXTERN 

GATE 

RF POWER 

GATE 

ADJUST 

GATE 

LEVEL 

The GATE LEVEL softkey activates the entry window for defining the 

threshold value of the external gate signal. 

The threshold can be set between -5V and +5V. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel 3V 

GATE MODE 

LEVEL EDGE 

The GATE MODE LEVEL/EDGE softkey selects the trigger mode. The sweep 

mode GATE can be operated either as level or as edge triggered. 

For level triggering, the GATE LENGTH softkey is deactivated and can not be 

used. 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE LEVel | EDGE 

GATE POL 

POS NEG 

The GATE POL softkey determines the polarity of the GATE control line. 

If level triggering with GATE POL POS is set, the sweep is stopped when the 

gate signal is a logic ´ 0 ' (input signal < gate level) at the EXT 

TRIGGER/GATE input and then, when the gate signal goes to a logic ' 1 ', the 

sweep is continued after a delay time of GATE DELAY. 

In the case of edge triggering, the sweep is continued on a ' 0 ' to ' 1' 

transition for the duration of GATE LENGTH after a delay (GATE DELAY) has 

elapsed. 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity POS|NEG 

1088.7531.12 4.255 E-15


ESIB 

GATE 

DELAY 

The GATE DELAY softkey activates the entry window for setting the delay 

time between the gate signal and the continuation of the sweep. 

This may be usefull in allowing for a delay between the gate signal and the 

stabilization of an RF carrier. 

Gate delay values can be selected between 1 µs and 100 s. The resolution is 

dependent upon the absolute value of the delay time: 

Gate delay Resolution 

0 - 500 µs 1 µs 

0.5 - 5 ms 5 µs 

5 - 50 ms 50 µs 

50 - 500 ms 500 µs 

0.5 - 5 s 5 ms 

5 - 50 s 50 ms 

50 - 100 s 500 ms 

In the time domain, a time line is displayed separated from the trigger point by 

the gate delay time. This simplifies the adjustment of the necessary delay 

time. 

The values for GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH are displayed by two time 

lines. The duration of the active sweep for span > 0 (continuation of sweep: 

GATE DELAY line, stopping of sweep: GATE LENGTH line) is described by 

these two lines. A change in parameters causes a shift of the corresponding 

line position. After switching to span > 0, the selected times for the gated 

sweep are effective. 

IEC-bus command 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 100us 

GATE 

LENGTH 

The GATE LENGTH softkey activates the entry window for defining the ESIB 

sweep duration. 

GATE LENGTH can be set to values between 1µs and 100 s. The resolution 

is dependent upon the absolute value of the gate length: 

Gate length Resolution 

0 - 500 µs 1 µs 

0.5 - 5 ms 5 µs 

5 - 50 ms 50 µs 

50 - 500 ms 500 µs 

0.5 - 5 s 5 ms 

5 - 50 s 50 ms 

50 - 100 s 500 ms 

In the time domain (ZERO SPAN), a time line is displayed separated from the 

GATE DELAY time by the GATE LENGTH time. 

The softkey is only available for the GATE MODE EDGE setting (edge 

triggering). It is disabled for the GATE MODE LEVEL setting (level triggering). 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 10ms 

GATE 

EXTERN 

The GATE EXTERN softkey selects a signal applied to the EXT 

TRIGGER/GATE connector on the rear panel of the instrument as a gate 

source. 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXT 

GATE 

RF POWER 

The GATE RF POWER softkey selects the internal RF power detector as a 

gate source. 

IEC-bus command 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce RFPower 

1088.7531.12 4.256 E-15

ESIB 


Setting the Gate Times 

SWEEP SWEEP- GATE SETTINGS - GATE ADJUST submenu: 

GATE 

ADJUST 

GATE 

ADJUST 

GATE 

LEVEL 

GATE MODE 

LEVEL EDGE 

GATE POL 

POS NEG 

GATE 

DELAY 

GATE 

LENGTH 

SWEEPTIME 

MANUAL 

RES BW 

MANUAL 

VIDEO BW 

MANUAL 

VIDEO BW 

AUTO 

The GATE ADJUST softkey opens a submenu comprising all 

softkeys that are used to set the parameters relevant for the 

’gated sweep’ function. 

On pressing this softkey, the display is switched to the time 

domain (zero span setting) so that all necessary times can be 

checked by means of cursor lines. 

The values for Res BW, Video BW and sweep time are taken 

from the corresponding settings in the frequency domain. 

To make sure that the times can be set correctly 

corresponding to the conditions in the frequency domain, the 

settings for the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth 

should not be changed. 

The sweep time must be selected such that, e. g., a full burst 

is displayed. It usually differs from the sweep time in the 


Finally, GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH can be used to 

set the times in such a way that the desired section in the 

spectral range is covered. 

On quitting the submenu, the original settings in the 

frequency range are restored so that the measurement can 

be directly performed with the required parameters. 

Measurement example: 

The modulation spectrum of a GSM or PCS1900 signal to be measured using the ’gated sweep’ 

function. The signal is generated by the test sender SME03. Its RF-output is directly connected to the 

RF input of the ESIB. 

Settings on the SME03: 

FREQ: 

802 MHz 

Level: 

0 dBm: Return 

Digital Mod: Select: GMSK: Select 

Source: 

Select: PRBS: Select: Return 

Level Attenuation: Select: 60 dB: Return 

The SME03 provides a GMSK-modulated TDMA-signal (GSM) 

1088.7531.12 4.257 E-15


ESIB 

Operation steps on the ESIB: 

[PRESET] 

[MODE] 

[↑] 

ANALYZER 

[CENTER: {802} MHz] 

[SPAN 

{3.6} MHz] 

[REF LVL: {0} dBm: RF ATTEN MANUAL: {10} dB] 

[COUPLING: RES BW MANUAL: {30} kHz] 

[TRACE 1: DETECTOR: RMS] 

[SWEEP: 

SWEEPTIME MANUAL: {50} ms; 

GATE ON 

GATE SETTINGS: GATE MODE EDGE: GATE POL POS: GATE RF POWER 

GATE ADJUST: SWEEPTIME MANUAL {1} ms: GATE DELAY {300} µs: 

GATE LENGTH: {250} µs] 

Note: [KEY] Menu called by the KEY. All indications inside the bracket refer to this menu. 

{Number} Numeric value to be entered for the corresponding parameter 

SOFTKEY Softkey used to select a parameter or enter a value. 

The following figure shows the screen display for gate parameter setting: The vertical lines for gate 

delay (GL) and gate length (GL) can be adapted to the burst signal by entering numbers or with the 

rollkey. 

Fig. 4-16 

Setting the GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH times in the time domain using the GD 

and GL lines 

On quitting the menu GATE ADJUST, the ESIB returns to spectral representation. 

1088.7531.12 4.258 E-15

ESIB 


Sweep Blanking – Gap Sweep 

For measurements in the time domain, the GAP SWEEP function offers a high degree of flexibility with 

regard to the display of measurement data. With the PRE TRIGGER softkey, it is possible to display 

measurements taken before the trigger time. With the GAP TIME softkey, the measurements within a 

predefined time range can be blanked. Thus, it is possible to display the rising and falling edge of a 

signal with high resolution on a single diagram. 

Displayed picture 

Trigger 

(not displayed) 

Displayed picture 

Pre-Trigger 

Time 

Trigger to Gap 

Time 

Gap 

Time 

Fig 4-17 

Trace blanking in sweep mode.– Gap Sweep 

Ref Lev 

-10.0 dBm 

RBW 1 MHz 

VBW 300 kHz 

SWT 800 µs 

RF Att 20 dB 

Unit 

(dBm) 

Span 0 Hz 80 µs / Div Center 914 MHz 

Fig. 4-18 

Display of a burst without gaps 

1088.7531.12 4.259 E-15


ESIB 

Ref Lev 

-10.0 dBm 

RBW 

VBW 

SWT 

100 kHz 

100 kHz 

500 us 

RF Att 20 dB 

Unit 

(dBm) 

Span 0 Hz 50 us / Div Center 914 MHz 

Fig. 4-19 

Display of a burst with a gap 

The GAP SWEEP measurement is activated by the GAP SWEEP ON/OFF softkey. The mode settings 

are made in the GAP SWEEP SETTINGS sub-menu. 


GAP SWEEP 

ON OFF 

The GAP SWEEP ON/OFF softkey switches the GAP SWEEP measurement 

on/off. 

The softkey is available only in the time domain. 

IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.260 E-15

ESIB 


SWEEP SWEEP-GAP SWEEP SETTINGS sub-menu: 

GAP SWEEP 

SETTINGS 

GAP SWEEP 

SETTINGS 

TRIGGER 

LEVEL 

PRE 

TRIGGER 

TRG TO GAP 

TIME 

GAP 

LENGTH 

The GAP SWEEP SETTINGS softkey opens a sub-menu in 

which the parameters for the gap can be selected. 

The trigger time corresponds to t = 0. Events occurring 

before the trigger time are displayed in negative time. 

TRIGGER 

LEVEL 

The TRIGGER LEVEL softkey activates the entry window for trigger level. 

This function corresponds to the setting in the trigger menu. 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 50PCT 

PRE 

TRIGGER 

The PRE TRIGGER softkey activates the entry window for the pre-trigger 

time. The pre-trigger time defines the separation between the left edge of the 

grid and the trigger time (t = 0). 

At the same time the gap sweep is switched on (exception : entry t = 0) 

The minimum pre-trigger time is −100 s, the maximum pre-trigger time 

depends on the sweep time and the trigger to gap time (max = 100 s). The 

maximum resolution is 50 ns. 

The PRE TRIGGER value can be entered in the frequency domain (span > 0) 

as well as in the time domain and GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It is, however, 

only effective when the GAP SWEEP measurement is enabled. 


:SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:PRETrigger 100us 

1088.7531.12 4.261 E-15


ESIB 

TRG TO GAP 

TIME 

The TRG TO GAP TIME softkey opens an entry window for defining the 

distance between the trigger time and the beginning of the gap. 

The TRIGGER TO GAP TIME range is from 0 to 100 s with a resolution of 50 

ns. The length of the gap is defined by GAP LENGTH. If the GAP LENGTH is 

0 s, the entered value of TRG TO GAP TIME is only stored. 

The TRG TO GAP TIME value can be entered in the frequency domain (span 

> 0) as well as in the time domain and for the GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It has 

an effect on the measurement only after the GAP SWEEP ON is switched on. 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:TRGTogap 50us 

GAP 

LENGTH 

The GAP LENGTH softkey activates the entry window for defining the gap 

within which the measurement values are to be blanked. 

The beginning of the gap is defined by TRG TO GAP TIME. 

GAP LENGTH can be set to values between 150 ns and 100 s in 1/2/3/5 

steps. The resolution is dependent upon the absolute value of the gap length: 

Gap length Resolution 

150 ns - 50 µs 50 ns 

50 - 500 µs 500 ns 

0.5 - 5 ms 5 µs 

5 - 50 ms 50 µs 

50 - 500 ms 500 µs 

0.5 - 5 s 5 ms 

5 - 50 s 50 ms 

50 - 100 s 500 ms 

The GAP LENGTH value can be entered in the frequency domain (span > 0) 

as well as in the time domain and for the GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It has an 

effect on the measurement only after the GAP SWEEP ON is switched on. 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:LENGth 400us 

1088.7531.12 4.262 E-15

ESIB 

Tracking generator 

Tracking Generator Option 

In the normal mode, the tracking generator sends a signal exactly at the input frequency of the 

instrument without a frequency offset. 

For frequency-converting measurements it is possible to set a constant frequency offset of ±200 MHz 

between the output signal of the tracking generator and the receive frequency of the instrument. 

Also, two analog input signals can be used to I/Q or AM and BB-FM modulate the output signal (options 

FSE-B9, FSE-B11). 

The output level is level-controlled and can be set from -20 to 0 dBm in 0.1-dB steps The level control 

can also be operated with external detectors. When the tracking generator is equipped with the optional 

attenuator, the setting range is extended from -90 dBm to 0 dBm. 

The tracking generator can be used in all operating modes. The recording of test setup calibration 

values (SOURCE CAL) and the normalization with this correction values (NORMALIZE) is only possible 

in operating mode ANALYZER MODE. 

SYSTEM MODE menu: 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SE P 

MODE 

ANALYZER 



TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 

. 

. 

The MODE key activates the menu in which the 

submenu for setting the tracking generator can be 

selected in addition to different operating modes. 

1088.7531.12 4.263 E-15

Tracking generator 

ESIB 

Tracking Generator Settings 

SYSTEM MODE menu: 

TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

SOURCE 

ON OFF 

The TRACKING GENERATOR softkey opens a menu for 

setting the functions of the tracking generator. 

SOURCE 

POWER 

POWER 

OFFSET 

SOURCE 

CAL 

FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 

MODULATION 

. 

. 

. 

SOURCE 

ON / OFF 

The SOURCE ON/OFF softkey switches the tracking generator on or off. 

Default setting is OFF 

IEC/IEEE bus command :OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF 

SOURCE 

POWER 

The SOURCE POWER softkey activates the entry of the tracking generator 

output level. 

The output level can be set from 0 dBm to -20 dBm in 0.1-dB steps. The 

setting range is extended to -90 dBm when the tracking generator is equipped 

with the optional attenuator FSE-B12. 

If the tracking generator is off, it is automatically switched on by the SOURCE 

PWR softkey. 

Default setting is -20 dBm. 


:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] 

POWER 

OFFSET 

The POWER OFFSET softkey activates the entry of a constant level offset of 

the tracking generator. 

With this offset it is possible to consider attenuators or amplifiers at the output 

connector of the tracking generator during the input or output of output levels, 

for example. 

The permissible setting range is -200 dB to +200 dB in 0.1-dB steps. Positive 

offsets apply to a subsequent amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator. 

Default setting is 0 dB. 


:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet 

1088.7531.12 4.264 E-15

ESIB 

Tracking generator - Transmission measurement 

Transmission Measurement 

In this measurement, the transmission characteristic of a two-port network is measured. The built-in 

tracking generator is the a signal source. The tracking generator is connected to the input of the DUT. 

The input of the instrument is connected to the output of the DUT. 

GEN OUTPUT 

RF INPUT 

DUT 

Fig. 4-20 Test setup for reflection measurements 

Calibration can be carried out to allow for the effects from the test setup (eg. frequency response of 

connecting cables). 

Calibration of the Transmission Measurement 

SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR menu: 

SOURCE 

CAL 

SOURCE 

CAL 

CAL 

TRANS 

CAL REFL 

SHORT 

CAL REFL 

OPEN 

REF VALUE 

POSITION 

The SOURCE CAL softkey opens a submenu with the 

calibration functions for transmission and reflection 

measurements. 

The calibration for the reflection measurement is described 

of the following sections . 

To carrry out a calibration for transmission measurements 

the whole test setup is through-connected (THRU). 

REF VALUE 

NORMALIZE 

RECALL 

1088.7531.12 4.265 E-15

Transmission measurement - Tracking generator 

ESIB 

CAL 

TRANS 

The CAL TRANS softkey triggers the calibration for the transmission 

measurement. 

It starts a sweep that records a reference curve. This trace is then used to 

obtain the differences to the normalized values. 

Fig. 4-21 Trace of a transmission calibration procedure 

During the calibration sweep the following message is displayed: 

SOURCE CAL 

in progress 

ABORT 

After the calibration sweep the following message is displayed: 

NOTE 

Calibration complete 

ABORT 

This message is cleared after approx. 3 seconds. 

By saving and recalling the reference data set with the SAVE and RECALL 

keys, several calibration datasets can be saved and, then, if necessary, any of 

these sets can be selected without going through a new calibration routine. 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough 

1088.7531.12 4.266 E-15

ESIB 


Normalization 

SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR -SOURCE CAL menu: 

NORMALIZE 

The NORMALIZE softkey switches the normalization on or off. The softkey is 

only enabled if the memory contains a correction trace. 

If no reference line is switched on when activating the normalization, all 

measured values are with reference to the top grid line. The effects of the 

test setup is corrected in such a way that the measured values are displayed 

at the top grid margin. 

Fig. 4-22 

Normalized display 

In SPLIT SCREEN mode, normalization is switched on in the currently active 

screen. Different types of normalization can be activated in the two split 

screens. 

Normalization is aborted when the ANALYZER operating mode is quit but 

can be switched on again as long as the reference trace stored in the 

memory has not been overwritten. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.267 E-15


ESIB 

It is now possible to shift the relative reference point within the grid by using the REF VALUE POSITION 

softkey. This means that the trace can be shifted from the upper edge of the grid towards the center of 

the grid: 

REF VALUE 

POSITION 

The REF VALUE POSITION softkey (reference position) marks a reference 

position in the active screen at which normalization is performed (difference 

between trace and reference trace). 

If no reference line is switched on, the softkey switches on a reference line 

and activates the input of its position. The line can be moved within the grid 

limits. 

The reference line is switched off by pressing the softkey again. 

The function of the reference line is explained in section "Calibration Method" 

Fig. 4-23 Normalized measurement, shifted with REF POSITION 50 % 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 

0 to 100PCT 

1088.7531.12 4.268 E-15

ESIB 


REF VALUE 

The REF VALUE softkey activates the entry of a level difference which is 

assigned to the reference line. 

With normalization switched on, all measured values are displayed relative 

to the reference line, or if the latter is switched off relative to the top grid line 

which corresponds to 0 dB with default setting. 

REF VALUE always refers to the ative screen. 

Fig. 4-24 

Measurement with REF VALUE 20 dB and REF VALUE 

POSITION 50% 

1088.7531.12 4.269 E-15


ESIB 

If, after source calibration, a 10 dB attenuator is inserted into the signal 

path between DUT and analyzer input, the measurement trace will be 

moved down by 10 dB. Entering a REF VALUE of –10 dB then moves the 

reference line down 10 dB. This means that the measured trace and the 

reference trace coincide again. 

After the reference line has been moved by entering a REF VALUE of –10 

dB, deviations from the nominal power level can then be displayed with a 

high resolution (e.g. 1 dB/div). The power is still displayed in absolute 

values, which means that in the above example 1 dB below the nominal 

power (reference line) is equivalent to an attenuation of 11 dB. 

Fig. 4-25 

Measurement of a 10dB attenuator pad with 1 dB / Div 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue 

 

RECALL 

The RECALL softkey restores the instrument setting that were used during 

calibration. 

This can be useful if the device setting was changed after calibration (eg 

center frequency setting, frequency deviation, reference level, etc. ). 

The softkey is only offered if: 

• the analyzer mode has been selected 

• the memory contains a calibration data set. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall 

1088.7531.12 4.270 E-15

ESIB 

Frequency Converting Measurements 

Reflection Measurements 

Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out with a reflection-coefficient bridge. 

GEN OUTPUT 

RF INPUT 

BRIDGE 

DUT 

Fig. 4-26 

Test setup for reflection measurements 

Calibration of Reflection Measurement 

This calibration procedure essentially corresponds to that of the transmission measurement. 

SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING-SOURCE CAL submenu 

CAL REFL 

OPEN 

The CAL REFL OPEN softkey starts the open-circuit calibration. 

During calibration the following message is displayed 

SOURCE CAL 

in progress 

ABORT 

CAL REFL 

SHORT 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod REFLexion 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN 

The CAL REFL SHORT softkey starts the short-circuit calibration. 

If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration 

curve is formed by averaging the two measurements and is stored in the 

memory. The order of measurements is optional. 

The completion of the calibration is indicated by 

NOTE 

calibration complete 

OK 

The display is cleared after 3 seconds. 




1088.7531.12 4.271 E-15

Functioning of Calibration - Tracking generator 

ESIB 

Calibration Methods 

Calibration means forming the difference between current measured values and a reference curve, no 

matter what the selected measurement type is (transmission/reflection). The hardware settings used for 

measuring the reference curve are included in the reference dataset. 

When normalization is switched on, a wide range of device settings can be changed without aborting 

normalization. In other words, the number of repeat normalizations is kept to a minimum. 

The reference dataset (trace with 500 measured values) is stored internally as a table of 500 points 

(frequency/level). 

Differences in level settings between the reference curve and the current device setting are calculated 

automatically. For small spans, a linear interpolation is used. If the span is increased, , the values at the 

left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated out to the new start or stop frequency; in 

other words, additional linearly extrapolated values are added to the reference dataset. 

An enhancement label is used to mark the different levels of measurement accuracy. This enhancement 

label is displayed at the right display margin when normalization is switched on and in case of an error 

from the reference setting. Three accuracy levels are defined: 

Table 4-1 

Measurement accuracy levels 

Accuracy 

Enhancement 

label 

Reason/Limitation 

High NOR No difference between reference setting and measurement 

Medium 

APP 

(approximation) 

Changes in the following settings: 

• coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT) 

• reference level, RF attenuation 

• start or stop frequency 

• output level of tracking generator 

• frequency offset of tracking generator 

• detector (max peak, min peak, sample...) 

Change of frequency: 

• at most 500 frozen continuation points within the set sweep limits (corresponds to 

a doubling of the span) 

- Abortion of 

calibration 

• more than 500 frozen points within the set sweep limits (span doubling) 

Note: 

At a reference level (REF LEVEL) of -10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the 

same value the instrument operates without a headroom. ie the instrument is in danger of being 

overloaded by any signal whose amplitude exeeds the reference line. In this case, either the 

message "OVLD" for overload is displayed in the status line or the display range is exceeded 

(clipping the top of the trace = Overrange). 

This overload can be avoided as follows: 

• Reducing the output level of the tracking generator (SOURCE POWER, SYSTEM-MODE- 

TRACKING GENERATOR menu) 

• Increasing the reference level (REF LEVEL, LEVEL-REF menu) 

1088.7531.12 4.272 E-15

ESIB 

Tracking generator - Frequency Converting Measurements 

Frequency-Converting Measurements 

For frequency-converting measurements (eg on converters) the tracking generator is able to set a 

constant frequency offset between the output frequency of the tracking generator and the receive 

frequency of the instrument. Up to an output frequency of 200 MHz the measurement can be carried out 

in inverted and normal position. 

GEN OUTPUT 

RF INPUT 

DUT 

Fig. 4-27 

Test setup for frequency-converting measurements 


FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 

The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the entry of the frequency 

offset between the output frequency of the tracking generator and the input 

frequency of the instrument. The setting range is ±200 MHz in 1-Hz steps. 

The default setting is 0 Hz. 

If a positive frequency offset is entered, the tracking generator generates 

an output signal frequency above the receive frequency of the instrument. 

With a negative frequency offset it generates a signal frequency below the 

receive frequency of the instrument. The output frequency of the tracking 

generator is calculated as follows: 

Tracking generator frequency = receive frequency + frequency offset. 

A frequency offset cannot be entered if an external I/Q or FM modulation is 

switched on. In this case, the FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey is blocked. 


:SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet 

1088.7531.12 4.273 E-15

External Modulation - Tracking generator 

ESIB 

External Modulation of Tracking Generator 


MODULATION 

MODULATION 

EXT AM 

EXT ALC 

EXT FM 

EXT I/Q 

The MODULATION softkey opens a submenu for 

selecting the different modulation types. 

The time characteristic of the output signal of the tracking 

generator can be varied by applying external signals (input 

voltage range -1 V to +1 V). 

The functions for amplitude and frequency modulation and 

for external level control are always available. 

The function IQ modulation is only available in models of 

tracking generators that are equipped with the IQ 

modulator (FSE-B9 and FSE-B11). 

Two BNC connectors at the rear panel are available as 

signal inputs. Their function changes depending on 

selected modulation type: 

TG-INPUT I / AM / ALC and 

TG-INPUT Q / FM 

The types of modulation can partly be combined with each other and with the frequency offset function. 

The following table shows which modulation types can be selected simultaneously and which can be 

combined with the frequency offset function. 

Table 4-2 

Simultaneous modulation types (tracking generator) 

Modulation 

Frequency 

offset 

EXT AM EXT ALC EXT FM EXT I/Q 

Frequency offset • • • 

EXT AM • • 

EXT ALC 

• 

EXT FM • • 

EXT I/Q 

• modulations can be combined 

1088.7531.12 4.274 E-15

ESIB 

Tracking generator - External modulation 

EXT AM 

The EXT AM softkey activates AM modulation of the tracking generator 

output signal. 

The modulation signal is connected to the TG-INPUT AM connector. The 

maximum possible modulation depth is 80% which corresponds to an input 

voltage of 0.8 V. 

Switching on external AM deactivates the following functions: 

– active external level control 

– active I/Q modulation. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :SOURce:AM:STATe ON | OFF 

EXT ALC 

The EXT ALC softkey activates the external level control. 

In case of external level control the output level of the tracking generator is 

determined from the signal of an external detector. The external detector 

has to supply a negative voltage in the range of -0.1 to -1 V which is applied 

to the TG-INPUT ALC connector. The setting of the output level is the same 

as that of the internal level control but the output level depends on the 

external detector. 

Switching on an external level control deactivates the following functions: 

– active external AM 


IEC/IEEE bus command :SOURce:POWer:ALC:SOURce INT | EXT 

EXT FM 

The EXT FM softkey activates FM modulation of the tracking generator 

output signal. 

The modulation frequency range is 1 kHz to 100 kHz, the deviation is 

approx. 1 MHz at an input voltage of 1 V. 

The modulation signal is connected to the TG-INPUT FM connector. 

Switching on external FM deactivates the following function: 


IEC/IEEE bus command :SOURce:FM:STATe ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.275 E-15

External Modulation - Tracking generator 

ESIB 

EXT I/Q 

The EXT I/Q softkey is only offered with I/Q modulator option built-in. It 

activates external I/Q modulation of the tracking generator (FSE-B9 and 

FSE B-11). 

The modulation signals are connected to the two input connectors TG- 

INPUT IN and TG-INPUT Q at the rear of the unit. The input voltage range 

is ±1 V into 50 Ω. 

Switching on external I/Q modulation deactivates the following functions: 

– active external AM 

– active external level control 

– active external FM or 

– a level offset. 

Functional description of quadrature modulator: 

I channel 

RF IN 

0° 

I mod 

RF OUT 

90° 

Q channel 

Fig. 4-28 

I/Q modulation 

Q mod 

I/Q modulation is performed by means of the built-in quadrature modulator. 

The RF signal is divided into the two orthogonal components, I and Q 

(inphase and quadrature phase). Amplitude and phase are controlled in 

each path by the I and Q modulation signal. Adding the two components 

generates an RF output signal whose amplitude and phase can be 

controlled. 

IEC/IEEE bus command :SOURce:DM:STATe ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 4.276 E-15

ESIB 

Contents - Remote Control - Basics 

Contents - Chapter 5 "Remote Control - "Basics" 

5 Remote Control - Basics..................................................................................... 5.1 

Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 5.1 

Brief Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 5.2 

Switchover to Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 5.2 

Indications during Remote Control .......................................................................................... 5.2 

Remote Control via IEC Bus.................................................................................................... 5.3 

Setting the Device Address ........................................................................................... 5.3 

Return to Manual Operation .......................................................................................... 5.3 

Remote Control via RS-232-Interface ..................................................................................... 5.4 

Setting the Transmission Parameters ........................................................................... 5.4 


Limitations .....................................................................................................................5.4 

Remote Control via RSIB Interface ......................................................................................... 5.5 

Windows Environment .................................................................................................. 5.5 

Unix Enviroment ............................................................................................................ 5.5 

Remote Control ............................................................................................................. 5.5 


Messages.......................................................................................................................................... 5.6 

IEE/IEEE-Bus Interface Messages.......................................................................................... 5.6 

RSIB Interface Messages........................................................................................................ 5.6 

Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) ........................................................ 5.7 

Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages ............................................................................. 5.8 

SCPI Introduction..................................................................................................................... 5.8 

Structure of a Command ......................................................................................................... 5.8 

Structure of a Command Line................................................................................................ 5.11 

Responses to Queries ........................................................................................................... 5.11 

Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 5.12 

Overview of Syntax Elements................................................................................................ 5.13 

Instrument Model and Command Processing ............................................................................ 5.14 

Input Unit ............................................................................................................................... 5.14 

Command Recognition .......................................................................................................... 5.15 

Data Set and Instrument Hardware ....................................................................................... 5.15 

Status Reporting System ....................................................................................................... 5.15 

Output Unit............................................................................................................................. 5.16 

Command Sequence and Command Synchronization.......................................................... 5.16 

Status Reporting System .............................................................................................................. 5.17 

Structure of an SCPI Status Register .................................................................................... 5.17 

Overview of the Status Registers .......................................................................................... 5.19 

Description of the Status Registers ....................................................................................... 5.20 

Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)................................ 5.20 

IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)....................................................... 5.21 

Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE)..................... 5.21 

STATus:OPERation Register ...................................................................................... 5.22 

STATus:QUEStionable Register ................................................................................. 5.23 

STATus QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register ................................................................. 5.24 

1088.7531.12 I-5.1 E-1

Contents - Remote Control - Basics 

ESIB 

STATus QUEStionable:FREQuency Register............................................................. 5.25 

STATus QUEStionable:LIMit Register ........................................................................ 5.26 

STATus QUEStionable:LMARgin Register ................................................................. 5.27 

STATus QUEStionable:POWer Register .................................................................... 5.28 

STATus QUEStionable:SYNC Register ...................................................................... 5.29 

STATus QUEStionable:TRANsducer Register ........................................................... 5.30 

Application of the Status Reporting Systems......................................................................... 5.31 

Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure........................................... 5.31 

Serial Poll .................................................................................................................... 5.31 

Parallel Poll.................................................................................................................. 5.32 

Query by Means of Commands................................................................................... 5.32 

Error-Queue Query...................................................................................................... 5.32 

Resetting Values of the Status Reporting System................................................................. 5.33 

1088.7531.12 I-5.2 E-1

ESIB 

Introduction 

5 Remote Control - Basics 

In this chapter you find: 

• instructions how to put the ESIB into operation via remote control, 

• a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments. This includes the description 

of the command structure and syntax according to the SCPI standard, the description of command 

execution and of the status registers, 

• diagrams and tables describing the status registers used in the ESIB. 

In chapter 6, all remote control functions are described in detail. The subsystems are listed by 

alphabetical order according to SCPI. All commands and their parameters are listed by alphabetical 

order in the command list at the end of chapter 6. 

Program examples for the ESIB can be found in chapter 7. 

The remote control interfaces and their interface functions are described in chapter 8. 

Introduction 

The instrument is equipped with an IEC-bus interface according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.2 and 

two RS-232 interfaces. The connector is located at the rear of the instrument and permits to connect a 

controller for remote control. 

The internal controller function may also be used as a controller (see chapter 1, section "Controller 

function). 

In addition, the instrument is equipped with an RSIB interface that allows instrument control by Visual 

C++ and Visual Basic programs 

The instrument supports the SCPI version 1994.0 (Standard Commands for Programmable 

Instruments). The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of 

device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers (see section "SCPI Introduction"). 

This section assumes basic knowledge of IEC-bus programming and operation of the controller. A 

description of the interface commands is to be obtained from the relevant manuals. The RSIB interface 

functions are matched to the function interface for IEC/IEEE-bus programming from National 

Instruments. The functions supported by the DLLs are listed in chapter 8. 

The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax, error handling and configuration of 

the status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections. Tables provide a fast overview of 

the commands implemented in the instrument and the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables 

are supplemented by a comprehensive description of every command and the status registers. Detailed 

program examples of the main functions are to be found in chapter 7. 

The program examples for IEC-bus programming are all written in Quick BASIC. 

1088.7531.12 5.1 E-16

Brief Instructions 

ESIB 

Brief Instructions 

The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the 

instrument and setting of its basic functions. As a prerequisite, the IEC-bus address, which is factory-set 

to 20, must not have been changed. 

1. Connect instrument and controller using IEC-bus cable. 

2. Write and start the following program on the controller: 

CALL IBFIND("DEV1", receiver%) 

CALL IBPAD(receiver%, 20) 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "*RST;*CLS") 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, ’FREQ:CENT 100MHz’) 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, ’INP:ATT 30DB’) 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, ’DET:REC AVER’) 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, ’*TRG’) 

’Open port to the instrument 

’Inform controller about instrument address 

’Reset instrument 

’Set receiver frequency to 100 MHz 

’Set RF attenuation to 30 dB 

’Select average detector 

’Start level measurement 

The receiver measures the level at 100 MHz. 

3. To return to manual control, press the LOCAL key at the front panel 

Switchover to Remote Control 

On power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state ("LOCAL" state) and can be 

operated via the front panel. 

It is switched to remote control ("REMOTE" state) 

IEC-bus as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller. 

RS-232 

as soon as it receives the command ’@REM’ from a controller. 

RSIB 

as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller. 

During remote control, operation via the front panel is disabled. The instrument remains in the remote 

state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via remote control interfaces. Switching 

from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument 

settings. 

Indications during Remote Control 

Remote control mode is indicated by the LED "REMOTE" on the instrument’s front panel. In this mode 

the softkeys, the function fields and the diagram labelling on the display are not shown. 

Note: 

Command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON activates all indications during remote control to 

check the instrument settings. 

1088.7531.12 5.2 E-16

ESIB 


Remote Control via IEC Bus 

Setting the Device Address 

In order to operate the instrument via the IEC-bus, it must be addressed using the set IEC-bus address. 

The IEC-bus address of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually in the SETUP - 

GENERAL SETUP menu or via IEC bus. Addresses 0 to 31 are permissible. 

Manually: 

½ Call SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu 

½ Enter desired address in table GPIB ADDRESS 

½ Terminate input using one of the unit keys (=ENTER). 

Via IEC bus: 




’Inform controller about old address 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18")’Set instrument to new address 


’Inform controller about new address 

Return to Manual Operation 

Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC bus. 


½ Press the LOCAL key. 

Notes: – Before switchover, command processing must be completed as 

otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately. 

– The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command LLO 

(see chapter 8) in order to prevent unintentional switchover. In 

this case, switchover to manual mode is only possible via the IEC 

bus. 

– The LOCAL key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN 

line of the IEC bus (see chapter 8). 

Via IEC bus: ... 

CALL IBLOC(receiver%) 

... 

’Set instrument to manual operation. 

1088.7531.12 5.3 E-16


ESIB 

Remote Control via RS-232-Interface 

Setting the Transmission Parameters 

To enable an error-free and correct data transmission, the parameters of the unit and the controller 

should have the same setting. Parameters can be manually changed in menu SETUP-GENERAL 

SETUP in table COM PORT 1/2 or via remote control using the command 

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1|2:... . 

The transmission parameters of the interfaces COM1 and COM2 are factory-set to the following values: 

baudrate = 9600, data bits = 8, stop bits = 1, parity = NONE and owner = INSTRUMENT. 


Setting interface COM1|2 

½ Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu 

½ Select desired baudrate, bits, stopbit, parity in table COM PORT 1/2. 

½ Terminate input using one of the unit keys (=ENTER). 


Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or via RS-232 interface. 



Notes: Before switchover, command processing must be completed as 


– The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command LLO 

(see chapter 8) in order to prevent unintentional switchover. In this 

case, switchover to manual mode is only possible via remote 

control. 

– The LOCAL key can be enabled again by sending the control 

codes "@LOC" via RS-232 (see chapter 8). 

Via RS-232: ... 

V24puts(port, ’@LOC’); Set instrument to manual operation. 

... 

Limitations 

The following limitations apply if the unit is remote-controlled via the RS-232-C interface: 

− No interface messages, some control codes are defined (see chapter 8). 

− Only the Common Commands *OPC? can be used for command synchronization, *WAI and *OPC 

are not available. 

− Block data cannot be transmitted. 

When Windows NT is booted, data are output via the COM interface because of automatic external 

device recognition. Therefore, it is recommended to clear the input buffer of the controller before remote 

operation of the instrument via the COM interface. 

1088.7531.12 5.4 E-16

ESIB 


Remote Control via RSIB Interface 

Windows Environment 

To access the measuring instruments via the RSIB interface the DLLs should be installed in the 

corresponding directories: 

•RSIB.DLL in Windows NT system directory or control application directory. 

• RSIB32.DLL in Windows NT system32 directory or control application directory. 

On the measuring instrument the DLL is already installed in the corresponding directory. 

Unix Enviroment 

In order to access the measuring equipment via the RSIB interface, copy the librsib.so.X.Y file to a 

directory for which the control application has read rights. X.Y in the file name indicates the version 

number of the library, for example 1.0 (for details see Chapter 8). 

Remote Control 

The control is performed with Visual C++ or Visual Basic programs. The local link to the internal 

controller is established with the name ’@local. If a remote controller is used, the instrument IP address 

is to be indicated here. 

Via VisualBasic: internal controller: ud = RSDLLibfind (’@local’, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

remote controller: ud = RSDLLibfind (’82.1.1.200’, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 


The return to manual operation can be performed via the front panel (LOCAL key) or the RSIB interface. 



Note: 

Before switchover, command processing must be completed as 


Via RSIB: ... 

ud = RSDLLibloc (ud, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl); 

... 

1088.7531.12 5.5 E-16

Messages 

ESIB 

Messages 

The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus or the RSIB interface (see chapter 8) can be 

divided into two groups: 

– interface messages and 

– device messages. 

Some control characters are defined for the control of the RS-232-interface (see chapter 8). 

IEE/IEEE-Bus Interface Messages 

Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line being active. 

They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a 

controller which has the IEC-bus control. Interface commands can be subdivided into 

– universal commands and 

– addressed commands. 

Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC bus without previous addressing, 

addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners. The interface messages 

relevant to the instrument are listed in chapter 8. 

RSIB Interface Messages 

The RSIB interface enables the instrument to be controlled by Visual C++ or Visual Basic programs. The 

interface functions are matched to the function interface for IEC/IEEE-bus programming from National 

Instruments. 

The functions supported by interface are listed in chapter 8. 

1088.7531.12 5.6 E-16

ESIB 

Messages 

Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) 

Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line not being 

active. ASCII code is used. The device messages are more or less equal for the different interfaces. 

A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent on the IEC bus: 

– Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the device 

functions and request informations. 

The commands are subdivided according to two criteria:: 

1. According to the effect they have on the instrument: 

Setting commands 

cause instrument settings such as reset of the 

instrument or setting the center frequency. 

Queries 

cause data to be provided for output on the IEC-bus, 

e.g. for identification of the device or polling the 

marker. 

2. According to their definition in standard IEEE 488.2: 

Common Commands 

Device-specific 

commands 

are exactly defined as to their function and 

notation in standard IEEE 488.2. They refer to 

functions such as management of the standar-dized 

status registers, reset and selftest. 

refer to functions depending on the features of the 

instrument such as frequency setting. A majority of 

these commands has also been standardized by the 

SCPI committee (cf. Section 3.5.1). 

– Device responses are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can 

contain measurement results, instrument settings and information on the 

instrument status (cf. Section 3.5.4). 

Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in the following section. The commands are 

listed and explained in detail in chapter 6. 

1088.7531.12 5.7 E-16

Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 

ESIB 


SCPI Introduction 

SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard command set for 

programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI 

consortium is to standardize the device-specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose, a model 

was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices. Command 

systems were generated which are assigned to these functions. Thus it is possible to address the same 

functions with identical commands. The command systems are of a hierarchical structure. 

Fig. 5-1 illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SENSe, which controls the 

sensor functions of the devices. 

SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488.2, i.e. it uses the same syntactic basic elements as well as the 

common commands defined in this standard. Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined with 

greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488.2 (see Section "Responses to Queries"). 

Structure of a Command 

The commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. Header and 

parameter are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The 

headers may consist of several key words. Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to 

the header. 

Note: 

The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the 

instrument. 

Common commands Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*" 

and one or several parameters, if any. 

Examples: *RST RESET, resets the device 

*ESE 253 

EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of the 

event status enable register 

*ESR? EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the 

contents of the event status register. 

1088.7531.12 5.8 E-16

ESIB 


Device-specific commands 

Hierarchy: 

Device-specific commands are of hierarchical structure (see 

Fig. 5-1). The different levels are represented by combined headers. 

Headers of the highest level (root level) have only one key word. This 

key word denotes a complete command system. 

Example: SENSe This key word denotes the command system 

SENSe. 

For commands of lower levels, the complete path has to be specified, 

starting on the left with the highest level, the individual key words being 

separated by a colon ":". 

Example: SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN:LINK STARt 

This command lies in the fourth level of the SENSe system. It 

determines which parameter remains unchanged when the span is 

changed. If LINK is set to STARt, the values of CENTer and STOP are 

adjusted when the span is changed. 

SENSe 

BANDwidth FUNCtion FREQuency 

DETector 

STARt 

STOP CENTer SPAN OFFSet 

HOLD 

LINK 

Fig. 5-1 Tree structure the SCPI command systems using the SENSe system by way of example 

Some key words occur in several levels within one command system. Their 

effect depends on the structure of the command, that is to say, at which 

position in the header of a command they are inserted. 

Example: 

SOURce:FM:POLarity NORMal 

This command contains key word POLarity in the third 

command level. It defines the polarity between modulator and 

modulation signal. 

SOURce:FM:EXTernal:POLarity NORMal 

This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth 

command level. It defines the polarity between modulation 

voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the 

external signal source indicated. 

1088.7531.12 5.9 E-16


ESIB 

Optional key words: 

Long and short form: 

Parameter: 

Numeric suffix: 

Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted 

into the header or omitted. These key words are marked by square 

brackets in the description. The full command length must be recognized 

by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard. 

Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words. 

Example: 

Note: 

[SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO 

This command couples the resolution bandwidth of the 

instrument to other parameters. The following command has 

the same effect: 

BANDwidth:AUTO 

An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified 

in detail by a numeric suffix. 

The key words feature a long form and a short form. Either the short form 

or the long form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permissible. 

Beispiel: STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1= STAT:QUES:ENAB 1 

Note: 

The short form is marked by upper-case letters, the long form 

corresponds to the complete word. Upper-case and lower-case 

notation only serve the above purpose, the instrument itself 

does not make any difference between upper-case and lowercase 

letters. 

The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If 

several parameters are specified in a command, they are separated by a 

comma ",". A few queries permit the parameters MINimum, MAXimum and 

DEFault to be entered. For a description of the types of parameter, refer to 

Section 3.5.5. 

Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAXimum Response: 3.5E9 

This query requests the maximal value for the stop frequency. 

If a device features several functions or features of the same kind, e.g. 

inputs, the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command. 

Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1. 

Example:. SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD 9600 

This command sets the baudrate of the second serial interface. 

1088.7531.12 5.10 E-16

ESIB 


Structure of a Command Line 

A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by a , a with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte. Quick BASIC automatically produces an EOI 

together with the last data byte. 

Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs 

to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. 

Example: 

CALL IBWRT(receiver, "SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 100MHz;:INPut:ATTenuation 10") 

This command line contains two commands. The first command is part of the SENSe 

system and is used to specify the center frequency of the analyzer. The second command 

is part of the INPut system and sets the attenuation of the input signal. 

If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the 

command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command after the semicolon starts with the 

level that lies below the common levels (see also Fig. 5-1). The colon following the semicolon must be 

omitted in this case. 

Example: 

CALL IBWRT(receiver, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1E9") 

This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated 

from each other by the semicolon. Both commands are part of the SENSe command 

system, subsystem FREQuency, i.e. they have two common levels. 

When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below 

SENSe:FREQuency. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. 

The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows: 

CALL IBWRT(receiver, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;STOP 1E9") 

However, a new command line always begins with the complete path. 

Example: CALL IBWRT(receiver, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6") 

CALL IBWRT(receiver, "SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1E9") 

Responses to Queries 

A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding 

a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are 

partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2. 

1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header. 

Example: INPut:COUPling? Response: DC 

2. Maximum values, minimum values and all further quantities, which are requested via a special text 

parameter are returned as numerical values. 

Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX Response: 3.5E9 

3. Numerical values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the 

units set using the Unit command. 

Example: SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? Response: 1E6 for 1 MHz 

4. Truth values are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON). 

Example: SENSe:BANDwidth:AUTO? Response: 1 for ON 

5. Text (character data) is returned in a short form (see also Section 3.5.5). 

Example: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS? Response(for standard): STAN 

1088.7531.12 5.11 E-16


ESIB 

Parameters 

Most commands require a parameter to be specified. The parameters must be separated from the 

header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, 

character strings and block data. The type of parameter required for the respective command and the 

permissible range of values are specified in the command description (see Section 3.6). 

Numerical values 

Special numerical 

Numerical values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and 

exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or 

down. The value range is -9.9E37 to 9.9E37. The exponent is introduced by an 

"E" or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not permissible. In the case of 

physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Permissible unit prefixes are G 

(giga), MA (mega), MOHM and MHZ are also permissible), K (kilo), M (milli), U 

(micro) and N (nano). It the unit is missing, the basic unit is used. 

Example: 

SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1.5E9 

The texts MINimum, MAXimum, DEFault, UP and DOWN are interpreted as 

valuesspecial numerical values. 

In the case of a query, the numerical value is provided. 

Example: Setting command: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP MAXimum 

Query: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? Response: 3.5E9 

MIN/MAX 

DEF 

UP/DOWN 

INF/NINF 

NAN 

Boolean Parameters 

MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value. 

DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This 

value conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command 

UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step. The step 

width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter 

which can be set via UP, DOWN. 

INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the 

numerical values -9.9E37 or 9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent 

as device reponses. 

Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as 

device response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division by 

zero, the subtraction/addition of infinite and the representation of undefined 

values. 

Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is 

represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0. The OFF state (logically 

untrue) is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0. 0 or 1 is provided in a 

query. 

Example: Setting command: DISPlay:WINDow:STATe ON 

Query: DISPlay:WINDow:STATe? Response: 1 

1088.7531.12 5.12 E-16

ESIB 


Text 

Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words, i.e. they can be 

entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be 

separated from the header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short 

form of the text is provided. 

Example: Setting command: INPut:COUPling GROund 

Query: INPut:COUPling? Response GRO 

Strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (’ or "). 

Example: SYSTem:LANGuage "SCPI" or 

SYSTem:LANGuage ’SCPI’ 

Block data 

Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of 

large amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the 

following structure: 

Example: HEADer:HEADer #45168xxxxxxxx 

ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how 

many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example 

the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. 

During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are 

ignored until all bytes are transmitted.. 

Overview of Syntax Elements 

The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements. 

: 

The colon separates the key words of a command. 

In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost 

command level. 

; 

, 

? 

The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. 

It does not alter the path. 

The comma separates several parameters of a command. 

The question mark forms a query. 

* 

" 

’ 

# 

The asterisk marks a common command. 

Double or single quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it. 

The double dagger # introduces block data. 

A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates 

header and parameter. 

1088.7531.12 5.13 E-16

Instrument Model and Command Processing 

ESIB 


The instrument model shown in Fig. 5-2 has been made viewed from the standpoint of the servicing of 

IEC-bus commands. The individual components work independently of each other and simultaneously. 

They communicate by means of so-called "messages". 

IEC Bus 

Input unit with 

input puffer 

Command 

recognition 

Data set 

Instrument 

hardware 

Status reportingsystem 

IEC Bus 

Output unit with 

output buffer 

Fig. 5-2 Instrument model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus 

Input Unit 

The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC bus and collects them in the 

input buffer. The input buffer has a size of 256 characters. The input unit sends a message to the 

command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter, 

, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. 

If the input buffer is full, the IEC-bus traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are processed. 

Subsequently the IEC-bus traffic is continued. If, however, the buffer is not yet full when receiving the 

delimiter, the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and 

execution. The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the 

command recognition. 

1088.7531.12 5.14 E-16

ESIB 


Command Recognition 

The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit. It proceeds in the order in 

which it receives the data. Only a DCL is serviced with priority, a GET (Group Execute Trigger), e.g., is 

only executed after the commands received before as well. Each recognized command is immediately 

transferred to the data set but without being executed there at once. 

Syntactical errors in the command are recognized here and supplied to the status reporting system. The 

rest of a command line after a syntax error is analysed further if possible and serviced. 

If the command recognition recognizes a delimiter or a DCL, it requests the data set to set the 

commands in the instrument hardware as well now. Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process 

commands again. This means for the command servicing that further commands can already be 

serviced while the hardware is still being set ("overlapping execution"). 

Data Set and Instrument Hardware 

Here the expression "instrument hardware" denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual 

instrument function - signal generation, measurement etc. The controller is not included. 

The instrument data base is a detailed reproduction of the instrument hardware in the software. 

IEC-bus setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set. The data base management enters the 

new values (e.g. frequency) into the data base, however, only passes them on to the hardware when 

requested by the command recognition. 

The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware 

immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware. If the detection is made that an 

execution is not possible, an "execution error" is signalled to the status reporting system. The alteration 

of the data base are cancelled, the instrument hardware is not reset. 

IEC-bus queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit. 

Status Reporting System 

The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the 

output unit on request. The exact structure and function are described in the following section. 

1088.7531.12 5.15 E-16


ESIB 

Output Unit 

The output unit collects the information requested by the controller, which it receives from the data set 

management. It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer. 

The output buffer has a size of 4096 characters. If the information requested is longer, it is made 

available "in portions" without this being recognized by the controller. 

If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from 

the data set management, the output unit sends error message "Query UNTERMINATED" to the status 

reporting system. No data are sent on the IEC bus, the controller waits until it has reached its time limit. 

This behaviour is specified by SCPI. 

Command Sequence and Command Synchronization 

What has been said above makes clear that all commands can potentially be carried out overlapping. 

Equally, setting commands within one command line are not absolutely serviced in the order in which 

they have been received. 

In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order, each command must 

be sent in a separate command line, that is to say, with a separate IBWRT()-call. 

In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI 

must be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has 

been set and has settled. By a suitable programming, the contoller can be forced to wait for the 

respective action to occur (cf. Table 5-1). 

Table 5-1 Synchronisation using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI 

Commnd Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller 

*OPC Setting the opteration-complete bit in the ESR - Setting bit 0 in the ESE 

- Setting bit 5 in the SRE 

- Waiting for service request (SRQ) 

*OPC? Writing a "1" into the output buffer Addressing the instrument as a talker 

*WAI Continuing the IEC-bus handshake Sending the next command 

An example as to command synchronization can be found in chapter 7 "Program Examples". 

1088.7531.12 5.16 E-16

ESIB 



The status reporting system (cf. Fig. 5-3) stores all information on the present operating state of the 

instrument, e.g. that the instrument presently carries out an AUTORANGE and on errors which have 

occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The status registers 

and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus. 

The information is of a hierarchical structure. The register status byte (STB) defined in IEEE 488.2 and 

its associated mask register service request enable (SRE) form the uppermost level. The STB receives 

its information from the standard event status register (ESR) which is also defined in IEEE 488.2 with 

the associated mask register standard event status enable (ESE) and registers STATus:OPERation and 

STATus:QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument. 

The IST flag ("Individual STatus") and the parallel poll enable register (PPE) allocated to it are also part 

of the status reporting system. The IST flag, like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a 

single bit. The PPE fulfills an analog function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request. 

The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the 

status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in 

Fig. 5-3. 

Table 5-12 at the end of this chapter comprises the different commands and events causing the status 

reporting system to be reset. 

Structure of an SCPI Status Register 

Each SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions 

(cf. Fig. 5-2). The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each hardware status is assigned a 

bit number which is valid for all five parts. For example, bit 3 of the STATus:OPERation register is 

assigned to the hardware status "wait for trigger" in all five parts. Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is set to 

zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive 

integer. 

15 14 13 12 CONDition part 3 2 1 0 

15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 3 2 1 0 

15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 0 

15 14 13 12 EVENt part 3 2 1 0 

to higher-order register 

& & & & & & & & & & & & & & & & 

+ 

Sum bit 

& = logical AND 

15 14 13 12 ENABle part 3 2 1 0 

+ 

= logical OR 

of all bits 

Fig. 5-2 The status-register model 

1088.7531.12 5.17 E-16


ESIB 

CONDition part 

PTRansition part 

NTRansition part 

EVENt part 

ENABle part 

Sum bit 

The CONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of 

the next lower register. Its contents reflects the current instrument status. This 

register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents is 

not affected by reading. 

The Positive-TRansition part acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the 

CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides 

whether the EVENt bit is set to 1. 

PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set. 

PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set. 

This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by 

reading. 

The Negative-TRansition part also acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the 

CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides 

whether the EVENt bit is set to 1. 

NTR-Bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set. 

NTR-Bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set. 

This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by 

reading. 

With these two edge register parts the user can define which state transition of 

the condition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part. 

The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last 

reading, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events 

passed on by the edge filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. 

This part can only be read by the user. During reading, its contents is set to 

zero. In linguistic usage this part is often equated with the entire register. 

The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to 

the sum bit (cf. below). Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the 

associated ENABle bit (symbol ’&’). The results of all logical operations of this 

part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function (symbol ’+’). 

ENABle-Bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit 

ENABle-Bit = 1: if the associated EVENT bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as 

well. 

This part can be written into and read by the user at will. Its contents is not 

affected by reading. 

As indicated above, the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part 

for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of 

the higher-order register. 

The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an 

event, e.g. a PLL that has not locked, can lead to a service request throughout 

all levels of the hierarchy. 

Note: 

The service request enable register SRE defined in IEEE 488.2 can be taken as ENABle 

part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be 

taken as the ENABle part of the ESR. 

1088.7531.12 5.18 E-16

ESIB 


Overview of the Status Registers 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

not used 

Subrange limit attained 

Subrange 10 

Subrange 9 

Subrange 8 

Subrange 7 

Subrange 6 

Subrange 5 

Subrange 4 

Subrange 3 

Subrange 2 

Subrange 1 

STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer 

SRE 

PPE 

& = logical AND 

= logical OR of all bits 

SRQ 

IST flag 

Fig. 5-3 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

STB 

Error/event 

queue 

RQS/MSS 

ESB 

MAV 

Output 

buffer 

ESE 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

-&- 

not used 

PROGram running 

INSTrument summary bit 

Scan results available 

HCOPy in progress 

CORRecting 

WAIT for ARM 

WAIT for TRIGGER 

MEASuring 

SWEeping 

RANGing 

SETTling 

CALibrating 

STATus:OPERation 

not used 

COMMand warning 

TRANsducer break 

ACPLimit 

SYNC 

LMARgin 

LIMit 

CALibration (= UNCAL) 

MODulation 

PHASe 

FREQuency 

TEMPerature 

POWer 

TIME 

CURRent 

VOLTage 

STATus:QUEStionable 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

ESR 

Power on 

User Request 

Command Error 

Execution Error 

Device Dependent Error 

Query Error 

Request Control 

Operation Complete 

Overview of the status registers 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

not used 

ALT2 LOWer FAIL (screen B) 

ALT2 UPPer FAIL (screen B) 

ALT1 LOWer FAIL (screen B) 

ALT1 UPPer FAIL (screen B) 

ADJ LOWer FAIL (screen B) 

ADJ UPPer FAIL (screen B) 

ALT2 LOWer FAIL (screen A) 

ALT2 UPPer FAIL (screen A) 

ALT1 LOWer FAIL (screen A) 

ALT1 UPPer FAIL (screen A) 

ADJ LOWer FAIL (screen A) 

ADJ UPPer FAIL (screen A) 

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit 

not used 

LMARgin 8 FAIL 








STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin 

not used 

LO LEVel (screen B) 

LO UNLocked (screen B) 

LO LEVel (screen A) 

LO UNLocked (screen A)b 

OVEN COLD 

STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

15 not used 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 LIMit 8 FAIL 








0 

STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

not used 

SYNC not found 

BURSt not found 

STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC 

not used 

IF_OVerload (screen B) 

UNDerload Option B7 (screen B) 

OVERload (screen B) 

IF_OVerload (screen A) 

UNDerload Option B7 (screen A) 

OVERload (screen A) 

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer 

1088.7531.12 5.19 E-16


ESIB 

Description of the Status Registers 

Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) 

The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by 

collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. It can thus be compared with the CONDition 

part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy. A special feature is 

that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte. 

The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command "*STB?" or a serial poll. 

The STB implies the SRE. It corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers as to its function. 

Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE 

and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a Service Request (SRQ) is generated on the 

IEC bus, which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further 

processed there. 

The SRE can be set using command "*SRE" and read using "*SRE?". 

Table 5-2 

Meaning of the bits in the status byte 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

2 Error Queue not empty 

The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. 

If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request. Thus an error can 

be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error 

message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with IECbus 

control. 

3 QUEStionable status sum bit 

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable-Status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 

1. 

A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by polling the 

QUEStionable-Status register. 

4 MAV bit (message available) 

The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read. 

This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller (cf. chapter 7, 

program examples). 

5 ESB bit 

Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in 

the event status enable register. 

Setting of this bit implies an error or an event which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status 

register. 

6 MSS bit (master status summary bit) 

The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers 

is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE. 

7 OPERation status register sum bit 

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation-Status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1. 

A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The type of action can be determined by 

polling the OPERation-status register. 

1088.7531.12 5.20 E-16

ESIB 


IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) 

By analogy with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can be 

queried by means of a parallel poll or using command "*IST?". 

The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag. The 

bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE, with bit 6 being used as well in 

contrast to the SRE. The Ist flag results from the ORing of all results. The PPE can be set using 

commands "*PRE" and read using command "*PRE?". 

Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE) 

The ESR is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of an SCPI register. 

The event status register can be read out using command "*ESR?". 

The ESE is the associated ENABle part. It can be set using command "*ESE" and read using command 

"*ESE?". 

Table 5-3 

Meaning of the bits in the event status register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

0 Operation Complete 

This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed. 

1 Request Control 

This bit is set if the instrument requests the controller function. This is the case when hardcopy is outputted to a 

printer or a plotter via the IEC-bus. 

2 Query Error 

This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having send a query, or if it 

does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead. The cause is often a query 

which is faulty and hence cannot be executed. 

3 Device-dependent Error 

This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between -300 and -399 or a 

positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue (cf. chapter 9, 

Error Messages). 

4 Execution Error 

This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, however, cannot be performed for other reasons. 

An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered 

into the error queue (cf. chapter 9, Error Messages). 

5 Command Error 

This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received. An error message with a 

number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the rror queue (cf. 

chapter 9, -Error Messages). 

6 User Request 

This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key. 

7 Power On (supply voltage on) 

This bit is set on switching on the instrument. 

1088.7531.12 5.21 E-16


ESIB 

STATus:OPERation Register 

In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being 

executing or, in the EVENt part, information on which actions the instrument has executed since the last 

reading. It can be read using commands "STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or "STATus 

:OPERation[:EVENt]?". 

Table 5-4 

Meaning of the bits in the STATus.OPERation register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

0 CALibrating 

This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration. 

1 SETTling 

This bit is set as long as the new status is settling after a setting command. It is only set if the settling time is 

longer than the command processing time. 

2 RANGing 

This bit is set as long as the instrument is changing a range (e.g. Autorange). 

3 SWEeping 

This bit is set while the instrument is performing a sweep. 

4 MEASuring 

This bit is set while the instrument is performing a measurement. 

5 WAIT for TRIGGER 

This bit is set as long as the instrument is waiting for a trigger event. 

6 WAIT for ARM 

This bit is set as long as the instrument is waiting for an arming event. 

7 CORRecting 

This bit is set while the instrument is performing a correction. 

8 HardCOPy in progress 

This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy. 

9 Scan Results available (device dependent) 

This bit is set as soon as a data block is ready for output during a scan. 

10-12 Device dependent 

13 INSTrument Summary Bit 

This bit is set when one or more logical instruments is reporting a status message. 

14 PROGram running 

This bit is set while the instrument is performing a program. 

15 This bit is always 0 

The ESIB supports bits 0 , 8, and 9 . 

1088.7531.12 5.22 E-16

ESIB 


STATus:QUEStionable Register 

This register comprises information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is operated 

without meeting the specifications. It can be queried by commands STATus:QUEStionable: 

CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?. 

Table 5-5 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

0 VOLTage 

This bit is set if a questionable voltage occurs. 

1 CURRent 

This bit is set if a questionable current occurs. 

2 TIME 

This bit is set if a questionable time occurs. 

3 POWer 

This bit is set if a questionable power occurs (cf. also section "STATus:QUEStionable:POWerRegister") 

4 TEMPerature 

This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs. 

5 FREQuency 

The bit is set if a frequency is questionable (cf. section "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register") 

6 PHASe 

The bit is set if a phase value is questionable. 

7 MODulation 

The bit is set if a modulation is performed questionably. 

8 CALibration 

The bit is set if a measurement is performed uncalibrated (=;^ label "UNCAL") 

9 LIMit (unit-dependent) 

This bit is set if a limit value is violated (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register) 

10 LMARgin (unit-dependent) 

This bit is set if a margin is violated (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register) 

11 SYNC (unit-dependent) 

This bit is set if, during measurements with Option B7 (Signal Vector Analysis), the synchronization with 

midamble or a successful search for bursts cannot be performed (see also STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC 

Register) 

12 ACPLimit (unit-dependent) 

This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated (see also section 

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register) 

13 TRANsducer break 

This bit is set when the limit of the transducer set subrange is attained. 

14 COMMand Warning 

This bit is set if the instrument ignores parameters when executing a command. 

15 This bit is always 0. 

The ESIB supports bits 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 and 13, bits 7 (MODulation) and 11 (SYNC) only with 

option FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis.’. 

1088.7531.12 5.23 E-16


ESIB 

STATus QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register 

This register Tcomprises information about the observance of limits during adjacent power 

measurements. It can be queried with commands ’STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit 

:CONDition?’ and ’STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?’ 

Table 5- 

Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

0 ADJ UPPer FAIL(Screen A) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel. 

1 ADJ LOWer FAIL (Screen A) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel. 

2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL (Screen A) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel. 

3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL (Screen A) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel. 

4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL (Screen A) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel. 


This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel. 

6 not used 

7 not used 

8 ADJ UPPer FAIL (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel. 

9 ADJ LOWer FAIL (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel. 

10 ALT1 UPPer FAIL (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel. 

11 ALT1 LOWer FAIL (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel. 

12 ALT2 UPPer FAIL (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel. 


This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel. 

14 not used 


1088.7531.12 5.24 E-16

ESIB 


STATus QUEStionable:FREQuency Register 

This register comprises information about the reference and local oscillator. 

It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? and "STATus 

:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?. 

Table 5-6 

Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

0 OVEN COLD 

This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. ’OCXO’ will then be 

displayed. 

1 LO UNLocked (Screen A) 

This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. ’LO unl’ will then be displayed. 

2 LO LEVel (Screen A) 

This bit is set if the level of the local oscillator is smaller than the nominal value. ’LO LVL’ will then be displayed. 

3 not used 

4 not used 

5 not used 

6 not used 

7 not used 

8 not used 

9 LO UNLocked (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks.’ LO unl’ will then be displayed. 

10 LO LEVel (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the level of the local oscillator is smaller than the nominal value. ’LO LVL’ will then be displayed. 

11 not used 

12 not used 

13 not used 

14 not used 


1088.7531.12 5.25 E-16


ESIB 

STATus QUEStionable:LIMit Register 

This register comprises information about the observance of limit lines. It can be queried with 

commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit 

[:EVENt]?. 

Table 5-7 

Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 


This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated. 















8 not used 

9 not used 

10 not used 

11 not used 

12 not used 

13 not used 

14 not used 


1088.7531.12 5.26 E-16

ESIB 


STATus QUEStionable:LMARgin Register 

This register comprises information about the observance of limit margins. It can be queried with 

commands STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? and "STATus:QUEStionable 

:LMARgin[:EVENt]?. 

Table 5-8 

Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register 

Bit No. 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

Meaning 


This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated. 















8 not used 

9 not used 

10 not used 

11 not used 

12 not used 

13 not used 

14 not used 


1088.7531.12 5.27 E-16


ESIB 

STATus QUEStionable:POWer Register 

This register comprises all information about possible overloads of the unit. 

It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable :POWer:CONDition? and "STATus 

:QUEStionable:POWer [:EVENt]?. 

Table 5-9 

Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

0 OVERload (Screen A) 

This bit is set if the RF input is overloaded. ’OVLD’ will then be displayed. 

1 UNDerload (Screen A) - Option FSE-B7 

This bit is set if, during measurements in vector analyzer mode without capture buffer used, the lower level limit 

in the IF path is violated. 

2 IF_OVerload (Screen A) 

This bit is set if the IF path is overloaded. ’IFOVLD’ will then be displayed. 

3 not used 

4 not used 

5 not used 

6 not used 

7 not used 

8 OVERload (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the RF input is overloaded. ’OVLD’ will then be displayed. 

9 UNDerload (Screen B) - Option FSE-B7 

This bit is set if, during measurements without capture buffer used, the lower level limit in the IF path is violated. 

10 IF_OVerload (Screen B) 

This bit is set if the IF path is overloaded. ’IFOVLD’ will then be displayed. 

11 not used 

12 not used 

13 not used 

14 not used 


1088.7531.12 5.28 E-16

ESIB 


STATus QUEStionable:SYNC Register 

This register comprises information about sync and burst events related to Vector Analyzer mode, 

option FSE-B7. It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition? and 

"STATus :QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?. 

Table 5-10 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

0 BURSt not found 

This bit is set if a burst was not found. 

1 SYNC not found 

This bit is set if the sync sequence of midamble was not found. 

2 to 14 not used 


1088.7531.12 5.29 E-16


ESIB 

STATus QUEStionable:TRANsducer Register 

This register indicates that a transducer hold point is attained (bit 15) and what range is to be swept next 

(bit 0 to 10). The sweep can be continued with command INITiate2:CONMeasure. 

It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition? and "STATus 

:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]?. 

Table 5-11 

Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register 

Bit No. 

Meaning 

0 

1 

Range 1 

This bit is set when subrange 1 is attained. 

Range 2 


2 Range 3 


3 Range 4 


4 Range 5 


5 Range 6 


6 Range 7 


7 Range 8 


8 Range 9 


9 Range 10 


10 not used 

11 not used 

12 not used 

13 not used 

14 Subrange limit 

This bit is set when the transducer is at the point of changeover from one range to another. 


1088.7531.12 5.30 E-16

ESIB 


Application of the Status Reporting Systems 

In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system, the information contained there must 

be transmitted to the controller and further processed there. There are several methods which are 

represented in the following. Detailed program examples are to be found in chapter 7, Program 

Examples. 

Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure 

Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually 

this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the control program can react with 

corresponding actions. As evident from Fig. 5-3, an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 3, 

4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information 

of a further register, the error queue or the output buffer. The corresponding setting of the ENABle parts 

of the status registers can achieve that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ. In 

order to make use of the possibilities of the service request, all bits should be set to "1" in enable 

registers SRE and ESE. 

Examples (cf. Fig. 5-3 and chapter 7, Program Examples, as well): 

Use of command "*OPC" to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep. 

½ Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation Complete) 

½ Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)? 

After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ. 

The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program 

should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction. The program 

should react appropriately to the service request. A detailed example for a service request routine is to 

be found in chapter 7, Program Examples. 

Serial Poll 

In a serial poll, just as with command "*STB", the status byte of an instrument is queried. However, the 

query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster. The serial-poll method has already 

been defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll 

the status byte. The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2. 

The quick-BASIC command for executing a serial poll is "IBRSP()". Serial poll is mainly used to obtain a 

fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC bus. 

1088.7531.12 5.31 E-16


ESIB 

Parallel Poll 

In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a 

single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated 

to each instrument to logically "0" or "1". By analogy to the SRE register which determines under which 

conditions an SRQ is generated, there is a parallel poll enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the 

STB bit by bit as well considering bit 6. The results are ORed, the result is then sent (possibly inverted) 

as a response in the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried without parallel poll by 

means of command "*IST". 

The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using quick-BASIC command "IBPPC()". This 

command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted. 

The parallel poll itself is executed using "IBRPP()". 

The parallel-poll method is mainly used in order to quickly find out after an SRQ which instrument has 

sent the service request if there are many instruments connected to the IEC bus. To this effect, SRE 

and PPE must be set to the same value. A detailed example as to the parallel poll is to be found in 

chapter 7, Program Examples. 

Query by Means of Commands 

Each part of every status register can be read by means of queries. The individual commands are 

indicated in the detailed description of the registers. What is returned is always a number which 

represents the bit pattern of the register queried. Evaluating this number is effected by the controller 

program. 

Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the 

SRQ. 

Error-Queue Query 

Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the error queue 

are detailed plain-text error messages which can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control 

or queried via the IEC bus using command "SYSTem:ERRor?". Each call of "SYSTem:ERRor?" 

provides an entry from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument 

responds with 0, "No error". 

The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the 

cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller 

program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the 

instrument are recorded there as well. 

1088.7531.12 5.32 E-16

ESIB 


Resetting Values of the Status Reporting System 

Table 5-12 comprises the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be 

reset. None of the commands, except for *RST and SYSTem:PRESet influences the functional 

instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the instrument settings. 

Table 5-12 

Resetting instrument functions 

Event 

Switching on supply 

voltage 

DCL,SDC 

Power-On-Status- 

Clear 

(Device Clear, 

Selected Device 

Clear) 

*RST or 

SYSTem:PRESet 

STATus:PRESet 

*CLS 

Effect 0 1 

Clear STB,ESR ⎯ yes ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ yes 

Clear SRE,ESE ⎯ yes ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 

Clear PPE ⎯ yes ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 

Clear EVENTt parts of the 

registers 

Clear Enable parts of all 

OPERation and 

QUEStionable registers, 

Fill Enable parts of all 

other registers with "1". 

Fill PTRansition parts with 

"1" , 

Clear NTRansition parts 

⎯ yes ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ yes 

⎯ yes ⎯ ⎯ yes ⎯ 

⎯ yes ⎯ ⎯ yes ⎯ 

Clear error queue yes yes ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ yes 

Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1) 

Clear command 

processing and input 

buffer 

yes yes yes ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 

1) Every command being the first in a command line, i.e., immediately following a 

clears the output buffer. 

1088.7531.12 5.33 E-16

ESIB 

Contents - Description of Commands 

Contents - Chapter 6 "Remote Control - Description 

of Commands" 

6 Description of Commands.................................................................................. 6.1 

Notation ............................................................................................................................................ 6.1 

Common Commands....................................................................................................................... 6.4 

ABORt Subsystem ........................................................................................................................... 6.7 

CALCulate Subsystem..................................................................................................................... 6.7 

CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem ..................................................................................... 6.8 

CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem ............................................................................................... 6.14 

CALCulate:FEED Subsystem ................................................................................................ 6.18 

CALCulate:FORMat Subsystem ............................................................................................ 6.19 

CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem.................................................................................................. 6.21 

CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem ............................................................................................ 6.31 

CALCulate:MATH Subsystem ............................................................................................... 6.55 

CALCulate:PEAKsearch - Subsystem ................................................................................... 6.56 

CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.58 

CALibration Subsystem ................................................................................................................ 6.59 

DIAGnostic Subsystem ................................................................................................................. 6.61 

DISPlay Subsystem........................................................................................................................ 6.63 

FORMat Subsystem....................................................................................................................... 6.74 

HCOPy Subsystem ........................................................................................................................ 6.76 

INITiate Subsystem........................................................................................................................ 6.81 

INPut Subsystem ........................................................................................................................... 6.82 

INSTrument Subsystem ................................................................................................................ 6.87 

MMEMory Subsystem.................................................................................................................... 6.89 

OUTPut Subsystem ..................................................................................................................... 6.100 

SENSe Subsystem ....................................................................................................................... 6.102 

SENSe:ADEMod Subsystem............................................................................................... 6.102 

SENSe:AVERage Subsystem ............................................................................................. 6.104 

SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem........................................................................................... 6.106 

SENSe:CORRection-Subsystem......................................................................................... 6.109 

SENSe:DEMod Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.119 

SENSe:DETector Subsystem.............................................................................................. 6.120 

SENSe:DDEMod Subsystem............................................................................................... 6.122 

SENSe:FILTer Subsystem .................................................................................................. 6.130 

SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem.......................................................................................... 6.133 

SENSe:MIXer - Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.137 

SENSe:MSUMmary Subsystem .......................................................................................... 6.140 

SENSe:POWer Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.142 

SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem .......................................................................................... 6.146 

1088.7531.12 I-6.1 E-15

Contents - Description of Commands 

ESIB 

SENSe:SCAN - Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.147 

SENSe:SWEep Subsystem................................................................................................. 6.150 

SOURce Subsystem .................................................................................................................... 6.154 

STATus Subsystem ..................................................................................................................... 6.156 

SYSTem Subsystem .................................................................................................................... 6.167 

TRACe Subsystem....................................................................................................................... 6.174 

TRIGger Subsystem..................................................................................................................... 6.177 

UNIT Subsystem .......................................................................................................................... 6.179 

Alphabetical List of Commands ................................................................................................. 6.180 

Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment ................................................ 6.192 

Basic Instrument - EMI Receiver Mode ............................................................................... 6.192 

CONFIGURATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.192 

FREQUENCY Key Group.......................................................................................... 6.196 

LEVEL Key Group ..................................................................................................... 6.197 

INPUT Key................................................................................................................. 6.198 

MARKER Key Group ................................................................................................. 6.198 

LINES Key Group ...................................................................................................... 6.201 

TRACE Key Group .................................................................................................... 6.202 

SWEEP Key Group ................................................................................................... 6.203 

Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis Mode ............................................................................... 205 

FREQUENCY Key Group............................................................................................. 205 

LEVEL Key Group ........................................................................................................ 207 

INPUT Key.................................................................................................................... 208 

MARKER Key Group .................................................................................................... 209 

LINES Key Group ......................................................................................................... 213 

TRACE Key Group ....................................................................................................... 215 

SWEEP Key Group ...................................................................................................... 216 

Basic Instrument - General Device Settings........................................................................ 6.219 

DATA VARIATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.219 

SYSTEM Key Group.................................................................................................. 6.219 


STATUS Key Group .................................................................................................. 6.225 

HARDCOPY Key Group ............................................................................................ 6.225 

MEMORY Key Group ................................................................................................ 6.226 

USER Key ................................................................................................................. 6.228 

Vector Signal Analysis Mode (Option FSE-B7) ................................................................... 6.229 

CONFIGURATION Key Group- Digital Demodulation............................................... 6.229 

CONFIGURATION Key Group - Analog Demodulation ........................................... 6.233 

FREQUENCY Key Group.......................................................................................... 6.234 

LEVEL Key Group ..................................................................................................... 6.234 

INPUT Key................................................................................................................. 6.236 

MARKER Key Group ................................................................................................. 6.236 

LINES Key Group ...................................................................................................... 6.238 

TRACE Key Group .................................................................................................... 6.240 

SWEEP Key Group ................................................................................................... 6.240 

TRIGGER Key Group - Digital Demodulation .......................................................... 6.241 

TRIGGER Key Group - Analog Demodulation ......................................................... 6.242 

Tracking Generator Mode (Option FSE-B10...B11)............................................................. 6.243 


External Mixer Output (Option FSE-B21) ............................................................................ 6.244 

INPUT Key................................................................................................................. 6.244 

1088.7531.12 I-6.2 E-15

ESIB 

Notation 

6 Description of Commands 

Notation 

In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then 

described in detail, separated according to the command system. The notation corresponds to the one 

of the SCPI standards to a large extent. The SCPI conformity information can be taken from the 

individual description of the commands. 

Table of Commands 

Command: 

In the command column, the table provides an overview of the commands 

and their hierarchical arrangement (see indentations). 

Parameter:The parameter column indicates the requested parameters together with their specified 

range. 

Unit: 

Remark: 

The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters. 

In the remark column an indication is made on: 

– whether the command does not have a query form, 

– whether the command has only one query form 

– whether this command is implemented only with a certain option of the 

instrument 

Indentations 

The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the 

table by means of indentations to the right. The lower the level is, the 

farther the indentation to the right is. Please observe that the complete 

notation of the command always includes the higher levels as well. 

Example: 

:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer is represented in the table as 

follows: 

:SENSe 

first level 

:FREQuency 

second level 

:CENTer 

third level 

Individual description 

In the individual description, the complete notation of the command is 

given. An example for each command, the *RST value and the SCPI 

information is written out at the end of the individual description. 

The modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the 

following abbreviations: 

R EMI Test Receiver 

A Spectrum analysis 

A-F Spectrum analysis - frequency domain only 

A-Z Spectrum analysis - time domain only (zero span) 

VA Vector signal analysis (option FSE-B7) 

VA-D Vector signal analysis - digital demodulation (option FSE-B7) 

VA-A Vector signal analysis - analog demodulation (option FSE-B7) 

Note: 

The receiver and spectrum analysis modes are implemented in 

the basic unit. For the other modes, the corresponding options 

are required. 

1088.7531.12 6.1 E-15

Notation 

ESIB 

Upper/lower case notation Upper/lower case letters serve to mark the long or short form of the key 

words of a command in the description (see Chapter 5). The instrument 

itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. 

Special characters | A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several 

commands. These key words are indicated in the same line, they are 

separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these key words has to be 

indicated in the header of the command. The effect of the command is 

independent of which of the key words is indicated. 

Example:SENSe:FREQuency:CW|:FIXed 

The two following commands of identical meaning can be 

formed. They set the frequency of the constantly frequent signal 

to 1 kHz: 

SENSe:FREQuency:CW 1E3 = SENSe:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3 

A vertical stroke in indicating the parameters marks alternative possibilities 

in the sense of "or". The effect of the command is different, depending on 

which parameter is entered. 

Example:Selection of the parameters for the command 

INPut:COUPling AC | DC 

If parameter AC is selected, only the AC content is fed through, in 

the case of DC, the DC as well as the AC content. 

[ ] Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header 

(cf. Chapter 5, Section "Optional Keywords"). The full command length 

must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the 

SCPI standards. 

Parameters in square brackets can optionally be incorporated in the 

command or omitted as well. 

{ } Parameters in braces can optionally be incorporated in the command either 

not at all, once or several times. 

Description of parameters Due to the standardization, the parameter section of SCPI commands 

consists always of the same syntactical elements. SCPI has specified a 

series of definitions therefore, which are used in the tables of commands. 

In the tables, these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets 

() and will be briefly explained in the following (see also Chapter 5, 

Section "Parameters"). 

 

This indication refers to parameters which can adopt two states, "on" and 

"off". The "off" state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the 

numeric value 0, the "on" state is indicated by ON or any numeric value 

other than zero. Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 

0 or 1. 

1088.7531.12 6.2 E-15

ESIB 

Notation 

 

 

These indications mark parameters which may be entered as numeric 

values or be set using specific keywords (character data). 

The keywords given below are permitted: 

MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible 

value. 

MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value. 

DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default 

value. 

UP This keyword increments the parameter value. 

DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter. 

The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be 

queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command. They 

must be entered following the quotation mark. 

Example:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? MAXimum 

returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as 

result. 

 

This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of 

a binary data block. 

1088.7531.12 6.3 E-15


ESIB 


The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. Same commands have 

the same effect on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*" followed 

by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in 

detail in Chapter 5. 

Command Designation Parameter Remark 

*CAL? Calibration Query query only 

*CLS Clear Status no query 

*ESE Event Status Enable 0 to 255 

*ESR? Standard Event Status Query 0 to 255 query only 

*IDN? Identification Query query only 

*IST? Individual Status Query 0 to 255 query only 

*OPC 

Operation Complete 

*OPT? Option Identification Query query only 

*PCB Pass Control Back 0 to 30 no query 

*PRE Parallel Poll Register Enable 0 to 255 

*PSC Power On Status Clear 0 | 1 

*RST Reset no query 

*SRE Service Request Enable 0 to 255 

*STB? Status Byte Query query only 

*TRG Trigger no query 

*TST? Self Test Query query only 

*WAI Wait to continue no query 

*CAL? 

CALIBRATION QUERY triggers a calibration of the instrument and subsequently query the 

calibration status. Any responses > 0 indicate errors. 

*CLS 

CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt-part 

of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero. The command does not alter the mask and 

transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer. 

*ESE 0 to 255 

EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated. Query *ESE? 

returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form. 

1088.7531.12 6.4 E-15

ESIB 


*ESR? 

STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal 

form (0 to 255) and subsequently sets the register to zero. 

*IDN? 

IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification. 

The instrument identification consists of the following elements which are separated by commas: 

Manufacturer 

Device (receiver model) 

Serial number of the instrument 

Firmware version number 

Example: "Rohde&Schwarz, ESIB7, 825082/007, 2.10" 

*IST? 

INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form (0 | 1). The IST 

flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll (cf. Chapter 5). 

*OPC 

OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have 

been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request (cf. Chapter 5). 

*OPC? 

OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY writes message "1" into the output buffer as soon as all 

preceding commands have been executed (cf. Chapter 5). 

*OPT? 

OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list 

of the options installed. The options are separated from each other by means of commas. 

Position 

Option 

1 

2 FSE-B4 Low Phase Noise & OCXO 

3 FSE-B5 FFT-Filter 

4 reserved 

5 FSE-B7 Vector Signal Analysis 

6 

7 

8 FSE-B10 Tracking Generator 7 GHz 

9 FSE-B11 Tracking Generator 7 GHz with I/Q modulator 

10 FSE-B12 Output Attenuator for Tracking Generator 

11 to 18 reserved 

19 FSE-B21 External Mixer Output 

Example: 0, FSE-B4, FSE-B5, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,.. 

Note: The standard ESIB is equipped with options FSE-B4 and FSE-B6 The options are 

indicated for reasons of compatibility to instrument family FSE. 

*PCB 0 to 30 

PASS CONTROL BACK indicates the controller address which the IEC-bus control is to be returned 

to after termination of the triggered action. 

1088.7531.12 6.5 E-15


ESIB 

*PRE 0 to 255 

PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets parallel poll enable register to the value indicated. 

Query *PRE? returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form. 

*PSC 0 | 1 

POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is 

maintained or reset in switching on. 

*PSC = 0 

*PSC = 0 

causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained. Thus a service request 

can be triggered in switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of status 

registers ESE and SRE. 

resets the registers. 

Query *PSC? reads out the contents of the power-on-status-clear flag. The response can be 0 or 1. 

*RST 

RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status. The command essentially corresponds to 

pressing the [PRESET] key. The default setting is indicated in the description of the commands. 

*SRE 0 to 255 

SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the value indicated. Bit 6 

(MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines under which conditions a service request is 

triggered. Query *SRE? reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form. Bit 

6 is always 0. 

*STB? 

READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form. 

*TRG 

TRIGGER triggers a measurement. This command corresponds to INITiate:IMMediate (cf. 

Section "TRIGger subsystem", as well). 

*TST? 

SELF TEST QUERY triggers all selftests of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal 

form. 

*WAI 

WAIT-to-CONTINUE only permits the servicing of the subsequent commands after all preceding 

commands have been executed and all signals have settled (cf. Chapter 5 and "*OPC" as well). 

1088.7531.12 6.6 E-15

ESIB 

ABORt / CALCulate Subsystem 

ABORt Subsystem 

The ABORt subsystem contains the commands for aborting triggered actions. An action can be 

triggered again immediately after being aborted. All commands trigger events which is why they are not 

assigned any *RST value. 

ABORt 

HOLD 

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

no query 

no query 

:ABORt 

This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system. 

Example: "ABOR;INIT:IMM" 

Features: *RST value: 0 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:HOLD 

This command interrupts a current scan measurement. 

Example: "HOLD" 



Modes: 

R 

CALCulate Subsystem 

The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data, transforming and 

carrying out corrections. These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquistion, i.e., following 

the SENSe subsystem. 

In the split-screen representation, a distinction is made between CALCulate1 and CALCulate2: 

CALCulate1 =;^ screen A; 

CALCulate2 =;^ screen B 

For setting REAL/IMAG PART in Vector Analyzer mode a distinction is also made between CALCulate3 

and CALCulate4 in the split-screen representation: 

CALCulate3 =;^ screen C; 

CALCulate4 =;^ screen D 

1088.7531.12 6.7 E-15


ESIB 

CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem 

The CALCulate:DELTamarker subsystem checks the delta-marker functions in the instrument. 


CALCulate 

:DELTamarker 

[:STATe] 

:MODE 

:AOFF 

:TRACe 

:X 

:RELative? 

:Y? 

:MAXimum 

[:PEAK] 

:APEak 

:NEXT 

:RIGHt 

:LEFT 

:MINimum 

[:PEAK] 

:NEXT 

:RIGHt 

:LEFT 

:FUNCtion 

:FIXed 

[:STATe] 

:RPOint 

:Y 

:OFFSet 

:X 

:PNOise 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:STEP 

[:INCRement] 

:AUTO 

 

ABSolute|RELative 

 

 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

 

 

 

 

 

-- 

 

 

-- 

-- 

HZ | S | SYM 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

DBM 

DB 

HZ |S | SYM 

no query 

query only 

query only 

no query 

no query (vector signal analysis) 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

-- query only 

HZ |S | SYM 

-- 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the selected delta marker. If no indication is made, delta marker 1 

is selected automatically. 

Example: 

":CALC:DELT3 ON" 

Features: *RST value: OFF 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.8 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MODE ABSolute | RELative 

This command switches over between relative and absolute input of frequency of the delta marker. 

Example: 

":CALC:DELT:MODE ABS" 

Features: *RST value: REL 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

In the RELative mode, the frequency of the delta marker is programmed relative to the reference 

marker. In the ABSolute mode, the frequency is defined by the absolute values. 


This command switches off all active delta markers. 

Example: 

":CALC:DELT:AOFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:TRACe 1 to 4 

This command assigns the selected delta marker to the indicated measuring curve. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT3:TRAC 2" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X 0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time | symbols) 

This command positions the selected delta marker to the indicated frequency (span > 0) or time 

(span = 0). The query always returns the absolute value of frequency or time. 

Example: 

":CALC:DELT:X 10.7MHz" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The SYM unit is only valid in Vector Signal Analysis mode. 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X:RELative? 

This command queries the frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0) of the selected delta marker 

relative to the reference marker. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:X:REL?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.9 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:Y? 

This command queries the value of the selected marker. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:Y?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

In complex presentations (vector signal analysis - polar diagrams), the real and the imaginary 

component as well as magnitude and phase are output separated by a comma. 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum[:PEAK] 

This command positions the delta marker to the current maximum value in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MAX" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:APEak 

This command positions the delta marker to the maximum absolute value of the trace. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MAX:APE" 



Modes: 

VA 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:NEXT 

This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MAX:NEXT" 



Modes: 

R, A 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:RIGHt 

This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the 

current value (i.e., in ascending X direction) in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MAX:RIGH" 



Modes: 

R, A 


1088.7531.12 6.10 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:LEFT 

This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the 

current value (i.e., in descending X direction) in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT" 



Modes: 

R, A 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MINimum[:PEAK] 

This command positions the delta marker to the current minimum value in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MIN" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MINimum:NEXT 

This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MIN:NEXT" 



Modes: 

R, A 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MINimum:RIGHt 

This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current 

value (ie in ascending X direction). 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MIN:RIGH" 



Modes: 

R, A 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MINimum:LEFT 

This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current 

value (ie in descending X direction). 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:MIN:LEFT" 



Modes: 

R, A 


1088.7531.12 6.11 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON" 


SCPI: device-specific. 

Modes: 

R, A, VA-D 

The reference value is independent of the current trace. 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y 

This command defines a new fixed reference value for the relative measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10dBm" 

Features: *RST value: - (FUNction:FIXed[:STATe] is set to OFF) 


Modes: 

A, VA 

The reference value is independent of the current trace. 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet 

This command defines an additional level offset for the relative measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 10dB" 

Features: *RST value: 0 dB 


Modes: 

A, VA 

The level offset is included in the output of the level value. 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X 

This command defines the new fixed reference frequency, time or symbols for the relative 

measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 10.7MHz" 

Features: *RST value: - (FUNction:FIXed[:STATe] is set to OFF) 


Mode: 

A 

The reference value is independent of the current trace. With span = 0, the reference time, otherwise 

the reference frequency is defined. 

1088.7531.12 6.12 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the measurement of the phase noise on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON" 



Mode: 

A 

When the phase noise is measured, the correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are 

automatically considered. The measurement uses the reference values defined by 

FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X or :Y. 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the phase noise measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:RES?" 



Mode: 

A 

This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value. 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:STEP[:INCRement] 

This command defines the delta marker step width. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:STEP 10kHz" (frequency domain) 

":CALC:DELT:STEP 5ms" (time domain) 

Features: *RST value: - (STEP is set to AUTO) 


Mode: 

A 


This command switches the automatic adaptation of the marker step width on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:DELT:STEP:AUTO OFF" 

Features: *RST value: ON 


Mode: 

A 

With AUTO ON, the step width is 10% of the span. 

1088.7531.12 6.13 E-15


ESIB 

CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem 

The CALCulate:DLINe subsystem checks the display lines in the instrument, i.e., the level, frequency 

and time lines (depending on the X-axis) as well as threshold and reference lines. 

CALCulate 

:DLINe 

:STATe 

:THReshold 

:STATe 

:CTHReshold 

:STATe 

:RLINe 

:STATe 

:FLINe 

:STATe 

:TLINe 

:STATe 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S | 

HZ | PCT 


HZ | PCT 


HZ | PCT 


HZ | PCT 

HZ 

S | SYM 

:CALCulate:DLINe MINimum to MAXimum (depending on current unit) 

This command defines the position of the display line. 

Example: ":CALC:DLIN -20dBm" 

Features: *RST value: - (STATe to OFF) 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The display lines mark the given level in the display. 

The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in conjunction with option Vector Signal Analysis, 

FSE-B7. 

:CALCulate:DLINe:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the display line on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:DLIN2:STAT OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.14 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:THReshold MINimum to MAXimum (depending on current unit) 

This command defines the position of the thresholds. 

Example: ":CALC:THR -82dBm" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

For marker scan functions MAX PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc., the threshold serves as the lowest limit for 

maximum or minimum search. 


FSE-B7. 

:CALCulate:THReshold:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the threshold on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:THR:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:CTHReshold MINimum to MAXimum (depending on the current unit) 

This command defines the position of a threshold line (base line), below which all measured values 

are cleared. 

Example: ":CALC:CTHR -82dBm" 



Mode: 

R, A, VA 


FSE-B7. 


This command is for switching on or off the threshold line (base line), below which all measured 

values are cleared. 

Example: ":CALC:CTHR:STAT ON" 



Mode: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.15 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:RLINe MINimum to MAXimum (depending on the current unit) 

This command defines the position of the reference line. 

Example: ":CALC:RLIN -10dBm" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The reference line serves as a reference for the arithmetic operation of traces. 


FSE-B7. 

:CALCulate:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the reference line on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:RLIN:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:FLINe 0 GHz to f max 

This command defines the position of the frequency lines. 

Example: ":CALC:FLIN2 120MHz" 



Modes: 

R, A-F, VA 

The frequency lines mark the given frequencies in the display. Frequency lines are only valid for a 

SPAN >0. 

:CALCulate:FLINe:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the frequency line on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:FLIN2:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A-F, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.16 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:TLINe 0 to 1000s 

This command defines the position of the time lines. 

Example: ":CALC:TLIN 10ms" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 

The time lines mark the given times in the display. Time lines are only valid for a SPAN = 0. 

:CALCulate:TLINe:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the time line on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:TLIN2:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.17 E-15


ESIB 

CALCulate:FEED Subsystem 

The CALCulate:FEED subsystem selects the measured data in operating mode vector signal analysis. 

This subsystem is only valid in connection with option FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis. 


CALCulate 

:FEED Vector Signal Analysis 

no query 

:CALCulate:FEED 

This command selects the measured data that are to be displayed. 

Parameter: ::= ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ | 

‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ | 

‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ | 

‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’ | 

‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’ | 

‘XTIM:AM’ | 

‘XTIM:FM’ | 

‘XTIM:PM’ | 

‘XTIM:AMSummary’ | 

‘XTIM:FMSummary’ | 

‘XTIM:PMSummary’ | 

‘TCAP’ 

Example: ":CALC:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’" 

Features: *RST value: ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ 


Mode: 

VA 

The string parameters have the following meaning: 

‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ 

Test signal (filtered, synchronized to symbol clock) 

‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ 

Reference signal (internally generated from demodulated test 

signal) 

‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ Error signal (magnitude and phase error) 

‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’ Vector error signal 

‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’ 

Symbol table (demodulated bits and table with modulation errors) 

'XTIM:AM' 

Demodulated AM signal (analog demodulation) 

'XTIM:FM' 

Demodulated FM signal (analog demodulation) 

'XTIM:PM' 

Demodulated PM signal (analog demodulation) 

'XTIM:AMSummary' 

AM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation) 

'XTIM:FMSummary' 

FM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation) 

'XTIM:PMSummary' 

PM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation) 

‘TCAP’ 

Test signal in capture buffer 

1088.7531.12 6.18 E-15

ESIB 


CALCulate:FORMat Subsystem 

The CALCulate:FORMat subsystem determines further processing and conversion of measured data in 

operating mode vector signal analysis. 

This sub system is only valid in connection with option FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis. 


CALCulate 

:FORMat MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | 

RIMag | FREQuency | IEYE | QEYE | 

TEYE | FEYE | COMP | CONS 


:FSK 

:DEViation 

:REFerence HZ Vector Signal Analysis 

:CALCulate:FORMat MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | RIMag | FREQuency | IEYE | QEYE | 

TEYE | FEYE | COMP | CONS 

This command defines the display of the traces. 

Example: ":CALC:FORM CONS" 

Features: *RST value: MAGNitude 


Mode: 

VA-D 

The availability of the parameters depends on the selected data (see command 

:CALCulate:FEED). 

Available for selection measurement signal, reference signal and modulation error 

(CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’,‘XTIM:DDEM:REF) ,‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’): 

MAGNitude 

Display of the magnitude in the time domain (only available for settings 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ (error signal) or 

‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ (measurement signal) or ‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ 

(reference signal) 

PHASe | UPHase 

Display of the phase in the time domain with or without (”unwrapped”) 

limitation to ±180° 

RIMag 

Display of the time characteristic of inphase and quadrature 

component 

FREQuency 

Display of the frequency response in the time domain 

COMP 

Display of the polar vector diagram (complex) 

CONS 

Display of the polar vector diagaram (constellation) 

Available for selection measurement signal and reference signal (CALCulate:FEED 

‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’,‘XTIM:DDEM:REF): 

IEYE | QEYE 

Eye diagram of the inphase or quadrature component 

TEYE 

Display of the trellis diagram 

FEYE 

Eye diagram of FSK modulation 

1088.7531.12 6.19 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:FSK:DEViation:REFerence 

This command defines the reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK modulation. 

Example: ":CALC:FSK:DEV:REF 20kHz" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

1088.7531.12 6.20 E-15

ESIB 


CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem 

The CALCulate:LIMit subsystem comprises the limit lines and the corresponding limit checks. Limit lines 

can be defined as upper and lower limit lines. The individual values of the limit lines correspond to the 

values of the X-axis (CONTrol) which have to have the same number. 


CALCulate 

:LIMit 

:ACTive? 

:TRACe 

:STATe 

:UNIT 

CATalog? 

:CONTrol 

[:DATA] 

:DOMain 

:OFFSet 

:MODE 

:UNIT 

[:TIME] 

:SHIFt 

:SPACing 

:UPPer 

[:DATA] 

:STATe 

:OFFSet 

:MARGin 

:MODE 

:SHIFt 

:SPACing 

:LOWer 

[:DATA] 

:STATe 

:OFFSet 

:MARGin 

:MODE 

:SHIFt 

:SPACing 

:FAIL? 

:CLEar 

[:IMMediate] 

:COMMent 

:COPY 

:NAME 

:DELete 

 

 

DBM | DBPW | DBPT | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | 

VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DB | DBUV_MHZ | 

DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M | 

DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ | DEG | RAD | S | 

HZ | PCT | UNITLESS 

,.. 

FREQuency | TIME 

 

RELative | ABSolute 

S | SYM 

 

LINear | LOGarithmic 

,.. 

 

 

 


 


,.. 

 

 

 


 


-- 

 

1 to 8 | < name> 

 

-- 

HZ | S | SYM 

HZ | S | SYM 

HZ | S | SYM 

DBM | DB | DEG | 

RAD | S | HZ | PCT 

-- 

DB | DEG | RAD | 

S | HZ | PCT 

DB| DEG | RAD | 

S | HZ | PCT 

-- 

DB | DEG | RAD| 

S | HZ | PCT 

DBM | DB | DEG | 

RAD | S | HZ | PCT 

-- 


S | HZ | PCT 


S | HZ | PCT 

-- 

DB | DEG | RAD | 

S | HZ | PCT 

-- 

-- 

Query only 


query only 

no query 

1088.7531.12 6.21 E-15


ESIB 


CALCulate 

:LIMit 

:ACPower 

[:STATe] 

:ACHannel 

:STATe 

:RESult? 

:ALTernate 

:STATe 

:RESult? 

 

, 

 

-- 

, 

 

-- 

DB; DB 

DB; DB 

query only 

query only 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACTive? 

This command queries the name of all activated limit lines. The names are output in alphabetical 

order. If no limit line is activated, an empty string will be output. The numeric suffixes in 

CALCulate and LIMit are not significant. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:ACT?" 



Modes: R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:TRACe 1 to 4 

This command assigns a trace to a limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM2:TRAC 2" 





This command switches the limit check for the selected limit line on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:STAT ON" 




In analyzer and vector analyzer mode, the result of the limit check can be queried with 

CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UNIT 

DBM | DBPW | DBPT | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT |DBUA | AMPere | DB | DBUV_MHZ | 

DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ | UNITLESS 

This command defines the unit of the selected limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:UNIT DBUV" 

Features: *RST value: DBM 



In receiver mode the units DBM, DBUV, DBUA, DBPW, DBPT, DBUV_M, and DBUA_M are 

available In analyzer mode all units are available except for DEG, RAD, S and HZ. 

DBUV_MHZ and DBUA_MHZ denote the units DBUV/MHZ or DBUA/MHZ. 

Upon selection of the unit DB the limit line is automatically switched to the relative mode. For units 

different from DB the limit line is automatically switched to the absolute mode. 

The units DEG, RAD, S, HZ are available in the vector analysis mode only. 

1088.7531.12 6.22 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CATalog? 

This command reads out the names of all limit lines stored on the harddisk. 

Syntax of output format: 

,, 

,,,,,,....,, 

 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:CAT?" 

Feature: *RST value: - 


Mode: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] ,.. 

This command defines the X-axis values (frequencies or times) of the upper or lower limit lines. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:CONT 1MHz,30MHz,300MHz,1GHz" 

Features: *RST value: - (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF) 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding UPPer- and/or LOWer limit lines 

have to be identical. The following units are available: 

receiver HZ 

spectrum analysis HZ | S 

vector analysis HZ | S | SYM. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency | TIME 

This command defines the X-axis in the frequency or time domain. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:CONT:DOM TIME" 

Features: *RST value: FREQuency 


Modes: 

A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:OFFSet 

This command defines an offset for the X-axis value of the selected relative limit line in the frequency 

or time domain. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:CONT:OFFS 100us" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.23 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:MODE RELative | ABSolute 

This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the X-axis of the selected limit line. 

Example: 

":CALC:LIM:CONT:MODE REL" 

Features: *RST value: ABSolute 


Modes: 

A, VA 

Upon selection of RELative, the unit is switched to DB. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:UNIT[:TIME] S | SYM 

This command defines the unit of the x-axis scaling of limit lines. 

Example: 

":CALC:LIM:CONT:UNIT SYM" 

Features: *RST value: S 


Mode: 

VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt 

This command shifts a limit line which has been specified for relative frequencies or times (X-axis). 

Example: 

":CALC:LIM:CONT:SHIF 50kHz" 

Features: *RST value: -- 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 

This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for determining the 

limit line from the frequency points. 

Example: 

":CALC:LIM:CONT:SPAC LIN" 

Features: *RST value: LIN 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] ,.. 

This command defines the values for the upper limit lines. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:UPP -10,0,0,-10" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding UPPer limit line have to be 

identical. The unit must be identical with the unit selected by command CALC:LIM:UNIT. If the 

measured values exceed the UPPer limit line in analyzer or vector analyzer mode, the limit check 

signals errors. The unit must be identical with the unit selected by CALC:LIM:UNIT. 

The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available in the vector signal analysis mode only. 

1088.7531.12 6.24 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF 

This command defines the selected limit line as upper limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:UPPer:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:OFFSet 

This command defines an offset for the Y-axis of the selected relative upper limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:UPP:OFFS 3dB" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:MARGin 

This command defines the margin of the selected upper limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:UPP:MARG 10dB" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:MODE RELative | ABSolute 

This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the Y-axis of the selected upper limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:UPP:MODE REL" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt 

This command shifts a limit line, which has relative values for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such 

as volt). 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:UPP:SHIF 20dB" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.25 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 

This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for the upper limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:UPP:SPAC LIN" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] ,.. 

This command defines the values for the selected lower limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:LOW -30,-40,-40,-30" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding LOWer limit line have to be 

identical.If the measured values violate the LOWer limit line in analyzer or vector analyzer mode, the 

limit check signals errors. The unit must be identical with the unit selected by CALC:LIM:UNIT. 

The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available in the vector signal analysis mode only. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF 

This command defines the selected limit line as lower limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:LOWer:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:OFFSet 

This command defines an offset for the Y-axis of the selected relative lower limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:LOW:OFFS 3dB" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:MARGin 

This command defines the margin of the selected lower limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:LOW:MARG 10dB" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.26 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:MODE RELative | ABSolute 

This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the Y-axis of the selected lower limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:LOW:MODE REL" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt 

This command shifts a limit line, which has relative values for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such 

as volt). 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:LOW:SHIF 20dB" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 

This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for the lower limit line. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:LOW:SPAC LIN" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL? 

This command queries the result of the limit check. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:FAIL?" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

The result of the limit check responds with 0 in case of PASS and with 1 in case of FAIL. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CLEar[:IMMediate] 

This command deletes the result of the current limit check. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:CLE" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value. 

1088.7531.12 6.27 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:COMMent 

This command defines a comment for the limit line selected. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM:COMM ’Upper limit for spectrum’" 

Features: *RST value: blank comment 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:LIMit:COPY 1 to 8 | 

This command copies one limit line onto another one. 

Parameter: 1 to 8 ::= number of the new limit line or, alternatively: 

::= name of the new limit line given as a string 

Example: ":CALC:LIM1:COPY 2" 

":CALC:LIM1:COPY ’GSM2’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The name of the limit line may contain a maximum of 8 characters. This command is an "event" 

which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. 


This command assigns a name to a limit line numbered 1 to 8. If it doesn’t exist previously, a limit 

line with this name is created. 

Example: ":CALC:LIM1:NAME ’GSM1’" 

Features: *RST value: ’REM1’ to ’REM8’ for lines 1 to 8 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The name of the limit line may contain a maximum of 8 characters. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:DELete 

This command deletes the limit line selected. 

Examples: ":CALC:LIM1:DEL" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. 

1088.7531.12 6.28 E-15

ESIB 



This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power measurements. The 

commands CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT or CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT:STAT must be used in addition to 

specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper/lower adjacent channel or for the 

alternate adjacent channels. 

Examples: 

":CALC:LIM:ACP ON" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

The numeric suffixes or are not significant for this command. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel 0 to 100 dB, 0 to 100 dB 

This command defines the limit for the upper/lower adjacent channel for adjacent channel power 

measurements. 

Parameter: 

Examples: 

The first (second) numeric value is the limit for the upper (lower) adjacent 

channel. 

":CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB" 



Modes: 

A, VA 


:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:STATe ON | OFF 

This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power 

measurement is performed. Before, the limit check must be activated using CALC:LIM:ACP ON. 

Examples: 

":CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

A, VA 


:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper/lower adjacent channel when 

adjacent channel power measurement is performed. 

Parameter: The result is returned in the form , where 

= PASSED | FAILED, and where the first returned value denotes the 

lower, the second denotes the upper adjacent channel. 

Examples: ":CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. If the power measurement of the 

adjacent channel is switched off, the command triggers a query error. 


1088.7531.12 6.29 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate 0 to 100DB, 0 to 100 dB. 

This command defines the limit for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for adjacent channel 

power measurements. 

Parameter: The first (second) numeric value is the limit for the lower (upper) alternate 

adjacent channel. The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the first 

or the second alternate channel. 

Examples: ":CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB 30DB" 

Features: *RST value: 0DB 


Modes: 

A, VA 


:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate:STATe ON | OFF 

This command activates the limit check for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for adjacent 

channel power measurements. Before, the limit check must be activated using CALC:LIM:ACP ON. 

Examples: ":CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

A, VA 


:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the limit check for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for 

adjacent channel power measurements. 

Parameter: The result is returned in the form , where 

= PASSED | FAILED and where the first (second) returned value 

denotes the lower (upper) alternate adjacent channel. 

Examples: ":CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:RES?" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. If the power measurement of the 

adjacent channel is switched off, the command triggers a query error. 


1088.7531.12 6.30 E-15

ESIB 


CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem 

The CALCulate:MARKer subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument. 

CALCulate 


:MARKer 

[:STATe] 

:AOFF 

:TRACe 

:X 

:SLIMits 

[:STATe] 

:COUNt 

:RESolution 

:FREQuency? 

:COUPled 

[:STATe] 

:SCOupled 

[:STATe] 

:LOEXclude 

:Y? 

:MAXimum 

[:PEAK] 

:APEak 

:NEXT 

:RIGHt 

:LEFT 

:MINimum 

[:PEAK] 

:NEXT 

:RIGHt 

:LEFT 

:STEP 

[:INCRement] 

:AUTO 

:PEXCursion 

:READout 

 

 

 

 

 

 

-- 

 

 

 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

 

 

 

MPHase | RIMaginary 

-- 

-- 

HZ | S | SYM 

-- 

HZ 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

HZ | S | SYM 

-- 

DB 

no query 

query only 

query only 

no query 

no query, 


no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 


:FUNCtion 

:NDBDown 

:STATe 

:RESult? 

:FREQuency? 

:ZOOM 

:NOISe 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:DEModulation 

:SELect 

[:STATe] 

:HOLDoff 

 

 

-- 

-- 

 

 

-- 

AM|FM 

 

 

DB 

-- 

-- 

HZ 

-- 

S 

query only 

query only 

no query 

query only 

:SFACtor 

:STATe 

:RESult? 

:FREQuency? 

 

 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

query only 

query only 

1088.7531.12 6.31 E-15


ESIB 


CALCulate 

:MARKer 

:FUNCtion 

:STRack 

[:STATe] 

:ADEMod 

:AM 

[:RESult]? 

:FM 

[:RESult]? 

:PM 

[:RESult]? 

:AFRequency 

[:RESult]? 

:FERRor 

[:RESult]? 

:SINad 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:CARRier 

[:RESult]? 

:DDEMod 

:RESult? 

:POWer 

:SELect 

:RESult? 

:PRESet 

:CFILter 

[:STATe] 

:SUMMary 

:STATe 

:MAXimum 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:AVERage 

:RESult? 

:PHOLd 

RESult? 

:PPEak 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:AVERage 

:RESult? 

:PHOLd 

RESult? 

 

PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS 

PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS | RDEV 


 

MERM | MEPK | MEPS | PERM | PEPK | PEPS 

|EVRM | EVPK | EVPS | IQOF | IQIM | ADR | 

FERR | DEV | FSRM | FSPK | FSPS | RHO 

|FEPK | DTTS 

ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | OBWidth | 

CN | CN0 

ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | 

OBWidth | CN | CN0 

NADC | TETRA | PHS| PDC | CDPD | F8CDma 

| R8CDma | F19Cdma | R19Cdma | FWCDma | 

RWCDma | FW3Gppcdma | RW3Gppcdma | 

M2CDma | D2CDma | FO8Cdma | RO8Cdma | 

FO19cdma | RO19cdma | NONE 

 

OFF 

 

 

 


query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 


query only 

query only 

no query 


query only 

query only 

query only 


query only 

query only 

query only 

1088.7531.12 6.32 E-15

ESIB 



CALCulate 

:MARKer 

:FUNCtion 

:SUMMary 

:MPEak 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:AVERage 

:RESult? 

:PHOLd 

RESult? 

:MIDDle 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:AVERage 

:RESult? 

:PHOLd 

RESult? 

:RMS 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:AVERage 

:RESult? 

:PHOLd 

RESult? 

:MEAN 

[:STATe] 

:RESult? 

:AVERage 

:RESult? 

:PHOLd 

RESult? 

:AOFF 

:PHOLd 

:AVERage 

:CENTer 

:CSTep 

:STARt 

:STOP 

:MSTep 

:REFerence 

 

 

 

 

 

 


query only 

query only 

query only 


query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

:CALCulate:MARKer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the currently selected marker. If no indication is made, marker 1 is 

selected automatically. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK3 ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.33 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF 

This command switches off all active markers. 

Example: 

":CALC:MARK:AOFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe 1 to 4 

This command assigns the selected marker (1 to 4) to the indicated test curve. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2" 

Features: *RST value - 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:MARKer:X 0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time | symbols) 

This command positions the selected marker to the indicated frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0). 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:X 10.7MHz" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Available units: receiver: Hz; analyzer: HZ | S; vector analyzer: HZ | S | SYM 

:CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches between a limited (ON) and unlimited (OFF) search range. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON" 

features: *RST value: OFF 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the frequency counter at the marker position. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:COUN ON" 



Mode: 

A 

1088.7531.12 6.34 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt:RESolution 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz 

This command specifies the resolution of the frequency counter. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:COUN:RES 1kHz" 

Features: *RST value: 1kHz 


Mode: 

A 

The numeric suffix in MARKer is not significant. 


This command queries the result of the frequency counter. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ?" 



Mode: 

A 

This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the coupling of markers on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:COUP ON" 



Mode: 

R, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:SCOupled[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the coupling of the receiver frequency at the marker frequency on or off. 

Example: 

":CALC:MARK:SCO ON" 



Mode: 

R 


:CALCulate:MARKer:LOEXclude ON | OFF 

This command switches the local oscillator suppression on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:LOEX ON" 



Mode: 

A-F 

The numeric suffixes 1|2 and 1 to 4 are not significant. 

1088.7531.12 6.35 E-15


ESIB 


This command queries the selected marker value. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:Y?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum[:PEAK] 

This command positions the marker to the current maximum value in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MAX" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:APEak 

This command positions the marker to the maximum absolute value of the trace. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MAX:APE" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:NEXT 

This command positions the marker to the next lower maximum value in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MAX:NEXT" 



Modes: 

R, A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:RIGHt 

This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current 

value (i.e., in ascending X direction) in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MAX:RIGH" 



Modes: 

R, A 


1088.7531.12 6.36 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:LEFT 

This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current 

value (i.e., in descending X direction) in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MAX:LEFT" 



Modes: 

R, A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum[:PEAK] 

This command positions the marker to the current minimum value in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MIN" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:NEXT 

This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value in the trace memory. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MIN:NEXT" 



Modes: 

R, A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:RIGHt 

This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current 

value (ie in ascending X direction). 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MIN:RIGH" 



Modes: 

R, A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:LEFT 

This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value 

(ie in descending X direction). 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:MIN:LEFT" 



Modes: 

R, A 

is command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. 

1088.7531.12 6.37 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:STEP[:INCRement] 

This command defines the marker step width. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:STEP 10kHz" (frequency domain) 

CALC:MARK:STEP 5ms" (time domain) 

Features: *RST value: - (STEP is set to AUTO) 


Mode: 

A 

This command sets STEP:AUTO to OFF. The numeric suffix in MARKer is not significant. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF 

This command switches the automatic adaptation of the marker step width on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:STEP:AUTO OFF" 



Mode: 

A 

With AUTO ON, the step width is 10% of the span. The numeric suffix in MARKer is not 

significant. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:PEXCursion 

This command defines the peak excursion. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB" 

Features: *RST value: 6dB 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:READout MPHase | RIMaginary 

This command determines the type of the marker display. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:READ RIM" 



Mode: 

VA-D 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown 

This command defines the "N dB Down" value. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB" 



Mode: 

A 

The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned by n dB below the active reference marker. The 

frequency spacing of these markers can be queried with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion: 

NDBDown:RESult?. 

1088.7531.12 6.38 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the "N dB Down" function on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON" 



Mode: 

A 


This command queries the frequency spacing (bandwidth) of the "N dB Down" markers. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?" 



Mode: 

A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? 

This command queries the frequencies of the "N dB Down" marker. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ?" 



Mode: 

A 

The two frequency values are separated by comma and indicated in ascending order. This command 

is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value. 


This command defines the range to be enlarged around the active marker. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM 1kHz" 



Mode: 

A-F 

The subsequent frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the frequency of the signal is 

counted. This frequency becomes the new center frequency, the zoomed span is then set. This 

command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the noise measurement on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON" 



Mode: 

A 

The noise power density is measured at the position of the markers. The result can be queried with 

CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?. 

1088.7531.12 6.39 E-15


ESIB 


This command queries the result of the noise measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS:RES?" 



Mode: 

A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect AM | FM 

This command selects the demodulation type. 

Example: 

":CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM" 

Features: *RST value: AM 


Mode: 

A 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the demodulation on or off. 

Example: 

":CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM ON" 



Mode: 

A 

With demodulation switched on, the frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the 

signal is demodulated during the given stop time. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff 10ms to 1000s 

This command defines the duration of the stop time for the demodulation. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 3s" 

Features: *RST value: - (DEModulation is set to OFF) 


Mode: 

A 

With demodulation switched on, the frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the 

signal is demodulated during the given stop time. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/3dB) | (60dB/6dB) 

This command defines the shape factor measurement 60dB/6dB or 60dB/3dB. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC (60dB/3dB)" 

Features: *RST value: (60dB/6dB) 


Mode: 

A 

The temporary markers T1 to T4 are positioned in pairs by 60dB and by 3dB or 6dB below the active 

reference marker. The frequency spacing ratio of these markers - the shape factor - can be queried 

with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult?. 

1088.7531.12 6.40 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the shape factor measurement on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:STAT ON" 



Mode: 

A 


This command queries the result of the shape factor measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:RES?" 



Mode: 

A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQuency? 

This command queries the frequencies of the shape factor measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:FREQ?" 



Mode: 

A 

Four frequency values (at -60 dB, -6 or. -3 dB, -6 or -3 dB, -60dB) are indicated in ascending order. 

They are separated by a comma. This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an 

*RST value. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the signal-track function on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR ON" 



Mode: 

A-F 

With SIGNAL TRACK function activated, the maximum signal is determined after each frequency 

sweep and the center frequency of this signal is set. With drifting signals the center frequency follows 

the signal. 

1088.7531.12 6.41 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AM[:RESult]? PPEak| MPEak| MIDDle| RMS 

This command queries the results of the AM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:AM? PPE" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

PPEak 

Result of the measurement with detector +PK 

MPEak 

Result of the measurement with detector -PK 

MIDDle 

Result of averaging ±PK/2 

RMS 

Result of the measurement with detector RMS 

In the modulation modes FM or PM query of the MIDDle-result is possible only. This command is 

only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | 

RMS | RDEV 

This command queries the results of the FM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:FM? PPE" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

PPEak 


MPEak 


MIDDle 


RMS 




:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:PM[:RESult]?PPEak| MPEak| MIDDle| RMS 

This command queries the results of the PM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:PM? PPE" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

PPEak 


MPEak 


MIDDle 


RMS 




1088.7531.12 6.42 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AFRequency[:RESult]? 

This command queries the audio frequency of the analog demodulation. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:AFR? " 



Mode: 

VA-A 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FERRor[:RESult]? 

This command queries the frequency error of the analog demodulation. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:FERR? " 



Mode: 

VA-A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:CARRier[:RESult]? 

This command queries the results of the carrier frequency measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:CARR?" 



Mode: 

VA-A 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the SINAD measurement on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:SIN ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

This command is valid only in the analog demodulation mode with Real Time ON. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad:RESult? 

This command queries the results of the SINAD measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:SIN:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned. 

1088.7531.12 6.43 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? 

MERM | MEPK | MEPS | PERM | PEPK | PEPS | EVRM | EVPK 

| EVPS | IQOF | IQIM | ADR | FERR | FEPK | RHO| DEV | 

FSRM | FSPK | FSPS | DTTS 

This command queries the error measurement results of digital demodulation.The results correspond 

to the values obtained when the symbol table (SYMBOL TABLE/ ERRORS softkey) is selected in 

manual operation. Marker values can be queried queried with command CALCulate: 

MARKer:Y? and trace data with command TRACe[:DATA]. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:DDEM:RES? EVRM" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

MERM magnitude error in %rms FERR frequency error in Hz 

MEPK maximum of magnitude error in %pk FEPK maximum of frequency error 

MEPS symbol number by which the maximum in Hz 

of the magnitude error occurred ADR amplitude drop in dB/symbol 

PERM phase error in deg RHO Rho-Factor 

PEPK maximum of phase error in deg DEV FSK deviation in Hz 

PEPS symbol number by which the maximum 

of the phase error occurred 

EVRM vector error in %rms FSPK maximum of FSK deviation error 

EVPK maximum of vector error in %pk in Hz 

EVPS symbol number by which the maximum FSRM FSK deviation error in Hz 

of the vector error occurred FSPS symbol number by which the 

maximum of error occurred 

IQOF I/Q-offset error in % DTTS trigger delay of synchronization 

IQIM I/Q Imbalance in % 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | 


This command selects the type of power measurement without modifying other settings. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP" 



Mode: 

A-F 


ACPower 

adjacent channel power measurement 

CPOWer 

channel power measurement 

OBANdwidth | OBWidth occupied bandwidth power measurement 

CN 

signal / noise power measurement 

CN0 

signal-/ noise power measurement based on 1Hz bandwidth 

1088.7531.12 6.44 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | 


This command queries the results of the power measurement (see also CALCulate:MARKer: 

FUNCtion:POWer:SELect.) 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

ACPower adjacent channel power measurement; Results are output separated by commas 

in the following order: Power of main channel 

Power of lower adjacent channel 1 

Power of upper adjacent channel 1 

Power of lower adjacent channel 2 

Power of upper adjacent channel 2 

... 

The number of results depends on the number of adjacent channels selected. 

With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the power is output in dBm, with linear 

scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %) in W. If SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:MODE REL 

is selected, adjacent channel power is output in dB. 

CPOWer channel power measurement 

With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the channel power is output in dBm, with 

linear scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %) in W. 

OBANdwidth | OBWidth occupied bandwidth power measurement 

The return value is the occupied bandwidth in Hz 

CN 

signal / noise power measurement 

The return value is always in dB.. 

CN0 

signal-/ noise power measurement based on 1Hz bandwidth 

The return value is always in dB/Hz 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF 

This command switches the power measurement off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF" 



Modes: 

A-F, VA-D 


1088.7531.12 6.45 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | CDPD | 

FWCDma | RWCDma | FW3Gppcdma 

| RW3Gppcdma| M2CDma | D2CDma | 


R19Cdma | NONE| FO8Cdma | 

RO8Cdma | FO19cdma | RO19cdma 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES NADC" 



Mode: 

A-F 

FWCDma W-CDMA forward RWCDma W-CDMA reverse 

FW3Gppcdma W-CDMA 3GPP forward RW3Gppcdma W-CDMA 3GPP reverse 

M2CDma CDMA2000 Multi Carrier D2CDma CDMA2000 Direct Sequence 

F8CDma CDMA800 forward R8CDma CDMA800 reverse 

F19Cdma CDMA1900 forward R19Cdma CDMA1900 reverse 

FO8Cdma CDMA One 800 forward FO19cdma CDMA One 1900 forward 

RO8Cdma CDMA One 800 reverse RO19cdma CDMA One 1900 reverse 

The selection of a standard influences the parameters weighting filter, channel bandwidth and 

spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep time. 

This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and query. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:CFILter ON | OFF 

This command switches the weighting filter for the selected standard on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:CFIL ON" 



Mode: 

A-F 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the messages selected by the summary marker (eg RMS and MEAN) on 

and off. One or several measurements can be selected with the commands listed in the following 

and then switched jointly on and off with SUMMary:STATe. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:STAT ON" 



Mode: 

A-Z, VA 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the measurement of the maximum of the absolute value. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX ON" 



Mode: 

VA 

When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command 

SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on 

provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically. 

1088.7531.12 6.46 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:RESult? 

This command queries the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute value. 

Results of average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands 

...:MAXimum:AVERage:RESult? and ...:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult?. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:AVERage:RESult? 

This command is used to query the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute 

value if the average is calculated using the command :CALCulate:MARKer: 

FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:AVER:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult? 

This command is used to query the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute 

value when the peak hold function is switched on with command :CALCulate: 

MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:PHOL:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] 

ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the measurement of the positive peak value if the calculation and. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON" 



Mode: 

VA 




1088.7531.12 6.47 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? 

This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value. Results of 

average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:PPEak:AVERage:RESult? 

and ...:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult? 

This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value if the 

average is calculated using the command :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion: 

SUMMary:AVERage. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:AVER:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult? 

This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value if the peak 

hold function is switched on with command :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion: 

SUMMary:PHOLd. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:PHOL:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the measurement of the negative peak value. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE ON" 



Mode: 

VA 




1088.7531.12 6.48 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value. Results of average 

calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:MPEak:AVERage:RESult? and 

...:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult?. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:RES?" 

Features: *RST- value: - 


Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:AVERage:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value if the average is 

calculated using the command :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion: 


Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:AVER:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value if the peak hold 

function is switched on with command :CALCulate:MARKer: 

FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:RES?" 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and 

negative peak value. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD ON" 



Mode: 

VA 




1088.7531.12 6.49 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and 

negative peak value. Results of average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands 

...:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult? and ...:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult?. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:RES? " 



Mode: 

VA 

This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult? 


negative peak value if the average is calculated using the command :CALCulate: 

MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:AVER:RES? " 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult? 


negative peak value if the peak hold function is switched on using the command 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:PHOL:RES? " 



Mode: 

VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the measurement of the effective (rms) value of the total trace. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUM:RMS ON" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 




1088.7531.12 6.50 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace. Results of 

average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:RMS:AVERage:RESult? and 

...:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?.. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the 



Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES?" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the peak 

hold function is switched on using the command :CALCulate:MARKer: 


Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES?" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the measurement of the mean value of the total trace. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 




1088.7531.12 6.51 E-15


ESIB 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace. Results of 

average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? and 

...:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?.. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the 



Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES?" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult? 

This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the peak 

hold function is switched on using the command :CALCulate:MARKer: 


Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES?" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the peak-hold function. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 

The peak-hold function is reset by switching off and on, again. 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON | OFF 

This command switches the calculation of the average value on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON" 



Modes: 

A-Z, VA 

The calculation of the average is reset by switching off and on, again. 

1088.7531.12 6.52 E-15

ESIB 



This command switches off all measuring functions. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AOFF" 

Features: *RST value: _ 


Modes: 

A-Z, VA 

This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query. 


This command sets the center or receiver to that of the current marker. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:CENT" 



Modes: 

R, A-F 



This command sets the step width of the center frequency to the x-value of the current marker. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:CST" 



Modes: 

R, A-F 



This command sets the start frequency to the frequency of the current marker. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:STAR" 



Modes: 

R, A-F 



This command sets the stop frequency to the frequency of the current marker. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:STOP" 



Modes: 

R, A-F 


1088.7531.12 6.53 E-15


ESIB 


This command sets the marker step width to the x-value of the current marker. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:MST" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 



This command sets the reference level to that of the current marker. 

Example: ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:REF" 



Modes: 

A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.54 E-15

ESIB 


CALCulate:MATH Subsystem 

The CALCulate:MATH - subsystem allows to process data from the SENSe-subsystem in numeric 

expressions. 


CALCulate 

:MATH 

[:EXPRession] 

[:DEFine] 

:STATe 

 

 

-- 

-- 

:CALCulate:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] 

This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces and reference line. Command 

CALCulate:MATH:STATe switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off . 

Parameter: 

Examples: 

::= ‘OP1 - OP2 [ + RLINE]’ 

OP1 ::= TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 

OP2 ::= TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | RLINE 

":CALC:MATH1 (TRACE1 - TRACE3 + RLINE)" 

":CALC:MATH4 (TRACE4 - RLINE)" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The operand [+ RLINE] may be used only if OP2 is different from RLINE. The numeric suffix in 

CALCULATE is not significant. The numeric suffix in MATH denotes the trace where 

the result of the mathematical operation is stored. The number must be identical to the number of the 

operand OP1. 

:CALCulate:MATH:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off. 

Example: ":CALC:MATH1:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The numeric suffix in CALCULATE is not significant. The numeric suffix in MATH 

denotes the trace which the command refers to. 

1088.7531.12 6.55 E-15


ESIB 

CALCulate:PEAKsearch - Subsystem 

The CALCulate:PEAKsearch subsystem allows data to be processed for final measurement. 

CALCulate 

Command PARAMETER Unit Comment 

:PEAKsearch | :PSEarch 

[:IMMediate] 

:MARGin 

:SUBRanges 

:METHod 

 

 

SUBRange | PEAK 

dB 

-- 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate] 

This command activates the generation of final measurement data. 

Example: "CALC:PEAK" 



Mode: 

R 

The numeric suffix in CALCULATE is not significant. 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin MINimun .. MAXimum 

This command defines the margin of the final measurement. 

Example: "CALC:PEAK:MARG 5 dB" 



Mode: 

R 


:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges 1 to 500 

This command defines the number of subranges for the final measurement. 

Example: "CALC:PEAK:SUBR 10" 



Mode: 

R 


1088.7531.12 6.56 E-15

ESIB 


:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod SUBRange | PEAK 

This command defines the method that is used to determine the maxima of a scan. 

Example: "CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR" 

Features: *RST value: PEAK 


Mode: 

R 


1088.7531.12 6.57 E-15


ESIB 

CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem 

The CALCulate:Unit subsystem defines the units for vector signal analyzer mode and power 

measurements. 

CALCulate 

:X 

:UNIT 

:TIME 

:UNIT 

:ANGLe 

:POWer 


S | SYM 

DEG | RAD 

DBM | V | W | DB | 

PCT | UNITLESS | 

DBPW | WATT | 

DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | 

DBPT | DBUA | AMPere 

DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ | 

DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M | 

DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ 



:CALCulate:X:UNIT:TIME S | SYM 

This command selects seconds or symbols as an x-axis unit. 

Example: ":CALC:X:UNIT:TIME S" 

Features: *RST value: S 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:CALCulate: UNIT:ANGLe DEG | RAD 

This command selects the unit for angular measurement. 

Example: ":CALC:UNIT:ANGL DEG" 

Features: *RST- value: RAD 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:CALCulate: UNIT:POWer DBM | V | W | DB | PCT | DBPT | UNITLESS | DBPW | WATT | 

DBUV |DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DBUV_MHZ |DBMV_MHZ| 

DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M |DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ 

This command selects the unit for power. 

Example: ":CALC:UNIT:POW DBM" 

Features: *RST value: _ 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

In the receiver mode, the units DBM, DBUV, DBPT, DBUA, DBPW, DBT, DBUV_M and DBUA_M 

are available. In the analyzer mode, all unit are available except for DBPT, DEG, RAD, S, and HZ. 

The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available only in the vector analyzer mode. 

DBUV_MHZ and DBUA_MHZ denote the units DBUV/MHZ or DBUA/MHZ. 

1088.7531.12 6.58 E-15

ESIB 

CALibration Subsystem 


The commands of the CALibration subsystem perform instrument calibrations. 

CALibration 

[:ALL]? 

:BANDwidth 

[:RESolution]? 

:BWIDth 

[:RESolution]? 

:IQ? 

:LDETector? 

:LOSuppression? 

:PPEak? 

:PRESelector? 

:SHORt? 

:STATe 


-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only / 


query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

query only 

::CALibration[:ALL]? 

This command performs a complete calibration of the instrument. A "0" is returned if the calibration 


Example: "CAL?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALibration:BANDwidth | BWIDth[:RESolution]? 

This command performs a calibration of the filter bandwidths. A "0" is returned if the calibration was 

successful. 

Example: ":CAL:BAND?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALibration:IQ? 

This command performs a calibration of the vector signal analyzer. A "0" is returned if the calibration 


Example: ":CAL:IQ?" 

features: *RST value: - 


Mode: 

VA 

1088.7531.12 6.59 E-15


ESIB 

:CALibration:LDETector? 

This command performs a calibration of the log module’s characteristic and of the detectors. A "0" is 

returned if the calibration was successful. 

Example: ":CAL:LDET?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALibration:LOSuppression? 

This command performs a calibration of the local oscillator suppression. . A "0" is returned if the 

calibration was successful. 

Example: ":CAL:LOS?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALibration:PPEak? 

This command performs a calibration of the tracking YIG filter (preselector peaking). A "0" is 

returned if the calibration was successful. 

Example: ":CAL:PPE?" 



Modes: 

R, A 

:CALibration:PRESelector? 

This command performs a calibration of the preselector. If this is done successfully, "0" is returned. 

Example: ":CAL:PRES?" 

Characteristics: *RST value: - 


Modes: 

R 

:CALibration:SHORt? 

This command performs a short calibration. A "0" is returned if the calibration was successful. 

Example: ":CAL:SHOR?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:CALibration:STATe ON | OFF 

This command determines whether (ON) or not (OFF) the current calibration data are taken into 

consideration. 

Example: ":CAL:STAT OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.60 E-15

ESIB 

DIAGnostic-Subsystem 

DIAGnostic Subsystem 

The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands which support instrument diagnostics for 

maintenance, service and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all of these commands are 

device-specific. 


DIAGnostic 

:SERVice 

:INPut 

[:SELect] 

:FUNCtion 

:NSOurce 

:INFO 

:CCOunt 

:ATTenuation? 

CALibration | RF 

,>numeric_value> 

 

-- 

-- 

-- 

no query 

query only 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] CALibration | RF 

This command toggles between the RF input on the front panel and the internal 120-MHz reference 

signal. 

Example: ":DIAG:SERV:INP CAL" 

Features: *RST value: RF 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:FUNCtion ,... 

This command activates a service function. 

Example: ":DIAG:SERV:FUNC 2,0,2,12,1" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The service function is selected via five parameters: functional group number, board number, 

function number, parameter 1 and parameter 2 (see service manual). 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce ON | OFF 

This command switches the 28-V supply at the rear connector of the noise source on and off. 

Example: ":DIAG:SERV:NSO ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.61 E-15

DIAGnostic Subsystem 

ESIB 

:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation? 

This command queries the cycle counters of the attenuators. The suffix selects the attenuator: 

1: Basic Instrument, input 1 2: Tracking Generator 4: Basic intrument,input2 

The result is output as a list of values separated by a ’,’. The list starts with the date. 

Example: ":DIAG:INFO:CCO:ATT?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is a query and has therefore no *RST value assigned. 

1088.7531.12 6.62 E-15

ESIB 

DISPlay Subsystem 


The DISPlay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information as 

well as of trace data on the display. 

The displays in the split-screen mode are assigned to WINDow 1 (screen A) or 2 (screen B) . 

DISPlay 

:FORMat 

:PROgram 

[:MODE] 

:ANNotation 

:FREQuency 

:LOGO 

:CMAP 

:DEFault 

:HSL 

:PDEFined 


[:WINDow] 

:TEXT 

[:DATA] 

:STATe 

:TIME 

:MINFo 

:TRACe 

:X 

[:SCALe] 

:RVALue 

:ZOOM 

[:FREQuency] 

:STARt 

:STOP 

:CENTer 

:SPACing 

:Y 

[:SCALe] 

:MODE 

:RLEVel 

:OFFSet 

:RVALue 

:AUTO 

:RPOSition 

:PDIVision 

:BOTTom 

:TOP 

:SPACing 

SINGle | SPLit 

 

 

 

0 to 100,0 to 100,0 to 100 

BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | 

CYAN | RED | MAGenta | YELLow | 

WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | 

LGREen | LCYan | LRED | LMAGenta 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

ABSolute | RELative 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LINear|LOGarithmic|PERCent 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

-- 

DB 

DBM 

DB 

DBM|DB|HZ| 

DEG|RAD 

PCT 

DBM|DB|HZ| 

DEG|RAD 

-- 

-- 

-- 


Analyzer mode only 

Vector Signal Analysis or 

Tracking Generator 


1088.7531.12 6.63 E-15


ESIB 

DISPlay 

[:WINDow] 

:TRACe 

:MODE 


:CWRite 

:ANALog 

:HCONtinuous 

[:STATe] 

:SYMBol 

:EYE 

:COUNt 

:BARGraph 

:LEVel 

:LOWer? 

:UPPer? 

:PSAVe 

[:STATe] 

HOLDoff 

WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | 

MAXHold | MINHold | FRESult 

 

 

 

 

DOTS | BARS | OFF 

 

-- 

-- 

 

 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

SYM 




:DISPlay:FORMat SINGle | SPLit 

This command switches the test result display between FULL SCREEN and SPLIT SCREEN. 

Example: ":DISP:FORM SPL" 

Features: *RST value: SINGle 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:DISPlay:PROGram[:MODE] ON | OFF 

This command switches the display between the measuring instrument and the computer function. 

Example: ":DISP:PROG ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF 

This command switches the x-axis annotation on or off. 

Example: ":DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.64 E-15

ESIB 


:DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF 

This command switches the factory logo on the screen on or off. 

Example: ":DISP:LOGO OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:DISPlay:CMAP:DEFault 

This command resets the screen colors of the instrument to their default settings. 

Example: ":DISP:CMAP:DEF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an event and has thus no query and no *RST value assigned. The numeric suffix in 

CMAP is not significant. 

:DISPlay:CMAP:HSL ,, 

This command defines the color table of the instrument. 

Parameter: hue = TINT 

sat = SATURATION 

lum = BRIGHTNESS 

The value range is 0.0 to 100.0 for all parameters. 

Example: ":DISP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

To each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified 

by varying the corresponding color setting. The following assignment applies: 

CMAP1 Trace 1 CMAP8 Soft key State Data Entry 

CMAP2 Trace 2 CMAP9 Soft key State OFF 

CMAP3 Trace 3 CMAP10 Soft key Shade 

CMAP4 Trace 4 CMAP11 Text 

CMAP5 Marker CMAP12 Title 

CMAP6 Grid CMAP13 Background 

CMAP7 softkey State On 

The values set are not changed by *RST. 

1088.7531.12 6.65 E-15


ESIB 

:DISPlay:CMAP:PDEFined BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta | 

YELLow |WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen | 

LCYan |LRED | LMAGenta 

This command defines the color table of the instrument using predefined color values. To each 

numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified by 

varying the corresponding color setting. The same assignment as for :DISPlay:CMAP:HSL applies. 

Example: 

":DISP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The values set are not changed by *RST. 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:MINFo ON | OFF 

This command switches the marker info list on the screen on or off. 

Example: ":DISP:MINF ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


This command defines a comment (max. 50 characters) which can be displayed on the screen. 

Example: ":DISP:TEXT "signal/noise power measurement" 

Features: *RST value: "" (empty) 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The numeric suffix in WINDow is not significant. 


This command switches on or off the screen display of the comment. 

Example: ":DISP:TEXT:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.66 E-15

ESIB 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TIME ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the screen display of date and time. 

Example: ":DISP:TIME ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:RVALue 

This command defines the reference value for the X-axis of the measuring diagram. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:X:RVAL 20SYM" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON | OFF 

This command displays the zoomed current frequency range in the opposite window of the split 

screen representation. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM ON" 



Mode: 

A-F 

The numeric suffix in TRACe is not significant. 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STARt 

 

This command defines the start frequency of the zoomed display range. The value must lie between 

start and stop frequency of the original range. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:STAR 100MHZ" 

Features: *RST value: -- (depending on the current frequency setting) 


Mode: 

A-F 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STOP 

This command defines the stop frequency of the zoomed display range. The value must lie between 

start and stop frequency of the original range. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:STOP 200MHZ" 



Mode: 

A-F 


1088.7531.12 6.67 E-15


ESIB 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:CENTer 

This command shifts the zoomed frequency range to the specified center frequency. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:CENT 1GHZ" 



Mode: 

A-F 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 

This command toggles between linear and logarithmic display. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LIN" 

Features: *RST value: LOGarithmic 


Modes: 

R, A 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe] 10dB to 200dB 

This command defines the display range of the Y-axis (level axis) with logarithmic scaling 

(DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG). 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB" 



Mode: 

A 

For linear scaling, (DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN | PERC) the display range is fixed and cannot be 

set. The numeric suffix in TRACe is not significant. 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute | RELative 

This command defines the scale of the y-axis (absolute or relative). 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL" 

Features: *RST value: ABS 


Mode: 

A 

As long as SYSTem:DISPlay is set to OFF, this command does not directly influence the screen. 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel 

This command defines the reference level. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -60dBm" 

Features: *RST value: -20dBm 


Modes: 

A, VA 


-200dBm to 200dBm 

1088.7531.12 6.68 E-15

ESIB 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet 

This command defines the offset of the reference level. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS -10dB" 



Modes: 

A, VA 


-200dB to 200dB 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue 

This command defines the reference value for the y-axis of the measurement diagram. 

This defines the upper limit of the display range, the corresponding parameters of the manual control 

vary according to the measurement mode. 

In the spectrum analysis mode the setting corresponds to the parameter MAX LEVEL. 

In the vector signal analysis mode the setting corresponds to the parameter REFERENCE VALUE Y 

AXIS. 

IF option tracking generator is fitted and the normalization in the analyzer mode is activated, the 

value corresponds to the parameter REFERENCE VALUE. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL -20dBm" (spectrum analysis) 

":DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL +1.20" (vector signal analysis) 

":DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL 0" (tracking generator) 

Features: *RST value: - coupled to reference level 

0 (vector signal analysis) 

0 dB (tracking generator with active normalization) 


Modes: 

A, VA 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO ON | OFF 

This command defines whether the reference value for the y-axis of the measured diagram is 

coupled to the reference level (default) or can be set independently. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL:AUTO ON" 



Mode: 

A 

This command is available in the analyzer mode only. The numeric suffix in TRACe is not 

significant. 

1088.7531.12 6.69 E-15


ESIB 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0 to 100PCT 

This command defines the position of the reference value. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50PCT" 

Features: *RST value: 100PCT (tracking generator) 

50PCT (vector analyzer) 


Modes: 

A, VA 

The numeric suffix in TRACe is not significant. This command is only valid in conjunction 

with option Tracking Generator or in vector analyzer mode. 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision 

This command defines the scaling of the Y-axis in the current unit. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:PDIV +1.20" 



Mode: 

VA 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom 

This command defines the minimum grid level for the display in the receiver mode. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:BOTT -20" 



Mode: 

R 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:TOP 

This command defines the maximum grid level for the display in the receiver mode. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:TOP 120" 



Mode: 

R 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic | PERCent 

This command toggles between linear and logarithmic display. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN" 

Features: *RST value: LOGarithmic 


Mode: 

A 

The linear display can be LIN/% (PERCent) or LIN/dB (LINear). The numeric suffix in TRACe 

is not significant. 

1088.7531.12 6.70 E-15

ESIB 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold | 

FRESult 

This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces. 

For selection FRESult (display of final measurement) only suffix 3 or 4 is valid for TRACe. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH" 

Features: *RST value: WRITe for TRACe1, STATe OFF for TRACe2 to 4 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:CWRite ON | OFF 

This command selects continuous display of the measured values (continuous write). 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC3:MODE:CWR ON" 



Mode: 

VA 


This command selects continuous display of the measured values in the analyzer mode (analog 

trace). 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC3:MODE:ANAL ON" 



Mode: 

A 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:HCONtinuous ON | OFF 

This command defines whether the traces in the min hold/max hold mode are reset after some 

definite parameter changes. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC3:MODE:HCON ON" 



Mode: 

A 

OFF 

The traces are reset after some definite parameter changes. 

ON 

This mechanism is switched off. 

In general, parameter changes require a restart of the measurement before results are evaluated 

(e.g. with markers). For those changes that are known to require a new measurement (e.g. 

modification of the span), the trace is automatically reset so that erroneous evaluations of previous 

results are avoided. This mechanism can be switched off for those exceptional cases where the 

described behavior is unwelcome. 


1088.7531.12 6.71 E-15


ESIB 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the display of the corresponding trace on or off. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC3 ON" 

Features: *RST value: ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 to 4 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:SYMBol DOTS | BARS | OFF 

This command determines the display of the points of decision on the trace. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:SYMB BARS" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:EYE:COUNt 1 to Result Length 

This command determines the display range of the eye diagram in symbols. 

Example: ":DISP:TRAC:EYE:COUNt 5" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer? 

This command queries the minimum level of the bar graph. 

Example: ":DISP:BARG:LEV:LOW?" 



Mode: 

R 

:DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer? 

This command queries the maximum level of the bar graph. 

Example: ":DISP:BARG:LEV:UPP?" 



Mode: 

R 

1088.7531.12 6.72 E-15

ESIB 


:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the screen saver mode on or off. 

Example ":DISP:PSAV ON" 



:DISPlay: PSAVe:HOLDoff 

This command determines the time after which the screen saver is switched on. Values are input in 

minutes, the valid range is 1 to 100 minutes. 

Example: ":DISP:PSAV:HOLD 10" 



1088.7531.12 6.73 E-15

FORMat Subsystem 

ESIB 

FORMat Subsystem 

The FORMat subsystem specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to the instrument. 


FORMat 

[:DATA] 

:DEXPort 

:DSEParator 

:HEADer 

[:STATe] 

:APPend 

[:STATe] 

:COMMent 

ASCii|REAL|UINT[,] 

POINt|COMMa 

 

 

 

- 

:FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | REAL | UINT [, 32] 

This command specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to the instrument. 

Example: ":FORM REAL,32" 

":FORM ASC" 

Features: *RST value: ASCii 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The data format is either ASCii or one of the formats REAL or UINT (Unsigned Integer). ASCii data 

are transmitted in plain text, separated by commas. REAL data are transmitted as 32-bit IEEE 754 

floating-point numbers in the "definite length block". The format UINT is only used in operating mode 

Vector Signal Analysis, for the symbol table. 

Format setting for the binary transmission of trace data (see also TRACE:DATA?): 

Analyzer mode: REAL, 32 

Vector analyzer: UINT, 8 with digital demodulation, symbol table 

REAL, 32otherwise 

Note: Incorrect format setting will result in numerical conversion, which may lead to incorrect 

results. 

If the format ”FORM REAL, 32” is selected for the above example, the data stream from the analyzer 

to the controller is as follows: 

#432085334..... 

||| || 

|||..|From here follow the data bytes of the data block, here 5334 

||Number of bytes of data block stated in ASCII plain text, here 3208 

|ASCII byte stating the length of the subsequent length counter, here 4 

Head marker of binary data stream 

For this example, the number of transmitted data bytes is as follows: 

Number = number of test points * bytes/value* 2 

3208 = 401 * 4* 2 

The FORMat command is valid for the transmission of trace data. The data format of trace data 

received by the instrument is automatically recognized, regardless of the format which is 

programmed. 

1088.7531.12 6.74 E-15

ESIB 

FORMat-Subsystem 


This command determines the decimal separator (decimal point or comma)for the output of the 

measurement data in ASCII format. Thus, evaluation programms (i.e. MS-Exel) of different language 

versions are supported. 

Example: ":FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN 

Features: *RST value: POINt 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This commad determines if the output file starts with a header (start frequency, sweep time, detector, 

.. = ON) or not. OFF = only measurement data is output. 

Example: ":FORM:DEXP:HEAD OFF 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This commad determines if the output file is overwritten or the data is added to the end of the file. 

Example: ":FORM:DEXP:APP OFF 

Featuures: *RSTvalue: ON 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent 

This command defines a comment for the output file. 

Example: ":FORM:DEXP:COMM ’ASCII EXPORT TRACE 1’" 

Features: *RST value: „“ 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.75 E-15

HCOPy Subsystem 

ESIB 


The HCOPy subsystem controls the output of display information for documentation purposes on output 

devices or files. 


HCOPy 

:ABORt 

:DESTination 

:DEVice 

:COLor 

:LANGuage 

[:IMMediate] 

:ITEM 

:ALL 

:FFEed 

:STATe 

:LABel 

:TEXT 

:PFEed 

:STATe 

:WINDow 

:TABLe 

:STATe 

:TEXT 

:TRACe 

:STATe 

:CAINcrement 

:PAGE 

:DIMensions 

:QUADrant 

:FULL 

:ORIentation 

-- 

‘SYST:COMM:PRIN’| 

’SYST:COMM:CLIP' | 

’MMEM’ 

 

WMF | GDI | EWMF | BMP 

-- 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LANDscape|PORTrait 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

:HCOPy:ABORt 

This command aborts a running hardcopy output. 

Example: ":HCOP:ABOR" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and no query. 

1088.7531.12 6.76 E-15

ESIB 


:HCOPy:DESTination 

This command selects the device for outputting the hardcopy. The availability of the parameters 

depends on the selected data format (see command :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage). 

Parameter: ::= ’MMEM’ | 

’SYST:COMM:PRIN’ | 

’SYST:COMM:CLIP’ 

Example: ":HCOP:DEST2 ’MMEM’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and no query. 

’MMEM’ 

’SYST:COMM:PRIN’ 

’SYST:COMM:CLIP’ 

creates a file for the hardcopy output. Command MMEM:NAME 

defines the file name. All formats can be selected for 

:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage. 

directs the hardcopy to the printer. The printer is selected with command 

SYSTEM:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect. 

GDI should be selected for :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage. 

directs the hardcopy to the clipboard. EWMF should be selected for 

:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage. 

:HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF 

This command selects between color and monochrome hardcopy of the screen. 

Example: ":HCOP:DEV:COL ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage WMF| EWMF | GDI | BMP 

This command determines the data format of the printout. 

Example: ":HCOP:DEV:LANG WMF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

WMF and 

EWMF 

BMP 

GDI 

(WINDOWS Metafile and Enhanced Metafile Format) 

Data formats for output files which can at a later time be integrated in 

corresponding programs for documentation purposes. 

(Bitmap) Data format for output files. 

(Graphics Device Interface) Default format for the output to a printer configured 

under Windows. For the output file the printer driver configured under Windows is 

used and thus a printer-specific format is generated. 

1088.7531.12 6.77 E-15


ESIB 

:HCOPy[:IMMediate] 

This command starts a hardcopy output. 

Example: "HCOP" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

HCOP[1] starts the hardcopy output to device 1 (default), HCOP2 starts the output to device 2. 


:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL 

This command selects the complete screen to be output. 

Example: ":HCOP:ITEM:ALL" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The hardcopy output is always provided with comments, title, time and date. As an alternative to the 

whole screen, only traces (commands ’:HCOPy:DEVice:WINDow:TRACe: STATe ON’) or tables 

(command ’:HCOPy:DEVice:WINDow:TABLe:STATe ON’) can be output. 


The command adds a form feed command to the hardcopy output of the screen. 

Example: ":HCOP:ITEM:FFE2:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:TEXT 

This command defines the title of the screen with a maximum of 60 characters. 

Example: ":HCOP:ITEM:LAB:TEXT ’My Title’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:HCOPy:ITEM:PFEed:STATe ON | OFF 

This command adds a paper feed command to the hardcopy output of the screen (ON). 

Example: ":HCOP:ITEM:PFE2:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.78 E-15

ESIB 


:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe ON | OFF 

This command selects the output of the currently displayed tables (ON). 

Example: ":HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TABL:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The command :HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe 

:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL enables the output of the whole screen. 

OFF same as command 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT 

This command defines the comment text for printout to trace 1 or 2 with a maximum of 100 

characters. 

Example: ":HCOP:ITEM:WIND2:TEXT ‘comment’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF 

This command selects the output of the currently displayed trace (ON). 

Example: ":HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The command :HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:STATe OFF same as command 

:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL enables the output of the whole screen. 


The command automatically changes the colour of the currently displayed trace after printout (ON). 

Example: ":HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:CAIN ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The automatic change of colour of the trace allows outputting to a plotter of several traces of the 

same diagram. For a better distinction, the colour of the trace is changed (”Color Auto Increment”). 

1088.7531.12 6.79 E-15


ESIB 

:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 

The command defines the quadrant which is allocated to the screen output. 

Example: ":HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD1" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The quadrants are defined as QUAD1 at the top right, QUAD2 at the top left, QUAD3 at the bottom 

left and QUAD4 at the bottom right. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an 

*RST value and has no query. 

:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL 

This command defines that the full screen is to be printed out. 

Example: ":HCOP:PAGE:DIM:FULL" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an event which is why it is not assigned and *RST value and has no query. 

:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait 

The command selects the format of the output (portrait and landscape) (hardcopy unit 1 or 2). 

Example: ":HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.80 E-15

ESIB 

INITiate Subsystem 

INITiate Subsystem 

The INITiate subsystem checks the initialization of the trigger subsystem. 

In receiver mode, a distinction is made between single measurement (INITiate1) and scan (INITiate2). 

In signal analyzer mode, a distinction is made between INITiate1 (screen A) and INITiate2 (screen B) in 

split screen representation. 

INITiate 

:CONTinuous 

:CONMeas 

[:IMMediate] 

:DISPlay 


 

-- 

-- 

 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

no query 

no query 

:INITiate:CONTinuous ON | OFF 

This command determines if the trigger system is continuously initiated ("Free Run"). 

Example: ":INIT:CONT OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Setting "INITiate:CONTinuous ON" corresponds to function SCAN/SWEEP CONTinuous, ie the 

scan/sweep of the receiver/analyzer is cyclically repeated. The setting "INITiate:CONTinuous 

OFF" corresponds to function SCAN/SWEEP SINGLE. 

:INITiate:CONMeas 

This command continues the sweep from the current sweep position. 

Example: ":INIT:CONM" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query. 

Sweeps are stopped, for example, in the case of transducer sets between the different transducer 

factors. 

:INITiate[:IMMediate] 

The command initiates a new sweep/scan or starts a single sweep/scan. 

Example: "INIT" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:INITiate:DISPlay ON | OFF 

This command switches the display on or off during a single sweep. 

Example: ":INIT:DISP OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.81 E-15

INPut Subsystem 

ESIB 


The INPut subsystem checks the input features of the instrument. In receiver mode, the suffix is not 

significant. In analyzer mode, a distinction is made between INPut1 (screen A) and INPut2 (screen B) in 

the split-screen representation. 

INPut 

:ATTenuation 

:AUTO 

:MODE 

:PROTection 

:UPORt 

[:VALue]? 

:STATe 

:LISN 

[:TYPE] 

:PHASe 

:PEARth 

:IMPedance 

:CORRection 

:MIXer 

:COUPling 

:GAIN 

:STATe 

:AUTO 

:TYPE 


 

 

NORMal | LNOise|LDIStortion 

 

-- 

 

TWOPhase | FOURphase | OFF 

L1 | L2 | L3 | N 

GROunded | FLOating 

50 | 75 

RAM | RAZ 

 

AC | DC 

 

 

INPUT1 |INPUT2 

DB 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

OHM 

DBM 

query only 

:INPut:ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB 

This command programs the input attenuator. 

Example: ":INP:ATT 40dB" 

Features: *RST value: - (AUTO is set to ON) 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The attenuation of the input calibration line can be programmed in steps of 10 dB (INPUT1) and 5 dB 

(INPUT2). If the attenuation is programmed directly, the autorange function (receiver) and coupling to 

the reference level (analyzer) are switched off. 


This command activates the auto range function (receiver) or automatically couples the input 

attenuation to the reference level. (analyzer). 

Example: ":INP:ATT:AUTO ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.82 E-15

ESIB 


:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal | LNOise | LDIStortion 

This command optimizes the coupling of the input attenuation to the reference level to high sensitivity 

or to high intermodulation immunity. 

Example: ":INP:ATT:AUTO:MODE LDIS" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

For LNOise, the input attenuator value is set 10 dB lower than for INPut:ATTenuation: 

AUTO:MODE NORMal, for LDIStortion it is set 10 dB higher. 


This command defines whether the 0 dB position of the attenuator is to be used in manual or 

automatic adjustment. 

Example: ":INP:ATT:PROT ON" 



Mode: 

R 


This command queries the control lines of the user ports. 

Example: ":INP:UPOR2?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is a query command which is why it is not assigned an *RST value. 

:INPut:UPORt:STATe ON | OFF 

This command toggles the control lines of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut. 

Example: ":INP:UPOR2:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

With ON, the user port is switched to INPut, with OFF to OUTPut. 

1088.7531.12 6.83 E-15


ESIB 

:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] TWOPhase | FOURphase | OFF 

This command selects the V-network to be controlled via the user port: 

TWOPhase = Two-line V-network ESH3-Z5 

FOURphase = Four-line V-networkESH2-Z5 oder ENV4200 

OFF = remote control is deactivated 

Example: ":INP:LISN:TWO" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The numeric suffix in INPut is not significant. 

:INPut:LISN:PHASe L1 | L2 | L3 | N 

This command selects the phase of the V-network on which the RFI voltage is to be measured. 

Example: ":INP:LISN:PHAS L1" 

Features: *RST value: L1 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:INPut:LISN:PEARth GROunded | FLOating 

This command selects the setting of the protectoion earth of the V-network. 

Example: ":INP:LISN:PEAR GRO" 

Features: *RST value: GROunded 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:INPut:IMPedance 50 | 75 

This command sets the nominal input impedance of the instrument. 

Example: ":INP:IMP 75" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

Switching the input impedance to 75 Ω includes the matching elements RAM or RAZ selected by the 

command INPut:IMPedance:CORRection. 

1088.7531.12 6.84 E-15

ESIB 


:INPut:IMPedance:CORRection RAM | RAZ 

This command selects the matching element for 75 Ω input impedance. 

Example: ":INP:IMP:CORR RAM" 

Features: *RST value: - (INPut:IMPedance = 50 Ω) 


Modes: 

A, VA 

:INPut:MIXer -10 to -100 dBm 

This command defines the nominal mixer level of the instrument. 

Example: ":INP:MIX -30" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

:INPut:COUPling AC | DC 

This command switches the input coupling of the RF input 2 between A.C. and D.C. 

Example: ":INP:COUP DC" 

Features: *RST value: AC 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:INPut:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches on the preamplifier. The preselector has to be activated for the preamplifier 

to become effective. Therefore, the preselector is switched on automatically when the preamplifier is 

activated. 

Example: ":INP:GAIN 20dB" 



Mode: 

E 

:INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF 

This command includes the preamplifier into the autoranging function of the receiver. 

Example: ":INP:GAIN:AUTO ON" 



Mode: 

R 

1088.7531.12 6.85 E-15


ESIB 

:INPut:PRESelection[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the preselection on or off. 

Example: ":INP:PRES:STAT ON" 



Modes: 

A, VA, R 

:INPut:TYPE INPUT1 | INPUT2 

This command selects the type of input. 

Example: ":INP:TYPE INPUT1" 

Features: *RST value: INPUT1 


Modes: 

E, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.86 E-15

ESIB 

INSTrument Subsystem 


The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text parameters or fixed 

numbers. In the receiver mode, the suffix is not significant. In the analyzer and vector analyzer mode, a 

distinction is made between INSTrument1 (screen A) and INSTrument2 (screen B) in the split-screen 

representation. 

INSTrument 

[:SELect] 

:NSELect 

:COUPle 


SANalyzer | DDEMod | ADEMod | 

RECeiver 

 

NONE | MODE | X | Y | CONTrol | 

XY | XCONtrol | YCONtrol | ALL 


:INSTrument[:SELect] RECeiver | DDEMod | ADEMod | SANalyzer 

This command switches between the operating modes by means of text parameters. 

Parameter: RECeiver: receiver mode 

SANalyzer: spectrum analysis 

DDEMod: vector signal analysis, digital demodulation 

ADEMod: vector signal analysis, analog demodulation 

Example: ":INST DDEM" 

Features: *RST value: RECeiver 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Switchover to DDEMod or ADEMod is only possible in conjunction with option FSE-B7, Vector Signal 

Analysis. 

:INSTrument:NSELect 1 | 2 | 3 | 6 

This command switches between the two modes by means of numbers. 

Example: ":INST:NSEL 2" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1: spectrum analysis 

2: vector signal analysis, digital demodulation 

3: vector signal analysis, analog demodulation 

6: receiver mode 

Switchover to 2 or 3 is only possible in conjunction with option FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis. 

1088.7531.12 6.87 E-15


ESIB 

:INSTrument:COUPle NONE | MODE | X | Y | CONTrol | XY | XCONtrol | YCONtrol | ALL 

This command defines the coupling between the two measurement windows screen A and B. 

Example: ":INST:COUP NONE" 

Features: *RST value: ALL 


Modes: 

A, VA 

NONE 

no coupling. 

MODE 

the operating mode of the two screens is coupled. 

X or Y 

the scaling of the x- or y axis of the two screens is coupled. 

CONTrol the trigger and gate parameter ,and the sweep parameters SINGle/ CONTinous 

and COUNt of the two screens are coupled. 

XY 

the scaling of the x- and y-axis of the two screens are coupled. 

XCONTrol bzw. the trigger and gate parameter, and the sweep parameters SINGle CONTinous/ 

YCONTrol COUNt of the two screens are coupled. 

ALL 

the scaling of the x- or y axis the trigger and gate parameter and the sweep 

parameters SINGle/ CONTinous/ COUNt of the two screens are coupled. 

The numeric suffix in INSTrument is not significant. 

1088.7531.12 6.88 E-15

ESIB 

MMEMory Subsystem 


The MMEMory (mass memory) subsystem provides commands which allow for access to the storage 

media of the instrument and for storing and loading various instrument settings. 

The NAME command stores the HCOPy outputs in a file. 

The various drives can be addressed via the mass storage unit specifier using the conventional 

DOS syntax. The internal hard disk is addressed by "C:", the floppy-disk drive installed by "A:". 

The file names are indicated as string parameters with the commands being enclosed in 

quotation marks. They correspond to the DOS conventions. 

DOS file names consist of max. 8 ASCII characters and an extension of up to three characters 

separated from the file name by a colon "." Both, the colon and the extension are optional. The colon is 

not part of the file name. DOS file names do not differ between uppercase and lowercase notation. All 

letters and digits are permitted as well as the special characters "_", "^", "$", "~", "!", "#", "%", "&", "-", "{", 

"}", "(", ")", "@" and "‘". Reserved file names are CLOCK$, CON, AUX, COM1 to COM4, LPT1 to LPT3, 

NUL and PRN. 

The two characters "*" and "?" have the function of so-called "wildcards", i.e., they are variables for 

selection of several files. The question mark "?" replaces exactly one character which may be any, the 

asterisk means any of the remaining characters in the file name. "*.*" thus means all files in a directory. 

MMEMory 

:CATalog 

:CDIRectory 

:COPY 

:DATA 

:DELete 

:INITialize 

:LOAD 

:STATe 

:AUTO 

:MDIRectory 

:MOVE 

:MSIS 

:NAME 

:RDIRectory 

:STORe 

:STATe 

:TRACe 

:FINal 

:CLEar 

:STATe 

:ALL 


 

 

, 

[,] 

 

 

1, 

1, 

 

, 

 

 

 

1, 

, 

 

1, 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

no query 

1088.7531.12 6.89 E-15


ESIB 


MMEMory 

:SELect 

[:ITEM] 

:GSETup 

:HWSettings 

:TRACE 

:LINes 

[:ACTive] 

:ALL 

:CSETup 

:HCOPy 

:MACRos 

:SCData 

:TRANsducer 

[:ACTive] 

:ALL 

:CVL 

[:ACTive] 

:ALL 

:ALL 

:NONE 

:DEFault 

:COMMent 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

-- 

-- 

-- 

 

Option Tracking Generator 

no query 

no query 

no query 

:MMEMory:CATalog? 

This command reads out the files and subdirectories of the current directory. A mask, eg "*.bat", can 

be defined so that only files with "bat" as extension are selected. 


,, 

,,,,,,....,,, . 

: in case of a file the field remains empty, 

in case of a subdirectory the field contains "DIR". 

Parameter: ::= DOS file name 

Example: ":MMEM:CAT ’rem?.lin’" 

Characteristics: *RST value: - 

SCPI: conformal 

Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.90 E-15

ESIB 


:MMEMory:CDIRectory 

This command changes the current directory. 

Parameter: 

Example: 

::= DOS path name 

":MMEM:CDIR ’C:\USER\DATA’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

In addition to the path name, the indication of the directory may contain the drive name. The path 

name complies with the DOS conventions. 

:MMEMory:COPY , 

This command copies the files indicated. 

Parameter: , ::= 

::= DOS file name 

Example: ":MMEM:COPY ’C:\USER\DATA\SETUP.CFG’,’A:’" 


SCPI conforming 

Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The indication of the file name may include the path and the drive. The file names and path 

information must be in accordance with the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is 

why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. 

:MMEMory:DATA [,] 

This command writes block data to the specified file. 

Syntax: :MMEMory:DATA , 

:MMEMory:DATA? 

Example: ":MMEM:DATA? ’TEST01.HCP’" 

":MMEM:DATA ’TEST01.HCP’, #217This is the file" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Each starts with the character ‘#’, followed by the value stating the length of the length 

information. This is followed by one or several characters for the length information; then come the 

data themselves. The end character must be set to EOI to ensure correct data transmission. 

:MMEMory:DELete 

This command deletes the files indicated. 

Parameter: ::= DOS file name 

Example: ":MMEM:DEL ’TEST01.HCP’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The indication of the file name contains the path and, optionally, the drive. Indication of the path 

corresponds to the DOS conventions. The file name includes indication of the path and may also 

include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event 


1088.7531.12 6.91 E-15


ESIB 

:MMEMory:INITialize ’A:’ 

This command formats the disk in drive A. 

Example: ":MMEM:INIT ’A:’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Formatting deletes all data stored on the floppy disk. This command is an event which is why it is not 

assigned an *RST value and has no query. 

:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1, 

This command loads instrument settings from files. 

Parameter: 

Example: 

::= DOS file name without extension 

":MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,’A:TEST’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The contents of the file is loaded and set as new instrument state. The file name includes indication 

of the path and may also include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. 


:MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1, 

This command defines which device setting is automatically loaded after the instrument is switched 

on. 

Parameter: 

Example: 

::= DOS file name without extension; 

FACTORY denotes the data set previously in the 

instrument 

":MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,’C:\USER\DATA\TEST’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The contents of the file are read after switching on the instrument and used to define the new device 

state. The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name 

corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an 


:MMEMory:MDIRectory 

This command creates a new directory. 

Parameter: 

Example: 

::= DOS path name 

":MMEM:MDIR ’C:\USER\DATA’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name 



1088.7531.12 6.92 E-15

ESIB 


:MMEMory:MOVE , 

This command renames existing files. 

Parameter: , ::= 

::= DOS file name 

Example: ":MMEM:MOVE ’TEST01.CFG’,’SETUP.CFG’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 




:MMEMory:MSIS ’A:’ | ’C:’ 

This command changes to the drive indicated. 

Example: ":MMEM:MSIS ’A:’" 

Features: *RST value: "C:’ 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The drive may be the internal hard disk C: or the floppy-disk drive A:. The drive is indicated according 

to the DOS conventions. 


This command specifies a file which is printed or plotted to. 

Parameter: ::= DOS filename 

Example: ":MMEM:NAME ’PLOT1.HPG’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The file name and path 

information correspond to the DOS conventions. The output to the printer is routed into a file using 

the command ":HCOP:DEST ’MMEM’". 

:MMEMory:RDIRectory 

This command deletes the directory indicated. 

Parameter: ::= DOS path name 

Example: ":MMEM:RDIR ’C:\TEST’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The directory name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name 



1088.7531.12 6.93 E-15


ESIB 

:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1, 

This command stores the current instrument setting in a file. 

Parameter: ::= DOS file name without extension 

Example: ":MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,’TEST’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The current instrument state is stored as a file. The file name includes indication of the path and may 

also include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an 

event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. 

:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 1 to 4, 

This command stores the selected trace (1 to 4) in ASCII format in a file. 

Parameter: 1 to 4 := selected trace 1 to 4 

:= DOS file name 

Example: ":MMEM:STOR:TRAC 3,’A:\TEST.ASC’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The file name and path 

information correspond to the DOS conventions.This command is an event which is why it is not 

assigned an *RST value and has no query. 

:MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1, 

This command deletes the instrument setting denoted by . 

Parameter: ::= DOS file name without extension 

Example: ":MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,’TEST’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The device data set specified is deleted. The file name includes indication of the path and may also 

include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event 


1088.7531.12 6.94 E-15

ESIB 


MMEMory:STORe:FINal 

This command stores the final measurement data in an ASCII file. 

Parameter: := DOS file name 

Example: "MMEM:STOR:FIN ’A:\TEST.ASC’" 



Mode: 

R 




:MMEMory:CLEar:ALL 

This command deletes all instrument settings in the current directory. 

Example: ":MMEM:CLE:ALL" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup ON | OFF 

This command includes the data of the general setup in the list of data subsets of a device setting to 

be stored/loaded. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:GSET ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON | OFF 

This command includes the hardware settings in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be 

stored/loaded. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:HWS ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Level and frequency lines are stored with this command as well. 

1088.7531.12 6.95 E-15


ESIB 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe ON | OFF 

This command includes the data of the selected trace in the list of data subsets of a device setting to 

be stored/loaded. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:TRACE3 ON" 

Features: *RST value: OFF for all Traces 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON | OFF 

This command includes the active limit lines in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be 


Example: ":MMEM:SEL:LIN ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Upon MMEM:LOAD the limit lines which are not currently active but contained in the data set are 

restored as well. 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON | OFF 

This command includes all limit lines in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be 


Example: ":MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command includes selection of the active limit lines. 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON | OFF 

This command includes the current color setting in the list of partial datasets of a device setting to be 


Example: ":MMEM:SEL:CSET ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy ON | OFF 

This command includes the hardcopy settings in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be 


Example: ":MMEM:SEL:HCOPy ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.96 E-15

ESIB 


:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON | OFF 

This command includes the keyboard macros in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be 


Example: ":MMEM:SEL:MACRos ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


This command includes the tracking generator calibration data in the list of data subsets of a device 

setting to be stored/loaded. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:SCData ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command only available in conjunction with the option Tracking Generator. 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer[:ACTive] ON | OFF 

This command includes the active transducer factors and set in the list of data subsets of a device 

setting to be stored/loaded. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:TRAN ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Upon MMEM:LOAD the transducer factors and sets which are not currently active but contained in the 

data set are restored as well. 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ON | OFF 

This command includes all transducer factors and sets in the list of data subsets of a device setting 

to be stored/loaded. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:TRAN:ALL ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned. 

1088.7531.12 6.97 E-15


ESIB 


This command includes the active conversion loss table into the list of data subrecords to be stored / 

loaded for a device setup. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:CVL ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is available only in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21. 


This command includes all conversion loss table into the list of data subrecords to be stored / loaded 

for a device setup. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:CVL ON" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is available only in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21. 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL 

This command includes all data subsets in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be 


Example: ":MMEM:SEL:ALL" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE 

This command deletes all data subsets in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be 


Example: ":MMEM:SEL:NONE" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.98 E-15

ESIB 


:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault 

This command sets the default list of the data subsets of a device setting to be stored/loaded. 

Example: ":MMEM:SEL:DEFault" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 



This command defines a comment for a device setting to be stored. 

Example: ":MMEM:COMM ’Setup for GSM measurement’" 

Features: *RST value: blank comment 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.99 E-15

OUTPut Subsystem 

ESIB 


The OUTPut subsystem checks the output features of the instrument. 

In conjunction with option tracking generator, in the split screen mode, a distinction is made between 

OUTPut1 (screen A) and OUTPut2 (screen B). 


OUTPut 

[:STATe] 

 

-- 

Option Tracking Generator 

:UPORt 

[:VALue] 

:STATe 

:AF 

:SENSitivity 

 

 

ESIB 


:OUTPutAF:SENSitivity 

This command changes the sensitivity of the AF-output. 

Parameter: ::= 0.1 PCT to 100 PCTfor AM 

0.1 KHZ to 100 KHZfor FM 

0.0 1RAD to 10 RADfor PM 

Example: ":OUTP:AF:SENS 20PCT" 

Features: *RST value: 100 % for AM 

100 kHz for FM 

10 rad for PM 


Mode: 

VA-A 

1088.7531.12 6.101 E-15

SENSe Subsystem 

ESIB 


The SENSe subsystem is itself divided up into several subsystems. The commands of these 

subsystems directly control device-specific settings, they do not refer to the signal characteristics of the 

measurement signal. 

The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the receiver, the analyzer and vector 

analyzer. In accordance with the SCPI standard, it is for this reason optional, which means that it is not 

necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences. 

In the split-screen representation, a distinction is made between SENSe1 and SENSe2: 

SENSe1 =;^ screen A; 

SENSe2 =;^ screen B 

SENSe:ADEMod Subsystem 

This subsystem controls the parameters for analog demodulation. 

It is active only in conjunction with option Vector Signal Analysis, FSE-B7. 

[SENSe] 

:ADEMod 

:AF 

:COUPling 

:SQUelch 

[:STATe] 

:LEVel 

:SBANd 

:RTIMe 


AC | DC 

 

 

NORMal | INVerse 

 

DBM 


:[SENSe:]ADEMod:AF:COUPling AC | DC 

This command selects coupling of the AF-branch. 

Example: ":ADEM:AF:COUP DC" 

Features: *RST value: AC 


Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]ADEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the squelch for the audio branch on or off. 

Example: ":ADEM:SQU ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

1088.7531.12 6.102 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]ADEMod:SQUelch:LEVel 30 to -150 dBm 

This command defines the switching threshold for the squelch referred to the measured signal. 

Example: ":ADEM:SQU -10DBM" 

Features: *RST value: -40dBm 


Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]ADEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse 

This command selects the side band for the demodulation. 

Example: ":ADEM:SBAN INV" 

Features: *RST value: NORMal 


Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]ADEMod:RTIMe ON | OFF 

This command selects whether the demodulation performed in real time or in blocks. 

Example: ":ADEM:RTIM ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

1088.7531.12 6.103 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:AVERage Subsystem 

The SENSe:AVERage subsystem calculates the average of the data acquired. A new test result is 

obtained from various successive measurements. The amount of test points and the axis reference of 

the new result correspond to those of the original measurements. 

[SENSe] 

:AVERage 

:COUNt 

:AUTO 

[:STATe] 

:TYPE 


 

 

 

MAXimum | SCALar 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:COUNt 0 to 32767 

The command specifies the number of measurements which are combined. 

Example: ":AVER:COUN 16" 



Modes: 

R, A. VA-D 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:COUNt:AUTO ON | OFF 

AUTO ON selects a suitable number of :COUNt for the respective type of measurement. 

Example: ":AVER:COUN:AUTO ON" 



Modes: 

R, A. VA-D 

:[SENSe:]AVERage[:STATe] ON | OFF 

The command switches on or off the average function. 

Example: "AVER OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.104 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]AVERage:TYPE MAXimum | MINimum | SCALar 

The command selects the type of average function. 

Example: ":AVER:TYPE SCAL" 

Features: *RST value: SCALar 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The following average functions have been defined: 

MAXimum (MAX HOLD): AVG(n) = MAX(X 1 to .X n ) 

MINimum (MIN HOLD): AVG(n) = Min(X 1 to .X n ) 

SCALar (AVERAGE): 

1 

AVG( n)= × 

n 

n 

∑ xi 

= 

1088.7531.12 6.105 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem 

This subsystem controls the setting of the instrument’s filter bandwidths. Both groups of commands 

(BANDwidth and BWIDth) perform the same functions. 


[SENSe] 

:BANDwidth | :BWIDth 

[:RESolution] 

:AUTO 

:MODE 

:FFT 

 

 

ANALog|DIGital 

 

HZ 

-- 

-- 

-- 

:RATio 

:FILTer 

:AUTO 

:RATio 

:DEMod 

:COUPling 

:PLL 

:VIDeo 

 

 

 

| SINe | PULSe | 

NOISe 

 

 

AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW 

-- 

DBHZ 

-- 

-- 

HZ 



:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] 1 Hz to 10 MHz 

This command defines the IF bandwidth (6-dB bandwidth) of the receiver or resolution bandwidth of 

the analyzer. 

Example: 

":BAND 1MHz" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

In the receiver mode, ESIB offers the IF bandwidths (6 dB bandwidths) 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 1 

kHz, 9 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz, 120 kHz, 1 MHz and 10 MHz. The bandwidth is limited by the set 

receive frequency: RES BW ≤ f E /2. When the quasi peak detector is switched on, a fixed bandwidth 

is preset depending on the frequency (see also chapter 4, section "Selecting a Detector"). 

In the analyzer and vector analyzer mode, the values for the resolution bandwidth are rounded in 

1 | 2 | 3 | 5 steps. 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF 

In receiver mode with activated quasi peak detector, this command either automatically couples the 

IF bandwidth of the receiver to the frequency range or cancels the coupling . 

In analyzer mode, this command either automatically couples the resolution bandwidth of the 

instrument to the span or cancels the coupling. 

Example: 

":BAND:AUTO OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The automatic coupling matches the resolution bandwidth to the currently set span according to the 

relationship between span and resolution bandwidth. 

1088.7531.12 6.106 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE ANALog | DIGital 

This command toggles between analog and digital resolution filters for the 1-kHz bandwidth. 

Example: ":BAND:MODE DIG" 

Features: *RST value: ANALog 


Mode: 

A 

Depending on the bandwidth, the resolution filters are automatically toggled between digital filters 

(1kHz). The 1-kHz bandwidth is present in the instrument as a digital 

filter and as an analog filter and can be toggled using this command. If the analog filter is selected for 

the bandwidth 1kHz, the FFT-filtering for bandwidths ≤ 1kHz is switched off. 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE:FFT ON | OFF 

This command toggles the digital filters used for bandwidths ≤ 1 kHz between ordinary mode and 

FFT-filter mode. 

Example: ":BAND:MODE:FFT ON" 



Mode: 

A 

The filter bandwidth of 1 kHz is switched to digital filtering for both ON and OFF. 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.0001 to 1 

This command defines the ratio resolution bandwidth (Hz) / span (Hz). 

Example: ":BAND:RAT 0.1" 

Features: *RST value: -- (AUTO is set to ON) 


Modes: 

A, VA, R 

The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio Span/RBW used in manual control. 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FILTer 3dB | 6dB 

In analyzer mode, this command switches between 3 dB and 6 dB bandwidths of the resolution 

filters. 

Example: "SENS:BWID:RES:FILT 6 dB" 



Mode: 

A 

1088.7531.12 6.107 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo 1Hz to 10MHz 

This command defines the instrument’s video bandwidth. 

Example: ":BAND:VID 10kHz" 



Mode: 

A 

The values for the video bandwidth are rounded in 1 | 2 | 3 | 5 steps. 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON | OFF 

This command either automatically couples the instrument’s video bandwidth to the resolution 

bandwidth or cancels the coupling. 

Example: ":BAND:VID:AUTO OFF" 



Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATIO 0.001to 1000 | SINe | PULSe | NOISe 

This command defines the ratio video bandwidth (Hz) / resolution bandwidth (Hz). 

Parameter: The parameters SINe, PULSe and NOISe may be used as synonyms for the 

following values: 

SINe: 1 PULSe: 10 NOISe: 0.1 

Example: ":BAND:VID:RAT 10" 



Modes: 

A, VA 

The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio RBW/VBW used in manual control. 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:DEMod 5kHz to 200kHz (Real Time on) | 

5kHz to 5MHz (Real Time off) 

This command defines the demodulation bandwidth of the instrument for analog demodulation. 

Example: ":BAND:DEM 100KHZ" 

Features: *RST value: 100KHZ 


Mode: 

VA-A 

The values for the demodulation bandwidth are rounded in steps of 1 | 2 | 3 | 5. 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:PLL AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW 

This command defines the bandwidth of the main PLL of the instrument synthesizer. 

Example: ":BAND:PLL HIGH" 

Features: *RST value: AUTO 


Mode: 

A 

1088.7531.12 6.108 E-15

ESIB 


SENSe:CORRection-Subsystem 

The SENSe:CORRection-subsystem controls the correction of measured results by means of 

frequency-dependent correction factors (e. g. for antenna or cable attenuation). 

It also controls calibration and normalization during operation with the option Tracking Generator . 

[SENSe] 

:CORRection 

:METHod 

:COLLect 

[:ACQuire] 

[:STATe] 

:RECall 


TRANsmission | REFLexion 

THRough | OPEN 

 

option Tracking Generator 

no query 

no query 

:TRANsducer 

:CATalog? 

:ACTive? 

:SELect 

:UNIT 

:SCALing 

:COMMent 

:DATA 

[:STATe] 

:DELete 

:TSET 

:CATalog? 

:ACTive? 

:SELect 

:UNIT 

:BREak 

:COMMent 

:RANGe 

[:STATe] 

:DELete 

:CVL 

:CATalog? 

:SELect 

:MIXer 

:SNUMber 

:BAND 

:TYPE 

:PORTs 

:BIAS 

:COMMent 

:DATA 

:CLEar 

 

 


 

, .. 

 

-- 

 

 

 

 

, , .. 

 

-- 

 

 

 

A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J 

ODD | EVEN | EODD 

2 | 3 

 

 

, .. 

-- 

HZ , -- 

-- 

HZ, HZ, -- 

-- 

A 

HZ , DB 

-- 

query only 

query only 

no query 

query only 

query only 

no query 

option external mixer output 

query only 

no query 

1088.7531.12 6.109 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command activates/deactivates normalization of the measurement results. 

Example: ":CORR ON " 



Mode: 

A 

This command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator. 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission | REFLexion 

This command selects the kind of measurement with active tracking generator 

(transmission/reflexion). 

Example: ":CORR:METH TRAN " 

Features: *RST value: TRANsmission 


Mode: 

A 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough | OPEN 

This command selects the kind of measurement for the reference values of the normalization 

(response calibration). 

Example: ":CORR:COLL THR" 

Features: 

Mode: 

THRough 

OPEN 

*RST value: 

SCPI: 

conforming 

A 

"TRANsmission" mode: calibration with direct connection between tracking 

generator and device input. 

"REFLexion" mode: calibration with short circuit at the input 

only valid in "REFLexion" mode:calibration with open input 

This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value an a query. It is only valid in 

conjunction with option Tracking Generator. 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall 

This command restores the instrument setting that was valid for the measurement of the reference 

data. 

Example: ":CORR:REC" 



Mode: 

A 

This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and a query. It is only valid 

in conjunction with option Tracking Generator. 

1088.7531.12 6.110 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog? 

This command reads out the names of all transducer factors stored on the harddisk. 


,, 

,,,,,,....,, 

 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:CAT?" 



Mode: 

R, A 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive? 

This command reveals the active transducer factor. If no transducer factor is switched on, a void 

string will be output. 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:ACT?" 



Mode: 

R, A 


This command selects the transducer factor designated by . If does not exist yet, a 

new transducer factor is created. 

Parameter: ::= Name of the transducer factor in string data form with a 

maximum of 8 characters. 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:SEL ’FACTOR1’" 



Modes: 

R, A 

This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands for modifying/activating transducer 

factors. 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT 

This command defines the unit of the transducer factor selected. 

Parameter: ::= ’DB’ | ’DBM’ | ’DBMV’ | ’DBUV’ | ’DBUV/M’ | ’DBUA’ 

’DBUA/M’ | ’DBPW’ | ’DBPT’ 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:UNIT ’DBUV’" 

Features: *RST value: ’DB’ 


Modes: 

R, A 

Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent. 

1088.7531.12 6.111 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing LINear | LOGarithmic 

This command defines whether the frequency scaling of the transducer factor is linear or logarithmic. 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:SCAL LOG" 

Features: *RST value: LINear 


Modes: 

R, A 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent 

This command defines the comment for the selected transducer factor. 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:COMM ’FACTOR FOR ANTENNA’" 

Features: *RST value ’’ (empty comment) 


Modes: 

R, A 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA ,.. 

This command defines the test points for the selected transducer factor. The values are entered as a 

series of frequency/level pairs. The frequencies must be in ascending order. 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:TRANsducer:DATA 1MHZ,-30,2MHZ,-40" 



Modes: 

R, A 

Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent. The level values are 

sent as dimensionless numbers; the unit is specified by means of the command 

SENS:CORR:TRAN:UNIT. 


This command switches the selected transducer factor on or off. 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN ON" 



Modes: 

R, A 


1088.7531.12 6.112 E-15

ESIB 



This command deletes the selected transducer factor. 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:DEL" 



Modes: 

R, A 

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value. 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog? 

This command polls the names of all transducer factors stored on the harddisk. 


,, 

,,,,,,....,, 

 

Example: ":CORR:TSET:CAT?" 

Mode: 

R, A 



:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:ACTive? 

This command reveals the active transducer set. If no transducer set is switched on, a void string will 

be output. 

Example: ":CORR:TSET:ACT?" 



Mode: 

R, A 


This command selected the transducer set designated by . If does not exist yet, a 

new set is created. 

Parameter: ::= name of the transducer set in string data form with a maximum 

of 8 characters. 

Example: ":CORR:TSET:SEL ’SET1’" 



Modes: 

R, A 

This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands for changing/activating the 

transducer sets. 

1088.7531.12 6.113 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT ’DB’ | ’DBM’ | ’DBUV’ | ’DBUV/M’ | ’DBUA’ | ’DBUA/M’’ | 

’DBPW’ | ’DBPT 

This command defines the unit of the selected transducer sets. When assigning transducer factors 

to the set, only factors which are compatible to the selected unit, i. e. factors with the same unit or the 

unit dB, are allowed. 

Example: ":CORR:TSET:UNIT ’DBUV’" 

Features: *RST value: ’DB’ 


Modes: 

R, A 

Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent. 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak ON | OFF 

This command defines if the sweep is to be stopped on changeover from range to another. 

Example: ":CORR:TSET:BRE ON" 



Modes: 

R, A 

Prior to the above command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent. 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent 

This command defines the comment for the selected transducer set. 

Example: ":CORR:TSET:COMM ’SET FOR ANTENNA’" 

Features: *RST value ’’ (empty comment) 


Modes: 

R, A 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe ,,.. 

This command defines a partial range of the selected transducer set. The partial range is determined 

by its start and stop frequencies plus a list of names of the assigned transducer factors. The ranges 

1 to 10 must be sent in ascending order. 

Parameter: ,::= start frequency, stop frequency of the range 

...::= list of names for the assigned transducer factors. 

The individual names must be characterized by single 

quotation marks (’) and separated by commas. 

Example: ":CORR:TRAN:TSET:RANG 1MHZ,2MHZ,’FACTOR1,’FACTOR2’" 



Modes: 

R, A 


1088.7531.12 6.114 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches the selected transducer set on or off. 

Example: ":CORR:TSET ON" 



Modes: 

R, A 



This command deletes the selected transducer set. 

Example: ":CORR:TSET:DEL" 



Modes: 

R, A 

This command is an event and thus has no *RST value assigned. 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog? 

This command polls the names of all conversion-loss tables stored on the harddisk. 


,, 

,,,,,,....,, 

 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:CAT?" 



Mode: 

A 

This command is only valid in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21. 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect 

This command selects the Conversion Loss Table designated with . If is 

not available, a new Conversion Loss Table will be created. 

Parameter: ::= Name of Conversion Loss Table as string data with 

a maximum of 8 characters 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:SEL ’LOSS_TAB’" 



Mode: 

A 

This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands used to change/activate the 

Conversion Loss files. It is only valid in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21. 

1088.7531.12 6.115 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer 

This command defines the type designation of the mixer in the Conversion Loss Table. 

Parameter: ::= Type designation of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:MIX ’FSE_Z60’" 



Mode: 

A 

Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid 

in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21. 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber 

This command defines the serial number of the mixer in the Conversion Loss Table. 

Parameter: ::= Serial number of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:SNUM ’123.4567’" 



Mode: 

A 



:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J 

This command defines the waveguide band in the Conversion Loss Table. 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:BAND E" 



Mode: 

A 



:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD 

This command defines the type of harmonic in the Conversion Loss Table. 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:TYPE EODD" 



Mode: 

A 



1088.7531.12 6.116 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs 2 | 3 

This command defines the type of mixer in the Conversion Loss Table. 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:PORT 3" 



Mode: 

A 



:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS 

This command defines the bias current in the Conversion Loss Table. 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:BIAS 7mA" 



Mode: 

A 



:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent 

This command defines the comment in the Conversion Loss Table. 

Parameter: ::= Comment of mixer with a maximum of 60 characters 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:COMMENT ’MIXER FOR BAND U’" 



Mode: 

A 



:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA ,.. 

This command defines the reference values of the selected Conversion Loss Tabels. The values are 

entered as a result of frequency/level pairs. The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order. 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:DATA 1MHZ,-30DB,2MHZ,-40DB" 



Mode: 

A 



1088.7531.12 6.117 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar 

This command deletes the selected Conversion Loss Table. 

Example: ":CORR:CVL:CLE" 



Mode: 

A 




1088.7531.12 6.118 E-15

ESIB 


SENSe:DEMod Subsystem 

The SENSe:DEMod subsystem controls the analog demodulation of the video signal. 

COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT 

[SENSe] 

:DEMod 

OFF | AM | FM 

:[SENSe:]DEMod OFF | AM | FM 

This command selects the type of analog demodulation. 

Example: ":DEM FM" 



Modes: 

R, A 

1088.7531.12 6.119 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:DETector Subsystem 

The SENSe:DETector subsystem controls the recording of measurement values via the type of detector 

selected for each trace. 

The suffix in SENSe is not significant in this subsystem. 

[SENSe] 

:DETector 

[:FUNCtion] 


:AUTO 

:RECeiver 

[:FUNCtion] 

:FMEasurement 

APEak | NEGative| POSitive | SAMPle| RMS 

| AVERage | QPEak | ACVideo 

 

POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | 

QPEak | ACVideo, POSitive | NEGative| 

RMS | AVERage | QPEak | ACVideo 

POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | 

QPEak | ACVideo 

-- 

ACVideo only with option 

ESIB-B1 

:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] APEak | NEGative | POSitive| SAMPle | RMS | 

AVERage | QPEak 

This command switches the detector for recording of the measured value. 

Example: ":DET POS" 

Features: *RST value: Trace1: POSitive 

Trace 2: AVERage 


Modes: 

R, A 

In scan mode of the receiver, the detectors POSitive, RMS, AVERage, QPEak and ACVideo are 

available (ACVideo only with option ESIB-B1). 

In the analyzer mode, the detectors APEak, POSitive, NEGative, RMS, SAMPLe and AVERage are 

available. The value "APEak" (AutoPeak) displays both the positive peak value and the negative 

peak value when noise is present. The positive peak value is displayed when one signal is present. 

The trace is selected by means of the numeric suffix after DETector. 

:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion]:AUTO ON | OFF 

This command either couples the detector to the current trace setting or turns coupling off. 

Example: ":DET:AUTO OFF" 



Mode: 

A 

The trace is defined by the numeric suffix at DETector. 

1088.7531.12 6.120 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | QPEak| 

ACVideo 

This command switches on the detectors for single measurements. 

Example: ":DET:REC POS,AVER,QPE" 

Features: *RST value: POS 


Mode: 

R 

The trace is not selectable; up to four detectors may be switched on simultaneously. 

The RMS, NEgative and ACVideo detector cannot be switched on simultaneously. 

Selection ACVideo is available only if the instrument is equipped with the linear video output (option 

ESIB-B1). 

:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement NEGative | POSitive | RMS | AVERage| QPEak | 

ACVideo 

This command selects the detector for the final measurement (the detector used for the subsequent 

final measurement). 

Example: "DET:FME POS" 

Features: *RST value: Trace 1, 3 POS 

Trace 2, 4 AVERage 


Mode: 

R 

1088.7531.12 6.121 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:DDEMod Subsystem 

This subsystem controls the parameters for digital demodulation. 

It is only active in conjunction with operating mode Vector Signal Analysis (option FSE-B7). 


[SENSe] 

:DDEMod 

:FORMat 

:SBANd 

:QPSK 

:FORMat 

:PSK 

:NSTate 

:FORMat 

:MSK 

:FORMat 

QPSK | PSK | MSK | QAM | FSK 

NORMal | INVerse 

NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4 

2 | 8 

NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8 

TYPE1 | TYPE2 | 


NORMal | DIFFerential 

:QAM 

:NSTate 

:FSK 

:NSTate 

:SRATe 

:TIMe 

:PRATe 

:FILTer 

:MEASurement 

:REFerence 

:ALPHa 

:NORMalize 

:PRESet 

:SEARch 

:PULSe 

:STATe 

:SYNC 

:CATalog? 

:SELect 

:OFFSet 

:PATTern 

:STATe 

:NAME 

:COMMent 

:DATA 

:DELete 

:MONLy 

:TIME 

:TCAPture 

:LENGth 

16 

2 | 4 

 

 

1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16 

OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | B22 | 

B25 | B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM 

|RM95 | QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF 

RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | B22 | B25 | 

B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 | 

QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF 

 

 

GSM | EDGe | TETRa | DCS1800 | PCS1900 

|PHS | PDCup | PDCDown | APCO25CQPSK | 

APCO25C4FM | CDPD | DECT | CT2 | ERMes | 

MODacom | PWT | TFTS | F16 | F322 | F324 | 

F64| FQCDma | F95Cdma | RQCDma | R95Cdma 

| FNADc | RNADc 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

HZ 

SYM 

SYM 

SYM 

query only 


1088.7531.12 6.122 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FORMat QPSK | PSK | MSK | QAM | FSK 

This command selects the digital demodulation type. 

Example: ":DDEM:FORM QPSK" 

Features: *RST value: MSK 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse 

This command selects the sideband for the demodulation. 

Example: ":DDEM:SBAN INV" 

Features: *RST value: NORMal 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4 

This command determines the specific demodulation type for QPSK. 

Example: ":DDEM:QPSK:FORM DPI4" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PSK:NSTate 2 | 8 

This command determines the specific demodulation type for PSK. 

Example: ":DDEM:PSK:NST 2" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

Value 2 (i.e. PSK2) corresponds to BPSK demodulation, value 8 the 8PSK demodulation. 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8 

This command determines the specific demodulation type for PSK. 

Example: ":DDEM:PSK:FORM DIFF" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

1088.7531.12 6.123 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:MSK:FORMat TYPE1 | TYPE2 | NORMal | DIFFerential 

This command determines the specific demodulation type for MSK. 

Example: ":DDEM:MSK:FORM TYPE2" 

Features: *RST value: TYPE2 | DIFFerential 


Mode: 

VA-D 

TYPE1 | NORMal corresponds to MSK demodulation, TYPE2 | DIFFerential corresponds to 

DMSK demodulation. 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:QAM:NSTate 16 

This command determines the specific demodulation type for QAM. 

Example: ":DDEM:QAM:NST 16" 


SCPI: device-specific. 

Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FSK:NSTate 2 | 4 

This command determines the specific demodulation type for FSK. 

Example: ":DDEM:FSK:NST 2" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

The parameter 2 corresponds to the demodulation type 2FSK, the parameter 4 to the demodulation 

type 4FSK. 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SRATe 160 Hz to 1.6 MHz 

This command defines the symbol rate. 

Example: ":DDEM:SRAT 18kHz" 

Features: *RST value: 270.833333kHz 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:TIME 1 to Frame Length 

The command determines the number of displayed symbols (result length). 

Example: ":DDEM:TIME 80" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

1088.7531.12 6.124 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRATe 1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16 

This command determines the number of points per symbol. 

Example: ":DDEM:PRAT 8" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:MEASurement OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian| B22 | B25 

| B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 | 

QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF 

This command selects the input filter for the test signal. 

B22 Bessel 22 

B25 Bessel 25 

B44 Bessel 44 

QFM or FM95 IS95-CDMA fm 

QFR or FR95 IS95-CDMA fr 

QRM or RM95 IS95-CDMA rm 

QRR or RR95 IS95-CDMA rr 

A25Fm 

APCO 25 fm 

EMES 

EDGE mes 

EREF 

EDGE ref 

Example: ":DDEM:FILT:MEAS RCOS" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian| B22 | B25 | B44 | 

QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 | QRR | RR95 

| A25Fm | EMES | EREF 

This command selects the input filter for the reference signal. 

Example: ":DDEM:FILT:REF RCOS" 

Features: *RST value: GAUSsian 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa 0.2 to 1 

This command determines the filter characteristic (ALPHA/BT). Step width is 0.05. 

Example: ":DDEM:FILT:ALPH 0.5" 

Features: *RST value: 0.3 


Mode: 

VA-D 

1088.7531.12 6.125 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:NORMalize ON | OFF 

This command switches normalizing of the unit circle on or off using IQ offset. 

Example: ":DDEM:NORM OFF" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:PULSe:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the signal burst search on or off. 

Example: ":DDEM:SEAR:PULS:STAT OFF" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:CATalog? 

This command polls the names of all sync-file data sets stored on the harddisk. Syntax of output 

format: 

,, 

,,,,,,....,, 

Example: ":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:CAT?" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect 

This command selects a predefined sync file. A file that has been set previously by the command 

DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern becomes invalid. 

Example: 

":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:SEL "PATT_1" 

Feature: *RST value: "" 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:OFFSet 

This command defines the offset of the display with reference to the synchronization sequence. 

Example: ":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:OFFS 10SYM" 

Features: *RST value: 0 SYM 


Mode: 

VA-D 

1088.7531.12 6.126 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern 

This command defines the synchronization sequence.A file that has been set previously by the 

command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:SELect becomes invalid. 

Example: ":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:PATT "1101001" 

Features: *RST value: "" 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches the search for a synchronization sequence on or off. 

Example: ":DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:STAT ON" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME 

This command selects a sync file to be edited or entered anew. 

Example: ":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME "PATT_NEW" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent 

This command defines a comment on a sync file. This sync file must be previously selected by the 

command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME. 

Example: 

":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:COMM "PATTERN FOR PPSK" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA 

This command defines a synchronization pattern for the sync file. Inputs other than "1" or "0" are 

interpreted as "Don’t Care Bits". This sync file must be previously selected by the command 

DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME. 

Example: ":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DATA "1101001" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

1088.7531.12 6.127 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete 

This command deletes a synchronization pattern on the hard disk. This sync file must be previously 

selected by the command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME. 

Example: 

":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DEL 

Features: *RST-value: "" 


Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MONLy ON | OFF 

For setting ON, this command sets the analyzer so that the measured values are displayed and 

taken into account in the error analysis only if the set sync pattern is found . Bursts with a wrong sync 

pattern (sync not found) are ignored. If an invalid sync pattern is found or if there is none, the 

measurement is halted and continued in the presence of a valid sync pattern. 

This command is available only if the search for a synchronization sequence is activated 

(DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:STATe = ON). 

Example: 

":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:MONL ON" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:TIME 100 to 1600 

This command determines the number of symbols required for demodulation (frame length). The 

values > 800 are only permissible if the number of points per symbol is 1600 only if 

the number of points per symbol is

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet GSM | EDGe | TETRa | DCS1800 | PCS1900 |PHS | PDCup | 

PDCDown | APCO25CQPSK | APCO25C4FM | CDPD | DECT | CT2 

| ERMes | MODacom | PWT | TFTS | F16 | F322 | F324 | F64| 

FQCDma | F95Cdma | RQCDma | R95Cdma | FNADc | RNADc 

This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standard 

transmission method. 

Example: ":DDEM:PRES TETR" 

Features: *RST value: GSM 


Mode: 

VA-D 

APCO25CQPSK 

APCO25C4FM 

F16 

F322 

F324 

F64 

FNADc 

RNADc 

FQCDma or F95Cdma 

RQCDma or R95Cdma 

APCO25 Continous Phase QPSK 

APCO25Continous Phase 4FM 

FLEX 1600 - 2FSK 

FLEX 3200 - 2FSK, 



Forward NADC 

Reverse NADC 

Forward CDMA acc. to IS95 Standard 

Reverse CDMA acc. to IS95 Standard 

:[SENSe:]TCAPture:LENGth 1024 | 2048 | 4096 | 8192 | 16384 

This command determines the number of sampling points that are written into the memory for each 

measurement (memory size). 

Example: "TCAP:LENG 1024" 



Mode: 

VA-D 

1088.7531.12 6.129 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:FILTer Subsystem 

The SENSe:FILTer subsystem selects the filters in the video signal path.This subsystem is active only in 

the Vector Signal Analysis mode (option FSE-B7). 

[SENSe] 

:FILTer 

:HPASs 

[:STATe] 

:FREQuency 


 

 

-- 

HZ 

Vector Signal Analyzer 

:LPASs 

[:STATe] 

:FREQuency 

:CCITt 

[:STATe] 

:CMESsage 

[:STATe] 

:DEMPhasis 

[:STATe] 

:TCONstant 

:LINK 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DISPlay | AUDio 

-- 

HZ | PCT 

-- 

-- 

S 

Vector Signal Analyzer 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command activates the high-pass filter in the AF-branch for analog demodulation. 

Example: ":FILT:HPAS ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:HPASs:FREQuency 30 Hz | 300 Hz 

In the Vector Signal Analysis mode with analog demodulation, this command defines the frequency 

limit of the high-pass filter in the AF-branch. For REAL TIME ON absolute frequencies are entered, 

for REAL TIME OFF, the frequencies are entered relative to the demodulation bandwidth. 

Example: ":FILT:HPAS:FREQ 300HZ" 

Features: *RST value: - (STATe = OFF) 


Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:LPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command activates the low-pass filter in the AF-branch with analog demodulation. 

Example: ":FILT:LPAS ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

On switching to ON, a bandwidth of 3 kHz for REAL TIME ON and a bandwidth of 5 PCT for REAL 

TIME OFF is set automatically. 

1088.7531.12 6.130 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]FILTer:LPASs:FREQuency 

This command defines the frequency limit of the low-pass filter in the NF-branch for analog 

demodulation. 

Parameter: ::= 3 kHz | 15 kHz for REAL TIME ON 

5 PCT | 10 PCT | 25 PCT for REAL TIME OFF 

Example: ":FILT:LPAS:FREQ 3KHZ" for REAL TIME ON 

":FILT:LPAS:FREQ 25PCT" for REAL TIME OFF 

Features: *RST value: - (STATe = OFF) 


Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:CCITt[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command activates the weighting filter according to CCITT-recommendation in the AF-branch 

for analog demodulation. 

Example: ":FILT:CCIT ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

This command is valid only in vector analysis mode with REAL TIME OFF. 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command activates the C-message weighting filter according to CCITT-recommendation in the 

AF-branch for analog demodulation. 

Example: ":FILT:CMES ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

This command is valid only in vector analysis mode with REAL TIME OFF. 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:DEMPhasis[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command activates the selected de-emphasis for analog demodulation. 

Example: ":FILT:DEMP ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

1088.7531.12 6.131 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:TCONstant 50US | 75US | 750US 

This command sets the time constant of the de-emphasis for analog demodulation. 

Example: ":FILT:DEMP:TCON 75US" 

Features: *RST value: 50us 


Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:LINK DISPlay | AUDio 

For analog demodulation, this command selects whether the de-emphasis set is to be active in the 

audio branch only or in addition for the display of measured values. 

Example: ":FILT:DEMP:LINK DISP" 

Features: *RST value: AUDio 


Mode: 

VA-A 

AUDio 

De-emphasis effective in the audio branch only 

DISPlay De-emphasis effective in the audio branch and in the display of measured values 

1088.7531.12 6.132 E-15

ESIB 


SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem 

The SENSe:FREQuency subsystem defines the frequency axis of the active display. The frequency axis 

can either be defined via the start/stop frequency or via the center frequency and span. 


[SENSe] 

:FREQuency 

:CENTer 

:LINK 

:STEP 

:LINK 

:FACTor 

:SPAN 

:FULL 

:LINK 

:STARt 

:LINK 

:STOP 

:LINK 

:MODE 

:OFFSet 

:CW: 

:STEP 

:FIXed 

:STEP 

 

STARt | STOP | SPAN 

 

SPAN | RBW | OFF 

 

 

-- 

CENTer | STARt | STOP 

 

CENTer | STOP | SPAN 

 

CENTer | STARt |SPAN 

CW | FIXed | SWEep 

 

 

 

 

 

HZ 

-- 

HZ 

-- 

PCT 

HZ 

-- 

-- 

HZ 

-- 

HZ 

-- 

-- 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer 0 GHz to f max 

This command defines the receiver frequency ot the center frequency of the analyzer. 

Example: ":FREQ:CENT 100MHz" 

Features: *RST value: f max / 2 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

In the analyzer mode, the automatic coupling of the parameters is set to SPAN FIXED. 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STARt | STOP | SPAN 

This command defines the coupling of the center frequency to the start, stop frequency or the 

frequency span. 

Example: ":FREQ:CENT:LINK STAR" 

Features: *RST value: SPAN 


Mode: 

A 

1088.7531.12 6.133 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 0 to f max 

This command defines the step width of the receiver or center frequency. 

Example: 

":FREQ:CENT:STEP 120MHz" 

Features: *RST value: - (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on) 


Modes: 

A, VA 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN | RBW | OFF 

This command couples the step width of the center frequency to span (span >0) or to the resolution 

bandwidth (span = 0) or cancels the couplings. 

Example: 

":FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN" 

Features: *RST value: SPAN 


Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 1 to 100 PCT 

This command couples the step width of the center frequency with a factor to the span (span >0) or 

to the resolution bandwidth (span = 0). 

Example: 

":FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT" 

Features: *RST value: - (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on) 


Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 0 GHz to f max 

This command defines the frequency span of the analyzer. 

Example: 

":FREQ:SPAN 10MHz" 

Features: *RST value: f max 


Mode: 

A 

The automatic coupling of the parameters is set to CENTER FIXED. 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL 

This command sets the maximum frequency span of the analyzer. 

Example: 

":FREQ:SPAN:FULL" 



Mode: 

A 


1088.7531.12 6.134 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK CENTer | START | STOP 

This command defines the coupling for frequency-span changes. 

Example: ":FREQ:SPAN:LINK STOP" 

Features: *RST value: CENTer 


Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt 0 GHz to f max 

This command defines the start frequency of the scan in receiver mode or the start frequency of the 

analyzer. 

Example: ":FREQ:STAR 20MHz" 



Modes: 

R, A 

In analyzer mode, the automatic coupling of the parameters is set to STOP FIXED. 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK CENTer | STOP | SPAN 

This command defines the coupling for start-frequency changes. 

Example: ":FREQ:STAR:LINK SPAN" 

Features: *RST value: STOP 


Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP 0 GHz to f max 

This command defines the stop frequency of the scan in receiver mode or the stop frequency of the 

analyzer. 

Example: ":FREQ:STOP 2000MHz" 

Features: *RST value: f max 


Modes: 

R, A 

In analyzer mode, the automatic coupling of the parameters is set to STARt FIXED. 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK CENTer | STARt | SPAN 

This command defines the coupling for stop-frequency changes. 

Example: ":FREQ:STOP:LINK SPAN" 

Features: *RST value: STARt 


Mode: 

A 

1088.7531.12 6.135 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep 

This command switches between frequency (SWEep) and time (CW | FIXed) domain in the analyzer 

mode. 

Example: ":FREQ:MODE SWE" 

Features: *RST value: CW 


Mode: 

A 

For CW and FIXed, the frequency setting is via command FREQuency:CENTer. In the SWEep 

mode, the setting is via commands FREQuency:STARt, STOP, CENTer and SPAN. 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet 

This command defines the frequency offset of the instrument. 

Example: ":FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ" 

Features: *RST value: 0 Hz 


Modes: 

A, VA 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed] 

This command defines the receiver frequency 

Example: ":FREQ:CW 50MHz" 

f min to f max 

Features: *RST value: 100MHz 


Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:STEP 

f min .. f max 

This command defines the step width of the receiver frequency. 

Example: ":FREQ:FIX:STEP 50kHz" 

Features: *RST value: 10kHz 


Mode: 

R 

1088.7531.12 6.136 E-15

ESIB 


SENSe:MIXer - Subsystem 

The SENSe:MIXer subsystem controls the settings of the external mixer. It is only active in Analyzer 

mode (INSTrument SANalyzer). 

This subsystem is available only if the instrument is equipped with the external mixer output (option 

FSE-B21) 

The suffix in SENSe is not significant in this subsystem. 

:[SENSe:] 

:MIXer 

[:STATe] 

:BLOCk 

:PORTs 

:SIGNal 

:THReshold 

:HARMonic 

:TYPE 

:BAND 

:LOSS 

[:LOW] 

:HIGH 

:TABLe 

:BIAS 


 

 

2 | 3 

OFF | ON | AUTO 

 

 

ODD | EVEN | EODD 

A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J 

 

 

 

 

-- 

-- 

DB 

DB 

A 

Only query in band lock on 

Not in band lock off 



:[SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command activates or shuts off the external mixer. 

Example: ":MIX ON" 



Mode: 

A 

This command is available only in conjunction with option FSE-B21, External Mixer Output. 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:BLOCk ON | OFF 

This command activates the BAND LOCK ON or BAND LOCK OFF mode. 

Example: ":MIX:BLOC ON" 



Mode: 

A 

This command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on. 

1088.7531.12 6.137 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:PORTs 2 | 3 

This command activates the 2- or 3-port mixer. In the BAND LOCK ON mode, the command refers 

to the active band selected with SENSe:MIXer:HARMonic:BAND . 

Example: ":MIX:PORT 3" 



Mode: 

A 


:[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal ON | OFF | AUTO 

This command activates the Signal ID or Auto ID mode. 

Example: ":MIX:SIGN ON" 



Mode: 

A 


:[SENSe:]MIXer:THReshold 0.1 to 100 dB 

This command sets the level threshold for auto ID. 

Example: ":MIX:THR 20" 



Mode: 

A 

The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on. 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic 1 to 62 

With BAND LOCK OFF, this command sets the nth harmonic. The command may be a query with 

BAND LOCK ON. 

Example: ":MIX:HARM 5" 



Mode: 

A 


:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD 

With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the type of harmonic. 

Example: ":MIX:HARM:TYPE EODD" 

Features: *RST value: EVEN 


Mode: 

A 


1088.7531.12 6.138 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J 

With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the active band. 

Example: ":MIX:HARM:BAND E" 

Features: *RST value: U 


Mode: 

A 


:[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] 

This command sets the conversion loss of the mixer. 

Example: ":MIX:LOSS -12DB" 



Mode: 

A 


:[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH 

With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the conversion loss of the mixer for higher harmonics in 

bands with two harmonics (band A: even harmonics, band Q: odd harmonics). 

Example: ":MIX:LOSS:HIGH -14DB" 



Mode: 

A 


:[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe 

This command sets a conversion loss table. 

Parameter: := DOS file name 

Example: ":MIX:LOSS:table ’mix_1’" 

Features: *RST value: no table set 


Mode: 

A 


:[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS 

This command sets the bias current. 

Example: ":MIX:BIAS 7mA" 

Features: *RST value: 0 A 


Mode: 

A 


1088.7531.12 6.139 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:MSUMmary Subsystem 

This subsystem controls the modulation summary setting for analog demodulation. 

It is active only in conjunction with option Vector Analysis, FSE-B7. 


[SENSe] 

:MSUMmary 

:AHOLd 

[:STATe] 

:MODE 

:RUNit 

:REFerence 

:AUTO 

:MTIMe 

 


PCT | DB 

 

ONCE 

 

PCT | HZ | DEG | 

RAD 

S 


no query 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:AHOLd[:STATe] ON | OFF 

This command switches on the average/peak hold mode. 

Example: ":MSUM:AHOL ON" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:MODE ABSolute | RELative 

This command selects the absolute or relative indication of the summary marker values. 

Example: ":MSUM:MODE REL" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:RUNit PCT | DB 

This command selects the relative unit of the summary marker in the relative result display. 

Example: ":MSUM:RUN DB" 

Features: *RST value: DB 


Mode: 

VA-A 

1088.7531.12 6.140 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:REFerence 

This command selects the reference modulation. 

Parameter: := 0.001PCT to 1000PCTfor AM 

0.1HZ to 10MHZfor FM 

0.0001RAD to 1000RADfor PM 

Example: ":MSUM:REF 50PCT" 

Features: *RST value: 100PCTfor AM 

100KHZfor FM 

10RAD for PM 


Mode: 

VA-A 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE 

This command sets the current absolute measured values of the main modulation signal as 

reference values for the relative indication. 

Example: ":MSUM:REF:AUTO ONCE" 



Mode: 

VA-A 

This command is an event and has therefore no query and no *RST value assigned. 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:MTIMe 0.1 s | 1 s 

This command selects the measurement time for the summary markers. 

Example: ":MSUM:MTIM 100US" 

Features: *RST value: 0.1S 


Mode: 

VA-A 

1088.7531.12 6.141 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:POWer Subsystem 

This subsystem controls the setting of the instrument’s power measurements. 


[SENSe] 

:POWer 

:ACHannel 

:SPACing 

[:UPPer] 

:ACHannel 

:ALTernate 

:ACPairs 

:BANDwidth 

[:CHANnel] 

:ACHannel 

:ALTernate 

:BWIDth 

[:CHANnel] 

:ACHannel 

:ALTernate 

:MODE 

:REFerence 

:AUTO 

:PRESet 

:BANDwidth 

:BWIDth 

 

 

 

1 | 2 | 3 

 

 

 

 

 

 


ONCE 

ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | 

OBWidth | CN | CN0 | ADJust 

 

 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

PCT 

PCT 

no query 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] 0 Hz to 1000 MHz 

This command defines the channel spacing of adjacent channel to carrier. 

Example: ":POW:ACH:SPAC 28kHz" 

Features: *RST value: 24 kHz 


Mode: 

A-F 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 0 Hz to 1000 MHz 

This command defines the channel spacing of adjacent channel to carrier. This command has the 

same effect as POW:ACH:SPAC. 

Example: 

":POW:ACH:SPAC:ACH 338kHz" 



Mode: 

A-F 

1088.7531.12 6.142 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate 0 Hz to 1000 MHz 

This command defines the spacing of the first (ALTernate1) or the second alternate adjacent 

channel (ALTernate2) relative to the carrier signal. 

Example: ":POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 99kHz" 



Mode: 

A-F 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 1 | 2 | 3 

This command sets the number of adjacent channels (upper and lower channel in pairs). 

Example: ":POW:ACH:ACP 3" 



Mode: 

A-F 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] 0 Hz to 1000 MHz 

This command sets the channel bandwidth of the radio communication system. 

Example: ":POW:ACH:BWID 30kHz" 



Mode: 

A-F 

If the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the bandwiths of all alternate adjacent 

channels are automatically set to the same value. 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel 0 Hz to 1000 MHz 

This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio transmission 

system. 

Example: ":POW:ACH:BWID:ACH 30kHz" 



Mode: 

A-F 

If the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the bandwiths of all alternate adjacent 

channels are automatically set to the same value. 

1088.7531.12 6.143 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate 0 Hz to 1000 MHz 

This command defines the channel bandwidth of the first/second alternate adjacent channel of the 

radio transmission system. 

Example: ":POW:ACH:BWID:ALT2 30kHz" 



Mode: 

A-F 

If the channel bandwidth of the alternate adjacent channel no. 1is changed the bandwith of the 

alternate adjacent channel no. 2 is automatically set to the same value. 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute | RELative 

This command toggles between absolute and relative measurement. 

Example: ":POW:ACH:MODE REL" 



Mode: 

A-F 

For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured channel power by 

command POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE. 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE 

This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power. 

Example: ":POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE" 



Mode: 

A-F 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth|OBWidth | CN | CN0 | 

ADJust 

This command selects the type of power measurement and resets the instrument depending on the 

selected measurement. 

The value ADJust optimizes automatically the settings (span, RBW, VBW and detector) of the 

analyzer for the power measurement selected by command 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect (see Softkey ADJUST CP SETTINGS). 

Example: 

":POW:ACH:REF:PRES ACP" 



Mode: 

A-F 

1088.7531.12 6.144 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth 0 to 100PCT 

This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power. 

Example: ":POW:BWID 95PCT" 

Features: *RST value: 99PCT 


Mode: 

A-F 

This value defines the occupied bandwidth (measurement POW:ACH:PRES OBW). 

1088.7531.12 6.145 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem 

This subsystem controls the reference oscillator. The suffix in SENSe is not significant in this 

subsystem. 


[SENSe] 

:ROSCillator 

:SOURce 

:EXTernal 

:FREQuency 

INTernal | EXTernal 

 

-- 

HZ 

[:INTernal] 

:TUNe 

 

:SAVe 

no query 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce 


This command controls selection of the reference oscillator. 

Example: ":ROSC:SOUR EXT" 

Features: *RST value: – 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected to the rear 

panel of the instrument. *RST has no influence on this setting. 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 1MHz to 16MHz 

This command defines the frequency of the external reference oscillator. 

Example: ":ROSC:EXT:FREQ 5MHz" 

Features: *RST value: 10MHz 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The value of the external reference frequency (1MHz to 16MHz) is rounded in steps of 1MHz. 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe 0 to 4095 

This command defines the value for the tuning of the internal reference oscillator. 

Example: ":ROSC:TUN 128" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The reference oscillator should be tuned only if an error has been detected in the frequency accuracy 

check. After PRESET or switching on the instrument, the saved value of the reference frequency is 

restored. 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe:SAVe 

This command saves the new value for the tuning of the internal reference oscillator. The factory-set 

value in the EEPROM is overwritten. 

Example: ":ROSC:TUN:SAV" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.146 E-15

ESIB 


SENSe:SCAN - Subsystem 

This subsystem controls the parameters for the receiver scan data. The numeric suffix in 

[SENSe]SCAN is not significant. 


[SENSe] 

:SCAN 

:STARt 

:STOP 

:STEP 

:BANDwidth 

:RESolution 

:TIME 

:INPut 

:TYPe 

:ATTenuation 

:AUTO 

:GAIN 

:STATe 

:AUTO 

:RANGes 

[:COUNt] 

 

 

 

 

 

INPUT1 | INPUT2 

 

 

 

 

 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

HZ 

s 

dB 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:STARt f min to f max 

This command defines the start frequency of a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:STAR 50kHz" 

Features: *RST value: 150 kHz (range1) 

30 MHz (range2) 


Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:STOP f min to f max 

This command defines the stop frequency of a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:STOP 50kHz" 

Features: *RST value: 30 MHz (range1) 

1 GHz (range2) 


Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:STEP f min to f max 

This command defines the step size for the frequency of a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:STEP 100Hz" 

Features: *RST value: 4 kHz (range 1) 

40 kHz (range 2) 


Mode: 

R 

1088.7531.12 6.147 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:BANDwidth:RESolution f min to f max 

This command defines the bandwidth for a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:BAND:RES 1MHz" 

Features: *RST value: 9 kHz (range 1) 

120 kHz (range 2) 


Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:TIME 100 µs to 100 s 

This command defines the measurement time of the receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:TIME 1 ms" 

Features: *RST value: 1 ms (range 1) 

100µs (range 2) 


Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:TYPE INPUT1 | INPUT2 

This command defines the input for a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:INP:TYPE INPUT2" 

Features: *RST value: INPUT1 


Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:ATTenuation dB min to dB max 

This command defines the RF attenuation for a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:INP:ATT 30dB" 



Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the autoranging function in a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:INP:ATT:AUTO ON" 



Mode: 

R 

1088.7531.12 6.148 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:GAIN:STATE ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the preamplifier in a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:INP:GAIN:STAT ON" 



Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF 

This command includes the preamplifier in the autoranging function of a receiver subscan. 

Example: ":SCAN1:INP:GAIN:AUTO ON" 



Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt] 1 to 10 

This command determines the number of ranges. 

Example: "SCAN:RANG:COUN 3" 



Mode: 

R 

1088.7531.12 6.149 E-15


ESIB 

SENSe:SWEep Subsystem 

This subsystem controls the sweep parameters. 


[SENSe] 

:SWEep 

:TIME 

:AUTO 

:FMEasurement 

:COUNt 

:EGATe 

:LEVel 

:TYPE 

:POLarity 

:HOLDoff 

:LENGth 

:SOURce 

:GAP 

:PRETrigger 

:TRGTogap 

:LENGth 

:SPACing 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LEVel | EDGE 

POSitive|NEGative 

 

 

EXTernal | RFPower 

 

 

 

 

LINear | LOGarithmic | AUTO 

S 

-- 

S 

-- 

-- 

V 

-- 

-- 

S 

S 

-- 

-- 

S 

S 

S 


This command defines the duration of a single measurement or the duration of the sweep. 

The allowed value range depends on the operating mode (see Chapter 4, Softkeys MEAS TIME 

(receiver mode) and SWEEP TIME MANUAL (analyzer mode)). 

Example: ":SWE:TIME 10s" 

Features: *RST value - (AUTO is set to ON) 


Modes: 

R, A, VA-A 

In analyzer and vector analyzer mode, automatic coupling is switched off if SWEep:TIME is directly 

programmed. 


This command switches the automatic coupling of the sweep time for the frequency span or 

bandwidth settings. 

Example: ":SWE:TIME:AUTO ON" 



Mode: 

A 

If SWEep:TIME is directly programmed, automatic coupling is switched off. 

1088.7531.12 6.150 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:FMEasurement : 

This command defines the measurement time in which the values indicated in the peak list (final 

measurement values) are re-checked. 

Example: "SWE:TIME:FME 0.01" 

Features: *RST value: 1s 


Mode: 

R 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt 0 to 32767 

This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep. 

Example: ":SWE:COUNT 64" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA-D 

This parameter defines the number of sweeps or the number of averaging procedures. In the 

average mode, the value 0 defines a running averaging of measurement data over 10 sweeps. 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe ON | OFF 

This command controls the sweep with the external gate signal. 

Example: ":SWE:EGAT ON" 



Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel -5V to +5V 

This command determines the threshold for the external gate signal. 

Example: ":SWE:EGAT:LEV 3V" 

Features: *RST value: 2V 


Mode: 

A 

If SWEep:TIME is directly programmed, automatic coupling is switched off. 


This command sets the type of triggering (level or edge) by the external gate signal. 

Example: ":SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE" 

Features: *RST value: EDGE 


Mode: 

A 

Parameter EGATe:LENGth is not used for level triggering. 

1088.7531.12 6.151 E-15


ESIB 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity POSitive | NEGative 

This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal. 

Example: ":SWE:EGAT:POL POS" 

Features: *RST value: POSitive 


Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 0 to 100s 

This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the continuation of the 

sweep. 

Example: ":SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100us" 



Mode: 

A 

The values for the delay time can be set in steps 1, 2, 3 and 5. 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 0 to 100s 

In case of edge triggering, this command determines the time interval in which the instrument 

sweeps. 

Example: ":SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms" 



Modes: 

A 

The values for the delay time can be set in steps 1, 2, 3 and 5. 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal | RFPower 

This command toggles between external gate signal and RF power signal. 

Example: ":SWE:EGAT:SOUR RFP" 

Features: *RST value: EXTernal 


Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP ON | OFF 

This command controls the operating mode GAP SWEEP. 

Example: ":SWE:GAP ON" 



Mode: 

A-Z 

Operating mode GAP SWEEP for measurements in the time domain controls the display of 

measured values. Measured values can be blanked for a defined time range (GAP). 

1088.7531.12 6.152 E-15

ESIB 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:PRETrigger 0 to 100s 

This command defines the evaluation time for measured values before the pretrigger time 

(resolution: 50 ns). 

Example: ":SWE:GAP:PRET 100us" 



Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:TRGTogap 0 to 100s 

This command defines the time between the pretrigger time and the beginning of the gap (trigger-togap 

time) (resolution: 50 ns). 

Example: ":SWE:GAP:TRGT 50us" 



Mode: 

A 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:LENGth 0 to 100s 

This command defines the gap length. 

Example: ":SWE:GAP:LENG 400us" 



Mode: 

A 

The gap length can be programmed from 0 to 100s in steps of 1, 2, 3 and 5. 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic | AUTO 

This command toggles between linear and logarithmic step modes of the receiver. In analyzer mode, 

it toggles between linear and logarithmic sweep. 

Example: ":SWE:SPAC LOG" 



Modes: 

R, A 

The frequency axis is set to linear or logarithmic scaling accordingly. 

1088.7531.12 6.153 E-15

SOURce Subsystem 

ESIB 


The SOURce subsystem controls the output signals of the instrument when the option Tracking 

Generator is installed. In the analyzer mode, in the split screen mode, a distinction is made between 

SOURce1 (screen A) and SOURce2 (screen B). 


SOURce 

:AM 

:STATe 

:DM 

:STATe 

:FM 

:STATe 

:FREQuency 

:OFFSet 

:POWer 

:ALC 

:SOURce 

[:LEVel] 

[:IMMediate] 

[:AMPLitude] 

:OFFSet 

 

 

 

 


 

 

HZ 

DBM 

DB 

Option Mitlaufgenerator 

:SOURce:AM:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the external amplitude modulation of the tracking generator. 

Example: ":SOUR:AM:STAT ON " 

Features: *RST-value: OFF 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

External ALC and external I/Q-modulation is switched off, if active. This command is only valid in 


:SOURce:DM:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the external delta modulation of the tracking generator. 

Example: ":SOUR:DM:STAT ON " 

Features: *RST- value: OFF 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

External AM, external ALC, external FM and external frequency offset are switched off, if active. This 

command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator. 

1088.7531.12 6.154 E-15

ESIB 


:SOURce:FM:STATe ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the external frequency modulation of the tracking generator. 

Example: ":SOUR:FM:STAT ON " 

Features: *RST-value: OFF 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

External AM, external I/Q-modulation and frequency offset are switched off, if active. This command 

is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator. 

:SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet -200MHz to 200MHz 

This command defines a frequency offset of the tracking generators to the current instrument 

frequency. 

Example: ":SOUR:FREQ:OFFS " 

Features: *RST-value: 0 Hz 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

External delta modulation is switched off, if active. This command is only valid in conjunction with 

option Tracking Generator. 

:SOURce:POWer:ALC:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal 

This command switches on or off the external level control (ALC). 

Example: ":SOUR:POW:ALC:SOUR INT " 

Features: *RST- value: INT 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

External AM and external delta modulation are switched off, if active. This command is only valid in 


:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] -20dBm to 0dBm / 

Option FSE-B12: -90dBm to 0dBm 

This command defines the level of the tracking generator. 

Example: ":SOUR:POW -20dBm" 

Features: *RST- value: -20 dBm 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet -200dB to +200dB 

This command defines a level offset for the tracking generator. 

Example: ":SOUR:POW:OFFS -10dB" 

Features: *RST- value: 0dB 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.155 E-15

STATus Subsystem 

ESIB 


The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status reporting system (see Chapter 5, Section 

"Status Reporting System"). *RST does not influence the status registers. The commands and events 

causing the status reporting system to be reset are comprised in a table at the end of chapter 5. 


STATus 

:OPERation 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

:PRESet 

:QUEStionable 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

:POWer 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

:LIMit 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

:LMARgin 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

:SYNC 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

:ACPLimit 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

1088.7531.12 6.156 E-15

ESIB 



STATus 

:QUEStionable 

:FREQuency 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

:TRANsducer 

[:EVENt]? 

:CONDition? 

:ENABle 

:PTRansition 

:NTRansition 

:QUEue? 

[:NEXT]? 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

0 to 65535 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the :STATus:OPERation register. 

Example: ":STAT:OPER?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The contents of the EVENt section is deleted with readout. 

:STATus:OPERation:CONDition? 

This command queries the CONDition section of the :STATus:OPERation register. 

Example: ":STAT:OPER:COND?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section. The value returned reflects the 

current hardware status. 

:STATus:OPERation:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the :STATus:QUEStionable register. 

Example: ":STAT:OPER:ENAB 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the 

sum bit in the status byte. 

1088.7531.12 6.157 E-15


ESIB 

:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:OPERation register from 0 to 1 for 

the transitions of the CONDition bit. 

Example: ":STAT:OPER:PTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition 0 to 65535 



Example: ":STAT:OPER:NTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:PRESet 

This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value. All 

PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e., all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition 

parts are set to 0, i.e., a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle part of 

the :STATus:OPERation and :STATus:QUEStionable registers are set to 0, i.e., all events in these 

registers are not passed on. 

Example: ":STAT:PRES" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the :STATus:QUEStionable register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section. 

:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? 

This command queries the CONDition section of the :STATus:QUEStionable register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:COND?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section. 

1088.7531.12 6.158 E-15

ESIB 


:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus-QUEStionable register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition 0 to 65535 



Example: ":STAT:QUES:PTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 0 to 65535 



Example: ":STAT:QUES:NTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer 

register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? 

This command queries the content of the CONDition section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer 

register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.159 E-15


ESIB 

:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register from 

0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit. 


Features: *RST-value: – 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register from 





Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit 

register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? 

This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit 

register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.160 E-15

ESIB 


:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the :STATus:QUEStionable register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register from 0 

to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register from 1 

to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin 

register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? 

This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the :STATus:QUEStionable: 

LMARgin register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.161 E-15


ESIB 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:PTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable: LMARgin register 

from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:NTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable: LMARgin register 





Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC 

register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition? 

This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC 

register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.162 E-15

ESIB 


:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the :STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register. 




Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register from 





Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register from 





Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit 

register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:ACPL?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? 

This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:ACPL:COND?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.163 E-15


ESIB 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:ACPL:ENAB 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable: ACPLimit register 


Example: ":STAT:QUES:ACPL:PTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable: ACPLimit register 


Example: ":STAT:QUES:ACPL:NTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the :STATus:QUEStionableFREQuency 

register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:FREQ?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? 


:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:FREQ:COND?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.164 E-15

ESIB 


:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency 

register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:FREQ:ENAB 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register 


Example: ":STAT:QUES:FREQ:PTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register 


Example: ":STAT:QUES:FREQ:NTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]? 

This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:TRAN?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition? 


:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:TRAN:COND?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.165 E-15


ESIB 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:ENABle 0 to 65535 

This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the :STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer 

register. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:TRAN:ENAB 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 



:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:PTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer 

register from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:TRAN:PTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:NTRansition 0 to 65535 

This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the :STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer 

register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit. 

Example: ":STAT:QUES:TRAN:NTR 65535" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]? 

This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue, thus deleting it. 

Example: ":STAT:QUE?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages 

defined by SCPI (cf. Chapter 9). If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "no error", is 

returned. This command is identical with the command SYSTem:ERRor. 

1088.7531.12 6.166 E-15

ESIB 

SYSTem Subsystem 


This subsystem comprises a series of commands for general functions. 


SYSTem 

:COMMunicate 

:GPIB 

[:SELF] 

:ADDRess 

:RTERminator 

:RDEVice 

:ADDRess 

:SERial 

:CONTrol 

:DTR 

:RTS 

[:RECeive] 

:BAUD 

:BITS 

:PARity 

[:TYPE] 

:SBITs 

:PACE 

:PRINter1|2> 

:ENUMerate 

[:NEXT]? 

:FIRSt? 

:SELect 

:DATE 

:DISPlay 

:UPDate 

:ERRor? 

:PASSword 

[:CENable] 

:PRESet 

:COMPatible 

:SET 

:SPEaker 

:VOLume 

:TIME 

:VERSion? 

:BINFo? 

0 to 30 

LFEoi | EOI 

0 to 30 

IBFull | OFF 

IBFull | OFF 

 

7 | 8 

EVEN | ODD | NONE 

1 | 2 

XON | NONE 

 

, , 

ON | OFF 

-- 

 

-- 

FSE | OFF 

 

 

0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

query only 

query only 

query only 

no query 

no query 

query only 

query only 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0 to 30 

This command changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the unit. 

Example: ":SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18" 

Features: *RST value: - (no influence on this parameter) 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.167 E-15


ESIB 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator LFEOI | EOI 

This command changes the delimiter. 

Example: ":SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI" 

Features: *RST value: LFEOI 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The instrument contains a DMA-channel for communication via IEC-bus. This ensures maximum 

speed for the transfer of commands and data. The parser for command decoding integrated in the 

instrument is, however, only activated by the delimiter when the command is completely transferred. 

In order to make this possible for the transfer of binary data, too (e. g. trace data which are 

retransferred into the instrument), the delimiter recognition must be switched to the EOI signal prior 

to the transfer. Output of binary data from the instrument does not require such a switching. 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:ADDRess 0 to 30 

This command changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the unit which is selected as hardcopy device 

1 or 2, provided that the IEC/IEEE-bus interface of this unit is set as an interface. 

Example: ":SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEV2:ADDR 5" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:DTR IBFull | OFF 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS IBFull | OFF 

These commands switch the hardware handshake procedure for the given serial interface off (OFF) 

or on (IBFull). 

Examples: 

":SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:DTR OFF" 

":SYST:COMM:SER2:CONT:RTS IBF" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The two commands have the same meaning. SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device COM1and 

COM2, respectively. 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD 75 | 150 | 300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 9600 

This command sets the transmission speed for the given serial interface. 

Example: ":SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 2400" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively. Permissible 

values are 75 Baud, 150 Baud, 300 Baud, 600 Baud, 1200 Baud, 2400 Baud, 4800 Baud, 9600 

Baud. 

1088.7531.12 6.168 E-15

ESIB 



This command defines the number of data bits per data word for the given serial interface. 

Example: ":SYST:COMM:SER2:BITS 7" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively. 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] EVEN | ODD | NONE 

This command defines the parity check for the given serial interface. 

Example: ":SYST:COMM:SER:PAR EVEN" 

Features: *RST value: NONE 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively. Permissible 

values are: EVEN even parity 

ODD odd parity 

NONE no parity check. 


This command defines the number of stopbits per data word for the given serial interface. 

Example: ":SYST:COMM:SER:SBITs 2" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PACE XON | NONE 

This command switches on or off the software handshake for the given serial interface. 

Example: ":SYST:COMM:SER:PACE XON" 

features: *RST value: NONE 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 


1088.7531.12 6.169 E-15


ESIB 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? 

This command queries the name of the first printer (in the list of printers) under Windows NT. 

The names of other installed printers can be queried with command :SYSTem:COMMunicate: 

PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT?. The numeric suffix in PRINter is not significant. 

If no printer is configured an empty string is output. 

Example: 

":SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRS?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT? 

This command queries the name of the next printer installed under Windows NT. 

This command can only be sent after command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter: 

ENUMerate:FIRSt?. 

An empty string is output after all printer names have been output. The numeric suffix in 

PRINter is not significant. 

Example: 

":SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:NEXT?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect 

This command selects one of the printers installed under Windows NT. 

The name of the first printer is queried with FIRSt?. After that the names of other installed printers 

can be queried with NEXT?. The numeric suffix in PRINter selects the device. 

Parameter: ::= string which has been queried with commands 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate :PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? and NEXT?. 

Example: 

":SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL ‘HP_DESKJET660’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:SYSTem:DATE 1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31 

This command is used to enter the date for the internal calendar. 

Example: " SYST:DATE 1994,12,1" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The sequence of entry is year, month, day. 

1088.7531.12 6.170 E-15

ESIB 


:SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON | OFF 

This command switches on or off the update of all display elements. 

Example: " SYST:DISP:UPD ON 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:SYSTem:ERRor? 

This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue, thus deleting it. . 

Example: ":SYST:ERR?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages 

defined by SCPI (cf. Chapter 9). If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "no error", is 

returned. This command is identical with the command :STATus:QUEue:NEXT?. This command is 

a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value. 

:SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] 

This command enables access to the service functions by means of the password. 

Example: ":SYST:PASS ’XXXX’" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 


:SYSTem:PRESet 

This command triggers an instrument reset. 

Example: ":SYST:PRES" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The effect of this command corresponds to that of the PRESET key with manual control or to the 

*RST command. 

:SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible FSE | OFF 

This command determines whether the unit is FSE-compatible after a preset. Following a preset, an 

ESIB is not in the same mode as an FSE. With compatibility, ESIB has the same default settings as 

FSE after a preset. 

Example: ":SYST:PRES:COMP FSE" 



Mode: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.171 E-15


ESIB 

:SYSTem:SET 

The query :SYSTem:SET? causes the data of the current instrument setting to be transmitted to the 

controller in binary form (SAVE function). The data can be read back into the instrument (RECALL 

function) by means of command :SYSTem:SET . If the data records are stored on the 

instrument harddisk with SAVE/RECALL (:MMEMory:STORe bzw. :MMEMory:LOAD), it is possible 

to store the data in an external computer by means of :SYSTem:SET. 

Example: ":SYST:SET " 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The receive terminator has to be set to EOI to ensure reliable transfer of data (setting 

SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI). 

:SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume 0 to 1 

This command sets the volume of the built-in loudspeaker for demodulated signals.The numeric 

suffix selects the measurement window. 

Volume control is only possible if the volume control knob on the front panel is set to REMOTE. 

Example: ":SYST:SPE:VOL 0.5" 



Modes: 

R, A 

The value 0 is the lowest volume, the value 1 is the highest volume. 

:SYSTem:TIME 0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59 

This command sets the internal clock. 

Example: ":SYST:TIME 12,30,30" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The sequence of entry is hour, minute, second. 

:SYSTem:VERSion? 

This command queries the number of the SCPI version, which is relevant for the instrument. 

Example: ":SYST:VERS?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value. 

1088.7531.12 6.172 E-15

ESIB 



This command queries all present modules with model index, modification index and HW code. 

Entries are separated by commas. 

Return format: module1, model index1, modification index1, HW code1, module2, model index2, 

modification index2, HW code2, module3,...,moduleN, model indexN, modification indexN, HW 

codeN 

Example: ":SYST:BINF?" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.173 E-15

TRACe Subsystem 

ESIB 


The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instrument’s internal trace memory. 


TRACe 

[:DATA] 

:COPY 

:FEED 

:CONTrol 

TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | SINGle | 

SCAN | STATus, |FINAL1|FINAL2|FINAL3|FINAL4, 

|... 

TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4, 

TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4 

ALWays | NEVer 

- 

:TRACe[:DATA] TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4| SINGle, | | FINAL1 

| FINAL2 | FINAL3 | FINAL4 

This command transfers trace data from the controller to the instrument, the query reads trace data 

out of the instrument. 

Example: ":TRAC TRACE1,"+A$ (A$: data list in the current format) 

"TRAC? TRACE1" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The trace data are transferred in the current format (corresponding to the command FORMat 

ASCii|REAL). The device-internal trace memory is addressed using the trace names ’TRACE1’ to 

’TRACE4’. 

The parameter of the query is the trace name TRACE1 to TRACE4, it indicates which trace memory 

will be read out. 

The transfer of trace data from the controller to the instrument takes place by indicating the trace 

name and then the data to be transferred. In ASCII format, these data are values separated by 

commas. If the transfer takes place using the format real (REAL 32), the data are transferred in block 

format (see FORMat subsystem). 

Saving and recalling trace data together with the device settings to/from the device-internal hard disk 

or to/from a floppy is controlled via the commands ":MMEMory:STORe:STATe" and 

":MMEMory:LOAD:STATe" respectively. Trace data are selected with 

":MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL" or "":MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe". Trace data in 

ASCII format (ASCII FILE EXPORT) are exported with the command ":MMEM:STORe:TRACe". 

The transfer format for the trace data depends on the instrument setting 

Analyzer mode (span >0 and zero span): 

500 results are output in the unit selected for display. 

Note: With AUTO PEAK detector, only positive peak values can be read out. 

Trace data can be read into instrument with logarithmic display only in dBm, with 

linear display only in volts. 

FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used as format for binary transmission. 

1088.7531.12 6.174 E-15

ESIB 


Vector analyzer mode, digital demodulation 

The number of data transferred (except for the symbol table) is determined by the following 

formula 

number of results = result length * points per symbol 

Max. 6400 results can be transferred (for example result length 1600, points per symbol 4). 

In all cartesian diagrams (MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER, MAGNITUDE, PHASE, 

FREQUENCY, REAL/IMAG, EYE[I], EYE[Q], ERROR VECT MAGNITUDE) test data are 

transferred in the unit selected for display. 

FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used for binary transmission. 

Note: In the case of the eye pattern, results are simply superimposed in the display, ie 

the EYE representation is the same as the REAL/IMAG representation. 

In the polar diagrams (POLAR CONSTELL, POLAR VECTOR) the real and the imaginary 

component are transferred as a pair for each result. 

FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used for binary transmission. 

With the SYMB TABLES / ERRORS setting, the displayed symbols can be read out as 

traces. Trace assignment is as follows: 

Full screen Trace 1 

Split screen, screen A: Trace 1 

Split screen, screen B: Trace 2 

One byte (8 bits) is read out for each symbol. 

FORMAT UINT,8 is to be used for binary transmission. 

Vector analyzer mode, analog demodulation 

The number of results transferred depends on the SWEEP TIME and DEMOD BW 

settings. Max. 5000 and min. 10 points are available. The unit for the results depends on 

the selected demodulation: 

AM unit % 

FM unit Hz 

PM unit rad or deg 

FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used for binary data transmission. 

Receiver 

SINGle is possible only as a query for single measurements in the receiver mode. The 

values of all activated detectors are transferred separated by commas.The values are 

transferred in the sequence the detectors are set with command 

SENSe:DETector:RECeiver (example: setting DET:REC POS, AVER yields , in response to query 

TRAC:DATA? SINGL). 

SCAN is only possible in form of a query during scan measurements. The number of 

transmitted measurement results depends on the scan settings. 

FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used as format setting for binary transmission. 

Structure of transmitted data: 

- 4 byte: trace status: bit 0 to 9 subscan; bit 10: last block of subscan; Bit 11: last block of 

last subscan of scan; Bit 12: last of all blocks (for multiple scans after the last scan) 

- 4 bytes:number n of the transmitted measurement results of a trace 

- 4 byte:trace1 active (0/1) 



1088.7531.12 6.175 E-15


ESIB 


- n*4 bytes:measurement results of trace 1 if trace 1 is active 




- n*1 byte:status information per measurement result: 

bit 0: underrange trace1; bit 1: underrange trace2;bit 2: underrange trace3; 

bit 3: underrange trace4; bit 4: overrange trace1 to trace4 

STATus is only possible in form of a query during scan measurements. 1 byte status 

information per measurement result is transmitted: 

bit 0: underrange trace1; bit 1: underrange trace2;bit 2: underrange trace3; 

bit 3: underrange trace4;bit 4: overrange trace1 to trace4 

FINAL1, FINAL2, FINAL3 and FINAL4 are only possible in form of a quey. The final 

measurement values are transmitted. 

:TRACe:COPY :TRACe:COPY TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4 , 


This command copies data from one trace to another. The second operand designates the source, 

the first operand the destination of the data to be copied. 

Example: ":TRAC:COPY TRACE1,TRACE2" 

Features: *RST value: 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value assigned. 

:TRACe:FEED:CONTrol ALWays | NEVer 

This command switches block data transmission during a scan on and off. 

Example: "TRAC:FEED:CONT ALW" 

Features: *RST Value: NEVer 


Mode: 

R 

The block size dependens on the scan time, the trace number is not evaluated. 

1088.7531.12 6.176 E-15

ESIB 

TRIGger Subsystem 


The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize instrument actions with events. This makes it possible 

to control and synchronize the start of a sweep. An external trigger signal can be fed to the connector at 

the rear panel of the instrument. In split screen mode, a distinction is made between TRIGger1 (screen 

A) and TRIGger2 (screen B). 


TRIGger 

[:SEQuence] 

:SOURce 

:LEVel 

[:EXTernal] 

:VIDeo 

:AF 

:HOLDoff 

:SLOPe 

IMMediate | LINE | EXTernal |VIDeo | 

RFPower | AF 

 

 

 

 

POSitive|NEGative 

V|MV|UV 

PCT 

PCT | HZ | 

DEG | RAD 

S 

-- 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate | LINE | EXTernal | VIDeo | RFPower | AF 

This command selects the trigger source for the start of a sweep. 

Example: 

":TRIG:SOUR EXT" 

Features: *RST value: IMMediate 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The value IMMediate corresponds to the "FREE RUN" setting. 

Selecting the parameter AF is possible only in the vector signal analysis mode with analog 

demodulation. 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] –5.0 to +5.0V 

This command sets the level of the external trigger source. 

Example: ":TRIG:LEV 2V" 

Features: *RST value: –5.0V 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 0 to 100PCT 

This command sets the level of the video trigger source. 

Example: 

":TRIG:LEV:VID 50PCT" 

Features: *RST value: 50 PCT 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

1088.7531.12 6.177 E-15


ESIB 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:AF 

This command defines the level of the demodulated trigger source. 

The units and ranges are: 

AM-Demod -120 PCT to +120 PCT (PCT) 

FM-Demod -1kHz to +1kHz (Hz) 

PM-Demod -12 to + 12 RAD (DEG or RAD) 

Example: ":TRIG:LEV:AF 50PCT" 

Features: *RST value: 0 PCT 


Mode: 

VA-A 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff -100s to 100s 

This command defines the length of the trigger delay. 

Example: ":TRIG:HOLD 500us" 



Modes: 

R, A, VA 

A negative delay time (pretrigger) can be set in the time domain (SPAN < 0 Hz) only. The maximum 

permissible range and the maximum effective resolution of the pretrigger are limited by the set 

sweep time (max range= - 499/500 x sweep time; max. resolution = sweep time/500). Pretriggering 

is not possible when the rms or the average detector is activated. 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative 

This command selects the slope of the trigger signal. 

Example: ":TRIG:SLOP NEG" 

Features: *RST value: POSitive 


Modes: 

R, A, VA 

The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources. 

1088.7531.12 6.178 E-15

ESIB 

UNIT Subsystem 

UNIT Subsystem 

The UNIT subsystem is used to switch the basic unit of setting parameters. In split screen mode, a 

distinction is made between UNIT1 (screen A) and UNIT2 (screen B). 


UNIT 

:POWer 

:PROBe 

DBM | DBPW | DBPT | WATT | 

DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | 

DBUA | AMPere 

V | W | DB | PCT | UNITLESS | 

DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ | 

DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M | 

DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ 

 

:UNIT:POWer DBM | DBPW | DBPT | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | V | W | 

DB | PCT | UNITLESS | DBUV_MHZ |DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | 

DBUA_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ 

This command selects the default unit for input and output. 

Example: ":UNIT:POW DBUV" 

Features: *RST value: DBM 


Modes: 

R, A 

:UNIT:PROBe ON | OFF 

This command determines whether the coding of a probe which is connected to the front panel is 

taken into consideration (ON) or not (OFF). 

Example: ":UNIT:PROB OFF" 



Modes: 

R, A 

1088.7531.12 6.179 E-15

Alphabetical List of Commands 

ESIB 


In the following, all remote-control commands are lisated with their parameters and page numbers. 

Generally, they are arranged alphabetically according to the keywords of the command. 

Command Parameter Page 

:ABORt 6.7 

:CALCulate:CTHReshold MIN to MAX (depending on current unit) 6.15 

:CALCulate:CTHReshold:STATe ON | OFF 6.15 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:AOFF 6.9 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X 6.12 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y 6.12 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet 6.12 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.12 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? 6.13 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.13 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:APEak 6.10 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:LEFT 6.11 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:NEXT 6.10 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum[:PEAK] 6.10 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:RIGHt 6.10 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MINimum:LEFT 6.11 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MINimum:NEXT 6.11 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MINimum[:PEAK] 6.11 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MINimum:RIGHt 6.11 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MODE ABSolute | RELative 6.9 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.8 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF 6.13 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:STEP[:INCRement] 6.13 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:TRACe 1 to 4 6.9 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X 

0 to MAX 

(frequency | sweep time | symbols) 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X:RELative? 6.9 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:Y? 6.10 

:CALCulate:DLINe MIN to MAX (depending on current unit) 6.14 

:CALCulate:DLINe:STATe ON | OFF 6.14 

:CALCulate:FEED 

‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ | ‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ 

| ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ | 

‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’ | 

‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’ | 'XTIM:AM' | 

'XTIM:FM' | 'XTIM:PM' | 

'XTIM:AMSummary' | 'XTIM:FMSummary' 

| 'XTIM:PMSummary' | ‘TCAP’’ 

:CALCulate:FLINe 0 GHz to f max 6.16 

:CALCulate:FLINe:STATe ON | OFF 6.16 

:CALCulate:FORMat MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | RIMag | 

FREQuency | IEYE | QEYE | TEYE | 

FEYE | COMP | CONS 

:CALCulate:FSK:DEViation:REFerence 6.20 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACTive? 6.22 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel 0 to 100 dB, 0 to 100 dB 6.29 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? 6.29 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:STATe ON | OFF 6.29 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate 0 to 100 DB, 0 to 100 DB 6.30 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate:RESult? 6.30 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate:STATe ON | OFF 6.30 

6.9 

6.18 

6.19 

1088.7531.12 6.180 E-15

ESIB 



:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.29 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CATalog? 6.23 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CLEar[:IMMediate] 6.27 

:CALCulate:LIMit:COMMent 6.28 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] ,.. 6.23 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency | TIME 6.23 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:MODE RELative | ABSolute 6.24 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:OFFSet 6.23 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt 6.24 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:SPACing LINear < LOGarithmic 6.24 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:UNIT[:TIME] S | SYM 6.24 

:CALCulate:LIMit:COPY 1 to 8 | 6.28 

:CALCulate:LIMit:DELete 6.28 

:CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL? 6.27 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] 6.26 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:MARGin 6.26 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:MODE RELative | ABSolute 6.27 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:OFFSet 6.26 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt 6.27 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 6.27 

:CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF 6.26 

:CALCulate:LIMit:NAME 1 to 8 | 6.28 

:CALCulate:LIMit:STATe ON | OFF 6.22 

:CALCulate:LIMit:TRACe 1 to 4 6.22 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UNIT DBM | DBPW | DBPT | WATT | DBUV | 

DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DB | 

DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ 

|DBUV_M | DBUA_M | DBUV_MHZ | 

DBUA_MHZ UNITLESS 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] ,.. 6.24 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:MARGin 6.25 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:MODE RELative | ABSolute 6.25 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:OFFSet 6.25 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt 6.25 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 6.26 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF 6.25 

:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF 6.34 

:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt ON | OFF 6.34 

:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt:FREQuency? 6.35 

:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt:RESolution 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz 6.35 

:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.35 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AFRequency[:RES]? 6.43 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS 6.42 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:CARRier[:RESult]? 6.43 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FERRor[:RESult]? 6.43 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS | RDEV 6.42 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:PM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS 6.42 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad:RESult? 6.43 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.43 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:CENTer: ON | OFF 6.53 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:CSTep: ON | OFF 6.53 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? MERM | MEPK | MEPS | PERM PEPK | 

PEPS | EVRM | EVPK | EVPS | IQOF | 

IQIM |ADR | FERR | FEPK | RHO | DEV | 

FSRM | FSPK | FSPS | DTTS 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff 10ms to 1000s 6.40 

6.22 

6.44 

1088.7531.12 6.181 E-15


ESIB 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect AM | FM 6.40 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.40 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:MSTep 6.54 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown 6.38 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? 6.39 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? 6.39 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON | OFF 6.39 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? 6.40 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.39 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:CFILter ON | OFF 6.46 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | CDPD | 

FWCDMA | RWCDMA | FW3Gppcdma | 

RW3Gppcdma | M2CDma | D2CDma | 


R19Cdma | NONE | FO8Cdma | 

RO8Cdma | FO19cdma | RO19cdma 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect? ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF 6.45 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:REFerence: ON | OFF 6.54 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/3dB) | (60dB/6dB) 6.40 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQuency? 6.41 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult? 6.41 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON | OFF 6.41 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STARt 6.53 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STOP 6.53 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.41 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF 6.53 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON | OFF 6.52 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAX:AVER:RES? 6.47 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAX:PHOL:RES? 6.47 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:RESult? 6.47 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.46 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVER:RES? 6.52 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOL:RES? 6.52 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? 6.52 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.51 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:AVER:RES? 6.50 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:PHOL:RES? 6.50 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:RESult? 6.50 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.49 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:AVER:RES? 6.49 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:PHOL:RES? 6.49 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:RESult? 6.49 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.48 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON | OFF 6.52 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVER:RES? 6.48 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOL:RES? 6.48 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? 6.48 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.47 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVER:RESult? 6.51 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOL:RESult? 6.51 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? 6.51 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.50 

6.46 

6.45 

6.44 

1088.7531.12 6.182 E-15

ESIB 



:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:STATe ON | OFF 6.46 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ZOOM 6.39 

:CALCulate:MARKer:LOEXclude ON | OFF 6.35 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:APEak 6.36 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:LEFT 6.37 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:NEXT 6.36 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum[:PEAK] 6.36 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:RIGHt 6.36 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:LEFT 6.37 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:NEXT 6.37 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum[:PEAK] 6.37 

:CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:RIGHt 6.37 

:CALCulate:MARKer:PEXCursion 6.38 

:CALCulate:MARKer:READout MPHase | RIMaginary 6.38 

:CALCulate:MARKer:SCOupled[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.35 

:CALCulate:MARKer:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF 6.38 

:CALCulate:MARKer:STEP[:INCRement] 6.38 

:CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe 1 to 4 6.34 

:CALCulate:MARKer:X 

0 to MAX 

(frequency | sweep time | symbols) 

:CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.34 

:CALCulate:MARKer:Y? 6.36 

:CALCulate:MARKer[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.33 

:CALCulate:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] 6.55 

:CALCulate:MATH:STATe ON | OFF 6.55 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch | PSEarch:MARGin MINimum .. MAXimum 6.56 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch | PSEarch:SUBRanges 1 .. 500 6.56 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch | PSEarch[:IMMediate] 6.56 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch: METHod SUBRange | PEAK 6.57 

:CALCulate:RLINe MIN to MAX (depending on current unit) 6.16 

:CALCulate:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF 6.16 

:CALCulate:THReshold MIN to MAX (depending on current unit) 6.15 

:CALCulate:THReshold:STATe ON | OFF 6.15 

:CALCulate:TLINe 0 to 1000s 6.17 

:CALCulate:TLINe:STATe ON | OFF 6.17 

:CALCulate:UNIT:ANGLe DEG | RAD 6.58 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBM | V | W | DB | PCT | UNITLESS | 

DBPT | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | 

VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DBUV_MHZ | 

DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | 


:CALCulate:X:UNIT:TIME S | SYM 6.58 

:CALibration[:ALL] 6.59 

:CALibration:BANDwidth| BWIDth[:RESolution]? 6.59 

:CALibration:IQ? 6.59 

:CALibration:LDETector? 6.60 

:CALibration:LOSuppression? 6.60 

:CALibration:PPEak? 6.60 

:CALibration:PRESelector? 6.60 

:CALibration:SHORt? 6.60 

:CALibration:STATe ON | OFF 6.60 

:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation? 6.62 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:FUNCtion numeric_value>,... 6.61 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] CALibration | RF 6.61 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce ON | OFF 6.61 

:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF 6.64 

6.34 

6.58 

1088.7531.12 6.183 E-15


ESIB 


:DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer? 6.72 

:DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer? 6.72 

:DISPlay:CMAP:DEFault 6.65 

:DISPlay:CMAP:HSL 

0.0 to 100.0 (tint), 

0.0 to 100.0 (saturation), 

0.0 to 100.0 (brightness) 

:DISPlay:CMAP:PDEFined 6.66 

:DISPlay:FORMat SINGle | SPLit 6.64 

:DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF 6.65 

:DISPlay:PROGram[:MODE] ON | OFF 6.64 

:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff 6.73 

:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.73 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:MINFo ON | OFF 6.66 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF 6.66 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[:DATA] 6.66 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TIME ON | OFF 6.67 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:EYE:COUNt 1 to Result Length 6.72 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | MAXHold | 

MINHold | FRESult 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:ANALog ON | OFF 6.71 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:CWRite ON | OFF 6.71 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:HCONtinuous ON | OFF 6.71 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:SYMBol DOTS | BARS | OFF 6.72 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 6.68 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:RVALue 6.67 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON | OFF 6.67 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQ]:CENTer 6.68 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQ]:STARt 6.67 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQ]:STOP 6.67 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic | PERCent 6.70 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe] 10dB to 200dB 6.68 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom 6.70 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute | RELative 6.68 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision 6.70 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel -200dBm to 200dBm 6.68 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet -200dB to 200dB 6.69 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0 to 100 PCT 6.70 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue 6.69 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO ON | OFF 6.69 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:TOP 6.70 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.72 

:FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | REAL | UINT [,32] 6.74 

:FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.75 

:FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent 6.75 

:FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMa 6.75 

:FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.75 

:HCOPy:ABORt 6.76 

:HCOPy:DESTination 'MMEM’ | ‘SYST:COMM:PRIN’ | 

‘SYST:COMM:CLIP’ 

:HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF 6.77 

:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage WMF | EWMF | GDI | BMP 6.77 

:HCOPy[:IMMediate] 6.78 

:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL 6.78 

:HCOPy:ITEM:FFEed:STATe ON | OFF 6.78 

:HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:TEXT 6.78 

6.65 

6.71 

6.77 

1088.7531.12 6.184 E-15

ESIB 



:HCOPy:ITEM:PFEed:STATe ON | OFF 6.78 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe ON | OFF 6.79 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT 6.79 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:CAINcrement ON | OFF 6.79 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF 6.79 

:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL 6.80 

:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 6.80 

:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait 6.80 

:HOLD 6.7 

:INITiate:CONMeas 6.81 

:INITiate:CONTinuous ON | OFF 6.81 

:INITiate:DISPlay ON | OFF 6.81 

:INITiate[:IMMediate] 6.81 

:INPut:ATTenuation 0 to 70dB 6.82 

:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF 6.82 

:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal | LNOise | LDIStorsion 6.83 

:INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection ON | OFF 6.83 

:INPut:COUPling AC | DC 6.85 

:INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF 6.85 

:INPut:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF 6.85 

:INPut:IMPedance 50 | 75 6.84 

:INPut:IMPedance:CORRection RAM | RAZ 6.85 

:INPut:LISN:PEARth GROunded | FLOating 6.84 

:INPut:LISN:PHASe L1 | L2 | L3 | N 6.84 

:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] TWOPhase | FOURphase | OFF 6.84 

:INPut:MIXer -10 to -100 dBm 6.85 

:INPut:TYPE INPUT1 | INPUT2 6.86 

:INPut:UPORt:STATe ON | OFF 6.83 

:INPut:UPORt[:VALue] 6.83 

:INSTrument:COUPle NONE | MODE | X | Y | CONTrol | XY | 

XCONtrol | YCONtrol | ALL 

:INSTrument:NSELect 1 | 2 | 3 | 6 6.87 

:INSTrument[:SELect] RECeiver | SANalyzer | ADEMod | 

DDEMod 

:MMEMory:CATalog? 6.90 

:MMEMory:CDIRectory directory name 6.91 

:MMEMory:CLear:ALL 6.95 

:MMEMory:CLear:STATe 1,path 6.94 

:MMEMory:COMMent 6.99 

:MMEMory:COPY path, file name 6.91 

:MMEMory:DATA , 6.91 

:MMEMory:DELete path, file name 6.91 

:MMEMory:INITialize ’A:’ 6.92 

:MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,path 6.92 

:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe path, file name 6.92 

:MMEMory:MDIRectory path 6.92 

:MMEMory:MOVE path, file name 6.93 

:MMEMory:MSIS ’A:’ | ’C:’ 6.93 

:MMEMory:NAME path, file name 6.93 

:MMEMory:RDIRectory directory name 6.93 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL 6.98 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON | OFF 6.96 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL:ALL ON | OFF 6.98 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL[:ACTive] ON | OFF 6.98 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault 6.99 

6.88 

6.87 

1088.7531.12 6.185 E-15


ESIB 


:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup ON | OFF 6.95 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy ON | OFF 6.96 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON | OFF 6.95 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON | OFF 6.96 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON | OFF 6.96 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON | OFF 6.97 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE 6.98 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData ON | OFF 6.97 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe ON | OFF 6.96 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ON | OFF 6.97 

:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer[:ACTive] ON | OFF 6.97 

:MMEMory:STORe:FINal Pfad 6.95 

:MMEMory:STORe:STATe path, file name 6.94 

:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 1 to 4, path 6.94 

:OUTPut:AF:SENSitivity 

0.1 PCT to 100 PCT for AM 

0.1 KHZ to 100 KHZ for FM 

0.0 1RAD to 10 RAD for PM 

:OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.100 

:OUTPut:UPORt:STATe ON | OFF 6.100 

:OUTPut:UPORt[:VALue] #B00000000 to #B11111111 6.100 

:[SENSe:]ADEMod:AF:COUPling AC | DC 6.102 

:[SENSe:]ADEMod:RTIMe ON | OFF 6.103 

:[SENSe:]ADEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse 6.103 

:[SENSe:]ADEMod:SQUelch:LEVel 30 to -150 dBm 6.103 

:[SENSe:]ADEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.102 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:AUTO ON | OFF 6.104 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:COUNt 0 to 256 6.104 

:[SENSe:]AVERage[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.104 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:TYPE MAXimum | SCALar 6.105 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:DEMod 

5 kHz to 200 kHz (Real Time on) 

5 kHz to 5 MHz (Real Time off) 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:PLL AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW 6.108 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo 1Hz to 10MHz 6.108 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON | OFF 6.108 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio 0.001 to 1000 | SINe | PULSe | NOISe 6.108 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] 1Hz to 10MHz 6.106 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF 6.106 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FILTer 3dB | 6dB 6.107 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE ANALog | DIGital 6.107 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE:FFT ON | OFF 6.107 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.0001 to 1 6.107 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough | OPEN 6.110 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J] 6.116 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS 6.117 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog? 6.115 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar 6.118 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent 6.117 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA ,.. 6.117 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer 6.116 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs 2 | 3 6.117 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect 6.115 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber 6.116 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD 6.116 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission | REFLexion 6.110 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall 6.110 

6.101 

6.108 

1088.7531.12 6.186 E-15

ESIB 



:[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.110 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive? 6.111 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog? 6.111 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent 6.112 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA ,.. 6.112 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete 6.113 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing LINear|LOGarithmic 6.112 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect 6.111 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.112 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT 6.111 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:ACTive? 6.113 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak ON | OFF 6.114 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog? 6.113 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent 6.114 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:DELete 6.115 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe ,,,... 6.114 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect 6.113 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.115 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT 6.114 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa 0.2 to 1 6.125 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:MEASurement OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian 

| B22 | B25 | B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | 

FR95 | QRM | RM95 | QRR | RR95 | 

A25Fm | EMES | EREF 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | B22 | 

B25 | B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | 

QRM | RM95 | QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | 

EMES | EREF 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FORMat QPSK | PSK | MSK | QAM | FSK 6.123 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FSK:NSTate 2 | 4 6.124 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:MSK:FORMat TYPE1 | TYPE2 | NORMal | DIFFerential 6.124 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:NORMalize ON | OFF 6.126 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRATe 1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16 6.125 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet GSM | EDGe | NADC | TETRa | 

DCS1800 | PCS1900 | PHS | PDCup | 

PDCDown | APCO25CQPSK | 

APCO25C4FM | CDPD | DECT | CT2 | 

ERMes | MODacom | PWT | TFTS | F16 | 

F322 | F324 | F64 | FQCDma | F95Cdma 

| RQCDma | R95Cdma | FNADc | RNADc 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8 6.123 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PSK:NSTate 2 | 8 6.123 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:QAM:NSTate 16 6.124 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4 6.123 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse 6.123 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:PULSe:STATe ON | OFF 6.126 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:CATalog? 6.126 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent 6.127 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA 6.127 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete 6.128 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MONLy ON | OFF 6.128 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME 6.127 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:OFFSet 6.126 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern 6.127 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect 6.126 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe ON | OFF 6.127 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:TIME 100 to 1600 6.128 

6.125 

6.125 

6.129 

1088.7531.12 6.187 E-15


ESIB 


:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SRATe 160 Hz to 1.6 MHz 6.124 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:TIME 1 to Frame Length 6.124 

:[SENSe:]DEMod OFF | AM | FM 6.119 

:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | 


:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion]:AUTO ON | OFF 6.120 

:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] APEak |NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | 

RMS | AVERage | QPEak | ACVideo 

:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | 


:[SENSe:]FILTer:CCITt[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.131 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.131 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:LINK DISPlay | AUDio 6.132 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:DEMPhasis[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.131 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:TCONstant 6.132 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:HPASs:FREQuency 30 Hz | 300 Hz 6.130 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:HPASS[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.130 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:LPASs:FREQuency 

3 kHz | 15 kHz (real time on) 

5 PCT | 10 PCT | 25 PCT (real time off) 

:[SENSe:]FILTer:LPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.130 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer 0 GHz to f max 6.133 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STARt | STOP | SPAN 6.133 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 0 to f max 6.134 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN | RBW | OFF 6.134 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 1 to 100 PCT 6.134 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE CW|FIXed | SWEep 6.136 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet 6.136 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 0 GHz to f max 6.134 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL 6.134 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK CENTer | STOP | SPAN 6.135 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt 0 GHz to f max 6.135 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK CENTer | STOP | SPAN 6.135 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP 0 GHz to f max 6.135 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK CENTer | STARt | SPAN 6.135 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed] f min to f max 6.136 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:STEP f min to f max 6.136 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS 6.139 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:BLOCk ON | OFF 6.137 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic 1 to 62 6.138 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND A | Q | U | V | E | W | F | D | G | Y | J 6.139 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD 6.138 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH 6.139 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] 6.139 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLE 6.139 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:PORTs 2 | 3 6.138 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal ON | OFF | AUTO 6.138 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:THReshold 0.1 to 100 dB 6.138 

:[SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.137 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:AHOLd[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.140 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:MODE ABSolute | RELative 6.140 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:MTIMe 0.1 s | 1 s 6.141 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:REFerence 6.141 

6.121 

6.120 

6.121 

6.131 

1088.7531.12 6.188 E-15

ESIB 



:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE 6.141 

:[SENSe:]MSUMmary:RUNit PCT | DB 6.140 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 1 to 3 6.143 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel 0 to 1000MHz 6.143 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate 0 to 1000MHz 6.144 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] 0 to 1000 MHz 6.143 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute | RELative 6.144 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | 

OBWidth | CN | CN0| ADJust 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE 6.144 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 0 to 1000MHz 6.142 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate 0 to 1000MHz 6.143 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] 0 to 1000 MHz 6.142 

:[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth 0 to 100PCT 6.145 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 1MHz to 16MHz 6.146 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe 0 to 4095 6.146 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe:SAVe 6.146 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal 6.146 

:[SENSe:]SCAN


ESIB 


:STATus:OPERation:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.157 

:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? 6.157 

:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.158 

:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.158 

:STATus:PRESet 6.158 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? 6.163 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.164 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]? 6.163 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.164 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.164 

:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? 6.158 

:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.159 

:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? 6.158 

:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.159 

:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.159 

:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? 6.164 

:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.165 

:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? 6.164 

:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.165 

:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.165 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? 6.160 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.161 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]? 6.160 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.161 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.161 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? 6.161 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.162 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]? 6.161 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.162 

:STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.162 

:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? 6.159 

:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.160 

:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? 6.159 

:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.160 

:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.160 

:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition? 6.162 

:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.163 

:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]? 6.162 

:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.163 

:STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.163 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition? 6.165 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.166 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]? 6.165 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.166 

:STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.166 

:STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]? 6.166 

:SYSTem:BINFo? 6.173 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:ADDRess 0 to 30 6.168 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0 to 30 6.167 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator LFEOI | EOI 6.168 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? 6.170 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT? 6.170 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect 6.170 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:DTR IBFull | OFF 6.168 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS IBFull | OFF 6.168 

1088.7531.12 6.190 E-15

ESIB 



:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD 6.168 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BITS 7 | 8 6.169 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PACE XON | NONE 6.169 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] EVEN | ODD | NONE 6.169 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:SBITs 1 | 2 6.169 

:SYSTem:DATE 1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31 6.170 

:SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON | OFF 6.171 

:SYSTem:ERRor? 6.171 

:SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] ’password’ 6.171 

:SYSTem:PRESet 6.171 

:SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible FSE | OFF 6.171 

:SYSTem:SET 6.172 

:SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume 0 to 1 6.172 

:SYSTem:TIME 0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59 6.172 

:SYSTem:VERSion? 6.172 

:TRACe[:DATA] 

:TRACe:COPY 

TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4| 

SINGle, | | 

FINAL1 | FINAL2 | FINAL3 | FINAL4 

TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 

,TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 

:TRACe:FEED:CONTrol ALWays | NEVer 6.176 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff -100s to 100 s 6.178 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:AF 

AM-Demod -120 to +120 PCT FM-Demod 

-1kHz to +1kHz PM-Demod -12 to + 12 

RAD 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] –5.0 V to +5.0 V 6.177 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 0 to 100 PCT 6.177 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative 6.178 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate | LINE | EXTernal | VIDeo | 

RFPower | AF 

:UNIT:POWer DBM | DBPW | DBPT | WATT | DBUV | 

DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | V | W | 

DB | PCT | UNITLESS | DBUV_MHZ | 

DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | 


:UNIT:PROBe ON | OFF 6.179 

6.174 

6.176 

6.178 

6.177 

6.179 

1088.7531.12 6.191 E-15

Command Assignment - EMI Receiver 

ESIB 

Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment 

Basic Instrument - EMI Receiver Mode 

CONFIGURATION Key Group 

MODE 




FREQUENCY 

ATTEN 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] 

-- 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

0 DB MIN 

ON OFF 

AUTO RANGE 

ON OFF 

AUTOPREAMP 

ON OFF 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

RES BW 






:[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] 

DETECTOR 

-- 

MAX PEAK 

:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive 

QUASIPEAK 

:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] QPEak 

AVERAGE 

:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] AVERage 

RMS 

:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] RMS 

MIN PEAK 

:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] NEGative 

AC VIDEO 

QP RBW 

UNCOUPLED 

MEAS TIME 

:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] ACVideo 


:[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF ACVideo 


DEMOD 

-- 

DEMOD 

ON OFF 

:[SENSe:]DEMod OFF (automatically switched on with AM|FM) 

1088.7531.12 6.192 E-15

ESIB 


AM 

:[SENSe:]DEMod AM 

FM 

:[SENSe:]DEMod FM 

SPLIT SCRN 

ON OFF 

DEFINE 

SCAN 

SCAN TABLE 

- 

-- 







ADJUST 

AXIS 

SINGLE 

SCAN 

CONTINUOUS 

SCAN 

SCAN 

RANGES 

-- 

:INITiate2:CONTinuous OFF; :INITiate[:IMMediate] 

:INITiate2:CONTinuous ON; :INITiate[:IMMediate] 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt] 1 ... 10 




:[SENSe:]SCAN:BANDwidth:RESolution 


:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:ATTenuation 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF 


INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

RANGE 

1-5 6-10 

RUN SCAN 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 


HOLD SCAN 

:HOLD 

CONT AT 

REC FREQ 

CONT AT 

HOLD 

STOP SCAN 


-- 

:ABORt 

STOP SCAN 

:ABORt 

CISPR 

RANGE A 

-- 

1088.7531.12 6.193 E-15


ESIB 

RUN SCAN 

CISPR 

RANGE B 

CISPR 

RANGE C 

CISPR 

RANGE D 

-- 

-- 

-- 

:INITiate2[:IMMediate]- 

HOLD SCAN 

:HOLD 

CONT AT 

REC FREQ 

CONT AT 

HOLD 

STOP SCAN 


-- 

:ABORt 

STOP SCAN 

:ABORt 

PEAK 

SEARCH 

EDIT PEAK 

LIST 

EDIT 

FREQUENCY 

INSERT 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate] 

-- 

-- 

-- 

DELETE 

-- 

SORT BY 

FREQUENCY 

SORT BY 

DELTA LIM 

-- 

-- 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

ASCII 

CONFIG 

:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 

-- 

1...4, 

EDIT PATH 

the path is included in command MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 

DECIM SEP 

. , 


NEW 

APPEND 

:FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON | OFF 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

:FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

:FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent ‘comment‘ 

NO OF 

PEAKS 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges 1 ... 500 

1088.7531.12 6.194 E-15

ESIB 


PEAKS 

SUBRANGES 

MARGIN 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod SUBRange | PEAK 

:CALCulate:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin -200 dB ... 200 dB 

FINAL 

MEAS TIME 

LISN 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:FMEasurement 

-- 

ESH2-Z5 

ENV 4200 

ESHR-Z5 

:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] FOURphase 

:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] TWOPhase 

OFF 

:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] OFF 

PRESCAN 

PHASES 

PHASE N 

-- 

:INPut:LISN:PHASe N 

PHASE L1 

:INPut:LISN:PHASe L1 

PHASE L2 


PHASE L3 


PE 

GROUNDED 

:INPut:LISN:PEARth GROunded 

PE 

FLOATING 

:INPut:LISN:PEARth FLOating 

FINAL 

PHASES 

PHASE N 

-- 


PHASE L1 


PHASE L2 


PHASE L3 


PE 

GROUNDED 


PE 

FLOATING 


AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

-- 

-- 

1088.7531.12 6.195 E-15


ESIB 

RUN 

FINAL MEAS 

HOLD 

FINAL MEAS 

-- 

-- 

AUTOMATIC 

FINAL 

-- 

INTER 

ACTIVE 

-- 

SKIP 

FREQUENCY 

-- 

MEASURE 

-- 

STOP 

FINAL MAES 

-- 

STOP 

FINAL MEAS 

-- 

FREQUENCY Key Group 

START 


STOP 


CENTER/ 

FREQ 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer 

STEP 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

STEPSIZE 

= CENTER 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 

no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command 

SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

-- 

1088.7531.12 6.196 E-15

ESIB 


LEVEL Key Group 

REF/ 

UNIT 

dBµV 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBMV 

dBm 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBM 

dBµA 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUA 

dBpW 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBPW 

dBpT 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBPT 

dBµV/m 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUV_M 

dBµA/m 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUA_M 

dB* / MHz 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ 

PROBE CODE 

ON / OFF 

UNIT:PROBe ON | OFF 

RANGE 

LOG 120 dB 

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe] 120 

LOG 100 dB 


LOG 50 dB 


LOG 20 dB 


LOG 10 dB 


LOG 

MANUAL 

GRID 

MAX LEVEL 

GRID 

MIN LEVEL 

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe] 

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:TOP 

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom 

1088.7531.12 6.197 E-15


ESIB 

INPUT Key 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

0 DB MIN 

ON OFF 

AUTO RANGE 

ON OFF 

AUTOPREAMP 

ON OFF 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

INPUT 1 






:INPut:TYPE INPUT1 

INPUT 2 


INPUT 2 

AC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

DC COUPLED 

:INPut:COUPling AC 

:INPut:COUPling DC 

MARKER Key Group 

NORMAL 

MARKER 

1..4 

MARKER 

ZOOM 

PREV ZOOM 

RANGE 

ZOOM 

OFF 

MARKER 

INFO 

ALL MARKER 

OFF 


:CALCulate:MARKer:X ; 



-- 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ZOOM OFF 

DISPlay:WINDow:MINFo ON | OFF (indication) 


STEP 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

MKR TO 

STEPSIZE 

DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 




-- 

1088.7531.12 6.198 E-15

ESIB 


DELTA 

DELTA 

1...4 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REF POINT 

LEVEL 

REF POINT 

LVL OFFSET 

REF POINT 

FREQUENCY 

REFERENCE 

FIXED 

DELTA MKR 

ABS REL 

ALL DELTA 

OFF 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:X 



-- 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet 

 





STEP 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

MANUAL 

STEPSIZE 



DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

-- 

SEARCH 

PEAK 

NEXT 

PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

NEXT PEAK 

LEFT 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

MARKER 

TRACK 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

SEARCH LIM 

ON/OFF 












:CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits[STATe] ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 6.199 E-15


ESIB 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR/DELTA 

MIN 

NEXT 

MIN 

NEXT MIN 

RIGHT 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

MARKER 

TRACK 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

PEAK 

EXCURSION 















MKR-> 

PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

ADD TO 

PEAK LIST 

TUNE TO 

MARKER 

MKR-> 

STEPSIZE 

MARKER 

TRACK 

SETTINGS 

COUPLED 

MKR-> 

TRACE 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR/DELTA 





-- 





:CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:TRACe 



1088.7531.12 6.200 E-15

ESIB 


LINES Key Group 

D LINES 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1/2 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 1/2 


:CALCulate:DLINe 


:CALCulate:THReshold 


:CALCulate:RLINe 


:CALCulate:FLINe 

LIMITS 

SELECT 

LIMIT LINE 

NEW 

LIMIT LINE 

NAME 



see EDIT LIMIT LINE 


VALUES 


INSERT 

VALUE 

DELETE 

VALUE 

SHIFT X 

LIMIT LINE 

SHIFT Y 

LIMIT LINE 

SAVE 

LIMIT LINE 

EDIT LIMIT 

LINE 

COPY 

LIMIT LINE 

DELETE 

LIMIT LINE 

X OFFSET 






automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UNIT DBM | DBUV | DBUA | DBPW | DBPT | 

DBUV_M | DBUA_M 

:CALCulate:LIMit:TRACe 


:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] , .. 



:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] , .. 








:CALCulate:LIMit:COPY 1...8 | 



X OFFSET 



1088.7531.12 6.201 E-15


ESIB 

TRACE Key Group 

TRACE 1 

CLEAR/ 

WRITE 

VIEW 



BLANK 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[:STATe] OFF 

MAX HOLD 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MAXHold 

MIN HOLD 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MINHold 

FINAL 

RESULTS 

SCAN 

COUNT 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE FRESult 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt 

DETECTOR 

-- 

MAX PEAK 


QUASIPEAK 

:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] QPEak 

AVERAGE 


RMS 


MIN PEAK 


AC VIDEO 

FINAL 

MAX PEAK 

FINAL 

QUASIPEAK 

FINAL 

AVERAGE 

FINAL 

RMS 

FINAL 

MIN PEAK 

FINAL 

AC VIDEO 

COPY 

T1-T2/T3/T4 

+REF ->T1 



:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement POSitive 

:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement QPEak 

:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement AVERage 

:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement RMS 

:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement NEGative 

:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement ACVideo 


TRACe:COPY TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4 , 




1088.7531.12 6.202 E-15

ESIB 


T1-REF 

->T1 

TRACE MATH 

OFF 



:CALCulate:MATH:STATe OFF 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

ASCII 

CONFIG 


-- 

1...4, 

EDIT PATH 


DECIM SEP 

. , 

NEW 

APPEND 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMA 

FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON | OFF 

FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent ‚comment‘ 

SWEEP Key Group 

TRIGGER 

FREE RUN 


EXTERN 

SLOPE 

POS/NEG 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] -5.0...+5.0V 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative 

SWEEP/ 

SCAN 

SCAN TABLE 

ADJUST 

AXIS 

SINGLE 

SCAN 

CONTINUOUS 

SCAN 







-- 

:INITiate2:CONTinuous OFF; :INITiate[:IMMediate] 

:INITiate2:CONTinuous ON; :INITiate[:IMMediate] 

1088.7531.12 6.203 E-15


ESIB 

SCAN 

RANGES 

INS BEFORE 

RANGE 

INS AFTER 

RANGE 

DELETE 

RANGE 

RANGE 

1-5 6-10 

RUN SCAN 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt] 1 ... 10 




:[SENSe:]SCAN:BANDwidth:RESolution 


:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPUT:ATTenuation:AUTO 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPut:ATTenuation 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPUT:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF 

:[SENSe:]SCAN:INPUT:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF 


-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 


HOLD SCAN 

:HOLD 

CONT AT 

REC FREQ 

CONT AT 

HOLD 

STOP SCAN 


-- 

:ABORt 

STOP SCAN 

:ABORt 

CISPR 

RANGE A 

CISPR 

RANGE B 

CISPR 

RANGE C 

CISPR 

RANGE D 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

RUN/ 

COUPLING 


HOLD SCAN 

:HOLD 

CONT AT 

REC FREQ 

CONT AT 

HOLD 

STOP SCAN 


-- 

:ABORt 

STOP SCAN 

:ABORt 

1088.7531.12 6.204 E-15

ESIB 

Command Assignment - Signal Analysis 

Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis Mode 


CENTER/ 

FREQ 

CENTER 

MANUAL 

START 

FIXED 

SPAN 

FIXED 

STOP 

FIXED 

FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STARt 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK SPAN 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STOP 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG 

STEP 

AUTO 

0.1 * SPAN 

or 

AUTO 

0.1 * RBW 

AUTO 

0.5 * SPAN 

or 

AUTO 

0.5 * RBW 

AUTO 

X * SPAN 

or 

AUTO 

X * RBW 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

STEPSIZE 

= CENTER 










:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 


SPAN/ 

ZOOM 

SPAN 

MANUAL 

START 

FIXED 

CENTER 

FIXED 

STOP 

FIXED 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK START 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK CENTer 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK STOP 

1088.7531.12 6.205 E-15


ESIB 

ZERO 

SPAN 

FULL 

SPAN 

LAST 

SPAN 

ZOOM 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 0HZ oder 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON| OFF 

MOVE ZOOM 

WINDOW 

MOVE ZOOM 

START 

MOVE ZOOM 

STOP 

ZOOM OFF 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:CENTer 

 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STARt 

 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STOP 

 


FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 


START 

START 

MANUAL 

CENTER 

FIXED 

SPAN 

FIXED 

STOP 

FIXED 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK CENTer 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK SPAN 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK STOP 


STOP 

STOP 

MANUAL 

START 

FIXED 

CENTER 

FIXED 

SPAN 

FIXED 

FREQ AXIS 

LIN LOG 


:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK STARt 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK CENTer 

:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK SPAN 


1088.7531.12 6.206 E-15

ESIB 



REF/ 

UNIT 

REF 

LEVEL 

REF LEVEL 

OFFSET 

GRID 

ABS/REL 

UNIT 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute|RELative 

-- 

dBm 


dBmV 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBMV 

dBµV 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUV 

dBµA 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUA 

dBpW 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBPW 

dB*/MHz 

VOLT 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUV_MHZ 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBUA_MHZ 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DBMV_MHZ 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer VOLT 

AMPERE 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer AMPere 

WATT 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer WATT 

PROBE CODE 

ON / OFF 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW NOISE 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

MIXER 

LEVEL 

MAX LEVEL 

AUTO 

MAX LEVEL 

MANUAL 

:UNIT:PROBe ON | OFF 


:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal; 


:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LNOise; 


:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LDIStortion; 


:INPut:MIXer 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO ON 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO OFF; 


1088.7531.12 6.207 E-15


ESIB 

RANGE 

LOG ... 

LINEAR/% 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing LOGarithmic; 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe] 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing PERCent 

LINEAR/dB 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing LINear 

LOG MANUAL 

GRID 

ABS/REL 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y:SPACing LOGarithmic; 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe] 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute|RELative 

INPUT Key 

INPUT 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW NOISE 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

MIXER 

LEVEL 

INPUT 

SELECT 

RF INPUT 

50 OHM 

RF INPUT 

75 OHM/RAM 

RF INPUT 

75OHM/RAZ 

INPUT 1 








:INPut:MIXer 

-- 

:INPut:IMPedance 50 

:INPut:IMPedance:CORRection RAM 

:INPut:IMPedance:CORRection RAZ 


INPUT 2 


INPUT 2 

AC COUPLED 

INPUT 2 

DC COUPLED 

:INPut:COUPling AC 

:INPut:COUPling DC 

1088.7531.12 6.208 E-15

ESIB 



NORMAL 

MARKER 

1..4 

SIGNAL 

COUNT 

MARKER 

DEMOD 

MKR DEMOD 

ON/OFF 

AM 




:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt ON | OFF; 


-- 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect AM 

FM 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect FM 

MARKER 

ZOOM 

MARKER 

INFO 

MKR STOP 

TIME 

ALL MARKER 

OFF 

POWER MEAS 

SETTINGS 

SET NO OF 

ADJ CHAN’S 

ACP 

STANDARD 

CH FILTER 

ON/OFF 

CHANNEL 

BANDWIDTH 

CHANNEL 

SPACING 

EDIT 

ACP LIMITS 

LIMIT 

CHECK 

% POWER 

BANDWIDTH 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff 




-- 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet 

NADC| TETRA| PDC| PHS| CDPD| FWCDma| RWCDma| FW3Gppcdma| RW3Gppcdma| 

M2CDma| D2CDma| F8CDma| R8CDma| F19Cdma| R19Cdma| FO8Cdma| RO8Cdma| 

FO19cdma| RO19cdma| NONE 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:CFILter ON | OFF 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate 

 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel , 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:STATe ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate , 

 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate:STATe ON | OFF 


:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? 

:CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ALTernate:RESult? 

:[SENSe:]POWer: BANDwidth|BWIDth 

1088.7531.12 6.209 E-15


ESIB 

CHANNEL 

POWER 

CP/ACP 

ABS/REL 

SET CP 

REFERENCE 

C/N 

C/No 

ADJACENT 

CHAN POWER 

ADJUST CP 

SETTINGS 

OCCUPIED 

PWR BANDW 

COUNTER 

RESOL 

SIGNAL 

TRACK 

NOISE 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect CPOWer; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CPOWer; 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute|RELative 

:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect CN; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CN; 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect CN0; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CN0; 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower; 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower; 


:[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ADJust 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect OBANdwidth|OBWidth 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? OBANdwidth|OBWidth 


:CALCulate:MARKer:COUNt:RESolution 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF; 


STEP 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

MKR TO 

STEPSIZE 

DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 




-- 

1088.7531.12 6.210 E-15

ESIB 


DELTA 

DELTA 

1...4 

PHASE 

NOISE 

REFERENCE 

POINT 

REF POINT 

LEVEL 

REF POINT 

LVL OFFSET 

REF POINT 

FREQUENCY 

REF POINT 

TIME 

REFERENCE 

FIXED 

DELTA MKR 

ABS REL 

ALL DELTA 

OFF 





:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? 

-- 


:CALCulate:DELTamarker:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet 

 






STEP 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

MANUAL 

STEPSIZE 



DELTA TO 

STEPSIZE 

-- 

SEARCH 

PEAK 

NEXT 

PEAK 

NEXT PEAK 

RIGHT 

NEXT PEAK 

LEFT 

SUM MKR 

ON/OFF 









:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] ON | OFF 

SUMMARY 

MARKER 

1088.7531.12 6.211 E-15


ESIB 

RMS 

MEAN 

PEAK HOLD 

ON/OFF 

AVERAGE 

ON/OFF 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

ALL SUM MKR 

OFF 

SEARCH LIM 

ON/OFF 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR/DELTA 

MIN 

NEXT 

MIN 

NEXT MIN 

LEFT 

NEXT MIN 

RIGHT 

EXCLUDE LO 

ON/OFF 

PEAK 

EXCURSION 

N dB DOWN 

SHAPE FACT 

60/3 dB 

SHAPE FACT 

60/6 dB 
























:CALCulate:MARKer:LOEXclude ON | OFF 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON | OFF 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/3dB) 




:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/6dB) 




1088.7531.12 6.212 E-15

ESIB 


MKR-> 

PEAK 

MKR-> 

CENTER 

MKR-> 

REF LEVEL 

ADD TO 

PEAK LIST 

MKR-> 

CF STEPSIZE 

MKR-> 

START 

MKR-> 

STOP 

MKR-> 

TRACE 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE 

MKR/DELTA 





-- 





:CALCulate:DELTamarker:TRACe 




D LINES 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1/2 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

FREQUENCY 

LINE 1/2 

or 

TIME 

LINE 1/2 

BASELINE 

CLIPPING 








:CALCulate:FLINe 


:CALCulate:TLINe 


:CALCulate:CTHReshold 

LIMITS 

SELECT 

LIMIT LINE 

NEW 

LIMIT LINE 




1088.7531.12 6.213 E-15


ESIB 

NAME 


VALUES 


INSERT 

VALUE 

DELETE 

VALUE 

SHIFT X 

LIMIT LINE 

SHIFT Y 

LIMIT LINE 

SAVE 

LIMIT LINE 

EDIT LIMIT 

LINE 







:CALCulate:LIMit:UNIT DB| DBM| PCT |DBUV| DBMW | DBUA | 

DBPW| DBPT | WATT| VOLT | AMPere | DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ| DBUA_MHZ | 

DBUV_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_M | DBUA_MMHZ 



:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] , .. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency|TIME 




:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] , .. 














COPY 

LIMIT LINE 

DELETE 

LIMIT LINE 

X OFFSET 




Y OFFSET 



1088.7531.12 6.214 E-15

ESIB 



TRACE 1 

CLEAR/ 

WRITE 

VIEW 



BLANK 


AVERAGE 

MAX HOLD 

MIN HOLD 

HOLD CONT 

ON/OFF 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE AVERage or 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:MODE SCALe 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MAXHold or 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:MODE MAX 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MINHold or 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:MODE MIN 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:HCONtinuous ON | OFF 

SWEEP 

COUNT 


DETECTOR 

-- 

AUTO 

SELECT 

DETECTOR 

AUTOPEAK 

:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion]:AUTO 

:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] APEak 

ON | OFF 

DETECTOR 

MAX PEAK 

DETECTOR 

MIN PEAK 

DETECTOR 

SAMPLE 

DETECTOR 

RMS 

DETECTOR 

AVERAGE 

DETECTOR 

AC VIDEO 

COPY.. 

ANALOG TR 

ON/OFF 

TRACE 

MATH 

T1-T2/T3/T4 

+REF ->T1 

T1-REF 

->T1 



:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] SAMPle 




TRACe:COPY TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4 , 



-- 





1088.7531.12 6.215 E-15


ESIB 

ADJUST 

TO TRACE 

TRACE MATH 

OFF 


:CALCulate:MATH:STATe OFF 

ASCII 

EXPORT 

ASCII 

CONFIG 


-- 

1...4, 

EDIT PATH 


DECIM SEP 

. , 

NEW 

APPEND 

HEADER 

ON OFF 

ASCII 

COMMENT 

FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMA 

FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON | OFF 

FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent ‘comment‘ 


TRIGGER 

FREE RUN 


VIDEO 

LINE 


:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce LINE 

EXTERN 

RF POWER 



:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce RFPower 

TRIGGER 

DELAY 

SLOPE 

POS/NEG 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff 


SWEEP/ 

SCAN 

CONTINUOUS 

SWEEP 

SINGLE 

SWEEP 

:INITiate:CONTinuous ON; :INITiate[:IMMediate] 

:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF; :INITiate[:IMMediate] 

1088.7531.12 6.216 E-15

ESIB 


SWEEP TIME 

AUTO 

SWEEP TIME 

MANUAL 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

GAP SWEEP 

ON/OFF 

GAP SWEEP 

SETTINGS 

TRIGGER 

LEVEL 

PRE TRIGGER 




:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP ON | OFF 

-- 


:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:PRETrigger 

TRG TO 

GAP TIME 

GAP 

LENGTH 

GATE 

ON / OFF 

GATE 

SETTINGS 

GATE 

LEVEL 

GATE MODE 

LEVEL/EDGE 

GATE POL 

POS/NEG 

GATE 

DELAY 

GATE 

LENGTH 

GATE 

EXTERN 

GATE 

RF POWER 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:TRGTogap 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:GAP:LENGth 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe ON | OFF 

-- 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel 



:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce RFPower 

GATE 

ADJUST 

GATE 

LEVEL 

GATE MODE 

LEVEL/EDGE 

GATE POL 

POS/NEG 

GATE 

DELAY 

GATE 

LENGTH 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel 



:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 

:[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 

1088.7531.12 6.217 E-15


ESIB 

SGL SWEEP 

DISP OFF 

SWEEP TIME 

MANUAL 

RES BW 

MANUAL 

VIDEO 

MANUAL 

VIDEO 

AUTO 


:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON | OFF 

:INITiate:DISPlay ON | OFF 


COUPLING 

/RUN 

RES BW 

MANUAL 

RES BW 

AUTO 

RES BW 

3dB 6dB 

VIDEO BW 

MANUAL 

VIDEO BW 

AUTO 

SWEEP TIME 

MANUAL 

SWEEP TIME 

AUTO 

COUPLING 

DEFAULT 

COUPLING 

RATIO 

RBW / VBW 

SINE [1] 

RBW / VBW 

PULSE [.1] 

RBW / VBW 

NOISE [10] 

RBW / VBW 

MANUAL 

SPAN / RBW 

AUTO [50] 

SPAN / RBW 

MANUAL 

RBW 1kHz 

ANA/DIG 

RBW

ESIB Command Assignment - General Device Settings 

Basic Instrument - General Device Settings 

DATA VARIATION Key Group 

HOLD 

UNLOCK 


LOCK DATA 


LOCK ALL 


STEP 

if needed, the step width is entered in the subsystem of the corresponding parameter. 

STEPSIZE 

AUTO 

-- 

STEPSIZE 

MANUAL 

-- 

SYSTEM Key Group 

DISPLAY 

FULL SCREEN 

DISPlay:FORMat SINGle 

SPLIT 

SCREEN 

ACTIVE 

SCREEN x 

SCREEN A 

BARGRAPH 

SCREEN A 

SWEEP 

RUN 

SCAN 

SCREEN 

COUPLING 

MODE 

COUPLED 

HORIZONTAL 

SCALING 

VERTICAL 

SCALING 

COUPLING 

CONTROL 

DISPlay:FORMat SPLit 

The screen is selected via the numeric suffix of the individual commands. 

:INSTrument[1][:SELect] RECeiver 

The softkey is available only in receiver mode 

:INSTrument[1][:SELect] SANalyzer 

The softkey is available only in receiver mode 

The softkey is available only in receiver mode (see COUPLING/RUN) 

-- 

:INSTrument:COUPle MODE 

:INSTrument:COUPle X 

:INSTrument:COUPle Y 

:INSTrument:COUPle CONTrol 

1088.7531.12 6.219 E-15

ESIB 

Command Assignment - General Device Settings 

SCREENS 

UNCOUPLED 

CONFIG 

DISPLAY 

SELECT 

OBJECT 

BRIGHTNESS 

:INSTrument:COUPle NONE | ALL 

-- 

-- 

DISPlay:CMAP:HSL ,, 

TINT 


SATURATION 


DEFAULT 

COLORS 

PREDEFINED 

COLORS 

LOGO 

ON/OFF 

FREQUENCY 

ON/OFF 

DATA ENTRY 

FIELD 

TIME 

ON OFF 

DISPLAY 

COMMENT 

SCR.SAVER 

ON OFF 

SCR.SAVER 

TIME 

DATAENTRY 

X 

DATAENTRY 

Y 

DEFAULT 

POSITION 

DATAENTRY 

OPAQUE 

DISPlay:CMAP:DEFault 

DISPlay:CMAP:PDEFined BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED 

| MAGenta | YELLow | WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen | LCYan | 

LRED | LMAGenta 

DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF 

DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF 

The softkey is available only in analyzer mode 

-- 





:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TIME ON | OFF 



DISPlay:PSAVer[:STATe] ON | OFF 

DISPlay:PSAVer:HOLDoff 

CAL 

CAL 

SHORT 

CALibration:SHORt? 

CAL 

TOTAL 

CAL 

RES BW 

CALibration[:ALL]? 

CALibration:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]? 

1088.7531.12 6.220 E-15


CAL 

LOG 

CAL 

LO SUPP 

CAL 

I/Q 


PRESEL 

PRESEL 

PEAK 

CAL CORR 

ON/OFF 

CAL 

RESULTS 

CALibration:LDETector? 

CALibration:LOSuppression? 

CALibration:IQ? 

CALibration:PRESelector 

CALibration:PPEak? 

CALibration:STATe ON | OFF 


INFO 

FIRMWARE 

VERSION 

HARDWARE+ 

OPTIONS 


*IDN? 

*OPT? 


*TST? 

EXECUTE 

TEST 

SYSTEM 

MESSAGES 

CLEAR 

MESSAGE 

CLEAR ALL 

MESSAGES 

UPDATE 

MESSAGES 

OPTIONS 

*TST? 



-- 

-- 

*OPT? 

STATISTIC 

-- 

ATT 

SWITCHES 

:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation 

1088.7531.12 6.221 E-15

ESIB 



MODE 

ANALYZER 



TRACKING 

GENERATOR 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 

:INSTrument[:SELect] SANalyzer 

:INSTrument:NSELect 1 


:INSTrument:NSELect 6 

OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:INSTrument[:SELect] ADEMod | DDEMod 

:INSTrument:NSELect 2 | 3 

SETUP 

TRANSDUCER 

-- 

TRANSDUCER 

FACTOR 

TRANSDUCER 

SET 

EDIT TRD 

FACTOR 

TRD FACTOR 

NAME 

TRD FACTOR 

UNIT 

TRD FACTOR 

VALUES 

EDIT TRD 

SET 

INSERT 

LINE 

DELETE 

LINE 

SAVE TRD 

FACTOR 

TRANSD SET 

NAME 

TRANSD SET 

UNIT 




:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing LINear|LOGarithmic 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA ,.. 




:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak ON | OFF 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent 


:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT 

1088.7531.12 6.222 E-15


TRANSD SET 

RANGES 

NEW 

FACT/SET 

INSERT 

LINE 

DELETE 

LINE 

SAVE TRD 

SET 

DELETE 

FACTOR/SET 

PREAMP 

ON OFF 

PRESELECT 

ON OFF 

LISN 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe ,,.. 




see EDIT TRD FACTOR or. EDIT TRD SET 








ESH2-Z5 

ENV 4200 

ESHR-Z5 

:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] FOURphase 

:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] TWOPhase 

OFF 

:INPut:LISN[:TYPE] OFF 

PHASE N 


PHASE L1 


PHASE L2 


PHASE L3 


PE 

GROUNDED 


PE 

FLOATING 


OPTIONS 


ENABLE NEW 

OPTION 

REFERENCE 

INT/EXT 

EXT REF 

FREQUENCY 

SERVICE 

-- 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 

-- 

1088.7531.12 6.223 E-15

ESIB 


INPUT RF 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] RF 

INPUT CAL 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] CALibration 

NOISE 

SOURCE 

REFERENCE 

ADJUST 

:DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce 

-- 

ON | OFF 

REFERENCE 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator:[INTernal:]TUNe 

REFERENCE 

PROG 

:[SENSe:]ROSCillator:[INTernal:]TUNe:SAVe 

ENTER 

PASSWORD 

CAL GEN 

120 MHZ 

PULSE 

25 Hz 

PULSE 

100 Hz 

PULSE 

100 kHz AB 

PULSE 

100 kHz CD 

GENERAL 

SETUP 

:SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

 

GPIB 

ADDRESS 

USER PORT 

A/B 

COM PORT 

1/2 

TIME 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0...30 


:INPut:UPORt:STATe ON | OFF 

:OUTPut:UPORt:STATe ON | OFF 

:OUTPut:UPORt[:VALue] 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:DTR IBFull | OFF 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS IBFull | OFF 

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD 


:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] EVEN|ODD|NONE 


:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:PACE XON | NONE 

:SYSTem:TIME 0...23, 0...59, 0...59 

DATE 

:SYSTem:DATE 

,, 

MONITOR 

CONNECTED 

KEY CLICK 

ON/OFF 

FIRMWARE 

UPDATE 

MODE FSE 

ON/OFF 




:SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible OFF | FSE 

1088.7531.12 6.224 E-15


STATUS Key Group 

LOCAL 

device message "Go to LOCAL (GTL)" 

HARDCOPY Key Group 

START 

:HCOPy[:IMMediate] 

SETTINGS 

COPY 

SCREEN 

COPY 

TRACE 

COPY 

TABLE 

SELECT 

QUADRANT 

ENTER 

TEXT 

UPPER 

LEFT 

LOWER 

LEFT 

UPPER 

RIGHT 

LOWER 

RIGHT 

FULL 

PAGE 

:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:STATe 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe 

-- 

:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 1 




:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL 

-- 

ON | OFF 

ON | OFF 

COMMENT 

SCREEN A/B 

:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT 

 

TITLE 

:HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:TEXT 

 

HARDCOPY 

DEVICE 

SETTINGS 

DEVICE 1/2 

ENABLE 

DEV1/DEV2 

COLOR 

ON/OFF 

TRC COLOR 

AUTO INC 

:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage WMF|EWMF | BMP | GDI 

:HCOPy:DESTination 



:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait 

the numeric suffix after HCOPy:IMMediate denotes the first or second device. 

:HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF 


1088.7531.12 6.225 E-15

ESIB 


MEMORY Key Group 

CONFIG 

EDIT 

PATH 

COPY 

:MMEMory:MSIS 

:MMEMory:CDIRectory 

:MMEMory:COPY , 

DELETE 

MAKE 

DIRECTORY 

RENAME 

:MMEMory:DELete 

:MMEMory:RDIRectory 

:MMEMory:MDIRectory 

:MMEMory:MOVE , 

SORT 

MODE 

FORMAT 

DISK 


:MMEMory:INITialize 

SAVE 

EDIT 

NAME 

EDIT 

PATH 

EDIT 

COMMENT 

SELECT ITEMS 

TO SAVE 

SELECT 

ITEMS 

ENABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DISABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DATA SET 

LIST 

DATA SET 

CLEAR 

DEFAULT 

CONFIG 

DATA SET 

CLEAR ALL 

:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1, 

the path is included in the file name. 


-- 

















-- 



1088.7531.12 6.226 E-15


RECALL 

EDIT 

NAME 

EDIT 

PATH 

AUTO 

RECALL 

SELECT ITEMS 

TO RECALL 

SELECT 

ITEMS 

:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1, 

the path is included in the file name. 

:MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1, 

-- 








:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CDATa ON | OFF 







ENABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DISABLE 

ALL ITEMS 

DATA SET 

LIST 

DATA SET 

CLEAR 

DEFAULT 

CONFIG 

DATA SET 

CLEAR ALL 




-- 



1088.7531.12 6.227 E-15

ESIB 


USER Key 

USER 

MACRO 

1...7 

DEFINE 

MACRO 

RECORD 

ON/OFF 

DEFINE 

PAUSE 

DELETE 

MACRO 

MACRO 

TITLE 

SELECT 

MACRO 








1088.7531.12 6.228 E-15

ESIB 

Command Assignment - Vector Signal Analysis 

Vector Signal Analysis Mode (Option FSE-B7) 

CONFIGURATION Key Group- Digital Demodulation 

MODE 

-- 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 

-- 

DIGITAL 

STANDARD 

PWT 

WCPE 

IS-95 CDMA 

FWD CH 

IS-95 CDMA 

REV CH 

APCO25 

C4FM 

APCO25 

CQPSK 

NADC 

REV CH 

PDC UP 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet PWT 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet F95Cdma | FQCDma 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet R95Cdma | RQCDma 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet APCO25C4FM 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet APCO25CQPSK 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet RNADc 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet PDCup 

TFTS 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet TFTS 

GSM 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet GSM | DCS1800 | PCS1900 

EDGE 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet EDGe 

NADC 

FWD CH 

CDPD 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet FNADc 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet CDPD 

DECT 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet DECT 

CT2 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet CT2 

PDC DOWN 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet PDCDown 

PHS 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet PHS 

TETRA 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet TETRa 

ERMES 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet ERMes 

MODACOM 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet MODacom 

1088.7531.12 6.229 E-15


ESIB 

FLEX16_2 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRESet F16 

FLEX32_2 


FLEX32_4 


FLEX64_4 


DIGITAL 

DEMOD 

:INSTrument[:SELect] DDEMod 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FORMat QPSK | PSK | MSK |QAM | FSK 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PSK:NSTate 2 | 8 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:MSK:FORMat TYPE1 | TYPE2 | NORMal | DIFFerential 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:QAM:NSTate 16 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FSK:NSTate 2 | 4 

Quering the results: 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? MERM| MEPK| MEPS| 

PERM| PEPK| PEPS| EVRM| EVPK| EVPS| IQOF| IQIM| ADR| FERR| DEV| 

FSRM| FSPK| FSPS| RHO| FEPK 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:Y? 

:TRACe:DATA? 

MODULATION 

PARAMETERS 

SYMBOL 

RATE 

SIDE BAND 

NORM INV 

MEAS 

FILTER 

REFERENCE 

FILTER 

ALPHA/BT 

-- 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SRATe 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SBANd NORMal|INVerse 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:MEASurement OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | 

GAUSsian | B22 | B25 | B44 | QFM|FM95 | QFR|FR95 | 

QRM|RM95 | QRR|RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | 

B22 | B25 | B44 | QFM|FM95 | QFR|FR95 | QRM|RM95 | 

QRR|RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa 

FSK REF 

DEVIATION 

NORMALIZE 

ON / OFF 

MEAS RESULT 

:CALCulate:FSK:DEViation:REFerence 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:NORMalize ON | OFF 

-- 

MAGNITUDE 

CAP BUFFER 

MEAS 

SIGNAL 

MAGNITUDE 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘TCAP’ 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ 

The following commands select the display mode: 

:CALCulate:FORMat MAGNitude 

PHASE 

:CALCulate:FORMat PHASe 

FREQUENCY 

:CALCulate:FORMat FREQuency 

1088.7531.12 6.230 E-15

ESIB 


REAL/IMAG 

PART 

EYE DIAG 

[FREQ] 

EYE DIAG 

[I] 

EYE DIAG 

[Q] 

EYE DIAG 

TRELLIS 

POLAR [IQ] 

VECTOR 

POLAR [IQ] 

CONSTELL 

SYMBOL 

DISPLAY 

PHASE WRAP 

ON/OFF 

EYE 

LENGTH 

REFERENCE 

SIGNAL 

MAGNITUDE 

:CALCulate:FORMat RIMag 

:CALCulate:FORMat FEYE 

:CALCulate:FORMat IEYE 

:CALCulate:FORMat QEYE 

:CALCulate:FORMat TEYE 

:CALCulate:FORMat COMP 

:CALCulate:FORMat CONS 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:SYMBol DOTS | BARS |OFF 

:CALCulate:FORMat PHASe | UPHase 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:EYE:COUNt 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ 

The following commands select the display mode:: 


PHASE 


FREQUENCY 


REAL/IMAG 

PART 

EYE DIAG 

[FREQ] 

EYE DIAG 

[I] 

EYE DIAG 

[Q] 

EYE DIAG 

TRELLIS 

POLAR [IQ] 

VECTOR 

POLAR [IQ] 

CONSTELL 

SYMBOL 

DISPLAY 

PHASE WRAP 

ON/OFF 

EYE 

LENGTH 


:CALCulate:FORMat FEYE 

:CALCulate:FORMat IEYE 

:CALCulate:FORMat QEYE 

:CALCulate:FORMat TEYE 



:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:SYMBol DOTS | BARS |OFF 

:CALCulate:FORMat PHASe | UPHase 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:EYE:COUNt 

1088.7531.12 6.231 E-15


ESIB 

ERROR 

SIGNAL 

MAGNITUDE 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ 

The following commands select the display mode: 


PHASE 


FREQUENCY 


REAL/IMAG 

PART 

ERROR VECT 

MAGNITUDE 

POLAR [IQ] 

VECTOR 

POLAR [IQ] 

CONSTELL 

SYMBOL 

DISPLAY 

SYMB TABLE 

/ ERRORS 



:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’ 





:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:SYMBol DOTS | BARS | OFF 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’ 

Quering the results: 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? MERM| MEPK| MEPS| 

PERM| PEPK| PEPS| EVRM| EVPK| EVPS| IQOF| IQIM| ADR| FERR| DEV| 

FSRM| FSPK| FSPS| RHO| FEPK 

MEMORY 

SIZE 

FRAME 

LENGTH 

RESULT 

LENGTH 

POINTS 

PER SYMBOL 

TRIGGER 

:[SENSe:]TCAPture:LENGth 1024 | 2048 | 4096 | 8192 | 16384 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:TIME 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:TIME 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:PRATe 1| 2| 4| 8| 16 

See section "SWEEP - TRIGGER" 

RANGE 

See section "LEVEL - RANGE" 

IF 

BANDWIDTH 

IF BW 

AUTO 

IF BW 

MANUAL 

-- 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:RESolution:AUTO ON | OFF 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:RESolution 

1088.7531.12 6.232 E-15

ESIB 


CONFIGURATION Key Group - Analog Demodulation 

MODE 

-- 

VECTOR 

ANALYZER 

-- 

ANALOG 

DEMOD 

MODULATION 

PARAMETER 

HIGH PASS 

AF FILTER 

LOW PASS 

AF FILTER 

WEIGHTING 

AF FILTER 

AF COUPL’G 

AC DC 

SQUELCH 

ON OFF 

SQUELCH 

LEVEL 

SIDE BAND 

NORM INV 

MEAS 

RESULT 

AM/FM 

DEEMPH 

PRE DISPL 

ON OFF 

AM 

SIGNAL 

FM 

SIGNAL 

PM 

SIGNAL 

MODULATION 

SUMMARY 

SUMMARY 

SETTINGS 

AVERAGE 

HOLD ON 

:INSTrument[:SELect] ADEMod 

-- 

SENSe:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF 

SENSe:FILTer:HPASs:FREQuency 

SENSe:FILTer[:LPASs][:STATe] ON | OFF 

SENSe:FILTer[:LPASs]:FREQuency 

SENSe:FILTer:CCITt[:STATe] ON | OFF 

SENSe:FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe] ON | OFF 

SENSe:ADEMod:AF:COUPling AC|DC 

SENSe:ADEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] ON | OFF 

SENSe:ADEMod:SQUelch:LEVel 

SENSe:ADEMod:SBANd NORMal|INVerse 

SENSe:FILTer:DEMPhasis:TCONstant 

SENSe:FILTer:DEMPhasis:LINK DISPlay|AUDio 

-- 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:AM’ 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:FM’ 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:PM’ 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:AMSummary’ 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:FMSummary’ 

:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:PMSummary’ 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AM[:RESult?] 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FM[:RESult?] 

PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS | RDEV 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:PM[:RESult?] 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AFRequency[:RESult?] 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FERRor [:RESult?] 


:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:CARRier[:RESult?] 

-- 

SENSe:MSUMmary:AHOLd[:STATe] ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 6.233 E-15


ESIB 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

RELUNIT 

DB % 

INDICATION 

ABS REL 

SET 

REFERENCE 

MEAS-> 

REF 

SINAD 1kHz 

ON OFF 

SUMMARY 

MEAS TIME 

REAL TIME 

ON OFF 

SENSITIV 

AF OUTPUT 

SENSe:SWEep:COUNt 

SENSe:MSUMmary:RUNit PCT | DB 

SENSe:MSUMmary:MODE ABSolute | RELative 

SENSe:MSUMmary:REFerence 

SENSe:MSUMmary:REFerence:AUTO ONCe 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad[:STATe] 


SENSe:MSUMmary:MTIMe 

SENSe:ADEMod:RTIMe[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:OUTPut:AF:SENSitivity 

VOLUME 

:SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume 

 

DEMOD 

BANDWIDTH 

DEEMPHASIS 

ON OFF 

SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth:DEMod 

SENSe:FILTer:DEMPhasis[:STATe] ON | OFF 


CENTER 


CENTER 

FREQUENCY 

FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 




REF 

-- 

REF 

LEVEL 

REF LEVEL 

OFFSET 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet 




1088.7531.12 6.234 E-15

ESIB 


ATTEN AUTO 

LOW NOISE 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

MIXER 

LEVEL 





:INPut:MIXer 

RANGE 

-- 

Y PER DIV 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision 

REF VALUE 

Y AXIS 

REF VALUE 

X AXIS 

REF VALUE 

POSITION 

SCALE UNIT 


:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:RVALue 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0..100PCT 

-- 

Y UNIT 

LOG[dB] 

Y UNIT 

LINEAR 

Y UNIT 

DEG 

Y UNIT 

RAD 

Y UNIT 

DBM 

Y UNIT 

VOLT 

Y UNIT 

WATT 

X UNIT 

TIME 

X UNIT 

SYMBOL 

SENSITIV 

AF OUTPUT 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer DB 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer UNITless 

:CALCulate:UNIT:ANGLe DEG 

:CALCulate:UNIT:ANGLe RAD 


:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer VOLT 

:CALCulate:UNIT:POWer WATT 

:CALCulate:X:UNIT:TIME S 

:CALCulate:X:UNIT:TIME SYMB 

:OUTPut:AF:SENSitivity 

VOLUME 

:SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume 

 

1088.7531.12 6.235 E-15


ESIB 

INPUT Key 

INPUT 

RF ATTEN 

MANUAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

NORMAL 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW NOISE 

ATTEN AUTO 

LOW DIST 

MIXER 

LEVEL 








:INPut:MIXer 

INPUT 

SELECT 

RF INPUT 

50 OHM 

RF INPUT 

75 OHM/RAM 

RF INPUT 

75OHM/RAZ 

:INPut:IMPedance 50 

:INPut:IMPedance:CORRection RAM 

:INPut:IMPedance:CORRection RAZ 


NORMAL 

MARKER 

1..2 




POLAR MARKER 

R/I / MA/PH 

POLAR MARKER 

DEG/ RAD 

:CALCulate:MARKer:READout 

:CALCulate:UNIT:ANGLe DEG | RAD 

MPHase | RIMaginary 

COUPLED 

MARKER 

MARKER 

INFO 

ALL MARKER 

OFF 




1088.7531.12 6.236 E-15

ESIB 


DELTA 

DELTA 

1/2 

DELTA MKR 

ABS / REL 

ALL DELTA 

OFF 






MARKER 

SEARCH 

PEAK 

ACTIVE MKR 

/ DELTA 

MIN 

MAX |PEAK| 

SUMMARY 

ON OFF 

SUMMARY 

MARKER 

MAX |PEAK| 

+PEAK 

-PEAK 

±PEAK/2 

RMS 

MEAN 

PEAK HOLD 

ON / OFF 

AVERAGE/HOLD 

ON / OFF 



-- 



:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:APEak 

:CALCulate:DELTamarker:MAXimum:APEak 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] ON | OFF 

-- 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:AVERage:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:AVERage:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult? 

:CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult? 











1088.7531.12 6.237 E-15


ESIB 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

ALL SUM MKR 

OFF 

SEARCH LIMIT 

ON/OFF 

SELECT 

MARKER 




-- 

MKR -> 

PEAK 

MKR → 

TRACE 

SELECT 

MARKER 

ACTIVE MKR 

/ DELTA 




-- 



D LINES 

-- 

DISPLAY 

LINE 1/2 

REFERENCE 

LINE 

THRESHOLD 

LINE 

TIME/SYMB 

1/2 








:CALCulate:TLINe 

LIMITS 

SELECT LIMIT 

LINE 

NEW LIMIT 

LINE 

NAME 





VALUES 


INSERT 

VALUE 

DELETE 

VALUE 



1088.7531.12 6.238 E-15

ESIB 


SHIFT X 

LIMIT LINE 

SHIFT Y 

LIMIT LINE 

SAVE 

LIMIT LINE 

EDIT LIMIT 

LINE 




automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation- 

:CALCulate:LIMit:UNIT DB| DBM | RAD | DEG | PCT | HZ | 

S | VOLT | WATT | UNITless 



:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] ,.. 

:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency|TIME 



:CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol:UNIT[:TIME] S | SYM 


:CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] ,.. 














COPY LIMIT 

LINE 

DELETE LIMIT 

LINE 

X OFFSET 




Y OFFSET 



1088.7531.12 6.239 E-15


ESIB 


TRACE 

-- 

CLEAR/WRITE 


VIEW 


BLANK 


CONTINUOUS 

WRITE 

AVERAGE 

MAX HOLD 

MIN HOLD 

SWEEP COUNT 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE:CWRite ON | OFF 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE AVERage or 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:MODE SCALe 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MAXHold or 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:MODE MAX 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:MODE MINHold or 

:[SENSe:]AVERage:MODE MIN 



COUPLING 

-- 

IF BW 

AUTO 

IF BW 

MANUAL 

MAIN PLL 

BANDWIDTH 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] 

:[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:PLL AUTO|HIGH|MEDium|LOW 

SWEEP 

CONTINUOUS 

SWEEP 

SINGLE 

SWEEP 

SWEEP 

COUNT 

SWEEP 

TIME 

RESULT 

LENGTH 

:INITiate:CONTinuous ON; :INITiate[:IMMediate] 

:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF; :INITiate[:IMMediate] 



(analog demodulation only) 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:TIME 

(digitale demodulation only) 

1088.7531.12 6.240 E-15

ESIB 


TRIGGER Key Group - Digital Demodulation 

TRIGGER 

FREE RUN 


VIDEO 

EXTERN 

TRIGGER 

OFFSET 

SLOPE 

POS NEG 




:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:EXTernal 



MEAS ONLY 

IF SYNC’D 

FIND BURST 

ON OFF 

FIND SYNC 

ON OFF 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MONLy 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:PULSe:STATe 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe 

ON | OFF 

ON | OFF 

ON | OFF 

SYNC 

OFFSET 

SYNC 

PATTERN 

SELECT 

PATTERN 

NEW SYNC 

PATTERN 

NAME 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:OFFSet 

-- 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect 


:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME 

COMMENT 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent 

EDIT SYNC 

PATTERN 

DELETE 

PATTERN 

VALUE 

SAVE 

PATTERN 

:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA 


(the pattern is set in the instrument and automatically saved under the name remote.pat) 

automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation (see command 

[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern ) 


:[SENSe:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete 

1088.7531.12 6.241 E-15


ESIB 

TRIGGER Key Group - Analog Demodulation 

TRIGGER 

FREE RUN 


VIDEO 

EXTERN 

AF SIGNAL 

SLOPE 

POS/NEG 

TRIGGER 

OFFSET 





:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce AF 

:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:AF -120...+120PCT 



1088.7531.12 6.242 E-15

ESIB 

Command Assignment - Tracking Generator 

Tracking Generator Mode (Option FSE-B10...B11) 


MODE 

TRACKING 

GEN 

-- 

SOURCE 

ON/OFF 

SOURCE 

POWER 

POWER 

OFFSET 

SOURCE 

CAL 

CAL TRANS 

CAL REFL 

SHORT 

CAL REFL 

OPEN 

NORMALIZE 

:OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF 

:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] 

:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet 

-- 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission 





:[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN 

:[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF 

REF VALUE 

POSITION 

REF VALUE 

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0...100PCT 


RECALL 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall 

FREQUENCY 

OFFSET 

MODULATION 

:SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet 

-- 

EXT AM 

:SOURce:AM:STATe ON | OFF 

EXT FM 

:SOURce:FM:STATe ON | OFF 

EXT ALC 

:SOURce:POWer:ALC:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal 

EXT I/Q 

:SOURce:DM:STATe ON | OFF 

1088.7531.12 6.243 E-15

Command Assignment - External Mixer Output 

ESIB 

External Mixer Output (Option FSE-B21) 

INPUT Key 

INPUT 

MIXER 

INTERNAL 

MIXER 

EXTERNAL 

BAND LOCK 

ON OFF 

SELECT 

BAND 

BAND 

:[SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe] OFF 

:[SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe] ON 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:BLOCk ON | OFF 

-- 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J 

EVEN 

HARMONICS 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD|EVEN|EODD 

ODD 

HARMONICS 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD|EVEN|EODD 

PORTS 

2 3 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:PORT 2|3 

BIAS 


ACCEPT 

BIAS 

-- 

AVG CONV 

LOSS LOW 


AVG CONV 

LOSS HIGH 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH 

CONV LOSS 

TABLE 

-- 

EDIT 

TABLE 

-- 

TABLE 

NAME 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect 

VALUES 

INSERT 

LINE 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA ,,,... 

input of additional value in CVL table: 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:TYPE ODD|EVEN|EODD 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs 2|3 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent 

-- 

1088.7531.12 6.244 E-15

ESIB 

Command Assignment - External Mixer Output 

DELETE 

LINE 

-- 

COPY 

TABLE 

-- 

SAVE 

TABLE 

Table is saved with every change of value 

PAGE 

UP 

-- 

PAGE 

DOWN 

-- 

NEW 

TABLE 

See softkey EDIT TABLE 

LOAD 

TABLE 

-- 

DELETE 

TABLE 

:[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar 

PAGE 

UP 

-- 

PAGE 

DOWN 

-- 

DEFAULT 

SETTINGS 

-- 

HARMONIC# 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic 

PORTS 

2 3 

AVG CONV 

LOSS 

BIAS 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:PORT 2|3 


-- 

BIAS 


BIAS OFF 

-- 

SIGNAL ID 

-- 

SIGNAL ID 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal OFF | ON 

AUTO ID 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal OFF | AUTO 

AUTO ID 

THRESHOLD 

:[SENSe:]MIXer:THReshold 

1088.7531.12 6.245 E-15

ESIB 

Contents - Programming Examples 

Contents - Chapter 7 "Remote Control - Programming 

Examples" 

7 Programming Examples ..................................................................................... 7.1 

Programming via IEC/IEEE Bus...................................................................................................... 7.1 

Including IEC-Bus Library for QuickBasic................................................................................ 7.1 

Initialization and Default Status ...............................................................................................7.1 

Initiate Controller ........................................................................................................... 7.1 

Initiate Instrument.......................................................................................................... 7.1 

Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands ..................................................................... 7.2 

Switchover to Manual Control.................................................................................................. 7.2 

Reading out Instrument Settings ............................................................................................. 7.2 

Positioning a Marker and Displaying Values ........................................................................... 7.2 

Command synchronization ...................................................................................................... 7.3 

Service Request ...................................................................................................................... 7.4 

Programming via the RSIB Interface ............................................................................................. 7.6 

Visual Basic ............................................................................................................................. 7.6 

Visual Basic for Applications (Winword and Excel) ................................................................. 7.9 

C / C++ .................................................................................................................................. 7.10 

1088.7531.12 I.7.1 E-16

Contents - Programming Examples 

ESIB 

1088.7531.12 I-7.2 E-16

ESIB 

Programming Examples 

7 Programming Examples 

The examples explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more 

complex programming tasks. 

QuickBASIC has been used as programming language. However, the programs can be translated into 

other languages. 

Programming via IEC/IEEE Bus 

Including IEC-Bus Library for QuickBasic 

REM ----------- Include IEC-bus library for quickbasic ---------------- 

’$INCLUDE: ’c:\qbasic\qbdecl4.bas’ 

Initialization and Default Status 

The IEC bus as well as the settings of the instrument are brought into a defined default status at the 

beginning of every program. Subroutines "InitController" and "InitDevice" are used to this 

effect. 

Initiate Controller 

REM ------------ Initiate controller ----------- 

REM InitController 

iecaddress% = 20 

’IEC-bus address of the 

’instrument 



CALL IBPAD(receiver%, iecaddress%) 

’Inform controller on instrument 

’address 

CALL IBTMO(receiver%, 11) 

’Response time to 1 sec 

REM ************************************************************************ 

Initiate Instrument 

The IEC-bus status registers and instrument settings of the instrument are brought into the default 

status. 

REM ------------ Initiate instrument -------------- 

REM InitDevice 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "*CLS") 

’Reset status register 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "*RST") 

’Reset instrument 

REM ************************************************************************* 

1088.7531.12 7.1 E-16


ESIB 

Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands 

Center frequency, span, and reference level of the instrument are set in this example. 

REM -------- Instrument setting commands ------------- 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, ’INSTRUMENT SANALYZER’) ’Analyzer mode 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "FREQUENCY:CENTER 120MHz") ’Center frequency 120 MHz 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "FREQUENCY:SPAN 10MHZ") ’Span 10 MHz 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "DISPLAY:TRACE:Y:RLEVEL -10dBm") 

’Reference level -10dBm 

REM *********************************************************************** 

Switchover to Manual Control 

REM -------- Switch instrument over to manual control ----------- 

CALL IBLOC(receiver%) ’Set instrument to Local state 

REM *********************************************************************** 

Reading out Instrument Settings 

The settings made in example 3 are read out here. The abbreviated commands are used. 

REM --------- Reading out instrument settings --------- 

CFfrequency$ = SPACE$(20) 

’Provide text variables (20 characters) 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "FREQ:CENT?") ’Request center frequency 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, CFfrequency$) ’Read value 

CFspan$ = SPACE$(20) 


CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "FREQ:SPAN?") ’Request span 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, CFspan$) ’Read value 

RLevel$ = SPACE$(20) 


CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV?") 

’Request reference level 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, RLevel$) ’Read value 

REM -------- Display values on the screen ----------- 

PRINT "Center frequency: "; CFfrequency$, 

PRINT "Span: 

"; CFspan$, 

PRINT "Reference level: "; RLevel$, 

REM************************************************************************* 

Positioning a Marker and Displaying Values 

REM -------- Examples of marker functions ----------- 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "CALC:MARKER ON;MARKER:MAX") 

’Activate marker1 and start peak search 

MKmark$ = SPACE$(30) 


CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "CALC:MARK:X?;Y?") ’Request frequency and level 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, MKmark$) 

’Read value 

REM -------- Display values on the screen ----------- 

PRINT "Center frequency / level "; MKmark$, 

REM ********************************************************************** 

1088.7531.12 7.2 E-16

ESIB 


Command synchronization 

The possibilities for synchronization implemented in the following example are described in Chapter 5, 

Section "Command Order and Command Synchronization". 

REM -------- Examples of command synchronization --------- 

REM The command INITiate[:IMMediate] starts a single sweep if the command 

REM INIT:CONT OFF was previously sent. It should be ensured that the next 

REM command is only then executed when the entire sweep is complete. 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "INIT:CONT OFF") 

REM -------- First possibility: Use of *WAI --------- 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *WAI") 

REM -------- Second possibility: Use of *OPC? --------- 

OpcOk$ = SPACE$(2) ’Space for *OPC? - Provide response 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *OPC?") 

REM -------- here the controller can service other instruments --------- 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, OpcOk$) ’Wait for "1" from *OPC? 

REM -------- Third possibility: Use of *OPC --------- 

REM In order to be able touse the service request function in conjugation 

REM with a National Instruments GPIB driver, the setting "Disable 

REM Auto Serial Poll" must be changed to "yes" by means of IBCONF! 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "*SRE 32") ’Permit service request for ESR 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "*ESE 1") ’Set event-enable bit for 

’operation-complete bit 

ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady ’Initialization of the 

’service request routine 

PEN ON 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *OPC") 

REM Continue main program here 

STOP 

’End of program 

OpcReady: 

REM As soon as the sweep has ended, this subroutine is activated 

REM Program suitable reaction to the OPC service request. 

ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady 

’Enable service request routine again 

RETURN 

REM *********************************************************************** 

1088.7531.12 7.3 E-16


ESIB 

Service Request 

The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the respective 

bits of the transition and enable registers are set. 

In order to use the service request function in conjugation with National Instruments GPIB driver, the 

setting "Disable Auto Serial Poll" must be changed to "yes" by means of IBCONF! 

REM ---- Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case of errors ------ 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "*CLS") 

’Reset Status Reporting System 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%,"*SRE 168") 

’Permit service request for 

’STAT:OPER,STAT:QUES and ESR 

’register 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%,"*ESE 60") 

’Set event-enable bit for 

’command, execution, device- 

’dependent and query error 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%,"STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767") ’Set OPERation enable bit for 

’all events 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%,"STAT:OPER:PTR 32767") ’Set appropriate OPERation 

’Ptransition bits 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%,"STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767") ’Set questionable enable bits 

’for all events 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%,"STAT:QUES:PTR 32767") ’Set appropriate questionable 

’Ptransition bits 

ON PEN GOSUB Srq 

’Initialization of the service 

’request routine 

PEN ON 

REM Continue main program here 

STOP 

A service request is then processed in the service request routine. 

Note: the variables userN% and userM% must be pre-assigned usefully! 

Srq: 

REM ------------ Service request routine ----------- 

DO 

SRQFOUND% = 0 

FOR I% = userN% TO userM% 

’Poll all bus users 

ON ERROR GOTO nouser 

’No user existing 

CALL IBRSP(I%, STB%) 

IF STB% > 0 THEN 

’Serial poll, read status byte 

’This instrument has bits set 

’in the STB 

SRQFOUND% = 1 

IF (STB% AND 16) > 0 THEN GOSUB Outputqueue 

IF (STB% AND 4) > 0 THEN GOSUB Failure 

IF (STB% AND 8) > 0 THEN GOSUB Questionablestatus 

IF (STB% AND 128) > 0 THEN GOSUB Operationstatus 

IF (STB% AND 32) > 0 THEN GOSUB Esrread 

END IF 

nouser: 

NEXT I% 

LOOP UNTIL SRQFOUND% = 0 

ON ERROR GOTO error handling 

ON PEN GOSUB Srq: RETURN 

’Enable SRQ routine again 

’End of SRQ routine 

1088.7531.12 7.4 E-16

ESIB 


Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is effected in 

subroutines. 

REM -------- Subroutines for the individual STB bits ------ 

Outputqueue: 

’Reading the output buffer 

Message$ = SPACE$(100) 

’Make space for response 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, Message$) 

PRINT "Message in output buffer :"; Message$ 

RETURN 

Failure: 

ERROR$ = SPACE$(100) 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "SYSTEM:ERROR?") 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, ERROR$) 

PRINT " Error text :"; ERROR$ 

RETURN 

’Read error queue 

’Make space for error variable 

Questionablestatus: 

’Read questionable status register 

Ques$ = SPACE$(20) 

’Preallocate blanks to text variable 

CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?") 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, Ques$) 

PRINT "Questionable Status:"; Ques$ 

RETURN 

Operationstatus: 

’Read operation status register 

Oper$ = SPACE$(20) 


CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "STATus:OPERation:EVENt?") 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, Oper$) 

PRINT "Operation Status:"; Oper$ 

RETURN 

Esrread: 

’Read event status register 

Esr$ = SPACE$(20) 


CALL IBWRT(receiver%, "*ESR?") 

’Read ESR 

CALL IBRD(receiver%, Esr$) 

IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1) > 0 THEN PRINT "Operation complete" 

IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 4) > 0 THEN GOTO Failure 

IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 8) > 0 THEN PRINT "Device dependent error" 



IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 64) > 0 THEN PRINT "User request" 

IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 128) > 0 THEN PRINT "Power on" 

RETURN 

REM ********************************************************************** 

REM ------------- Error routine ---------------- 

Error handling: 

PRINT "ERROR 

’Output error message 

STOP 

’Stop software 

1088.7531.12 7.5 E-16


ESIB 

Programming via the RSIB Interface 

The following hints apply to both the 16-bit and the 32-bit DLL versions (RSIB.DLL and RSIB32.DLL) 

unless an explicit distinction is made.. The RSIB interface supports links to max. 16 measuring 

instruments at the same time. 

Visual Basic 

Programming Hints: 

• Access to RSIB.DLL functions 

To generate Visual Basic control applications, the file RSIB.BAS for 16 bit basic programs or 

RSIB32.BAS for 32 bit basic programs (C:/R_S/INSTR/RSIB) s added to a project to enable call-up 

of the RSIB.DLL or RSIB32.DLL functions. 

• Generating a response buffer 

Prior to calling the functions RSDLLibrd() and RSDLLilrd(), a string of sufficient length must 

be generated. This is possible either by defining the string or using the command Space$(). 

Generating a string of the length 100: - Dim Response as String * 100 

- Dim Response as String 

Response = Space$(100) 

If a response is to be output as a string from the measuring instrument, the appended blanks can be 

removed using the Visual Basic Function RTrim(). 

Example: 


Call RSDLLibrd(ud, Response, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Response = RTrim(Response) 

’ Output of Response 

• Reading trace data in real format 

Using the function declarations in the file RSIB.BAS or RSIB32.BAS the responses of the device can 

be assigned to one string only. If the data are to be read into an array with float values, the header 

and the useful data must be read out with separate function calls. 

Example of a header 

# 4 2004 

Prefix for 

binary data 

Number of digits of 

the following length 

indication 

Length of data, e.g. 

501 pixels 

4 bytes/pixel 

In order to enable the trace data to be directly read into a float array, a special function declaration 

must be created. 

Declare Function RSDLLilrdTraceReal Lib "rsib32.dll" Alias "RSDLLilrd" 

(ByVal ud%, Rd As Single, ByVal Cnt&, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer 

1088.7531.12 7.6 E-16

ESIB 


Example: 

Dim ibsta As Integer 

Dim iberr As Integer 

Dim ibcntl As Long 

Dim ud As Integer 

Dim Result As String 

Dim Digits As Byte 

Dim TraceBytes As Long 

Dim TraceData(501) As Single 

’ Status variable 

’ Error variable 

’ Count variable 

’ Handle for measuring instrument 

’ Buffer for simple results 

’ Number of digits of length indication 

’ Length of trace data in bytes 

’ Buffer for floating point 

’ Binary data 

’ Set up connection to instrument 

ud = RSDLLibfind("89.10.38.97", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’ Query trace data in real format 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "FORM:DATA REAL,32", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "TRACE? TRACE1", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’Read number of digits of length indication 

Result = Space$(20) 

Call RSDLLilrd(ud, Result, 2, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Digits = Val(Mid$(Result, 2, 1)) 

’Read length indication 

Result = Space$(20) 

Call RSDLLilrd(ud, Result, Digits, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

TraceBytes = Val(Left$(Result, Digits)) ’and store 

’ Read out trace data 

Call RSDLLilrdTraceReal(ud, TraceData(0), TraceBytes, ibsta, iberr,ibcntl) 

Programming examples: 

• In this example, the start frequency of the instrument is queried. 

Dim ibsta As Integer ’ Status variable 

Dim iberr As Integer ’ Error variable 

Dim ibcntl As Long ’ Count variable 

Dim ud As Integer ’ Handle for measuring instrument 

Dim Response As String ’ Response string 

’ Set up connection to measuring instrument 


If (ud < 0) Then 

’ Error treatment 

End If 

’ Send query command 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "FREQ:START?", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’ Provide space for response 


’ Read response from measuring instrument 


1088.7531.12 7.7 E-16


ESIB 

• In this example, a Save/Recall of the instrument setups is performed. 



Dim ibcntl As Long ’ Count variable 

Dim ud As Integer ’ Handle for measuring instrument 

Dim Cmd As String ’ Command string 




’ Error treatment 

End If 

’ Request instrument settings 

Cmd = "SYST:SET?" 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, Cmd, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’ Store instrument response in file 

Call RSDLLibrdf(ud, "C:\db.sav", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’ Reset instrument 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "*RST", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’ and restore the previous settings 

’ to this end disable the END message 

Call RSDLLibeot(ud, 0, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’ first send off command 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "SYST:SET ", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’ enable the END message again 

Call RSDLLibeot(ud, 1, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

’ and send the data 

Call RSDLLibwrtf(ud, "C:\db.sav", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

1088.7531.12 7.8 E-16

ESIB 


Visual Basic for Applications (Winword and Excel) 

Programming hints: 

The programming language Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) is supported as a macro language by 

various manufacturers. The programs Winword and Excel use this language for the versions Winword 

97 or Excel 5.0 and higher. 

For macros created with Visual Basic for Applications, the same hints are valid as for Visual Basic 

Applications. 

Programming example: 

• Using the macro QueryMaxPeak a single sweep with subsequent query of the maximum peak is 

performed. The result is entered in a Winword or Excel document. 

Sub QueryMaxPeak() 

End Sub 



Dim ibcntl As Long ’ transferred characters 

Dim ud As Integer ’ Unit Descriptor (handle)for instrument 

Dim Response As String ’ Response string 




Call MsgBox("Device with address 89.10.38.97 could" & _ 

"not be found", vbExclamation) 

End 

End If 

’ Determine maximum peak in the range 1-2MHZ 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "*RST", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "INIT:CONT OFF", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "FREQ:START 1MHZ", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "FREQ:STOP 2MHZ", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "INIT:IMM;*WAI", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Call RSDLLibwrt(ud, "CALC:MARK:MAX;Y?", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 



Response = RTrim(Response) ’ Cut off space 

’ Insert value in current document (Winword) 

Selection.InsertBefore (Response) 

Selection.Collapse (wdCollapseEnd) 

’ Terminate connection to measuring instrument 

Call RSDLLibonl(ud, 0, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

The entry of the peak value in the Winword document can be replaced as follows for Excel: 

’ Insert value in current document (Excel) 

ActiveCell.FormulaR1C1 = Response 

1088.7531.12 7.9 E-16


ESIB 

C / C++ 

Programming Hint: 

• Access to the functions of the RSIB32.DLL (Windows platforms) 

The functions of the RSIB32.DLL are declared in the header file RSIB.H. The DLL functions can be 

linked to a C/C++ program in different ways. 

1. Enter one of the supplied import libraries (RSIB.LIB or RSIB32.DLL) into the linker options. 

2. Load the library using the function LoadLibrary() during runtime and determine the function 

pointers of the DLL functions using GetProcAddress(). Before the end of the program, the 

RSIB.DLL must be unloaded again using the function FreeLibrary(). 

When import libraries are used, the DLL is automatically loaded immediately before the application is 

started. At the end of the program, the DLL is unloaded again unless it is still used by other 

applications. 

• Access to librsib.so functions (Unix platforms) 

The functions of librsib.so are declared in the header file RSIB.H. Upper/lower case characters 

for file names are typically observed under Unix. The library functions are linked to a C/C++ program 

by entering the -lrsib linker option. 

The shared library librsib.so is automatically loaded on starting the application. The accessibility 

(for example via standard path) of the library must be ensured. Refer to the beginning of this main 

chapter under „Unix Environment“. 

• Query of strings 

If instrument responses are to be further processed as strings, a zero termination must be appended. 

Example: 

char buffer[100]; 

... 

RSDLLibrd( ud, buffer, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

buffer[ibcntl] = 0; 

1088.7531.12 7.10 E-16

ESIB 


Programming example: 

In the following C program, a single sweep is started on the instrument with the IP address 

89.10.38.97 and a marker is set to the maximum level. Before the maximum level can be 

determined, the sweep must be terminated. Synchronization to the end of the sweep is made by 

triggering a service request at the end of the sweep with command "*OPC" (operation complete). 

The control program waits for the SRQ with the function RSDLLWaitSrq(). Then the maximum 

level is determined ("CALC:MARK:MAX") and the level is read out ("Y?"). Prior to readout a check 

is made with serial poll whether data are available (MAV bit set in status register. 

#define MAX_RESP_LEN 100 

short 

ibsta, iberr; 

unsigned long ibcntl; 

short 

ud; 

short 

srq; 

char 

Maxlevel[MAX_RESP_LEN]; 

char 

spr; 

// Determining the handle for the instrument 

ud = RSDLLibfind( "89.10.38.97", &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

// If instrument exists 

if ( ud >= 0 ) { 

// Setting timeout for RSDLLWaitSrq() to 10 seconds 

RSDLLibtmo( ud, 10, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

// Activate SRQ generation through event status register (ESR) 

// and enable ESB bit of SRE register 

RSDLLibwrt( ud, "*ESE 1;*SRE 32", &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

// Set single sweep, trigger sweep 

// and generate SRQ at the end of the sweep with "*OPC" 

RSDLLibwrt( ud, "INIT:CONT off;INIT;*OPC", &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

// Wait for SRQ (end of sweep) 

RSDLLWaitSrq( ud, &srq, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

// Clear RQS/MSS bit 

RSDLLibrsp( ud, &spr, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

// If sweep is terminated 

if (srq) { 

// Set marker to first maximum and query level 

RSDLLibwrt( ud, "CALC:MARK:MAX;Y?", &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

// Check if data are available (MAV bit in status register set) 

RSDLLibrsp( ud, &spr, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

if (spr & 0x10) { 

// then read out data 

RSDLLilrd( ud, MaxPegel, MAX_RESP_LEN, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ); 

} 

} 

// end connection to instrument 

RSDLLibonl (ud, 0, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ) ;} 

else { 

; // Error - instrument not found 

} 

1088.7531.12 7.11 E-16

ESIB 

Contents - Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces 

Contents - Chapter 8 "Maintenance and Instrument 

Interfaces" 

8 Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces............................................................ 8.1 

Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 8.1 

Mechanical Maintenance......................................................................................................... 8.1 

Electrical Maintenance............................................................................................................. 8.1 

Testing the Level Measuring Accuracy ......................................................................... 8.1 

Testing the Frequency Accuracy................................................................................... 8.1 

Instrument Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 8.2 

IEC Bus Interface .................................................................................................................... 8.2 

Interface Characteristics................................................................................................ 8.2 

Bus Lines.......................................................................................................................8.3 

Interface Functions........................................................................................................ 8.4 

IEC Bus Messages........................................................................................................ 8.4 

Interface Messages ....................................................................................................... 8.4 

Instrument Messages.................................................................................................... 8.5 

RS-232-C Interface.................................................................................................................. 8.6 

Interface Characteristics................................................................................................ 8.6 

Signal Lines ................................................................................................................... 8.6 

Interface Functions........................................................................................................ 8.7 

Transmission Parameters ............................................................................................. 8.7 

Handshake .................................................................................................................... 8.8 

RSIB Interface ....................................................................................................................... 8.10 

Windows Environment ................................................................................................ 8.10 

Unix Environment ........................................................................................................ 8.11 

RSIB Interface Functions ............................................................................................ 8.12 

Variables ibsta, iberr, ibcntl ......................................................................................... 8.12 

List of Interface Functions ........................................................................................... 8.13 

Description of Interface Functions............................................................................... 8.14 

User Interface (USER)...........................................................................................................8.21 

Printer Interface (LPT) ........................................................................................................... 8.22 

Measurement Converters (PROBE CODE)........................................................................... 8.23 

Probe Connector (PROBE POWER)..................................................................................... 8.23 

AF-Output (AF OUTPUT) ...................................................................................................... 8.24 

IF Output 21.4 MHz (21.4 MHz OUT).................................................................................... 8.24 

Video Output (VIDEO OUT) .................................................................................................. 8.24 

Reference Output/Input (EXT REF IN/OUT) ......................................................................... 8.24 

Sweep Output (SWEEP) ....................................................................................................... 8.24 

External Trigger Input (EXT TRIGGER/GATE) ..................................................................... 8.24 

Noise Source Control (NOISE SOURCE) ............................................................................. 8.25 

External Keyboard (KEYBOARD).......................................................................................... 8.25 

Mouse Connector (MOUSE).................................................................................................. 8.25 

Monitor Connector (MONITOR)............................................................................................. 8.25 

1088.7531.12 I-8.1 E-16


ESIB 

1088.7531.12 I-8.2 E-16

ESIB Maintenance 

8 Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces 

The following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the ESIB and on the instrument 

interfaces. 

The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde & Schwarz service centers can be found at the 

beginning of this manual. 

Maintenance 

Mechanical Maintenance 

The ESIB does not require any mechanical maintenance. The front panel can be cleaned from time to 

time using a damp, soft cloth. 

Electrical Maintenance 

Testing the Level Measuring Accuracy 

Due to the total calibration facility by means of the built-in calibration generator, high long-term stability 

of the level measuring characteristics is guaranteed. It is recommended to check the measuring 

accuracy every two years according to the performance test. Reprogramming of the correction data by a 

R&S servicing shop is necessary, if tolerances are exceeded. 

Testing the Frequency Accuracy 

The frequency accuracy of the reference oscillator is to be checked once a year according to section 5. 

It is not necessary to perform this test if the instrument is operated using an external reference. 

Test utility: 

Test setup: 

Frequency counter of signal generator 

Measurement with frequency counter 

Connect frequency counter to the REF OUT/IN socket at the rear of the 

instrument. 

Measurement with signal generator 

Apply signal with 1GHz, -10dBm to RFin. 

Measurement: Settings on ESIB: MODE ANALYZER 

[CENTER 1000 MHz] 

[SPAN 0 MHz] 

[REF REF LEVEL -10 dBm] 

[MARKER COUNT ON 

COUNTER RESOL 0.1 Hz] 

Activate internal frequency counter (marker function) 

1088.7531.12 8.1 E-16


ESIB 

Instrument Interfaces 

IEC Bus Interface 

The standard instrument is equipped with an IEC/IEEE Bus connector. An IEEE 488 interface connector 

is located on the rear panel of the ESIB. An external controller for remote control of the instrument can 

be connected via the IEEE 488 interface connector using a shielded cable. 

A further optional IEC/IEEE-bus interface can be installed in the ESIB and is assigned to the controller. 

This interface can be controlled by standard software (R&S-Basic, QUICK-Basic, etc.). It enables the 

remote control of the instrument via an external link to the two IEC/IEEE-bus interfaces and in addition 

the control of other equipment via the IEC/IEEE-bus connector at the rear of the unit (eg control of a 

complete test setup). 

The following section describes the first IEC Bus interface over which the instrument can be remotely 

controlled. The characteristics of the PC2A/PC-AT controller interface depend upon the user-installed 

software running on the controller and is, therefore, not described here. 

Interface Characteristics 

• 8-bit parallel data transfer 

• bidirectional data transfer 

• three-line handshake 

• high data transfer rate of max. 350 kbyte/s 

• up to 15 instruments can be connected 

• maximal length of the interconnecting cables 15 m (single connection, 2m) 

• wired-OR connection if several instruments are connected in parallel. 

ATN IFC NRFD EOI DIO3 DIO1 

SHIELD SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 DIO2 

12 1 

13 

24 

LOGIC GND GND(10) GND(8) GND(6) DIO8 DIO6 

GND(11) GND(9) GND(7) REN DIO7 DIO5 

Fig. 8-1 

Pin assignment of IEC-Bus interface 

1088.7531.12 8.2 E-16

ESIB 


Bus Lines 

1. Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8. 

The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. DIO1 is the least significant, 

DIO8 the most significant bit. 

2. Control bus with 5 lines. 

IFC (Interface Clear), 

active low resets the interfaces of the devices connected to the default setting. 

ATN (Attention), 

active low signals the transmission of interface messages 

inactive high signals the transmission of device messages. 

SRQ (Service Request), 

active low enables a device connected to send a service request to the controller. 

REN (Remote Enable), 

active low permits the switch over to remote control. 

EOI (End or Identify), 

has two functions in connection with ATN: 

active low marks the end of data transmission when ATN=high 

active low triggers a parallel poll when ATN=low. 

3. Handshake bus with three lines. 

DAV (Data Valid), 

active low signals a valid data byte on the data bus. 

NRFD (Not Ready For Data), 

active low signals that one of the devices connected is not ready for data transfer . 

NDAC (Not Data Accepted), 

active low as long as the device connected is accepting the data present on the data bus. 

1088.7531.12 8.3 E-16


ESIB 

Interface Functions 

Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC bus can be equipped with different interface 

functions. Table 8-1 lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument. 

Table 8-1 Interface functions 

Control character 

Interface function 

SH1 

AH1 

L4 

T6 

SR1 

PP1 

RL1 

DC1 

DT1 

C12 

Handshake source function (source handshake), full capability 

Handshake sink function (acceptor handshake), full capability 

Listener function, full capability, deaddressed by MTA. 

Talker function, full capability, ability to respond to serial poll, deaddressed by MLA 

Service request function (Service Request), full capability 

Parallel poll function, full capability 

Remote/Local switch over function, full capability 

Reset function (Device Clear), full capability 

Trigger function (Device Trigger), full capability 

Controller function, capability to send interface messages, to accept or relinquish the 

controller function 

IEC Bus Messages 

The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus can be divided into two groups: 

– interface messages 

and 

– instrument messages. 

Interface Messages 

Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC Bus when the "ATN" control line is 

active (LOW). They are used for communication between controller and instruments and can only be 

sent by the controller which currently has control of the IEC Bus. 

1088.7531.12 8.4 E-16

ESIB 


Universal Commands 

The universal commands are encoded 10 - 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus 

without addressing. 

Table 8-2 Universal Commands 

Command QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument 

DCL (Device Clear) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(20)) Aborts the processing of the commands just received 

and sets the command processing software to a 

defined initial state. Does not change the instrument 

settings. 

IFC (Interface Clear) IBSIC (controller%) Resets the interfaces to the default setting. 

LLO (Local Lockout) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(17)) The LOC/IEC ADDR key is disabled. 

SPE (Serial Poll Enable) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(24)) Ready for serial poll. 

SPD (Serial Poll Disable) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(25)) End of serial poll. 

PPU (Parallel Poll 

Unconfigure) 

IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(21)) 

End of the parallel-poll state. 

Addressed Commands 

The addressed commands are encoded 00 - 0F hex. They are only effective for instruments addressed 

as listeners. 

Table 8-3 Addressed Commands 

Command QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument 

SDC (Selected Device Clear) IBCLR (device%) Aborts the processing of the commands just received 

and sets the command processing software to a 

defined initial state. Does not change the instrument 

setting. 

GTL (Go to Local) IBLOC (device%) Transition to the "Local" state (manual control). 

PPC (Parallel Poll Configure) IBPPC (device%, data%) Configure instrument for parallel poll. Additionally, the 

QuickBASIC command executes PPE/PPD. 

Instrument Messages 

Instrument messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus when the "ATN" control line is not 

active. ASCII code is used. 

Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in Chapter 5. The commands are listed 

and explained in detail in Chapter 6. 

1088.7531.12 8.5 E-16


ESIB 

RS-232-C Interface 

The standard ESIB is equipped with two serial interfaces (RS-232-C).The interfaces can be set up 

manually in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu in the COM PORT1/2 table. 

Each of the active RS-232-C interfaces is assigned to one of the 9-pin connectors located on the rear 

panel. Interface 1 is assigned to the connector COM1 and Interface 2 is assigned to the connector 

COM2. 

Interface Characteristics 

• Serial data transmission in asynchronous mode 

• Bidirectional data transfer via two separate lines 

• Transmission rate selectable from 110 to 19200 baud 

• Logic ’0’ signal from+3 V to +15 V 

• Logic ’1’ signal from -15 V to -3 V 

• An external instrument (controller) can be connected. 

• Software handshake (XON, XOFF) 

• Hardware handshake 

RxD DTR 

DCD TxD SG 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 7 8 9 

RTS RI 

DSR CTS 

Fig. 8-2 

Pin assignment of the RS-232-C interface 

Signal Lines 

1. Data lines 

The data transmission is bit-serial in ASCII code starting with the LSB. Two lines, RxD and TxD are 

necessary as the minimum requirement for transmission; however, no hardware handshake is 

possible. For handshaking, only the XON/XOFF software handshake protocol can be used . 

RxD (Receive Data) 

Input, LOW = logic ’1’, HIGH = logic ’0’. 

Data line, local terminal receives data from remote station. 

TxD (Transmit Data) 

Output, LOW = logic ’1’, HIGH = logic ’0’. 

Data line, local terminal transmits data to remote station. 

2. Control lines 

DCD (Data Carrier Detect), 

Not used in ESIB. 

DTR (Data Terminal Ready), 

Output, active LOW, 

Indicates that the local terminal is ready to receive data. 

1088.7531.12 8.6 E-16

ESIB 


DSR (Data Set Ready), 

Input, active LOW, 

Indicates that the remote station is ready to receive data. 

RTS (Request To Send), 

Output, active LOW. 

Indicates that the local terminal wants to transmit data. 

CTS (Clear To Send), 

Input, active LOW. 

Used to tell the local terminal that the remote station is ready to receive data. 

RI (Ring Indicator), 

Not used in ESIB. 

Interface Functions 

For interface control, several strings are defined and control characters are reserved which are based 

upon IEC-\IEEE bus control. 

Table 8-4 Control strings or control characters of the RS-232 interface 

Control string or character 

"@REM" 

"@LOC" 

11 Hex 

13 Hex 

0D Hex, 0A Hex 

Interface function 

Switch over to remote 

Switch over to local 

Enables character output 

Inhibits character output 

Terminator , 

Transmission Parameters 

To ensure error-free data transmission, the parameters of the instrument and the controller must have 

the same settings. The parameters are defined in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu. 

Transmission rate the following transmission rates can be set in the analyzer: 

(baud rate) 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200. 

Data bits 

Data transmission is in 7- or 8-bit ASCII code. The first bit 

transmitted is the LSB (least significant bit). 

Start bit 

Each data byte starts with a start bit. The falling edge of the start 

bit indicates the beginning of the data byte. 

Parity bit 

In order to detect errors, a parity bit may be transmitted. No 

parity, even parity or odd parity may be selected. In addition, the 

parity bit can be set to logic ’0’ or to logic ’1’. 

Stop bits 

The transmission of a data byte is terminated by 1, 1,5 or 2 stop bits. 

Example: 

Transmission of character ’A’ (41 hex) in 7-bit ASCII code, 

with even parity and 2 stop bits: 

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 

Bit 01 Bit 02...08 Bit 09 Bit 10...11 

Start bit Data bits Parity bit Stop bits 

1088.7531.12 8.7 E-16


ESIB 

Handshake 

Software handshake 

In the software handshake mode of operation, the data transfer is controlled using the two control 

characters XON / XOFF. 

The instrument uses the control character XON to indicate that it is ready to receive data. If the receive 

buffer is full, it sends the XOFF character via the interface to the controller. The controller then interrupts 

the data output until it receives another XON from the instrument. The controller indicates to the 

instrument that it is ready to receive data in the same way. 

Cable required for software handshake 

The connection of the instrument with a controller for software handshake is made by crossing the data 

lines. The following wiring diagram applies to a controller with a 9-pin or 25-pin configuration. 

Instrument 

Controller 

DSR 

RxD 

RTS 

TxD 

CTS 

DTR 

GND 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

DSR 

RxD 

RTS 

TxD 

CTS 

DTR 

GND 

DSUB connector female / 9 poles 


Instrument 

Controller / PC 

DSR 

RxD 

RTS 

TxD 

CTS 

DTR 

GND 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 


6 

7 

8 

9 

1 

14 

2 TxD 

15 

3 RxD 

16 

4 RTS 

17 

5 CTS 

18 

6 DSR 

19 

7 GND 

20 DTR 

8 

21 

9 

22 

10 

23 

11 

24 

12 

25 

13 


Fig. 8-3 

Wiring of the data lines for software handshake 

1088.7531.12 8.8 E-16

ESIB 


Hardware handshake 

For hardware handshake, the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data via the lines DTR and 

RTS. A logic ’0’ on both lines means ’ready’ and a logic ’1’ means ’not ready’. The RTS line is always 

active (logic ’0’) as long as the serial interface is switched on. The DTR line thus controls the readiness 

of the instrument to receive data. 

The readiness of the remote station to receive data is reported to the instrument via the CTS and DSR 

line. A logic ’0’ on both lines activates the data output and a logic ’1’ on both lines stops the data output 

of the instrument. The data output takes place via the TxD line. 

Cable for hardware handshake 

The connection of the instrument to a controller is made with a so-called zero modem cable. Here, the 

data, control and acknowledge lines must be crossed. The following wiring diagram applies to a 

controller with a 9-pin or 25-pin configuration. 

Instrument 


DSR 

RxD 

RTS 

TxD 

CTS 

DTR 

GND 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

DSR 

RxD 

RTS 

TxD 

CTS 

DTR 

GND 

DSUB connector, 9 poles / female 


Instrument 


DSR 

RxD 

RTS 

TxD 

CTS 

DTR 

GND 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 


6 

7 

8 

9 

1 

14 

2 TxD 

15 

3 RxD 

16 

4 RTS 

17 

5 CTS 

18 

6 DSR 

19 

7 GND 

20 DTR 

8 

21 

9 

22 

10 

23 

11 

24 

12 

25 

13 

Fig. 8-4 


Wiring of the data, control and acknowledge lines for hardware handshake 

1088.7531.12 8.9 E-16

SYSTEM 

PRES ET CAL 

DISPLAY INFO 

CONFIGURATION 

MODE 

SE TUP 

HARDCOPY 

START 

SETTING 

STATUS 

SRQ 

REMOTE 

LOCAL 

EMI TEST RECEIVER . 20 Hz . . . 7 GHz . I 1088.7490 07 


CE NTER / SP A N / REF / 

-d Bm 

FREQ ZOOM UNIT 7 8 9 V GHz 

s 

dBm 

ST ART ST OP RANGE 4 5 6 mV MHz 

ms 

dB 

1 2 3 µV kHz 

MARKER LINES 

µs 

NOR MAL SEARCH D LINES 

dB.. 

0 . - nV Hz 

ns 


CLR BA CK EXP 


TRIGGER 

1 2 

HOLD STEP 

SW EE P / 

MEMORY 

3 4 SCAN 

SAVE 

RB W 

RE CALL 

MENU 

VBW 

CONFIG 

SWT 

COU PLING / 

RUN 

INPUT 



RF INPUT 1 

+30 dBm 

+ 30 d Bm 

DC 0V 

MAX 

MAX 

MAX 

50 W 

50 W 

REM OTE 

M ADE IN GER MAN Y 


ESIB 

RSIB Interface 

The RSIB interface allows the control of ESIB by Visual C++ and VisualBasic programs but also by 

using the Windows applications WinWord and Excel. The functions for the programming of control 

applications are provided by DLLs RSIB32.DLL (for 32-bit applications) and RSIB.DLL (for 16-bit 

applications). 

A Unix operating system can be installed on an external computer in addition to a Windows operating 

system. In this case, the control applications are created either in C or C++. The supported Unix 

operating systems include: 

• Sun Solaris 2.6 Sparc Station 

• Sun Solaris 2.6 Intel Platform 

• Red Hat Linux 6.2 x86 Processors 

Control applications may run locally on the measuring instrument as well as on a remote controller in a 

network. With local control, the name ’@local’ is specified for link setup by means of function 

RSDLLibfind(). If ’@local’ is not specified, the RSIB.DLL interprets the name as an IP address 

and attempts to set up a link to the device via the Winsock interface. 

Remote controller 

(Windows NT or Windows 95) 

ESIB 

Remote 

control via 

network 

Local 

applications 

on instrument 

32-bit application 

16-bit application 

RSIB DLL 

16-bit app. 

RSIB network interface 

RSIB.DLL 

RSIB32.DLL 

RSIB32.DLL 

32-bit app. 

Windows Environment 

To access the measuring instruments via the RSIB interface the DLLs should be installed in the 

corresponding directories: 

• RSIB.DLL in Windows NT system directory or control application directory. 

• RSIB32.DLL in Windows NT system32 directory or control application directory. 

The DLLs are already installed in the corresponding directories on the measuring instruments. 

For the different programming languages, files exist containing the declarations for the DLL functions 

and the error code definitions. 

Thus, the RSIB directory features a program ‘RSIBCNTR.EXE’ with SCPI commands which can be sent 

to the instrument by the RSIB interface. This program can be used as a test for the function of the 

interface. Transit-time module VBRUN3200.DLL in the path or the Windows directory are required. 

The control is performed with Visual C++ or Visual Basic programs. The local link to the internal 

controller is established with the name '@local'.If a remote controller is used, the instrument IP address 

is to be indicated here. 

1088.7531.12 8.10 E-16

ESIB 


Via VisualBasic: internal controller: ud = RSDLLibfind ("@local", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

remote controller: ud = RSDLLibfind (’82.1.1.200’, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

The return to manual operation can be performed via the front panel (LOCAL key) or the RSIB interface. 

Via RSIB: ... 

ud = RSDLLibloc (ud, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl); 

... 

Unix Environment 

In order to access the measuring equipment via the RSIB interface, copy the librsib.so.X.Y file to a 

directory for which the control application has read rights. X.Y in the file name indicates the version 

number of the library, for example 1.0. 

The librsib.so.X.Y library is created as a shared library. The applications using the library have 

nothing to do with versions. They simply link the library with the lrsib option. The following instructions 

have to be observed so that linking can be successfully performed and the library can be found during 

the program run: 

File link: 

• Use the operating system command In to create a file with the link name librsib.so and 

pointing to librsib.so.X.Y in a directory for which the control application has read rights. 

Example: 

$ ln –s /usr/lib/librsib.so.1.0 /usr/lib/librsib.so 

Linker options for creating applications: 

• -lrsib : import library 

• -Lxxx : path information where the import library can be found. This is where the above file 

link has been created. Example: -L/usr/lib. 

Additional linker options for creating applications (only under Solaris): 

• -Rxxx: path information where the library is searched for during the program run: 

-R/usr/lib. 

Run-time environment: 

• Set environment variable LD_RUN_PATH to the directory in which the file link has been 

created. This is necessary only if librsib.so cannot be found in the standard search path of 

the operating system and the -R linker option (only Solaris) was not specified. 

For C/C++ programming, the declarations of the library functions and the definition of error codes are 

contained in: 

C/C++: 

'RSIB.H' (C:\R_S\Instr\RSIB) 

1088.7531.12 8.11 E-16


ESIB 

RSIB Interface Functions 

This following sections describe all functions of libraries ’RSIB.DLL’, ’RSIB32.DLL’ or 

"librsib.so" by means of which control applications can be written. 

Variables ibsta, iberr, ibcntl 

Same as with the National Instrument interface, successful execution of a command can be checked by 

means of the variables ibsta, iberr and ibcntl. To this end, references to the three variables are 

transferred to all RSIB functions. In addition, the status word ibsta is returned as a function value by all 

functions. 

Status word ibsta 

All functions send back a status word that provides information on the status of the RSIB interface. The 

following bits are defined: 

Bit name Bit Hex code Description 

ERR 15 8000 This bit is set if an error occurs during a function call. If this bit is set, iberr 

contains an error code which specifies the error. 

TIMO 14 4000 This bit is set if a timeout occurs during a function call. A timeout may occur in 

the following situations: 

• while waiting for an SRQ with the function RSDLLWaitSrq(). 

• if no acknowledgment is received for data sent to an instrument with 

RSDLLibwrt() or RSDLLilwrt(). 

• if no response from server to a data request with function RSDLLibrd() or 

RSDLLilrd(). 

CMPL 8 0100 This bit is set if the reply of the IEC/IEEE-bus parser is completely read. If a 

reply of the parser is read with the function RSDLLilrd() and the buffer 

length is not sufficient, the bit is cleared. 

Error variable iberr 

If the ERR bit (8000h) is set in the status word, iberr contains an error code that specifies the error. 

The RSIB has error codes of its own independent of the National Instrument interface. 

Error Error code Description 

IBERR_DEVICE_REGISTER 1 RSIB.DLL cannot register any new device. 

IBERR_CONNECT 2 Link to the device has failed. 

IBERR_NO_DEVICE 3 An interface function was called with an invalid device handle. 

IBERR_MEM 4 No free memory available. 

IBERR_TIMEOUT 5 Timeout has occurred. 

IBERR_BUSY 6 The RSIB interface is blocked by a function not yet completed. 

Windows is not blocked, for example, by function RSDLLibrd() if data are still 

to be transmitted in response to this function. In this case a new call is 

possible. Further calls are however rejected by RSIB.DLL with error code 

IBERR_BUSY. 

IBERR_FILE 7 Error in reading from or writing to a file. 

IBERR_SEMA 8 Error upon creating or assigning a semaphore (only under Unix) 

Count variable - ibcntl 

The variable ibcntl is updated with the number of bytes transmitted on every read and write function call. 

1088.7531.12 8.12 E-16

ESIB 


List of Interface Functions 

The DLL functions are matched to the interface functions for IEC/IEEE-bus programming from National 

Instruments. Functions supported by the DLLs are listed in the following table. 

Function 

Description 

RSDLLibfind() 

RSDLLibwrt() 

RSDLLilwrt() 

RSDLLibwrtf() 

RSDLLibrd() 

RSDLLilrd() 

RSDLLibrdf() 

RSDLLibtmo() 

RSDLLibsre() 

RSDLLibloc() 

RSDLLibeot() 

RSDLLibrsp() 

RSDLLibonl() 

RSDLLTestSrq() 

RSDLLWaitSrq() 

RSDLLSwapBytes 

Provides a handle for accessing a device. 

Sends a string terminated with a null to a device. 

Sends a specific number of bytes to a device. 

Sends the contents of a file to a device. 

Reads data from a device into a string. 

Reads a specific number of bytes from a device. 

Reads data from a device into a file. 

Sets timeout period for RSIB functions. 

Switches a device to local or remote. 

Switches a device temporarily to local. 

Enables/disables END message in write operations. 

Starts a serrial poll and reads the status byte 

Switches the instrument online/offline 

Checks if a device has generated an SRQ. 

Waits until a device generates an SRQ. 

Swaps the byte sequence for binary numeric display (only required for non-Intel platforms) 

1088.7531.12 8.13 E-16


ESIB 

Description of Interface Functions 

RSDLLibfind() 

The function provides a handle for access to the device with the name udName. 

VB format: 

C-format: 

C format (Unix): 

Function RSDLLibfind (ByVal udName$, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) 

As Integer 

short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibfind( char far *udName, short far 

*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) 

short RSDLLibfind( char *udName, short *ibsta, short *iberr, 

unsigned long *ibcntl) 

Parameter: udName IP address of device 

Example: ud = RSDLLibfind ("89.10.38.97", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

The function must be called before all other interface functions. 

The function supplies a handle as a return value. The handle must be specified in all functions for 

accessing the instrument. If no instrument with the name udName is found, the handle will take on a 

negative value. 

The local link on the instrument is established with the name ’@local’. For setting up a link via a 

network, on the other hand, the IP address of the instrument must be given (eg ’89.1.1.200’). 

RSDLLibwrt 

The function sends data to the instrument with the handle ud. 

VB format: 

C format: 


Function RSDLLibwrt (ByVal ud%, ByVal Wrt$, ibsta%, iberr%, 

ibcntl&) As Integer 

short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibwrt( short ud, char far *Wrt, short 

far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl ) 

short RSDLLibwrt( short ud, char *Wrt, short *ibsta, short 

*iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl ) 

Parameter: ud Device handle 

Wrt 

String sent to the device. 

Example: RSDLLibwrt(ud, "SENS:FREQ:STAR?", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

The function allows setting and query commands to be sent to the measuring instruments. The function 

RSDLLibeot() is used for defining whether the data are interpreted as a complete command. 

1088.7531.12 8.14 E-16

ESIB 


RSDLLilwrt 

The function sends Cnt bytes to the instrument with the handle ud. 

VB format: 

C format: 

Function RSDLLilwrt (ByVal ud%, ByVal Wrt$, ByVal Cnt&, 

ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer 

short FAR PASCAL RSDLLilwrt( short ud, char far *Wrt, 

unsigned long Cnt, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, 

unsigned long far *ibcntl) 

C format (Unix): short RSDLLilwrt( short ud, char *Wrt, unsigned long Cnt, 

short *ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl) 


Wrt 

String sent to the IEC/IEEE-bus parser. 

Cnt 

Number of bytes sent to the instrument. 

Example: RSDLLilwrt (ud, ’......’, 100, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

This function sends data to an instrument same as function RSDLLibwrt() but with the difference that 

binary data, too, can be sent. The length of the data is determined not by a zero-terminated string but by 

the definition of Cnt bytes. If the data are to be terminated with EOS (0Ah), the EOS byte must be 

appended to the string. 

RSDLLibwrtf 

The function sends the contents of a file to the instrument with the handle ud. 

VB format: 

C format: 


Function RSDLLibwrtf (ByVal ud%, ByVal file$, ibsta%, iberr%, 


short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibwrt( short ud, char far *Wrt, short 


short RSDLLibwrtf( short ud, char *Wrt, short *ibsta, short 



file 

File whose contents are sent to the instrument. 

Example: RSDLLibrdf(ud, "C:\db.sav", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

The function allows setting and query commands to be sent to the measuring instruments. The function 

RSDLLibeot() is used for defining whether the data are interpreted as a complete command. 

1088.7531.12 8.15 E-16


ESIB 

RSDLLibrd() 

The function reads data from the instrument into the string Rd with the handle ud. 

VB format: 

C format: 


Function RSDLLibrd (ByVal ud%, ByVal Rd$, ibsta%, iberr%, 


short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibrd( short ud, char far *Rd, short far 

*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl ) 

short RSDLLibrd( short ud, char *Rd, short *ibsta, short 



Rd String into which the read data are copied. 

Example: RSDLLibrd (ud, Rd, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

This function fetches replies of the IEC/IEEE-bus parser in response to a query command. 

For this, a string of sufficient length must be generated when programming in Visual Basic. This can be 

accomplished in the definition of the string or with the command Space$(). 

Generation of a string of the length 100: - Dim Rd as String * 100 

- Dim Rd as String 

Rd = Space$(100) 

RSDLLilrd 

The function reads Cnt bytes from the instrument with the handle ud. 

VB format: 

C format: 


Function RSDLLilrd (ByVal ud%, ByVal Rd$, ByVal Cnt&, ibsta%, 

iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer 

short FAR PASCAL RSDLLilrd( short ud, char far *Rd, unsigned 

long Cnt, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long 

far *ibcntl ) 

short RSDLLilrd( short ud, char *Rd, unsigned long Cnt, short 

*ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl ) 


cnt 

Maximum number of bytes copied to target string Rd by the 

DLL. 

Example: RSDLLilrd (ud, RD, 100, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

The function reads data from an instrument same as function RSDLLibrd() but with the difference that 

here the maximum number of bytes is allowed to be copied to target string Rd to be defined with Cnt. 

Writing beyond a string can thus be prevented with this function. The number of bytes cut off is lost. 

RSDLLibrdf() 

Reads data from the instrument into the file file with the handle ud. 

VB format: Function RSDLLibrdf (ByVal ud%, ByVal file$, ibsta%, iberr%, 


C format: short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibrdf( short ud, char far *file, short 


C format (Unix): short RSDLLibrdf( short ud, char *file, short *ibsta, short 



file 

File into which the read data are written. 

Example: RSDLLibrdf (ud, c:\db.sav, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

1088.7531.12 8.16 E-16

ESIB 


This function serves to read replies of the IEC/IEEE-bus parser that are larger than 64 KB. The file 

name may include the drive and path. 

RSDLLibtmo 

The function defines the timeout for an instrument. The default value for the timeout is 5 seconds. 

VB format: 

C format: 


Function RSDLLibtmo (ByVal ud%, ByVal tmo%, ibsta%, iberr%, 


void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibtmo( short ud, short tmo, short far 

*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl ) 

short RSDLLibtmo( short ud, short tmo, short *ibsta, short 



tmo 

Time in seconds 

Example: RSDLLibtmo (ud, 10, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

Timeout can occur in the following cases: 

• Waiting for an SRQ with the function RSDLLWaitSrq(). 

• Waiting for an acknowledgment for data sent to an instrument with RSDLLibwrt() or 

RSDLLilwrt(). 

• Waiting for a reply to a data request made with function RSDLLibrd() or RSDLLilrd(). 

RSDLLibsre 

The function switches the instrument to LOCAL or REMOTE mode. 

VB format: 

C format: 


Function RSDLLibsre (ByVal ud%, ByVal v%, ibsta%, iberr%, 


void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibsre( short ud, short v, short far 


short RSDLLibsre( short ud, short v, short *ibsta, short 

*iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl) 


v 

Instrument status 

0 - local 

1 - remote 

Example: RSDLLibsre (ud, 0, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

1088.7531.12 8.17 E-16


ESIB 

RSDLLibloc 

The function switches the instrument temporarily to LOCAL mode. 

VB format: 

C format: 


Function RSDLLibloc (ByVal ud%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As 

Integer 

void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibloc( short ud, short far *ibsta, short 

far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) 

short RSDLLibloc( short ud, short *ibsta, short *iberr, 

unsigned long *ibcntl) 


Example: RSDLLibloc (ud, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

After switchover the instrument can be manually operated from the front panel. On the next access to 

the instrument by means of one of the functions of the RSIB.DLL, the instrument is switched again to the 

REMOTE state. 

RSDLLibeot 

The function enables the END message after write operations or disables it. 

VB format: Function RSDLLibeot (ByVal ud%, ByVal v%, ibsta%, iberr%, 


C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibeot( short ud, short v, short far 



short RSDLLibeot( short ud, short v, short *ibsta, short 


Parameter: ud Device handle. 

v 

0 - no END message 

1 - send END message 

Example: RSDLLibeot (ud, 1, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

If the END message is disabled, the data of a command can be sent by means of several successive 

write function calls. The END message must be enabled prior to the last data block. 

RSDLLibrsp 

The function carries out a Serial Poll and outputs the instrument status.. 

VB format: Function RSDLLibrsp(ByVal ud%, spr%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) 

As Integer 

C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibrsp( short ud, char far* spr, short far 


C format (Unix): short RSDLLibrsp( short ud, char *spr, short *ibsta, short 



spr 

Reference to status byte 

Example: RSDLLibrsp(ud, spr, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

1088.7531.12 8.18 E-16

ESIB 


RSDLLibonl 

The function switches the instrument to the 'online' or 'offline' state. When switching to ‘offline’ the 

interface is enabled and the device handle made invalid. The next call of RSDLLibfind sets up the 

communication again. 

VB format: Function RSDLLibonl (ByVal ud%, ByVal v%, ibsta%, iberr%, 


C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibonl( short ud, short v, short far 


C format (Unix): short RSDLLibonl( short ud, short v, short *ibsta, short 



v 

Status of instrument 

0 - local 

1 - remote 

Example: RSDLLibonl(ud, 0, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

RSDLLTestSRQ 

The function checks the status of the SRQ bit. 

VB format: Function RSDLLTestSrq (ByVal ud%, Result%, ibsta%, iberr%, 


C format: 


void FAR PASCAL RSDLLTestSrq( short ud, short far *result, 

short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) 

short RSDLLTestSrq( short ud, short *result, short *ibsta, 

short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl) 


result 

Reference to an integer value in which the library 

returns 

the status of the SRQ bit. 

0 - no SRQ 

1 - SRQ active, instrument has output a service request 

Example: RSDLLTestSrq (ud, result%, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) 

The function corresponds to the function RSDLLWaitSrq but with the difference that RSDLLTestSRQ 

returns immediately the current status of the SRQ bit whereas RSDLLWaitSrq waits for an SRQ to 

occur. 

1088.7531.12 8.19 E-16


ESIB 

RSDLLWaitSrq 

The function waits until the instrument triggers an SRQ with the handle ud. 

VB format: 

C format: 


Function RSDLLWaitSrq (ByVal ud%, Result%, ibsta%, iberr%, 


void FAR PASCAL RSDLLWaitSrq( short ud, short far *result, 

short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) 

short RSDLLWaitSrq( short ud, short *result, short *ibsta, 

short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl) 


result 

Reference to an integer value in which the library 

returns 

the status of the SRQ bit. 

0 - no SRQ occurred within the timeout 

1 - SRQ occurred within the timeout 

Parameter: RSDLLWaitSrq( ud, result, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl ); 

The function waits until one of the two following events occurs: 

• The instrument triggers an SRQ. 

• No SRQ occurs during the timeout defined with RSDLLibtmo(). 

RSDLLSwapBytes 

This function changes the display of binary numbers on non-Intel platforms.. 

VB format: Not provided at present since it is required only on non-Intel platforms. 

C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLSwapBytes( void far *pArray, const long 

size, const long count) 

C format (Unix): void RSDLLSwapBytes( void *pArray, const long size, const long 

count) 

Parameter: pArray Array in which modifications are made 

size 

Size of a single element in pArray 

count 

Number of elements in pArray 

Example: RSDLLSwapBytes( Buffer, sizeof(float), ibcntl/sizeof(float)) 

This function swaps the display of various elements from Big Endian to Little Endian and vice versa. It is 

expected that a coherent storage area of elements of the same file type (size byte) is transferred to 

pArray. This function has no effect on Intel platforms. 

Different types of processor architecture store data in different byte sequences. For example, Intel 

processors store data in the reverse order of Motorola processors. Comparison of byte sequences: 

Byte sequence Use in Display in memory Description 

Big Endian 

Motorola processors, 

network standard 

Most significant byte at 

least significant address 

The most significant byte is at the left end 

of the word. 

Little Endian Intel processors Least significant byte at 

least significant address 

The most significant byte is at the right 

end of the word. 

1088.7531.12 8.20 E-16

ESIB 


User Interface (USER) 

The user interface, located on the rear panel of the ESIB, is a 25 pin Cannon connector which provides 

access to the two user ports (Port A and Port B). Each port is 8 bits wide (A0 - A7 and B0 -B7) and can 

be configured either as output or as input. The voltage levels are TTL levels (Low < 0,4 V, High > 2 V). 

In addition, an internal +5 V power supply voltage is provided. The maximum load current is 100 mA. 

The pin assignments for the USER connector can be seen in the following diagram: 

GND GND A7 

+5 V GND GND A6 

A5 

A4 

A3 

A2 

A1 

A0 

13 

25 

1 

14 

+5 V 

B7 

B6 

B5 

B4 

B3 

B2 B0 

B1 

Fig. 8-5 

Pin assignments for the USER connector. 

The configuration of the user ports takes place in the SETUP menu (SETUP key) in the GENERAL 

SETUP sub-menu. 

1088.7531.12 8.21 E-16


ESIB 

Printer Interface (LPT) 

The 25-pin LPT connector on the rear panel of the ESIB is provided for the connection of a printer.. The 

LPT interface is compatible with the CENTRONICS printer interface. 

PE 

ACK 

SELECT BUSY 

D7 

D6 

D5 

D4 

D3 

D2 

D1 

D0 

STROBE 

13 

25 

1 

14 

GND 

INIT AUTOFEED 

GND GND GND 

GND GND ERROR 

GND GND 

SELECT IN 

Pin Signal Input (I) 

Output (O) 

Description 

1 STROBE O Pulse for transmitting a data byte, min. 1µs pulse width 

(active LOW) 

2 D0 O Data Line 0 








10 ACK I Indicates that the printer is ready to receive the next byte. 

(active LOW) 

11 BUSY I Signal is active when the printer cannot accept data. 

(active HIGH) 

12 PE I Signal is active when the paper tray is empty. 

(active HIGH) 

13 SELECT I Signal is active when the printer is selected. 

(active HIGH) 

14 AUTOFEED O When signal is active, the printer automatically performs a 

linefeed after each line. 

(active LOW) 

15 ERROR I This signal is high when the printer has no paper, is not 

selected or has an error status. 

(active LOW) 

16 INIT O Initialise the printer. 

(active LOW) 

17 SELECT IN O If signal is active, the codes DC1/DC3 are ignored by the 

printer. 

(active LOW). 

18 - 25 GND Ground connection. 

Fig. 8-6 

Pin assignments for the LPT connector. 

1088.7531.12 8.22 E-16

ESIB 


Measurement Converters (PROBE CODE) 

The PROBE CODE connector is used for supplying power to measurement converters and the providing 

the correct conversion factor coding to the ESIB. Using it, the conversion factors for high-impedance 

probes, current converters and antennas can be encoded in 10dB steps. In addition, the quantity to be 

measured (field strength, current and voltage) is also passed to the ESIB. Active converters can be 

supplied with ±10 V via the PROBE CODE connector. The following R&S accessories are deliverable 

with the applicable coding: 

· Wide band dipole 20...80 MHz HUF-Z2 

· HF current converter 100 kHz..30 MHz ESH2-Z1 

· VHF current converter 20...300 MHz ESV-Z1 

· Current converter 20 Hz...100 MHz EZ-17 

· Preamplifier 20...1000 MHz ESV-Z2. 

The pins of the PROBE CODE connector are assigned as follows: 

H 

G 

J 

K 

F 

M 

L 

A 

E 

D 

C 

B 

Pin 

Signal 

A ground 

B 

+10 V, max. 50 mA 

C µV/m (elec. field strength) 

D µA 

E 

10 dB 

F 

20 dB 

G 

40 dB 

H 

80 dB 

K 

- 10 V, max. 50 mA 

M 

factor sign inversion 

Fig 8-7 

Pin assignment for the 12-pin Tuchel connector. 

A 12-pin connector is used for coding (manufacturer: Tuchel, R&S part number 0018.5362.00, Tuchel 

type number: T3635/2). The input pins for implementing the code are connected to ground. 

Example: An antenna for measurement of the electromagnetic field strength has an antenna factor of 

10 dB, i.e., a field strength of 10 dBµV/m produces a voltage at the RF input of 0 dBµV. 

-> Pins C and E are connected to ground. 

Probe Connector (PROBE POWER) 

To allow the connection of probes, the ESIB provides the PROBE POWER power connector. It delivers 

the power supply voltages +15 V and -12,6 V and ground. 

The connector is also suited for powering the high-impedance probes from Hewlett Packard. 

3 

1 

2 

Pin Signal 

1 GND 

2 -12,6 V; max 150 mA 

3 +15 V; max 150 mA 

1088.7531.12 8.23 E-16


ESIB 

AF-Output (AF OUTPUT) 

A miniature telephone jack can be used at the AF OUTPUT connector to connect an external 

loudspeaker, a headphone set or, e.g., a LF voltmeter. The internal resistance is 10 ohms and the 

output voltage can be controlled in the MARKER DEMOD menu. When a jack is plugged in, the internal 

loudspeaker is automatically turned off. 

IF Output 21.4 MHz (21.4 MHz OUT) 

The 21,4 MHz IF signal of the ESIB is available at the IF 21.4 MHz OUT BNC connector. The bandwidth 

corresponds to the selected bandwidth for a resolution bandwidth between 2 kHz and 10 MHz. For a 

resolution bandwidth below 2 kHz, the bandwidth of the output is 5 kHz. 

In analyzer mode, the signal level at the IF output is 0 dBm for signals which correspond to the selected 

reference level in the range from -60 dBm to +30 dBm. In receiver mode, the signal level is 0 dB for full 

bar graph display (unit dBm) or 100 dBµV (unit dBµV). 

Video Output (VIDEO OUT) 

In analyzer mode, the video output delivers the logarithmic envelope curve of the IF signal independent 

of the level scaling on the display screen (linear or logarithmic). The bandwidth of the video signal 

always corresponds to one-half of the IF bandwidth and is not limited by the video filter in the 

measurement path. When the ESIB is equipped with option ESIB-B1 the video output delivers a signal 

which corresponds to the displayed video signal. The level scaling LIN or LOG is adapted to the display 

in the signal analysis mode and to the selected detector (LIN with average-, quasi-peak-, AC video- and 

RMS-detector, LOG with peak detector) in the receiver mode. The level range is always 100 dB. 

Reference Output/Input (EXT REF IN/OUT) 

When the ESIB is operated with the internal reference, the internal 10 MHz reference signal is also 

available at the REF IN/OUT connector and thus provides the capability of, e.g., synchronisation of 

external instruments to the ESIB. The level is 1 V RMS at 50 ohms source impedance. 

For operation with an external reference, this connector becomes an input connector. The internal 

reference oscillator is then synchronised to the reference applied to the connector. The reference 

frequency can be between 1 and 16 MHz in 1 MHz steps. The necessary level is > 0 dBm. 

The selection of internal or external references takes place in the SETUP menu. 

Sweep Output (SWEEP) 

The SWEEP BNC connector delivers a saw-tooth voltage between 0V and + 10 V which, for the 

frequency spectrum display, is proportional to the instantaneous frequency. The selected start frequency 

corresponds to a voltage of 0V and the stop frequency corresponds to a voltage of +10 V. 

External Trigger Input (EXT TRIGGER/GATE) 

The EXT TRIG/GATE connector is used for controlling the measurement via an external signal. 

Trigger voltage range:: -5 V ... +5 V 

1088.7531.12 8.24 E-16

ESIB 


Noise Source Control (NOISE SOURCE) 

Using the NOISE SOURCE connector, an external noise source can be switched on/off, in order, e.g., to 

measure the noise figure of Units Under Test (UUTs). Usual noise sources require a +28 V signal to be 

turned on. At 0 V, they are turned off. These switching voltages are delivered by the connector. 

External Keyboard (KEYBOARD) 

A 5-pin DIN connector is provided to allow connecting an external keyboard. Because of its low 

interference radiation, the PSA-Z1 keyboard is recommended (Order No. 1009.5001.31). However, any 

other multi-function keyboard may also be used. 

Pin 

Signal 

1 Keyboard Clock 

2 Data 

3 Free 

4 Ground 

5 +5-V-Power Supply 

Fig. 8-8 

Pin assignments of the KEYBOARD connector. 

Mouse Connector (MOUSE) 

Pin 

Signal 

1 MOUSEDATA 

2 NC 

3 MOUSEGND 

4 MOUSEVD5 

5 MOUSECLK 

6 NC 

Fig 8-9 

Pin assignments for the MOUSE connector. 

Monitor Connector (MONITOR) 

Pin Signal Pin Signal 

1 R 9 NC 

2 G 10 GND 

3 B 11 MID0 (NC) 

4 MID2 (NC) 12 MID1 (NC) 

5 NC 13 HSYNC 

6 R-GND 14 VSYNC 

7 G-GND 15 NC 

8 B-GND 

Fig. 8-10 Pin assignments of the MONITOR connector. 

1088.7531.12 8.25 E-16

ESIB 

Contents - Error Messages 

Contents - Chapter 9 "Error Messages" 

9 List of Error Messages 

SCPI-Specific Error Messages........................................................................................................ 9.1 

Command Error - Faulty command; sets bit 5 in the ESR register. ........................................ 9.1 

Execution Error - Error on execution of a command; sets bit 4 in the ESR register................ 9.4 

Device Specific Error; sets bit 3 in the ESR register ............................................................... 9.7 

Query Error - Error in data request; sets bit 2 in the ESR register .......................................... 9.7 

1088.7531.12 I-9.1 E-2

Contents - Error Messages 

ESIB 

1088.7531.12 I-9.2 E-2

ESIB 

List of Error Messages 

9 List of Error Messages 

The following list contains the error messages for errors occurring in the instrument. The meaning of 

negative error codes is defined in SCPI, positive error codes mark errors specific of the instrument. 

Error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system in the remote 

control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. The answer format of ESIB to 

the command is as follows: 

, "; " 

The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional. 

Example: 

The command "TEST:COMMAND" generates the following answer to the query SYSTem:ERRor? : 

-113,"Undefined header;TEST:COMMAND" 

The table contains the error code in the left-hand column. In the right-hand column the error text being 

entered into the error/event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face. Below the error text, there 

is an explanation as to the respective error. 

SCPI-Specific Error Messages 

No Error 

Error code 

Error text in the case of queue poll 

Error explanation 

0 No error 

This message is output if the error queue does not contain any entries. 

Command Error - Faulty command; sets bit 5 in the ESR register. 

Error code 



-100 Command Error 

The command is faulty or invalid. 

-101 Invalid Character 

The command contains an invalid sign. 

Example: A header contains an ampersand, "SENSe&". 

-102 Syntax error 

The command is invalid. 

Example: The command contains block data the instrument does not accept. 

-103 Invalid separator 

The command contains an impermissible sign instead of a separator. 

Example: A semicolon is missing after the command. 

1088.7531.12 9.1 E-2


ESIB 

Continuation: Command Error 

Error code 



-104 Data type error 

The command contains an invalid value indication. 

Example: ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting. 

-105 GET not allowed 

A Group Execute Trigger (GET) is within a command line. 

-108 Parameter not allowed 

The command contains too many parameters. 

Example: Command SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer permits only one frequency indication. 

-109 Missing parameter 

The command contains too few parameters. 

Example: The command SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer requires a frequency indication. 

-110 Command header error 

The header of the command is faulty. 

-111 Header separator error 

The header contains an impermissible separator. 

Example: the header is not followed by a "White Space", "*ESE255" 

-112 Program mnemonic too long 

The header contains more than 12 characters. 

-113 Undefined header 

The header is not defined for the instrument. 

Example: *XYZ is undefined for every instrument. 

-114 Header suffix out of range 

The header contains an impermissible numeric suffix. 

Example: SENSe3 does not exist in the instrument. 

-120 Numeric data error 

The command contains a faulty numeric parameter. 

-121 Invalid character in number 

A number contains an invalid character. 

Example: An "A" in a decimal number or a "9" in an octal number. 

-123 Exponent too large 

The absolute value of the exponent is greater than 32000. 

-124 Too many digits 

The number includes too many digits. 

-128 Numeric data not allowed 

The command includes a number which is not allowed at this position. 

Example: The command INPut:COUPling requires indication of a text parameter. 

-130 Suffix error 

The command contains a faulty suffix. 

-131 Invalid suffix 

The suffix is invalid for this instrument. 

Example: nHz is not defined. 

-134 Suffix too long 

The suffix contains more than 12 characters. 

1088.7531.12 9.2 E-2

ESIB 


Continuation: Command Error 

Error code 



-138 Suffix not allowed 

A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command. 

Example: The command *RCL does not permit a suffix to be indicated. 

-140 Character data error 

The command contains a faulty text parameter 

-141 Invalid character data 

The text parameter either contains an invalid character or it is invalid for this command. 

Example: Write error with parameter indication;INPut:COUPling XC. 

-144 Character data too long 

The text parameter contains more than 12 characters. 

-148 Character data not allowed 

The text parameter is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command. 

Example: The command *RCL requires a number to be indicated. 

-150 String data error 

The command contains a faulty string. 

-151 Invalid string data 

The command contains a faulty string. 

Example: An END message has been received prior to the terminating apostrophe. 

-158 String data not allowed 

The command contains a valid string at a position which is not allowed. 

Example: A text parameter is set in quotation marks, INPut:COUPling "DC" 

-160 Block data error 

The command contains faulty block data. 

-161 Invalid block data 

The command contains faulty block data. 

Example: An END message was received prior to reception of the expected number of data. 

-168 Block data not allowed 

The command contains valid block data at an impermissible position. 

Example: The command *RCL requires a number to be indicated. 

-170 Expression error 

The command contains an invalid mathematical expression. 

-171 Invalid expression 

The command contains an invalid mathematical expression. 

Example: The expression contains mismatching parentheses. 

-178 Expression data not allowed 

The command contains a mathematical expression at an impermissible position. 

-180 Macro error 

A faulty macro has been defined, or an error has occurred during execution of a macro. 

-181 Invalid outside macro definition 

A macro parameter placeholder was encountered outside of a macro definition. 

-183 Invalid inside macro definition 

A macro definition is syntactically wrong. 

-184 Macro parameter error 

A command inside the macro definition has the wrong number or type of parameters. 

1088.7531.12 9.3 E-2


ESIB 

Execution Error - Error on execution of a command; sets bit 4 in the ESR 

register 

Error code 



-200 Execution error 

Error on execution of the command. 

-201 Invalid while in local 

The command is not executable while the device is in local due to a hard local control. 

Example: The device receives a command which would change the rotary knob state, but the device is in 

local so the command can not be executed. 

-202 Settings lost due to rtl 

A setting associated with hard local control was lost when the device changed to LOCS from REMS or to 

LWLS from RWLS. 

-210 Trigger error 

Error on triggering the device. 

-211 Trigger ignored 

The trigger (GET, *TRG or trigger signal) was ignored because of device timing considerations. 

Example: The device was not ready to respond. 

-212 Arm ignored 

An arming signal was ignored by the device. 

-213 Init ignored 

Measurement initialisation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress. 

-214 Trigger deadlock 

The trigger source for the initiation of measurement is set to GET and subsequent measurement is 

received. The measurement cannot be started until a GET is received, but the GET would cause an 

interrupted-error) 

-215 Arm deadlock 

The trigger source for the initiation of measurement is set to GET and subsequent measurement is 

received. The measurement cannot be started until a GET is received, but the GET would cause an 

interrupted-error. 

-220 Parameter error 

The command contains a faulty or invalid parameter. 

-221 Settings conflict 

There is a conflict between setting of parameter value and instrument state. 

-222 Data out of range 

The parameter value lies out of the permissible range of the instrument. 

-223 Too much data 

The command contains too many data. 

Example: The instrument does not have sufficient storage space. 

-224 Illegal parameter value 

The parameter value is invalid. 

Example: The text parameter is invalid , TRIGger:SWEep:SOURce TASTe 

1088.7531.12 9.4 E-2

ESIB 


Continuation: Execution Error 

Error code 



-230 Data corrupt or stale 

The data are incomplete or invalid. 

Example: The instrument has aborted a measurement. 

-231 Data questionable 

The measurement accuracy is suspect. 

-240 Hardware error 

The command cannot be executed due to problems with the instrument hardware. 

-241 Hardware missing 

Hardware is missing. 

Example: An option is not fitted. 

-250 Mass storage error 

A mass storage error occured. 

-251 Missing mass storage 

The mass storage is missing. 

Example: An option is not installed. 

-252 Missing media 

The media is missing. 

Example: There is no floppy in the floppy disk drive. 

-253 Corrupt media 

The media is corrupt. 

Example: The floppy is bad or has the wrong format. 

-254 Media full 

The media is full. 

Example: There is no room on the floppy. 

-255 Directory full 

The media directory is full. 

-256 File name not found 

The file name cannot be found on the media. 

-257 File name error 

The file name is wrong. 

Example: An attempt is made to copy to a duplicate file name. 

-258 Media protected 

The media is protected. 

Example: The write-protect tab on the floppy is present. 

-260 Expression error 

The expression contains an error. 

-261 Math error in expression 

The expression contains a math error. 

Example: Divide-by-zero. 

1088.7531.12 9.5 E-2


ESIB 

Continuation: Execution Error 

Error code 



-270 Macro error 

Error on the execution of a macro. 

-271 Macro syntax error 

The macro definition contains a syntax error. 

-272 Macro execution error 

The macro definition contains an error. 

-273 illegal macro label 

An illegal macro label is defined in the *DMC command. 

Example: The label is too long. The label is identical with the common command header or contains an 

invalid header syntax. 

-274 Macro parameter error 

The macro definition improperly uses a macro parameter placeholder. 

-275 Macro definition too long 

The macro definition is too long. 

-276 Macro recursion error 

The command sequence defined by the macro is trapped in a program loop. 

Example: The event that would allow the loop to be exited does not occur. 

-277 Macro redefinition not allowed 

The macro label defined in the *DMC command is already defined elsewhere. 

-278 Macro header not found 

The macro label in the *GMC? query is not yet defined. 

-280 Program error 

Error on the execution of a down-loaded program. 

-281 Cannot create program 

The program cannot be created. 

-282 illegal program name 

The name of the programm is illegal. 

Example: The name relates to a non-existing program. 

-283 illegal variable name 

The inputted variable does not exist in the program. 

-284 Program currently running 

The desired operation is not possible while the program is running. 

Example: A running program cannot be deleted. 

-285 Program syntax error 

The down-loaded program contains a syntax error. 

-286 Program runtime error 

1088.7531.12 9.6 E-2

ESIB 


Device Specific Error; sets bit 3 in the ESR register 

Error code 

Error test in the case of queue poll 


-300 Device-specific error 

ESIB-specific error not defined in greater detail. 

-310 System error 

This error message suggests an error within the instrument. Please inform the R&S Service. 

-311 Memory error 

Error in the instrument memory. 

-312 PUD memory lost 

Loss of the protected user data stored using the *PUD command. 

-313 Calibration memory lost 

Loss of the non-volatile calibration data stored using the *CAL? command. 

-314 Save/recall memory lost 

Loss of the non-volatile data stored using the *SAV command. 

-315 Configuration memory lost 

Loss of the non-volatile configuration data stored by the instrument. 

-330 Self-test failed 

The selftest could not be executed. 

-350 Queue overflow 

This error code is entered in the queue instead of the actual error code if the queue is full. It indicates that 

an error has occurred but not been accepted. The queue can accept 5 entries. 

Query Error - Error in data request; sets bit 2 in the ESR register 

Error code 



-400 Query error 

General error occurring when data are requested by a query. 

-410 Query INTERRUPTED 

The query has been interrupted. 

Example: After a query, the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely. 

-420 Query UNTERMINATED 

The query is incomplete. 

Example: The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data. 

-430 Query DEADLOCKED 

The query cannot be processed. 

Example: The input and output buffers are full, the instrument cannot continue operation. 

-440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response 

A query is in the same command line after a query which requests an indefinite response. 

1088.7531.12 9.7 E-2

ESIB 

Index 

10 Index 

Note: 

- The softkeys are listed alphabetically under the keyword "Softkey". 

- For each softkey, the page in chapter 6 containing the description of the corresponding remote 

command is quoted in addition. 

- The assignment between IEEE-bus commands and softkeys is described in Chapter 6, Section 

"Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment". 

- Chapter 6 contains an alphabetical list of all IEEE-bus commands 

0 

0 dB setting ......................................................................4.78 

6 

6 dB bandwidths ...............................................................4.79 

A 

Abort 

hardcopy ....................................................................4.49 

macro .........................................................................4.48 

AC video detector ......................................... 4.81, 4.83, 4.232 

ACP measurement .........................................................4.184 

absolute/relative .......................................................4.189 

bandwidth.................................................................4.186 

channel spacing .......................................................4.187 

channels...................................................................4.184 

filter ..........................................................................4.186 

limits.........................................................................4.187 

standard ...................................................................4.185 

Addressed command..........................................................8.5 

Adjacent channel power measurement ...........................4.184 

Administrator identification................................................1.22 

Alphanumeric parameter 

editing.........................................................................3.18 

AM demodulation..............................................................4.86 

AM modulation................................................................4.275 

Analog trace ...................................................................4.235 

Ascii #...............................................................................5.14 

Attenuation ................................................. 4.77, 4.116, 4.171 

Attenuator (tracking generator) .......................................4.264 

AUI connector...................................................................1.43 

Autopeak detector ..........................................................4.233 

Autorange function..........................................................4.117 

Average..........................................................................4.228 

continuous sweep.....................................................4.229 

signal per sweep ......................................................4.209 

single sweep ............................................................4.229 

summary markers.....................................................4.210 

sweep count .............................................................4.228 

Average detector .......................................... 4.80, 4.82, 4.234 

Axis 

adjustment..................................................................4.93 

labelling ........................................................................3.8 

B 

Bandwidth 

channel .................................................................... 4.186 

occupied .................................................................. 4.194 

resolution ................................................................. 4.241 

video ........................................................................ 4.242 

Bargraph measurement...................................................... 4.5 

Beeper ............................................................................. 4.46 

Block data ........................................................................ 5.14 

BNC connector................................................................. 1.42 

Boolean parameter........................................................... 5.13 

C 

Calibration........................................................................ 4.10 

method..................................................................... 4.272 

CD-ROM installation......................................................... 1.35 

Center frequency..................................................4.111, 4.158 

Channel 

bandwidth ................................................................ 4.186 

power measurement ................................................ 4.188 

power, absolute/relative ........................................... 4.189 

spacing .................................................................... 4.187 

Characters, special ............................................................ 6.2 

Clear/Write ...........................................................4.144, 4.227 

Clock................................................................................ 4.46 

Colon................................................................................ 5.14 

COM1/2 interface ............................................................. 4.43 

Comma ............................................................................ 5.14 

Command 

#................................................................................. 5.14 

addressed .................................................................... 8.5 

alphabetical list ........................................................ 6.180 

colon .......................................................................... 5.14 

comma....................................................................... 5.14 

header........................................................................ 5.10 

line ............................................................................. 5.12 

long form.................................................................... 5.11 

overlapping execution ................................................ 5.17 

query.......................................................................... 5.12 

question mark ................................................... 5.12, 5.14 

quotation mark ........................................................... 5.14 

recognition ................................................................. 5.16 

sequence ................................................................... 5.17 

short form................................................................... 5.11 

structure....................................................................... 5.9 

suffix .......................................................................... 5.11 

synchronization .......................................................... 5.17 

syntax elements......................................................... 5.14 

univeral ........................................................................ 8.5 

white space................................................................ 5.14 

Common commands .......................................................... 6.4 

CONDition register part .................................................... 5.19 

Configuration.................................................................... 4.21 

1088.7531.12 10.1 E-3

Index 

ESIB 

recall ..........................................................................4.66 

reset.............................................................................4.2 

save ...........................................................................4.57 

Copy 

file ..............................................................................4.60 

limit line ......................................................... 4.138, 4.220 

trace .............................................................. 4.148, 4.230 

Coupling .........................................................................4.240 

default settings .........................................................4.243 

define .......................................................................4.247 

IF bandwidth to frequency range ................................4.83 

Cursor keys ......................................................................3.15 

D 

D Lines ...........................................................................4.214 

Data set 

creation ......................................................................4.66 

partial .........................................................................4.64 

recall ..........................................................................4.66 

save ...........................................................................4.61 

Date of internal real-time clock .........................................4.46 

dB*/MHz .........................................................................4.168 

dBµA ................................................................... 4.114, 4.168 

dBµA/m ..........................................................................4.114 

dBµA/MHz ......................................................................4.168 

dBµA/mMHz ...................................................................4.168 

dBµV ................................................................... 4.114, 4.168 

dBµV/m ..........................................................................4.114 

dBµV/MHz ......................................................................4.168 

dBµV/mMHz ...................................................................4.168 

dBm..................................................................... 4.114, 4.168 

dBmV .............................................................................4.168 

dBmV/MHz .....................................................................4.168 

dBpT...............................................................................4.114 

dBpW .................................................................. 4.114, 4.168 

DCL ..................................................................................5.16 

Default 

commands....................................................................6.1 

instrument settings .......................................................4.1 

scan table...................................................................4.89 

Delete 

file ..............................................................................4.60 

limit line ....................................................................4.138 

line of peak list .........................................................4.100 

line of transducer table ...............................................4.27 

macro .........................................................................4.74 

message.....................................................................4.17 

scan range .................................................................4.94 

transducer factor/set...................................................4.24 

Delta marker...................................................................4.198 

step size ........................................................ 4.127, 4.202 

Demodulation ........................................................ 4.86, 4.179 

Detector 

AC video................................................. 4.81, 4.83, 4.232 

auto select................................................................4.233 

autopeak ..................................................................4.233 

average .................................................. 4.80, 4.82, 4.234 

max peak................................................ 4.80, 4.82, 4.233 

min peak................................................. 4.80, 4.83, 4.233 

quasi-peak.............................................. 4.80, 4.82, 4.146 

RMS ....................................................... 4.81, 4.83, 4.234 

sample......................................................................4.234 

Device 

reset (overall) ...............................................................4.2 

status .........................................................................4.14 

DIFOVL .............................................................................. 3.4 

Directory 

create .........................................................................4.60 

rename .......................................................................4.60 

Disable 

front panel.................................................................. 3.20 

keyboard .................................................................... 3.20 

Disk formatting ................................................................. 4.60 

Display 

configuration ................................................................ 4.3 

energy-saving ............................................................ 1.21 

mean value .............................................................. 4.209 

rms value ................................................................. 4.209 

Display mode 

full screen .................................................... 3.9, 4.4, 4.86 

split screen................................................... 3.8, 4.4, 4.86 

Double dagger.................................................................. 5.14 

Driver 

printer......................................................................... 1.27 

software ..................................................................... 1.38 

E 

Electrostatic discharge ..................................................... 1.18 

EMI RECEIVER ............................................................... 4.75 

ENABle register part......................................................... 5.19 

Energy saving mode......................................................... 1.21 

Enhancement labels........................................................... 3.6 

Entry 

abortion...................................................................... 3.17 

alphanumeric parameters........................................... 3.18 

mouse control ............................................................ 3.23 

numeric parameter ..................................................... 3.17 

table........................................................................... 3.19 

termination ................................................................. 3.17 

window....................................................................... 3.16 

Error messages.................................................................. 9.1 

Error-queue query ............................................................ 5.33 

ESE (event status enable register)................................... 5.22 

ESR (event status register) .............................................. 5.22 

Ethernet Adapter .............................................................. 1.42 

EVENt register part .......................................................... 5.19 

Event status enable register (ESE) .................................. 5.22 

Event status register (ESR).............................................. 5.22 

EXT ALC modulation...................................................... 4.275 

Ext Trig/Gate input ........................................................... 8.24 

ExtRef ................................................................................ 3.4 

External noise source....................................................... 4.38 

F 

FFT-Filter ....................................................................... 4.245 

File 

copy ........................................................................... 4.60 

delete......................................................................... 4.60 

rename....................................................................... 4.60 

sort............................................................................. 4.60 

Final results.................................................................... 4.145 

Firmware 

options (enabling)....................................................... 4.37 

options (info) .............................................................. 4.15 

update............................................................... 1.37, 4.47 

version ....................................................................... 4.14 

FM demodulation.............................................................. 4.86 

FM modulation ............................................................... 4.275 

Frequency 

axis labelling ................................................................ 3.8 

counter..................................................................... 4.181 

line .................................................................4.134, 4.213 

measurement window ....................................4.111, 4.155 

offset........................................................................ 4.159 

receiver...................................................................... 4.76 

start.......................................................................... 4.155 

start/stop of scan ....................................................... 4.90 

1088.7531.12 10.2 E-3

ESIB 

Index 

stop ..........................................................................4.157 

zoom ........................................................................4.164 

Front panel 

disable........................................................................3.20 

keyboard emulation ........................................... 3.22, 3.24 

FTP operation...................................................................1.53 

Full screen.......................................................... 3.9, 4.4, 4.86 

Function test.....................................................................1.21 

Fuse .................................................................................1.19 

G 

GET (Group Execute Trigger)...........................................5.16 

GPIB 

address ......................................................................4.41 

interface .......................................................................8.2 

H 

Handshake .........................................................................8.8 

Hardcopy 

abort...........................................................................4.49 

comments...................................................................4.54 

format.........................................................................4.56 

items ..........................................................................4.52 

position.......................................................................4.53 

printer.........................................................................4.55 

settings.......................................................................4.51 

start ............................................................................4.49 

Hardware 

configuration...............................................................4.15 

indication of settings.....................................................3.5 

installed options..........................................................4.15 

Header..............................................................................5.10 

Help line editor..................................................................3.18 

Hold scan .........................................................................4.96 

I 

I/Q modulation ................................................................4.276 

IEC/IEEE-bus 

address ......................................................................4.41 

interface .......................................................................8.2 

interface functions ........................................................8.4 

IF bandwidth.....................................................................4.79 

coupling to frequency range .......................................4.83 

IFOVLD .............................................................................. 3.4 

Indication 

hardware settings .........................................................3.5 

instrument settings .......................................................3.6 

marker information........................................................3.5 

screen ..........................................................................3.4 

Input 

attenuation .................................................................4.77 

attenuator ............................................. 4.77, 4.116, 4.171 

Ext Trig/Gate..............................................................8.24 

external reference.......................................................8.24 

Input buffer .......................................................................5.15 

Installation 

CD-ROM ....................................................................1.35 

firmware update................................................. 1.37, 4.47 

keyboard ....................................................................1.24 

monitor .......................................................................1.25 

mouse ........................................................................1.23 

network printer............................................................1.33 

printer.........................................................................1.27 

rack ............................................................................1.19 

Windows NT software ................................................1.38 

Instrument functions ...........................................................4.1 


indication...................................................................... 3.6 

preset.................................................................. 4.1, 4.67 

power-up.................................................................... 4.67 

Interface 

IEC/IEEE-bus............................................................... 8.2 

printer......................................................................... 8.22 

RS-232-C..................................................................... 8.6 

RSIB .......................................................................... 8.10 

Interrupt............................................................................ 5.32 

Interrupt scan ................................................................... 4.96 

IST flag ............................................................................ 5.22 

K 

Key 

CAL............................................................................ 4.10 

CENTER........................................................4.158, 6.133 

CONFIG..................................................................... 4.59 

COUPLING .............................................................. 4.240 

cursor......................................................................... 3.15 

D LINES.........................................................4.134, 4.213 

DELTA ...........................................................4.124, 4.198 

DISPLAY...................................................................... 4.3 

FREQ....................................................................... 4.111 

HOLD......................................................................... 3.20 

INFO .......................................................................... 4.14 

INPUT............................................................4.116, 4.171 

LIMITS ...........................................................4.136, 4.217 

LOCAL....................................................................... 4.48 

MENU ........................................................................ 3.13 

MKR...............................................................4.133, 4.211 

MODE........................................................................ 4.19 

NORMAL .......................................................4.119, 4.175 

numeric keypad.......................................................... 3.14 

PRESET ........................................................... 4.2, 6.171 

RANGE..........................................................4.115, 4.169 

RECALL..................................................................... 4.66 

REF ...............................................................4.113, 4.165 

roll-key ....................................................................... 3.15 

RUN................................................................ 4.153, 6.81 

SAVE ......................................................................... 4.61 

SCAN....................................................................... 4.153 

SEARCH........................................................4.128, 4.203 

SETTINGS................................................................. 4.51 

SETUP....................................................................... 4.21 

SPAN....................................................................... 4.162 

START (frequency) ........................................4.111, 4.155 

START (hardcopy) ............................................ 4.49, 6.78 

STEP ......................................................................... 3.21 

STOP.............................................................4.111, 4.157 

SWEEP.................................................................... 4.251 

TRACE1 to 4..................................................4.143, 4.226 

TRIGGER ......................................................4.154, 4.249 

UNIT ........................................................................ 4.113 

USER......................................................................... 4.71 

Keyboard 

connection ................................................................. 1.24 

connector................................................................... 8.25 

disable ....................................................................... 3.20 

external...................................................................... 3.22 

L 

Level 

attenuation ............................................4.77, 4.116, 4.171 

control, external ....................................................... 4.275 

1088.7531.12 10.3 E-3

Index 

ESIB 

line ................................................................ 4.135, 4.215 

maximum..................................................................4.166 

mixer ........................................................................4.172 

offset (tracking generator).........................................4.264 

range............................................................. 4.115, 4.169 

reference ..................................................................4.165 

unit ................................................................ 4.113, 4.167 

LF demodulation.............................................................4.179 

Limit line .........................................................................4.217 

copy .............................................................. 4.138, 4.220 

delete ............................................................ 4.138, 4.220 

edit ................................................................ 4.139, 4.221 

save .............................................................. 4.142, 4.225 

select............................................................. 4.138, 4.218 

shift ............................................................... 4.142, 4.225 

value ............................................................. 4.142, 4.224 

Line 

display 1,2 ..................................................... 4.135, 4.215 

frequency 1, 2................................................ 4.135, 4.215 

limit................................................................ 4.138, 4.218 

reference ....................................................... 4.135, 4.215 

threshold ....................................................... 4.135, 4.215 

time 1, 2 ...................................................................4.216 

LO LvD ............................................................................... 3.4 

LO Lvl................................................................................. 3.4 

LO unl................................................................................. 3.4 

Login/logout (NT controller) ..............................................1.22 

Lower case .........................................................................6.2 

LPT interface....................................................................8.22 

M 

Macro 

abort...........................................................................4.48 

definition.....................................................................4.73 

start ............................................................................4.71 

Maintenance.......................................................................8.1 

Manual operation................................................................3.1 

return to...............................................................4.48, 5.4 

Marker ............................................................................4.175 

center .......................................................................4.211 

delta .........................................................................4.198 

demodulation................................................. 4.179, 4.180 

indication......................................................................3.5 

info ................................................................ 4.122, 4.179 

n-dB-down................................................................4.207 

normal ........................................................... 4.119, 4.175 

peak ................................................... 4.129, 4.204, 4.211 

search ......................................................................4.203 

search limit .................................................... 4.132, 4.207 

signal track ...............................................................4.178 

step size ........................................................ 4.123, 4.197 

zoom ........................................................................4.179 

Max hold.............................................................. 4.145, 4.229 

Max peak detector ........................................ 4.80, 4.82, 4.233 

MAX / REF LVL .................................................................. 3.4 

Mean power (GSM burst)................................................4.209 

Measurement 

examples......................................................................2.1 

frequency-converting ................................................4.273 

recall ..........................................................................4.66 

save ...........................................................................4.57 

time ............................................................................4.84 

transmission .............................................................4.265 

window .........................................................................4.3 

Measurement converters ..................................................4.21 

connector ..........................................................8.22, 8.23 

Memory 

battery-backed-up.......................................................1.21 


Menu switching ................................................................ 3.12 

MICROSOFT NET operation............................................ 1.47 

Min hold ...............................................................4.145, 4.230 

Min peak detector..........................................4.80, 4.83, 4.233 

Minimum search...................................................4.130, 4.204 

Mixer level...................................................................... 4.172 

Mode................................................................................ 4.19 

EMI receiver............................................................... 4.75 

signal analysis ......................................................... 4.155 

tracking generator .................................................... 4.263 

Modification level of modules ........................................... 4.15 

Modulation 

AM ........................................................................... 4.275 

EXT ALC.................................................................. 4.275 

FM ........................................................................... 4.275 

I/Q............................................................................ 4.276 

Modulation filter.............................................................. 4.186 

Monitor 

connecting ................................................................. 4.46 

connection ................................................................. 1.25 

connector................................................................... 8.25 

Mouse 

connection ................................................................. 1.23 

connector................................................................... 8.25 

control........................................................................ 3.23 

N 

Network operating system 

FTP............................................................................ 1.53 

MICROSOFT NET ..................................................... 1.47 

NOVELL NETWARE.................................................. 1.47 

TCP/IP ....................................................................... 1.52 

Network printer connection............................................... 1.33 

Noise power density measurement ................................ 4.182 

Noise source, external...................................................... 4.38 

NOVELL NETWARE operation ........................................ 1.47 

NT controller..................................................................... 1.22 

NTRansition register part.................................................. 5.19 

Numeric keypad ............................................................... 3.14 

Numeric parameter 

editing ........................................................................ 3.17 

Numerical values (command) ........................................... 5.13 

O 

OCXO ................................................................................ 3.4 

Offset frequency............................................................. 4.159 

Operating mode 

receiver...................................................................... 4.75 

signal analysis ......................................................... 4.155 

tracking generator .................................................... 4.263 

Option 

ESIB-B1 - Linear Video Output .................................. 4.81 

FSE-B10/B11 - Tracking Generator ......................... 2.263 

FSE-B16 - Ethernet Adapter ...................................... 1.42 

FSE-B17 - Second IEC/IEEE bus interface................ 1.39 

Output 

AF..................................................................... 8.22, 8.24 

buffer ..........................................................................5.17 

IF ............................................................................... 8.24 

level (tracking generator)...........................................4.264 

LOG VIDEO OUT....................................................... 8.24 

noise source control................................................... 8.25 

reference.................................................................... 8.24 

sweep ........................................................................ 8.24 

video out .................................................................... 8.24 

OVLD ................................................................................. 3.4 

1088.7531.12 10.4 E-3

ESIB 

Index 

P 

Parallel poll.......................................................................5.33 

Parallel poll enable register (PPE) ....................................5.22 

Parameter 

block data...................................................................5.14 

boolean ......................................................................5.13 

numerical values ........................................................5.13 

string ..........................................................................5.14 

text .............................................................................5.14 

Password 

service function ..........................................................4.39 

Windows NT...............................................................1.22 

Path..................................................................................4.59 

Peak 

detector ................................................ 4.80, 4.146, 4.231 

excursion....................................................... 4.130, 4.205 

search ........................................................... 4.129, 4.204 

Power mean ...................................................................4.209 

Power measurement 

adjacent channel ......................................................4.192 

automatic optimisation of settings.............................4.195 

bandwidth, occupied.................................................4.194 

channel.....................................................................4.188 

channel configuration ...............................................4.183 

signal/noise ..............................................................4.190 

PPE (parallel poll enable register).....................................5.22 

Preamplification ................................... 4.32, 4.34, 4.79, 4.117 

Preselection......................................................................4.32 

Preset.................................................................................4.2 

Pre-trigger.......................................................................4.261 

Printer connection....................................................1.27, 8.22 

Printing 

abort...........................................................................4.49 

Configuration ..............................................................4.51 

start ............................................................................4.49 

Probe Code connector......................................................8.22 

Probe Power connector ....................................................8.22 

PTRansition register part ..................................................5.19 

Q 

Quasi analog display ......................................................4.235 

Quasi-peak detector ..................................... 4.80, 4.82, 4.146 

Query....................................................................... 5.12, 5.33 

Question mark ......................................................... 5.12, 5.14 

Quotation mark .................................................................5.14 

R 

Rack installation ...............................................................1.19 

Real-time clock .................................................................4.46 

Recall data set..................................................................4.66 

Receiver .................................................................. 4.19, 4.75 

frequency ...................................................................4.76 

Recording the correction data...........................................4.10 

Reference 

dataset (tracking generator)......................................4.272 

external ......................................................................4.37 

line ................................................................ 4.135, 4.215 

Reference level...............................................................4.165 

offset ........................................................................4.166 

Remote control 

basics...........................................................................5.1 

IEC-bus ........................................................................5.4 

indication .............................................................4.48, 5.3 

RS-232-C .....................................................................5.5 

RSIB....................................................................5.6, 8.10 

switch over ...................................................................5.3 

Rename 

directory..................................................................... 4.60 

file.............................................................................. 4.60 

Reset 

device .......................................................................... 4.2 

status reporting system.............................................. 5.34 

Resolution bandwidth ............................................ 4.79, 4.241 

RF attenuation.............................................4.77, 4.116, 4.171 

auto.......................................................................... 4.172 

auto low distortion .................................................... 4.172 

auto low noise.......................................................... 4.172 

RF input ...............................................................4.116, 4.171 

RFI reception.................................................................... 4.75 

RJ45 (star topology)......................................................... 1.43 

RMS detector ................................................4.81, 4.83, 4.234 

RMS value (summary marker)........................................ 4.209 

Roll-key............................................................................ 3.15 

RS-232-C 

interface....................................................................... 8.6 

interface functions........................................................ 8.7 

transmission parameters.............................................. 8.7 

RSIB interface.................................................................. 8.10 

S 

S/N ratio......................................................................... 4.117 

Sample detector ............................................................. 4.234 

Save 

configuration .............................................................. 4.57 

data set...................................................................... 4.61 

limit line..........................................................4.142, 4.225 

measurement ............................................................. 4.57 

Scan................................................................................. 4.87 

count........................................................................ 4.146 

default setup .............................................................. 4.89 

editing ........................................................................ 4.94 

entry........................................................................... 4.89 

hold............................................................................ 4.96 

ranges........................................................................ 4.93 

run ............................................................................. 4.95 

stop............................................................................ 4.96 

SCPI 

conformance information.............................................. 6.1 

introduction .................................................................. 5.9 

Screen......................................................................... 3.2, 4.5 

full screen ........................................................... 3.9, 4.86 

indications.................................................................... 3.4 

split screen.......................................................... 3.9, 4.86 

Search 

limit ................................................................4.132, 4.207 

minimum ........................................................4.130, 4.204 

peak...............................................................4.129, 4.204 

Self test............................................................................ 4.16 

Serial poll ......................................................................... 5.32 

Service functions.............................................................. 4.38 

Service Pack .................................................................... 1.38 

Service request (SRQ) ............................................ 5.21, 5.32 

indication.................................................................... 4.48 

Service request enable register (SRE) ............................. 5.21 

Setup ............................................................................... 4.21 

general....................................................................... 4.41 

Softkey 

% POWER BANDWIDTH...............................4.187, 6.145 

0 DB MIN ON/OFF..................................4.78, 4.117, 6.83 

AC VIDEO..................................4.83, 4.147, 6.120, 6.121 

ACP STANDARD..................................................... 4.185 

ACTIVE MKR / DELTA ..................................4.129, 4.204 

ACTIVE SCREEN A/B .......................................... 4.4, 4.5 

ADD TO PEAK LIST ......................................4.133, 4.212 

ADJACENT CHAN POWER....................4.192, 6.44, 6.45 

1088.7531.12 10.5 E-3

Index 

ESIB 

ADJUST AXIS ............................................................4.93 

ADJUST CP SETTINGS................................ 4.195, 6.144 

ADJUST TO TRACE ..................................... 4.235, 4.236 

ALL DELTA OFF .................................... 4.125, 4.199, 6.9 

ALL MARKER OFF .............................. 4.122, 4.178, 6.34 

ALL SUM MKR OFF........................................ 4.210, 6.53 

AM.....................................4.86, 4.179, 4.180, 6.40, 6.119 

AMPERE......................................................... 4.169, 6.58 

ANALOG TR ON/OFF ..................................... 4.235, 6.71 

ANALYZER ............................................ 4.19, 4.155, 6.87 

APPEND NEW ..................................... 4.149, 4.237, 6.75 

area............................................................................3.11 

ASCII COMMENT ................................ 4.150, 4.238, 6.75 

ASCII CONFIG.........................................................4.237 

ASCII EXPORT ........................... 4.101, 4.237, 6.94, 6.95 

ATT SWITCHES................................................ 4.18, 6.62 

ATTEN .......................................................................4.77 

ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST ...................... 4.172, 6.82, 6.83 

ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE ................... 4.172, 6.82, 6.83 

ATTEN AUTO NORMAL ........................ 4.172, 6.82, 6.83 

ATTEN STEP 1dB/10dB.................................. 4.174, 6.83 

ATTEN UP/DOWN ............................. 4.243, 4.244, 4.245 

AUTO 0.1 * RBW........................................... 4.160, 6.134 

AUTO 0.1 * SPAN ......................................... 4.160, 6.134 

AUTO 0.5 * RBW........................................... 4.161, 6.134 

AUTO 0.5 * SPAN ......................................... 4.161, 6.134 

AUTO RANGE ON/OFF ......................... 4.78, 4.117, 6.83 

AUTO RECALL ................................................. 4.67, 6.92 

AUTO SELECT ............................................. 4.233, 6.120 

AUTO x * RBW.............................................. 4.161, 6.134 

AUTO x * SPAN ............................................ 4.161, 6.134 

AUTOMATIC FINAL ...................................... 4.104, 4.106 

AUTOPREAMP ON/OFF........................ 4.78, 4.117, 6.85 

AVERAGE........................................... 4.82, 4.147, 4.228, 

.................................................. 6.71, 6.105, 6.120, 6.121 

AVERAGE ON/OFF ........................................ 4.210, 6.52 

BASELINE CLIPPING ..................................... 4.216, 6.15 

BLANK ................................................. 4.145, 4.228, 6.72 

BRIGHTNESS.....................................................4.7, 6.65 

C/N......................................................... 4.190, 6.44, 6.45 

C/No....................................................... 4.190, 6.44, 6.45 

CAL CORR ON/OFF ......................................... 4.12, 6.60 

CAL GEN 120 MHZ....................................................4.40 

CAL I/Q ............................................................. 4.11, 6.59 

CAL LO SUPP................................................... 4.11, 6.60 

CAL LOG........................................................... 4.11, 6.60 

CAL REFL OPEN .......................................... 4.271, 6.110 

CAL REFL SHORT........................................ 4.271, 6.110 

CAL RES BW .................................................... 4.11, 6.59 

CAL RESULTS...........................................................4.13 

CAL SHORT...................................................... 4.11, 6.60 

CAL TOTAL....................................................... 4.11, 6.59 

CAL TRANS .................................................. 4.266, 6.110 

CAPT MEM ..............................................................4.234 

CENTER FIXED .......................4.156, 4.157, 4.163, 6.135 

CENTER FREQUENCY ...........4.243, 4.244, 4.245, 6.133 

CENTER MANUAL........................................ 4.158, 6.133 

CH FILTER ON/OFF ....................................... 4.186, 6.46 

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH............................... 4.186, 6.143 

CHANNEL POWER................................ 4.188, 6.44, 6.45 

CHANNEL SPACING ......................... 4.187, 6.142, 6.143 

CISPR RANGE A .......................................................4.95 

CLEAR ALL MESSAGES ...........................................4.17 

CLEAR MESSAGE.......................................... 4.17, 6.171 

CLEAR/WRITE..................................... 4.144, 4.227, 6.71 

COLOR ON/ OFF .............................................. 4.52, 6.77 

COM PORT 1/2 ............................................... 4.43, 6.168 

COMMENT SCREEN A/B ................................. 4.54, 6.79 

CONFIG ...................................................................4.237 

CONFIG DISPLAY .......................................................4.7 

CONT AT HOLD.........................................................4.96 

CONT AT REC FREQ ................................................4.96 

CONTINUOUS SCAN ....................................... 4.93, 6.81 

CONTINUOUS SWEEP .................................. 4.251, 6.81 

COPY .....................................................4.60, 4.148, 6.91 

COPY (TRACE) .............................................4.230, 6.176 

COPY LIMIT LINE.................................4.138, 4.220, 6.28 

COPY SCREEN................................................ 4.52, 6.78 

COPY TABLE ................................................... 4.52, 6.79 

COPY TRACE................................................... 4.52, 6.79 

COUNTER RESOL ......................................... 4.182, 6.35 

COUPLING CONTROL....................................... 4.6, 6.88 

COUPLING DEFAULT ........................4.243, 6.106, 6.150 

COUPLING RATIO .................................................. 4.247 

CP/ACP ABS/REL ........................................4.189, 6.144 

D LINES................................................................... 4.135 

DATA ENTRY FIELD ................................................... 4.9 

DATA SET CLEAR ........................................... 4.63, 6.94 

DATA SET CLEAR ALL .................................... 4.63, 6.95 

DATA SET LIST......................................................... 4.62 

DATAENTRY OPAQUE ............................................... 4.9 

DATAENTRY X............................................................ 4.9 

DATAENTRY Y............................................................ 4.9 

DATE .............................................................. 4.46, 6.170 

dB*/MHz................................................4.114, 4.168, 6.58 

dBµA.....................................................4.114, 4.168, 6.58 

dBµA/m........................................................... 4.114, 6.58 

dBµV.....................................................4.114, 4.168, 6.58 

dBµV/m........................................................... 4.114, 6.58 

dBm ......................................................4.114, 4.168, 6.58 

dBmV.............................................................. 4.168, 6.58 

dBpT ............................................................... 4.114, 6.58 

dBpW....................................................4.114, 4.168, 6.58 

DECIM SEP ..........................................4.149, 4.237, 6.75 

DEFAULT COLORS............................................ 4.8, 6.65 

DEFAULT CONFIG........................................... 4.65, 6.99 

DEFAULT POSITION................................................... 4.9 

DEFINE MACRO ....................................................... 4.73 

DEFINE PAUSE......................................................... 4.74 

DEFINE SCAN........................................................... 4.90 

DELETE....................................................4.60, 6.91, 6.93 

DELETE (peak list) .................................................. 4.100 

DELETE FACTOR/SET ........................4.24, 6.113, 6.115 

DELETE LIMIT LINE.............................4.138, 4.220, 6.28 

DELETE MACRO....................................................... 4.74 

DELETE RANGE ....................................................... 4.94 

DELETE VALUE (limit line) ............................4.142, 4.225 

DELTA 1 to 4 ..........................4.124, 4.198, 6.8, 6.9, 6.10 

DELTA ABS REL ....................................4.125, 4.199, 6.9 

DELTA TO STEPSIZE ...................................4.123, 4.197 

DEMOD ..................................................................... 4.86 

DEMOD ON/OFF ............................................ 4.86, 6.119 

DETECTOR ..........................................4.82, 4.146, 4.233 

DETECTOR AC VIDEO ................................ 4.234, 6.120 

DETECTOR AUTOPEAK...............................4.233, 6.120 

DETECTOR AVERAGE .................................4.234, 6.120 

DETECTOR MAX PEAK................................4.233, 6.120 

DETECTOR MIN PEAK .................................4.233, 6.120 

DETECTOR RMS ..........................................4.234, 6.120 

DETECTOR SAMPLE....................................4.234, 6.120 

DISABLE ALL ITEMS ...............................4.65, 4.70, 6.98 

DISPLAY COMMENT ......................................... 4.8, 6.66 

DISPLAY LINE 1/2................................4.135, 4.215, 6.14 

EDIT ACP LIMITS...................................4.187, 6.29, 6.30 

EDIT COMMENT .............................................. 4.62, 6.99 

EDIT FREQUENCY ................................................. 4.100 

EDIT LIMIT LINE...........................................4.140, 4.222, 

............................. 6.22, 6.23, 6.24, 6.25, 6.26, 6.27, 6.28 

EDIT NAME .....................................4.62, 4.67, 6.92, 6.94 

EDIT PATH ....... 4.59, 4.62, 4.67, 4.149, 4.237, 6.90, 6.93 

EDIT PEAK LIST ..................................................... 4.100 

EDIT TRD FACTOR........................................ 4.25, 6.112 

EDIT TRD SET ............................................... 4.28, 6.114 

EMI PRESEL .................................................... 4.12, 6.60 

1088.7531.12 10.6 E-3

ESIB 

Index 

EMI RECEIVER........................................ 4.19, 4.75, 6.87 

ENABLE ALL ITEMS................................ 4.65, 4.70, 6.98 

ENABLE DEV1 / DEV2...............................................4.56 

ENABLE OPTION ......................................................4.37 

ENTER PASSWORD ...................................... 4.39, 6.171 

ENTER TEXT.............................................................4.54 

ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200 ............................... 4.35, 4.109, 6.84 

ESH3-Z5 ................................................ 4.35, 4.109, 6.84 

EXCLUDE LO ON/OFF ................................... 4.205, 6.35 

EXECUTE TESTS...............................................4.16, 6.6 

EXT ALC ....................................................... 4.275, 6.155 

EXT AM......................................................... 4.275, 6.154 

EXT FM......................................................... 4.275, 6.155 

EXT I/Q ......................................................... 4.276, 6.154 

EXT REF FREQUENCY.................................. 4.37, 6.146 

EXTERN...................................................................4.154 

EXTERN (trigger) .......................................... 4.250, 6.177 

FINAL AC VIDEO ............................................ 4.1486.121 

FINAL AVERAGE............................................ 4.1476.121 

FINAL MEAS TIME ....................................... 4.104, 6.151 

FINAL MAX PEAK......................................... 4.147, 6.121 

FINAL MIN PEAK......................................... 4.148,6.121 

FINAL PHASES........................................................4.110 

FINAL QUASIPEAK ...................................... 4.147, 6.121 

FINAL RESULTS............................................. 4.145, 6.71 

FINAL RMS ................................................... 4.147, 6.121 

FIRMWARE UPDATE ................................................4.47 

FIRMWARE VERSION........................................4.14, 6.5 

FM.....................................4.86, 4.179, 4.180, 6.40, 6.119 

FORMAT DISK.................................................. 4.60, 6.92 

FREE RUN......................................... 4.154, 4.249, 6.177 

FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG .................................... 4.156, 6.153 

FREQUENCY LINE 1/2 ........................ 4.135, 4.215, 6.16 

FREQUENCY OFFSET...................... 4.159, 4.273, 6.136 

FREQUENCY ON/OFF .......................................4.8, 6.64 

FSE MODE ON/OFF ....................................... 4.47, 6.171 

FULL PAGE ...................................................... 4.53, 6.80 

FULL SCREEN....................................................4.4, 6.64 

FULL SPAN................................................... 4.163, 6.134 

GAP LENGTH ............................................... 4.262, 6.153 

GAP SWEEP ON/OFF .................................. 4.260, 6.152 

GAP SWEEP SETTINGS.........................................4.261 

GATE ADJUST.........................................................4.257 

GATE DELAY................................................ 4.256, 6.152 

GATE EXTERN............................................. 4.256, 6.152 

GATE LENGTH............................................. 4.256, 6.152 

GATE LEVEL ................................................ 4.255, 6.151 

GATE MODE LEVEL/EDGE.......................... 4.255, 6.151 

GATE ON / OFF............................................ 4.254, 6.151 

GATE POL .................................................... 4.255, 6.152 

GATE RF POWER ........................................ 4.256, 6.152 

GATE SETTINGS.....................................................4.255 

GENERAL SETUP .....................................................4.41 

GPIB ADDRESS ............................................. 4.41, 6.167 

GRID ABS/REL .................................... 4.166, 4.170, 6.68 

GRID MAX LEVEL ...................................................4.115 

GRID MIN LEVEL.....................................................4.115 

HARDCOPY DEVICE........................................ 4.55, 6.77 

HARDWARE+OPTIONS .....................................4.15, 6.5 

HEADER ON/OFF................................ 4.150, 4.237, 6.75 

HOLD CONT ON/OFF..................................... 4.230, 6.71 

HOLD FINAL MEAS .................................................4.106 

HOLD SCAN .......................................................4.96, 6.7 

HORIZONTAL SCALING.....................................4.6, 6.88 

INPUT 1/2 ............................................ 4.118, 4.174, 6.86 

INPUT CAL ....................................................... 4.38, 6.61 

INPUT RF.......................................................... 4.38, 6.61 

INPUT SELECT............................................. 4.172, 4.173 

INPUT2 AC COUPLED ................................... 4.118, 6.85 

INPUT2 DC COUPLED ................................... 4.118, 6.85 

INS AFTER RANGE...................................................4.94 

INS BEFORE RANGE................................................ 4.94 

INSERT (peak list) ................................................... 4.100 

INSERT VALUE (limit line).............................4.142, 4.225 

INTERACTIVE ...............................................4.105, 4.106 

KEY CLICK ON/OFF.................................................. 4.46 

LAST SPAN............................................................. 4.163 

LIMIT CHECK .........................................4.187, 6.29, 6.30 

LINE (trigger) .................................................4.249, 6.177 

LINEAR/%....................................................... 4.170, 6.70 

LINEAR/dB ..................................................... 4.170, 6.70 

LISN................................................................ 4.35, 4.109 

LOCK ALL.................................................................. 3.20 

LOCK DATA .............................................................. 3.20 

LOG 10dB/20dB/50dB/100dB/120dB .............4.115, 4.169 

LOG MANUAL .............................4.115, 4.170, 6.68, 6.70 

LOGO ON/OFF ................................................... 4.8, 6.65 

LOWER LEFT................................................... 4.53, 6.80 

LOWER RIGHT................................................. 4.53, 6.80 

MACRO 1 to 7............................................................ 4.72 

MACRO TITLE........................................................... 4.74 

MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH ................................4.246, 6.108 

MAKE DIRECTORY.......................................... 4.60, 6.92 

MARGIN ......................................................... 4.104, 6.56 

MARKER 1 to 4................... 4.120, 4.176, 6.33, 6.34, 6.36 

MARKER 1/2 .................................................... 6.33, 6.34 

MARKER DEMOD .........................................4.179, 4.180 

MARKER INFO.................. 4.122, 4.179, 6.13, 6.39, 6.40, 

.............................................. 6.41, 6.45, 6.51, 6.52, 6.66 

MARKER TRACK ........................................... 4.130, 6.35 

MARKER ZOOM...................................4.121, 4.179, 6.39 

MAX HOLD ................................4.145, 4.229, 6.71, 6.105 

MAX LEVEL AUTO ......................................... 4.166, 6.69 

MAX LEVEL MANUAL .................................... 4.166, 6.69 

MAX PEAK ................................4.82, 4.146, 6.120, 6.121 

MEAN ............................................................. 4.209, 6.51 

MEAS TIME.................................................... 4.84, 6.150 

MEASURE ............................................................... 4.106 

MIN..............................................4.130, 4.204, 6.11, 6.37 

MIN HOLD .................................4.145, 4.230, 6.71, 6.105 

MIN PEAK..................................4.83, 4.147, 6.120, 6.121 

MIXER LEVEL ................................................ 4.172, 6.85 

MKR -> CENTER............................................ 4.211, 6.53 

MKR -> CF STEPSIZE................................... 4.212, 6.53 

MKR -> REF LEVEL ....................................... 4.212, 6.54 

MKR -> START............................................... 4.212, 6.53 

MKR -> STEPSIZE ......................................... 4.133, 6.53 

MKR -> STOP................................................. 4.212, 6.53 

MKR -> TRACE .............................4.133, 4.212, 6.9, 6.34 

MKR DEMOD ON/OFF .........................4.179, 4.180, 6.40 

MKR STOP TIME..................................4.179, 4.180, 6.40 

MKR TO STEPSIZE..............................4.123, 4.197, 6.54 

MODE COUPLED............................................... 4.6, 6.88 

MODULATION......................................................... 4.274 

MONITOR CONNECTED........................................... 4.46 

MOVE ZOOM START..................................... 4.164, 6.67 

MOVE ZOOM STOP....................................... 4.164, 6.67 

MOVE ZOOM WINDOW ................................. 4.164, 6.68 

N dB DOWN ................................................... 4.207, 6.38 

NAME (limit line) ...................................4.141, 4.223, 6.28 

NEW FACT/SET ..........................4.25, 4.28, 6.111, 6.113 

NEW LIMIT LINE ...........................................4.140, 4.222 

NEXT MIN....................................4.130, 4.205, 6.11, 6.37 

NEXT MIN LEFT..........................4.130, 4.205, 6.11, 6.37 

NEXT MIN RIGHT........................4.130, 4.205, 6.11, 6.37 

NEXT PEAK.................................4.129, 4.204, 6.10, 6.36 

NEXT PEAK LEFT.......................4.129, 4.204, 6.11, 6.37 

NEXT PEAK RIGHT.....................4.129, 4.204, 6.10, 6.36 

NO OF PEAKS ............................................... 4.104, 6.56 

NOISE ....................................................4.182, 6.39, 6.40 

NOISE SOURCE .............................................. 4.38, 6.61 

NORMALIZE..................................................4.267, 6.110 

1088.7531.12 10.7 E-3

Index 

ESIB 

OCCUPIED PWR BANDW..................... 4.194, 6.44, 6.45 

OPTIONS ................................................... 4.15, 4.37, 6.5 

PE FLOATING........................................ 4.36, 4.110, 6.84 

PE GROUNDED..................................... 4.36, 4.110, 6.84 

PEAK .......................................... 4.129, 4.204, 6.10, 6.36 

PEAK EXCURSION ............................. 4.130, 4.205, 6.38 

PEAK HOLD ON/OFF ..................................... 4.210, 6.52 

PEAK SEARCH................................................. 4.99, 6.56 

PEAKS/SUBRANGES..................................... 4.104, 6.57 

PHASE L1/L2/L3 .................................... 4.36, 4.110, 6.84 

PHASE N ............................................... 4.36, 4.110, 6.84 

PHASE NOISE................................................ 4.201, 6.13 

POWER MEAS SETTINGS......................................4.184 

POWER OFFSET.......................................... 4.264, 6.155 

PRE TRIGGER (gap sweep) ......................... 4.261, 6.153 

PREAMP ON/OFF......................... 4.34, 4.79, 4.117, 6.85 

PREDEFINED COLORS .....................................4.8, 6.66 

PRESCAN PHASES ................................................4.110 

PRESEL PEAK ................................................. 4.12, 6.60 

PRESELECT ON/OFF....................................... 4.32, 6.86 

PREVIOUS ZOOM ...................................................4.121 

PROBE CODE ON/OFF ..................... 4.114, 4.169, 6.179 

PULSE 100 HZ...........................................................4.40 

PULSE 100 KHZ AB...................................................4.40 

PULSE 100 KHZ CD ..................................................4.40 

PULSE 25 HZ.............................................................4.40 

QP RBW UNCOUPLED .................................. 4.83, 6.106 

QUASIPEAK ............................. 4.82, 4.146, 6.120, 6.121 

RANGES 1-5/6-10......................................................4.94 

RBW / VBW MANUAL................................... 4.248, 6.108 

RBW / VBW NOISE....................................... 4.248, 6.108 

RBW / VBW PULSE...................................... 4.248, 6.108 

RBW / VBW SINE [1] .................................... 4.247, 6.108 

RBW

ESIB 

Index 

TRANSD SET RANGES.................................. 4.30, 6.114 

TRANSD SET UNIT ........................................ 4.29, 6.114 

TRANSDUCER FACTOR ................................ 4.23, 6.112 

TRANSDUCER SET............................. 4.23, 6.113, 6.115 

TRC COLOR AUTO INC ................................... 4.52, 6.79 

TRD FACTOR NAME ...................................... 4.26, 6.111 

TRD FACTOR UNIT ........................................ 4.26, 6.111 

TRD FACTOR VALUES .................................. 4.27, 6.112 

TRD SET NAME.............................................. 4.29, 6.113 

TRG TO GAP TIME....................................... 4.262, 6.153 

TRIGGER DELAY ......................................... 4.250, 6.178 

TRIGGER LEVEL (gap sweep) ..................... 4.261, 6.177 

TUNE TO MARKER ........................................ 4.129, 6.53 

UNIT.............................................................. 4.167, 6.179 

UNLOCK ....................................................................3.20 

UPDATE.....................................................................4.47 

UPDATE MESSAGES................................................4.17 

UPPER LEFT .................................................... 4.53, 6.80 

UPPER RIGHT.................................................. 4.53, 6.80 

USER PORT A/B.................................... 4.42, 6.83, 6.100 

VALUES (limit line)............................... 4.142, 4.224, 6.26 

VECTOR ANALYZER........................................ 4.20, 6.87 

VERTICAL SCALING ..........................................4.6, 6.88 

VIDEO (trigger).............................................. 4.249, 6.177 

VIDEO BW AUTO ......................................... 4.242, 6.108 

VIDEO BW MANUAL .................................... 4.242, 6.108 

VIEW.................................................... 4.145, 4.227, 6.71 

VOLT............................................................... 4.169, 6.58 

WATT.............................................................. 4.169, 6.58 

X OFFSET............................................ 4.138, 4.220, 6.23 

Y OFFSET................................... 4.138, 4.220, 6.25, 6.26 

ZERO SPAN ................................................. 4.162, 6.134 

ZOOM ............................................................. 4.164, 6.67 

ZOOM OFF .......................................... 4.122, 4.164, 6.67 

Span...............................................................................4.162 

measurement window.................................... 4.111, 4.155 

Special characters ..............................................................6.2 

Split screen......................................................... 3.9, 4.4, 4.86 

Split screen mode........................................................4.4, 4.5 

SRE (service request enable register) ..............................5.21 

SRQ (service request) ............................................. 5.21, 5.32 

Start frequency ...............................................................4.111 

scan ...........................................................................4.90 

sweep.......................................................................4.155 

Start-Up............................................................................1.18 

Status byte (STB) .............................................................5.21 

Status information...............................................................3.4 

DIFOVL ........................................................................3.4 

ExtRef ..........................................................................3.4 

IFOVLD ........................................................................3.4 

LO LvD.........................................................................3.4 

LO Lvl...........................................................................3.4 

LO unl...........................................................................3.4 

MAX / REF LVL............................................................3.4 

OCXO...........................................................................3.4 

OVLD ...........................................................................3.4 

UNCAL .........................................................................3.4 

Status Questionable .........................................................5.24 

ACPLimit register .......................................................5.25 

FREQuency register...................................................5.26 

LIMit register ..............................................................5.27 

LMARgin register........................................................5.28 

POWer register...........................................................5.29 

SYNC register ............................................................5.30 

TRANsducer register..................................................5.31 

Status register 

CONDition part ...........................................................5.19 

ENABle part ...............................................................5.19 

ESE............................................................................5.22 

ESR............................................................................5.22 

EVENt part .................................................................5.19 

NTRansition part ........................................................5.19 

overview..................................................................... 5.20 

PPE ........................................................................... 5.22 

PTRansition part ........................................................ 5.19 

SRE ........................................................................... 5.21 

STATus OPERation ................................................... 5.23 

STATus QUEStionable .............................................. 5.24 

FREQuency ......................................................... 5.26 

LIMit..................................................................... 5.27 

LMARgin.............................................................. 5.28 

POWer................................................................. 5.29 

SYNC .................................................................. 5.30 

TRANsducer ........................................................ 5.31 

STATus QUEStionable .............................................. 5.24 

STB............................................................................ 5.21 

structure..................................................................... 5.18 

sum bit ....................................................................... 5.19 

Status reporting system.................................................... 5.18 

resetting values.......................................6.156, 5.18, 5.34 

STB (status byte) ............................................................. 5.21 

Step size 

center frequency ...................................................... 4.160 

delta marker...................................................4.127, 4.202 

marker............................................................4.123, 4.197 

receiver frequency ................................................... 4.112 

setting ........................................................................ 3.21 

Stop frequency............................................................... 4.111 

scan........................................................................... 4.90 

sweep ...................................................................... 4.157 

String ............................................................................... 5.14 

Suffix................................................................................ 5.11 

Sum bit............................................................................. 5.19 

Supply voltage, external noise source .............................. 4.38 

Sweep 

count..............................................................4.229, 4.252 

coupling ................................................................... 4.240 

gap........................................................................... 4.259 

gap length ................................................................ 4.262 

gated........................................................................ 4.253 

mode........................................................................ 4.251 

single ....................................................................... 4.251 

time.......................................................................... 4.243 

Switching on/off................................................................ 1.19 

Switching operations ........................................................ 4.18 

Syntax elements 

command ................................................................... 5.14 

System messages............................................................ 4.17 

T 

Table entry ....................................................................... 3.19 

TCP/IP operation.............................................................. 1.52 

Test receiver .................................................................... 4.75 

Text parameter................................................................. 5.14 

Thick Ethernet.................................................................. 1.43 

Thin Ethernet.................................................................... 1.42 

Time of internal real-time clock......................................... 4.46 

Trace....................................................................4.143, 4.226 

copy ...............................................................4.148, 4.230 

detector........................................................... 4.80, 4.231 

export....................................................................... 4.237 

mathematics............................................................. 4.235 

Transducer....................................................................... 4.21 

entry........................................................................... 4.24 

set.............................................................................. 4.28 

switch on.................................................................... 4.22 

Transmission measurement ........................................... 4.265 

Transmission parameters of RS-232-C .............................. 8.7 

Trigger 

delay ........................................................................ 4.250 

external..........................................................4.154, 4.249 

1088.7531.12 10.9 E-3

Index 

ESIB 

free run.......................................................... 4.154, 4.249 

gap sweep................................................................4.261 

line ...........................................................................4.249 

pre-trigger.................................................................4.261 

RF power..................................................................4.250 

slope ............................................................. 4.154, 4.250 

video ........................................................................4.249 

U 

UNCAL ............................................................................... 3.4 

Units ...............................................................................4.167 

Units setting....................................................................4.113 

Universal command ............................................................8.5 

Upper case .........................................................................6.2 

User port 


interface .....................................................................8.21 

V 

Vector analyzer mode .......................................................4.20 

Video bandwidth .............................................................4.242 

View .................................................................... 4.145, 4.227 

Volume ................................................................ 4.179, 4.180 

W 

Weighting modes..............................................................4.84 

White space......................................................................5.14 

Windows NT .....................................................................1.22 

administrator...............................................................1.22 

login ...........................................................................1.22 

password....................................................................1.22 

Z 

Zero span .......................................................................4.162 

Zoom ................................................................... 4.164, 4.227 

amplitude....................................................... 4.145, 4.227 

1088.7531.12 10.10 E-3

Operating Manual EMI TEST RECEIVER ESIB7 - Rohde & Schwarz

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?